Padmasambhava (Guru Rinpoche)

THE

TIBETAN
BOOK. OF

THE DEAD
[English Title]

THE GREAT LIBERATION BY HEARING IN THE INTERMEDIATE STATES
[Tibetan Title]

Composed by

Padmasambhava
Revealed by

Terton Karma Lingpa
Translated by

Gyurme Dorje
Edited by

Graham Coleman with Thupten Jinpa
Introductory Commentary by

His Holiness the Dalai Lama

VIKING

VIKING Published by the Penguin Group Penguin Group (USA) Inc., 375 Hudson Street, New York, New York 10014, U.S.A. Penguin Group (Canada), 90 Eglinton Avenue East, Suite 700, Toronto, Ontario, Canada M4P 2Y3 (a division of Pearson Penguin Canada Inc.) Penguin Books Ltd, 80 Strand, London WC2R ORL, England Penguin Irelo.md, 25 St. Stephen's Green, Dublin 2, Ireland (a division of Penguin Books Ltd) Penguin Books Australia Ltd, 250 Camberwell Road, Camberwell, Victoria 3124, Australia (a division of Pearson Australia Group Pry Ltd) Penguin Books India Pvt Ltd, 11 Community Centre, Panchsheel Park, New Delhi - 110 017, India Penguin Group (NZ), Cor Airborne and Rosedale Roads, Albany, Auckland 1310, New Zealand (a division of Pearson New Zealand Ltd) Penguin Books (South Africa) (Pty) Ltd, 24 Sturdee Avenue, Rosebank, Johannesburg 2196, South Africa Penguin Books Ltd, Registered Offices: 80 Strand, London WC2R ORL, England First American edition Published in 2006 by Viking Penguin, a member of Penguin Group (USA) Inc.

1 3 5 7 9 10 8 6 4 2
Translation copyright© The Orient Foundation (UK) and Gyurme Dorje, 2005 Editorial apparatus copyright ©The Orient Foundation (UK), Graham Coleman, and Thupten Jinpa, 2005 Introductory commentary copyright © His Holiness The Dalai Lama, 2005 All rights reserved Thangkas painted by the late Shawu Tsering of Repkong and photographed by Jill Morley Smith are from the private collection of Gyurme Dorje. ISBN 0-6 70-85 886-2 Printed in the United States of America Without limiting the rights under copyright reserved above, no part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in or introduced into a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise), without the prior written permission of both the copyright owner and the above publisher of this book. The scanning, uploading, and distribution of this book via the Internet or via any other means without the permission of the publisher is illegal and punishable by law. Please purchase only authorized electronic editions and do not participate in or encourage electronic piracy of copyrightable materials. Your support of the author's rights is appreciated.

May all sentient beings, children of buddha nature, realise the ultimate nature of mind: insight and compassion, in blissful union.

Contents

List of Illustrations Acknowledgements Acknowledgements for the Illustrations Introductory Commentary by His Holiness the XIVth Dalai Lama Editor's Introduction A Brief Literary History of the Tibetan Book of the Dead by Gyurme Dorje

Vlll lX

Xll

Xlll XXlX

XXXVl

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD
Appendix One: Peaceful and Wrathful Deities and the Tibetan Book of the Dead Appendix Two: Symbolism of the MaQQala of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities Notes Bibliography Glossary of Key Terms Thematic Index by Chapter

1

381

387 403 436 443 529

List of Illustrations

Guru Padmasambhava Karma Lingpa The Mantra Circle of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities

u xliv
346

Colour Plates 1. The assembly of the Forty-two Peaceful Deities 2. Samantabhadra with Samantabhadrr, and the Peaceful Deities of the Buddha Family 3· Peaceful Deities of the Vajra Family 4· Peaceful Deities of the Ratna Family 5. Peaceful Deities of the Padma Family 6. Peaceful Deities of the Karma Family 7. The Six Sages 8. The Eight Gatekeepers 9· The Assembly of the Fifty-eight Wrathful Deities 10. Mahottara Heruka with Krodhesvari I 1. Wrathful Deities of the Buddha Family 12. Wrathful Deities of the Vajra Family 13. Wrathful Deities of the Rarna Family I 4· Wrathful Deities of the Padma Family 15. Wrathful Deities of the Karma Family 16. The Eight Mataral) and the Eight Pisacl

Acknowledgements

Our project began in 1988 when HH the Dalai Lama kindly offered to request HH Dilgo Khyentse Rinpoche, the late head of the Nyingma school, to give an oral commentary to me on key sections of the Tibetan Book of the Dead. The Dalai Lama knew that various translations had been made of 'The Great Liberation by Hearing', our Chapter 11, but that so far no one had translated the entire Tibetan Book of the Dead. HH Dilgo Khyentse graciously agreed to the Dalai Lama's request and over a period of four weeks gave the empowcrments and an incisive and illuminating oral commentary to the core elements of the text, which was eloquently translated each day by Sogyal Rinpoche. While in Kathmandu, receiving the oral commentary from HH Dilgo Khyentse Rinpoche, I had the good fortune to meet Dr Gyurme Dorje, who had previously translated Longchen Rabjampa's commentary to the Guhygarbha Tantra, the root text on which the Tibetan Book of the Dead is based. During our first meeting, Gyurme agreed to make a new annotated translation of the entire Tibetan Book of the Dead, a task he undertook with exceptional care and dedication over the years that followed. While Gyurmc was working on the translation he was also employed at the School of Oriental and African Studies in London as a research fellow, translating into English the Greater Tibetan-Chinese Dictionary (Bod-rgya tshig-mdzod chen-mo). During this time, Gyurme worked closely with the highly regarded Nyingma master Zenkar Rinpoche, who is one of the foremost contemporary lincage holders of the Tibetan Book of the Dead. Zenkar Rinpoche kindly advised Gyurme throughout the translation of our text and also gave an extensive oral commentary to us on Chapter 4, 'The Introduction to Awareness'. At various stages of the project, the Dalai Lama answered my

X

ACKr.:OW l.EDGl-.M ENTS

questions about difficult points, and he also dictated to me the lucid and succinct Introductory Commentary. At the Dalai Lama's request, Khamtrul Rinpoche, an adviser to the Dalai Lama on Nyingma studies, also gave a beautiful oral commentary to key sections of Chapter 8 and dictated the introduction to Chapter I 1. Throughout the editing process I had the happy good fortune of working with Geshe Thupten jinpa, senior translator to the Dalai Lama, whom I had first met in 1 977 and who has been a close friend since he came to England to study philosophy at Cambridge in 1989. Jinpa translated the Dalai Lama's Introductory Commentary and reviewed every line and word of all fourteen chapters of the edited translation with me twice, in the course of \vhich he made countless important and inspiring suggestions. Everyone who knows Jinpa's work is aware of his special talent and skill both as a translator and writer and these have played an invaluable role in this project. finally, the individual introductions to each of the chapters, except Chapter I I, were written by Dasho Sangay Dorji, a Bhutanese scholar, who comes from a family whose paternal line has been lineage holders of the Tibetan Book of the Dead for several generations and who throughout his childhood accompanied his father every time he was called to a household to carry out these practices. Needless to say it has been a wonderful privilege for us to work with all those who helped to make this project possible. Our insights and skills as writers would not even register on the most sensitive of detectors compared to those of the composers of the original cycle of teachings or the lineage holders who gave the commentarial explanation that guided us. Throughout this endeavour therefore we have tried to substitute hard work and attention to detail for our lack of ability and to let the original magnificence of the text shine through the clouds of our shortcomings as much as we were able . .My work on this project would not have been possible without the life-long friendship of the Orient foundation's chairman David Lascelles. It is difficult to thank him enough for all that he has made possible, beginning with our work together on the making of our films Tibet: A Buddhist Trilogy, in the I 970s, and ever since. Two other special friends, Elinore Detiger and Elsie Walker made it possible fur this project to be initiated, and their kindness and confidence, together with that of .Michael Baldwin, will never

.\ C 1\ :--.; 0 \\' LED G F :<.I E :--.; T S

XI

be forgotten. ~1y sincere appreciation goes also to Johnnie and Buff Chace, Lucinda Ziesing, Faith Bieler, Lavinia Currier, Cynthia Jurs, Catherine Cochran, Nlargot Wilkie, Basil Panzer, Bokara Patterson and Lindsay !\-!asters for their important contributions in the early stages of this work. At Gyurme Dorje's request, Gene Smith of the Tibetan Buddhist Resource Center in New York generously made available a digital version of the three-volume manuscript from the library of the late Ky~1bje Dudjom Rinpoche, on which our translation is largely hascd. HH Dilgo Khyentse Rinpoche had previously provided copies of the text reprinted under his supervision in Delhi. Other versions of the text which we consulted, including the Yaranasi reprint and other versions of Bhutanese and Chinese origin, are all from Gyurme Dorje's private collection. Some source materials were also kindly provided by Zcnkar Rinpoche, Tulku Jigme Khyentse, Dr Burkhard Quessel of the British Library, and Dr Fernand Meyer of CN RS in Paris. Gyurme Dorje also especially acknowledges the kindness and profound advice of all of his teachers within the Nyingma tradition, including the previous Kangyur, Dudjom and Dilgo Khyentse Rinpoches, as well as Tulku Pema \'Vangyal and Zenkar Rinpoche, and he thanks his wife Xiaohong for all her encouragement and sustenance during the final years of this project. I am very grateful to Gillon Aitken, my agent, for introducing this project to Penguin, our publishers, and to Simon \X'inder, our editor at Penguin, for his patience and unfailing enthusiasm during the long genesis of this work. Our thanks go also to Dr Martin Boord for his proofreading of the text, and the Tibetan and Sanskrit terms in particular, and to Robert Chilton for compiling the thematic index.
GRAHA,\1 COLEMAN

Bath, England

Acknowledgements for the Illustrations

The colour illustrations that appear in our text have never previously been published. The two painted scrolls depicting the Hundred Peaceful and Wrathful Deities in Rcpkong style, which were commissioned by Gyurme Dorje in 2002, are from the studio of the late master artist Shawu Tsering of Sengeshong Yagotsang in Amdo. The line drawing of Guru Padmasambhava (p. ii) is the work of Robert Beer. The line drawing of Karma Lingpa (p. xliv) is reproduced by courtesy of Wisdom Publications of Boston, who commissioned it for inclusion in Dudjom Rinpoche's The Nyingma School of Tibetan Buddhism: Its Fundamentals and History ( 199 r ). The circular chart of mantras (htags-grol) (p. 346) is reproduced from Fremantle and Trungpa, The Tibetan Book of the Dead (Shambhala Classics, 2ooo), p. 3 2.

Introductory Commentary
by His Holiness the XIVth Dalai Lama

The question of whether or not there exists a continuity of consciousness after death has been an important aspect of philosophical reflection and debate from ancient Indian times to the present. When considering these matters from a Buddhist point of view, however, we have to bear in mind that the understanding of the nature of continuity of consciousness and the understanding of the nature of the 'I' or 'self' are closely interlinked. Therefore, let us first look at what it is that can be said to constitute a person. According to Buddhist classical literature, a person can be seen as possessing five interrelated aggregates, technically known as the five psycho-physical aggregates. • These are the aggregate of consciousness, the aggregate of form (which includes our physical body and senses), the aggregate of feeling, the aggregate of discrimination, and the aggregate of motivational tendencies. That is to say, there is our body, the physical world and our five senses, and there are the various processes of mental activity, our motivational tendencies, our labelling of and discrimination between objects, our feelings, and the underlying awareness or consciousness. Among the ancient schools of thought, which accepted the notion of continuity of consciousness, there were several nonBuddhist philosophical schools which regarded the entity, the 'I' or 'self', which migrated from existence to existence as being unitary and permanent. They also suggested that this 'self' was autonomous in its relationship to the psycho-physical components that constitute a person. In other words they believed or posited that there is an essence or 'soul' of the person, which exists independently from the body and the mind of the person.
1. See the glossary for a description of the five psycho-physical aggregates and other Buddhist terms used in the commentary. Ed.

XIV

I:\ T H 0 lJ U C T 0 R Y C 0 ,\I .\IE:\ TAR Y

However, Buddhist philosophy does not accept the existence of such an independent, autonomous entity. In the Buddhist view, the self or the person is understood in terms of a dynamic interdependent relationship of both mental and physical attributes, that is to say the psycho-physical components which constitute a person. In other words our sense of self can, upon examination, be seen as a complex flow of mental and physical events, clustered in clearly identifiable patterns, including our physical features, instincts, emotions, and attitudes, etc., continuing through time. Further, according to Prasa11gika-Madhyamaka philosophy, which has become the prevailing philosophical view of Tibetan Buddhism today, this sense of self is simply a mental construct, a mere label given to this cluster of dependently arising mental and physical events in dependence on their continuity. Now, when we look at this interdependence of mental and physical constituents from the perspective of Highest Yoga Tantra, 4 there are two concepts of a person. One is the temporary person or self, that is as \Ve exist at the moment, and this is labelled on the basis of our coarse or gross physical body and conditioned mind, and, at the same time, there is a subtle person or self which is designated in dependence on the subtle hody and subtle mind. This subtle body and subtle mind are seen as a single entity that has two facets. The aspect which has the quality of awareness, which can reflect and has the power of cognition, is the subtle mind. Simultaneously, there is its energy, the force that activates the mind towards its object- this is the subtle body or suhtle wind. These two inextricably conjoined qualities are regarded, in Highest Yoga Tantra, as the ultimate nature of a person and are identified as buddha nature, the essential or actual nature of mind. Now, before we look more closely at the nature of the subtle body and mind, let us look at how the gross body and mind are thought to originate. The notion of dependent origination lies at the very heart of Buddhist philosophy. The principle of dependent origination asserts that nothing exists in its own right independent of other factors. Things and events come into being only in dependence on the aggregation of multiple causes and conditions. The process through which the external world and the sentient beings
2.

The pcrspedive of the Tibet<111 Buok u/ the De,uf is that of Highest Yoga T anrra.

Ed.

I :-.1 T H 0 () U C T 0 H Y C 0

~I ~II·.~

TAHY

XV

\Vithin it revolve in a cyde of existence propelled by karmic propensities and their interaction with misapprehension, attraction and aversion and conditions is described in terms of twelve interdependent links. Each cycle of the process begins with a misapprehension of the nature of actual reality. This fundamental ignorance acts as a condition for the arising of the propensities created by our past actions, mental, verbal and physical, which condition our dualising consciousness. Our dualising consciousness, in turn, conditions the qualities and mode of interaction of our psycho-physical aggregates, which condition our sensory fields, which generate contact, which generates sensations, and then in turn attachment, grasping, and maturation towards rebirth. At this point there is an interaction with the genetic constituents of the parents and subsequent interaction with the environment, and then finally we have birth, ageing and death. This cycle can be viewed as both illustrating the underlying processes of life, death and rebirth and as an illustration of the processes to be transformed on the path to liberation from suffering in cyclic existence. The notion that there is a connection between this life and the events of both our previous existence and our future existence, follows from the Buddhist understanding of the natural law of cause and effect. For example, although we can speak of yesterday's weather and today's weather as distinct, today's weather is inextricably linked with the weather patterns of yesterday. Even at the bodily level, in the case of our physical health for example, we know that events in the past affect the present and those of the present the future. Similarly, in the realm of consciousness the Buddhist view is that there is also this same causal continuum between the events of the past, present and future. The Buddhist understanding of the continuity of personal experience, including our memories, can also be considered here. The Buddhist view is that the continuity of personal experience is primarily founded on the capacity for retention, which can be further developed during one's meditative practice in this life. However, generally speaking, it is thought that if a person dies after a prolonged period of illness that has led to a prolonged degeneration of both physical and mental capacities, there will he a greater chance of many of the personal characteristics, including memories etc., being lost. On the other hand, in the case of someone who dies a sudden death, when the mind-body relationship at the gross

XVI

INTRODUCTORY C0.\1:'\Il-.NTARY

level is still very firm, it is thought that there is a greater chance of carrying forward the acquired characteristics and memories, etc. Nonetheless, in both cases, the characteristics carried forward from a previous life are generally thought to be most strongly felt at an early stage of one's rebirth. This is because the personal characteristics of the previous life are thought, generally speaking, to be quickly overwhelmed by the developing characteristics inherited from the parents of the present life. Nonetheless, as I have mentioned, much depends in this respect on the individual's cap<Kity for recall and this capacity for recall is dependent on a deepened retentive training acquired in this lifetime. Now, let us look at the possible states of existence one can be born into. From the Buddhist perspective, rebirth in conditioned existence can take place in one of three realms: the formless realm, the form realm or the desire realm. The form and formless realms arc fruits of subtle states of consciousness, attained upon the realisation of certain meditative concentrations. Our realm, the desire realm, is the most gross of these three. Six cla~ses of beings are de~cribed as inhabiting the desire realm: gods (mundane celestial beings whose primary mental state is exaltation), antigods (who are predominantly hostile and jealous), human beings (who are intluenccd by all the five dissonant mental states), animals (\vho are under the sway of delusion), anguished spirits (who arc under the sway of attachment and unsatisfied craving) and hell beings (who arc overwhelmed by hatred, anger and fear). In the literature of Highest Yoga Tantra, the evolution of all the three realms of conditioned existence are described in terms of differing expressions or states of energy and, as I have mentioned, it is said that our fundamental ignorance is the root of conditioned existence and that karmic energy is its activating force. In the Buddhist view, therefore, it is the nature of our habitual tendencies that generates our future existence, driven by the natural law of cause and effect. Further, when we observe the patterns of arising and subsiding that underlie the dynamic nature of the physical environment, the cycle of days and nights and the passing of the seasons, for example, and we observe how matter arises from insubstantial subatomic particles and we look at the patterns of causal connectedness in the arising and dissolution of our mental experienLeS from moment to moment, across the differing ph<lSes of deep sleep, dreams and our waking state, the notion of continuity of

I I" T R 0 DUCT 0 R Y C 0 M .\IE :"0 TAR Y

XVII

consciousness can come to be seen to be in accord with both the nature of our environment and the nature of our mental experience. Certainly, it has often been argued that one advantage of accepting the notion of continuity of consciousness is that it gives us a more profound ability to understand and to explain the nature o{ our existence and of the universe. In addition, this notion of continuity and causal interconnectedness reinforces a sense of consequences for our own actions, in terms of both the impact on ourselves and the impact on others and the environment. So, in summary, when considering the notion of continuity of consciousness we must bear in mind that there are many different levels of greater or lesser subtlety in the states of consciousness. For example, we know of course that certain qualities of sensory perception are dependent on the physical constitution of the individual and that when the physical body dies, the states of consciousness associated with these sensory perceptions also cease. But, although we know that the human body serves as a condition for human consciousness, the question still remains: what is the nature of the underlying factor or essence that accounts for our experience of consciousness as having the natural quality of luminosity and awareness? Finally, then, when considering the interrelationship between mind, body and the environment at the subtle level, we know that material things are composed of cells, atoms and particles and that consciousness is composed of moments. That is to say that mind and matter have distinctly different natures and therefore have different substantial causes. Material things come into being based on other material entities such as particles, atoms and cells and the mind comes into being based on a previous moment of mind, which is something that is luminous and has the capacity to he aware. Each moment of awareness therefore depends on a previous moment of awareness as its cause. This is the reasoning upon which Buddhist logic asserts that there is at the level of subtle mind and subtle wind a bcginningless continuum of mind and matter. It is through reflection on the above themes: the law of cause and effect, dependent origination, the dynamics of our physical environment, and, based on our analysis of the nature of mind, the mode of the arising and subsiding of thoughts, the shifts in the modalities of our consciousness between deep sleep, dreams and our waking state, etc., that the notion of continuity of conscious-

XV Ill

INTRODUCTOI{Y COMMENTARY

ness may first become established as relevant to the understanding of our current condition. Once the notion of this continuity has been confirmed, through reflection and experience, then it becomes logical to prepare oneself for death and for future existences. Now, as to the nature of the actual preparation itself, this will depend on each individual's depth of spiritual aspiration. For example, if an individual is simply seeking a favourable rebirth as a human being, there is no need to engage in a sophisticated meditative path related to the processes of death and rebirth. Simply to live a virtuous life is seen as sufficient. Similarly, in the case of those who are seeking personal liberation from conditioned existence and also in the case of those whose practice is confined to the sOtra level of the Mahayana path, their meditative preparation will be limited to ensuring the attainment of successive forms of existence that will be conducive to the continuation of their journey towards enlightenment. For these three kinds of individuals, no actual techniques for utilising the time of death as an essential element of the spiritual path have been set down in the classical Buddhist literature. Nevertheless, since the understanding of the processes of death, the intermediate state and rebirth are crucial to our understanding of the nature of existence, we do find extensive discussion of these three processes, even in the texts which relate to the aspirations of these three kinds of persons. It is exclusively in tantra, however, and particubrly in Highest Yoga Tantra, that the methods for utilising the processes of death, the intermediate state and rebirth are specifically taught as the basis for achieving liberation from cyclic existence. These methods involve the development of a skilful relationship with certain experiential stages that an individual actually induces with the intention of enhancing spiritual realisation and the fruition of their capacities as a human being. Generally speaking, the practices of Highest Yoga Tantra present a spiritual path which enables the individual to attain complete buddhahood within a single lifetime, prior to the moment of death. Yet, for those who are unable to achieve this, it becomes crucial to use the rransfonnative opportunities offered by the naturally occurring processes of death, the intermediate state and rebirth. Hence, in Highest Yoga Tantra, it is not merely the preparation for a more developed future rebirth which is important, but of

I :-.1 T R 0 0 U C T 0 R Y C 0 ,\1 M EN T A R Y

XIX

more fundamental significance is the personal preparation for using one's own death and subsequent states as a means of achieving liberation. . In the literature of Highest Yoga Tantra, as I have mentioned, the three realms of conditioned existence into which a human being may be born are described in terms of differing expressions or modalities of energy (rlung) and it is said that our fundamental ignorance is the root of conditioned existence and that karmic energy is its activating force. Further, from the tantric perspective, death, the intermediate state and rebirth are also seen as nothing other than differing modalities of karmic energy. The point at which the gross levels of energy are completely dissolved and only the subtle energies remain is death. The stage at which these energies unfold into a more manifest form is the intermediate state, and the stage at which they eventually manifest substantially is called rebirth. Thus, all three states are differing manifestations of energy (rlung). Based on this understanding, since death is the state when all the gross levels of energy and consciousness have been dissolved, and only the subtle energies and consciousnesses remain, it is possible for an advanced yogin to meditatively induce a state which is almost identical to the actual experience of death. This can be achieved because it is possible to meditatively bring about the dissolution of the gross levels of energy and consciousness. When such a task is accomplished, the meditator gains an enormous potential to progress definitively in his or her spiritual practice. For at the stage, when the experience of fundamental inner radiance is genuinely effected through such a method, the yogin gains the capacity to actualise the illusory body of the meditational deity- thus ensuring the realisation of perfect buddhahood in this lifetime. This achievement of perfect buddhahood entails the actualisation of the three dimensions or bodies of a buddha (trikaya). These fruitional bodies are related both to our ultimate natural state and to the emanational qualities of full enlightenment. Interestingly, we see exactly the same pattern of dimensions in our ordinary existence. Death is the point at which both the physical and mental fields dissolve into inner radiance and where both consciousness and energy exist at their most subtle non-dual level, as in deep sleep. This mode in its fruitional state is the Buddha-body of Reality (dharmakaya). Then, from within this essential or

XX

I NT R 0 D U C T 0 R Y C 0 M ;\I EN TAR Y

natural state, one enters into the intermediate state, where, although there is perceptual experience, the phenomenal forms arc comparatively subtle and non-substantive, as in a dream. This mode in its fruitional state is the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource (sambhogakaya). Then, from this state, one assumes a grosser physical existence culminating in actual rebirth, as in our normal waking experience. This mode in its fruitional state is the Buddhabody of Emanation (nirmii1.zakaya). Thus, we see a direct parallel between the three natural states of our existence and the three dimensions of a fully enlightened being. Now, since actualisation of these three dimensions can be effected through the transformation of the three ordinary states of our existence, we find an array of practices which contain specific meditative techniques focusing on those attributes which the three ordinary states of existence and the three buddha-bodies have in common. Through these practices a continuity is developed between the ground or base (the ordinary state}, the path, and the fruition (the buddha-bodies). In order to highlight the potential for liberation which exists in the skilful transformation of the ordinary states of existence, the great Indian Buddhist master Nagarjuna uses the term 'kaya' even when describing the three ordinary states. Thus, the dimension (kaya) of the moment of death is equated with the basic dharmakiiya, the dimension (kdya) of the intermediate state with the basic sambhogakdya and the dimension (kaya) of the rebirth process with the basic nirma1.zakaya.3 Thus, it is said, that through the meditative ability of an accomplished yogin, a genuine assimilation takes place at the actual moment of death, upon entering the intermediate state and upon beginning the process of rebirth. With respect to training in these practices, a similitude of such an assimilation can be effected during the waking state, through generation stage practices, and during sleep, through dream yoga practices.
3. These relationships are vividly expressed in Chapter Ll of our text, 'The Great Liberation by Hearing', where specific instructions are given for recognising the spiritual opportunities that occur at the moment of death, th<lt occur Juring the intermediate state of reality, and that occur as the processes of rebirth are experienced. ~!ere the instructions speak of a recognition which assimilates the moment of death with the Buddha-body of Reality, the intermediate state of reality with the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource and the intermediate stare of rebirth with the Buddha-body of Emanation. EJ.

I :-1 T R 0 DUCT 0 R Y C 0 .\1 .\1 EN TAR Y

XXI

In tantra the practice of imaginatively generating the meditational deity, that is to say, the practice of tantra's generation stage, is a unique path by which the three fruitional dimensions or buddha-bodies arc brought into the path of one's practice. It is through understanding the profundity of this method that the tantric approach can be fully appreciated. The process of generating oneself as the meditational deity is the means by whi<..:h the indivisible union of the realisation of emptiness and the realisation of perfect awareness is brought to fruition. This accomplishment directly counteracts the ordinary perceptions and apprehensions which underlie our ordinary dualistic experience. It is this accomplishment that culminates in the realisation of the ultimate nature of mind, the Buddha-body of Reality, the state beyond ordinary thought, where there is no longer any trace of the misapprehension of the nature of reality, of attachment or of aversion - only pure radiant awareness. The practice of generating oneself as the meditational deity is found in all four classes of tantra. However, these methods arc taught in their most sophisticated forms in the class of Highest Yoga Tantra. Depending on the spiritual capacities of the practitioner the tantras describe a graduated series of methods for generating oneself as the mcditational deity. In the New Translation schools there is a systematisation according to four levels of <..:apacity and in the Nyingma (or Old Translation) school the highest level of practice is further subdivided into three methods: ~lahayoga, Anuyoga and Atiyoga. In the primary stages of tantric practice, in order to train oneself in the actualisation of the three buddha-bodies, as I have mentioned, the yogin first engages in the practices of the generation stage of meditation. The generation stage is like an imaginary rehearsal of the actual processes. Then, in the perfection stage of meditation, however, the experiences of entering the Buddha-body of Reality and actualising its emanational states, the Buddhabody of Perfect Resource and the Buddha-body of Emanation, are not imagined but real, and even involve certain physiological changes occurring in the yogin's body. Crucial to all these practices is the process of the dissolution of the gross consciousnesscs and energies of the practitioner. Here, the practice of Highest Yoga Tantra underlines the importance of interrupting or cutting off the gross energy which serves as a vehicle for conceptual elaborations.

XXII

INTRODUCTORY

LO~I~IFNTARY

Therl'hy, hypothl'tically speaking, if the individual succeeds in interrupting the flow of karmic energy, then, even if the propensities for fundamental ignorance remain, they will be rendered impotent. As I have noted above, if we observe carefully, we can see a basic pattern of emergence and dissolution which is common to both ~minute and inanimate phenomena. Among inanimate phenoml'na the processes of arising start from the very subtle and dt"velop into the more gross. That is: there is an emergence from L'mpty space, and a progression to movement or energy, to heat or light, ro moisture or liquidity, and finally to solidity. The dissolution is the ren~rse of this sequence. This process of arising and dissolution abo occurs in the body. In tantra, the process of dissolution of the physical elements which constitute a human body is descrihl'd as beginning first with the dissolution of the earth ell'ment, followed by the water clement, the fire element, the wind element and, finally, at the point at which only the space element is prominent, all the gross levels of energy and consciousness have dissolved. Then, in a further series of dissolutions, this stage gives rise to the experiences which are called: 'whitish appearance', followed by 'reddish increased appL'arance', 'blackish near attain111l'nt' and finally there is a culmination in the full experience of inner radiance called 'the attainment'.~ lkc1Lise the stages of dissolution are natural processes, imagining these is of pre-eminent importance in the generation-stage practices of visualising the meditational deity. Both in the New and Old Translation schools, the actualisation of inner radi,lnce, the point at which all our gross consciousnesses and energies have been dissolved, is the primary intent. This is the essence of the Great Perfection (Dzogchen) practices' of the :\yingma tradition, of the Union of Emptiness and Luminosity Based on the Sameness of SarpsJra and Nirvar_1a practices of the Sakya tradition, of the Great Seal (MahJmudra) practices of the I<.~1gyu tradition and the Indivisible Union of Bliss and Emptiness pr.1ctices of the Gclug tradition. Now, when we speak of inner radiance, it is important to bear in mind that there are different levels at which this can be experi4· In our rexr the ... e proce-;-;c::s are JesniheJ 111 Ch~tpter S. Ed. 5· The re;Jchinp pre'>enreJ in our rexr ;He based on rhc Grc.H Periecrion (Dzogchen)
vtc\\·.

L!.

I !'IT R 0 D lJ C T 0 R Y C 0

~I

l\1 E !'-0 T A R Y

XXIII

enced and, in addition, there is one important difference between the Dzogchen view of inner radiance and that of the New Translation schools. As with that of emptiness, the experience of inner radiance can be of different types. The experience of inner radiance described in the New Translation schools is effected only subsequent to the dissolution of all the gross levels of conceptual elaboration. However, in the Dzogchen view, all states of awareness or consciousness are thought to be pervaded by inner radiance, just as a sesame seed is permeated by oil. Therefore, in Dzogchen, there exist refined instructions which allow the recognition of inner radiance even while all the gross levels of sensory activity arc still active. This is where we come to the important distinction made in the Dzogchen teachings between the Tibetan terms 'sems' and 'rig-pa'. Our 'ordinary mind' (senzs) refers to the gross dualising consciousness (rnam-shes), whereas 'pure awareness' (rig-pa) is free from the dualistic perceptions of subject and object. Following the practices of the Dzogchen teachings of the Nyingma school the student is directly introduced by an authentic spiritual teacher to the very nature of his or her mind as pure awareness. This is the focus of the 'Cutting through Resistance' (khregs-chod) aspect of the Dzogchen path and this is complemented by the All-surpassing Realisation (tlwd-rgal) practices which focus on eliciting and recognising the radiances of pristine cognition. 6 Irrespective of these differences of view and practice, however, a genuine experience of inner radiance is the realisation of the fundamental nature of our awareness, which is the inextricable union of emptiness and luminosity. Now, when the subtle mind is completely pure, the body or energy aspect of the combination of subtle mind and subtle body arises as the five different coloured luminosities (white, blue, red, yellow and green) and in the form of buddha-bodies. All the different mai)Qalas, of the hundred deities, or the thousand deities, or whatever number, are all expressions of the five enlightened families, which arc related to the purity of the five psycho-physical aggregates, the five elements and the five pristine cognitions. These
6. 'Cutting through Resistance' and the direct introduction to awareness arc the suhrect matter of Chapter 4 of the present work. The introduction to the intermediate state of reality, in Chapter 1 I of our text, is illustrative of the esoteric instructions on 'All-surpassing Realisation', which is the pinnacle of meditative practice acmrding to the "t\:yingma school. Ed.

XXIV

l!'<TROUUCTORY

CO.\t~tEI'OTARY

relationships form the core of the practices presented in Highest Yoga Tantra, as does the experiential cultivation of the nature of these deities through the daily practice. So, in summary, by following in our practice the process of the natural dissolution of our gross forms of consciousness, and the natural arising from this state of the luminosities and bodies of the deities, first the actualisation of inner radiance is refined and this serves as the substantive cause for the arising of the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource and the Buddha-body of Emanation respectively. Thus the three bodies of a buddha are perfected, which is the fruition of the path of tantra. Now, as for the forms of the mcditational deity, which are generated in the practice of tantra, there are two principal types: peaceful deities and wrathful deities. In general terms, these are concerned with the transformation of the cognitive and emotional states associated with attachment and aversion respectively. The peaceful deities are quiescent and are expressions of the natural purity of attraction, that is the mind resting in its natural pristine state. The wrathful deities are the dynamic aspect of the peaceful deities and are expressions of the natural transformation of aversion. That is they represent the mind's active transformation of delusion into pristine cognition .., As we now see, the path of Highest Yoga T antra involves taking dissonant cognitive states, such as attachment and aversion, on to the path. In the path followed by pious attendants (sr.:ivaka) dissonant cognitive states arc categorically perceived as something to be renounced. In the .Mahayana path, however, there are two approaches which contrast with that of the pious attendants. According to the Mahayana sutras, if a certain situation suggests a positive outcome in terms of benefiting others the voluntary use of desire or attachment is allowable. However, in the tantras it is nor merely that desire or attachment is permissible when beneficial, here one deliberately utilises their energies as the path to purifying or consuming the dissonant states themselves. Given that the practices of the tantras indude the disciplined engagement of subtle physiological processes and the transforma7· Th~ symbolism of eal:h of the meditJttonal Jeitie~ as-.o~iateJ wuh our text is dc~nibl·J in Chapters 5, 6, 11 and I 4 and in Append1x Two. bi.

11\TH 0 D U CTO R Y

CO~I

M ENTAR Y

XXV

tion of the energies associated with attraction and aversion, before a practitioner can embark on the practices of tantra, he or she must find a spiritual teacher who meets the qualifications as set out in the authoritative literature and must receive empowerments and graduated instruction from that master. In addition, the practitioner should complete the preliminary practices and achieve a thorough grounding in the foundational paths of the sutras, which includes the development of the altruistic intention to attain enlightenment (bodhicitta), the development of calm abiding- the stabilisation of attention on an internal object of meditation- and the development of penetrative insight - an analytical meditative state that dissects the nature of its object, its relationships, characteristics and function. The development of calm abiding and penetrative insight arc the means by which the practitioner can cultivate his or her understanding of emptiness, which is an appreciation of the total absence of inherent existence and selfidentity with respect to all phenomena. It is an essential prerequisite for beginning on the path of tantra that the practitioner achieve a profound appreciation of both non-substantiality and its interdependent relationship with phenomenal reality. The tantras presuppose this understanding, so it is in the sutras therefore that we find the extensive elucidation of the methods for developing a complete understanding of emptiness. Now, as to the nature of the understanding of emptiness presuppo-;ed by the tantras, the majority of masters of the Nyingma, Kagyu, Sakya and Gelug schools agree that this is the view of the i\liddle Way (madhyumapratipad) propounded in the sutras and elucidated by Nagarjuna in his works. In the Dzogchen view, however, there is also a unique method of explaining emptiness, which emphasises the inseparability of emptiness and inner radiance, but nonetheless, principally, this designation docs refer to emptiness as presented in Nagarjuna's Middle Way. As far as the concept of emptiness or the ultimate nature of reality is concerned this is one area where there is an emerging convergence between the Buddhist understanding of the ultimate nature of existence and the evolving contemporary scientific view. This convergence relates to the unfindability of entities when these are analytically sought. In modern science the methods of analysis are principally applied to investigating the nature of material

XXVI

I NT R 0 D U C T 0 R Y C 0

~~ ~~

EN T A R Y

entities. Thus, the ultimate nature of matter is sought through a reductive process and the macroscopic world is reduced to the microscopic world of particles. Yet, when the nature of these particles is further examined, we find that ultimately their very existence as objects is called into question. This interface between non-substantiality and phenomena is a fundamental focus of Buddhist philosophical analysis and of experiential analysis through meditation on the nature of mind. As is now becoming more commonly known in the contemporary scientific field, a subtle understanding of the nature of the arising and dissolution of both individual thoughts and the cycles of existence lies at the heart of Buddhist literature and practice. In summary, therefore, even though the stages of preparation for engaging in the practices of Highest Yoga Tantra are extensive, it is said that, since the mode of procedure in Highest Yoga Tantra follows a very close correspondence to the nature of existence, human beings of this world are regarded as having the perfect gross and subtle physiological basis for undertaking these practices successfully. Normally in our lives, if we know that we are going to be confronted by a difficult or unfamiliar situation, we prepare and train ourselves for such a circumstance in advance, so that when this event actually happens we are fully prepared. As I have outlined, the rehearsal of the processes of death, and those of the intermediate state, and the emergence into a future existence, lies at the very heart of the path in Highest Yoga Tantra. These practices are part of my daily practice also and because of this I somehow feel a sense of excitement when I think about the experience of death. At the same time, though, sometimes I do wonder whether or not I will really be able to fully utilise my own preparatory practices when the actual moment of death comes! A sense of uncertainty, and often fear, is a natural human feeling when thinking about the nature of death and the relationship between living and dying. It is perhaps not surprising therefore that the Bar-do Thos-grol Chen-mo, the Tibetan Book of the Dead, a treasure-text which focuses on this important subject, has become one of the best-known works of Tibetan literature in the West. Carrying out the first complete translation of this cycle of teachings has been an extraordinary accomplishment undertaken with great care over many years.

ll'\ T R 0 DUCT 0 H Y C 0 .\I .\IE]'; TAR Y

XXVII

I hope that the profound insights contained in this work will be a source of inspiration and support to many interested people around the world, as they have been in my own culture.

Editor's Introduction

The Tibetan Book of the Dead includes one of the most detailed and compelling descriptions of the after-death state in world literature. It is not surprising therefore that when Chapter I I of our text, 'The Great Liberation by Hearing', first appeared in English, in 1927, it caused a considerable stir and has remained one of the most well known of Tibet's literary works ever since. In our work, for the first time, we are presenting a complete translation of all twelve chapters of the compilation of texts known as the Tibetan Book of the Dead, which includes nine chapters not translated in W. Y. Evans-\Ventz's original publication. Our intention in carrying out this work was twofold. One was to present the entire original work, and the second was to compose the translation with the close support and participation of the contemporary masters and lineage holders of this tradition. The complete Tibetan Book of the Dead is a comprehensive guide to both living and dying as originally taught by the great master from 099iyana, Padmasambhava. Padmasambhava, along with Santarak~ita and King Trisong Detsen, formally established Buddhism in Tibet, during the eighth century, and most Tibetans revere him as a 'second Buddha'. The story of how this teaching was first given by Padmasambhava to King Trisong Detsen is presented in Gyurme Dorje's 'Brief Literary History', which follows. The compendium of texts known as The Tibetan Book of the Dead contains exquisitely written guidance and practices related to transforming our experience in daily life, on how to address the processes of dying and the after-death state, and on how to help those who are dying. These teachings include: methods for investigating and cultivating our experience of the ultimate nature of mind in our daily practice (Chapters 2-7), guidance on the

XXX

EDITOR'S INTRODUCTION

recognition of the signs of impending death and a detailed description of the mental and physical processes of dying (Chapter 8), rituals for the avoidance of premature death (Chapter 9), the now famous guide 'The Great Liberation by Hearing' that is read to the dying and the dead (Chapter I 1 ), aspirational prayers that arc read at the time of death (Chapter 1 2), an allegorical masked play that light-heartedly dramatises the journey through the intermediate state (Chapter I 3 }, and a translation of the sacred mantras that are attached to the body after death and are said to bring 'Liberation by Wearing' (Chapter I4}. In addition, and at the advice of the late HH Dilgo Khyentse Rinpoche, we have also included two additional texts that are not usually included, namely Chapter I, which poetically sets out the preliminary meditations and practices related to this cycle of teachings, and indeed to tantric practice in general, and Chapter ro, the instructions on methods for transferring consciousness at the point of death into an enlightened state, which arc referred to in Chapter 11 and are an essential aspect of the practices related to dying. Our second intention was to present the entire work in a way that, as honestly as we could, reflects the insights and intentions of the masters of the lineage and gives a sense of the elegance and moving, poetic beauty of the original work. In order to do this, as is described in the Acknowledgements, the translation has been based on the oral commentarial explanation of contemporary lineage holders and was carried out with the continuous advice of contemporary masters. Given the above, there is very little to say with respect to offering further introduction to the meaning of the texts. It is our hope that with the help of HH the Dalai Lama's Introductory Commentary, the short introductions to each chapter, the notes and the glossary, the meaning will shine through as directly as was intended. As I have been asked to do so, I will just say a few words about the psychological context of this material. It may seem somewhat woolly to many if it is said that the insights that are presented here come from those who have realised the ultimate nature of mind and thereby have experiential understanding of the processes of the mind in deep sleep, dreams, the waking state and throughout the processes of dying and beyond. But, as described by the Dalai Lama in the Introductory Commentary, the process of imagining

I' D IT 0 R ' ~ I N T R 0 D U C T I 0 !';

XXXI

and then acrualising the st~tges of dissolution of consciousness that will occur naturally at the time of death lies at the heart of higher Tibetan Buddhist meditative practices, as do practices related to maintaining awareness during Jeep sleep and while dreaming. As Gyurme Dorje describes in "A Brief Literary History', this cycle of teachings is based on the Guhyagarbha Tantra. This text is described as having been received in a revelation from the primordial buddha Samantabhadra, transmitted through the agency of the meditational deities Vajrasattva and Guhyapati Vajrap<ii)i. In other words, the source is Samantabhadra, who is the resonance of pure awareness, the natural purity of mental consciousness, transmitted through an embodiment of the insight, compassion and communicative skills (skilful means) of all the buddhas, that is to say of all those who abide in an unmoving realisation of the ultimate nature of mind. As in all the major Buddhist tantric systems, the Guhyagarbha Tuntra describes a mai)c)ala, which is a visual representation of the components of the enlightened mind. Our chart of the mai)~ala of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities (Appendix Two) sets out the core aspects of the symbolism of the mary~ala associated with our text. As is always the case, this symbolism is based on the classical understanding of the nature of a person's psycho-physical components, as described in the Abhidharma literature, which is common to all forms of Huddhism. This analysis of the components of our being can be undcrt.tken \vith our normal conceptual mind. The acwal experience of the luminosities which arc said to underlie the mai_l~lala is ho\vever only possible as a result of the accomplishment of very subrle meditative states, which arc fruitional aspects of the path of Highest Yoga Tantra. As the Dalai Lama relates in his commentary, these luminosities only become appuent to the meditator once realisation of the ultimate nature of mind is achieved. This occurs during the processes of meditations, which are simulacra of the processes of dying and the re-emergence of consciousness from a non-conceptual inner radiance, the mind's ultimate nature. The processes of the dissolution of the coarse forms of consciousness into inner radiance and the emergence of consciousness from inner radiance also occur naturally at the time of death. In other words, according to Buddhist tradition, experiential access to the processes, which mirror those

XXXII

EDITOR's l!'<TRODUCTION

of dying and the re-emergen~.:e of consciousness after death, is a~.:hievable in the waking state. When HH Dilgo Khyenste Rinpoche gave his commentary to the text he explained that the 'Introduction to the Intermediate State of Reality', the ~.:entral section of 'The Great Liberation by Hearing', is an expression of the esoteric Thodgal pra~.:tices of Dzogchen, the 'Great Perfection' teachings. Thodgal is the pinnacle of meditative practice according to the Nyingma school and it results in the direct experience during meditation of the luminosities and the mal)<;iala of meditational deities that are described in Chapter 1 I. This arising of the five-coloured luminosities as a result of actualising the ultimate nature of mind is a phenomenon that has been described by all the great meditators of the four major Buddhist s~.:hools of Tibet and the pre-Buddhist Bon tradition. The point I am leading up to here is that the experiences described in our text relate to the modalities of our awareness from moment to moment, in our waking state, in deep sleep, in our dreams and also during the transition from life to death and beyond. In this sense 'The Great Liberation by Hearing' ~.:an be read as a wonderful metaphori~.:al narrative illustrating the pro~.:esses of our cognitive state, whether in our waking state or in death. Carl Jung in his ~.:ommentary to Evans-Wentz's 1927 edition of the Tibetan Book of the Dead spoke about how ~.:ompclling he found it to look at 'The Great Liberation by Hearing' backwards. From a psychoanalytical point of view this is indeed interesting, as our text can then be seen as providing a guide for tracing our confused and deluded states, back through our conditioned attraction and aversion to selected aspects of our experience, back through the weave of our habitual tendencies and mental constructs and a relentless series of voluntary or involuntary mental choices, back through the illusory comfort generated by our sense of ego, right back to a pure original cognitive event. This is something that we can explore during our own waking experience by analysing how our thoughts originate in the mind, interact with our mental constructs and guide our emotions and subsequent actions. Chapter 4 of our text, 'The Introduction to Awareness', addresses this process of exploration directly. Here we find guidance for the meditator on how to recognise the mind's ultimate nature, the underlying, mirror-like pure awareness, free from dual-

EOITOK'S INTKODUCTION

XXXIII

istic elaboration, from which all our thoughts and perceptions arise and into which they always again dissolve. Chapter I I then gives a symbolic description of how the pure radiances of our awareness, the ultimate nature of our pure psycho-physical components and elemental properties, arise as luminosities and meditational deities. At this critical point, either we recognise these luminosities and meditational deities as the embodiments of our own actual nature, and thereby remain in a state of pure perception, or, having failed to recognise their appearance as being a natural expression of the ultimate nature of all phenomena, we are then inexorably drawn into the clouded, dull impulses of dualistic experience. Once this occurs, the matrix of our habitual tendencies and mental constructs is activated and this generates our sense of independent, individual identity. By now our ego, which cannot accept the openness and clarity of the pristine perceptual state, is established and the mind functions purely on the basis of wanting to satisfy its conditioned expectations and impulses, from moment to moment. In this ego-bound state our thoughts, speech and actions arc then modulated by a process of inner judgement. As the text describes, death holds up an all-seeing mirror, 'the mirror of past actions', to our eyes, in which the consequences of all our negative and positive actions are clearly seen and there is a weighing of our past actions in the light of their consequences, the balance of which will determine the kind of existence or mental state we are being driven to enter. The 'life-review' aspect of this process, metaphorically described in our text as the weighing of white pebbles, representing our positive actions, against the weight of black pebbles, representing our negative actions, is wonderfully illustrated by the poet Heathcote Williams' phrase 'death develops life's photographs', which succinctly evokes the notion of our day-to-day obliviousness to the consequences of our actions being developed or processed in death so that we can experience them face to face. Following the expansive process of the 'life-review', the mind is then driven into a new equilibrium, avoiding the chaos of dissociation. This twofold process of inner judgement, the 'lifereview' followed by the coalescence of the mind into a new modality, is symbolically represented in our text by the actions of Yama, who is the embodiment of the infallible laws of cause

XXXIV

EDITOR'S INTRODUCTION

and effect. In our waking state, this weighing and modulation of the momentum of our past thoughts, speech and actions is of course largely hidden, but we do experience this in our sense of 'conscience' at the time of thinking, speaking or acting. In death, as in life, the process of inner judgement is not of course a judgement by an external being but it is the result of our own mind's innate dynamic of manifesting the natural fruition of our own mental constructs and coalescing this ripening into a new equilibrium. At this stage, in particular, just as we are about to enter a changed emotive state, it is absolutely critical that we recognise the fundamental reality that we are experiencing the results of the mental states which we ourselves have generated and that we usc this understanding to recognise the actual nature of our experience. In our day-to-day life we know that if we begin to feel angry, for example, this immediately creates an internal disturbance and this disturbance creates a shift in the way we perceive both others and our environment, which in turn affects the way in which others react to us, which then reinforces our initial anger and we feel confirmed in that new state. This is the cycle of experiencing the results of the mental states that we ourselves have generated, which can occur from moment to moment or according to our text from lifetime to lifetime. Finally, if there is no recognition and as a culmination of this entire process, our text describes how, driven on by a relentless search for security and the urge to resolve our impulses and expectations, in a mental realm where our expectations and actual reality do not match, and based on the ever-present swinging back and forth of our attraction and aversion, we enter into an emotive state whose focus can be anywhere across the spectrum of elation, jealousy, pride, confusion, blankness, desire, craving, anger, hatred or fear. These states are depicted in our text as the realms of existence into which we may pass at birth. Given the above, even if we do not accept the Buddhist understanding that the modalities of our consciousness in deep sleep, dreams and our waking state mirror those of death, we can still apply the advice given in 'The Great Liberation by Hearing' to our everyday experience. Giving up our compulsive attraction and aversion to aspects of our perceptual realm, glimpsing the causal dynamic of our actual condition and coming to the realisation that what we sec is the product of our own mental constructs, and that

EUITOR'S lr-ITROUUCTION

XXXV

we therefore do have the potential to view our experience more insightfully, is a powerful method of releasing us from the dissonant and perhaps even fearful qualities of our own self-made, perceptual landscape. Chapters I -7 provide us with a framework for achieving this release in our daily lives. Chapter I poetically evokes the perspectives that may lead us to realise that understanding our actual nature and understanding our current condition as human beings are worthwhile, Chapters 2-6 offer us methods for training our minds to instinctively recognise the actual nature of our being and existence, and Chapter 7 provides a framework for modulating and refining our motivation, perspectives and actions. It is undeniably the case that in our society we do not easily accept that death is a natural part of life, which results in a perpetual sense of insecurity and fear, and many are confused at the time of the death of a loved one, not knowing what they can do to help the one that has passed away or how to address their own grief. Exploring ways of overcoming our fear of death and adopting a creative approach at the time of bereavement, that is, focusing one's energy on supporting the one that has passed away, are both extraordinary benefits of the insights and practices that are so beautifully expressed in the Tibetan Book of the Dead. When I think of these things I often remember the Dalai Lama saying: 'When we look at life and death from a broader perspective, then dying is just like changing our clothes! When this body becomes old and useless, we die and take on a new body, which is fresh, healthy and full of energy! This need not be so bad!' Graham Coleman Thimpu, Bhutan

A Brief Literary History of the Tibetan Book of the Dead
by Gyurme Dorje

Since the puhliGHion in 1927 of Lama Kazi Dawa Samdup and W. Y. Evans- Wentz's pioneering English translation of three chapters from the cycle of texts known in the original Tibetan as The

Greut Liberation by Heuring in the lntermediute States (Bur-du thos-grol chen-mo ), the chapters they translated, dealing \Vith the
nature of the after-death state, including the accompanying aspirational prayers, have attracted a compelling interest outside Tibet under the title the Tibetan Book of the Dead. Learned Tibetans today often express their surprise that this particular collection of meditative practices concerning methods for understanding the nature of mind and transforming our experiences throughout the round of life and death has become one of the most well known of all the works of Tibetan literature in translation. This renown is especially unexpected when one considers the esoteric origins of the text and its highly restricted transmission within Tibet until the mid-fifteenth century. It is on account of this widespread popular recognition however that the title coined by the editor of the first translation, Evans- Wentz, has been retained in all subsequent translations and related studies. Following in this tradition, we too have retained the title the Tibetan Book of the Dead to refer to the first complete English translation of The Great Liherution hy Hearing in the lntermediute States, which includes translations of all twelve chapters of the original compilation.

EARLY ORIGINS
The Greut l.iber.ltion by Heuring in the lntermediute Stutes is an outstanding example of Nyingma literature. The Nyingmapa are the followers of the oldest of all the schools of Tibetan Buddhism,

A BHllF LlTl:HAHY IIISTOHY

xxxvii

tracing their lineage back to the first wave of transmission of the Buddhist teachings to Tibet, to the royal dynastic period of Tibetan history in the eighth century, when great Indian masters such as Padmasambhava, Vimalamitra and Buddhaguhya initially introduced the three inner classes of tantra: ~~lahayoga, Anuyoga and Atiyoga. These tantra texts are differentiated on the basis of their distinctive meditative techniques, known respectively as the generation stage, the perfection stage and the Great Perfection (Dzogchen). All traditions of Tibetan Buddhism today share the inheritance of the canonical compilations of the Indian Buddhist scriptures and treatises contained in the Kangyur and Tengyur. The former contains those teachings of the Buddhas (vinaya, sOtras and tantras) that were translated from Sanskrit and other languages into Tibetan, mostly from the late tenth century onwards and compiled initially by Buton Rinchendrub ( 1290- I 3 64). The latter includes the classical Indian commentaries that were also translated from Sanskrit into Tibetan. In a recently published and collared master edition of both the Kangyur and Tengyur these texts comprise r So volumes. At the same time, each school has its own distinctive writings. The particular literature of the Nyingma school comprises translations from Sanskrit and other languages, which are preserved in the twenty-six volume Collected Tantras of the Nyingmapa (rNying-ma 'i rgyud- 'bum), and a companion anthology of commcntarial treatises, written by successive generations of Indian and Tibetan lineage holders. The latter, which has been faithfully handed down through a 'long lineage of oral precepts' (ring-brgyud bka '-ma), that is to say through an unbroken lineage of transmission from one generation of accomplished masters to the next, is continuously growing and currently comprises I 20 volumes in a recently published edition. The Collected Tantras of the Nyingmapa has three main sections, corresponding to the compilations of Atiyoga, Anuyoga and Nlahayoga. Among them, the most influential single text is the Guhyagarbha Tantra, a revelation of the primordial buddha Samantabhadra, transmitted through Vajrasattva and Guhyapati Vajrapal)i. The compendium of texts that we now know as the Tibetan Book of the Dead bases its symbolism and iconography on the Guhy,lgarbha Tantra. Founded on the classical Abhidharma

XXXVIII

A BRIEF LITERARY HISTORY

view of the elements, psycho-physical aggregates, etc., this tantra text is the earliest known literary work to portray the natural purity and natural transformation of our mundane psychological states, respectively, as the maQc)ala of the forty-two peaceful deities and as the maQc)ala of the fifty-eight wrathful deities. Though generally and rightly classified as a Mahayoga text, the Guhyagarbha Tantra has also been obliquely interpreted from the perspective of Dzogchen, most famously by Longchen Rabjampa (I 308-6 3 ). The meditative techniques of both !v1ahayoga and Dzogchen are clearly expressed among the chapters of our present work: the generation stage of meditation is emphasised in Chapters 5-7, and the Great Perfection in Chapters 4 and I I, these latter two chapters being based on the teachings of the two key aspects of the Great Perfection, namely Cutting through Resistance (khregs-chod) and All-surpassing Realisation (thod-rga/) respectively. Thus from the point of view of its theoretical foundation and practice, as well as in its iconography and symbolism, the Tibetan Book of the Dead echoes its roots in the Guhyagarbha Tantra but, in addition, vividly incorporates the classical teachings of Dzogchen. The Guhyagarbha Tantra was initially compiled by King lndrabhoti and Kukkuraja of Sahor in north-west India (circa sixth century). The monarch, also known as King Dza, received the whole corpus of the N1ahayoga tantras in a vision from Vajrasattva, and Kukkuraja, a great accomplished master, divided this literature into eighteen books (tantras) - the most all-embracing of which is the Guhyagarbha. During the eighth century, the Guhyagarbha Tantra was translated into Tibetan from Sanskrit three times: initially by Buddhaguhya and Vairocana, secondly by Padmasambhava and Nyak Jiianakumara, and definitively by Vimalamitra with Nyak Jiianakumara and Ma Rinchen Chok. A much later indigenous Tibetan translation was also prepared in the fifteenth century by Tharlo Nyima Gyeltsen and Go Lotsawa. The anthology of treatises related to the Guhyagarbha Tantra includes a large number of commentaries on this text, of both Indian and Tibetan origin, composed by illustrious masters such as Lllavajra, Buddhaguhya, Rongzom Pai)c)ita, Longchen Rabjampa and Lochen Dharmasri. The iconography and symbolism of the hundred Peaceful and Wrathful Deities presented in the Guhyagarbha Tantra sub-

A BRILF LITLHARY

lll~Tl)HY

XXXIX

sequently gave rise to a whole genre of literature in Tibet known as the Cydes of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities (zhi-khro), among which our compilation of texts The Great tiberation by Hearing in the Intermediate States is the most influential.

THE CLOSE LINEAGE OF TREASURES
According to traditional accounts, when Padmasambhava introduced these teachings to Tibet in the eighth century he foresaw that the oral transmission of the 'long lineage' would be subjected over time to corruption and misapplication, and that the efficacy of the teachings would be diminished. To counteract this, through the agency of his consort Yeshe Tsogyal and other foremost disciples, he concealed a large number of 'treasure-teachings' (gter-chos), in the.form of books and sacred artefacts, at powerplaces (gnLZs) throughout the Tibetan plateau, predicting that they would be rediscovered in future generations by their respective 'treasure-finders' (gter-ston) and promulgated for the sake of future generations. Prophecies were written, describing those who would have the power to unearth such revelations in the future - figures of the calibre of Nyangrel Nyima Ozer, Guru Chmvang, and the discoverer of our text, Karma Lingpa. The term "treasure-teachings' is generally extended to include not only concealed 'earth-treasures' (sa-gter), but also revelations discovered in a telepathic manner directly from the enlightened intention of buddha-mind (dgongs-gter), and pure visionary experiences

(d.zg-S1hl11g).
This notion of the concealment of texts in the form of treasure had precedents in both Indian and Chinese Buddhism. Nagarjuna, for example, is said to have received the Prajfzaparanzita Szttras in the form of treasure from the ocean-depths, and, according to Nyingma doxographers, a recension of A-1ahayoga Tantras was revealed to the eight teachers of Padmasambhava, at the Sitavana charnel ground near Vajrasana. Similarly, the Chinese Buddhist tradition of elemental divination, which includes aspects of Feng Simi and Yi Jing, also recounts how the bodhisattva Mafljugho~a concealed certain divinarory texts on Wang Hai Feng, the Eastern Peak of the sacred iYlount \X'utai Shan. Tibetan sources then describe how iY1aiijugho~a subsequently revealed the Precious

xl

A BRIEF LITERARY HISTORY

Clarifying Lamp (Rin-chen gsal-ba'i sgron-me) to the Chinese master Dahura Nagpo. Since the initial discoveries of the first Tibetan 'treasure-finder' Sangye Lama, in the eleventh century, a vast literature has been produced in Tibet by way of revelation through the 'close lineage of treasures' (nye-brgyud gter-ma), and redacted within the public domain. The Collected Treasures of the various treasure-finders are too voluminous to mention here, but many of their works are represented in the extensive nineteenth-century anthology known as the Store of Precious Treasures (Rin-chen gter-mdzod), which was recently republished in 76 volumes. Just as the anthology of the 'long lineage' contains many commentaries on the Guhyagarbha Tmztra, a significant number of 'treasure-teachings' are also inspired by its portrayal of the hundred Peaceful and Wrathful Deities. Among them the most elaborate is the cycle discovered in the fourteenth century by Karma Lingpa- the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, [entitled} Natural Liberation through [Recognition of/ Enlightened Intention (Zab-chos zhi-khro dgongs-pa rang-grol). The compendium of texts now known outside Tibet as the Tibetan Book of the Dead is an abridgement of this treasury of texts discovered by Karma Lingpa.

THE CONCEALMENT BY PADMASAMBHAVA
The extant cycle of texts that comprise Karma Lingpa's revelations includes a few short biographies and historical accounts of the work's original concealment and subsequent revelation, which were composed by later lineage holders. The following passage from the Middle-length Empowerment (pp. 61-4) describes the roots of this tradition:
At the time when [Padmasambhava] was turning incalculable wheels of the teachings concerning the supremely secret vehicle Iof Vajrayana], he revealed, in accord with the individual capacities of the fortunate king [Trisong Detsen] and his subjects, many practices related to the generation and perfection stages of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities; and these were [later] concealed, for the most part, as profound treasures, for the benefit of beings in the future. When Padmasamhhava was nearing the completion of his direct

A BRIEF LITERARY HISTORY

xli

spiritual work and teaching in Tibet, the sovereign and his son [Prince Mutri Tsenpo], along with the translator Chokrolui Gyelsten and others, offered him a mary9ala of gold and turquoise, and fervently made the following supplication: 'Although your compassion is always present and in the past you have held high the incalculable beacons of the teaching, according to the outer and inner vehicles, yet for the benefit of ourselves, the king, ministers, friends and subjects, and for future beings of the degenerate age, we request you to give a teaching which is the quintessence of all the teachings of the outer and inner vehicles; one through which buddhahood may be attained in a single lifetime; one which will bestow liberation by merely hearing it, a profound and concise teaching containing the essential meaning.' Thus, [in response to their supplication] the Great Master replied, '0! Sovereign King, Prince, Ministers, in accord with your wish, I do have a teaching which is the essential point of all the six million four hundred thousand tantras of the Great Perfection, which were brought forth from the enlightened intention of glorious Samantabhadra. By merely hearing this teaching, the doors leading to birth in inferior existences will be blocked. By merely understanding it you will arrive at the level of supreme bliss. Those who take its meaning to heart will reach the irreversible level of the spontaneously accomplished awareness-holders. It can bring great benefit for all those who are connected with it. 'Although I do possess such a teaching, since those who are of weak mind, or who are naturally inclined towards the Lesser Vehicle, or who lack good fortune, and harbour wrong views and doubts, may disparage this teaching and thereby fall into inferior existences, you should not proclaim [this teaching] to others, even [by whispering its name] into the wind. It should be concealed as a [buried] treasure for the sake of future beings of the degenerate age.' So it was that he named this teaching, which cssentialises all teachings, the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, fmtitledj Natural Liberation through f Recognition of} Enlightened Intention, and he bestowed it on the translator, lChokro ]lui Gyeltsen, as his legacy [of good fortune]. Then, directing his enlightened intention towards living beings of the future degenerate age, who would be of meagre merit, he concealed it in the form of a treasure at Mount Gampodar in Dakpo, at a site which resembles a dancing god.

xlii

A BRIEF LITERARY

HI~TORY

THE PROPHECY CONCERNING KARMA LINGPA
Padmasambhava 's prophesies concerning the treasure-finder Karma Lingpa and his immediate successors are also recounted elsewhere within the cycle. The following verses are taken from Gendun Gyeltsen 's fifteenth-century account, entitled Padma-

sambhava's Prophecy of the Treasure-finder and the Series of Authentic Lineage Teachers (pp. 22ff.). In particuLlr, they offer a
rationale for the original concealment of the texts and predictions regarding their subsequent discovery and secret transmission. It is clear that even in this early formative period the cycle of texts had acquired two distinct titles, The Great Liber,ltion by Hearing during the Intermediate States, and The Natural Liberation through Recognition of Enlightened Intention, reflecting its shorter and longer versions.
It says in a prophetic dedaration of Orgyan Rinpoche: 'In the future, during the final era, the degenerate age, When monks !act] like pigs and make women pregnanr, When virtuous actions generate and sustain rcsenrmenr, When the most nohle of monks rakes a bride, When factionalism and wars are widespread, At that rime there is no douht that all those hereft of such instructions Will fall into the inferior existences. So to benefit the sentient beings of this degenerJte age, I have committed Ithis cycle of teachings] to writing, And concealed them at .Mount Gampodar. In that age, a supremely fortunate son will be born. His father will have the name Accomplished Master NyinJa, And he will he the courageous "Karma Lingpa". On his right thigh there will he a mole, Resembling the eye of pristine cognition, And he will be born in the Jragon or snake year, lnro a heroic family line, the fruit of past good actions. May that fortunate person encounter this [teaching!!

A BRIEF LITERARY HISTORY

xliii

'But he [Karma Lingpa] should not publicly teach the cycles of The Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: Natural Liberation through [Recognition of] Enlightened Intention To anyone at all, even by whispering into the wind, And so it should remain until the time of the third lineage holder. Obstacles will arise if these [teachings] are publicly taught! However, he should impart the cycle of the Great Compassionate One: Lotus Peaceful and Wrathful Deities To all of his fortunate students!

'If the oral instructions of the lineage issuing from the third generation lineage holder Are kept secret for seven years, there will be no obstacles. When seven years have passed, That [third generation successor] may properly impart to others The empowerments and practical application of the [abridged) cycle, The [Great} Liberation [by Hearing} during the Intermediate States. Then, when nine years have passed, the [complete] cycle of the Natural Liberation through /Recognition of} J:nlightened Intention Should be imparted gradually, not all at once!
'These treasures will be extracted in the region of Dakpo, in Southern Kongpo, And they will be concentrated for the sake of living beings, In the region of Draglong, in Upper Kongpo. Karma Lingpa's activity on behalf of living beings will ripen in the north!'

THE LIFE OF KARMA LINGPA
Although the exact dates of Karma Lingpa are unknown, his birth and death have been accurately placed within the fourteenth century. The following passages describing his life and those of his immediate successors arc taken from Gyarawa Namka Chokyi Gyeltsen's fifteenth-century Jewel Garland: An Abridged History

xllv

A BRIEr LITERARY

HI~TORY

Karma Lingpa

A B R 11: f

LI T [ R A R Y H 1 S T 0 R Y

xlv

of the Lineage (pp. 40ff.). Of particular interest is the discovery of two distinct cycles of treasure-teachings, the well-known Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: Natural Liberation of fnlightened Intention, and the Great Compassionate One: Lotus Peaceful and Wrathful Deities. The latter is no longer extant in this form, although it appears to have been the source for the masked drama contained in Chapter r 3 of the present work.
!Revered as an emanation of the great translator Chokrolui GyeltscnJ, Karma Lingpa was born at Khyerdrup, above Dakpo in Southern Tibet. He was the eldest son of the accomplished master Nyinda Sangye, an upholder of the mantra tradition and a treasurefinder in his o\vn right. In his fifteenth year, the prophetic declaration and the auspicious coincidence came together. From Mount Gampodar, which resembles a dancing god, he extracted the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: Natural Liberation of Enlightened Intention, along with the Great Compassionate One: Lotus Peaceful mzd Wrathful Deities and other treasures. Unfortunately others spoke ill of him because he did not form an auspicious relationship with the intended consort who had been prophesised for him in connection with his discovery of these treasure-teachings. He did have one son, but because he showed a yellow scroll !containing his treasures! to his student before the time when he was destined to impart the Pe.lceful and Wrathfitl Deities: Natural Liber,ztion of bzlighte11ed Intention, it is said he encountered lifethreatening obstacles. Karma Lingpa was endowed with innumerable attributes, and dv.·clt as the very embodiment of unimpeded enlightened activity. So, knowing of his own untimely death, he said with prescience: 'In the near future, many marks in the form of lotus flowers will appear on my body!', and he also made numerous other clairvoyant statements. Then, the next year, when he was on the point of death, he granted the empowermcnts and transmissions of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: Natural Liberation of Enlightened /mention, to his son alone, and not to any others, saying 'You should entrust this teaching to a saintly person who maintains the commitments and has the name Nyinda. His actions for the welfare of living beings will be most extensive!' ~laking many such prophecies, Karma Lingpa passed away.

xlvi

A BRIEF LITERARY HISTORY

Thus the first lineage holder was Karma Lingpa's own son, Nyinda Choje, the author of Chapter I of the present work. The sec<mdgeneration lineage holder, Lama Nyinda Ozer ofTsikar ~lonastery in Longpo, was born in 1409 (earth female ox year), and he is said to have written down the text contained in Chapter 1 of the present work. It is the third-generation lineage holder Gyarawa Namka Chokyi Gyatso who has the distinction of being the first person to publicly teach the treasures of Karma Lingpa. The transmissions of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities and The Great Liberation by Hearing in the Intermediate States that eventually came to permeate the entire Tibetan plateau can all trace their roots back to his teaching activity, particularly at Menmo and Thangdrok monasteries in Kongpo. The extensive dispersion of the lineage throughout Tibet and the Himalayan region that issued from Gyarawa has been recently documented, along with visual charts, by Bryan J. Cuevas in his work The Hidden History of the Tibetan Book of the Dead. We will not therefore describe this again here. However, one important figure, from the perspective of the literary history, is Rigdzin Nyima Drakpa (I647-17Io), who in his later years, at Takmogang and Chakru, began transcribing and collating the various texts associated with Karma Lingpa 's cycle. It is clear from the various extant lineage prayers that he was directly responsible for standardising the shorter anthology entitled The Great Liberation by Hearing in the Intermediate States in its present form. Rigdzin Nyima Drakpa's lineage was particularly influential in the nomadic areas of Sok Dzong, where the mantrins of the Kabgye Lhakhang even now maintain the lineage of his teachings, and in Dzachuka, where his teacher Dzogchen Pema Rikdzin founded Dzogchcn ~1onastcry in I 68 5. He also formed a spiritual rapport with Terdak Lingpa, on account of which the transmissions of Tsele, Lhalung and Mindroling all converged in his own son Orgyan Tcndzin. Subsequently, the teachings of the Karma Lingpa tradition were passed on from Mindroling to Dzogchen in the following line of transmission: Pema Gyurme Gyatso, Gyelse Rarna Vija, Dzogchen II Gyurme Thekchok Tendzin, Perna Kundrol Namgyel and Dzogchen III Ngedon Tendzin Zangpo. The last named was responsible for preparing the first xylographic edition of The Great Liberation by Hearing in the Intermediate Shztes, at Dzogchen ~1onastery in the mid-eighteenth century.

A BRIEf LITERARY

lli~TORY

xi vii

EDITIONS AND CONTENT OF THE

GREAT LIBERATION BY HEARING IN THE INTERMEDIATE STATES
The diverse strands of the lineage stemming from Karma Lingpa and Gyarawa, summarised above, ensured that their legacy would flourish throughout Tibet and in the neighbouring sub-Himalayan regions of Northern Nepal, Sikkim and Bhutan. The earliest texts which these spiritual successions imparted through the generations were handwritten manuscripts, including a great many local and anonymous supplements. Yet, as Bryan Cuevas has rightly observed, 'most of the available recensions of [Karma Lingpa's] Peaceful and Wrathful Deities come to us in the form of xylographic prints and facsimile reproductions from blocks carved only in the last two centuries'. Unfortunately, the scribal errors that have crept into many of these 'standard' editions subsequently acquired great currency. At present, the most extensive extant version of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: Natural Liberation of Enlightened Intention is not a block-print, but the manuscript version from the library of the late Kyabje Dudjom Rinpochc, who in the I 96os had his scribe prepare an elegant three-volume edition on the basis of the two volumes in his possession, which were apparently of Katok provenance. This manuscript contains sixty-four distinct texts, which are arranged sequentially under the categories of history, empowerment, generation stage, perfection stage, introductions (according to the Great Perfection), path of skilful means, and protector liturgies. Although it is the most extensive version available, this manuscript is by no means exhaustive - for there are other, smaller published compilations, associated with Pelyul, Dzogchcn and Nedo, containing texts that arc excluded from the larger anthology. However, in our experience, and on the authority of Gene Smith, who generously made the Dudjom manuscript available on CD-ROM, the Dudjom manuscript is far more accurate than the many Indian and Bhutanese reprints that arc more widely available and have provided the source for the recent partial translations of The Great Liberation by Hearing in the Intermediate States. Even the illuminated manuscript on which Kazi

xlviii

A BRIEF LITERARY HISTORY

Dawa Samdup's 1927 translation is based appears to perpetuate the same inaccuracies. After wrestling with the scribal errors, lacunae and inconsistencies that fill the various Indian reprints of The Great Liberation by Hearing in the Intermediate States, it was with considerable joy and relief that we were finally able to clarify obscure readings and eliminate many cumbersome and unnecessary annotations by basing our translation on the three-volume Dudjom edition of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: Natural Liberation of Enlightened Intention. Seldom have we opted for readings based on the two Indian reprints of The Great Liberation by Hearing in the Intermediate States at our disposal, the Delhi and Varanasi photo-offset publications, and when we have done so, we have indicated the reason for our choice in the notes. We have not, however, made reference to the new Amdo edition, compiled by Khenpo Dorje and just published in Hong Kong. Readers wishing to understand the precise relationship between the chapters of the derivative Great Liberation by Hearing in the Intermediate States, and the larger cycle of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities, are referred to Appendix One, where the correspondences are presented. As stated above, this is the first complete English translation of The Great Liberation by Hearing in the Intermediate States, otherwise known to the outside world as the Tibetan Book of the Dead, and it is based on a version of the original text which has proven to be far more accurate than those used in previous translations. All the chapters of the anthology standardised by Nyima Drakpa and later published in woodblock form at Dzogchen Monastery arc contained in this book. With the exception of Chapter I 3, Part One, which may well derive from the non-extant Lotus Peaceful and Wrathful Deities, and Chapter I 3, Part Two, which was composed by Gyarawa Namka Chokyi Gyatso, all the other chapters from Nyima Drakpa's compilation appear to have been taken from the original treasure-cycle of Karma Lingpa's Peaceful and Wrathful Deities. In presenting our translation, we have sought to order the chapters according to the meaningful sequence of the intermediate states that arise in the course of life and death, and therefore the order of the chapters in this translation differs from the arrangement of Nyima Drakpa. In addition, we have included two further chapters from the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities that are not part of The

A BRIEf LITERARY HISTORY

xlix

Great Liber,ztion by Hearing in the Intermediate States. Chapter 1, outlining the preliminary practices of meditation, is attributed to Nyinda Choje and Nyinda Ozer, while Chapter 10, on consciousness transference, derives from Karma Lingpa's Six Guidebooks of the Perfection Stage of meditation. The first of these has been included because it provides an essential context to the later chapters, and the instructions on consciousness transference have been included because they are specifically mentioned in Chapter I I, as a necessary practice related to the intermediate state of the time of death.

THE

TIBETAN
BOOK OF

THE DEAD

Contents

1. Natural Liberation of the Nature of Mind: The Foursession Yoga of the Preliminary Practice 2. A Prayer for Union with the Spiritual Teacher, [entitled] Natural Liberation, without Renunciation of the Three Poisons 3. Root Verses of the Six Intermediate States 4. The Introduction to Awareness: Natural Liberation through Naked Perception

5

23

29

35
59

5. The Spiritual Practice entitled Natural Liberation of
Habitual Tendencies 6. Natural Liberation of Negativity and Obscuration through [Enactment of] the Hundredfold Homage to the Sacred Enlightened Families 7. Natural Liberation through Acts of Confession 8. Natural Liberation through Recognition of the Visual Indications and Signs of Death

93
I I

3

I

5r

9. Natural Liberation of Fear through the Ritual Deception of Death r83 10. Consciousness Transference: Natural Liberation through Recollection 11. The Great Liberation by Hearing 12. Aspirational Prayers 13.A Masked Drama of Rebirth 14. Liberation by Wearing: Natural Liberation of the Psycho-physical Aggregates
I97
217

305
317
343

1
Natural Liberation of the Nature of Mind: The Four-session Yoga of the Preliminary Practice

CONTEXT
In its original Tibetan this preliminary practice is beautifully written in verse. In the monasteries and lay households of the practitioners of this cycle of teachings, it is usually sung melodically in the early morning, before any other practice or activity is begun. Often the young monks sing the opening verses of this poem as they go about their morning duties. When engaging in a preliminary retreat, it is recommended that this meditation is done every day in four sessions: early morning till dawn, after sunrise until just before noon, from afternoon until just before sunset, and from sunset until late evening. The practice essentialises the 'four common or outer preliminaries' and the 'five uncommon or inner preliminaries', which are described in the glossary. It is recommended that the inner preliminary practices are repeated 1oo,ooo times as a prerequisite to receiving instruction on the 'generation stage' practices of the Vehicle of Indestructible Reality (Vajrayana).

Herein is contained the Natural Liberation of the Nature of Mind: The four-session Yoga which is a Spiritual Practice of the Vehicle of Indestructible Reality, the Way of Secret Mantras, 1 an extract from the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, {entitled} Natural Liberation through f Recognition of} Enlightened lntcntion. 1 It would be excellent if one were to train one's mental continuum according to the [following] preliminary practices which are based on the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, {entitled] Natural Liberation through {Recognition of] Enlightened Intention.

COMMON PRELIMINARY PRACTICE
0, Alas! Alas! Fortunate Child of Buddha Nature, Do not be oppressed by the forces of ignorance and delusion! But rise up now with resolve and courage! Entranced by ignorance, from beginningless time until now, You have had [more than] enough time to sleep. So do not slumber any longer, but strive after virtue with body, speech and mind! Are you oblivious to the sufferings of birth, old age, sickness and death? There is no guarantee that you will survive, even past this very day! The time has come [for you I to develop perseverance in ryour I practice.

PRELIMINARY PRACTICE

9

For, at this singular opportunity, you could attain the everlasting bliss [of nirval).a]. So now is [certainly] not the time to sit idly, But, starting with [the reflection on] death, you should bring your practice to completion! 3 The moments of our life are not expendable, And the [possible J circumstances of death are beyond imagination. If you do not achieve an undaunted confident security now, What point is there in your being alive, 0 living creature? All phenomena are [ultimately] selfless, empty, and free from conceptual elaboration. In their dynamic they resemble an illusion, mirage, dream, or reflected image, A celestial city, an echo, a reflection of the moon in water, a bubble, an optical illusion, or an intangible emanation. You should know that all things of cyclic existence and nirval).a Accord [in nature] with these ten similes of illusory phenomena. All phenomena are naturally uncreated. They neither abide nor cease, neither come nor go. They are without objective referent, signless, ineffable, and free from thought. 4 The time has come for this truth to be realised! Homage to the spiritual teachers! Homage to the meditational deities! Homage to the <;lakinis! 0, Alas! Alas! How needing of compassion are those living beings, tortured by their past actions, [Who are drowning] in this deep chasm, the engulfing ocean of their past actions! Such is the nature of fluctuating cyclic existence! Grant your blessing, so that this ocean of sufferings may run dry!

10

THE TIBETAN BOOK Of THE DEAD

How needing of compassion are those who are skill-less,' Those who are tortured by ignorance and past actions, Those who indulge in actions conducive to sufferingEven though they desire happiness! Grant your blessing, so that the obscuration of dissonant mental states and past actions may be purified! How needing of compassion are the ignorant and the deluded, [Bound! in this confining dungeon of egotistical attachment and the subject-object dichotomy, Who, like wild game, are trapped in this snare, time after time! Grant your blessing, so that cyclic existence may be stirred to its depths! How needing of compassion are those beings who endlessly revolve [in the cycle of existence], As if [circling] perpetually fonJ the rim of a water-wheel, In this six-dimensional city of imprisoning past actions! Grant your blessing, so that the womb entrances to the six classes of existence rna y be barred! We who are fearless and hard-hearted, despite having seen so many sufferings of birth, old age, sickness and death, Are wasting our human lives, endowed with freedom and opportunity 6 on the paths of distraction. Grant your blessing, so that we may [continuously] remember impermanence and death! Since we do not recognise that impermanent [things] are unreliable, Still, even now, we remain attached, clinging to this cycle of existence. Wishing for happiness, we pass our human lives in suffering. Grant your blessing, so that attachment to cyclic existence may be reversed! Our impermanent environment will be destroyed by fire and water/ The impermanent sentient beings within it will endure the severing of body and mind.

PRELIMINARY PRACTICE

I I

The seasons of the year: summer, winter, autumn and spring, themselves [exemplify] impermanence. Grant your blessing, so that disillusionment [with conditioned existence] may arise from the depths [of our hearts]! Last year, this year, the waxing and waning moons, The days, nights, and indivisible time moments are all impermanent. If we reflect carefully, we too are face to face with death. Grant your blessing, so that we may become resolute in our practice! Though this [body] endowed with freedom and opportunity is extremely hard to find, When the Lord of Death 8 approaches in the semblance of disease, How needing of compassion are those who, bereft of the [sacred] teachings, Return empty-handed [from this life]! Grant your blessing so that la recognition of] urgency may grow in our minds! Alas! Alas! 0 Precious Jewel, embodiment of compassion! Since you, the Conqueror, arc endowed with a loving heart, Grant your blessing, so that we and the six classes of beings Nlay be liberated, right now, from the sufferings of cyclic existence!

UNCOMMON PRELIMINARY PRACTICE

Refuge
:Then, the outer, inner, and secret refuges should be adopted in the following way:)

Outer Refuge
I bow down to and take refuge in the spiritual teachers Whose enlightened intention, throughout the past, present and future,

12

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

Is uninterruptedly directed towards living beings, The infinite sentient beings of the three world systems and six classes. I bow down to and take refuge in the [perfect] buddhas, The Transcendent Ones Gone to Bliss of the ten directions and four times, Foremost of humankind, adorned by the major and minor marks, Whose enlightened activities are inexhaustible, and as vast as space. I bow down to and take refuge in the sacred teachings, Including the doctrines of the ultimate truth, quiescent and desire less, The irreversible path 9 of the three vehicles, And the transmissions, esoteric instructions, and treatises Of the transmitted precepts and treasures. I bow down to and take refuge in the communities [of monks and nuns], Who abide on the unerring path, forming a field of all supreme merits, 10 Together with the assembly of Sublime Ones, set apart from the stains of dissonant mental states, And the supreme upholders of the Teaching: bodhisattvas, pious attendants, and hermit buddhas.

Inner Refuge
I bow down to and take refuge in the spiritual teachers, [Embodying) the essential nature of the buddhas of the three times, The masters of all the secret and unsurpassed mal)cjalas, Who guide all living beings with their blessings and compassiOn. I bow down to and take refuge in the meditational deities, Who, even though [they remain unmoving as J the Buddha-body of Reality, Uncreated and free from the limits of conceptual elaboration,

PRE LI

~~

I NARY PRACTICE

13

Emanate in peaceful and wrathful forms for the sake of living beings, And confer the supreme and common accomplishments. I bow down to and take refuge in the assembly of 9akinis, Who, moving with the energy of compassion through the space of reality, Grant supreme bliss [as they arise] from their pure abodes, And bestow accomplishments upon those who keep their commitments.

Secret Refuge
From within a state free from grasping and beyond intellect, I take refuge in the nature of the great expanse of sameness and perfection, 11 Atemporal emptiness, free from conceptual elaboration, Primordially pure in essence, natural expression and compassionate energy. From within [a state which is] non-conceptual, naturally radiant and stark, I take refuge in the primordial embodiment of the five buddha-bodies, Spontaneously and naturally present, [Abiding] in the maQ.9ala of the [unique] seminal point, Which is (the union ofj expanse and awareness, and of radiance and emptiness, The indestructible chain of inner radiance, that is intrinsic awareness. Throughout the three times, beginningless and endless, I take refuge in the Compassionate Ones, Unimpeded, naturally expressive, and all-pervasive, The unimpededly arising and subsiding rays of light, Which emanate through the expressive power of awareness, Dispelling, non-conceptually, the darkness in the minds of living beings.

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

The Generation of an Altruistic Intention
(Then, the altruistic intention of the Greater Vehicle should be generated in the following way:) Even though all phenomena are empty and selfless, Sentient beings fail to realise this. Alas! How needing of compassion arc they! So that all those who are the focus of our compassion may attain enlightenment, I must rouse my body, speech and mind to [the practice of] virtue! For the benefit of all sentient beings of the six classes, From now until enlightenment is attained, Not just for my own sake but for the benefit of all, I must generate the mind [aspiring] to supreme enlightenment! How needing of compassion arc those bereft of the [sacred] teachings, Who have ensnared themselves within the unfathomable ocean of suffering. So that all those who are the focus of our compassion may be established in happiness, I must generate the mind [aspiring] to supreme enlightenment! I myself and all infinite sentient beings Arc primordially of the nature of buddhahood. So that we may [all] become supreme embodiments, who know this to be so, I must generate the mind [aspiring] to supreme enlightenment! The ocean of mundane cyclic existence is like an illusion. All compounded things lack permanence. Their essence is empty and selfless, But these naive beings [right here] who do not realise this to be so

P R E L I ~11 N A R Y I' R ACT I C E

15

Roam through cyclic existence, [driven on] by the twelve links of dependent origination. So that all beings gripped in this quagmire of name and form may attain buddha hood, 12 I must rouse my body, speech, and mind to [the practice of] virtue! I take refuge [from now] until enlightenment, In the Buddha, the [sacred] teachings and supreme assembly. Through the merit of practising generosity and the other [perfections], May I attain buddhahood for the sake of [all] living beings! May I become a spiritual teacher, [able to) guide infinite sentient beings, As many as there are, without exception! (Then, one should meditate on the four immeasurable aspirations as follows:) May all sentient beings be endowed with happiness! ~lay they all be separated from suffering and its causes! May they be endowed with joy, free from suffering! May they abide in equanimity, free from attachment or aversion!

Purification of Negativity and Obscuration through the Repeated Recitation of the Hundred-syllable Mantra [of Vajrasattva]
(This should be done in the context of the following visualisation:) At the crown of my head, on a lotus moon cushion, Is my spiritual teacher, [resplendent] in the form of Vajrasattva. His body is translucent, like crystal, and at his heart, [Resting] on a moon-disc, is a syllable HO¥, surrounded by the Hundred-syllable Mantra. 13

16

TilE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

A stream of nectar then descends through my crown fontanelle, 14 Purifying my violations [of the commitments], my negativities and obscurations. May Vajrasattva, glorious transcendent one, Anoint me at this very moment With the nectar stream of pristine cognition, So that the negativities and obscurations Of myself and all sentient beings, without exception, are purified.
0¥ VAJRASATTVA SAMAYAMANUPALAYA VAJRASATTVA
TVENOPATI~THA D~QHO
SUTO~YO

ME BHAVA

SUPO~YO

ME BHAVA

ME BHAVA ANURAKTO ME BHAVA SARVASIDDHI:yt

ME PRAYACCIIA SARVAKARMASU CAME ClTfA¥ SREYAI;I KURU H0¥ HAHAHAHA HO BHAGAVAN SARVA TATHAGATA VAJRA MA ME MUNCA VAJRABHAVA MAHASAMAYASATTVA

Al;IJS

Owing to my ignorance, delusion, and confusion, I have transgressed the boundaries of the commitments, which I should have guarded. 0 my protector and spiritual teacher, be my refuge! You who are the supreme and glorious Vajra-holder, 1" Embodying great compassion and love, 0 foremost of beings, be our refuge. Assist us to purify and cleanse, without exception, this mass of flawsOur negativitics, obscurations, transgressions, and downfalls. By this virtuous activity, May I swiftly attain [the state of] Vajrasattva, now, And may all sentient beings, without exception, Be swiftly established in that same state! ~1ay we become exactly like you, Vajrasattva, Exactly resembling you in body, retinue, lifespan, fields, And in your supreme and exquisite major marks. 17

PRELIMINARY PRACTICE

17

The Mal)Qala Offering
(Then present the mal)9ala of offerings in the following way:)
0¥ VAJRA BHOMI A.l;l H0¥ 0¥ VAJRA REKHE A.l;l H0¥
18

The base transforms into a powerful ground of gold. 19
20

The outer periphery becomes a jewelled fence of iron mountains, And at the centre is Mount Sumeru, king of mountains, Majestic and formed from the five precious substances, Exquisitely beautiful in shape, and delightful to behold, Encircled by seven [concentric] golden mountain ranges, And seven (intervening] emanational oceans. To the east is the continent Viratdeha, And to the south is Jambudvipa, The west is adorned by Aparagodaniya, And to the north is Uttarakuru. lT o either side of these continents arc 1the eight subcontinents: Deha and Videha [to the east], Camara and Aparacamara [to the south], Satha and Uttaramantril)a [to the west], And Kurava and Kaurava [to the north]. I offer this [world-system], along with the sun, moon, Rahu, Ketu, 21 And the luxuriant resources and riches of gods and humans, To you, my precious spiritual teachers, and to your retinues. Through your compassion, please accept them for the benefit of all beings!
A¥ H0¥ To my precious spiritual teachers and the fields of the Buddha-body of Emanation, I offer all the inestimable resources of gods and humans, Within the immeasurable palace of the animate and inanimate trichiliocosm, [In the form of] a dense cloud of offerings, as numerous as atomic particles, Together with Mount Sumeru and its continents.
0¥
22

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

Please accept [these offerings], with compassion and love! May all beings be born into the fields of the Buddha-body of Emanation!
o.~

AJ:I HO¥

To my precious spiritual teachers and the fields of the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource, I offer this perfect purity of the sensory spectra and sensory activity fields, Adorned by the five sense-faculties, radiant and brilliant, Within the immeasurable palace of the pure energy channels of my body. Please accept [these offerings], with compassion and love! May all beings be born into the fields of the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource!
0¥ A~l HO¥

To my precious spiritual teachers and the field of the Buddha-body of Reality, I offer this primordially pure and innate pristine cognition That abides within the immeasurable palace of the pure Buddha-body of Reality, which is mind's actual nature, 23 Free from an objective referent, empty, radiant, and free from subjective apprehension. Please accept [these offerings], with compassion and love! May all beings be born into the field of the Buddha-body of Reality!
0~1 AI:I H0¥

By offering this exquisite and pleasing mal)~ala, May no obstacles arise on the path to enlightenment! May the enlightened intention of Those Gone to Bliss, past, present and future, be realised, May I neither be bewildered in migratory existence, Nor lulled by the solitary quiescence [of nirval)a]! But may I liberate beings throughout the expanse of space!
0¥ AI~ HO¥ MAHA GURU DEVA QAKINI RATNA MA~QALA POJA MEGHA

A H0¥ 24

PRELl~~

IN A R Y I' R ACT ICE

19

Prayer to the Lineage Teachers
(Then, in order to cultivate union with the spiritual teacher, the prayer to the lineage should be recited as follows:) I pray to the fdirect] intentional lineage of the conquerors: To Samantabhadra, primordial lord, Buddha-body of Reality, To the Conqueror Vajradhara, embodiment of the sixth [enlightened family], And to Vajrasattva, foremost of guides, the supreme buddha-mind. I pray to the [symbolic] lineage of the awareness holders: To the awareness holder Prahevajra, supreme among emanations, To the spiritual teacher Sri Sirpha, supreme son of the conquerors, To the undying Padmakara, established in the Buddha-body of Indestructible Reality, And to the 9akini [Yeshe] Tshogyalma, worthy recipient of the secret mantras. I pray to the aural lineage of [authoritative] personages: To Karma Lingpa, master of the profound treasures, To the one named [Nyinda] Choje, supreme son of his buddha-mind, And to the one named Soryacandra [Nyinda Ozer ], lord of living beings during this degenerate age. I pray ro the assembled deities of the three roots: To all the genuine spiritual teachers of the core lineage, Who form the connecting links [of this transmission]/ 5 To the Peaceful and Wrathful meditational deities, in whom appearance and emptiness are indivisible, And to the oceanic assembly of <;iakinis and oath-bound protectors of the [sacred] teachings! 0 you spiritual teachers who uphold the lineage of the oral transmission, 26 And train each according to his or her needs!

20

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

If your teaching were to enter into decline,
The yogins of this era would be l utterly] disheartened. Please, therefore, continue to guide all beings from this swamp of cyclic existence! As we call out to you with mournful and tormented cries, Bring to mind, now, the strict vows which you made in the past! 27 Reveal your faces from the expanse of space, endowed with major and minor marks! Please guide all beings from this swamp of cyclic existence! Let your Brahma voice reverberate like a thousand peals of thunder! 18 Open [wideJ the portals to the treasury of your buddha-mind! Pour out the light rays of your discriminative awareness and com passion! Please guide all beings from this swamp of cyclic existence! Liberate now, without exception, all beings of this final era! 29 Anoint l us) now with the river of the four pure em powermen ts! Liberate now the four continua, bewildered by dissonant mental states! Please guide all beings from this swamp of cyclic existence! Grant now the fruitional attainment of the four buddha-bodies of Those Gone to Bliss! May I become a spiritual teacher, [able] to guide all the infinite sentient beings, Who have been my parents, throughout space, without exception! Please guide all beings from this swamp of cyclic existence!

Receiving the Four Empowerments
(Then the meditation to be adopted while rece1vmg the four empowerments should be as follows: 30 ) From the crown of the spiritual teacher in union with consort, A white syllable 0~1, [radiating] rays of light, Descends into the mid-point between my eyebrows,

PRELIMII"ARY PRACTICE

21

The vase empowerment is thus received and the obscurations of the body are purified. Please confer Iupon meJ the accomplishments of buddha-body! From the throat of the spiritual teacher in union with consort, A red syllable AI:f, [radiating] rays of light, Descends into the sense faculty of my tongue, The secret empowerment is thus received and the obscurations of speech are purified. Please confer [upon mel the accomplishments of buddha-speech! From the heart of the spiritual teacher in union with consort, A blue syllable H0~1, [radiating] rays of light, Descends into the centre of my heart, The empowerment of pristine cognition is thus received, and the obscurations of mind are purified. Please confer [upon mel the accomplishments of buddha-mind! From the navel of the spiritual teacher in union with consort, A red syllable HRII:f, [radiating! rays of light, Descends into the centre of my navel, The obscurations which [mundanely] differentiate between body, speech and mind are purified, And the fourth empowerment of indivisible coemergence is received. 0 glorious and precious root spiritual teacher! Be indivisibly present, [seated! on the pistil of a lotus within my heart for ever! Through your great kindness, favour me with your acceptance, And please confer [upon me] the accomplishments of buddha-body, speech and mind! May we become exactly like you, glorious spiritual teacher! Exactly resembling you in body, retinue, lifespan, fields, And in your supreme and excellent major marks. These verses forming the preliminary practice of the Peaceful and

Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, [entitled] Natural

22

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

Liberation through [Recognition of] Enlightened Intention may be applied as a supplementary method in the context of mental purification. This spiritual practice of the unsurpassed Greater Vehicle (Mahayana) is an oral teaching of [Nyinda] Choje Lingpa, the eldest son of the treasure-finder Karma Lingpa; and it was committed to writing by Guru Suryacandrarasmi [i.e. Nyinda Ozer].

2
A Prayer for Union with the Spiritual Teacher, [entitled] Natural Liberation, without Renunciation of the Three Poisons

CONTEXT
This prayer to the spiritual teacher is generally recited immediately after the Preliminary Practice. It is also recommended that it be recited at the beginning of any ritual, or when thinking of the spiritual teacher or whenever the practitioner is about to enter into periods of meditation. A correct perception of the spiritual teacher is considered vital for all practitioners of the Vehicle of Indestructible Reality (Vajrayana). Further, it is considered essential that a practitioner receive spiritual inspiration, as transmitted through an unbroken lineage of masters, from a living teacher. First, however, before accepting anyone as a spiritual teacher, it is also regarded as essential that the practitioner examine and scrutinise the prospective teacher over a long period of time and accept him or her as a qualified teacher only when it is certain that the person meets the requirements of a spiritual teacher as set out in the authoritative sacred texts. Then, if they are sure that their own motivation is sincere, students should follow the advice of their chosen spiritual teacher with incontrovertible devotion. Ultimately, the inspiration that is requested from the spiritual teacher is coming from the purity of the practitioner's own perception, altruistic intention and confidence.

Herein is contained A Prayer for Union with the Spiritual Teacher, {Embodiment ofi the Three Buddha-bodies, [entitled/ Natural Liberation, without Renunciation of the Three Poisons, I rwhich is an extract] from the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, {entitled/ Natural Liberation through I Recognition off Enlightened Intention. 2 In the palace of reality's expanse, pure and pervasive, Is my spiritual teacher, the Buddha-body of RealityUncreated and free from conceptual elaboration. To you, I pray with fervent devotion. I request the primordially pure self-empowerment, The blessings of the Buddha-body of Reality/ So that naturally arising pristine cognition Is uncontrived and spontaneously present, Through natural liberation, Without renunciation of ignorance and delusion. In the palace of great bliss, which is pristine cognition, radiant and pure, Is my spiritual teacher, the Buddha-body of Perfect ResourceUnimpeded and supremely blissful. To you, I pray with fervent devotion. I request the spontaneously present self-empowerment, The blessings of the Buddha-body of Perfect Resoun:e, 4 So that intrinsic awareness, which is pristine cognition, Is naturally liberated in supreme bliss/ Through natural liberation, Without renunciation of desire and clinging.

PRAYER TO TilE SPIRITUAL TEACHER

27

In the palace of the lotus, untainted and pure, Is my spiritual teacher, the Buddha-body of EmanationNaturally arising in unlimited forms, beyond determination. To you, I pray with fervent devotion. I request the naturally liberating self-empowerment, The blessings of the Buddha-body of Emanation, So that intrinsic awareness, which is naturally manifesting Pristine cognition, naturally radiates/ Through natural liberation, Without renunciation of discordant views and aversion. In the palace of intrinsic awareness, the genuine inner radiance, Is my spiritual teacher, [the unity of) the three buddha-bodiesBeyond spatial delineation, and supremely blissful. To you, I pray with fervent devotion. I request the supremely blissful self-empowerment, The blessings of the Three Buddha-bodies, So that naturally arising pristine cognition Is spontaneously present as the three buddha-bodies, 7 Through natural liberation, Without renunciation of the subject-object dichotomy. How needing of compassion are suffering sentient beings, right here, Who are driven on through cyclic existence by delusion and confusionBecause they do not understand that their own mind Is the Buddha-body of Reality, free from extremes! tvlJy they all actualise the Buddha-body of Reality! How needing of compassion are mistakenly prejudiced sentient beings, right here, Who are driven on through cyclic existence by attachment and cravmgBecause they do not understand that their own awareness Is the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource, imbued with supreme bliss! rv1ay they all actualise the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource!

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

How needing of compassion are sentient beings with discordant views, right here, Who are driven on through cyclic existence by aversion and dualistic perception Because they do not understand that their own mind Is the Buddha-body of Emanation, arising and subsiding [naturally)! May they all actualise the Buddha-body of Emanation! How needing of compassion are all unenlightened living beings, right here, Who, as a result of grasping, are obscured by dissonant mental states and [subtle obstructions to] knowledgeBecause they do not understand [that their own mind] Is indivisible from the three buddha-bodies! May they all actualise the three buddha-bodies! These verses forming A Prayer for Union with the Spiritual Teacher, [Embodiment of] the Three Buddha-bodies, {entitled} Natural Liberation, without Renunciation of the Three Poisons, which are an extract from the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, [entitled] Natural Liberation through [Recognition of/ Enlightened Intention, were composed by Padmakara, the preceptor from O<;l<;liyana. May [the influence of] this sacred teaching not be extinguished until cyclic existence has been emptied! 8 This prayer was brought forth from Mount Gampodar, which resembles a dancing god, by the accomplished master Karma Lingpa.

3
Root Verses of the Six Intermediate States

CONTEXT

According to this cycle of teachings, the circle of birth and death can be seen as being composed of six intermediate states. These six modalities of existence: our waking living state, dreaming, meditation, the time of death, and the two successive phases of the after-death state are defined in the glossary. This poem emphasises the centrally important perspective that relates to each of these states. It is recommended that practitioners should memorise these verses and recite them repeatedly, while reflecting on their meaning, throughout their lives.

Herein is contained the Root Verses of the Six Intermediate States. 1 I bow down to the Conquerors, the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities. The root verses concerning the six intermediate states are as follows: Alas, now as the intermediate state of living! arises before me, Renouncing laziness, for which there is no time in this life, I must enter the undistracred path of study, reflection and meditation. Taking perceptual experience and [the nature of] mind as the path, I must cultivate actualisation of the three buddha-bodies. Now, having obtained a precious human body, this one time, I do nor have the luxury of remaining on a distracted path. Alas, now as the intermediate state of dreams arises before me, Renouncing the corpse-like, insensitive sleep of delusion, I must enter, free from distracting memories, the state of the abiding nature of reality. Cultivating [the experience of] inner radiance, Through the recognition, emanation, and transformation of dreams, I must not sleep like a beast, But cherish the experiential cultivation which mingles sleep with actual [realisation].

ROOT VERSES

33

Alas, now as the intermediate state of meditative concentration arises before me, Renouncing the mass of distractions and confusions, I must undistractedly enter a state, Which is devoid of subjective apprehension, and free from the [two] extremes, And attain stability in the stages of generation and perfection. At this moment, having renounced activity, And having attained a singular [concentration], I must not fall under the sway of bewildering mental afflictions! Alas, now as the intermediate state of the time of death 3 arises before me, Renouncing [all] attachment, yearning and subjective apprehension in every respect, I must undistractedly enter the path, on which the oral teachings are clearly understood, And eject my own awareness into the uncreated expanse of space. Immediately upon separation from this compounded body of flesh and blood, I must know [this body] to be like a transient illusion. Alas, now as the intermediate state of reality 4 arises before me, Renouncing the merest sense of awe, terror or fear, I must recognise all that arises to be awareness, manifesting naturally of itself. Knowing [such sounds, lights and rays] to be visionary phenomena of the intermediate state, At this moment, having reached this critical point, I must not fear the assembly of Peaceful and Wrathful Deities, which manifest naturally! Alas, now as the intermediate state of rebirth 5 arises before me, I must with one-pointed intention concentrate my mind, And resolutely connect with the residual potency of my virtuous past actions.

34

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

I must obstruct the womb entrance and call to mind the methods of reversal. This is the time when perseverance and purity of perception are imperative. I must give up all jealousy and meditate on my spiritual teacher with consort. From the mouth of the accomplished masters come these words: '0, [you], with your mind far away, thinking that death will not come, Entranced by the pointless activities of this life, If you were to return empty-handed now, would not your [life's] purpose have been [utterly] confused? Recognise what it is that you truly need! It is a sacred teaching [for liberation]! So, should you not practise this divine [sacred] teaching, beginning from this very moment?' And it is also said, 'If I choose not to take the oral teachings of the spiritual teacher to heart, Am I not the deceiver of myself?' This completes the Root Verses of the Six Intermediate States.

4
The Introduction to Awareness: Natural Liberation through Naked Perception

CONTEXT
This chapter is the essence of the esoteric instruction by which the student is introduced to the ultimate nature of mind. Prior to entering into this practice, which focuses directly on the nature of mind itself, this introduction should be received from an accomplished lineage holder. Then, whilst in solitary retreat, it is recommended that this text be read repeatedly as a guide between meditation sessions.

Herein is contained The Introduction to Awareness: Natural Liberation through Naked Perception,' [which is an extract] from the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, [entitled/ Natural Liberation through/ Recognition on Enlightened Intention. 2 Homage to the deities [embodying] the three buddha-bodies, who are the natural radiance of awareness. [Here], I shall present the teaching [known asJ The Introduction to Awareness: Natural Liberation through Naked Perception, [which is an extract] from the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, {entitled/ Natural Liberation through {Recognition on Enlightened Intention. Thus, shall I introduce [to you the nature ofl intrinsic awareness. So contemplate it well, 0 Fortunate Child of Buddha nature. SAMAYA rgya rgya rgya

[THE IMPORTANCE OF THE INTRODUCTION TO A WARENESSJ
EMAHO!

Though the single lnature of] mind, which completely pervades both cyclic existence and nirvaQ.a, Has been naturally present from the beginning, you have not recognised it. Even though its radiance and awareness have never been interrupted,

lf'I"RODUCTION TO AWARENESS

39

You have not yet encountered its true face. Even though it arises unimpededly in every facet [of existence], You have not as yet recognised [this single nature of mind]. In order that this [single] nature might be recognised by you, The Conquerors of the three times have taught an inconceivably [vast number of practices], Including the eighty-four thousand aspects of the [sacred] teachings. Yet, [despite this diversity], not even one of these [teachings] has been given by the Conquerors, Outside the context of an understanding of this nature! 3 [And even] though there are inestimable volumes of sacred writings, equally vast as the limits of space, Actually, [these teachings can be succinctly expressed in] a few words, 4 which arc the introduction to awareness. Here [is] the direct [face to face] introduction To the enlightened intention of the Conquerors. Here is the method for entering [into actual reality], [In this very moment!, without reference to past or future [events}.

[THE ACTUAL INTRODUCTION TO AWARENESS]
KYE HO!

0 fortunate children, listen to these words! The term 'mind' is commonplace and widely used, Yet there are those who do not understand [its meaning], Those who falsely understand it, those who partially understand it, And those who have not quite understood its genuine reality. Thus there has arisen an inconceivably vast number of assertions [as to the nature of mindj, Posited by [the various] philosophical systems. 5 Further, since ordinary persons do not understand [the meaning of the term 'mind' j,

THE TIBI:TAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

And do not intuitively recognise its nature, They continue to roam through the six classes of sentient [rebirth] within the three world-systems, And consequently experience suffering. 6 This is the fault of not understanding this intrinsic nature of mind. Even though pious attendants and hermit buddhas claim that they understand [this single nature of mind] as the partial absence of self/ They do not understand it exactly as it is. Furthermore, being fettered by opinions held in accordance with their respective literatures and philosophical systems, 8 There are those who do not perceive the inner radiance [directly]: The pious attendants and hermit buddhas are obscured [in this respect] by their attachment to the subject-object dichotomy. The adherents of Madhyamaka are obscured by their attachment to the extremes of the two truths. The practitioners of Kriyatantra and Yogatantra are obscured by their attachment to the extremes of ritual service and attainment. 9 The practitioners of Mahayoga and Anuyoga are obscured by their attachment to l the extremes of] space and awareness. 10 All these [practitioners] stray from the point because they polarise the non-dual reality, And since they fail to unify [these extremes] in non-duality, they do not attain buddhahood. Thus, all of those beings continue to roam in cyclic existence, Because they persistently engage in [forms of] renunciation, And in acts of rejection and acceptance with regard to their own minds, Where [in reality] cyclic existence and nirval)a are inseparable. Therefore, one should abandon all constructed teachings, And all [unnatural] states free from activity, And, by virtue of this {Introduction to) Awareness: Natural Liberation through Naked Perception, which is presented here, One should realise all things in the context of this great natural liberation.

INTRODUCTION TO

AWAREJI.OES~

So it is that all [enlightened attributes] arc brought to completion within the Great Perfection.
SAMAYA

rgya rgya rgya

[SYNONYtv1S FOR MIND]
As for this apparent and distinct [phenomenon] which is called 'mind': In terms of existence, it has no (inherent] existence whatsoever. In terms of origination, it is the source of the diverse joys and sorrows of cyclic existence and nirvaQa, In terms of [philosophical] opinion, it is subject to opinions in accordance with the eleven vehicles. In terms of designation, it has an inconceivable number of distinct names: Some call it 'the nature of mind', the 'nature of mind itself', Some eternalists give it the name 'self', Pious attendants call it 'selflessness of the individual', 11 Cittamatrins call it 'mind', Some call it the 'Perfection of Discriminative Awareness', Some call it the 'Nucleus of the Sugata', Some call it the 'Great Seal', Some call it the 'Unique Seminal Point', Some call it the 'Expanse of Reality', Some call it the 'Ground-of-all', And some call it 'ordinary [unfabricated consciousness]'.

[THE THREE CONSIDERATIONS]
The following is the introduction [ro the means of experiencing] this [single] nature [of mind] Through the application of three considerations: [First, recognise that] past thoughts are traceless, clear, and empty, [Second, recognise that] future thoughts are unproduced and fresh,

.p.

TilE TIBETA:-.: liOOK OF THE DEAD

And [third, recognise that] the present moment abides naturally and unconstructed. When this ordinary, momentary consciousness is examined nakedly [and directly] by oneself, Upon examination, it is a radiant awareness, \\'hich is free from the presence of an observer, !\..lanifcsrly st~uk and clear, Completely empty and uncreated in all respects, Lucid, without duality of radiance and emptiness, Not permanent, for it is lacking inherent existence in all respects, Not a mere nothingness, for it is radiant and dear, 1\:ot a single entity, for it is clearly perceptible as a multiplicity, Yet nor existing inherently as a multiplicity, for it is indivisible and of a single savour. 12 This intrinsic awareness, which is not extraneously derived, Is itself the genuine introduction to the abiding nature of [all] things. For in this [intrinsic awareness], the three buddha-bodies are insepar..1ble, and fully present as one: Its emptiness and utter lack of inherent existence is the Buddha-body of Reality; The natural resonance and radiance of this emptiness is the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource; And its unimpeded arising in any form whatsoever is the Buddha-body of Emanation. These three, fully present as one, are the very essence [of awareness] itself.

!CONSEQUENCES OF THE INTRODUCTION TO AWARENESS]
\X'hcn the introduction is powerfully applied in accordance with the [above] method for entering into this [reality]: One's own immediate consciousness is this very freality l! [Abiding! in this [reality], which is uncontrived and naturally radi,lnt,

1:-iTKODUCTION TO AWAREI'<ESS

43

How can one say that one docs not understand the nature of mind? [Abiding] in this [reality], wherein there is nothing on which to meditate, How can one say that, by having entered into meditation, one was not successful? [Abiding] in this [reality], which is one's actual awareness itself, How can one say that one could not find one's own mind? [Abiding] in this [reality], the uninterrupted [union] of radiance and awareness, How can one say that the [true] face of mind has not been seen? lAbiding] in this [reality], which is itself the cogniser, How can one say that, though sought, this [cogniser] could not be found? [Abiding] in this [reality], where there is nothing at all to be done, How can one say that, whatever one did, one did not succeed? Given that it is sufficient to leave [this awareness] as it is, uncontrived, How can one say that one could not continue to abide [in that state]? Given that it is sufficient to leave it as it is, without doing anything whatsoever, How can one say that one could not do just that? Given that, [within this reality], radiance, awareness, and emptiness are inseparable and spontaneously present, How can one say that, by having practised, one attained nothing? Given that [this reality] is naturally originating and spontaneously present, without causes or conditions, How can one say that, by having made the effort [to find it], one was incapable [of success]? Given that the arising and liberation of conceptual thoughts occur simultaneously, How can one say that, by having applied this antidote [to conceptual thoughts}, one was not effective?

44

TilE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

IAbiding]

in this immediate consciousness itself, How can one say that one does not know this [reality J? u

[OBSERVATIONS RELATED TO EXAN1INING THE NATURE OF
~1IND]

Be certain that the nature of mind is empty and without foundation. One's own mind is insubstantial, like an empty sky. Look at your own mind to see whether it is like that or not. Divorced from views which constructedly determine [the nature of] emptiness, Be certain that pristine cognition, naturally originating, is primordially radiantJust like the nucleus of the sun, which is itself naturally originating. Look at your own mind to see whether it is like that or not! Be certain that this awareness, which is pristine cognition, is uninterrupted, Like the coursing central torrent of a river which flows unceasingly. Look at your own mind to see whether it is like that or not! Be certain that conceptual thoughts and fleeting memories are not strictly identifiable, But insubstantial in their motion, like the breezes of the atmosphere. Look at your own mind to see whether it is like that or not! Be certain that all that appears is naturally manifest [in the mind], Like the images in a mirror which [also] appear naturally. Look at your own mind to see whether it is like that or not!

INTRODUCTION TO

A\\'ARENl:~S

45

Be certain that all characteristics arc liberated right where they are, Like the clouds of the atmosphere, naturally originating and naturally dissolving. Look at your own mind to see whether it is like that or not! There are no phenomena extraneous to those that originate from the mind. [So], how could there be anything on which to meditate apart from the mind? There are no phenomena extraneous to those that originate from the mind. [So], there are no modes of conduct to be undertaken extraneous [to those that originate from the mind]. There are no phenomena extraneous to those that originate from the mind. [So], there are no commitments to be kept extraneous [to those that originate from the mind]. There arc no phenomena extraneous to those that originate from the mind. [So], there are no results to be attained extraneous [to those that originate from the mind]. There arc no phenomena extraneous to those that originate from the mind. [So], one should observe one's own mind, looking into its nature again and again.

If, upon looking outwards towards the external expanse of the skv ' . There arc no projections emanated by the mind, And if, on looking inwards at one's own mind, There is no projectionist who projects [thoughts] by thinking them, Then, one's own mind, completely free from conceptual projections, will become luminously clear. [This] intrinsic awareness, [union of] inner radiance and emptiness, is the Buddha-body of Reality, [Appearing] like [the illumining effect of] a sunrise on a clear and cloudless sky,

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

It is clearly knowable, despite its lack of specific shape or form. There is a great distinction between those wl;o understand and those who misunderstand this point.
This naturally originating inner radiance, uncreated from the very beginning, Is the parentlcss child of awareness- how amazing! It is the naturally originating pristine cognition, uncreated by anyone - how amazing! [This radiant awareness I has never been born and will never die- how amazing! Though manifestly radiant, it lacks an [extraneous] perceiverhow amazing! Though it has roamed throughout cyclic existence, it does not degenerate- how amazing! Though it has seen buddhahood itself, it docs not improvehow amazing! Though it is present in everyone, it remains unrecognisedhow amazing! Still, one hopes for some attainment other than this- how amazing! Though it is present within oneself, one continues to seck it elsewhere- how amazing!

[INTRINSIC AWARENESS AS VIEW, MEDITATION, CONDUCT, AND RESULT]
EMA! This immediate awareness, insubstantial and radiant, Is itself the highest of all views. This non-referential, all-encompassing [awareness] which is free in every respect Is itself the highest of all meditations. This uncontrived [activity based on awareness], simply expressed in worldly terms, Is itself the highest of all types of conduct. This unsought [attainment of awareness], spontaneously present from the beginning, Is itself the highest of all results.

INTROUUCTJON TO AWARENESS

47

[Now], the four great media, which are errorless, are presented: 14 [First], the great medium of errorless view Is this radiant immediate awarenessSince it is radiant and without error, it is called a 'medium'. [Second], the great medium of errorless meditation Is this radiant immediate awarenessSince it is radiant and without error, it is called a 'medium'. [Third], the great medium of errorless conduct Is this radiant immediate awarenessSince it is radiant and without error, it is called a 'medium'. [Fourth], the great medium of errorless result Is this radiant immediate awarenessSince it is radiant and without error, it is called a 'medium'. [Now] the four great nails, which arc unchanging, are presented: Js [First], the great nail of the unchanging view Is this radiant immediate awarenessSince it is firm throughout the three times, it is called a [Second], the great nail of unchanging meditation Is this radiant immediate awarenessSince it is firm throughout the three times, it is called a [Third], the great nail of unchanging conduct Is this radiant immediate awarenessSince it is firm throughout the three times, it is called a [Fourth], the great nail of the unchanging result Is this radiant immediate awarenessSince it is firm throughout the three times, it is called a

'nail'.

'nail'.

'nail'.

'nail'.

Now follows the esoteric instruction which reveals the three times to be one: Abandon your notions of the past, without attributing a ~emporal sequence! Cut off your mental associations regarding the future, without anticipation! Rest in a spacious modality, without clinging to [the thoughts ofl the present. Do not meditate at all, since there is nothing upon which to meditate.

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

Instead, revelation will come through undistracted mindfulness Since there is nothing by which you can be distracted. Nakedly observe [all that arises] in this modality, which is without meditation and without distraction! When this lexperience] arises, Intrinsically aware, naturally cognisant, naturally radiant and clear, It is called 'the mind of enlightenment'. Since [within this mind of enlightenment] there is nothing upon which to meditate, This [modality] transcends all objects of knowledge. Since [within this mind of enlightenment] there arc no distractions, It is the radiance of the essence itself. This Buddha-body of Reality, [union of] radiance and emptiness, In which [the duality of] appearance and emptiness is naturally liberated, Becomes manifest [in this way J, unattaincd by the [structured] path to buddhahood, And thus Vajrasattva is [actually] perceived at this moment. Now follows the instruction which brings one to the point where the six extreme [perspectives] are exhaustcd: 16 Though there is a vast plethora of discordant views, Within this intrinsic awareness or [single nature of] mind, Which is the naturally originating pristine cognition, There is no duality between the object viewed and the observer. Without focusing on the view, search for the observer! Though one searches for this observer, none will be found. So, at that instant, one will be brought to the exhaustion point of the view. At that very moment, one will encounter the innermost boundary of the view. Since there is no object at all to be observed, And since one has not fallen into a primordial vacuous emptiness, 17 The lucid awareness, which is now present, Is itself the view of the Great Perfection. [Here], there is no duality between realisation and lack of realisation.

1:-.ITROOUCTION TO AWARENESS

49

Though there is a vast plethora of discordant meditations, Within this intrinsic awareness, Which penetrates ordinary consciousness to the core, There is no duality between the object of meditation and the meditator. Without meditating on the object of meditation, search for the meditator! Though one searches for this meditator, none will be found. So, at that instant, one will be brought to the exhaustion point of meditation. At that very moment, one will encounter the innermost boundary of meditation. Since there is no object at all on which to meditate, And since one has not fallen under the sway of delusion, drowsiness, or agitation, 111 The lucid uncontrived awareness, which is now present, Is itself the uncontrived meditative equipoise or concentration. [Here], there is no duality between abiding and non-abiding. Though there is a vast plethora of discordant modes of conduct, Within this intrinsic awareness, Which is the unique seminal point of pristine cognition, There is no duality between the action and the actor. Without focusing on the action, search for the actor! Though one searches for this actor, none will be found. So, at that instant, one will be brought to the exhaustion point of conduct. At that very moment, one will encounter the innermost boundary of conduct. Since, from the beginning, there has been no conduct to undertake, And since one has not fallen under the sway of bewildering propensities, The lucid uncontrived awareness, which is now present, Is itself pure conduct, without having to be contrived, modified, accepted or rejected. [Here], there is no duality between purity and impurity.

so

Tlil-. TIBETAN BOOK Of THE UEAD

Though there is a vast plethora of discordant results, Within this intrinsic awareness, Which is the true nature of mind, the spontaneous presence of the three buddha-bodies, There is no duality between the object of attainment and the attainer. Without focusing on the attainment of the result, search for the attainer! Though one searches for this attainer, none will be found. So, at that instant, one will be brought to the exhaustion point of the result. At that very moment, one will encounter the innermost boundary of the result. Since, whate\'er the [projected I result, there is nothing to be attained, And since one has not fallen under the sway of rejection and acceptance, or hope and doubt, The naturally radiant awareness, which is now spontaneously present, Is the fully manifest realisation of the three buddha-bodies, within oneself. [Here[, there is the result, atemporal buddhahood itself.

[SYNONY.\15 FOR AWARENESS]
This awareness, free from the eight extremes, such as eternalism and nihilism Iand so forth I, Is called the '!\Iiddle Way', which does not fall into any extremes. It is called 'awareness' because mindfulness is uninterrupted. It is given the name 'Nucleus of the Tathagata' Because emptiness is [naturally] endowed with this nucleus of awareness. If one understands this truth, one reaches perfection in all respects, For which reason, this [awareness] is also called the 'Perfection of Discriminative Awareness'. furthermore, it is called the 'Great Seal' because it transcends the intellect and is atemporally free from extremes,

INTRODUCTION TO AWARENESS

51

And, further, it is called the 'Ground-of-all', Because [this awareness] is the ground of all joys and sorrows associated with cyclic existence and nirval)aThe distinction between these being contingent on whether or not this [awareness] is realised. [Further], this radiant and lucid awareness is itself referred to as 'ordinary consciousness', On account of those periods when it abides in its natural state in an ordinary non-exceptional way. Thus, however many well-conceived and pleasant-sounding names are applied to this [awareness], In reality, those who maintain that these names do not refer to this present conscious awareness, But to something else, above and beyond it, Resemble someone who has already found an elephant, but is our looking for its tracks [elsewhere]. Though one \vere to scan the [entire] external universe, [Searching for the nature of mind], one would not find it. Buddhahood cannot be attained other than through the mind. Not recognising this, one does indeed search for the mind externally, Yet, how can one find [one's own mind] when one looks for it elsewhere? This is like a fool, for example, who, when finding himself amidst a crowd of people, Becomes mesmerised by the spectacle [of the crowd] and forgets himself, Then, no longer recognising who he is, starts searching elsewhere for himself, Continuously mistaking others for himself. [Similarly], since one docs not discern the abiding nature, Which is the fundamental reality of [all] things, One is cast into cyclic existence, not knowing that appearances arc to be identified with the mind, And, not discerning one's own mind to be buddha, nirvai)a becomes obscured. The [apparent] dichotomy between cyclic existence and

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

nirvarya is due
awarene~s,

to

[the dichotomy between] ignorance and

But there is [in reality] no temporal divide between these two, [even] by a single moment. Seeing the mind as extraneous to oneself is indeed bewildering, Yet bewilderment and non-bewilderment are of a single essence. Since there exists no [intrinsic] dichotomy in the mental continuum of sentient beings, The uncontrived nature of mind is liberated just by being left in its natural state. Yet if you remain unaware that bewilderment [originates] in the mind, You will never understand the meaning of actual reality. So you should observe that which naturally arises and naturally originates within your own [mind]. [hrst], observe (the source] from which these appearances initially originated, [Second, observe the place] in which they abide in the interim, And [third, observe the place I to which they will finally go. Then, one will find that, ·just as, for example, a pond-dwelling crow docs not stray from its pond, Even though it flies away from the pond, Similarly, although appearances arise from the mind, They arise from the mind and subside into the mind of their own accord. This nature of mind, which is all-knowing, aware of everything, empty and radiant, Is established to be the manifestly radiant and self-originating pristine cognition, [Present] from the beginning, just like the sky, As an indivisible Iunion I of emptiness and radiance. This itself is actual reality. The indication that this is [the actual reality] is that all phenomenal existence is perceived in [the single nature of] one's own mind; And this nature of mind is aware and radiant. Therefore, recognise Ithis nature] to be like the sky!

INTRODUCTION TO AWARENESS

53

However, this example of the sky, though used to illustrate actual reality, Is merely a symbol, a partial and provisional illustration. For the nature of mind is aware, empty and radiant in all respects, While the sky is without awareness, empty, inanimate and void. Therefore, the true understanding of the nature of mind is not illustrated by Ithe metaphor of] the sky. lTo achieve this understanding], let the mind remain in its own state, without distraction!

[THE NATURE OF APPEARANCES]
Now, with regard to the diversity of relative appearances: They are all perishable; not one of them is genuinely existent. All phenomenal existence, all the things of cyclic existence and mrvaQ.a, Are the discernible manifestations of the unique essential nature of one's o\vn mind. [This is known because I whenever one's own mental continuum undergoes change, There will arise the discernible manifestation of an external change. Therefore, all things arc the discernible manifestations of mind. For example, the six classes of living beings discern phenomenal appearances in their differing ways: Eternalistic extremists [and others] who are remote from [the Buddhist perspective J, Perceive [appearances] in terms of a dichotomy of etcrnalism 1nd nihilism; And [followers of] the nine sequences of the vehicle perceive [appearances] in terms of their respective views, [and so forth]. For as long as this diversity [of appearances] is being perceived and diversely elucidated, Differences [as to the nature of appearances] arc apprehended, And consequently, bewilderment comes about through attachment to those respective [views].

54

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

Yet, even though all those appearances, of which one is aware in one's own mind, Do arise as discernible manifestations, Buddhahood is present [simply] when they are not subjectively apprehended or grasped. Bewilderment does not come about on account of these appearancesBut it does come about through their subjective apprehension. [Thus], if the subjectively apprehending thoughts are known to be [of the single nature ofl mind, they will be liberated of their own accord. All things that appear are manifestations of mind. The surrounding environment which appears to be inanimate, that too is mind. The sentient life-forms which appear as the six classes of living beings, they too are mind. The joys of both the gods and humans of the higher existences which appear, they too are mind. The sorrows of the three lower existences which appear, they too are mind. The five poisons, representing the dissonant mental states of ignorance, which appear, they too are mind. The awareness, that is self-originating pristine cognition which appears, it too is mind. The beneficial thoughts conducive to attainment of nirvar:ta which appear, they too are mind. The obstacles of malevolent forces and spirits which appear, they too are mind. The deities and [spiritual] accomplishments which manifest exquisitely, they too are mind. The diverse kinds of pure [vision] which appear, they too are mind. The non-conceptual one-pointed abiding fin meditation] which appears, it too is mind. The colours characteristic of objects which appear, they too are mind. The state without characteristics and without conceptual elaboration which appears, it too is mind.

INTRODUCTION TO AWARENESS

55

The non-duality of the single and the multiple which appears, it too is mind. The unproveability of existence and non-existence which appears, it too is mind. 19 There arc no appearances at all apart from [those that originate in 1 the mind. The unimpeded nature of mind assumes all manner of appearances. Yet, though these [appearances] arise, they are without duality, And they !naturally! subside into the modality of mind, Like waves in the waters of an ocean. Whatever names are given to these unceasingly [arising] objects of designation, In actuality, there is but one [single nature of] mind, And that single [nature of mind] is without foundation and without root. [Therefore], it is not perceptible at all, in any direction whatsoever. It is not perceptible as substance, for it lacks inherent existence in all respects. It is not perceptible as emptiness, for it is the resonance of awareness and radiance. It is not perceptible as diversity, for it is the indivisibility of radiance and emptiness. This present intrinsic awareness is manifestly radiant and clear, And even though there exists no known means by which it can be fabricated, And even though !this awareness! is without inherent existence, It can be directly experienced. [Thus], if it is experientially cultivated, alii beings] will be liberated.

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

[CONCLUSION]
All those of all [differing] potential, regardless of their acumen or dullness, May realise [this intrinsic awareness]. However, for example, even though sesame is the source of oil, and milk of butter, But there will be no extract if these are unpressed or unchurned, Similarly, even though all beings actually possess the seed of buddha hood, Sentient beings will not attain buddhahood without experiential cultivation. Nonetheless, even a cowherd will attain liberation if he or she engages in experiential cultivation. For, even though one may not know how to elucidate [this state] intellectually, One will[through experiential cultivation] become manifestly established in it. One whose mouth has actually tasted molasses, Does not need others to explain its taste. But, even learned scholars who have not realised [this single nature of mind] will remain the victims of bewilderment. For, however learned and knowledgeable in explaining the nine vehicles they may be, They will be like those who spread fabulous tales of remote [places] they have never seen, And as far as the attainment of buddhahood is concerned, They will not approach it, even for an instant.

If this nature [of intrinsic awareness] is understood, Virtuous and negative acts will be liberated, right where they are. But if this [single nature] is not understood, One will amass nothing but [future lives within] cyclic existence, with its higher and lower realms, Regardless of whether one has engaged in virtuous or non-virtuous actions.

INTRODUCTION TO AWARENESS

57

Yet, if one's own mind is simply understood to be pristine [utterly] empty [of inherent existence], The consequences of virtuous and negative actions will never come to fruitionFor just as a spring cannot materialise in empty space, Within [the realisation of] emptiness, virtuous and negative actions do not objectively exist. 20
cognition~

So it is that, for the purpose of nakedly perceiving the manifestly present intrinsic awareness, This Natural Liberation through Naked Perception is most profound. Thus, [by following this instruction], one should familiarise oneself with this intrinsic awareness. Profoundly Scaled!
E-MA!

This Introduction to Awareness: Natural Liberation through Naked Perception Has been composed for the sake of future generations, the sentient beings of a degenerate age. [It integrates] in a purposeful concise abridgement, All my preferred tantras, transmissions and esoteric instructions. Though I have disseminated it at this present time, It will be concealed as a precious treasure. May it be encountered by those of the future, Who have a [positive] inheritance of past actions. 21 SAMAYA rgya rgya rgya! This treatise concerning the direct introduction to awareness, entitled Natural Liberation through Naked Perception, was r.omposed by Padmakara, the preceptor of 099iyana. May [its influence] not be ended until cyclic existence has been emptied.

5
The Spiritual Practice entitled Natural Liberation of Habitual Tendencies

CONTEXT
This is the concise 'generation stage' practice associated with this cycle of teachings. Normally, after completing the preparatory philosophical studies and meditation a! practices over many years, the full generation stage practice entitled The Natural Liberation of Feelings would be done four times a day while in an extended solitary retreat. Following this retreat, the full generation stage practice should be done at least monthly. As a method for enhancing and sustaining an unbroken purity of perception, this concise practice, The Natural Liberation of Habitual Tendencies, should be done three times a day, in the morning, at midday and in the evening, throughout the practitioner's life. If this is not practical, then the concise practice should be done twice a day, in the morning and evening, or at least once a day in the morning, following the Preliminary Practice (Chapter 1). The aim is to provide a means by which the practitioner can · cultivate an unwavering recognition of the nature of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities within his or her own mind and body. Thereby recognition of the natural purity of the practitioner's impure habitual tendencies is continuously developed. The measure of successful training is: the location and nature of the deities will be remembered even in the practitioner's dreams, and, the arising of a sustained recognition that all phenomena, sounds and thoughts are, in their essence, the body, speech and mind of the deities.

Herein is contained The Spiritual Practice entitled Natural Liberation of Habitual Tendencies, 1 [which is an extract] from the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, fentitled} Natural Liberation through [Recognition of} Enlightened Intention. 2 I respectfully bow down to Samantabhadra and Mahottara, 3 To the assembly of the Peaceful and Wrathful deities, And to the assembly of the Hundred Sacred Enlightened Families! Having been liberated in the intermediate states, .Nlay all beings abide in the reality of the three buddha-bodies. 0 You who are fortunate and auspiciously blessed, Apply [yourself to] the meditations and recitations of this most lucid Spiritual Practice, Which is a coalescence of the [full means of accomplishment] of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities! Never forget [to practise this] throughout the three times.

THE TEN-BRANCHED PRAYER FOR THE ACCUMULATION [OF MERITJ
[First], visualise in the space before you the Three Precious Jewels and the deities of the hundred enlightened families, and then recite · as follows:

DAILY PRACTICE

The Branch of Taking Refuge
0¥ AI~ HO~l

I respectfully take refuge, inseparably, from now until enlightenment, In the infinitude of Peaceful and Wrathful Deities, the Conquerors Gone to Bliss, The Three Precious Jewels, the meditational deities, The ocean of ~akinis, and assembly of oath-bound protectors, Within the infinite Ibuddha] fields, reaching to the limits of space.

The Branch of Invitation
I request the infinite Peaceful and Wrathful Deities Of the ten directions and four times, Compassionate emanations embodying discriminative awareness and skilful means, Pervading the vast infinite space of reality's expanse, To come to this place for the sake of [all] living beings.

The Branch of Requesting [the Deities] to be Seated
I request that [the meditational deities] be seated, Here on sun, moon, and lotus cushions, [Symbolising] skilful means, discriminative awareness, and their stainless [union], Upon their bejewelled thrones [fashioned] in the form of lions and so forth, In [an attitude of] unblemished supreme delight, Within this mary~ala of pristine cognition, Which is the [natural] purity of phenomenal existence!

The Branch of Paying Homage
I bow down to the assembly of the Peaceful and Wrathful Conquerors, To the father and mother deities, and [allJ their offspring, [Whose essence is] the pristine cognition of Samantabhadra, Displayed as uncorrupted bliss in the secret womb of Samantabhadri.

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

The Branch of Making Offerings
I request the Peaceful and Wrathful Conquerors, the oceans of Those Gone to Bliss, To partake of these inestimable outer, inner, and secret offerings, Both those actually arrayed and those mentally emanated, Which are offered for the benefit of all living beings.

The Branch of the Confession of Negativity
I acknowledge and remorsefully confess all my negative obscurations And all my habitual tendencies of body, speech and mind, Beginninglessly influenced by the three poisons Which are the accumulating causes for [rebirth] Among the lower states [of suffering] in cyclic existence.

The Branch of Sympathetic Rejoicing
I rejoice with great delight in the [buddha] fields of supreme bliss, Where all phenomenal existence is [recognised as] the pervasion of reality's expanse. I rejoice in [all] compassionate acts, in their merits, and in their altruistic intention, And in all [deeds that are] the source of merit and pristine cognition.

The Branch of Turning the Wheel of the [Sacred] Teachings
I exhort the teachers throughout the fields of the ten directions, Who are as numerous as atoms, To stir from their meditative commitments for the sake of all sentient beings, And to turn the Wheel of the Sacred Teachings, Thus [entirely] pervading the reaches of space.

DAILY PRACTICE

The Branch of Requesting [the Buddhas] Not to Enter N irvar;a
I beseech you all, 0 teachers, infinite buddhas without exception, To remain [present] and not to pass into nirval)a, And to continue to enact deeds of extensive benefit for the sake of beings, Until the world-systems of cyclic existence have been emptied!

The Branch of the Dedication [of Merit] to the Unsurpassed Greater Vehicle
[By the power of] whatever past, present and future virtues I accumulate, May all sentient beings, throughout the furthest reaches of space, Mature into worthy recipients of the unsurpassed Greater Vehicle, And then swiftly attain the status of the infinite Peaceful and Wrathful Deities!

PURIFICATION
0¥ AJ:I H0¥ BODHICITTA MAHASUKHAJNANA DHATU AJ:l 0¥ RULU RULU 1-10¥ BHYOI:l H0JY1
4

From the field of reality's expanse, uncreated and pure, Within a celestial palace, which is a seminal point [of light], pure, unceasing, and radiant, Through the natural expressive power of one's own mind, uncontrived and empty, Intrinsic awareness, radiant and empty, arises in the form of Vajrasattva, [Seated] upon a bejewelled throne adorned with lotus, sun and moon [cushions]. [Vajrasattva isj white, radiant, with one face, two arms, and a smiling countenance; The right hand holds a vajra at the heart,

66

THl:. TIBETA:-i BOOK OF Till:. Ol:.AO

[Symbolising the union] of awareness and emptiness, The left hand supports a bell [resting] on the hip, [Symbolising the union] of appearances and emptiness; And the head [is adorned with a garland of] perfect huddhas, [Representing] the five enlightened families of Those Gone to Bliss. Thus, [Vajrasattva] manifests in the form of the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource, [Exquisitely] adorned with silks and jewels, Seated in the posture of royal ease, With the right leg extended, and the left drawn in.'

IRadiating] at the heart is the seed-syllable 110 ~1, Surrounded by the Hundred-syllable Mantra:
Oryt VAJRASATTVA SAMAYAMANUPAI.AYA VAJRASATTVA
TVENOPATI~THA D~I?HO

ME BHAVA

SUPO~YO

ME BHAVA

SUTO?YO ME BHAVA ANURAKTO ME BHAVA

SARVASIDDHI~t

ME PRAYACCIIA SARVAKAR.\IASU CA .ME CITTA~t SREYAI:f KURU H0~1 HAIIAHAHA HO BHAGAVAN SARVA TATHAGATA VAJRA MA ME ,\1UNCA VAJRABIIAVA MAHASA.\1AYASATTVA AI/'

Having performed the twofold act of benefiting [self and others] through the emanation and reabsorption [of light from these syllables], the obscurations of conceptual thought are purified. Do not be distracted! Recite this quintessential [mantra] of the hundred sacred enlightened families as much as possible, so that the two obscurations may be cleansed.

MAIN PRACTICE
Having thus purified the [two] obscurations, one should visualise the assembled Peaceful and Wrathful Deities of the hundred sacred enlightened families as a mary9ala [of deities] within one's body, and pray. It is in this context that the aspirational prayers /of the intermediate states are recited. [The combined practice] is as follows:

DAILY PRACTICE

6;

Then, [maintaining the recognition of] oneself as Vajrasattva, In the celestial palace of one's own precious heart, One clearly discerns a seminal point [formed ofJ the five lights, Whose nature is the five pure essences [of the five elements], [And from this], the thirty-six peaceful buddhas 7 radiantly manifest, Amidst a radiant and vibrant mai)Qala suffused by the five pristine cognitions, Their bodies composed of five lights, the unimpeded [union of] emptiness and radiance, [Seated] upon a tier of lotus, sun and moon [cushions], Supported by lion, elephant, horse, peacock and civaf11Civaka [thrones].
0¥ A~I HO¥

Within the expanse of a seminal point located at the centre of one's heart, The primordial lord, the unchanging buddha-body of light, Samantabhadra, the Buddha-body of Reality, blue in colour, And Samantabhadri, the expanse of reality, white in colour, Arc indivisibly united, both in the posture of meditative equ1pmsc, Seated upon lotus, sun and moon cushions, [Symbolising the union of] radiance and emptiness. To you, the supreme ancestors of the buddhas of past, present and future, I bow down, make offerings, take refuge and pray: As soon as we die and begin to transmigrate, M At that very moment, when the pure inner radiance of reality dawns, May we be welcomed by the father Samantabhadra before us, May we be supported by the mother Samantabhadri behind us; And thus [encircled} may we be guided to the indivisible level of Samantabhadra. 9
0¥ AI;I HO¥

fin the channel centre of one's heart] is Vairocana in blissful union with Dhatvisvari, White and radiant, holding a wheel and a bell,

68

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

Seated cross-legged, [symbolising the union of] radiance and emptiness, [Amidst a mass of light, radiating the pristine cognition of reality's expanse]. To you, the principal [deities] of the central Buddha Family, I bow down, make offerings, take refuge and pray: As soon as we die and begin to transmigrate, At that very moment, when the visions of the intermediate state of reality dawn, And we roam [alone] in cyclic existence [driven] by deep-seated delusion, May the Transcendent Lord Vairocana draw us forward, Leading us on the path of radiant light, Which is the pristine cognition of reality's expanse. May the supreme consort [Akasa] Dhatvisvari support us from behind, And thus [encircled] may we be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfected buddha. 10
0¥ Al:f HO¥ In the eastern channel branch of one's heart, Is Vajrasattva, in blissful[union] with Buddhalocana, Blue and radiant, holding a vajra and a bell, Seated cross-legged, [symbolising the union ofl radiance and emptiness, Amidst a mass of light radiating the mirror-like pristine cognition. To the right is white K~itigarbha, holding a seedling and a bell, To the left is white Maitreya, holding a blossoming orange bush and a bell, To the front is white Lasya, holding a mirror and a bell, And to the rear is white Pu~pa, holding a flower and seated with one leg extended and the other drawn in. To you, the sixfold principal and encircling [deities] of the Vajra Family, I bow down, make offerings, take refuge and pray: As soon as we die and begin to transmigrate,

DAILY PRACTICE

At that very moment, when the visions of the intermediate state of reality dawn, And we roam [alone] in cyclic existence [driven] by deep-seated aversion, May the Transcendent Lord Vajrasattva draw us forward, Leading us on the path of radiant light, Which is the mirror-like pristine cognition. May the supreme consort Buddhalocana support us from behind, And thus [encircled] may we be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfected buddha.
0¥

AJ:I HO¥

In the southern channel branch of one's heart, Is Ratnasambhava, in [blissful] union with Mamaki, Yell ow [and radiant], holding a jewel and a bell, Seated cross-legged, [symbolising the unionj of radiance and emptiness, Amidst a mass of light, radiating the pristine cognition of sameness. To the right is yellow Samantabhadra, holding a grain-sheath and a bell, To the left is yellow Akasagarbha, holding a sword and a bell, To the front is yellow Malya, holding a garland and seated with one leg extended and the other drawn in, And to the rear is yellow Dhopa, holding incense and [also] seated with one leg extended and the other drawn in. To you, the sixfold principal and encircling [deities] of the Ratna Family, I bow down, make offerings, take refuge, and pray: As soon as we die and begin to transmigrate, At that very moment, when the visions of the intermediate state of reality dawn, And we roam [alone] in cyclic existence [driven] by deep-seated pride, May the Transcendent Lord Ratnasambhava draw us forward, Leading us on the path of radiant light,

TilE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE LJEALJ

Which is the pristi1ze cognition of sameness. May the supreme consort Mamaki support us from behind, And thus {encircled} may we be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the leuel of an utterly perfected buddha.
0¥ Al:l HO¥

In the western channel branch of one's heart, Is Amitabha, in blissful union with PaQC;laravasini, Red and radiant, holding a lotus and a bell, Seated cross-legged, [symbolising the union of] radiance and emptiness, Amidst a mass of light, radiating the pristine cognition of discernment. To the right is red Avalokitesvara, holding a lotus and a bell, To the left is red Mafijusri, holding a sword and a bell, To the front is red Gita, holding a gong and seated with one leg extended and the other drawn in, And to the rear is red Aloka, holding a butter lamp, and !also] seated with one leg extended and the other drawn in. To you, the sixfold principal and encircling [deities! of the Padma Family, I bow down, make offerings, take refuge, and pray: As soon as we die and begin to transmigrate, At that very moment, when the visions of the intermediate state of reality dawn, And we roam {alone/ in cyclic existence fdriuenj by deep-seated attachment, May the Lord Transcendent Lord Amit~.ihha draw us forward, Leading us on the path of radiant light, Which is the pristine cognition of discernment. May the supreme consort Pa7J4aravasini support us from behind, And thus {encircled} may we be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermedi.zte state, And be escorted to the leuel of an utterly perfected buddha.

DAILY PRACTICE

71

O~t

AJ:I HO,';t

In the northern channel branch of one's heart, Is Amoghasiddhi, in blissful union with Samayatara, Green and radiant, holding a crossed-vajra and a bell, Seated cross-legged, [symbolising the union of] radiance and emptiness, Amidst a mass of light, radiating the pristine cognition of accomplishment. To the right is green Sarvanivarar:taviskambhin, holding a book and a bell, To the left is green VajrapaQi, holding a vajra and a bell, To the front is green Gandha, holding a conch and seated with one leg extended and the other drawn in, And to the rear is green Nartl, holding a food-offering, and [also) seated with one leg extended and the other drawn in. To you, the sixfold principal and encircling [deities 1of the Karma Family, I bow down, make offerings, take refuge, and pray: As soon as we [die and] begin to transmigrate, At that very moment, when the visions of the intermediate state of reality dawn, And tl/e roam [alone] in cyclic existence [driven] by deep-seated envy, May the Transcendent Lord Amoghasiddhi draw us forward, Leading us on the path of radiant light, \'fhich is the pristine cognition of accomplishment. May the supreme consort Samayatdra support us from behind, And thus {encircled} may we be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfected buddha.
0¥ A~l HO¥

In the channel branch at the eastern gate of one's heart, Are white ITrailokya]vijaya and A.rikusa, In [blissful] union, and dancing. In the channel branch at the southern gate of one's heart, Are yellow Yamantaka and Pasa, In lhlissful] union, and dancing. In the channel branch at the western gate of one's heart,

7L

TilE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

Arc red Hayagriva and Spotha, In [blissful] union, and dancing. In the channel branch at the northern gate of one's heart, Are green Amrtakui).Qalin and Ghal).ta, In [blissful] union, and dancing. To you, the eight emanational gatekeepers, male and female, I bow down, make offerings, take refuge, and pray: As soon as we die and begin to transmigrate, At that very moment, when the visions of the intermediate state of reality dawn, And we roam {alone] in cyclic existence {driven] by deep-seated habitual tendencies, May the four Mahakrodha male gatekeepers draw us forward, Leading us on the path of radiant light, Which is the four pristine cognitions combined. 11 May the supreme consorts, the four female gatekeepers, support us from behind, And thus [encircled] may we be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfected buddha.
0¥ Al;f HO¥

Amidst an expanse of light in the channel branch of the energy centre of great bliss at one's crown, Within a radiant and vibrant mat;9ala, that is a lustrous white seminal point, [Stands] Sakra, sage of the god realms, white in colour, and playing a lute. May he obstruct pride, which is the entrance to rebirth in the god realms! Amidst an expanse of light in one's occipital channel, which resembles the horn of an ox, 12 Within a radiant and vibrant mai).Qala, that is a lustrous green seminal point, [Stands] Vemacitra, sage of the antigods, green in colour, bearing armour and a weapon, May he obstruct envy, which is the entrance to rebirth in the antigod realms!

DAILY PRACTICE

73

Amidst an expanse of light in one's 'life-force' channel, which resembles a crystal tube, 13 Within a radiant and vibrant mal)qala, that is a lustrous yellow seminal point, [Stands] Sakyamuni., sage of human beings, yellow in colour, and carrying a mendicant's staff. May he obstruct attachment, which is the entrance to rebirth in the human realms! Amidst an expanse of light in the energy centre of one's navel, Within a radiant and vibrant mal)cJala, that is a lustrous blue seminal point, [Stands] Sthirasirpha, sage of animals, blue in colour, and carrying a book. May he obstruct delusion, which is the entrance to rebirth in the animal realms! Amidst an expanse of light in the channel branch at one's bliss-sustaining secret place, 14 Within a radiant and vibrant mal)cJala, that is a lustrous red seminal point, [Stands] Jvalamukha, sage of the anguished spirits, red in colour, carrying a [wish-granting] casket. May he obstruct miserliness, which is the entrance to rebirth among the anguished-spirit realms! Amidst an expanse of light in the energy centre at the soles of one's feet, Within a radiant and vibrant mal)<;iala, that is a lustrous black seminal point, [Stands] Yama Dharmaraja, sage of the hell beings, black in colour, and carrying a flame and water. N1ay he obstruct aversion, which is the entrance to rebirth among the hell realms! To you, the six sages, the Buddha-bodies of Emanation, Who act for the benefit of living beings, I bow down, make offerings, take refuge, and pray: As soon as we die and begin to transmigrate,

74

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

At that very moment, when the visions of the intermediate state of rebirth dawn, And we roam fa/one} in cyclic existence [driven} by deep-seated habitual tendencies, May the three sages of the higher realms draw us forward, Leading us on the path of radiant light, Which is the four pristine cognitions combined. May the three sages of the lower realms support us from behind, And thus fencircledj may we be rescued From the light paths of the six impure states [of existence/, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfected buddha.
0~1 AI;I HO¥

The forty-two deities of the peaceful assembly blaze with rays of light: Radiant, vibrant, resplendent, and naturally beautiful. Their bodies are supple, slender, handsome, upright, and youthful, Exquisitely ornamented and [splendidly] endowed with the major and minor marks. To you, the assembled peaceful deities of the indestructible expanse, I bow down, make offerings, take refuge, and pray: As soon as we die and begin to transmigrate, At that very moment, when the visions of the intermediate state of reality dawn, And we roam {alone/ in cyclic existence /driven} by the five deep-seated poisons, May all the peaceful male deities draw us forward, Leading us on the path of radiant light, Which is the five pristine cognitions combined. May the supreme female consorts, Queens of the Expanse, support us from behind, And may the male and female gatekeepers support us from the perimeter, And thus {encircled/ may we be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfected buddha.

DAILY PRACTICE

75

0~1 A~l

HO ~~

At this time when we dwell within the intermediate state of living, The forty-two assembled peaceful deities, Arc radiantly present within the celestial palace of our own hearts, Embodied in the form of a cluster of five-coloured lights. Yet, as soon as we die and begin to transmigrate, This assembly of peaceful deities will emerge from our hearts, And fill the space before us. Each of the innumerable central and peripheral forms Will be [fully endowed \Vith] the ornaments and attire [of the peaceful deities], 1 ' Each composed of the five-coloured lights [indicative of the union 1 of radiance and emptiness, And !encircled] by an expanse of rainbow light. Vibrant beaming shafts of light, indicative of the five pristine cognitions, Emanating fivd-coloured] seminal points, sounds, lights and rays, Radiant, vibrant, resplendent, clear, and naturally resonant, Will beam out, as if piercing our hearts. Concomitant with these lights of the five pristine cognitions, The six light paths indicative of the six classes of deluded impure beings will also dawn before us. At this moment, 0 compassionate assembly of peaceful deities, Blessed Transcendent Ones, Beings of Compassion, Do not withhold your compassion, But draw us fonvard on the path [of radiant light], w·hich is the four pristine cognitions combined, And draw us b<1ck from the paths [of the dull lights], Which are !the doors to] the six states of impure [existence]!
0¥ Alj HO¥

In the celestial palace of perfect resource, within one's own throat, Amidst an expanse permeated with rainbows and lights, In the central channel branch of the energy centre of perfect resource, Is Padmanatesvara, the great Awareness Holder of ~1aturation,

THE TIBI::TA!\i BOOK OF TilE DEAD

Red and radiant, glowing in [an array of] five[-colouredJ lights, And embraced by the Qakini of Pristine Cognition, [Their union symbolising the coalescence of] bliss and emptiness. lShe holds] a blood-filled skull and a curved knife, Raised in the gesture of pointing to the sky. May the awareness holders of buddha-body protect all living beings!
0~1

AJ:I

HO¥

In the eastern channel branch of the energy centre of perfect resource, within one's throat, Is the great Awareness Holder who Abides on the Levels, White, radiant, smiling, and embraced by the White QakinL [She holds] a blood-filled skull and a curved knife, Raised in the gesture of pointing to the sky. May the awareness holders of buddha-mind protect all living beings!
0¥ Al;l HO¥

In the southern channel branch of the energy centre of perfect resource, within one's throat, Is the great Awareness Holder with Power over the Lifespan, Yellow, radiant, smiling, and embraced by the Yellow QakinL lShe holds! a blood-filled skull and a curved knife, Raised in the gesture of pointing to the sky. May the awareness holders of buddha-attributes protect all living beings!
0~1

AJ:I

HO¥

In the western channel branch of the energy centre of perfect resource, within one's throat, Is the great Awareness Holder of the Great Seal, Red, radiant, smiling, and embraced by the Red QakinL IShe holds I a blood-filled skull and a curved knife, Raised in the gesture of pointing to the sky. May the awareness holders of buddha-speech protect all living beings!

DAILY PRACTICE

77

0~1 AJ:l HO¥ In the northern channel branch of the energy centre of perfect resource, within one's throat, Is the great Awareness Holder of Spontaneous Presence, Green, radiant, wrathful, smiling, and embraced by the Green QakinL [She holds] a blood-filled skull and a curved knife, Raised in the gesture of pointing to the sky. ~by the awareness holders of buddha-activity protect all living beings!

0~1 AJ:I HO¥ To you, the assembly of awareness holders, the heroes and dakinis ' . I bow down, make offerings, take refuge and pray: As soon as we die and begin to transmigrate, At th,zt uery moment, when the uisions of the intermediate state of re,zlity d.mm, And u•e roam fa/one/ in cyclic existence [driven] by deep-seated habitual tendencies, Aiay the heroic awareness holders draw us forward, Le,zding us on the path of radi,mt light, Which is the fluminance of} spontaneously arising pristine cognition. 16 May the supreme female consorts, the assembly of cjakinfs, support us from behind, And thus [encircled} may we be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the pure fields of the sky-farers.
0.~1 A~l H0~1

At this time when we dwell within the intermediate state of living, The assemblies of awareness holders, both heroes and <;fakinis, Arc radiantly present within the celestial palace of the energy centre of perfect resource within our own throats, Embodied in the form of a cluster of five-coloured lights. Yet, as soon as we die and begin to transmigrate, This divine assembly of the awareness holders will emerge from the throat [centre],

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

And fill the space before us. Amidst a plethora of musical sounds they will manifest in myriad dancing postures, Pounding and vibrating throughout all world-systems, [And generating] a vibrant beaming path of light, Indi~o:ative of spontaneously arising pristine cognition. Simultaneously, the [light] path of the animal realms, indicative of delusion, Will [also] dawn before us. 0 divine assembly of awareness holders, at that moment, Do not withhold your compassion, But draw us back from the [dull-light] path, Which is the gateway to the deluded animal-realms, And draw all beings along the path [of light], Which is [the luminance of] spontaneously arising pristine cognition! Seize us with your compassion, [Ensuring] that we recognise [the characteristics of] the intermediate state! Empower us so that we may become awareness holders, children of the Conquerors.
0¥

AJ:I HO¥

At the nown-centre of onsclf, [visualised] as Vajrasattva, In the celestial palace of the blazing skull, within one's brain, Amidst an expanse of light composed of flaming seminal points of rainbow-light, Is the assembly of blood-drinking deities, 17 standing in clusters.
0¥ Al:l HO¥

In the central channel branch of the skull, within one's brain, Amidst an expanse of light, composed of flaming seminal points of rainbow-light, [Stands] Samantabhadra in the form of Mahottara Heruka. He has three faces: brown, white and red; and six arms: The three right arms brandish a vajra, a khatvanga, and a small drum, And the left hold a bell, a blood-filled skull, and a noose of entrails.

DAILY PRACTICE

79

Mahottara Heruka is joyously and indivisibly embraced by Krodhc5vari. May these two, the central male and female consorts, guide all beings [to li bcra tion]!
0¥ A~I HO¥

On a throne in the central channel branch of one's skull, Amidst an expanse of light, composed of flaming seminal points of rainbow-light, [Stands] Vairocana in the form of Buddha Heruka. He has three faces: reddish brown, white and red; and six arms: The three right arms brandish a wheel, an axe, and a sword, And the left hold a bell, a ploughshare, and a blood-filled skull. Buddha Heruka is joyously and indivisibly embraced by Buddhakrodhesvari. May these two, the blood-drinking deities of the Sugata Family, guide all beings [to liberation]!
0¥ Al:l HO¥

On [a throne in] the eastern channel branch of the skull, within one's brain, Amidst an expanse of light, composed of flaming seminal points of rainbow-light, [Stands] Vajrasattva in the form of Vajra Heruka. He has three faces: dark blue, white and red; and six arms: The three right arms brandish a vajra, a skull, and an axe, And the left hold a bell, a blood-filled skull, and a ploughshare. Vajra Heruka is joyously and indivisibly embraced by Va jrakrodhesvari. May these two, the blood-drinking deities of the Vajra Family, gLiide all beings [to liberation]!
0~1 A~l HO¥

On [a throne in] the southern channel branch of the skull, within one's brain, Amidst an expanse of light, composed of flaming seminal points of rainbow-light,

8o

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THl: DEAD

[Stands] Ratnasambhava in the form of Ratna Heruka. He has three faces: dark yellow, white and red; and six arms: The three right arms brandish a jewel, a khatv<htga, and a club, And the left hold a bell, a blood-filled skull, and a trident. Ratna Heruka is joyously and indivisibly embraced by Ra tnakrodhesvari. May these two, the blood-drinking deities of the Ratna Family, guide all beings [to liberation]!

AJ:I HO¥ On [a throne in] the western channel branch of the skull, within one's brain, Amidst an expanse of light, composed of flaming seminal points of rainbow-light, [Stands] Amitabha in the form of Padma Heruka. He has three faces: dark red, white and blue; and six arms: The three right arms brandish a lotus, a khatvanga, and a mace, And the left hold a bell, a blood-filled skull, and a small drum. Padma Heruka is joyously and indivisibly embraced by Padmakrodhesvari. May these two, the blood-drinking deities of the Padma family, guide all beings [to liberation]!
0¥

AJ:I HO¥ On [a throne in) the northern channel branch of the skull, within one's brain, Amidst an expanse of light, composed of flaming seminal points of rainbow-light, [Stands] Amoghasiddhi in the form of Karma Hcruka. He has three faces: dark green, white and red; and six arms: The three right arms brandish a sword, a khatvanga, and a mace, And the left hold a bell, a blood-filled skull, and a ploughshare. Karma Heruka is joyously and indivisibly embraced by Ka rmakrod hes va ri. May these two, the blood-drinking deities of the Karma Family, guide all beings [to liberation)!
0¥

DAILY PRACTICE

0~1 AJ:I HO¥ To you, the twelve central, male and female, blood-drinking deities, I bow down, make offerings, take refuge, and pray: As soon as we die and begin to transmigrate, At that very moment, when the visions of the intermediate state of reality dawn, And we roam [alone} in cyclic existence [driven} by deepseated confused perceptions, May the conquerors, the nz~zle wrathful blood-drinking deities, draw us forward, Leading us on the path of radiant light, Which is the five fully perfect pristine cognitions. May the assembly of wrathful female deities, Queens of the Expanse, support us from behind, And thus [encircled} may we be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfected buddha.

AJ:I HO¥ Amidst an expanse of light in the eastern channel branch of one's skull, [Stands] Gauri, white in colour, holding a human corpse cudgel and a skull; Amidst an expanse of light in the southern channel branch of one's skull, [Stands] Cauri, yellow in colour, shooting an arrow from a bow; Amidst an expanse of light in the western channel branch of one's skull, [Stands] Pramoha, red in colour, holding a crocodile victory-banner; Amidst an expanse of light in the northern channel branch of one's skull, [Stands] Yetali, black in colour, holding a vajra and a blood-filled skull; Amidst an expanse of light in the south-eastern channel branch of one's skull, [Stands] Pukkasi, red-yellow in colour, clutching and devouring entrails;
0¥

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

Amidst an expanse of light in the south-western channel branch of one's skull, [Stands] Ghasmari, green-black in colour, stirring a blood-filled skull with a vajra; Amidst an expanse of light in the north-western channel branch of one's skull, [Stands] Caf!9ali, pale-yellow in colour, [clutching] a human corpse and eating its heart; Amidst an expanse of light in the north-eastern channel branch of one's skull, [Stands l Smasani, blue-black in colour, tearing apart the head and body of a bloated corpse.
0¥ AI:I HO~t To you, the Eight Matara~, beginning with Gauri, [Who are embodiments! of the Ieight] classes [of consciousness], 1x I bow down, make offerings, take refuge, and pray: As soon as we die and begin to transmigrate, At that very moment, when the uisions of the intermediate state of reality dawn, And we roam [alone] in cyclic existence [driven] by deepseated confused perceptions, May the four MataraiJ, beginning with Gauri, draw us forward, Leading us on the path of light, Which is [the vibrance of] the sounds, lights and rays [of the eight classes of consciousness]. May the four Matara~, beginning with Pukkasi, support us from behind, And thus [encircled] may we be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfected buddha.

0~1 Al:l HO¥ Amidst an expanse of light in the outer eastern channel branch of one's skull, [Stands] lion-headed Sirphamukhi, brown-black in colour, carrying a corpse in her mouth; Amidst an expanse of light in the outer southern channel branch of one's skull,

DAILY PRACTICE

[Stands] tiger-headed Vyaghrimukhi, red in colour, with her two arms crossed; Amidst an expanse of light in the outer western channel branch of one's skull, [Standsj fox-headed Srg~llamukhi, black in colour, eating entrails; Amidst an expanse of light in the outer northern channel branch of one's skull, [Stands] wolf-headed Svanamukhi, blue-black in colour, tearing apart a bloated corpse; Amidst an expanse of light in the outer south-eastern channel branch of one's skull, [Stands] vulture-headed Grdhramukhi, white-yellow in colour, carrying a human corpse draped over her shoulder; Amidst an expanse of light in the outer south-western channel branch of one's skull, [Stands] kite-headed Ka11kamukhi, red-black in colour, carrying a large human corpse; Amidst an expanse of light in the outer north-western channel branch of one's skull, [Stands] crow-headed Kakamukhi, black in colour, brandishing a skull and a sword; Amidst an expanse of light in the outer north-eastern channel branch of one's skull, [Stands] owl-headed Ulokamukhi, dark blue in colour, 19 holding a vajra.
[0¥ Af:l HO~l) To you, the Eight Pisaci, beginning with Sirphamukhi, [Who arc embodiments] of the [eight] sensory objects/ 0 I bow down, make offerings, take refuge, and pray: As soon as UN die and begin to transmigrate, At that z;ery moment, u:hen the z;isions of the intermediate state of reality daum, And we roam {alone] in cyclic existence fdriz;en] by deepseated confused perceptions, May the four PisJci, starting with Sil!zharnukhi, draw us forward, Leading us on the path of pure /radiant] light, 'W'hich is the purity of the naturally manifesting eight objects {of consciousness].

THE Tl BET AN BOOK OF THE DEAD

May the four Pisaci, starting with Grdhramukhi, support us from behind, And thus [encircled) may we be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfected buddha.
0¥

AJ:I

HO¥

In the channel branch at the eastern gate of the skull, within one's brain, Is horse-headed [Ankusa], white in colour, carrying an iron hook and a skull. In the channel branch at the southern gate of the skull, within one's brain, Is sow-headed [Pasa], yellow in colour, holding a noose and a skull. In the channel branch at the western gate of the skull, within one's brain, Is lion-headed [Sphota], red in colour, holding an iron chain and a skull. In the channel branch of the northern gate of the skull, within one's brain, Is snake-headed [Gharyra], green in colour, holding a bell and a skull. 21 To you, the four Female Gatekeepers, who are pristine cognition in emanational form, I bow down, make offerings, take refuge, and pray: As soon as we die and begin to transmigrate, At that very moment, when the visions of the intermediate state of reality dawn, And we roam [alone} in cyclic existence [driven] by deepseated confused perceptions, May Atikusa and Pasa draw us forward, Obstructing the entrances to confusion through the four types of birth, And opening the doors to the four rites of pure enlightened activity. M~.zy Sphofa and Ghat.zfa support us from behind, And thus {encircled] may we be rescued From the fearsome fJassageway of the intermediate state, Alld be escorted to the leuel of an utterly perfected buddha.

DAILY PRACTICE

0~1

AJ:I

HO~l

In the minor channels of the eastern outer courtyard of one's skull, [Stand] the six Queens of Yoga who enact the rites of pacification: Yak-headed Nlanurak~asi, brownish white, and holding a vajra; Snake-headed BrahmaQI, yellowish white, and holding a lotus; Leopard-headed Raudri, greenish white, and holding a trident; Weasel-headed Vai~Qavi, bluish white, and holding a wheel; Brown bear-headed Kaum~1ri, reddish white, and holding a short pike; And black bear-headed IndraQI, white, and holding a noose of entrails. 0 you, the six yogini from the east, who enact the rites of pacification, Perform the rites which pacify our fears of the intermediate state! 22
0¥ AJ:I HO~l

In the minor channels of the southern outer courtyard of one's skull, [Stand] the six Queens of Yoga who enact the rites of enrichment: Bat-headed Vajra,-! 3 yellow, and holding a razor; Crocodile-headed Santi, reddish yellow, and holding a vase; Scorpion-headed Amrta, reddish yellow, and holding a lotus; Hawk-headed Saumi, whitish yellow, and holding a vajra; fox-headed Dai)QI, greenish yellow, and holding a cudgel; And tiger-headed Rak~asi, blackish yellow, and drinking from a blood-filled skull. 0 you, the six yogin! from the south, who enact the rites of enrichment, Perform the rites which enrich pristine cognition during the intermediate state! 24
o.~ Af:l HO~t In the minor channels of the western outer courtyard of one's skull, IStand I the six Queens of Yoga who enact the rites of subjugation:

86

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

Vulture-headed Bhak~asi, greenish red, and holding a club; Horse-headed Rati, red, and holding a human torso; Garu9a-headed Rudhiramadi, pale red, and holding a cudgel; Dog-headed Ekacarir:ti Rak~asi, red, and holding a vajra; Hoopoe-headed Manoharika, red, and firing an arrow from a bow; And deer-headed Siddhikari, greenish red, and holding a vase. 0 you, the six yogini from the west, who enact the rites of subjugation, Perform the rites which assure our independence during the intermediate state! 25
0¥ Al;l HO¥

In the minor channels of the northern outer courtyard of one's skull, [Stand] the six Queens of Yoga who enact the rites of wrath: Wolf-headed Vayudevi, bluish green, and brandishing an enstgn; Ibex-headed Agnayi, reddish green, and holding a firebrand; Sow-headed Varahi, blackish green, and holding a noose of fangs; Crow-headed Camur:t9I, reddish green, and holding an infant human corpse; Elephant-headed Bhujana, blackish green, and holding a bloated corpse; And snake-headed Varur:tani, bluish green, and holding a noose of snakes. 0 you, the six yogini from the north, who enact the rites of wrath, Perform the rites which utterly destroy the confused perceptions of the intermediate state! 26
0¥ Al;f HO¥

At the [outer] eastern gate of one's skull is Vajra [Mahakali], White, cuckoo-headed, and holding an iron hook; At the [outer] southern gate of one's skull is Vajra [Mahachagala], Yellow, goat-headed, and holding a noose; At the [outer] western gate of one's skull is Vajra [Mahakumbhakarr:ti],

DAILY PRACTICE

Red, lion-headed, and holding an iron chain; And at the [outer] northern gate of one's skull is Vajra [Lambodara], Dark green, snake-headed, and holding a bell. 0 you, the four female gatekeepers, Queens [of Yoga] who enact the emanational rites, Perform the rites which obstruct the doors [leading] to [mundane] rebirth from the intermediate state! 17
0¥ AI;I HO¥

To you, the Twenty-eight Isvari, Queens of Yoga, I bow down, make offerings, take refuge, and pray: As soon as we die and begin to transmigrate, At that very moment, when the visions of the intermediate state of reality dawn, And we roam [alone) in cyclic existence [driven] by deepseated confused perceptions, May the seven lsvari of the east draw us forward, Leading us on the path of radiant light, Which is fa vibrance ofj sounds, lights and rays. May the seven lsvari of the south support us from behind, May the seven Isvari of the west support us from the perimeter, And may the seven lsvarf of the north destroy [and liberate] our enemies, And thus {encircled) may we be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfected buddha.
0~1. Al;i HO¥

At this time when we dwell within the intermediate state of living, The assembly of the sixty blood-drinking deities 18 Is radiantly present within the celestial palace of the skull, at the crown-centre, within one's brainEmbodied in the form of a cluster of five-coloured lights. Yet, as soon as we die and begin to transmigrate, This assembly of blood-drinking deities will emerge from the brain, And appear [before us], filling the entire trichiliocosm.

88

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

[Each ofJ the central and peripheral[formsj Will be endowed with fearsome ornaments and attire. [Resounding] within an immense space, Vibrant with sounds, lights and rays, The bodily demeanour of these wrathful deities Will be elegant, heroic and terrifying, Their roar wild, murderous and awesome, Each blazing with compassion, wrath and fierce aversion, Adorned by face markings of human ash, blood, and grease; 29 Dressed in skirts of moist hide and flayed tiger skin; Decorated with skull garlands and wreaths of snakes; Resplendent in a blazing mass of fire which pounds With the cries of 'HA HA HO¥ PHAT strike! Slay!', Reverberating like a thousand peals of thunder. fully arrayed with hand-emblems and multifarious faces, Displaying the arts of transformation, They will pulvcrise and rock the infinite trichiliocosm. At that very moment when the fierce sounds, lights and rays Dawn before us in terrifying manifestation, 0 you, the compassionate assembly of wrathful blood-drinking deities, 0 Beings of Compassion, do not withhold your compassion at that [time]! As we roam [alone} in cyclic existence [driven} by deep-seated habitual tendencies, May the assembly of wrathful blood-drinking [deities} draw us forward, Leading us on the path of [radiant} light, Which is free of fear and terrifying perceptions! May the assembly of wrathful female deities, Queens of the Expanse, support us from behind! May the assembly of the Mataral;, Pisaci, and Female Gatekeepers support us from the perimeter! May the Eight Great Projectresses [who propel beings to exalted rebirths}, Propel us from our [mundane} states [into higher rebirth]! May the diverse animal-headed lsvarf eliminate all obstacles! May the four supreme Female Gatekeepers obstruct the entrance to frnundanej births; And thus [encircled}, may we be rescued

DAILY PRACTICE

From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfected buddha.

Af:l HD~1 When we roam alone, separated from our loved ones, And [myriad] images of emptiness arise, naturally manifesting, May the buddhas [quickly] release the power of their compassion, And may the fear of the awesome and terrifying intermediate state be annulled. When the radiant light path of pristine cognition dawns, May we recognise [its nature], without awe and without terror, And as the [manifold] forms of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities arise, May we be fearlessly confident, and recognise [the characteristics of] the intermediate state. When we experience suffering, as the result of negative past actions, May our meditational deities utterly dispel all such misery, And as the natural sound of reality reverberates like a thousand peals of thunder, May [all sounds] be heard as the sacred resonance of the Greater Vehicle. When we are driven on by past actions, without a refuge, May the Great Compassionate One, Mahakaru1'}ika, protect us, And as we experience suffering generated by habitual tendencies and past actions, May the meditative stabilities of inner radiance and bliss [naturally] arise. May the fields 30 of the five elements not rise up as a hostile force, But may we see these as the buddha fields of the five enlightened families! 31
0¥

By the blessing of the spiritual teachers of the oral lineage, By the compassion of the assembly of Peaceful and Wrathful Deities, And by the force of the purity of my altruistic aspiration,

90

TilE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE Dl:.AD

May all the aspirational prayers, here expressed, Be immediately realised.

CONCLUSION

If one consistently perseveres in this Spiritual Practice of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities, together with the recitation of the aspirational prayers, even the negativity and obscurarions caused by past actions which involve the five inexpiable crimes will be purified. Even the very hell realms themselves [can] be stirred [by the power of this practice]. If this practice is followed, there is no doubt that one will be born as an awareness holder amongst the fields of the Conquerors. For it is said in the transmitted precepts of the Transcendent One Samantabhadra himself: 'One who respectfully pays homage to the mar:l(Jala Of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities of the Magical Net, Will purify each and every transgression [of the commitments]. Even the negativity of the five inexpiable crimes will he purified. Even the hell realms themselves may be stirred !by the force of this practice], And one will become recognised as an awareness holder, Among the fields of the Conquerors.' The advantages which accrue from engaging in the SpirituJl Practice as here set down, are extremely great. It is said that just by simply hearing, once, the names of the deities of this mary~ala, one will avoid rebirth in the lower existences, and buddhahood will eventually be attained. Samantabhadra himself has said:

'If anyone hears, only once, the names of these deities of the
mai)~ala,

he or she will he saved from falling into the great hells.'

And: 'Anyone who respectfully pays homage To the natural mary~ala of the Magical Net, Will purify each and every transgression [of the commitments].

DAILY PRACTICE

The commitments will be repaired, and accomplishments attained.' Therefore, since the advantages of following this practice are beyond expression, one should persevere with this Spiritual Practice and [consistently 1visualise one's own body as the assembly of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities. Thus, the supreme and common accomplishments will be attained in this very life; and after one has died, when the visions of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities dawn during the intermediate state of reality, one will dissolve indivisibly with the meditational deities, and buddhahood will be attained. 32 Experientially cultivate this [Spiritual Practice I! Do not forget its words and meanings even if you were to be pursued by a hundred assassins. Embrace it! Hold it [to your heart]! Read it aloud! Comprehend it in its entirety! Keep it in mind, fully and accurately! This most lucid Spiritual Practice, which is a coalescence of the [full means of accomplishment of the] Peaceful and Wrathful Deities is the experiential cultivation associated with the Liberation by Hearing in the Intermediate States. 33 It is the essence of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: The Ritual Purification entitled N,1fural Liber,ztion of Feelings. 14 It is a supporting text to the Natural Liberation of Awareness: Secret Empowerment of the Intermediate States, 35 and it is the main practice associated with the Reparation [of Commitrnentsj and Confession: Natural Liberation of TrLZnsgressions. 3h It is the path of liberation followed by fortunate beings. !v1ay [the influence of] this Spiritual Practice: Natural Liberation of H,zbitua/ Tendencies not be exhausted until cyclic existence has been emptied. SAMA YA rgya rgya rgya dge'o

6
Natural Liberation of Negativity and Obscuration through [Enactment ofl the Hundredfold Homage to the Sacred Enlightened Families

CONTEXT
This practice reinforces the previous meditation, taking the form of a physical prostration to each of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities in turn. This Hundredfold Homage can be done on its own or immediately after the practice of the Natural Liberation of Habitual Tendencies. It can also be practised whenever feast-offerings are performed in conjunction with The Natural Liberation of Feelings or whenever the practitioner makes offerings of incense, flowers and butter-lamps to the deities. Practitioners should make these prostrations while clearly visualising before them the form of the deity, in perfect detail, and while experientially cultivating the deity's nature and the inner meaning of the symbolism. Also, as the colophon recommends, the practitioner should concurrently: 'mentally admit and feel remorse for all one's negativities and obscurations, which have been, are being and will be accumulated.'

Herein is contained an ancillary chapter of the LiberLZtion by Hearing in the Intermediate States, 1 entitled Natural Liberation of Negativity and Obscuration through [Enactment off the Hundredfold Homage/ [which is an extract from] the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, /entitled/ Natural Liberation through [Recognition of} Enlightened Intention. 3 I respectfully bow down to Samantabhadra and .Mahottara, To the assembly of Peaceful and Wrathful Deities, And to the assembly of the hundred sacred enlightened families. Having purified all negativity and obscurations, May I act so as to guide all beings to the pure buddha fields! I [now] present this Natural Liberation of Negatiuity and Obscuration through {Enactment of the Hzmdred(oldj Homage, a method for performing a hundredfold homage to the infinite Peaceful and Wrathful Deities of the hundred sacred enlightened families, by which negativity and obscuration may be purified. Cherish your zeal in this [practice] throughout the three times!
NAM0!
4

I bow down to 5 Samantabhadra, the Buddha-body of Reality, Father of all buddhas, the natural purity of mental conscwusness, The primary buddha, unchanging body of light, Sky fblue], and seated in the posture of meditative equipoise. I bow down to Samantabhadri, the supreme consort, Natural purity of the sensory spectrum of phenomena/'

II U ~ 0 R E D F 0 I. D

H 0 :\1 A G E

97

Stainless white, like crystal,
~1other of all buddhas of past, present and future,

Joyously embracing her consort, in supreme bliss. I bow down to Vairocana, [manifestation of] supreme buddha-body, The natural purity of the aggregate of form, Pure without renunciation of delusion, Conch [white], holding a wheel and a bell, [Scatcdj on an exalted throne supported by lions, The [resplendent] pristine cognition of reality's expanse. I bow down to Vajrasattva, [manifestation of] supreme buddha-mind, The natural purity of the aggregate of consciousness, Pure without renunciation of aversion, Azure [blue], holding a vajra and a bell, ISeated] on an exalted throne supported by elephants, The [resplendent] mirror-like pristine cognition. I bow down to Ratnasambhava, [manifestation of supreme] buddha attributes, The natural purity of the aggregate of feeling, Pure without renunciation of pride, Golden [yellow!, holding a jewel and a bell, [Seated I on an exalted throne supported by horses, The [resplendent] pristine cognition of sameness. I bow do\vn to Amitabha, [manifestation of] supreme buddha-speech, The natural purity of the aggregate of perceptions, Pure without renunciation of attachment, Copper [red], holding a lotus and a bell, [Seated] on an exalted throne supported by peacocks, The [resplendent] pristine cognition of discernment. I bow down to Amoghasiddhi, [manifestation of supreme] buddha activities, The natural purity of the aggregate of motivational tendencies, Pure without renunciation of envy,

THE TIBETAN BOOK Of THE DEAD

Turquoise [green], holding a crossed-vajra and a bell, [Seated] on an exalted throne supported by civan:zcivaka birds, The [resplendent] pristine cognition of accomplishment. I bow down to Dhatvisvari, the supreme consort, The mother of the Buddha Family, natural purity of space, Moonlike [white}, holding a wheel and a hell, Joyously embracing her consort, in supreme bliss. I bow down to Buddhalocana, the supreme consort. The mother of the Vajra Family, natural purity of earth, Beryl Iblue], holding a vajra and a bell, Joyously embracing her consort, in supreme bliss. I bow down to Mamaki, the supreme consort, The mother of the Ratna Family, natural purity of water, Minium [orange], holding a jewel and a bell, Joyously embracing her consort, in supreme bliss. I bow down to PaQc)aravasini, the supreme consort, The mother of the Padma Family, n3tural purity of fire, fire-crystal [red], holding a lotus and a bell, Joyously embracing her consort, in supreme bliss. I bow down to Samayatara, the supreme consort, The mother of the Karm3 Family, natural purity of wind, Sapphire [green], holding a crossed-vajra and a bell, Joyously embracing her consort, in supreme bliss. I bow down to K~itigarbha, male bodhisattva who acts for the benefit of beings, The natural purity of visual consciousness, transcendent of renunciation, Snow-mountain [white], holding a seedling and a bell. I bow down to Maitreya, male bodhisattva who acts for the benefit of beings, The natural purity of auditory consciousness, transcendent of renunciation, Cloud-white, holding a blossoming orange bush and a bell.

HUNDRED F 0 L D II 0 .\I AGE

99

I bow down to Samantabhadra, male bodhisattva who acts for the benefit of beings, The natural purity of olfactory consciousness, transcendent of renunciation, Amber [yellow], holding a grain-sheath and a bell. I bow down to Akasagarbha, male bodhisattva who acts for the benefit of beings, The natural purity of gustatory consciousness, transcendent of renunciation, Burnished golden [yellow], holding a sword and a bell. I bow down to Avalokitesvara, male bodhisattva who acts for the benefit of beings, The natural purity of tactile consciousness, transcendent of renunciation, Coral [redJ, holding a lotus and a· bell. I bow down to ~1anjusrikumarabhuta, male bodhisattva who acts for the benefit of beings, The natural purity of mental consciousness, transcendent of renunciation, Minium [orange], holding a lily and a bell. I bow down to Nivara1pviskambhin, male bodhisattva who acts for the benefit of beings, The natural purity of the 'ground-of-all' consciousness, transcendent of renunciation, [Green] as the night-flowering lotus, holding a book and a bell. I bow down to Vajrapal)i, male bodhisattva who acts for the benefit of beings, The natural purity of 'defiled' consciousness, transcendent of renunciation, Emerald [greenJ, holding a vajra and a bell. I bow down to white Lasya, [female bodhisattva] whose offerings fdelight 1 The eyes of [alii Those Gone to Bliss, past, present and future,

IOO

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

The natural purity of visual phenomena, transcendent of renunciation, Quartz [white], holding a mirror and a bell.
I bow down to white Pu~pa, [female bodhisattva] whose offerings delight [The minds of all] Those Gone to Bliss, past, present and future, The natural purity of past conceptual thoughts, transcendent of renunciation, Pearl [white], holding a white lotus and a bell.

I bow down to yellow Malya, [female bodhisattva] whose gestures delight [The minds of all] Those Gone to Bliss, past, present and future, The natural purity of indeterminate conceptual thoughts, transcendent of renunciation, Saffron [yellow], holding a garland and a bell. I bow down to yellow Dhopa, [female bodhisattva] whose offerings [delight] The noses of [all] Those Gone to Bliss, past, present and future, The natural purity of fragrance, transcendent of renunciation, Golden [yellow] in colour, holding sweet-smelling incense and a censer. I bow down to red Gita, [female bodhisattva] whose offerings [delight] The ears of [all] Those Gone to Bliss, past, present and future, The natural purity of sound, transcendent of renunciation, Marsh mallow [pink], and playing a lute. I bow down to red Aloka, [female bodhisattva] whose offerings [delight] The eyes of [all] Those Gone to Bliss, past, present and future, The natural purity of future conceptual thoughts, transcendent of renunciation, Lotus [pink], and holding a glowing butter lamp.

H lJ N D R F. D F 0 L D II 0 .\1 A G E

101

I bow down to green Gandha, [female bodhisattva] whose offerings [delight J The bodies of (all] Those Gone to Bliss, past, present and future, The natural purity of present conceptual thoughts, transcendent of renunciation, Poppy [green], holding a perfume-filled conch. I bow down to green Narti, [female bodhisattva] whose offerings [delight] The tongues of [all] Those Gone to Bliss, past, present and future, The natural purity of taste, transcendent of renunciation, Marine [green!, holding a [deliciously] nutritious food-offering. I bow down to [Trailokya-jVijaya, [male gatekeeper] whose wrathful presence Guards against obstacles at the eastern gate, The natural purity of eternalist views, transcendent of renunciation, White, holding a cudgel and a bell. I bow down to Yamantaka, [male gatekeeper] whose wrathful presence Guards against obstacles at the southern gate, The natural purity of nihilistic views, transcendent of renunciation, Yellow, holding a skull-club and a bell. I bow down to Hayagrivaraja, [male gatekeeper] whose wrathful presence Guards against obstacles at the western gate, The natural purity of egotistical views, transcendent of renunciation, Red, holding an iron chain and a bell. I bow down to Amrtakury9alin, [male gatekeeper] whose wrathful presence Guards against obstacles at the northern gate,

102

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

The natural purity of substantialist views/ transcendent of renunciation, Green, holding a crossed-vajra and a bell. I bow down to Vajrankusa, [female gatekeeper] whose immeasurable compassion Guides the six classes [of beings] away from [their mundane] realms, White, holding an iron hook that attracts, She embraces her wrathful consort in blissful union. I bow down to Vajrapasa, [female gatekeeper] whose immeasurable loving kindness Acts [ceaselessly] on behalf of beings, Yellow, holding a noose that lassoes, She embraces her wrathful consort in blissful union. I bow down to Vajrasphota, [female gatekeeper] whose immeasurable sympathetic joy Embraces [each and every] living being, Red, holding an iron chain that binds, She embraces her wrathful consort in blissful union. I bow down to Vajraghar;tta, [female gatekeeper] whose immeasurable equanimity Transcends discrimination between living beings, Green, holding a bell that summons, She embraces her wrathful consort in blissful union. I bow down to Indrasakra, [sageJ whose emanational buddha form Acts [ceaselessly] on behalf of beings, The natural purity of pride, and guide of the god realms, White and holding a lute. I bow down to Vemacitra, [sage] whose emanational buddlYa form Acts [ceaselessly] on behalf of beings, The natural purity of envy, and guide of the antigod realms, Green, holding armour and a weapon.

HU~DREDfOLD

HOMAGE

103

I bow down to Sakyamuni, [sage] whose emanational buddha form Acts Iceaselessly] on behalf of beings, The natural purity of attachment, and guide of the human realms, Yellow, holding a begging bowl and staff. I bow down to Sthirasirpha, [sage] whose emanational buddha form Acts [ceaselessly] on behalf of beings, The natural purity of delusion, and guide of the animal realms, Blue, and holding a book. I bow down to the transcendent Jvalamukha, [sagel whose emanational buddha form Acts lceasclessly] on behalf of beings, The natural purity of miserliness, and guide of the anguishedspirit realms, Red, and holding a bejewelled casket. I bow down to Dharmaraja, [sage] whose emanational buddha form Acts [ceaselessly] on behalf of beings, The natural purity of aversion, and guide of the hell realms, Black, and holding a warming flame and cooling water. I bow down to ~1ahottara Heruka, who has three faces, Dark brown, white and red; and six arms: A vajra, kharvanga, and small drum in his right hands, And a bell, blood-filled skull, and noose of entrails in his left. I bow down to Buddha Heruka, who has three faces, Dark brown, white and red; and six arms: A wheel, axe, and sword in his right hands, And a bell, ploughshare, and blood-filled skull in his left. I bow down to Vajra Heruka, who has three faces, Dark blue, white and red; and six arms: A vajra, blood-filled skull, and axe in his right hands, And a bell, blood-filled skull, and ploughshare in his left.

104

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

I bow down to Ratna Heruka, who has three faces, Dark yellow, white and red; and six arms: A jewel, kharvanga, and mace in his right hands, And a bell, blood-filled skull, and trident in his left. I bow down to Padma Heruka, who has three faces, Dark red, white and blue; and six arms: A lotus, kharvanga, and cudgel in his right hands, And a bell, blood-filled skull, and small drum in his left. I bow down to Karma Heruka, who has three faces, Dark green, white and red; and six arms: A sword, kharvanga, and cudgel in his right hands, And a bell, blood-filled skull, and ploughshare in his left. I bow down to Krodhesvari, wrathful Queen of rReality's] Expanse, Dark blue, holding a vajra, Offering a blood-filled skull to her consort's mouth, She joyously embraces him, in supreme bliss. I bow down to Buddhakrodhesvari, the Buddha Queen of [Reality's] Expanse, Red-brown, holding a wheel, Offering a blood-filled skull to her consort's mouth, She joyously embraces him, in supreme bliss. I bow down to Vajrakrodhesvari, Vajra Queen of [Reality's] Expanse, Pale blue, holding a vajra, Offering a blood-filled skull to her consort's mouth, She joyously embraces him, in supreme bliss. I bow down to Ratnakrodhesvari, Ratna Queen of [Reality's] Expanse, Pale yellow, holding a jewel, Offering a blood-filled skull to her consort's mouth, She joyously embraces him, in supreme bliss.

HU!>;OKEDI'OLD HOMAGE

105

I bow down to Padmakrodhesvari, Padma Queen of [Reality's] Expanse, Pale red, holding a lotus, Offering a blood-filled skull to her consort's mouth, She joyously embraces him, in supreme bliss. I bow down to Karmakrodhesvari, Karma Queen of [Reality's] Expanse, Pale green, holding a crossed-vajra, Offering a blood-filled skull to her consort's mouth, She joyously embraces him, in supreme bliss. I bow down to Gaur! of the eastern direction, Acting on behalf of living beings as one of the .Nlatarary, \Vrathful, white, and aloof on her throne of human corpses, Brandishing a human corpse as a cudgel To destroy the conceptual landscape of cyclic existence. I bow down to Cauri of the southern direction, Acting on behalf of living beings as one of the ~1atarary, Wrathful, yellow, and aloof on her throne of human corpses, Shooting an arrow from a bow To bind indivisibly skilful means and discriminative awareness. I bow down to Pramoha of the western direction, Acting on behalf of living beings as one of the Matarary, Wrathful, red, and aloof on her throne of human corpses, Holding a crocodile victory-banner To resist [the seductions of] cyclic existence. I bow down to Vetali of the northern direction, Acting on behalf of living beings as one of the -'1atarary, Wrathful, black, 8 and aloof on her throne of human corpses, Holding a vajra and a blood-filled skull [To sustain recognition of] the unchanging reality. I bow down to Pukkasi of the south-eastern direction, Acting on behalf of living beings as one of the Matarary,

106

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

Wrathful, red-yellow, and aloof on her throne of human corpses, [Clutching and] devouring entrails To draw [sentient beings] free from the dissonant realms. I bow down to Ghasmari of the south-western direction, Acting on behalf of living beings as one of the Mataral), Wrathful, green-black, and aloof on her throne of human corpses, Drinking blood from a skull To consume [the turning circle of] cyclic existence. I bow down to Cary<;lali of the north-western direction, Acting on behalf of living beings as one of the Mataral), Wrathful, pale yellow, and aloof on her throne of human corpses, Tearing apart the head and body of a bloated corpse To sever erroneous thoughts [at their roots]. I bow down to Smasani of the north-eastern direction, Acting on behalf of living beings as one of the Mataral), Wrathful, blue-black, and aloof on her throne of human corpses, Tearing apart [the head from] a human corpse To sever the buttresses of cyclic existence. I bow down to brown-black, lion-headed Sirphamukhi, Acting on behalf of living beings in the form of a Pisaci, Carrying a corpse in her mouth, and shaking her mane To stir cyclic existence to its depths. I bow down to red, tiger-headed Vyaghrimukhi, Acting on behalf of living beings in the form of a Pisaci, With her two arms crossed, and staring with bulging eyes To overwhelm attachment to cyclic existence. I bow down to black, fox-headed Srgalamukhi, Actin~ on behalf of living beings in the form of a Pisaci, Brandishing a razor, and devouring lungs and a heart To purify dissonant mental states in their basic nature.

II U I' lJ RED F 0 I. D II 0

~1

A<..; E

107

I bow down to blue-black, wolf-headed Svanamukhi, Acting on behalf of living beings in the form of a Pisaci, Tearing apart a corpse, and staring with bulging eyes To stir the pit of cyclic existence. I bow down to white-yellow, vulture-headed Grdhramukhi, Acting on behalf of living beings in the form of a Pisaci, Clawing a bloated corpse, and extracting the entrails To sever the three poisons from their roots. I bow down to red-black, kite-headed Kankamukhi, Acting on behalf of living beings in the form of a Pisaci, Carrying a bloated corpse, draped over her shoulder To extract l beings I from the pit of cyclic existence. I bow down to black, crow-headed Kakamukhi, Acting on behalf of living beings in the form of a Pisaci, Brandishing a sword, and drinking blood from a skull To consume and liberate dissonant mental states. I bow down to blue-black, owl-headed Ulukamukhi, Acting on behalf of living beings in the form of a Pisaci, Holding an iron hook, 9 and carrying a blood-filled skull To draw [beings] free from the false mentality of cyclic existence. I bow down to horse-headed AI'1kusa at the eastern gate, Acting on behalf of living beings in the form of a female gatekeeper, Horse-headed, white, and holding an iron hook, The force of her immeasurable compassion Guiding [those trapped in] cyclic existence away from the lower realms. I bow down to sow-headed Pasa at the southern gate, Acting on behalf of living beings in the form of a female gatekeeper, Sow-headed, yellow, and holding a noose, The force of her immeasurable loving kindness Constricting the false mentality [of beings J.

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

I bow down to lion-headed Sphota at the western gate, Acting on behalf of living beings in the form of a female gatekeeper, Lion-headed, red, and holding an iron chain, The force of her immeasurable sympathetic joy Shackling the dissonant mental states generated by ignorance. 10 I bow down to snake-headed Garnha at the northern gate, Acting on behalf of living beings in the form of a female gatekeeper, Snake-headed, green, and holding a bell, The force of her immeasurable equanimity Subduing the cognitive resonances of the five poisons. 11 I bow down to the Projectress who Casts a Noose, 12 Manifestation of the natural purity of reality, Clothed in flayed hides, she unites the three levels of existence With the [pure buddha] fields, however these may manifest, And casts her noose of solar rays, Projecting l beings of] the trichiliocosm into higher rebirths. I bow down to the Projectress who Casts a Pike, u [Holding] a blood-filled skull, and casting a pike, She purifies the five dissonant mental states To dispel permanently the diseases of conceptual thought, The force of her compassion, rich in skilful means, Projecting human beings into higher rebirths. I bow down to the Projectress who Rings a Bell, 14 Holding to her heart a blood-filled skull, She subjugates the entire trichiliocosm To secure ignorant sentient beings in [reality's] expanse, The resonance of her charisma Projecting [beings of! the chiliocosm into higher rebirths. I bow down to the Projectress who Carries a Garu9a, 15 Her body an exquisite white-yellow, [Signifying] her proficiency in the rites of pacification and enrichment.

II UN DR En F 0 I. 0

H 0

~~AGE

109

Holding to her heart a blood-filled skull To overpower the five sensory desires, She carries a vajra and a large garuga, Projecting the gods into higher rebirths. I bow down to the Projectress who Casts a Shooting Star, 16 Her awesome body an exquisite blue-black, [Holding] a vajra and casting a shooting star To avert the intensity of •The Great Battle', 17 She drinks blood from a skull, Projecting the antigods into higher rebirths. I bow down to the Projectress who Holds a Thunderbolt-garland, 18 Her body part red and part black, [Signifying proficiency in the rites of] subjugation and wrath, Her facial expression fixed in domination. To purify and ease outer and inner obscurations, [She wields! a vajra and thunderbolt-garland, Projecting anguished spirits into higher rebirths. I bow down to the Projectress who Wields an Eagle-feathered Banner, 19 Her body part white and part black, [Signifying! her proficiency in the rites of pacification and wrath, Drinking blood from a skull To dissolve delusion [into emptiness], [She holds] a vajra and wields an eagle-feathered banner, Projecting animals into higher rebirths. I bow down to the Projectress who Holds a Sword/ 0 Her body part yellow and part black, [Signifying] her proficiency in the rites of enrichment and wrath, Drinking blood from a skull To dissolve the hells into emptiness, [She holds] a vajra and a sword, Projecting the hell-beings into higher rebirths.

110

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

I bow down to yak-headed Manurak~asi, The brownish white yogin!, holding a vajra and skull. I bow down to snake-headed Brahmai)I, The yellowish white yogini, holding a vajra and lotus. I bow down to leopard-headed Raudri, The greenish white yogini, holding a vajra and trident. I bow down to weasel-headed Vai~l)<lVI, The bluish white yogini, holding a vajra and wheel. I bow down to brown bear-headed Kaumari, The reddish white yogini, holding a vajra and pike. I bow down to black bear-headed Indrai)I, The white yogini, holding a vajra and noose of entrails. I bow down to bat-headed Vajra, 21 The yellow yogini, holding a jewel and razor. I bow down to crocodile-headed Santi, The reddish yellow yogini, holding a jewel and vase. I bow down to scorpion-headed Amrta, The reddish yellow yogini, holding a jewel and lotus. I bow down to hawk-headed Saumi, The whitish yellow yogini, holding a jewel and vajra. I bow down to fox-headed Dai)<)I, The greenish yellow yogini, holding a jewel and cudgel. I bow down to tiger-headed Rak~asi, The blackish yellow yogini, holding a jewel and blood-filled skull. I bow down to vulture-headed Bhak~asi, The greenish red yogini, holding a lotus and club.

HUNDRI:.DI'OLD

IIO~IAGE

Ill

I bow down to horse-headed Ran, The red yogini, holding a lotus and human torso. I bow down to garu<)a-headed Rudhiramadi, The pale red yogini, holding a lotus and cudgel. I bow down to dog-headed Ekacarii)I, The red yogini, holding a lotus and vajra.

I bow down to hoopoe-headed Manoharika, The red yogini, holding a lotus and a bow and arrow.
I bow down to deer-headed Siddhikari, The greenish red yogini, holding a lotus and vase.

I bow down to wolf-headed Vayudevi, The bluish green yogini, holding a crossed-vajra and ensign.
I bow down to ibex-headed Agnayi, The reddish green yogini, holding a crossed-vajra and firebrand.

I bow down to sow-headed Varahi, The blackish green yogini, holding a crossed-vajra and a noose of fangs.
I bow down to crow-headed Camui)<)i, The reddish green yogini, holding a crossed-vajra and an infant corpse.

I bow down to elephant-headed Bhujana, The blackish green yogini, holding a crossed-vajra and a bloated corpse. I bow down to snake-headed VarUI);lni, The [bluish] green 22 yogini, holding a crossed-vajra and a noose of snakes. I bow down to cuckoo-headed Vajra [Mahakali], The white gatekeeper, holding a vajra and iron hook.

112

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

I bow down to goat-headed Vajra [~1ahachagala], The yellow gatekeeper, holding a jewel and a noose. I bow down to lion-headed Vajra [Mahakumbhakan)I], The red gatekeeper, holding a lotus and an iron chain. I bow down to snake-headed Vajra [Lambodara], The blackish green gatekeeper, holding a crossed-vajra and a bell. While reciting this prayer, all the male and female yogins present should remove their outer garments and, as they make [successive] full-length prostrations, they should respectfully pay homage [to the deities]. While respectfully narrating this eulogy in a melodious voice and enacting the hundredfold homage, one should mentally admit and feel remorse for all one's negativities and obscurations, which have been, are being and will be accumulated. This Natural Liberation of Negativity and Obscuration is an extraordinary [method for] purifying obscurations, by enacting in full the one hundred and ten homages13 to the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities. Whatever other [confessional] practices one may [generally] undertake, such as the Reparation and Confession of the Hells/ 4 the merits accrued by one who practises in this manner are immeasurable. Therefore, one should persevere diligently with the enactment of this Hundredfold Homage. May [the influence of this] Natural Liberation of Negativity and Obscuration through [Enactment of] the Hundredfold Homage to the Hundred Sacred Enlightened Families of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities not be exhausted until cyclic existence has been emptied. This most profound teaching is an ancillary chapter of the Liberation by Hearing in the Intermediate States, a supporting text to the Reparation and Confession of the Hells, and a synopsis of the three editions [long, medium and short] of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: The Ritual Purification {entitled Natural Liberation of Feelings/. It should be propagated everywhere and enq,cted energetically at all times without interruption.

7
Natural Liberation through Acts of Confession

CONTEXT

In addition to the experiential cultivation of the nature of the deity, as outlined in the previous two chapters, the act of confession plays an important role in purifying the negativity and obscuration that has, according to the Buddhist perspective, clouded our minds over a beginningless cycle of lifetimes. In Buddhist practice this process of purification, which includes the reparation of commitments and vows, is enhanced by the engagement of the 'four antidotal powers'. In the context of this cycle of teachings the four powers are: 1. The power of reliance, which here refers to the visualisation of the hundred Peaceful and Wrathful Deities. 2. The power of the actual antidote, which here refers to the recitation of the Natural Liberation through Acts of Confession, together with the practice of the Hundred-syllable Mantra ofVajrasattva. 3· The power of remorse, which is the genuinely remorseful recollection of all negative acts previously committed. 4· The power of resolve, which is the pledge never to engage wilfully in such negative actions again. Before beginning the confessional practice, it is recommended that the practitioner should make actual or mentally emanated offerings before his or her altar. Then, each afternoon, while sitting on the floor in front of the altar, the practitioner should engage in this practice, with the palms of the hands placed together, chanting the words lucidly and with conviction. For as long as practitioners have not gained full accomplishment in the practices of this cycle of teachings, inappropriate negative actions of body, speech and mind should be continuously confessed.

Herein is contained the Natural Liberation through Acts of Confession, in the Presence of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities, 1 an extract from the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, [entitled] Natural Liberation through [Recognition ofl Enlightened Intention. 2 I respectfully bow down to Samantabhadra, Mahottara, And the assembly of Peaceful and Wrathful Deities! May the degenerations [of our commitments] be purified! In order that the degenerations [of our commitments] may be naturally purified, without being renounced, the [following] Natural Liberation through Acts of Confession, in the Presence of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities, which is an extract from the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: Natural Liberation through [Recognition ofl Enlightened Intention, is [now] presented. Be persevering in this regard, 0 Children of Posterity! SAMAYA! This [confessional practice] is presented in six parts, namely: confession [in the presence] of the inexpressible truth, confession in the presence of the Peaceful Deities, confession in the presence of the Wrathful Deities, the plaintive confession of rampant egohood, confession in the presence of the view, and confession fin the presence] of all Those Gone to Bliss.

ACTS OF COl"'FESSION

117

PRELLv1IN ARIES
The invitation and request for [the confessional field] to be present
o~ 0, supreme buddha-body of pristine cognition, Even though, like the [clarity of the] waxing moon, You are free from conceptual elaboration in this natural mar:t<;lala, Your compassion [radiates to all] without bias, like the rays of the sun. Please be present here, and attend to us!

The homage to the three buddha-bodies, which compose the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities
I bow down to the three buddha-bodies of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: To the Buddha-body of Reality, the inexpressible and unwavering discriminative awareness, To the supremely blissful Buddha-body of Perfect Resource, the lords of the five enlightened families, And to the Buddha-body of Emanation: extensive, compassionate and skilful.

The threefold offering of [outer} phenomena, [inner} cloud-masses, and secret [substances]
By arraying the vast and pure expanse of space, With [billowing] clouds of unsurpassed Samantabhadra-like offerings, Whether they be actually gathered together or imagined, We dedicate [to you] oceans of outer, inner and secret >fferings. 3

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

The secret offering of supreme bliss
May [the deities] be delighted by the non-dual 'generative essence' 4 Whose [blissful] single savour indicates a [pristine] state, Where all the infinite mal)<;ialas of the conquerors, without exception, Are established, beyond conjunction or disjunction, In the secret womb of Samantabhadri.

The affirmation of vows within the modality of the view
Since the nature of mind is the great expanse of reality, And all things are pure atemporal inner radiance, This yoga is itself the inexpressible and inconceivable expanse. Everlastingly we bow down to the mind of enlightenment, Which is [the realisation of] sameness!

The call to the assembly of Peaceful and Wrathful Deities for attention
Al;l In the atemporal omnipresence of the Great Perfection, which is Samantabhadra, Is [displayed] the mal)<;iala of the outer, inner, and secret arrays. Here, the expanse of male and female deities is the [natural] purity of mundane existence, And the spontaneously perfect male and female consorts are the [natural purity] of past and future [events]. All of these are centred in the 'lotus of vast space', which is that of [Samantabhadri], She who embodies the most secret and most joyous of supreme forms. Within this [space, the mal)<;iala] radiates as a supreme non-dual seminal point, And within this secret mal)<;iala, where there is no conjuncf{on or disjunction, Is [arrayed] the buddha-body of the uncontrived nucleus of enlightenment, free from conceptual elaboration,

ACTS OF COl\FESSION

119

Where the immutable deities of supreme bliss manifest in myriad forms. 0, you manifold assembly of [peaceful] emanations, present within the indivisible expanse, Including the male and female [buddhas] of the five enlightened families, who are the Great Embodiment, The [sixteen] male and female bodhisattvas, and the six sages who instruct living beings, Along with the eight emanational gatekeepers, male and female; 0, you manifold [wrathful] assembly of the emanational deities of pristine cognition, [Including] the ten male and female wrathful conquerors, Great and glorious [principals] of the five enlightened families, Who preside over the indestructible matrix of female [wrathful] deities, The [sixteen active] seals [who represent the natural transformation] Of the classes of consciousness and their objects, And the four gatekeepers; 0, you twenty-eight outer and inner 9akinis and yoginis, Who, with motherly loving kindness and sisterly affection, Evaluate our good and bad [conduct], And inspect our commitments; And you oath-bound [protectors] of indestructible reality, who have been subjugatedPlease, [all of you], attend to us!

CONFESSION [IN THE PRESENCE] OF THE INEXPRESSIBLE TRUTH
~ompassionate

We [aspiring] awareness holders, who are heirs to the lineage, Strive to cultivate the mind of enlightenment for the sake of all living beings. In order that the unsurpassed state may be attained, We have repeatedly received and earnestly undertaken [Both] the individual disciplines of the ocean-like teachings/

HO~l

120

TilE TIBETAN BOOK Ol' THF !HAD

And the supreme vows concordant with buddha-body, speech and mind, including: The fappropriateJ commitments of [the Vehicle of] Indestructible Reality, Which are dangerous to transgress, and must be constantly maintained, Together with all the general and particular higher commitments. Yet, even though we strive neither to abandon nor to transgress !these commitments], And we strive neither to deviate from the truth nor to allow our minds to fluctuate, Since we idly think that we have the momentary luxury to sit back in relaxation, We have not reached fulfilment and our mental energy has been faltering. We have lacked alertness, and have been overpowered by carelessness. If, therefore, under the sway of ignorance, consciously or unconsciously, Our meditation has lacked perseverance, And we have been distracted in our ritual service and means for attainment, We will have contradicted the injunctions of the Teacher and contradicted our vows. Further, it says in the [Buddha's] scriptures: 'A yogin should not associate, even for a moment, with one whose commitments have degenerated.' Not being [continuously! cognisant of this, we have transgressed the secret approach lof the tantras], And [consistently] we have had difficulty discriminating [between worthy and unworthy associates]. Lacking supernormal prescience, we have failed to recognise those that are unworthy. Thus, now, with heartfelt remorse, we confess all our individual faults, Which have already become the misfortunes of this life and will become the obscurations of future lives. Whatever faults of degeneration and obscuration have tainted us,

ACTS Of

CONFE~~ION

121

Whether they be our own actual degenerations or those acquired through association with others by: ~lixing in assemblies with those whose [commitments] have degenerated, Repairing [the commitments of] those who have degenerated, Giving the [sacred] teachings to those who arc degenerate and unworthy, Or by committing the degenerate fault of not avoiding [the influence otl those who have degenerated, and so forth. Do not permit the retribution of the sublime [protectors] to fall upon us! Attend to us with the compassion of your loving kindness! And make us secure, so that we never stray from the non-dual expanse. Having inspired us to abide within the modality of non-referential equanimity, Please grant us the purity of the non-dual truth! In ultimate truth, inexpressible and without conceptual cla bora tion, There is no objective referent to any conceptual thought whatsoever. But if, by the power of illusion-like relative appearances, we should err, [We acknowledge this and seek your forgiveness.] We confess that we have deviated from the buddha-mind! If we have committed transgressions, please forgive our deviations. Throughout beginningless time and throughout the limits of cyclic existence, We have roamed within these turning worlds driven on by the forces of [ripening] past actions[Endlessly] drinking the poisons of dissonant states and false perspectives on reality. May The One Gone to Bliss, king among compassionate physicians, Grant the medicine of liberation, the nectar of the genuine teachings,

122

THE TIBETAl' BOOK OF THE DEAD

To those [of us) who are severely afflicted by the [primal) disease, which is suffering! May all the diseases caused by bewildering dissonant states be pacified! May we be sustained in the nucleus of unsurpassed enlightenment! We take refuge in you, 0 compassionate lord of loving kindness! We confess that we have contradicted the buddha-mind!

If we have boasted of our high view and yet not understood the meaning of actual reality, If we have not clearly visualised the meditational deity, owing to our meditations being excessively brief, Or if we have made an inadequate number of recitations or spoken these defectively, However we have deviated from the buddha-mind of the oceans of conquerors, We confess our transgressions in the presence of the Peaceful and Wrathful Conquerors. We make confession to you, 0 Compassionate Ones! We make confession in the presence of the entire assembly of the deities of pristine cognition! If we have failed to please our spiritual teacher, on account of the feebleness of our effort, If we have failed to be well regarded by our spiritual brothers and sisters, on account of the feebleness of our devotion, If we have divulged the oral teachings to another, on account of our flirtatious intentions, Indeed, whatever extravagances, omissions, deviations or mistakes we have made, With respect to the fundamental commitments of buddhabody, speech and mind, Whilst swayed by the influence of ignorance, either consciously or unconsciously, We confess all such transgressions in the presence of the Peaceful and Wrathful Conquerors. We make confession to you, 0 Compassionate Ones!

ACTS OF

CONFES~.ION

1.2.3

We make confession to the oceanic assembly of the conquerors! May all [the degenerations] that we now confess be cleansed and purified! Please grant us the purity of the non-dual truth!
SAMAYA!

CONFESSION IN THE PRESENCE OF THE PEACEFUL DEITIES, THE EMBODIMENT OF [THE QUIESCENT NATURE OF] REALITY
The initial confession is that to Samantabhadra and Samantabhadri, the father and mother consorts
HO~

We pray to you, father and mother, listen and attend to

us! and phenomena arc atemporally manifest buddhas, But even though this [reality] is the expression of your enlightened intention, 0 Samantabhadra and Samantabhadri, father and mother, in umon, Due to our ignorance, we have not understood this to be so. For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind Of you, Samantabhadra and Samantabhadri, father and mother, We seck your forgiveness, 0 greatly compassionate ones!
~lind

Second is the confession to the five male buddhas of the enlightened families of the conquerors
We pray to you, the five [male buddhas] of the enlightened iamilics of the conquerors, listen and attend to us! The five psycho-physical aggregates are atemporally manifest budd has, But even though this [reality] is the expression of your enlightened intention, 0 five [male buddhas] of the enlightened families of the conquerors,

I

24

TilE TIBETAN BOOK Of TilE UEAU

Due to our ignorance, we have not understood this to be so. For whatever ways we have contradined the buddha-mind Of the five !male buddhas of thel enlightened families of the conquerors, We seek your forgiveness, 0 greatly compassionate ones!

Third is the confession to the fiue female buddhas of the enlightened fanzilies
We pray to you, the five female buddhas of the enlightened families, listen and attend to us! The five elements are atemporally manifest buddhas, But even though this [reality] is the expression of your enlightened intention, 0, five female buddhas of the enlightened families, Due to our ignorance, we have not understood this to be so. For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind Of the five female buddhas of the enlightened families, We seek your forgiveness, 0 greatly compassionate ones!

Fourth is the confession to the eight male bodhisattuas of the retinue
We pray to you, the eight male bodhisattvas, listen and attend us! The eight classes of consciousness are atemporally manifest budd has, But even though this Ireality] is the expression of your enlightened intention, 0, eight male bodhisattvas, due to our ignorance, we have not understood this to be so. For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of the eight male bodhisattvas, We seek your forgiveness, 0 greatly compassionate ones!
to

Fifth is the confession to the eight female bodhisattuas
We pray to you, the eight female bodhisattvas, listen and attend to us! The eight objects of consciousness are atemporally manifest budd has,

ACTS OF CONFESSION

125

But even though this [reality j is the expression of your enlightened intention, 0, eight female bodhisattvas, due to our ignorance, we have not understood this to be so. For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of the eight female bodhisattvas, We seck your forgiveness, 0 greatly compassionate ones!

Sixth is the confession to the six sages
We pray to you, the six sages, listen and attend to us! The six dissonant mental states are atemporally manifest buddhas, But even though this [reality] is the expression of your enlightened intention, 0, six sages, due to our ignorance, we have not understood this to be so. For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of the six sages, We seek your forgiveness, 0 greatly compassionate ones!

Seventh is the confession to the four male gatekeepers
We pray to you, the four male gatekeepers, listen and attend to us! The four immeasurable [aspirations] are atemporally manifest budd has, But even though this Ireality] is the expression of your enlightened intention, 0, four male gatekeepers, due to our ignorance, we have not understood this to be so. For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of t:le four male gatekeepers, We seek your forgiveness, 0 greatly compassionate ones!

Eighth is the confession to the four female gatekeepers
We pray to you, the four female gatekeepers, listen and attend to us! The four extremes of eternalism and nihilism are atemporally manifest buddhas,

126

THF TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

But even though this [reality] is the expression of your enlightened intention, 0, four female gatekeepers, due to our ignorance, we have not understood this to be so. For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of the four female gatekeepers, We seek your forgiveness, 0 greatly compassionate ones!

Then the confession should be made to the fentire array of the] peaceful deities in the following way:
O¥ Since our minds are not endowed with pristine cognition, which is intrinsic awareness, We have not correctly integrated the psycho-physical aggregates, the sensory spectra, and their activity fields, Within the mary9ala of the peaceful deities. We seek the forgiveness of each of you, the forty-two peaceful deities! Since our minds are not endowed with pristine cognition, which is intrinsic awareness, We have not correctly integrated the five psycho-physical aggregates with the five [male buddhas] of the enlightened families, And further still, our own minds, swayed by ignorance, have continued to be afflicted by egotism. We seek the forgiveness of you, the assembly of Sa manta bhadra! Since our minds are not endowed with pristine cognition, which is intrinsic awareness, We have not correctly integrated the five elements with the five female buddhas, And further still, our own minds, swayed by ignorance, have continued to be afflicted by egotism. We seek the forgiveness of you, the assembly of Samantabhadri! Since our minds are not endowed with pristine cognition, which is intrinsic awareness, We have not correctly integrated the four classes of

ACT~

OF

CO;\iFl:~Sl0:-.1

127

consciousness and four sense organs with the [eight] male bodh is a ttvas, And further still, our own minds, swayed by ignorance, have continued to be afflicted by egotism. We seck the forgiveness of you, the assembly of male bodhisattvas! Since our minds are not endowed with pristine cognition, which is intrinsic awareness, We have not correctly integrated the four objects of consciousness and four times with the [eightl female bodhisattvas, And further still, our own minds, swayed by ignorance, have continued to be afflicted by egotism. We seck the forgiveness of you, the assembly of female bodhisa ttvas! Since our minds are not endowed with pristine cognition, which is intrinsic awareness, We have not correctly integrated the six dissonant mental states with the [sixl sages, And further still, our own minds, swayed by ignorance, have continued to be afflicted by egotism. We seek the forgiveness of you, the emanational buddhabodies, the six sages! Since our minds arc not endowed with pristine cognition, which is intrinsic awareness, We have not correctly integrated the four immeasurable (aspirations] with the [four] male gatekeepers, And further still, our own minds, swayed by ignorance, have continued to be afflicted by egotism. We seek the forgiveness of you, the wrathful male gatekeepers! Since our minds are not endowed with pristine cognition, which is intrinsic awareness, We have not correctly integrated the eternalist and nihilist [perspectives on] awareness with the [four] female gatekeepers, And further still, our own minds, swayed by ignorance, have continued to be afflicted by egotism. We seck the forgiveness of you, the wrathful female gatekeepers!

!28

THE TIBETAN BOOK Or THE DEAD

Since our minds are not endowed with pristine cognition, which is intrinsic awareness, We have not correctly integrated mind and phenomena with Samantabhadra and Samantabhadri, the father and mother, And further still, our own minds, swayed by ignorance, have continued to be afflicted by egotism. We seek the forgiveness of you, Samantabhadra and Sa manta bhadri! Since our minds are not endowed with pristine cognition, which is intrinsic awareness, We have been afflicted by bewildering ignorance, And have been alienated from the meditational deities By the force of dissonant mental states and past [negative] actions. Swayed by self-deception, we have disappointed our teachers, Stirred by strong pride, we have agitated our spiritual brothers and sisters, Distracted by vanity, 6 we have divulged the secret mantras, Gripped by miserliness, we have been untimely in the dedication of offerings, Entrapped by base friendships, we have violated the secret [precepts 1of the rituals, Weakened by feeble yogic discipline, we have failed to eradicate obstructing forces. Thus, [our commitments) have degenerated due to either excessive or deficient determination and strength. Throughout our lives, from beginningless time until the present [life], In which we have assumed this body, However much negativity and non-virtuous past actions we have accrued, We seek your forgiveness for all these transgressions. 0 you whose cognisance and knowledge spans [the three 1 times, Since you are sublime beings, embrace us! Since we are sentient beings, we are flawed and bewildered,

ACTS OF CONFESSION

129

And, since [this separation] is an illusion, may our confession be granted! Since you are accomplished in skilful means, bestow your purity upon us!

Then a renzorseful confession should be made to the peaceful deities as follows:
0¥ Most precious Samantabhadra lin union], supreme buddha-mind, Even though you are our father and hold mastery over the three world-systems, And even though you are our mother and assimilate [all things] in the ultimate expanse, By conceiving of our bodies fin a mundane wayJ, we have dishonoured the illusory body. Thus our commitments have degenerated and we have grown truly remorseful. We seek your forgiveness, 0 Samantabhadra and Samantabhadri, mother and father!
Most precious buddhas of the five enlightened families, [manifestations of] supreme buddha-mind, Even though you are our fathers and hold mastery over the three world-systems, And even though you are our mothers and assimilate [all things] in the ultimate expanse, By conceiving of our bodies [in a mundane way], we have dishonoured the illusory body. Thus our commitments have degenerated and we have grown truly remorseful. We seek your forgiveness, 0 father and mother buddhas of the five enlightened families! Most precious male and female bodhisattvas, [manifestations ofJ supreme buddha-mind, Even though you are our fathers and hold mastery over the three world-systems, And even though you are our mothers and assimilate [all things] in the ultimate expanse,

130

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

By conceiving of our bodies [in a mundane way], we have dishonoured the illusory body. Thus our commitments have degenerated and we have grown truly remorseful. We seek your forgiveness, 0 male and female bodhisattvas! Most precious six sages, buddha-bodies of emanation, [and manifestations of] supreme buddha-mind, Even though you hold mastery over all the sentient beings throughout the three world-systems, And even though you emancipate their respective worlds into the ultimate expanse, By conceiving of our bodies [in a mundane way], we have dishonoured the illusory body. Thus our commitments have degenerated and we have grown truly remorseful. We seek your forgiveness, 0 six sages, emanational buddhabodies! Most precious male and female gatekeepers, [manifestations of] supreme buddha-mind, Even though you are our fathers and hold mastery over the three world-systems, And even though you are our mothers and assimilate [all things] in the ultimate expanse, By conceiving of our bodies [in a mundane way], we have dishonoured the illusory body. Thus our commitments have degenerated and we have grown truly remorseful. We seek your forgiveness, 0 male and female gatekeepers!

CONFESSION IN THE PRESENCE OF THE WRATHFUL DEITIES

The confession of faults in achieving meditative stability in reality is as follows:
O¥ As we have failed to liberate the egotism of the subjectobject dichotomy,

ACTS Of CONFESSION

I

3I

Within the original mal)~ala of natural sameness, We still have not realised the non-dual truth of the abiding nature. 0 non-dual Buddha-body of Reality, we seck forgiveness! 7

The confession of faults in achieving the meditative stability which illuminates all that appears is as follows:
You open the portals which unimpededly illuminate the ultimate truth, And [naturally] arise as the Buddha-body [of Perfect Resource], within an expanse of radiantly clear moonlight, But we have let the light [emanating fromJ the seminal points of your 'generative essence' be diffused. 0 Buddha-body [of Perfect Resource], which illuminates all that appears, we seek forgivencss! 8

The confession [of faults in achieving} the meditative stability of the causal basis [entailing the visualisation of] the tiered celestial palace and the seats [of the wrathful deities} is as follows:
From the expanse of space, which is the unborn ultimate truth, There appears the buddha-body, the medium through which the fruitional attributes [of buddhahood] emerge. Yet we have not even clearly visualised this powerful celestial palace, The abode in which the supreme power [of buddha-body] is gradually generated. In the presence of the blazing celestial palace, we seek forgiveness!

Confession to the five male herukas, the executors of buddha-body
Though you steadfastly [appear] as buddha-bodies, sealed within the nature of supreme bliss, Holding in your hands the respective implements, emblematic of the six pristine cognitions,

132

THE TIBETAN BOOK Of THE DEAD

We have not [even] achieved the experience of such [vividly] clear visualisation. 0 five blood-drinking herukas, we seek forgiveness!

Confession to their consorts, the five krodhesvarf
0 supreme mother-consorts, conjoined indivisibly with the [male] buddha-bodies, We have let the light of your non-dual 'generative essence' be diffused, Into the 'spacious expanse', which is the lotus seed of desire. 0 five krodhesvari deities, we seek forgiveness!

Confession to the eight miitara~
0 wrathful female deities of pristine cognition, born of buddha-mind, [The natural transformation] of the eight classes of consciOusness, 0 Gauri and accompanying [Mataral)], 9akinis of pristine cognition, For whatever ways we have contradicted your buddha-mind, 0 eight matara}:l [who embody] the classes [of consciousness], we seek forgiveness!

Confession to the eight pisacf
0 Sirphamukhi and accompanying [pisaci], Though you remain unwavering in a compassionate and quiescent state, You emanate in blazing awesome forms, [endowed] with fangs and wings, 9 To pacify misconceptions and substantialist views. For whatever ways we have contradicted your buddha-mind, 0 eight pisaci [who embody! the objects [of consciousness], we seek forgiveness!

ACTS OF CO:-.;FESSION

133

Confession to the four female gatekeepers
0 four female gatekeepers, at [the portals of] the ornate palatial mal)qala, You who summon [with the hookj, bind [with the noose], shackle [with the chain] and insulate [with the bell], 0 Horse-headed AI'tkusa and accompanying [female gatekeepers], For whatever ways we have contradicted your buddha-mind, 0 seals of the four gatekeepers, we seek forgiveness!

Confession to the twenty-eight fsvarf
0 lsvarl, you who arc accomplished in the rites of 'liberation', 10 And hold mastery over [the judgement of] virtuous and non-virtuous actions, 0 Isvari, assembly of mothers, For whatever ways we have contradicted your buddha-mind, 0 oceanic expanse of mothers and sisters, we seek forgiveness!

Confession to the awareness holders
[0 awareness holders], though you never stray from a state of compassionate equipoise, Within the mai)Qala of spontaneously present natural expresswn, We have not achieved your [pristine] clarity of subtle meditative stability. 0 you who maintain the enlightened attributes, we seek your forgiveness!

Confession of one's beginningless violation of the commitnzents
Throughout the bcginningless succession of our births, Until now, when we have assumed these, our present bodies, We have revolved within the worlds of rebirth, swayed by 1gnorance, And however many human births we have taken,

134

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

Wherever we have been born, we have engaged in all kinds of negative acts, Including the five inexpiable crimes and the five approximate cnmesActually committing them, or inciting [others] to commit them, And even rejoicing in committing and inciting them. Please direct your enlightened compassion towards us! Grant us purification, and bestow your [spiritual] accomplishments upon us!

Then the confession should be recited to the entire ma~zl,iala of wrathful deities, and the request for forgiveness made in the following way:
H 0¥ 0 herukas of pristine cognition, natural purity of the five p01sons, [Resplendent] amidst flames blazing like the fire at the end of an aeon, United with the five krodhisvari, the great mothers of space; 0 four inner <;iakinis, Gaur! and your partners, 0 outer yoginis, Pukkasi and your partners, 0 fanged clusters of devourers, Si111hamukhi and your partners, 0 winged [clusters] of the intermediate directions, Grdhramukhi and your partners, 0 twenty-eight ISvari, of the blazing courtyard, 0 four female gatekeepers, who summon, bind, shackle and insulate 11 at the four gates: We who have not even clearly visualised the bodies of the assembly of wrathful herukas, We who have failed to recite sufficient heart-mantras, And failed to stabilise [the actualisation of] the seals, We who have failed to offer adequate feast- and tormaofferings, Request the entire assembly of wrathful deities for forgiveness!

ACTS OF

CONI-'E~SION

135

Next, the following specific confessional prayers should be made to the ma1J4ala of the wrathful deities:
o.~t Should we have broken our pledge, which is dangerous to transgress, Having earlier taken upon us this supremely secret vow, For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of the five families of herukas, We seek your forgiveness, 0 greatly compassionate ones!

Should we have been obscured by conceptual grasping, Whilst engaged in the practices of the supreme sexual yoga, For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of the great mother Krodhisvaris, We seek your forgiveness, 0 [mother] krodhesvaris! Should we have failed to actualisc the sacred substances and the seals, For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of the carnivorous Gauris, We seek your forgiveness, 0 eight matara}:t, embodiments of the classes [of consciousness]! Should we have failed to array the offerings of flesh and blood, 11 in accordance with the textual descriptions, For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of the Pisacis, Sirphamukhi and her partners, We seck your forgiveness, 0 <;fakinis, embodiments of the objects [of consciousness]! Should we have failed to differentiate between the four gates: e:Jst, south, west, and north, For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of the female gatekeepers, the horse-headed Ari.kusa and her partners, W'e seek your forgiveness, 0 four female gatekeepers of pristine cognition!

q6

TilE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

Should we have failed to subdue [attachment to] the six realms of cyclic existence, Having accepted [vows], which are dangerous to transgress, For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of the seven mothers and four sisters, u We seek your forgiveness, 0 eleven c,lakinis! Should we have allowed our resources to become exhausted and the first fruits of the feast-offerings to be spoiled, For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of the Isvari who monitor the first fruits l of the feast-offerings], We seek your forgiveness, 0 twenty-eight Isvari! Should we have failed to remain unmovingly in the sacred abodes, but instead engaged in [distracted] activities, For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of the wardens of the sacred abodes, 14 We seek your forgiveness, 0 great wardens of the sacred abodes! Should we have failed to regard our personal [spiritual teacher] as our parent, For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of the vajra-master, We seek your forgiveness, 0 regal vajra[-masterl! Should we have failed to master meditative stability, And failed to distinguish [the characteristics of] the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities, For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of the assistant vajra-master, 15 We seek your forgiveness, 0 lamp of the Buddhist teachings! 16 Should we have interrupted [the stabilisation of] the seals through our laziness, For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind tif the ritual officiant, We seck your forgiveness, 0 master of ritual activities!

ACTS OF CO!'IrESSION

137

Should we have failed to reach the highest criteria when engaged in the practices of sexual yoga, For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of the female consorts, the embodiments of discriminative awareness, We seek your forgiveness, 0 secret mother, consort who embodies awareness! Should we have lacked the power to maintain meditative stability when engaging in rites of 'liberation', For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of the male 'liberating' avengers, We seek your forgiveness, 0 [Citipati], master of 'liberating' a vengcrs! 17 Should we have failed to please the buddha-mind of the wrathful female emanations, For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of the fgatekecping] messengers who summon and guide, 18 We seck your forgiveness, 0 [female gatekeepers], who swiftly enact the rites! Should we have broken the continuous expression of love and affection through our laziness, For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of our brothers and sisters, [our companions] on the path to enlightenment, We seek your forgiveness, 0 vajra-brothcrs and sisters! Should we have allowed our commitments to degenerate out of trivial banter, For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of those [protectors] who determine the outer and inner [boundaries of our precepts], We seek your forgiveness, 0 you [protectors] who keep vigil over the commitments! Should we have consumed our resources [accumulated for the feast-offering], And allowed the first fruits of the residual offering to be spoiled,

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF TilE DEAD

For whatever ways we have contradicted the buddha-mind of the subterranean goddesses within the outer retinue, We seek your forgiveness, 0 greatly compassionate ones! Please be patient [with us], And bestow your pure spiritual accomplishments upon us!

PLAINTIVE CONFESSION OF RAMPANT EGOHOOD 19
0¥ 0 great compassionate and transcendent lord Vajrasattva, Whose supremely exquisite form, immaculate and white, Is suffused by a pure inner radiance, glowing like a hundred thousand suns and moons, [Emanating] heroic rays of light, which illuminate the chiliocosm, You who are known as the guide and teacher of the three levels of existence, The unique friend to all living beings of the three world -systems, 0 lord of loving kindness, deity of compassion, please attend to us!
From beginningless time, without end, I have roamed throughout cyclic existence Led astray by the momentum of my mistaken past actions and improper past behaviour, I have mistaken the path and become lost on the path. I regret with powerful remorse the negative past actions I have committed, of any kind. Drawn by the momentum of momentary yet violently resonant past acts, I have sunk into this ocean of suffering, the sea of cyclic existence. The fires of blazing hatred have unabatingly seared my mind, The dense darkness of delusion has blinded my discriminative awareness,

ACTS Of CONFESSION

139

The ocean coasts of desire have drowned my consciousness, The mountain of fierce pride has entombed me in the lower existences, The cruel whirlwind of envy has sucked 20 me into these turning worlds, Where, entwined by the tight knot of egocentricity, I have fallen into the pit of desire, this chasm of blazing fires. Unbearably brutal misery has poured down on me like heavy ram. [Damaged] by such extreme and unbearable suffering, [Seared] by the blazing ferocious fires of my negative past actions, The shoots of my consciousness and sense faculties have been blunted. If my body, this illusory aggregate, can no longer withstand [all this pain I, How can you bear Ito witness] this, 0 Compassionate Lord of Loving Kindness? 21 Obscured fool [that I am, burdened by] the most negative, evil past acts, Propelled by the momentum of these past actions, I have taken birth as the personification of rampant egohood within this world-system of desire. I regret having taken such birth, and am dismayed by my past acts! Yet, regardless of my regret and my dismay, past actions cannot be re-made. The momentum of past actions is as strong as a river's inexorable flow, So how can the mighty river of past actions be reversed in a mere moment! All that ripens is born from one's own past actions, And I am one who has been swept along by the violent whirlwind of my past actions, And accordingly have roamed over countless past aeons, Lost within the dark prisons of cyclic existence. 0 Lord of Loving Kindness, through the blessing of your compassion,

140

THE TIBETAN BOOK Or THE DEAD

Purify the obscurations (generated by I my past actions and dissonant mental states, And secure me in the presence of your mother-like loving kindness! Here am I, continuously yearning for the sight of your compassionate face, Which shines with a luminosity like that of the sun, And radiates with a clarity like that of the moon. Yet my darkened eyes, blinded by the cataracts 22 of beginningless ignorance, Are unable to see you, 0 Lord of Living Beings, where are you [now I? When I am terrified by the utterly unbearable and virulent power of past actions, And my hair stands on end, out of fear, I call out this lament, in heartfelt passion, And cry out [to you] in a voice of utter despair! 0 Lord of Loving Kindness, if you do not attend Ito mel with compassiOn now, At the time of my death, when my mind and body separate, When I am cut off from the company of spiritual friends, and dragged away by Yama, At that time, when my relatives stay behind in the world, Yet I alone am led away by the power of past actions, At that time, I will be unprotected and without a refuge. So, do not on any account hesitate or delay now, But draw near to me at this very moment, And enact the wrathful rites of 'liberation'. Beings such as I, who are afflicted by past actions, Have been subject to misconceptions since beginningless rime. As a result, we have not achieved release from the lturning] states of cyclic existence. Indeed, beings such as I have assumed such a countless number of corporeal forms, During countless births in countless aeons, That if our flesh and bones were to be collected together,

ACTS OF CONfESSION

Their accumulated mass would fill this world, And if our pus and blood were to be collected together, Their accumulated mass would fill a vast ocean, And if the residue of our past actions were to be collected together, Their extent would be beyond conception and inexpressible. Though I have continued endlessly in a cycle of births and deaths, Throughout the three world-systems, The actions that I have committed have been pointless and unproductive. Yet, from amongst all these many countless births, The actions committed in the course of just a single lifetime Could have been worthwhile if only I had trained well, Pursued the path of unsurpassed enlightenment, And thus attained the genuine final nirval)a. But, swayed by the virulence of past actions and the great potency of dissonant mental states, I have assumed bodies, these networks of flesh and blood, and roamed throughout cyclic existence, Thrust into [a succession of] prison-like existences, Where the suffering is hard to bear. All my transgressions, resonant with such unbearably intense suffering, Have been born out of my own past actions. Please, through your great compassion, shatter the momentum of [these] past actions, And reverse the vital energy of past actions, [generated by] dissonant mental states! When, overpowered by the influence of perverse past actions [rooted in] fundamental ignorance, I wander perpetually within the darkness of unknowing, Why do you not release me, [suffusing me] with the lamplight of your pristine cognition? When I can no longer bear the continuing fruition of my transgressions and past actions, Why do you not embrace me with the enlightened activity of your great compassion?

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

When I fall into the abyss of error, Why do you not catch me in the palm of your swift compassion? When I am afflicted by the irresistible diseases of the three pmsons, Why do you not cure me with the medicine of your compassionate skilful means? When the fires of my suffering- the continuing maturation of my own past actions - blaze, Why do you not release a compassionate shower of cooling rains? When I sink into rhe swamp of suffering in cyclic existence, Why do you not draw me up with the hook of compassionate skilful means? Were I to attain the resultant [states of enlightenment], By training, again and again, in the three world-systems of cyclic existence, What need would there be for your sublime compassion then? Given that this [release] would be the potent inheritance of my [positive] past actions, Would there be anyone to whom I would need to express my gratitude? [But], 0 spiritual warrior, you who are endowed with the power of compassion, Since the momentum of my [negative] past actions is so potent, Do not be ineffective! Do not be indifferent! Do not be inactive! From your heart, 0 compassionate conquering deity, gaze upon me now! Draw me up from the swamp of cyclic existence! Lead me swiftly to the supreme level of the three buddhabodies.

ACTS OF

CONI'ES~ION

143

CONFESSION IN THE PRESENCE OF THE VIEW
O¥ How mistaken is the view which dualises subject and object, When the expanse of reality is free from conceptual elaboration! How deluded we have been by our grasping at characteristics! We confess this transgression within the expanse of supreme bliss, Which is free from conceptual elaboration!
How debilitating is the view which dualises good and evil, When Samantabhadra, [The Ever Perfect], is beyond good and evil! How pitiful we are, clinging to purity and impurity! We confess this transgression within the expanse, Which is free from the duality of good and evil! How mistaken is the view which sees buddhas [as great] and sentient beings [as small], When, in the state of sameness, there is neither great nor small! How deluded we have been in clinging to the dichotomy of great and small! We confess this transgression within the expanse of supreme bliss, which is sameness! How debilitating is the view which dualises this life and the next, When the mind of enlightenment is free from birth or death! How deluded we have been in clinging to the dichotomy of birth and death! \Ve confess this transgression within the deathless, immutable expanse! How mistaken is the view which dualiscs form and material substance, When the supreme seminal point is free from spatial dimensions!

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

How deluded we have been in clinging to the dichotomy of corners and angles! We confess this transgression within the supreme seminal point, which is all-embracing in its symmetry! 23 How mistaken is the view which dualises beginning and end, When the essential nature of the three times is unchanging! How deluded we have been in clinging to the dichotomy of transitional processes! We confess this transgression within the expanse of the three times, which is unchanging! How debilitating is the view which dualises cause and effect, When the naturally present pristine cognition arises effortlessly! How deluded we have been in clinging to the dichotomy of effort and attainment! We confess this transgression within the naturally present expanse, which arises without effort! How pitiful is the view which dualises eternalism and nihilism, When the pristine cognition of [intrinsic] awareness is free from eternalism and nihilism! How deluded we have been in clinging to the dichotomy of existence and non-existence! We confess this transgression within the expanse of pristine cognition, which is beyond eternalism and nihilism! 24 How debilitating is the view which oscillates between biased positions, When the pure expanse of reality is free from middle and extremes! How deluded we have been in clinging to the dichotomy of middle and extremes! We confess this transgression within the pure expanse of reality, which is free from a middle or extremes! How debilitating is the view which dualiscs outside and inside, When the celestial palace is free from inner and outer dimensions!

ACTS OF CO:-.:FESSIO:'Ii

145

How deluded we have been in clinging to the dichotomy of spaciousness and confinement! We confess this transgression within the expanse [of the celestial palace], \X'hi~h is free from the duality of spaciousness and confinement, or of inner and outer dimensions! How pitiful is the view which dualises 'higher and lower'
[approa~hes],

When the sexual centre of the female consort is free from [the distinction between] higher and lower [energy centres]! How deluded we have been in clinging to the dichotomy between higher and lower lenergy centres] !25 We confess this transgression within the expanse of the [consort's] secret placc, 26 Which is free from [the distinction between] higher and lower! How debilitating is the view which dualises objects and mind, When the Buddha-body of Reality is free from individuated distinctions! How deluded we have been in clinging to the dichotomy between the environment and its inhabitants! \Xie confess this transgression within [the expanse of] the Buddha-body of Reality, which is unchanging! How debilitating is the view which discriminates between individual thoughts, When the dynamic of the male consort acts unconstrictedly! How deluded we have been in clinging mistakenly to nominalism! We confess this transgression within the expanse of the awareness holders, who are free from conceptual thoughts! Since pristine cognition, which is intrinsic awareness, has not arisen within us, How pitiful is this mind obscured by ignorance, Which grasps immaterial phenomena as materially substantive! We confess this transgression within the expanse of natural pristine cognition!

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

Since we have failed to understand the nature of uncreated truth, How tormented is this intellect of a bewildered being, Which apprehends the uncreated truth in terms of 'I' and 'mine'! We confess this transgression within the expanse of supreme bliss, which is uncreated! Since we have failed to mentally elucidate the nature of reality, · We have not understood that phenomenal appearances are illusory, And thereby our minds have become ·attached to material wealth! We confess this transgression within the uncreated reality, which ·is free from attachment! Since we have failed to realise that cyclic existence is free from inherent existence, We have grasped at the self-existence of things and their characteristics, And thereby sought happiness through non-virtuous behaviour. How deluded we have been in clinging to the dichotomy between hope and doubt! We confess this transgression within the expanse of enlightenment, which is untainted! Since we have failed to understand the truth of sameness with true equanimity, We have mistakenly clung to the permanence of relatives and friends. How totally mistaken is this mind of ignorant people [such as ourselves]! We confess this transgression within the expanse of supreme bliss, which is sameness! Since we have failed to encounter the true meaning of reality, We have forsaken truth and persevered in non-virtuous acts. We have forsaken the transmitted precepts of the Teacher and

ACTS Of CONI'ESSJOI'\

147

have been deceived by the vagaries of [mundane] human doctrines! We confess this transgression within the expanse of supreme bliss, which is reality! Since we have failed to experience the natural liberation of pristine cognition, which is [intrinsic] awareness, We have forsaken the modality of intrinsic awareness, and persevered in distracted acts. Take pity on these sentient beings who are devoid of such truthful experience! We confess this transgression within the expanse, which is free from distraction! To the assembled deities of pristine cognition, to the protectors who uphold the commitments, And to those yogins who have fulfilled their commitments in accordance with the textual elucidation, We remorsefully confess all our own faults, [We remorsefully confess] all our deviations and obscurations generated by our unrealised view!

CONFESSION IN THE PRESENCE OF ALL THOSE GONE TO BLISS
0~1 We pray to all Those Gone to Bliss, throughout the three times, To you, the conquerors, and your retinues, And to all who maintain the commitments of indestructible reality, Please, each of you, attend to us!

Having initially generated the mind [aspiring] to supreme enlightenment, In order to actualise the indestructible reality of buddha-body, speech and mind, On the enlightened plain of an accomplished awareness holder,

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

We have adopted numerous secret commitments, Relating to both the meditational deities and our vajra-masters, And we have pledged not to transgress these injunctions, to which we are bound, [for to do so J would lead to a birth in the hells, Driven by our past actions and misfortunes. [Nonetheless], swayed by attachment, aversion, delusion, pride, envy and so forth, We have continued to err: Should we have belittled the vajra-master in our hearts, the 'lamp of the teaching', And thus allowed our commitments to degenerate, And should we have harboured ill will and mistaken attitudes Towards the vajra-companions who share our commitments, for !whatever! such [harm we have thus created], We confess all our degenerations of the commitments of buddha- body! Should we have not clearly visualised the seals of the meditational deity/ 7 Should we have been deficient in our mantra recitations during our ritual service, Should we have failed to carry out the rites through which both ritual service and attainment are fulfilled, Especially with respect to the ritual offerings of six session [yoga J, And should we have been incapable of practising in accordance with the teachings and the texts, We confess all such degenerations of the commitments of buddha-speech! Should we have degraded the commitments, which the vajra-master imparted as an esoteric instruction of buddha-mind, Commitments he orally seeded in our hearts, through the grace of his loving kindness, And should we have even transgressed our secret name/x by divulging it carelessly, We confess all such degenerations of the commitments of buddha-mind!

ACTS OF CO!'ifl:.SSIO!'i

149

We [also] confess our degenerations of the ancillary commitments, Caused by our failure to realise the essential sameness of phenomena. We confess our degenerations of the commitments relating to ritual service and attainment, Caused by our falling into the sleep of idleness and apathy. We confess [each and every one of our] degenerations of the commitments of buddha-body, speech and mind, Caused by our transgressions, enacted physically, verbally and mentally! In the presence of our revered spiritual teachers, \X'e confess our inadequate utensils and resources. In the presence of the assembled meditational deities, We confess our prejudices towards their practices of visualisation. 29 In the presence of the four classes of 9akinis, We confess our degenerations of our commitments and pledges. In the presence of the protectors of the [sacred] teachings, We confess our [tardy] torma-offerings, whether years or months overdue. In the presence of our parents of the three times, We confess our failure to repay their kindness. In the presence of our spiritual brothers and sisters, We confess our inadequate fervour for upholding the commitments. In the presence of the six classes of sentient beings, We confess the inadequacy of our compassion and altruism. We confess all our contradictions and degenerations: Those relating to the prdtimok~a vows, Those relating to the trainings cultivated by the bodhisattvas, And those relating to the commitments upheld by the awareness holders. ~ 0 From now on we shall not conceal[such degenerations] And we resolve to guard against any and every infraction!

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

As we confess all our negative obscurations born of indulging in the three poisons, Please purify [all our obscurations] And grant us the supreme and common accomplishments of buddha-body, speech and mind! The Hundred-syllable Mantra [of Vajrasattva] should be recited [repeatedly] in conjunction with these verses and thus the confession will be effected. This Natural Liberation through Acts of Confession in the Presence of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities, Which is a supporting text to the Reparation and Confession: Natural Liberation of Degenerations, 31 is thus presented. Be persevering with regard to this practice, 0 Children of Posterity! May this practice be encountered by all those of the future who have a [positive] inheritance of past actions! This Natural Liberation through Acts of Confession, in the Presence of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities was extracted from the Tantra of Immaculate Confession by Padmakara, the preceptor of O<;l<;liyana. May [the influence of] this sublime teaching not be exhausted until all of cyclic existence is emptied! May virtue prevail! SAMAYA rgya rgya rgya! gter-rgya! sbas-rgya! gtad-rgya! 32 A treasure of Karma Lingpa!

8
Natural Liberation through Recognition of the Visual Indications and Signs of Death

CONTEXT
Since the human body is regarded as an abode of deities, it is the responsibility of the practitioner to protect the body from the causes of harm, disease and premature death and to foster the conditions which support an active and unencumbered life up to the natural exhaustion of the lifespan. This chapter describes six categories of signs indicative of the time of death, together with a variety of techniques for purposefully eliciting specific indications of death. Also described, in the section titled 'Signs of Extremely Near Death', are the experiential and outer signs that occur during the process of dying. Lastly, the signs that are indicative of the nature of the future rebirth, which occur at or after death, are described. This chapter and the following chapter: Natural Liberation of Fear through the. Ritual Deception of Death _are inextricably interlinked. Should the predictive signs described in this chapter definitively arise, then it is expected that the appropriate practices described in the following chapter: Natural Liberation of Fear through the Ritual Deception of Death should be undertaken without delay. The sophisticated description of the process of dying, contained in the section 'Signs of Extremely Near Death', concurs with the understanding of the process of death commonly found in classical Buddhist literature.* This section forms a component of the Liberation by Hearing (Chapter 11) and it is a vital aspect of the guidance to be given by a qualified spiritual teacher at the time of death. The predictive signs of death, however, are more idiosyncratic and show influences from Tibetan folklore and traditional medicine. Further, in terms of the predictive signs of death, it is said that the
*For a derailed description of rhe processes of dearh, sec also H H Dalai Lama, Adt,ice on Dying.

THE TIBETAI'i BOOK OF THE DEAD

subtler signs described here can only be accurately recognised by those who are continuously engaged in meditative practice. The elicitation and analysis of the predictive signs is not a common practice today, except, in the case of certain signs, in the context of traditional medicine. Nonetheless, this text demonstrates a powerful sensitivity to impermanence and a sustained sensitivity to one's immediate experience.

Herein is contained the Natural Liberation through [Recognition of) the Visual Indications and Signs of Death, 1 an extract from the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, [entitled] Natural Liberation through [Recognition of) Enlightened Intention. 2 I bow down to the naturally radiant Peaceful and Wrathful Deities, [Manifestations of] the three buddha-bodies! This natural liberation through [the recognition of] signs Which is a technique for analysing [the onset of] death Is presented as a supporting text to the Natural Liberation by Hearing in the Intermediate States. 3 Study it repeatedly, 0 Child of Buddha Nature.
SAMAYA!

INTRODUCTION
Alas! This illusory and feeble aggregate of form, Created from compounded past actions and conditions, Like [the flame of] a butter lamp blowing in the wind, cannot last for ever. 4 Nothing at all exists which is not subject to the conditioning of death, And indeed, since it is uncertain when death will occur, One should constantly be cognisant of the signs of [impending] death, And strive after [the accumulation of] virtue.

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

There are two [primary] conditions responsible for the death of human beings: [First] untimely death and [second] death due to the [natural] exhaustion of the lifespan. 5 Untimely or sudden death may be averted, By successful application of the Ritual Deception of Death, 6 But death due to the [natural] exhaustion of the lifespan Is like the burning out of a butter lamp, So there is no way of averting this through 'ritual deception', And thus, [if this is indicated], one should make preparations to depart. In either case, [however], it is most important to engage in the following analysis. This teaching fon the visual indications and signs of death] Is presented in terms of six general topics, namely: External, internal, and secret signs of death, Signs of remote death, signs of near death, And, lastly, miscellaneous signs of death. When investigating [the time of] death, First one should make offerings To the [visualised] assemblies of spiritual teachers, meditational deities and c;lakinis, And please the protectors of the [sacred] teachings with tormaofferings. Then, one should present feast-offerings to one's fellow practitioners, And also engage in charitable acts. Then, [the signs of] death should be examined in the following way.

EXTERNAL SIGNS OF DEATH
First, when the examination of external[signs] is made,

It is the bodily characteristics that should be investigated,
Because the signs of death will arise in relation to these

lcharacteristics J.
The body is composed of the four elements,

SIG!'lS OF DEATH

157

Thus the following portents of its demise Will arise prior [to the time of death]: Loss of appetite, dullness of the sense faculties, A feeling of anger which consumes body, speech and mind, Distracted or depressed thoughts, Disturbed dreams, character changes, and fading complexion. These are the portents [indicating] that life[ -threatening] hindrances may arise. More particularly, there are the following specifically physical signs of death: 7 If the fingernails and toenails become bloodless or lustrclcss, [This indicates] death after nine months, less half a day. If the cornea of the eyes begin to cloud over, [This indicates] death after five months. If the hair on the nape of the neck grows upwards, [This indicates] death after three months. lThen again, more generally], if one urinates, defecates and sneezes simultaneously, This too is an indication of death. Also, if one's urine falls in two forks, If one's muscles become utterly loose and flabby, If faeces arc excreted and semen ejaculated simultaneously, If one's body odour changes dramatically, If one's conduct changes dramatically, If one blushes little and one's complexion becomes pallid, If the tone of one's voice becomes thin, and one's eyes become sunken, If the space above the bridge of the nose becomes exfoliated, If the eyes do not clearly perceive forms, Or else if they perceive incorrectly, and so forth, If [the ears] do not hear, or else hear incorrectly, If [the nose] does not smell, or else smells incorrectly, If [the tongue] docs not taste, or else tastes incorrect! y, If the point between the eyebrows is effaced, Or evaporation ceases from the crown of the head, These [signs] may all indicate that one has fallen into the hands of the Lord of Death. 8

THE TIBETAN BOOK Of THE DEAD

Furthermore, while in good health, [The following technique for eliciting indications can also be applied]: If, when the [closed] eyes are pressed with the fingers, The [minute] circles of light which appear Are absent from the lower part of the left eye, [This indicates that] one may die after six months, But if they are absent from the upper part [of that eye], One may die after three months. If these [same circles] are absent from the direction of the [left] nostril, [This indicates that) one may die after one month. If they are absent from the direction of the [left] ear, [This indicates that] one may die after two months. [Resuming this process, focusing on the right eye):

If [the circles] are absent from the lower part of the right eye,
One should know that one may die after ten days.

If they are absent from the upper part [of the right eye],
[This indicates that] one may die after five days.

If they are absent from the direction of the [right] ear,
[This indicates that one may dieJ after three days; And if they are absent from the direction of the [right] nostril, One should know that one may die after two days, even if one is not sick. Secondly, if when the ears are cupped with the fingers, No humming sound is heard throughout an entire day, 9 One should know that one might die after six years. If it is absent for two days, One may die after six years less two months. Similarly, for each additional day [that the sound is absent], [This indicates that! one may die, decrementally, after three fewer months. That is, if [the sound] is absent for a third or fourth day, Death may come after three [or six] fewer months, respectively. It has also been said that the number of days [indicated] might not necessarily be definite.

SIGN~

Of DEATH

159

There are also other [external] signs of death, such as: If one feels [continuously] angry and short-tempered, If one feels fearful, wherever one may be, If one's positive perspective, devotion, and similar qualities ebb away, If one feels a version towards saintly beings, If one feels depressed, wherever one may be, and [constantly] wishes to go [elsewhere], If one wishes to be separated from sympathetic Buddhist compamons, If one delights in the social diversions and distracting activities of cyclic existence, Or if one feels excessive attachment, aversion, pride, or envy, These may all indicate that one has fallen into the hands of the Lord of Death. These, [the above], are called 'the external signs of death', Which, it is said, can be averted by the ritual deception of death. The techniques, by which they are averted, should be studied, By referring to the Ritual Deception of Death [chapter, which follows].

INTERNAL SIGNS OF DEATH
The investigation of the internal signs of death Comprises the examination of vital breath and the examination of dreams.

Examination of the Vital Breath 10
Around the time of the [vernal or autumnal] equinox, At daybreak on the first day lof the lunar month], One should sit upright, with the body in the seven-point posture of Vairocana. Then, one should observe the vital breath, and note from which [nostril] this emerges. If, at this time, the vital breath is moving through the left nostril,

160

THE TIBETAN BOOK Or THE DEAD

Then, for a period of three days, the breath will continue to move exclusively through the left nostril, But then on the fourth day it will change, And proceed to move through the right nostril for three days. Thus it will alternate in this way every three days between the two nostrils. [Observe this process and] count the number of days diligently, and do not make a mistake. If no error is made [in the counting], and if the breath moves successively in this way, And then begins to move erratically after one and a half months, It is said that one may die after [a further] six months. If the breath begins to move erratically after one month, It is said that severe misfortunes may occur. If it begins to move erratically after two weeks, [It is said that] serious illness may occur. If it moves erratically after five days, 11 [It is said that] slander and calumny may occur. If [the breath] does not alternate [from one nostril to the other] over a ten-day period, Then, as soon as it docs change, one may die. If it moves simultaneously through both nostrils and the mouth, [This indicates that] one may die after half a day. And if it ceases to move through the nose and instead moves only through the mouth, It is said that one will die immediately.

Examination of the Signs of Death which Occur in Dreams 12
[First, one should know that] those dreams which occur in the late evening or around midnight are unreliable, But if one dreams between dawn and daybreak that: One is riding a cat or a white monkey with a red face, While moving further and further towards the east, It is saiJ that this is a sign of death caused by king spirits. 13 If one Jrcams of riding a tiger, fox, or corpse,

SIG~S

OF DEATH

I6I

Or of riding a buffalo, pig, camel, or donkey, While moving further and further towards the south, This is a sign of death [indicating that] one has fallen into the hands of Yama. Furthermore, if one dreams of eating faeces, Of wearing black clothes of yak hair, while plunging downwards, Of being trapped in a wicker-basket or snare, Of being bound with iron chains, Or of copulating repeatedly with a black figure or animal, These are [also! signs [which arc indicative] of death.

If one dreams of being disembowelled by a fierce black woman, And that one's entrails arc spilling out, Or that a black man arrives, wielding an iron mace, And coming into one's presence, he tells you to depart, Or [if one dreams! that one is being dragged along by a black rope attached to the neck, Or that one is inside a lofty red-coloured castle, Surrounded by a moat and perimeter wall, Or [if one dreams] of being decapitated and having one's head carried off by another, Or of being surrounded by crows, anguished spirits, or villains, Or of being willingly led away, or leaving [home] in a bridal processiOn, Of being naked, with one's hair cut off and beard shaved, Of constantly associating with friends who have died, Of being dragged along by a crowd of dead people, Of jumping into water, sinking into mud, or being swallowed b:: fish, Of entering a womb and falling asleep, Of being overcome in a battle, in which the other side is victorious, Of wearing red clothing, and being adorned with red garlands, Of repeatedly picking red flowers, Of climbing a mountain of red shellac,

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF TilE DEAD

Of having one's head wrapped in a red silk turban, Of twigs growing on the crown of your head, and birds nesting there, Of falling asleep repeatedly in a terrifying charnel ground, Of being old, and carrying a heavy burden, Of the sun and moon falling to the plains, leaving one shrouded in darkness, Of jumping headlong into a pit, Of dancing together with a host of ogres, Or setting out, thinking one will roam to unfamiliar distant lands, never to return If such dreams and others like them occur when one is not sick, they are indefinite [with respect to the time of death], And one may be released [from their indications] by means of the [appropriate] ritual service. If, however, such dreams continually recur, [This indicates that) one will die within a year.

If one should dream of the sun and moon being eclipsed,
Falling to the plains, or repeatedly setting, One's father, mother, or teacher may die, And it is said that if they are sick at the time, Their death will be inevitable. The above are called the 'internal signs of death', Which are slightly more difficult [to avert] Through ritual deception than the aforementioned [external signs].

SECRET SIGNS OF DEATH
The secret signs of death will[now] be described. When the external and internal signs of death occur, They can be averted by repeatedly performing the Ritual Deception of Death. If, however, the external and internal signs are not lsuccessfully] reversed, One should then examine the secret signs in the following way:

SIG:SS OF DEATH

Having first generated the mind [aspiring] to supreme enlightenment, 14 And then taken refuge and offered prayers, One should examine, on the morning of the first day of the month, The flow of one's semen or menstrual blood. It is said that if the semen of a man is blackish yellow, Or if the menstrual blood of a woman is whitish, Death may occur after two months. If the semen of a man is reddish, He may die or be subjected to slander after six months. However, if its [natural] whiteness is undiminished, [This indicates that] there is no obstacle [to life], And [the semenJ should be inhaled through the nose, while it is still warm. This is itself a rite associated with the Ritual Deception of Death. Furthermore, if semen flows without any [blissful! sensation, And it is interspersed with quicksilver-like globules, the size of sesame seeds, It is said that one will die [imminently]. If the flow of a \Voman's menstrual blood is unceasing, And if at that time she dreams she is picking red flowers, [This indicates that] death will [soon] follow. !\1oreover, if a man has continual spermatorrhoea, Even when not engaged in sexual intercourse, It is said that he may die after four months. If a black mole suddenly appears for the first time, At the orifice of the glans penis, Or if one has an undistracted and constant [sexual] desire, thinking only of women, And one allows one's commitments in respect of the third empowerment to degenerate, 1.s These are not only signs of death, But also omens that one will later proceed to [rebirth in] the indestructible hells. [Therefore], if one docs not confess [and repair] these [degenerations] fully, One will experience the fierce sufferings of the hells.

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF Till·. UFAl>

In order for the confession to be effective, however, You should perform the ritual deception pertaining to the secret [signs of] death, Yet [de;Hh] will be harder to deceive than in the rwo preceding categories. The above are called the 'secret signs of death'.

SIGNS OF REMOTE DEATH
The examination of the signs of death when it is [still] years or months away Should be made by scrutinising the 'shadow of one's lifespan', Optically projected onto the sky, in the way described below. [These indications may show that] one will die, or that one will not die, And that the averting [of death] will be possible, or impossible. 16 [To begin], offerings should be made to the spiritual teacher, and the Three Precious Jewels, Torma-offerings should be presented to the <;iakinis and protectors of the [sacred] teachings; And then, after going for refuge and offering prayers, The examination should be made [as follows]: In an isolated and delightful place, In the morning or afternoon of the first day of the month, Or in the evening or at dawn of the fifteenth day, 1When the sky is clear and there is no wind, One should sit naked in a comfortable spot, And there, after praying fervently, One should repeat the following mantra one hundred times:
0¥ AYU~E SA¥HARAKESVARE HO~t PHAT ~
11

Then, standing up, naked, one should bow down seven times To each of the gods of the [ten] directions, And then, directly stretching out one's four limbs, \X'hile holding in one's hand a rosary or suitable symbolic lund-implement, 1 '~

SIG!"S OF DEATH

One should inscribe the letter A on the heart of one's shadow. 20 [Next], without blinking, one should gaze fixedly at the letter A [drawn] at the heart [of the shadow], And focus one's awareness upon [the letter A]. Then, once the eyes have grown numb [through strain], One should look up into the centre of the cloudless sky, At \vhich time one's own form should become visible in the sky. One should then know that if the head and body of this [reflected image] are intact, and [the image] is pale in colour, This is an auspicious sign that there will be no obstacles and that one will not die [imminently].

If one's reflected image is not visible in the sky,
[First], perform the rite for affirmation of vows, And, while sitting in the 'indestructible cross-legged posture', With the hands in the 'gesture of meditative equipoise'/ 1 Look [for the image again], in the above manner. If [one's reflected image] still does not appear, It may not be significant, as it may have been obscured by clouds or atmospheric winds, In which case, the examination should be postponed until the sky is clear. [When the reflected image does become visible, however,] Its examination entails three considerations: of completeness, shape, and colour. First, the completeness [of the reflected image] should be examined as follows: When [assessing] the completeness of the image In relation to the number of years [one is yet to live], If the hand-held implement is missing, This [indication] is called the 'separation from the deity on whom one has relied', 22 And it indicates that one's life may end in seven years' time. If the right hand is missing, [This indicates that] one may die after five years. If the left hand is missing, [This indicates that] one may die after three years.

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

If the right leg is missing below the knee, One may die after two years. If the left leg is missing, [This indicates that] one may die after one year.
Next, when [assessing] the completeness [of the image] In relation to the number of months [one is yet to live]: If the right part of the head is missing, One may die after nine months. If the left part of the head is missing, One may die after seven months. If the head is missing above the neck, One may die after five months. If the head and the neck are both missing, One may die after three months. If the upper trunk is missing, One may die after two months. If the lower trunk is missing, One may die after one month. Next, when [assessing] the completeness [of the image] In relation to the number of days [one is yet to live]: If the right side of the body is missing, One may die in twenty-nine days. If the left side lof the body] is missing, One may die in twenty-one days. Second, the [overall] shape [of the image] should be examined as follows: If [the image] is square, one may die after five months. If it is round, one may die after four months. If it is semicircular, one may die after three months, And if it is oblong, one may die after two months. In all these cases, death may be averted by ritual deception. However, if it is triangular, one will die after one month. If it resembles a bundled corpse, one will die after half a month. If it is upside down, 21 one will die after ten days. In these last three cases, death cannot be averted and is absolutely inevitable.

SIG:-;s OF DEATH

Third, the colour [of the image] should be examined as follows: If it is white in colour, and fades from the centre, This is a sign that one has displeased serpentine water spirits, king spirits, and gods. If it is black in colour, and fades from the right, This is a sign that one has been overwhelmed by beguiling forces and imprecatory female spirits. If it is red in colour, and fades from the left, This is a sign that one has been seized by martial haunting spirits, and by one's own lifelong companion gods, Or else that one will encounter woundings and diseases. If it is yellow in colour, and fades from the head, This is a sign that one has been seized by serpentine water spirits, king spirits and bewitchers. If it is blue in colour, and fades from the legs, This is a sign that one has been seized by serpentine water spirits and lake-dwelling medicinal spirits. If it is hazy and diffuse, This is a sign that one has been seized by imprecatory female spirits and the acolytes of Yama. If it appears yellowish and uneven, [This is a sign that one has been seized] by the spirit lords of the soil. If it is garish, irregular, and variegated, [This indicates that] one has been seized by the eight classes of spirits, Comprising the diverse beguiling forces of death. All these arc [the signs] recognised with respect to the colours [of the reflected image]. When any of the above signs of death occur, One should persevere with [the practices set down in] the Ritual Deception of Death, And then re-examine [the imagcJ, in the manner described above. If the limbs are complete, [Death] may be ritually deceived. But if the ritual deception of death fails to be effective, even after being applied three times,

168

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

This is a sign that the time has come for one's life to end. Therefore, those of highest [potential] should maintain the v1ew, Which accords with the profound abiding nature [of reality], 24 Those of average [potential] should meditate on the meditational deity, according to the generation and perfection stages, And those of lowest [potential] should persevere with the accumulation [of merit]. The above is the analysis of the reflected image in the sky.

SIGNS OF NEAR DEATH
The analysis of the signs of near death is now presented. The examination of [the signs] described so far should be made when one is in good health, For [at that time] there are [still] many possibilities [for recovery], because the signs of a remote death can be ritually deceived. Here, however, with regard to a sick person, The signs indicative of [near] death arise as follows:

If one's gums grow grimy and black, This is called the 'gathering of the personal demons of the elements', And it indicates that one may die after nine days. If the nostrils sag inwards and deflate, This is called the 'blockage of the passageway of the vital breath', And it indicates that one may die after nine days. If the limbs are subject to repeated fits of expansion and contraction, This is called the 'scaling of the mountain of the elements', And it indicates that one may die after five days. If the eyes stare fixedly, without blinking, This is called the 'escape of the mother-like vital breath', 25 And it indicates that one may die after three days. If the cheeks sag in\vards,

SIG!\S OF DEATII

This is called the 'rupture of the edge of the earth element', And it indicates that one may die at daybreak, ten days later. If breathing is repeatedly agitated, This is called the 'collision of vital energy and mind', And it indicates that one may die after six days. 26 If the tip of the nose inclines to the right or left, This is called the 'cutting off of the bridge of the nose', And it indicates that one may die after seven days. If tears flow uncontrollably from the eyes, This is called the 'impediment', And it indicates that one may die after five days. If the right or left cheek sags inwards, This is called the 'cutting off of the intervening muscle', And it indicates that [one may dieJ after one day. If the upper and lower teeth become locked, This is called the 'blockage of the path of the elements', And it indicates that one may die after two and a half days. If a black spot appears on the tongue, It is certain that one will die after two days. If the ears lie flat against the head, This is called the 'blockage of the stairway of the cars', And it indicates that one may die within half a day. If the xiphoid of the chest sags inward, This is called the 'rupture of the support of the water element', And it indicates that one may die after two weeks. If the hands shake for a prolonged time, when standing or sitting, One should know that one may quickly die. Other signs of [ncar] death should also be examined in the following way: At noun one should face towards the south, Placing the elbows on the knees, Whereupon, lifting up one's hand, One should place [the wrist] at the point between the eyebrows, And focus both eyes upon one's hand. [The image of the arm] will appear very thin, and if it then vanishes,

170

TilE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

This is called the 'severing of the bond between atmosphere and earth', And it indicates that one may die after nineteen days. [Or else, one should position oneself at sunrise] with a pool or pond to the east, And stand up and gaze at the surface of a wall towards the west. Two superimposed shadows will appear, one above the other, And if the upper shadow disappears, This is called the 'fall of a rider on a white lioness from the slopes of .Mount Sumeru', And it indicates that one may die after fifteen and a half days. [Alternatively, one should examine irregularities in one's urine specimen): 27 In the morning after a night when one has not engaged in sexual intercourse, Drunk alcohol, or talked excessively, One should fill a clay container with one's [first] urine, at sunrise, and examine it. If [the urine] has a bluish or reddish vapour which then disappears, This is called the 'vanishing of the froth of the ocean', And it indicates that one will certainly die after nine days. If the vapour is blackish and putrid, [This indicates that] one will die after one day. If the vapour is red and spotted, one may die after nine [days]. [Alternatively], one should defecate at sunrise, And if no vapour arises from [the faeces], This is called the 'ceasing of monks' smoke in the cities of the earth element', And it indicates that one may die after nine days. [Further], if, when the [closed] eyes are pressed, no circles of light appear, This is called the 'setting of the unchanging sun at the summit of :Vlount Sumeru', 28 And it indicates that one may die after three or seven days.

SIGN'> OF OEATH

I7I

[Further], if, when the ears arc cupped with the fingers, The humming sound which is [normally] present is absent, This is l:alled the 'interruption of the natural sound of the 4akinis from within Mount Sumeru'/ 9 And it indicates that one may die after seven or thirteen days. [Alternatively], on a morning when the sun is shining, One should turn one's back to the sun, And if no evaporation [is seen to] rise from the crown of one's shadow, This is called the 'rupturing of the Wish-granting Tree from the Summit of Mount Sumeru'/ 0 And it indicates that one may die after five days. [Also], if a single tuft of hair exceptionally rises upwards from the posterior fontanelles, This is called 'the black lord of death, one-legged Yavati, arising as an enemy against the Wish-granting Tree', 31 And it indicates that one may die after seven days. \X'hichevcr of these [signs of] death occur, They indicate the spel:ific time-frame [of impending death]. Therefore, upon the occurrence of such [signs], the Ritual Deception of Death should be performed three times. If this is carried out [successfully], untimely death will be averted. One should [therefore I exert oneself and persevere in [applying] the practical instructions, As [taught I in the Natural Liberation of Fear through the

Ritual Deception of Death.
But if the ritual deception does not take effect, Despite being performed on three occasions, Death is definite, for one's lifespan is at its end.

MISCELLANEOUS SIGNS OF DEATH 32
Here follows the presentation of the miscellaneous signs of death. Regardless of whether one is sick or healthy,

172

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF TilE DEAD

If one cannot see the point of the nose with the eyes,
One may die after five months.

If one cannot see the tip of one's own tongue,
One may die after three days even if one is not sick. If, when one gazes at the surface of a clear mirror, One cannot see with one's left eye, one may die after seven months. [Usually], when one breathes into the palm of one's own hand [from dose byj, it will feel warm, And when one does so [from a distance] it will feel cold, But if these [sensations] are reversed, One should know that one might die after ten days. If, when one looks for one's reflection in a vessel filled with water, No reflections, images, or the like, are apparent, This too is a sign of death. If, when bathing, water docs not cling to the area around the heart, Or if the water dries out [quickly 1around the heart, this may indicate death. It is [also] said that if no sound is emitted when one snaps the fingers, this may indicate death; And if the anklebones protrude from the legs, It is said that one may die after one month. [Furthermore],.it is said that if one leaves no footprints in soft earth, this may indicate death, And if one becomes weaker after having eaten nutritious food, And if one's shadow changes [its shape unnaturally], this too may indicate death. When lice and nits [suddenly] gather or leave, this may indicate death. If a former temperament, peaceful or wrathful, is reversed, And if a former pattern of behaviour, good or bad, changes, These too are signs indicative of a person's death. If one's image reflected in water or in a mirror lacks a head or limbs, This too may be a sign of death.

SIG:-iS OF DEATH

173

If there is a retraction of the penis and protrusion of the testicles, or vice versa, If a previously unheard pulmonary wheezing sound occurs, And if one cannot sense the smell of a dying butter lamp, These are said to be signs that one will certainly die [imminently].
In addition to such signs, the following may also occur: A turbid confusion and darkening of normal consciousness, A loss of one's former appetite, Embarrassment and incapacity in undertaking virtuous acts, A [restless] urge to leave, and an inability to stay in one place, Discomfort in bed and inability to fall asleep, Recurring amnesia and disorientation, Recurring memories of one's former kindred, and the desire to be with them [again], Death wishes and the desire to commit suicide, The desire to roam and travel alone, without companions, Inertia, faintheartedness, and character changes, Poor physique and the convergence of many different illnesses, Dreams which are disturbed and recurringly negative, The welling up of powerful mental anxiety, Impious behaviour, which does not avoid the five poisonous, dissonant mental states, Lack of clarity and loss of faith in the [sublime] instructions, And incontinence or constant secretion of generative fluids. Such are the [miscellaneous] signs that death is ncar. Examine and scrutinise them with awareness! Then, [if the time of death has arrived], The transference of consciousness should be performed! 33

SIGNS OF EXTREMELY NEAR DEATH
Now follows the presentation of the signs of extremely ncar death: The five sense faculties dissolve sequentially, And as a sign of this [imminent] demise of the sense faculties,

174

TilE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

One will be unable to digest food and drink, and one may vomit. Bodily warmth will diminish, the neck will not support the head, And one will feel that the head is sinking downwards. Then the five elements will dissolve as follows: 34 The internal earth element comprises flesh and bone. As an indication of its dissolution into the external earth element, The body will grow heavy, and its skin will sag towards the ground, Whereupon, as an internal sign, one will feel that the body is sinking into the earth. Because the energy of earth will have dissolved into water, One will be incapable [of supporting] one's physical form. Bodily strength will slip away, and consciousness will become clouded. 35 The internal water element comprises blood and serum. As an indication of its dissolution into the external water element, Saliva and nasal mucus will be secreted, While the throat and the tongue will become dry. Because the energy of water will have dissolved into fire, The warmth of the body will slip away, And consciousness will oscillate between clarity and dullness. 16 The internal fire element comprises warmth. As an indication of irs dissolution into the external fire element, The eyes will roll upwards, and one will no longer recognise people. Because the energy of fire will have dissolved into wind, The warmth [of the body] will converge. 37 The internal wind element comprises breath. As an indication of its dissolution into the external wind element, The breath will become wheezy, and the limbs will quiver.

SIGNS 01- DI-.ATII

175

As an internal indication, consciousness will become turbulent, While mirage-like flashing and fleeting [visions] will arise, And [concurrently] all lice and nits will leave the body.' 8 [Then], the red 'generative essence' derived from one's mother will rise upwards, And the phenomenon called 'redness' will occur, Wherein all appearances are suffused by redness. At that point, appearances will dissolve into the '[subtle mental consciousness of] increasing [redness]', And the forty patterns of conceptual thought that originate from attachment will cease. ' 9 [Then], the white 'generative essence' derived from one's father will fall downward, And the phenomenon called 'whiteness' will occur, Wherein all appearances are suffused by whiteness. At that point, the 'increasing [redness]' will dissolve into the '[subtle mind of] attainment', And the thirty-three patterns of conceptual thought that originate from aversion will cease. [During this process, each exhalation of] breath will become increasingly protracted, While all the blood of the body will converge in the 'life channel', 40 And then a single drop of blood will form at the heart-centre. In this way, the phenomenon called 'blackness' will occur, Engulfing the suffocating mind in blackness, And one will experience the sensation of falling into darkness, as if into an abyss. At that point, 'attainment' will dissolve into the '[subtle mind of] near art;linmenr', And the seven patterns of conceptual thought that originate from delusion will cease. [During this process], the mouth will open, and the eyes will roll upwards, [Exposing] their pale underside. External appearances Iwill fade], as during the setting of the sun,

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

And [finally J the sense faculties, memory, and perceptions will all cease, Whereupon, all [external] appearances will be absorbed into blackness. At that point, the [exhaled! breath will extend [from the bodyJ by a cubit, And [all] internal appearances will [also] come to resemble darkness. Then, the blood in the heart will form two drops, The head will stoop, And the [exhaled] breath will extend [from the body] by an arrow-length. Following this, the blood in the centre of the heart will form three drops, And, with HIKA-like gasps, the [exhaled] breath will extend [from the body] by a double arm-span. 41 [Then], the external breath will cease, and, engulfed by blackness, one will become unconscious. Then, the white and red 'generative essences' will meet together at the heart, And, as this occurs, one will swoon into a state of blissfulness. Thus, consciousness dissolves into inner radiance, 42 Engendering the experience of the 'co-emergent delight'. [At this point], awareness dissolves into actual reality, at the centre of the heart, [like the meeting of] mother and child. 43 [It is at this time that] the inner breath will [also] cease, 44 And the vital energy and mind will rest in the central channel. [At this moment], the inner radiance of the ground dawns upon all sentient beings, And, in the case of a few yogins who have achieved realisation, At this moment, the inner radiance of the path meets [the inner radiance of the ground], 45 Like a [meeting ofl a mother and child, And [thus, now], instantaneously, in an ascending and core-penetrating manner, These [yoginsJ will actualise the uncreated Buddha-body of Reality,

SIG:-.~

OF Dl:ATH

177

And through the Buddha-bodies of Perfect Resource and Emanation, They will perform inestimable actions for the sake of all beings. [Thus], the three buddha-bodies will be spontaneously present, And buddhahood will have been attained. Because of this, one should understand the significance of obtaining a human body, And cherish the experiential cultivation of the profound [sacred] teachings. For, even though the genuine inner radiance [of the ground] will[always] arise [at the moment of death], In the case of all beings who have not [already] realised the [inner radiance of the path], It will not be recognised. The [past] births that one has assumed and left behind are countless and infinite, And, although the inner radiance has indeed arisen an indescribable [number of times], It has been obscured [again and again] by the dense [fog of] coemergent ignorance, And [thereby], one has come to wander endlessly through cyclic existence. This is why it is important to achieve such a secure level [of realisation in this life].

[SIGNS INDICATING THE PLACE OF SUBSEQUENT REBIRTH]
At the moment, [as described above], when the outer breath is ab.:>ut to cease, Signs will also occur [which indicate] the place of subsequent rebirth. If [when dying] the right hand quivers, one talks nonsensically, And bodily warmth recedes from under the right armpit, [This indicates that] one will be born as an antigod.

TliE TIBETAN BOOK OF TilE DEAD

If nasal mucous and vital wind flow through the left nostril,
And bodily warmth recedes from the left eye, [This indicates that] one will be born as a human being. If animal sounds are emitted from the mouth, urine is secreted from the urethra, And bodily warmth recedes from the genitals, [This indicates that] one will be born as an animal. If the skin turns yellowish and lustreless, And there is salivation, accompanied by sensations of hunger, While reproductive fluid is secreted, [This indicates that] one will be reborn as an anguished spirit. If the right leg shakes, defecation takes place, Anger is felt, and bodily warmth recedes from the soles of the feet, It is said that this person will be born in the hells. If one experiences intense pride, bodily warmth recedes from the ears, And consciousness is emitted via the ears, !This indicates thatJ one will be born as a yak~a. 4 b

If good circumstances prevail [at the time of death],
And if there is minimal impairment of the vital organs, and dear mindfulness, And if one's spiritual teacher and fellow practitioners gather together, with an inspired perspective, And if serum and other signs appear at the crown of the head, And consciousness is transferred from the crown of the head, Then, it is said that one will achieve liberation, or take birth among the higher realms. 47 Therefore, it is most important [to create] the right circumstances at the time of death. Furthermore, there are indications and signs of a higher or lower rebirth That arise after the death of a sentient being. These relate to changes occurring in the sky, which should be examined over [an appropriate] number of days: If the sky turns dark brown, or vaporous [clouds] well up, Or if there are winds, chilling breezes, blizzards and so forth,

'iiG:-o;~

Of DEATH

179

All these are indications that the [deceased] will be born among the hell realms. If a lustrelcss mist hangs in the sky, and the sun and moon fade, If there is no wind or breeze, and the sun is obscured, Or if there are traces of rain, or else if it rains in the evening, All these are indications that the [deceased] will be born among the realms of anguished spirits. If the sky turns brownish, and there is unbroken black cloud, Or if there is a mist and an unpleasantly brown sky, All these are indications that the [deceased] will be born among the animal realms. If the clouds in the sky turn yellowish black and assume terrifying forms, And hurtle fiercely back and forth, driven by the wind, Or if there is thunder and lightning, and the sun and moon become invisible, All these are indications that the [deceased] will be born among the antigod realms. If the sky is bright and the sun and moon are clearly visible, IOr the atmosphere is I utterly clear, without wind or breeze, All these are indications that the [deceased] will be born among the god realms. If the sky is bright and clear, and fine white silken clouds appear, Or if the sun and moon are encircled by aureoles of light, All these arc the indications that the [deceased] will be born among rhe human realms. \X'hichever of the above indications arise, They signify that the Ideceased] will be born in one or other of the six !mundane] realms. These [signs] will occur either two, three, or seven days after death, As it is explained in the Tantra of the Cremation of Corpses. 48 The indications that one has attained the three buddha-bodies with a pure rebirth, Or that one has attained liberation in the manner of the sky-farcrs,

r8o

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

Are explained in the Tantra of the Cremation of Corpses, and in the Liberation by \Y./earing. 49 One should therefore consult these sources in detail.

CONCLUSION
Since living beings do not know when they will die, These signs of death should be looked for again and again. When the signs occur, indicating that one is certainly to die, Then one should renounce whatever possessions one has, And clearly call to mind the spiritual teacher, One's fellow practitioners, assembled around one, and the oral teachings. Especially, one should prepare to apply the transference [of consciousness ], 50 And listen to and reflect on the teaching of the Liberation by Hearing in the Intermediate States. 5 1 [However], when the external, internal, and secret signs of death do occur, If one does not perform the Ritual Deception of Death, 52 One will incur the downfall of abandoning the assemblies of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities, Who are the Conquerors, present within one's own body. 53 As a result, one's commitments will degenerate, and one will proceed to the hells. It is said that this is even more negative than the [five] inexpiable crimes. Therefore one should diligently persevere in the practices of the Ritual Deception of Death. [furthermore], if consciousness is transferred [too soon], When [only] one or other of the external or internal signs of death is present, This is called the 'slaying of the deities'. One must not allow this to occur, because the downfall wilfbe extremely great. But if all the signs of death are completely present, and cannot be averted,

SIGJ\~

Of DEATH

Then, and only then, should one apply the instructions of consciousness transference. It is said, in the tantras, with regard to the advantages of the timely application of consciousness transference, That even one \vho has committed an inexpiable crime Will proceed to higher rebirths and blissful states, And can attain liberation, [through the timely application of the instructions on transference]. EMA! I have here presented the Natural Liberation through [Recognition of] the Visual Indications and Signs of Death, Which is a supporting text to the teaching on the Liberation by Hearing in the Intermediate States, An extract from the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, [entitled] Natural Liberation through [Recognition on Enlightened Intention. 0 yogins of posterity, comprehend this as it is! SAMA Y A! rgya rgya rgya! .May [this teaching] be encountered by fortunate beings, Who possess a [ positive] residue of past actions, And who are intelligent, faithful, persevering, and compassionate. J\by [the activities associated with this teaching], The Natural Liberation through [Recognition of] the Visual Indications and Signs of Death, never be exhausted Until cyclic existence has been emptied! This is a treasure-teaching revealed by the accomplished master Karma Lingpa. ~1ay virtue prevail!

9
Natural Liberation of Fear through the Ritual Deception of Death

CONTEXT

This is the companion text to the previous chapter and it describes the practices to be followed in the event that definitive signs indicating death are discerned. The general consolidated rite described in this chapter follows the classical structure of many Vajrayana protective rituals. This consolidated rite, and similar rituals, are commonly performed in Tibetan Buddhist communities today by practitioners, both for their own benefit and for the benefit of others.* On the other hand, the specific rites, related to specific signs, are again idiosyncratic and are not commonly practised.

•for a selection of finely translated Vajrayiina protective rituals, see Stephen Beyer, The Cult ofTtJra.

Herein is contained the Natural Liberation of fear through the Ritual Deception of Death, 1 [an extract] from the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, {entitled} Natural Liberation through [Recognition of} I-:nlightened Intention. 2 I bow down to the glorious transcendent one, lYajra]kumara, whose face frowns with wrath! 3 The methods by which death can be averted and postponed should now be explained in order that living beings might be released from suffering, and in order that all the unremitting and extremely bitter sufferings of death, [in particular], might be dispelled by Mahakaruryika. 4 For, the sufferings of all such beings [who are afflicted by the discomforts associated with death 1 may be completely curtailed [through ritual means]. It is the case that, for some children of buddha nature, the signs of death will arise, [when looked for] as described in the previous chapter. The esoteric instructions for averting [the signs which indicate] the swiftly approaching year or month [of death] consist of both the general consolidated rite and specific rites.

GENERAL CONSOLIDATED RITE FOR AVERTING DEATH
The general rite for averting death is applicable in cases when the lifespan is threatened by obstacle-causing forces and [imbabncedJ elemental forces. Now, the body of a person acts as a supporting frame for the five elements, and it naturally comprises five append-

RITUAL DECEPTION OF DEATH

ages, five sense-organs, five solid viscera, five hollow viscera, and five great energy channels. In each of these [anatomical] parts, the five elements circulate in a clockwise manner, 5 and the cessation of life can occur due to [external] circumstances, or one could die through the mingling of conflicting internal elements, or life could also cease through the agency of a severe obstacle-causing force. The [time of] death may be ascertained by actually observing the respective signs associated with these [three causes of death], as and when they manifest. Immediately following the initial experience of such [signs], one should perform the [appropriate] rites for averting [death], which include ceremonies, services, and exorcisms. In this regard, [one should know that] of the twelve months of the year, two are ruled by each of the [five] elements, while the two [remaining] months are ruled [by all five elements] in common. Also, within each of these months [of the year] there is a five-day period ruled by each of the [five] elements, while the five [remaining] days are ruled [by all five elements] in common. [The signs of death] cannot be averted, however, when an [imbalanced] elemental or malevolent force [completely] controls the body. Just as, for example, if fire breaks out in a tall fortress, it is more easily averted while it is first confined within the lower storey, but should it reach the top [of the fortress], the fire cannot be extinguished. A person in whom the signs [of death] have manifested should first make preliminary offerings to the spiritual teacher, and to the Three Precious Jewels, and accumulate as much merit as possible. Then, the ritual for averting [an imbalance in the elements] should be effected through the agency of the wheels and seed-syllables of the elements. This should be done as follows: [First], draw a series of wheels [representing the elements] on Indian paper or palm leaf. The representation of the [green] wheel of the wind element 6 should depict four spokes and a circumference, with five Y A¥ syllables .inscribed, one on each spoke and one at the centre, and with the vowels and consonants [depicted] on the outer circumference. 7 The red wheel of the fire element should be similar [in design], with four spokes etc., but inscribed with five RA¥ syllables, placed as before, and the vowels and consonants on its circumference, [all placed] as before. Similarly, the yellow wheel of the earth element should be depicted with five LA¥ syllables, the white wheel of the

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

water element with five KHA¥ syllables, and the azure wheel of the space element with five E syllables. [Then], on each of these insuibed wheels, one should visualise the deities who embody the nature of these elements, corresponding in colour to their respective wheels. 8 Then one should make five offerings, [one] to [each of] these [deities], confess all negativity, and pray for one's desired purpose. After this, recite the seed-syllables of the individual [deities] the appropriate number of times, corresponding to the age of the person in years, and [visualise that] the [seed-syllables] are then absorbed into the [respective] deities. 9 Then [each of the depictions] of the [elemental] wheels should be placed inside containers made from two small bowls of dough, which are sealed together, and bound with threads of five colours, forming [the pattern of] a cross. In addition, a dough effigy of the subject's human form should be prepared, one cubit in height. The dough should be mixed with wood, water, fire, earth, and the breath of different species of sentient beings. 10 [Depictions of] the [same] five seed-syllables should then be inserted into the five [corresponding] sense-organs [of this effigy]. 11 As for the substances to be used for the ritual deception of the malevolent forces rwhich cause death], create substitutes, which may be made either of red minium clay, or else from dough, which is then painted. These should all be equal finger-widths in size, black, red, yellow, white, green and multicoloured, 12 corresponding in number to the age of the subject. These should be mixed with the subject's grime, clothing, nasal mucous, saliva, tears, hair, fingernails, and so forth; as well as with ground jewels or precious substances. They should then be adorned with [five] coloured wool threads and various silks, and also decorated with many sorts of bird feathers, [which are indicative] of bad omens. u Each [substitute] should then have a torma-offering [prepared], corresponding to it in colour, and [it should be surrounded by] a number of dough chang-bu offerings, equalling the subject's age in years. Then, consecrate all these with the six mantras and six gestutes, and repeat the following words, 'Take them! Take them! 0 mighty [malignant] ones! Your craving! Your attachment! Your clinging! Your memories! Your grasping! Your thoughts! Your contact! Let go of them! Be pacified! And be free!'

RITUAL DECEPTION OF DEATH

Then, together with the [bowls containing the elemental] wheels, cast [these substitutes] into the torrent of a wide river. Death will thereby be averted for up to three years. It is best, therefore, if this rite is performed once every three years, ev.en before the indications [of death] have occurred.

SPECIFIC RITES FOR AVERTING DEATH
I bow down to the deity Mahakarm;ika, Who is a sanctuary of great bliss. The methods employed in the specific rites for averting death are now presented.

[Ritual Averting of Signs of Near Death]
For all these rites, which follow, it is best if the subject's own spiritual teacher can be present, or alternatively a sympathetic friend. They should empower the five sense-organs [of the subject] with the seed-syllables of the elements. 14 Then, in cases when the fingernails become lustrcless, [as described in the previous chapter], a religious feast should be offered to seven monks. Donations should be offered, and one should receive the [Buddhist! vows, wearing yellow clothes. If one has already taken these vows, one should retake them. Thereby, [death! will be averted. Similarly, in cases when the cornea of the eyes begins to fade, small terracotta imprints of white earth should be moulded, their number equalling the subject's own age in years. After seven circumambulations [of the terracotta imprints], cast these into a lake or river, and then [retreat!, taking a number of paces equal ro the •ubject's age in years, while reciting the Heart-mantra of DcpenJent Origination 15 and not looking back. In cases when the hair of the nape of the neck grows upwards, one should prepare a dough with black seeds and [usc this to] make a substitute effigy, one cubit in height. Into its heart, one should then insert a number of crushed berries, equalling the subject's age in years, and attach a label bearing the subject's own name. The hair should be made from the subject's cut hair. Blood

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

should be drawn from the subject's body, and smeared on its face. It should then be wrapped in the subject's clothing and smeared with black pigment. Then, at one hundred and twenty-one paces from the subject's own dwelling, one should dig a triangular dark pit, and recite [RA~t], the seed-syllable of the element fire, a number of times equalling the subject's age in years. Then repeat the following words three times, 'Black demon! Take this [effigy]! This is important! This is important!' Then, throw it into the pit, defecate upon it, cover it with earth and run away. Then, one should re-examine [the above sign of death]. If it persists as before, the rite will not have been effective [and need not be repeated]. However, there is no doubt that if other [associated signs] have not been [completely] averted by a single performance [of the rite], they will be successfully averted following three such performances. In cases when the indication of [protruding] ankle bones appears, one should face westwards towards the sun when it is close to setting, and remove one's clothes. Then placing a dog's tail under you and some excrement in a heap in front, one should eat a mouthful and bark like a dog. This [rite] should be repeated three times. Also in cases when other people are afflicted by illness: if the roots of their teeth grow grimy and black, such a person should wear a goat's skin, face the sunrise, and bleat three times like a goat. Similarly, in cases when the nostrils sag inwards, it will be beneficial if one visualises the syllable A on the tip of the subject's nose, 16 recites the syllable A twenty-one times, and bathes in vanous nvers. In cases when the limbs are subject to repeated spasms, it will be beneficial if one draws a four-spoked wheel on each of the limbs with a solution of shellac, and bathes a number of times, equalling the subject's age in years, in [consecrated] water over which many dharm.zf mantras have been recited. In cases when the eyes stare fixedly, one should prepare a bountiful religious feast on behalf of the monastic community; and hold a party for a number of children, equalling the subject's age in years. One should also wear red clothing. In cases when the right cheek sags inwards, [for the rites of the earth element], one should mould a number of small terracotta imprints, equalling the subject's age in years. For the rites of the water element one should make a number of water libations, equal-

RITUAL DECEPTION OF DEATH

ling the subject's age in years; for the rites of the fire element one should make a number of burnt offerings, equalling the subject's age in years; for the rites of the wind clement, one should erect a number of flags, equalling the subject's age in years; and for the rites of the space clement, one should recite a number of syllables E, equalling the subject's age in years. Thereby, there is no doubt that [deathl will be ritually deceived. In cases when the breathing becomes agitated, it will be beneficial and [death] will be averted if one makes a concentrated paste of molasses over which [YA~t], the seed-syllable of the wind clement, has been recited. In cases when the nose tilts to the right or left, one should visualise a white syllable H 0 ~~ on the tip of the nose. In cases when tears flow uncontrollably, one should visualise the syllable BHRO~t on the subject's eyes. 17 In cases when the left cheek sags inwards, one should visualise the syllable K~A [on the cheek]. 18 In cases when the teeth become locked, one should visualise the syllable HO¥ [on the teeth]. If a black spot appears on the tongue, one should visualise the short syllable HO~t [on the tongue]. 19 If the ears lie flat [against the head], one should visualise the syllable MA¥ [on the ears). 20 If the xiphoid of the chest is sagging inwards, one should visualise the syllable MO¥ [on the xiphoidj. 11 In cases when the pulse of the carotid arteries 11 is missing, one should visualise the syllable H 0 ~~ [on those arteries]. These visualised syllables should be recited as many times as equals the subject's age in years; and they should also be drawn [on the appropriate point of the body J, using vermilion and scented water.

[Ritual Averting of the Signs of Remote Death]
Similarly, when an examination is made of one's reflected image optically projected onto the sky: if the symbolic hand-held imple.nent is missing, one should perform one hundred and eight feastofferings on behalf of one's spiritual teacher. If the right hand is missing, one should prepare a dough effigy, one cubit in height, using seven kinds of grain. The head should be fashioned to resemble an open-jawed lion, and a number of gull feathers should be inserted into it, equalling the subject's age in years. The effigy should then be carried down a main street tmvards a royal manor, which is located to the north.

THE TIBETAN BOOK 01' TilE OEAD

In cases when the left hand is missing, one should place the fang of a black-striped tiger and the fang of a black dog inside a weasel skin. On top of that one should place a dough effigy, kneaded together with the subject's own urine, and then ritually expel the effigy by throwing it into a river. In cases when the right leg is missing below the knee, fdeath l will be averted if, at dusk as the sun is setting, one offers a number of acacia or juniper lamps, equalling the subject's age in years. In cases when the left leg is missing, one should make an effigy of white earth, one cubit in height, and insert into its heart a birchwood stick, four finger-widths in length, marked with notches, equalling the subject's own age in number. It should be carried off at daybreak, and left in an empty quadrangle. In cases when the right part of the head is missing, one should compound various kinds of inauspicious earth with the fruits of black wood trees, and [out of this mixture] make a black amulet, into which the subject's own hair and clothing fragments should be inserted, along with a label made from mountain willow wood, [inscribed] with the names of the twelve [animal] year-signs. Then the amulet should be sealed, and a number of thorns of different species should be attached to its upper face. If one can find as many differing types of thorn as equals the subject's age in years it would be best. Otherwise, if one cannot find [that many], one should insert as many [differing types] as one can find. Then at midnight, one should put on black clothing and carry the amulet to a cemetery. In cases when the left part of the head is missing, one should make a dough effigy using twenty-five different types of grain, and insert [fragments of] human bones, horse bones and dog bones into its heart. Then, one should wrap the effigy in the subject's old clothing, and at twilight on the eleventh day [of the lunar month], one should give it to another person for insertion into a pit rwhich has been made] eighty paces to the south. At that time, one should cry out, proclaiming one's sorrows three times, and bury the effigy. Thereupon, [death] will be averted. In cases when the head is missing above the neck, one should make a number of burnt offerings using thorn bushes, equalling the subject's age in years, and burn them in succession. While each of these is burning, the heart-mantra syllable of fire [RA ¥]

RITUAL DECEPTION OF DEATH

193

should be recited, for a number of times equalling the subject's age m years. In cases when the head and the neck are missing, one should blacken one's body with burnt charcoal, and bind one's hair up on the crown of the head. Then, on a piece of paper, four fingerwidths in size, one should write the subject's age and the name of the present year, and around this in the four cardinal directions, one should inscribe the seed-syllables of the four elements. This [paper simulacrum] should then be attached to the nose, and at noon on the ninth day Jof the lunar monthj, one should run in each of the four directions, shouting out uninterruptedly, 'You take this! You take this!' Then the paper should be buried in a charnel ground. In cases when the upper trunk is missing, one should light a wood fire, and burn a label inscribed with the names of the twelve [animal! year-signs. In cases when the lower trunk is missing, it will suffice if one goes to a charnel ground, and uses the assorted bones one finds to make smoke. In cases when the right side of the body is missing, [one should recite the dhlirm;i mantra ofj U~QI~a[ -vijaya], as many times as equals the subject's age in years, and one should [mould] a number of small terracotta imprints, equalling the subject's age in years. In cases when the left side [of the body] is missing, one should read aloud countless dharu1.zi mantras, and wear red clothing.

[Ritual Averting of Further Signs of Near Death]
In C3ses when the 'severing of the bond between atmosphere and earth' occurs, one should read aloud the extensive scriptures, 23 or complete a number of virtuous acts. In cases when the 'fall of a rider on a white lioness' occurs, it will be beneficial if one performs as many maQ9ala rituals as equals the subject's age in years. If the 'rupturing of the [Wish-granting] Tree' occurs, one should know the cures for each of the [ailments affecting! the solid and hollow viscera. 24 In cases when urine scum appears reddish blue/ 5 one should fashion a dough effigy of the twelve [animal] year-signs, with their elcments/ 6 and for each subsequent change in the colour [of the

194

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

urine scum], one should make a single terracotta imprint, a single water libation, a single 'substitute effigy' of the subject, and a single burnt offering of birchwood. Then, at sunrise, one should carry these off to a cemetery in the north-east. In cases when [the urine vapour] is blackish and putrid, one's purpose will be achieved if one mixes powdered iron and copper with various grains, and scatters this [mixture] in the four directions. In cases when the vapour is red and spotted, one should make a number of substitutes, imbued with the subject's own body odour, equalling the subject's age in years, and attach a red silk flag and a porcupine quill to each. [Death] wilL be averted if one carries these off, together with assorted bones, to a main road in the east. In cases when one's excrement has no vapour, one should face the west at a time when the sun is at its peak, and inscribe the elemental seed-syllables on the skull of a horse. !Death] will then be averted if one neighs as many times as possible. In cases when the humming sound [normally heard] when the ears fare cupped] is absent/ 7 one should prepare a number of torma-offerings of various foods, equalling one's age in years, and attach a label to each of these, bearing the names of the twelve [animal year-signs]. One's purpose will be achieved if one then conveys these [torma-offerings] to the foot of a palm tree. 28 In cases when the [sign known as] 'lone-legged Yavati) arising [as an enemy] against the leaves of the Wish-granting Tree' occurs, one will be liberated [from the indications of death], if one perseveres in the accumulation [of merit] and engages in virtuous activities.

[CONCLUSION]
After the rituals have been performed according to the above instructions, one should look again [for the visual indications of death]. If the nature of their appearance has altered, the indicati6ns will undoubtedly be averted if the rites are repeated from seven to twenty-one times, or a number of times equalling the subject's age m years. This completes the esoteric instruction concerning the ritual

RITUAL DECEPTION OF DEATH

195

aversion of death, which was composed by the master Padmasambhava, as a means of liberating sentient beings from their sufferings. May it be encountered by one of worthy past actions!
SAMAYA!

rgya rgya rgya!

This is a treasure-teaching revealed by the treasure-finder Karma Lingpa.

10
Consciousness Transference: Natural Liberation through Recollection

CONTEXT
Practitioners of this cycle of teachings who commence with the Preliminary Practice (Chapter 1), and purify all their negativity and obscurations, generated by their past actions, through the practice of the Natural Liberation of Habitual Tendencies, the Hundredfold Homage and the Confession (Chapters 5-7), and who also experientially cultivate the practices described in the Introduction to Awareness (Chapter 4), will, in the best of cases, attain liberation from cyclic existence in this very lifetime. However, those who are unable to realise this level of achievement should implement the instructions on consciousness transference described in this chapter at the time of their own death. This wonderful practice is classed among the few that do not require previous experience of Vajrayana meditational practices in order to be effective. Once guidance has been received from a qualified spiritual teacher, the practitioner should follow the course of training, outlined in this chapter, until the signs of accomplishment arise. Then, the practitioner should maintain this proficiency throughout his or her life. It is regarded as extremely beneficial if those that are accomplished in this practice perform this consciousness transference in support of other people or animals when they are dying. This should be begun during the interval between the cessation of the outer respiration and the cessation of the inner respiration, at the point when the _mind and body separate, and can be continued for an appropriate period after death. As the text stresses, at the time of the practitioner's own death, it is critically important that this technique is only actually implemented at the exact moment of death.

Herein is contained an oral instruction entitled Consciousness Transference: Natural Liber,ltion {through Recollection], 1 which relates to the intermediate state of the time of death. This is the fourth topic in the Guide to the Six Intermediate States according to the Perfection Stage, 2 which is an extract from the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, {entitled} Natural Liberation through f Recognition of] Enlightened Intention. 3

INTRODUCTION
This Consciousness Transference: Natural Liberation through Recollection, which is the fourth topic [in the Guide to the Six Intermediate States according to the Perfection Stage, and which specifically contains] guidance on the intermediate state of the time of death, will [now] be presented. 4 This Consciousness Transference: Natural Liberation through Recollection is a powerful method, a means for attaining buddhahood which does not [necessarily] require meditation. This oral instruction through which buddhahood can be attained at the time of death is [therefore! most valuable for those who have not trained in the cycle of Cutting through Resistance, or [in the meditations of] the Illusory Body, Dream Yoga, and Inner Radiance, and have [therefore] not realised the truth of the four modes of liberation. In particular, [iris valuable] for ordinary persons, officials, householders and distracted individuals who have had no time to m~di­ tate, despite having received those [instructions!. That is, [it is valuable to alii those who have not engaged in experiential cultivation, even though they may have obtained profound teachings, and who, [as a consequence], may die in an ordinary frame of

201

mind, having left the instructions as (unrealised] words, or having left [their relationship to] the [sacred] teachings as a [mere] theoretical understanding. Now, anyone who is born is subsequently certain to die. Yet the time of death is unknown. Indeed, since one's death might be imminent, one should be constantly alert to [the signs which portend] death. In accordance with the Natural Liberation through /Recognition of/ the Visual Indications and Signs of Death, 5 one should analyse the signs indicative of remote death, the signs indicative of near death, the signs indicative of uncertain death, and the signs indicative of inevitable death. One should also persevere with [the practices contained in] the Ritual Deception of Death, as these correspond to the signs of death which might appear.~> If, on the other hand, one were to perform this consciousness transference, either when the signs of death are not fully present or even when the signs are fully present but without having [first] practised the ritual deception of death, then one would, in effect, incur the crime of slaying a deity, and the crime of committing suicide. This is an even greater misdeed than committing [one of the five] inexpiable crimes. Thus, it is essential that one should perform the general and specific ritual deceptions of death, whichever is appropriate, three times or as often as is required, in accordance with the Natural Liberation of Fear through the Ritual Deception of Death. 7 If, despite having performed the [appropriate] ritual deception of death on three occasions, the indications of death are unaltered, this demonstrates that death is certain to occur. It is at this time [only] therefore that one should begin to engage in the [actual practice of] consciousness transference. Since it is said that [this practice may confer] higher rebirth or liberation even on one who has committed the five inexpiable crimes, the timely application of consciousness transference can be of extremely great benefit.

TRAINING IN CONSCIOUSNESS TRANSFERENCE
[The practice of] consciousness transference has two aspects: [namely] training and the actual application.

2.02.

TilE TIBETA:-.1 BOO!\ OF THE DEAD

First, with regard to training: just as, for example, when a man faces the inevitability of the arrival of an external foe, before his enemy approaches, he will prepare armour, weapons, and arrows, and train in the arts [of warfare], but only don [and apply] these when the enemy [actually] arrives and strikes, so, in this context, the training takes place before the indications of death have arisen. Since one does not know when one will die, training should be undertaken from the present moment, for it is essential that [one is able] to complete the actual application [of consciousness transference] successfully, when death becomes certain. Now, the training in consciousness transference may be undertaken [in two contexts]: at times when [general] guidance [on preliminary practices] is being given, or when specific guidance on consciousness transference is being given, whichever is appropriate. H As found in the preliminary practices of the [general] guidance,'} one should reflect upon the difficulty of obtaining [a human form endowed with] freedoms and opportunities [conducive to practice], and [one should reflect on] the sufferings of cyclic existence, and develop an attitude which is disillusioned with cyclic existence and desirous of renunciation. Furthermore, even though one has obtained [the above freedoms and opportunities j, which are difficult to obtain, one should [always], from the depths of one's heart, remember death, which is never far away. Then, sitting on a comfortable seat in the posture of the bodhisattvas, one should, in the following manner, close the orifices [of the body which lead to rebirth] within cyclic existence: The body should be upright and erect. The hands should cover the knees, forming the earth-touching gesture, 10 and the shoulders should be drawn upwards. Then, in one's own heart one should visualise an azure blue syllable H 0 l'yt, blazing with light, from which a single syllable H 0 ~~ breaks away and descends to the rectum, precisely blocking the orifice through which the hells are entered. Another syllable H 0 .~1 breaks away and descends to the orifice of procreation, thereby blocking the entrance to [the realm of] the anguished spirits. Similarly, another syllable H 0¥ [br~aks away and] blocks the entrance Ito the world of] animals, which is in the urethra, while yet another syllable HO 1'y1 moves to the navel, and others to the mouth, the nostrils, the eyes, and the ears, each one precisely blocking its respective orifice. 11

CO="~CIUCS:-.;EsS

TRA="SFE:.RE:.="CE

203

Then, on the crown of the head, one should visualise that the crown fontanelle is blocked by a downward-facing white syllable 12 HA~L [Further, one should visualise] the central channel, in the middle of the body, straight and erect, with a yellowish white lustre, like a taut air-filled sheep's intestine, with its lower extremity extending below the navel, and its upper extremity extending to the crown fontanelle. At the lower extremity below the navel, at a focal point where the three [main] channels converge, 13 one should visualise a brilliant white seminal point, which is the essence of awareness, radiant and clear, breathing rhythmically, continuously pulsating, and on the verge of ascending. In the space above the crown of the head, one should visualise one's spiritual teacher, seated, full of joy, in the form of Vajradhara. Then, one's bodily weight should be [drawn in and] concentrated upwards, and the rectum forcefully closed. The eyes should be turned upwards, the tongue [lifted to l rest along the upper palate, and the hands firmly placed in the 'fist' gesture, 14 with the thumbs pressing down on the bases of the fourth fingers. [Then], from below the navel, the seminal point is moved forcefully upwards, and, through the engagement of speech, it is elevated with the support of guttural gasps pronounced as 'HI-KA HI-KA'. Through the force of the vital energy below, the seminal point is unable to resist being accelerated upwards through the central channel. By this method, it is moved upwards, with seven HI-KA gasps, to the navel. Then, \Vith a further seven HI-KA gasps it reaches the heart, with a further seven it reaches the throat, and with a further seven it reaches the space between the eyebrows. Then, uttering H 1- KA, [a final time], the seminal point makes contact with the syllable HA¥ at the crown fontanelle, after which one should visualise that it spins downwards again and comes to rest below the navel as a white diffusion. Rest in that state for some time. By simply repeating this exercise a few times, signs will emerge that this [training in] consciousness transference has taken effect: a sensation of warmth will well up at the crown fontanelle, and there will he sensations of prickliness, irritation, numbness, and swelling, while the crown of the head will seem to become supple and numb, and serous fluid, blood, and so forth will emerge at the crown fontanelle. \'\'hen this occurs, the spiritual teacher should carefully examine the crown fontanelle: a peacock feather or stalk

204

THE TIBETAN BOOK Or THE DEAD

of grass should be inserted [into the fontanelle I so that it settles into [the fontanelle]. This [insertion] confirms that the training in consciousness transference has been successfully achieved. If you do not stop at this point, your practice can limit your lifespan. Therefore, one should cease the visualisation and yogic exercises, and the crown of the head should be massaged with butter or grain-seed oil. If, on the other hand, the signs do not appear, ]the seminal point] should be moved upwards many times by vigorous effort until the signs eventually do emerge. Furthermore, swelling may occur on the crown of the head, and if [the seminal point] remains localised at the crown fontanelle [and the fontanelle is not breached!, headaches and similar [uncomfortable sensations] will occur. Therefore, one should visualise that the syllable HA~1 at the crown fontanelle is opened up, and that the seminal point emerges vertically from the crown fontanelle, touches the feet of the spiritual teacher [visualised above], and then descends again through the fontanelle to rest motionless below the navel. By repeating this exercise, just a few times, the crown fontanelle will be opened, blood or serous fluid will certainly emerge, and the blade of grass can then be inserted. After this, it is very important that the crown fontanelle be re-blocked by the syllable HA¥, for not doing so could limit your lifespan. Subsequently fin training], when manoeuvring the seminal point up and down within the central channel without the HI-KA breathing and yogic exercises, it remains very important to keep the crown fontanelle blocked with the syllable HA~t. The [training in I consciousness transference should be practised in the above manner. However, because HI-KA is a mantra which reduces the lifespan, this should only be used until [training in] consciousness transference is successful. Otherwise, after [the training] has been successful, do not resort to the HI-KA breathing. If, on account of excessive exertion, one overdoes [the training inj consciousness transference, one will run the risk of lapsing into perpetual unconsciousness. In such cases, and if the consciousness has risen -roo precipitously, and one experiences vertigo and so forth, one should beat the soles of the feet with the fists and massage the crown of the head. Then, while focusing intensely on the visualisation of an extremely heavy golden stOpa on the soles of the feet, one should

CO!'<'>CIOL"'>~l:'\S

THA="'>FF.HE:-<CE

205

perform many yogic jumps, so that [the consciousness] is becalmed. These essential points are to be generally observed in the course of the practical training. The 'consciousness transference of the training phase' which has just been described should be carefully practised while one is in good health, and before the signs of death emerge. SAMA YA!

THE ACTUAL APPLICATION Of CONSCIOUSNESS TRANSFERENCE AT THE TIME OF DEATH [The Timing and Context]
Secondly, the application phase refers to the actual transference of consciousness, which is to be undertaken when the indications of death are unequivocally present and when, even after performing the !appropriate] ritual deception of death [practice] on three occasions, it is indicated that one will not recover. There are four [modes of actual consciousness transference], namely: consciousness transference into the Buddha-body of Reality; consciousness transference into the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource; consciousness transference into the Buddha-body of Emanation; and the consciousness transference of ordinary persons. Concerning these, it is said [in the Root Verses of the Six 11lter-

medi,ztc StatcsJ: 1'
Alas, now as the intermediate state of the time of death arises before me, Renouncing [all] attachment, yearning and subjective apprehension in every respect, I must undistractedly enter the path, on which the oral teachings are clearly understood, And eject my own awareness into the uncreated expanse of space. Now, when the signs of the onset of the intermediate state of the time of death are provoked by fatal illnesses, at this time, when the indications of death are completely present, there are oral instructions which bring clearly to mind that which may be

206

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

obscured during the intermediate state of the time of death. [The clarity of these instructions] is likened to [the clarity of] an elegant lady looking into a mirror. These [instructions] arc twofold: a clarification which is elucidated by another 16 and a clarification undertaken by oneself. In the former context: regardless of whether or not one perceives the unequivocal presence of the signs of [one's own impending] death, these signs will be recognised by the physician and by the nurses, based on [their knowledge of] the behavioural changes which occur. 17 Nonetheless, if one's own mindfulness remains clear, one should also examine the indications of near death of one's own accord. In any case, when [it is thus ascertained that] one is dying, an invitation should be sent to one's root spiritual teacher if he or she lives nearby, and all one's possessions should be offered to the teacher, without even a single instant of attachment. If one remains even slightly attached [to worldly goods], one may be cast into inferior existences, as recounted in the story of the monk Barwasum. 18 If an individual is unable to make such offerings in actuality, these should be offered mentally, and thereby a complete state of renunciation should be achieved. In particular, one should not leave any object at all close to [the dying person] which could give rise to attachment or aversion. This is the sense of the verse 'Renouncing [all] attachment, yearning and subjective apprehension in every respect.' At this time, renunciation should be generated stainlessly. As it is said in the T,mtra of the Coalescence of Sun and Moon: 19 In particular, one should please with offerings and feasts One's own spiritual teacher, the monastic community, And the field of accumulated merits. 20 Once the spiritual teacher has arrived, one should confess any former violations or breaches of the commitments, if any; and make amends for any transgressions or downfalls previously committed. If one holds any vows, these should be reaffirmed, aiJd if no vows J.re held, these should be taken on the basis of the Rite of Going for Refuge. 21 Then, if one has had previous experience in [the practice of] consciousness transference, one should assume the appropriate bodily posture, and the visualisation should be

C 0 :-.; '> C I 0 L! '> :-.; L '> '>

I R :\

~

'>

r

L K I· :-.; C 1:

207

repeatedly elucidated by one's spiritual teacher, in accordaiKe with the [specihc tradition] of consciousness transference one formerly practised.-~ 2 Thereupon, it should take effect. As an indication of success, as soon as one has expired, the signs that this transference has been effective, such as blood or serous f1uid [appearing] at a swelling on the crown of the head, will certainly emerge. If these signs do emerge, there will be no need to elucidate the intermediate states. Bur if they do not appear, the spiritual teacher should place his or her lips dose to the car, or else place a bamboo reed or a hollow tube of p<lper close to the car, and through it slowly elucid,lte the verses [describing! the intnmcdiatc states in succession, starting with the intermediate state of reality or inner radiance, in accordance with the Libcrdtiun hy Hc.zring. 21 If this is done appropriately, it is certain that [these instructions! will be effective. [The re;lson for their effectiveness can be illustr<Hed as follows): If, for example, a powerful king were to dispatch amessage through a reliable person, it would be impossible for that person to forget [the mcss;lgcJ. He would communicate it absolutely, fearing that royal repr<><lch would ensue if he were to forget. Similarly, in this context, too, fearing the abyss of the lower existences, one will certainly retain the instructions in mind, and thereby achin-c ceruinry as to [the nature) of the intcrmcdi,Hc st.Hc of realitv. If one's spiritual teacher is nor present, the rlucidarion should be nude by a spiritual friend holding the same teaching lineage [as oneself[, or else by a fellow spiritual sibling whose commitments have not been dissipated, and whose view and conduct arc sympathetic. It is said in the T.mtr.z o/ the Cualcsancc o/ Sun . md .\loon: At th<H time, the oral instrucrions of the spiritu<1l teacher Should sJtur~ltc one's 111L'nt,d continuum. These truths should be repeatedly elucidated. The elucidation should he made repcatcdly by a spiritual teacher, spiritual friend, or by a fellow spiritual sibling. Such is thc form of the darihcation which should be made by others [who are caring for a dying person]. Secondly, the clarification to be undertaken by oneself [at the time of one's own death) is applicable in cases where the spiritual

20H

THE TIBETAN BOOK Of THl: DEAD

teacher and fellow students have not gathered together, or \vhere one dies alone in a hermitage, or when one already has a refined experience [of consciousness transference] and docs not require an elucidation to be made by others. In such cases, one should bring dearly to mind the practices which one formerly experientially cultivated.

Consciousness Transference into the Buddha-body of Reality
Now, if one is a person who has some understanding of inner radiance, who has cultivated the view of emptiness, and encountered it directly in [one's own] awareness, the consciousness transference into the Buddha-body of Reality is the supreme [method]. Thus, when this is undertaken, one should first ensure, as abo\·e, that one is completely without a single possession which could generate attachment or aversion. If one is capable, one should secure one's body in the seven postures [of Vairocana], or sit upright. If this is not possible, one should lie on one's right side, with the head pointing north, and repeatedly think: 'Now that I am about to die, how fortunate am I to be able to effect the transference of consciousness based on a profound instruction such as this, \vhile in the three realms of cyclic existence in general and in particular in this degenerate age. So today, I shall now recognise the inner radiance of death to be the Buddha-body of Reality, and consequently take birth as an inestimable number of emanations, in order to guide each in accord with his or her needs. I must act on behalf of sentient beings until cyclic existence has been emptied!' In this way, generate the altruistic intention [to attain enlightenment for the benefit of others] fervently and repeatedly. Then, one should think undistractedly, as follows: 'I must attend to [the words of] my spiritual teacher, and must [actj in accordance with the content of the profound teachings which I [formerly] received.' The whole point is that one should not be distracted from a state in which the oral instructions are clearly held in mind. Then, without concocting thoughts, one should free oneself from the [dualistic] framework of the object, which is to be transmigrated, and the [subjective] an of consciousness transference. Intrinsic awareness should he uncontrived and clear, undistractcd

CONSCIOCS~ESS

TRAl"St-EREI"CE

209

and distinct, stark in its [coalescence otl radiance and emptiness. Let [this experience] remain unmoving for a prolonged period. If one expires in this state, the mother and child inner radiances, that is to say the inner radiance of the ground and the inner radiance of the path which is the focus of one's current meditation, will encounter each other, like a stream meeting the main river. [Thus], one will attain the uncreated Buddha-body of Reality, in an upward-moving core-penetrating manner; and liberation will be instantaneous. This is called the 'pure consciousness transference into the Buddha-body of Reality' because those who have highly developed experience and realisation need repeat only this, again and again. It is the best of all modes of consciousness transference. Now, in the case of those who have not recognised [intrinsic awareness I and \vho are without experience and realisation, though they may well try to apply this consciousness transference into the Buddha-body of Reality, [this would be ineffectual]. It would be [like trying] to show a material object to someone who has been blind from birth, or [like trying] to point out a [particular! star to a dog. It is very important, therefore, that the [method of] consciousness transference and the manner of its clarification correspond to the mental capacity of the individual. If, however, the consciousness transference into the Buddhabody of Reality is effected in the above manner, as an 'outer sign', the sky will become clear and unclouded; and as an 'inner sign', the body will glow radiantly and its lustre will not fade for a long time. The 'secret signs' include the appearance of the white syllable 24 A¥ and the azure syll<1ble H 0¥ [among the cremated relics ]. Such is [the instruction onj the consciousness transference into the Buddha-body of Reality. SA~1A YA!

Consciousness Transference into the Buddhabody of Perfect Resource
If one chiefly practises the generation stage [of meditation I and
particubrly if one has little certainty with regard to [the experience of! emptiness, one should undertake the consciousness transference into the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource. If one is capable of securing one's body in an upright position, adopting as suggested before the appropriate bodily posture, then one should sit upright

l.IO

TilE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

and bring clearly to mind the visualisations of consciousness transference, as previously practised during one's training. In particular, one should clearly visualise above the crown of one's head, upon a lotus, sun and moon cushion, one's spiritual teacher [in the form ofl the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource. [The teacher may be visualised as] the great Vajradhara, or Vajrasattva, Avalokitesvara, and so forth, and especially as one's own particular meditational deity, following whichever [practices of] the generation stage one prefers. One should meditate clearly on the essence of intrinsic awareness as a white seminal point, [situated] below the navel at the lower extremity of the central channel within the body; or alternatively, [one should clearly visualise here] the seed-syllable of one's very own meditational deity: a white syllable Ai;I, an azure syllable H0~1, a red syllable HRII;I, and so forth, as appropriate. 15 It will be best if one [also] clearly visualises that [each of] the orifices [of one's body] is blocked by the syllable HO¥; but if this is not visualised, one should focus one's consciousness singlepointedly within the central channel, without mentally engaging the orifices. Then, one's bodily weight should be [drawn in and] concentrated upwards, and the rectum forcefully closed. The eyes should be turned up\vards, and the tongue llifred to] rest along the [upper] palate. The lower vital energy should be moved upwards, while focusing one's consciousness within the central channel. Then, in conjunction with a series of HI-KA HI-KA gasps, [the seminal point] should be moved successively upwards until it reaches the crown fontanelle. There, it breaks open the orifice of the crown fontanelle, which had been blocked by the syllable HA¥, and shoots upwards, like an arrow, blazing with white light, and then it dissolves into the heart of the meditational deity [seated above]. One's awareness should then be focused upwards into the heart of the meditational deity, and without letting it descend, it should be repeatedly drawn in, and o.1hsorbed [into the deity's heart]. Then, finally, [the visualisation of] the meditational deity should also be dissolved into a non-referential state. If one's breath ceases while [resting) in that state, one will attain the status of an awareness holder, inseparable from the meditational deity; and achieve buddhahood in the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource. If the consciousness transference into the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource docs take effect in the above manner, as an 'outer

CO;\SCJOt;St-.;E'>S T!{A;\'>I'ERE:-.oCE

21 I

sign', the sky will be filled with rainbows and light; and as an 'inner sign', blood or serous fluid will emerge from the crown fontandle at the top of the head, or dew-like drops, swellings, and so forth will also appear. The 'secret signs' include the appearance of any one of the five types of bone relic, and the appearance of fbone rdics] shaped like the physical form or hand-implement of a deity, and so forth. 26 Such is the consciousness transference into the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource. SA.MA YA!

Consciousness Transference into the Buddha-body of Emanation
As for the appropri<lte bodily posture, one should lay the body down on its right side, since [this position] will facilitate the departure of the vital energy from the left nostril. Then, one should request that a statue, relief, or drawing of the Buddha-body of Emanation be placed in front of oneself. This could be a represent<ltion of the Great Sage [Sakyamuni Buddha], the King of ~1edicine [Yai9uryapr<1bharaj<l], ~laitreya, or Padmasambhava of O<)<)iyana; or it could be an image of one's own spiritual teacher or spiritual friend. Offerings should be extensively arrayed before the [image]. If no image is actually present, clearly visualise one, and make mentally imagined offerings. Then, all those present, oneself and others, should make the following aspirational prayer, saying, 'Now, may I, consequent on my death, for the sake of all sentient beings, take birth in an emanational body; and may this be of extensive benefit to all living beings! Nlay this emanational body also be endowed with the major and minor mo1rks, and may there be no obstacles to its lifespan and enlightened <.lctivity! ~lay I be reborn as a great awareness holder, holding the lineage of the buddhas of the three times!' ~lent<1lly, too, one should retain this fervent aspiration [constantly[, and visualise that within the utterly translucent central channel, the essence of one's awareness is located in a triangle below the navel, in the form of a white seminal point, tinged with red, which is glistening and concentrated, and on the verge of rising up\vards. Immedi<.ltely, the rectum should be closed and drawn in, so th<lt there is no option but for the seminal point to

212

TilE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

be forced upwards by the power of the vital energy below. Then, by means of HI-KA HI-KA gasps, which should be performed to the best of one's ability, [the seminal point] should be moved upwards, and, as it reaches the orifice of the left nostril, the [motion of one's] awareness should be synchronised with [that of one's] respiration. Then, in an instant, like an arrow being fired, [one's awareness] should penetrate the heart of the Buddha-body of Emanation which is before one. Let the vital energy and awareness remain there, without reabsorbing them [into one's body]. This exercise should be repeated until one's consciousness docs depart [the body]. Consequently, [the transference] is certain to take effect. Once consciousness does depart in that state, it is certain that one will subsequently take birth in an emanational body which will act for the benefit of sentient beings. If the consciousness transference into the Buddha-body of Emanation does occur in the above way, as an 'outer sign', clouds or rainbows will appear in the sky, some resembling a wish-granting tree or unfurled white silk, or a shower of flowers, and so forth. As an 'inner sign', blood, serous fluid, or generative tluid will emerge from the left nostril; or else dew-like drops, and so forth may appear. The 'secret signs' include the appearance of many small relics, a complete unbroken skull, and [bones in the shape of] the hand-emblems of deitics.-~ 7 Such is the consciousness transference into the Buddha-body of Emanation. SAMAYA!

Instantaneous Consciousness Transference
All the [above methods of consciousness transference are appropriate 1 in the context of a person whose death is gradual; but in the case of those who die suddenly, there will not be sufficient time to engage in meditations, such as those [just described]. In this case, therefore, the method of instantaneous consciousness transference becomes most important. Since it is unknown what the circumstances of one's death will be, one should, from this very moment, alternate one's training, sometimes practising the consciousnesstransference technique of the training phase, [described earlier], and sometimes practising the instantaneous consciousness transference. The [practice] should be undertaken in the following manner:

CONSCIOU~NE~S

rRAI'.;~fERENCE

213

One should establish a clear and mindful resolution, thinking, 'If I die suddenly, my mental focus should be directed towards the crown of my head!' This resolution is extremely important. It is similar, for example, to the resolution of someone who thinks that one should get up and leave [home] when the moon rises on the twenty-second day [of the lunar month]. If [this mental focus] is continuously maintained during the evening of the [day before], one will [actually J awaken when the moon rises, just after midnight. In exactly this way, from this very moment onwards, one should practise projecting one's mental focus upwards to the crown of the head whenever strong fear arises. Then, when 'sudden death' docs occur, as when falling straight over a steep precipice, the thought will arise, 'I am dying!' As soon as this happens, it would be best if one were to fervently recall one's spiritual teacher, or recall one's particular meditational deity, [as being present, seated] on the crown of one's head. Even if there is not sufficient time to make this recollection, it is essential to project one's mental focus upwards towards the crown of one's head. The rea·son for doing so is that even [ordinarily] now, when strong fear arises, we tend to cry out, '0 father! spiritual teacher!' [Similarly! therefore, at the moment [of sudden death] also, it is certainly possible that one will recollect one's teacher, or [if one has trained in this practice] that one will focus one's awareness at the crown of one's head [instinctively]. This is the most profound crucial point. Likewise, were one to be engulfed by a great fire, or swiftly carried away by a mighty river, or struck on the head by lightning, or pierced by an arrow through the heart, one must immediately recollect one's spiritual teacher, [as being seated] on the crown of the head, or alternatively one must [at least] direct one's awareness to the crown of the head. This is called the 'instantaneous consciousness transference', and it is also known as the 'forceful consciousness transference'. As this is most profound, one should train one's mind assiduously fin this technique]. Moreover, it is said that at times when ordinary people experience strong fears, there are many advantages when they simply cry out '0 father! spiritual teacher!' or invoke the name of a buddha, saying, '0 Orgyan!' 211 If this is so, the benefits of [additionally] directing one's mental focus towards the spiritual teacher, present on the crown of the head, are inconceivable.

THE TIBETA:-.1 BOOK OF THE Dl:AIJ

There are, altogether, nine different pathways through which consciousness transference can occur, and these are associated with persons of superior, average, and inferior capacity. The aperture of the crown fontanelle is the pathway through which [consciousness] departs to the pure [realm of the] sky-farers. Given this, fit is said that] one \viii attain liberation if awareness exits through the [crown fontanelle]. Since this is the supreme pathway, it is extremely important that one trains in directing one's mental focus towards this [aperture]. Furthermore, if consciousness is transferred through the pathway of the eyes, [it is said that) one will be born as a universal monarch, and if it is transferred through the left nostril, one will obtain an unimpaired human body. These are the three optimum apertures Iassociated with those of superior capacity]. One will, however, be born as a yak~a if [consciousness is transferred I through the right nostril, or as a god of the world-system of form if lit is transferred] through the ears, and as a god of the world-system of desire if [it is transferred I through the navel. These are the three medial apertures [associated with those of average capacity]. Lastly, one will be born as an animal if [it is transferred] through the urethra, as a anguished spirit if Iit is transferred) through the sexual passage/" and as a hell being if it is transferred through the rectum. These are the three inferior apertures [associated with those of inferior capacity]. Given that there are such very great consequential differences between the various apertures through which consciousness transference may occur, there will be inestimable benefits in directing one's awareness to the crown of the head, at the time of death. Such is the forceful consciousness transference. SAMA Y A!

Consciousness Transference of Ordinary Beings
In the case of those who have not realised the meaning of emptiness, and who do not know the significance of the generation and perfection stages Iof meditation], it is the consciousness transference of ordinary beings which should be applied as follows·: The head [of the dying person] should point north, with the body lyirig down on the right side. A spiritual teacher or fellow practitioner should then remind [the dying person] to pay attention, and if health permits, he or she should be encouraged to take refuge, to

CO!'\SCIOLJS!\:ESS TRA!'\SFE){I:.!':CE

215

cultivate an altruistic intention, and to confess negativity. Then, the teacher should confer the vows of the Buddhist laity, and if there is time, the empowerments of the way of secret mantras should be conferred. Consequently, by dying with a positive momentum of past actions, the individual who has ljust received] these untainted commitments and vows, with respect to the nature of reality, w will be liberated from inferior existences, and there will be inestimable advantages. In the case of a person who cannot do even that, one should slowly call out the name [of the dying one], saying, 'Lord Mahakarul)ika is present on the crown of your head! Be reverential!' One should stroke the crown of his or her head and gently pull the hair above the crown fontanelle. Thereby, the consciousness will [be encouraged to] exit from the crown fontanelle. In the case of those who cannot do even that, and whose capacity is indistinguishable from that of animals, one should repeat the words, many times, 'Homage to Buddha Ratnaketu!', directing these [words] towards the head [of the dying person]. As a consequence, they will certainly be liberated from [rebirth in] the inferior existences, because, when in the past this buddha made his aspirational prayer, he did so, saying, '~lay all who hear my name be liberated from frebirth inJ the inferior existences!' Alternatively, if one calls out the name of the [Medicine J Buddha Bhai~ajyaguru Vaif;ioryaprabharaja, it is said that just by hearing his name, [the dying person] will be protected from the sufferings of inferior existences. Similarly, one may c.11l out the name of whichever buddha one may know, and recite whichever blessed heart-mantra one may know, such as the Six-syllable .\;1anrra. In particular, if one has at hand the Liberation by Wearing, lt one should read this aloud, and also recite the Liberation by Hearing, ' 2 repeating whichever aspirational prayers one may know. Since the positive momentum of [the dying person's] past actions can thereby be secured, this will be most advantageous. In the worst cases, it is said that simply by dying with the body lying down on the right side and the head pointing north, [that person] will not proceed into inferior existences.

216

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

CONCLUSION
In summary, since it is essential that all the advantages [that accrue from] practising the teachings should converge at the time of death, it is extremely important to become skilled [during one's lifetime] in the process of dying. [This completes] the Guide to the Intermediate State of the Time of Death entitled Consciousness Transference: Natural Liberation through Recollection. SAMAYA! rgya rgya rgya!

11
The Great Liberation by Hearing

CONTEXT

Traditionally, the procedures followed when a lama visits a dying or deceased person are intricate and prolonged, and will vary depending on whether the person is about to die, has just recently died, or has been dead for some days. When a person is approaching death, it is customary for the relatives or close friends to seek the assistance of a fully qualified lama. The lama should be motivated by a sincere compassion for all sentient beings and should have mastered in his own mental continuum the direct experiential cultivation of the dying processes, as well as the consciousness transference practices. It is very important that when coming in to the household, the attending lama is concentrated on the motivation to free the dying person from the sufferings of cyclic existence. Very often the mere presence of an accomplished lama can create a solid sense of calm and purposefulness, which inspires both the dying person and family. The formal practice begins with the attending lama taking refuge in the Buddha, the sacred teachings, and the ideal spiritual community, on behalf of the dying person and all other sentient beings, including himself. At this point, the lama should visualise in the space in front of himself images of the three objects of refuge- the Buddha, sacred teachings and ideal community - forming a tree, whose branches like billowing clouds in the sky are adorned by budd has, bodhisattvas and the spiritual masters of the lineage. Then he should visualise that the dying person, surrounded by all sentient beings, takes refuge by reciting the following verses three times:
I take refuge from now until enlightenment, In the Buddha, the [sacred] teachings and the supreme assembly.

22.0

THE TIHETAN 1\00K 01' TilE DEAD

Through the merit of practising generosity and the other [perfections I, May I attain buddhahood for the sake of [all] living beings.
Maintaining this same visualisation, the lama should slowly recite with full concentration the four immeasurable aspirations, based on the cultivation of loving kindness, compassion, sympathetic joy, and equanimity.
~1ay all sentient beings be endo\ved with happiness! May they all be separated from suffering and its causes! May they be endowed with joy, free from suffering! May they abide in equanimity, free from attraction and aversion!

Up to this point, the preliminary procedures are common to all the traditions ofTibetan Buddhism. Next, the lama should enter into the practice of the Natural Liberation of Habitual Tendencies, as presented in Chapter 5· During the practice of the initial ten-branched prayer (contained in Chapter 5), the refuge tree is still visualised in the space in front. As the ten-branched prayer is concluded the lama visualises that all the objects of refuge melt into light and then gradually dissolve into the crowns of each of the attending persons, including the dying person and himself. So at this point the body, speech and mind of all enlightened beings, the objects of refuge, become indivisible from the lama's own body, speech, and mind and those of all others present. Like water poured into water they become inseparably one in nature. In this way, it is visualised that all those present are brought under the protection of the Three Precious Jewels. Then, like a bubble emerging from water, the lama visualises himself arising out of emptiness in the form of Vajrasattva and he continues with the practice of the Natural Liberation of Habitual Tendencies. Once this practice is complete, extensive mental offerings should then be made to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas and the lama should slowly recite three or seven times the short prayer entitled an Aspirational Prayer [Calling] to the Buddhas and Bodhisattva~ for Assistance (see Chapter 12), followed by the accompanying aspirational prayers. This is often followed by a series of more general recitations from the Buddhist canon, including the Sutra of the Three

TilE GREAT LIBERATION BY HEARING

221

Heaps (Triskandhakasutra, T 284), dedicated to the Thirty-five
Buddhas of Confession, the recitation of the names of the thousand budd has of this aeon, following the arrangement of SakyasrT of Kashmir, entitled Ornate Garland of the Auspicious Aeon (Bhadrakalpikalaty~karamala, T n6g), together with the recitation of the mantras given in the Tantra of the Purification of All Lower Destinies (Sarvadurgatiparisodhanatantra, T 483). Just to hear these names is said to make a powerful impact on the consciousness of the dying person. At this point, the lama has to be very observant of the dying person. Excessive preoccupation with the completion of these recitations may distract him from seizing the moment when the dying person's consciousness actually leaves the body. Carefully observing the signs of death, as indicated in the Natural Liberation through Recognition of the Visual Indications and Signs of Death (Chapter 8), just before the person passes away, the lama should immediately begin the introduction to the intermediate state of the time of death (the first part of the present chapter), even if the previous recitations are unfinished. In certain circumstances, mouth to mouth resuscitation might be given, in accordance with the cycle entitled Eight Transmitted

Precepts: Oral Transmission of the Awareness Holder (bKa'-brgyad rig-'dzin zhal-lung), which was revealed by the Fifth Dalai Lama, or an
equivalent text. This may maintain life for a short period while final guidance is given. Accordingly, the dying one should be guided through the processes of the dissolution of the elements (as set out in Chapter 8), before continuing with the introduction to the intermediate state of the time of death, as set out in this chapter. Usually, the dying person is addressed by name, or by the expression 'child of buddha nature' (rigs-kyi bu). One who is worthy of great respect is addressed by an expression such as 'venerable one', 'spiritual master', 'teacher', or 'your ladyship' and so forth. If it is someone from whom the attending lama has personally received teaching, he may use the expression 'IJrd of the refuge' (skyabs-mgon) or 'great lama' (bla-chen), and so forth. There are different modes of address. The voice of the lama who calls out to the dying person should be very melodious, so that merely upon hearing the sound of the instructions the person feels soothed, elevated and attracted. Following the outer dissolution of the four elements and the inner dissolution of the processes of conceptual thought into redness, whiteness and blackness, the lama should recite the verses describing

222

THE TIBETAN BOOK Or TilE lJI:AD

the moment of the arising of the inner radiance of the ground. These words of introduction should be read aloud three times. If the dying person fails to recognise the first inner radiance and swoons into unconsciousness, the lama should proceed with the introduction to the second inner radiance followed by the introduction to the emergence of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities during the intermediate state of reality. Once the introduction to the intermediate state of reality has been completed, the attending lama should closely observe the body of the deceased and seek to determine whether he or she has attained liberation from rebirth in cyclic existence. If emancipation has occurred, the body will take on a certain glow, and while being in its presence, one will experience a sensation of happiness. The body will not smell. It will look just like a living person who is sleeping. These are signs that the consciousness of the deceased has attained liberation. In addition, external environmental signs may arise, as described in Chapter 8, including distinctive cloud formations and rainbows. If the deceased is a realised yogin, monk or layperson who has gained complete freedom at the time of death, then the attending lama may hear the sound of chanting and the music of sacred instruments, such as the skull drum or bell. On the other hand, if the consciousness of the deceased has not been emancipated, the complexion of the deceased will become disquieting and may inspire a sense of fear when it is seen. The face will become grey and dusty, and the body will begin to decompose very quickly. If the consciousness of the deceased does not attain liberation while in the intermediate state of reality, the mental body assumed by the deceased will then immediately fall into the intermediate state of rebirth, at which time, the attending lama should recite the introduction to that phase, as presented in the latter part of this chapter. Importantly, these introductions to the three intermediate states of the time of death, reality and rebirth should be supplemented, if appropriate, by the practice of the transference of consciousness, as presented in Chapter 10. If the internal and external signs are v,ery good, consciousness transference will not be necessary and could even be potentially harmful. The attending lama must take great care as to if and when consciousness transference should be practised. It is not only highly

THE GREAT LIBERATIO:'II BY IIF.ARI:-.iG

223

realised spiritual masters who remain in meditation during these intermediate states, but even ordinary men, women, and children may have achieved a settled state of mind, enabling them to remain in peaceful and deep meditation after death. If consciousness transference were performed in such cases, the deceased would be disturbed. Moreover, since the consciousness of the deceased has a tendency to leave the body from whichever point it is touched, the relatives, loved ones and the attending lama should refrain from touching the body or only tap the crown fontanelle in order to induce the consciousness to leave from that point. If the attending lama decides that consciousness transference is the appropriate course of action, it should be repeated many times until certain indications occur, such as the emergence of mucous or blood from both nostrils. Further, in order to induce the consciousness to leave the body via the crown, which is the optimum gateway for the transference to take effect, the means of preventing the consciousness from leaving through other orifices as described in Chapter 1 o should be applied. This is facilitated by visual ising that the nine orifices of the body are each sealed by a single H 0 ty1 syllable, thus forcing the consciousness to exit via the crown fontanelle. In any event, if the attending lama feels that the consciousness of the deceased has become confused and trapped, or if the corpse begins to decompose and lose its radiance, then consciousness transference should be immediately performed. Once the introductions to the intermediate states of the time of death, reality, and rebirth have been concluded, the attending lama should then recite: the Prayer for Union with the Spiritual Teacher (Chapter 2), the Natural Liberation of Habitual Tendencies (Chapter 5), the Hundredfold Homage (Chapter 6), the Confession (Chapter 7), and the Liberation by Wearing (Chapter 14). At this juncture the attending lama may read certain general prayers not included within the present cycle, such as the Aspirational Prayer for Good Conduct (Bodhisattvaprat:~idhanaraja, T 1095), one of the many versions of the Aspirational Prayer for Rebirth in Sukhavatr (contained in bDe-smon Phyogs-sgrigs), the Aspirational Prayer of Maitreya (Maitreyaprat:~idhana, T 1096), and the final chapter of the

Introduction to the Conduct of a Bodhisattva (Bodhisattvacaryavatara,
T 3871), which concerns the dedication of merit on behalf of all sentient beings.

224

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

These may be followed by a further recitation of prayers specific to the present cycle, namely the: Root Verses of the Six Intermediate States (Chapter 3) and the Aspirationa/ Prayers (Chapter 12). This completes the summary of the process through which the attending lama tends directly to the consciousness of the dying person and the deceased.

PART ONE
An Elucidation of the Intermediate State of the Time of Death and of the Appearance of the Peaceful Deities in the Intermediate State of Reality
Herein is contained the Great Liberation by Hearing, 1 an elucidation of the intermediate state of reality, [which is an extract] from the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, [entitled] Natural Liberation through [Recognition on Enlightened lntention. 2 I bow down to the spiritual teachers, [embodiment of] the Three Buddha-bodies: To the Buddha-body of Reality, Infinite Light, Amitabha; To the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource, the Peaceful and Wrathful Lotus Deities; And to the Buddha-body of Emanation, Padmakara, protector of beings. This Great Liberation by Hearing, the skilful means which liberates yogins of average ability during the intermediate states, has three parts, namely: the introduction, the main subject matter [of the text] and the conclusion.

INTRODUCTION
[All aspirants] should experientially cultivate the steps of guid_ance/ which are the means by which corporeal beings can achieve liberation. Those of highest acumen should certainly attain liberation [in their lifetime] through [the application of] that guidance. But if liberation does not occur thereby, [yogins] should implement, during the intermediate state of the time of death, [the appropriate procedure outlined in] the Consciousness Transference: Natural Liberation through Recollection. 4 Yogins of average

22.6

TilE TIBETAl' BOOK OF TilE DEAD

ability should certainly be liberated by that. If liberation is not effected by the [application of consciousness transference], then [the recitation of] the following Great Liberation by Hearing should be persistently made Juring the intermediate state of reality. First, therefore, yogins should examine the signs of death in accordance with the text entitled Natural Liberation through f Recognition off the Visual Indications and Signs of Death, also known as the Mirror which Clarifies the Visible Indications of Death.s Thereupon, when the [inner] signs of the processes of death are definitively and completely present, Ithe appropriate procedure as outlined in J the Consciousness Translerence: Natural Liberation thrott?,h Recollection should be applied. Thus, if this transference is effective, there will be no need to read aloud the Great l-iberation by Hearing. If, however, the transference is ineffective, this Liberation by Hearing should be read aloud with correct pronunciation and clear diction, close to the corpse. If the corpse is not present, one should sit next to the bed or scat of the deceased. Then, having invoked the power of truth 6 and summoned the consciousness rof the deceased], 7 one should imagine him or her to be listening in one's presence and read aloud [this Great Liberation by He.lring]. At this time the relatives and close friends should Ibe advised to] show restraint because, at this stage, it is not appropriate to cry or dramatically express one's grief.x If the deceased's body is present, then during the interval which follows the ceasing of respiration,'~ this Great Liberation by He.~ring should be read aloud by a spiritual teacher, or by a spiritual sibling, sincere [practitioner], or a sympathetic friend, placing the lips [close] to the car [of the deceased], without actually touching. 10

THE

~1AIN

SUBJECT !vlATTER

Now follows the actual exegesis of the l.iberation by Hearing: first, one should make extensive offerings to the Three Precious Jewels. 11 If these are unobtainable, one should make offerings by arraying whatever one has as a support for visualisation and mentally emanating an immeasurable [quantity of offerings]. Then

TIIF CREAT LIBERATI0:-.1 BY HEARI!'G

227

one should recite, three or seven times, the Aspirational Prayer {Callmgj to the Buddhas and Bodhisattvas for Assistance. After this, one should melodiously recite the Aspirational Prayer which Protects from Fear of the Intermediate States, the Aspirational

Prayer which Rescues from the Dangerous Pathways of the Intermediate States and the Root Verses of the [Six/ Intermediate States. 12 Thereafter, this Great Liberation by Hearing is to be read aloud
seven or three times, or [as many times] as the circumstances permit. [The main subject matter of the Great Liberation by Hearing] comprises three sections: the introduction to inner radiance during the intermediate state of the time of death, 11 the great elucidation which introduces the intermediate state of reality 14 and a teaching on the means for obstructing the entrance to the womb during the intermediate state of rcbirrh. 15

Introduction to Inner Radiance in the Intermediate State of the Time of Death
This introduction is made on behalf of those individuals who have good understanding, but do not yet have recognition l of inner radiance], as well as those who have gained recognition but have little familiarity, and all ordinary persons who have received little experiential guidance. By means of [this introduction], such beings will, upon recognising the inner radiance of the ground, attain the uncreated Buddha-body of Reality, in an ascending and corepenetrating manner, without [experiencing] the intermediate states.

Introduction to the Inner Radiance of the Ground
As for the method of making [this introduction], it is best if the root spiritual teacher from whom [the dying person] personally received guidance can be present. If he cannot be present, then a spiritual sibling with identical commitments 16 [should be called upon], or if none of these can be present, then a spiritual friend holding the same lineage 17 should attend; or if none of these at all can be present, someone who knows how to read aloud with correct pronunciation and clear diction should recite [the introductions] many times. Thereby, [the dying person] will remember

228

Till-.

I"IIH.TA!'I BOOK OF TilE Dl::\D

that which had [formerly] been introduced by his or her spiritual teacher and immediately afterwards, being set face to face with the inner radiance of the ground, will undoubtedly attain liberation. Concerning the rime for making [this introduction]: after respiration has ceased, the vital energy is absorbed into the channel of pristine COgnition IS and the COnsciOUSneSS rof the deceased j naturally arises as a non-conceptual inner radiance. Later, the viral energy will be reversed and escape into the right and left channels and, as a result, the appearances of the [subsequent] intermediate state [of reality] will arise suddenly. Therefore, [the introduction to inner radiance at the time of death] should be nude before [the vital energy J has escaped into the right and left channels. [Generally], the length of time during which the inner breath remains present within the central channel is just about the time taken to eat a meal. 19 As regards the actual mode of making [this introduction], it is best if the consciousness transference is effected at that moment when the respiration is about to cease. If it is not, one should say the following words: 0, Child of Buddha Nature, (call the name of the dying person), the time has now come for you to seek a path. As soon as your respiration ceases, {the luminosity} known as the 'inner radiance of the first intermediate state'/ 0 which your spiritual teacher formerly introduced to you, will arise. {Immediately/ your respiration ceases, all phenomena will become empty and utterly naked like space. {At the same time/, a naked awareness U/i/1 arise, not extraneous {to yourself/, but radi.mt, empty and without horizon or centre. At that moment, you should personally recognise this intrinsic nature and rest in the state of that {experience/. I too will introduce it {to you} at that time. 21 These words should he spoken audibly many times, impressing them on the mind [of the dying person 1 until respiration ceases. Then, when the respiration is on the point of ceasing, one should lay [the dying person] on the right side, in the posture of the lion, and take the pulse. 22 Once the throbbing of the two carotid arteries has stopped, they should be firmly pressed [at their pressure points on the neck].-u Then the vital energy, having entered the central

THE GIU:AT LIBERATIO:o-; BY HEARI="G

channel, cannot reverse [and escape] and it will certainly emerge through the crown fontanelle. 24 The introduction should continue to be made at this time. This phase in the process of death is called: 'the inner radiance of reality during the first intermediate state'. It is the unique and incontrovertible enlightened intention of the Buddha-body of Reality, which arises in the minds of all living beings. [At the moment of death], this coincides with the period when the vital energy is absorbed into the central channel, after respiration has ceased and before the ceasing of the inner breath. Ordinary people describe this state as 'loss of consciousness'. 25 The duration of this [experience of inner radiance] is uncertain, [for it depends on] the health and characteristics of [the dying person's I physical constitution, and on the degree of [his or her proficiency in the practices related to 1 the vital energies and channels. For those who have considerable practical experience, or those who have achieved stability in the practice of calm abiding, or those who have healthy energy channels, this experience can be prolonged. 26 In striving to make this introduction, therefore, one should remind [the deceased] repeatedly [by giving the instruction as above and below], until serous fluid emerges from the apertures of the sense-organs. 27 For those persons of great negativity and those classes of beings with unhealthy channels this phase lasts no longer than a single snapping of the fingers. In others, it may last for as long as it takes to cat a meal. However, as most sutras and tantras state that the period of unconsciousness [following the moment of death! may last for three and a half days, generally one should persevere for that length of time, in making this introduction to inner radiance. As for the way in which this introduction is made: if capable, the dying person should facilitate this of his or her own accord by projecting a formerly cultivated [spiritual practice into the intermediate state]. If [the individual] is not capable of this, then a spiritual teacher, a student, or a spiritual sibling who was a close tricnd, should stay nearby and clearly remind [the dying person] of the signs [of death] in their correct sequence, saying:

Now, the sign of the dissolution of earth into water is pr~sent, of water into fire, fire into wind, wind into consciousness,

2j0

THE TIBETAN ROOK OF THE DE:\IJ

and so forth [as set down in the text entitled Natural Liber.ztion through Recognition of the Visual Indications and Signs of Death]. 2s Then, when the sequence of the signs is almost complete, [the attendant] should encourage the dying person to cultivate the following altruistic intention, beginning with the words: '0, Child of Buddha Nature!' or, if [the dying person] is a spiritual teacher, the attendant should gently say the following words into the ear:

0, Venerable One! I beg you not to be distracted from the cultivation of an altruistic intention!

If l the dying person] is a spiritual sibling or anyone else, [the attendant] should call to him or her by name and say the following \Vords:
0, Child of Buddha Nature, that which is called death has now arrived. Therefore you should adopt an ,zltruistic motiuation and concentrate your thinking as follows: 'I have arrived at the time of death, so now, relying on the process of death, I will singlemindedly cultivate an altmistic intention. I will medilLzte on the generation of loving kindness, compassion and an ,zltmistic intention to attain enlightenment. For the benefit of all sentient beings, who are as limitless as space, I must attain perfect buddhaiJOod.' And in particular, {you should think}: 'At this moment, for the sake of all sentient beings, I must recognise /the time of} de,zth .zs [the arising of] inner radiance, the Buddha-body of Reality, and while in that state, I must attain the supreme accomplishment of the Great Seal, and thereby act for the good of all sentient beings. If I do not achieve this accomplishment, then, recognising the intermediate state as it is, I will actualise the coalescent Budd/Jt.zbody of the Great Seal during the intermediate s!L1te, and thereby, manifesting in order to instruct each in accord.znce with his or her needs, I will act for the benefit of all sentient beings, who are as limitless as space.' \'1/ithout giuing up the focus on cultivating an altruistic intention, in the above way, recollect the medit,ztive experiences whidJ you formerly developed 011 the basis of the otal te.zchings.
Those words should be clearly spoken, while placing the lips close to the car Iof the dying person 1. Without permitting the attention

TilE GREAT LlgFRATIO!'< BY l-IEARISG

23 I

[of the dying one! to be distracted even for an instant, [the attendanti should remind him or her of past meditative experiences. Then, when the respiration has ceased, and the two carotid arteries have been firmly pressed, remind [the dying person] with the following words, if the individual was a spiritual teacher or a spiritual friend greater than oneself:

Venerable One! The inner radiance of the ground is now arisen before you. Recognise it, and concentrate directly on its experiential cultivation.
For all others, one should introduce [the inner radiance of the ground!, with the following words: 0, Child of Buddha Nature, (call the name of the individual) listen! Pure inner radiance, reality itself, is now arising before you. Recognise it! 0, Child of Buddha Nature, this radiant essence that is now your conscious awareness is a brilliant emptiness. It is beyond substance, beyond characteristics and beyond colour, completely empty of inherent existence in any respect whatsoever. This is the female Buddha Samantabhadri, the essential nature of reality. The essence of your own conscious awareness is emptiness. Yet, this is not a vacuous or nihilistic emptiness; this, your very own conscious awareness, is zmimpedcdly radiant, brilliant and vibrant. This [conscious awareness/ is the male Buddha Samantabhadra. The utterly indivisible presence of these two: the essence of your own awareness, tuhich is empty, without inherent existence with respect to any substance whatsoeuer, and your own conscious azl!areness, which is vibrant and radiantly present, is the Buddhabody of Reality. This intrinsic awareness, manifest in a great mass of light, in which radiance and emptiness are indivisible, is the buddha [nature/ of unchanging light, beyond birth or death. Just to recognise this is enough! If you recognise this brilliant essence ofyour own conscious awareness to be the buddha [nature/, then to gaze into intrinsic awareness is to abide in the enlightened intention of all the buddhus. This introduction should be made three or seven times, with correct pronuncic1tion and clear diction. Accordingly, [the deceased! will firstly recollect lthe teachings! as they had been formerly given by

232

THE TIBET:\Jii BOOK OF THE DEAD

his or her teacher, and secondly be introduced to inner radiance as a naked natural awareness. And then, thirdly, having recognised this, he or she will attain the Buddha-body of Reality, beyond conjum:tion or disjunction, and certainly achieve liberation. Recognition of the 'first inner radiance' [of the ground] takes place in this way.

[Introduction to the Inner Radiance of the Path j

If, however, it is feared that [the deceased] has not recognised the
first inner radiance, the so-called 'second inner radiance' [of the path] will arise. !Again, it is said that this second inner radiance] lasts a little more than the time it takes to eat a meal, after the respiration has ceased. Specifically, it arises once the vital energy has escaped into the right or left channel, whichever is appropriate depending on the positive and negative past actions [of the deceased], and once the vital energy has emerged through one of the orifices of the body. 2<J When this occurs, the consciousness suddenly becomes awake and lucid. Although it is said that this second inner radiance also lasts [approximately] for as long as it takes to eat a meal, this actually depends, as before, on whether or not the energy channels are healthy and whether or not [the individual] has or lacks meditative expenence. Now, at this point, the consciousness emerges from the body and, !initially], the individual may not know whether or not he or she has died. The relatives are seen as before, and their cries of sorrow can be heard. During this period, before the harsh and bewildering experiences related to past actions have arisen, and before the terrifying experiences related to Yama have occurred, the oral teaching should be given.w This [oral teaching] concerns both the perfection stage and the generation stage [of meditation]. If [the deceased I was engaged in [the practices of] the perfection stage, one should call to him or her three times, by name, and repeat the above !instruction, which is] the introduction to inner radiance. If [the deceased] was engaged in [the practices of] the generation stage, one should read aloud the formal description of the individual's chosen meditational deity as set down in the corresponding meditative cycle. Then remind him or her with the following words:

THE GRI:-.AT LIBERATIOI" BY IIEARI:-.G

233

0, Child of Buddha Nature! lvteditate on this, your nzeditational deity. Do 1lot be distracted! Concentrate intently on your meditational deity! Meditate that [the deity/ appears, and yet is without inherent existence, like [the reflection o(J the moon in water. Do not medit,lte on the deity as a solid corporeal form! 31

If [the deceased] was an ordinary person, without a specific practice, then preface the introduction with the following words:
Meditate on the Lord of Great Compassion! 12
By means of such an introduction, there is no doubt that even those who have not recognised !the nature of] the intermediate state will do so. This, Ithe above] precise reminder, should be given by a spiritual teacher or sibling to those who, despite having already received this introduction from a spiritual teacher while they were alive, have an undeveloped meditative experience, and accordingly will not recognise the intermediate state by themselves. Equally, this instruction is of crucial importance in the case of those who, despite their meditative experience, are bewildered by serious illness at the moment of death and therefore cannot recall [their past meditative experiences]; and finally, it is particularly necessary in the case of those beings who, despite their former meditative experience, are at risk of falling into lower existences as a result of having broken their vo\vs and having failed to maintain their basic commitments. 33 [As stated above], it is best if [recognition] occurs during the first intermediate state. However, if it does not occur therein, awareness can be awakened and liberation attained during the second intermediate state. This second intermediate state is also called 'the pure illusory body'. [During this second phase], consciousness achieves an instance of clarity, even though the deceased may not know whether or not they arc dead. If the teaching is given at this time, therefore, the mother and child aspects of reality can mcct, 14 and [the deceased] will no longer be controlled by the force of past actions. just as, for example, darkness is destroyed by the light of the sun, the controlling force of past actions is destroyed by this 'inner radiance of the path' and liberation is attained. Now, this so-called 'second intermediate state' [occurring at that point when consciousness leaves the body] is one which suddenly

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

appears to the 'mental body' [assumed by the deceased]/) while the consciousness [of the deceased] retains the same range of hearing as before. If the above oral teaching is given at this time, its purpose can therefore be accomplished. Since the bewildering appearances generated by past actions have not yet arisen, [the deceased] is able to direct his or her attention anywhere. Therefore, even though [the individual] may not have attained recognition of the inner radiance of the ground, he or she will be liberated by the recognition of the inner radiance [of the path], which is the second intermediate state.

INTRODUCTION TO THE INTERNlEDIATE STATE OF REALITY
If liberation is still not attained through the above [introductions],
then the intermediate state of reality, also called 'the third intermediate state', will arise. 36 It is during this third phase that the bewildering apparitions, [which are the products] of past actions, emerge. Therefore, it is extremely important to read aloud the following Great Introduction to the lnternzedi.1fe State of Re,zlityF at this juncture. It is most powerful and beneficial. At around this time, the bereaved relatives will be crying and expressing their grief. They will no longer be serving [the deceased's] share of food, they will have removed his or her clothes, and stripped down the bed, and so forth. Although [the deceased] can see them, they cannot see the deceased. Although the deceased can hear them calling out, they cannot hear the departed one calling back. So, [the deceased] may turn away in a state of despair. At this time, three phenomena: sounds, lights and rays of light will arise, and Ithe deceased] may faint with fear, terror or a·we. Thus, during this period, the following Great Introduction to the Intermediate State of Reality should be given. Call the deceased by name and say the following words, with correct pronunciation and clear diction:

0, Child of BuddiJLl Nature, listen very intently and without distraaion. There are six kinds of intermediate st11te, namely: the intermediute state of living or natural existence, the intermedi.zte

THE GREAT LIBERATION BY HEARING

235

state of dreams, the intermediate state of meditative stability or concentration, the intermediate state of the time of death, the intermediate shzte of reality, and the intermediate state of consequent rebirth. Js 0, Child of Buddha Nature, [during and after death], you will experience three intermediate states: the intermediate stt.lte of the time of death, the intermediate state of reality and the intermediate state of rebirth. Of these three, it was the intermediate state of the time of death which you experienced until yesterday. Although the inner radiance of reality arose during that time, you did not recognise it. So now, [as a result], you have been compelled to wander here; and now you will experience the intermedi.zte state of reality, followed by the intermediate state of rebirth. You must therefore recognise, without distraction, [the instruction and events] which I am now going to introduce to you. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, that which is called death has now arrived. You are leaving this world. But in this you are not alone. This happens to eueryone. Do not be attached to this life! Do not cling to this life! Even if you remain attached and clinging, you do not have the power to st.1y- you will only continue to roam within the cycles of existence. Therefore, do not be attached and do not cling! Think of the Three Precious Jewels! 0, Child of Buddha Nature, however terrifving the appearances of the intermediate st.zte of reality might be, do not forget the following words. Go forward remembering their meaning. The crucial point is that through them recognition may be attained. Alas, now, as the intermediate state of reality arises before me, Renouncing the merest thought of awe, terror or fear, I will recog11ise all that arises to be awareness, rnanifesting naturally of itself. Knowing such [sounds, lights and rays] to be visionary phenomena of the intermediate state. At this nzome11t, having reached this critical point, I must not fear the assembly of Peaceful and Wrathful Deities, which manifest naturally! Go forward, reciting these words distinctly and be mindful of their meaning. Do 110t forget them! For it is essential to recognise, with

236

THE TIBETAN BOOK Ol- TilE DEAD

certainty, that whatever terrifying experiences may arise, they are natural manifestations [of actual reality}. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, when your mind and body separate, the pure [luminous} apparitions of reality itself, will arise: subtle and clear, radiant and dazzling, naturally bright and awesome, shimmering like a mirage on a plain in summer. Do not fear them! Do not be terrified! Do not be awed! They are the natura/luminosities of your own actu.zl reality. Therefore recognise them [as they are}! From within these lights, the natural sound of re~.zlity will resound, clear and thunderous, reverberating like a thousand simultaneous peals of thunder. This is the natural sound of your own actual reality. So, do not be afraid! Do not be terrified! Do not be awed! The body that you now haue is called a 'mental body', it is the fJroduct of [subtle] propensities and not a solid corporeal body of flesh and blood. Therefore, whatever sounds, lights or rays may arise, they cannot harm you. r'or you are beyond death now! It is enough that you simply recognise [the sounds and luminosities] to be manifestations of your own factual reality]. Know that this is the intermediate state! 0, Child of Buddha Nature, if you do not now recognise [these phenomena] to be natural manifestations, whatever meditative practices you may have undertaken whilst in the human world, if you have not [previously/ encountered this present instruction, you will fear the light, you will be awed by the sound and you will be terrified by the rays. If you do not now understand this essenti,zl point of the teaching, you u•illnot recognise the sounds, the lights and the rays, and you will continue to roam within the cycles of existence. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, should you hat•e moued on, {tl!ithout recognition/, after hauing been unconscious for [up to] three and a half days,''~ you will awaken from unconsciousness and wonder, "What has happened to me?" So, recognise this to be the intermediate state! At this time, the aspects of the cycles of existence are reversed [into their own true nature] and all phenonzena are arising as lights and buddha-bodies. 40 [On the first day of the intermediate state of reality/, 41 all sfJilce will arise as a blue light. At this time, from the central Buddha field called Peruasiue Seminal Point, 42 the transcendent lord Vairocana wi/1 dawn before you, his body white in colour, seated on a lion throne, holding in his [right] hand an eight-spoked wheel and

THF GREAT LIBERATI0::-.1 UY IIEAR!l"'G

237

embraced by his consort Akasadhatufsuarf. A blue luminosity, radiant and clear, bright ~.md d ..lZzling, {indicatiue of] the pristine cognition of re~.1lity 's expanse, which is the nutural punty of your aggregate of consciousness, (will emanate} from the heart of Vairoc. m.z and his consort, and it will shine piercingly before you fat the level of your heart, with such brilliance/ that your eyes cannot bear it. Together with this {luminosity/, a dull white light, {indicative of the realm/ of the gods, will . 1lso dawn directly before you {and touch your heart}. At this time, under the sway of negative past actions, you u•ill (tl'ish to] flee in fear and terror from the bright blue light, tohich is the pristine cognition of reulity's expanse, and you tui/1 come to perceive the dull white light o{ the god (realms} with delight. At this moment, do not be awed by the blue luminosity, which is radiant and d,uzling, clear and very bright. This is the supreme inner radiance (of pristine cognition}! Do not be terrified! This is the light ray of the Tathagata, which is called the pristine cognition of reality's expanse. 43 Have confidence in it! Be dr,zwn to it with longing deuotion! Pray, with deuotion, thinking: 'This is the light r,zy of the transcendent lord Vairocana 's comp,zssion. I take refuge in it.' For this, in reulity, is the transcendent lord V,zirocana and his consort come to escort you on the danger(JUS p,lthw .. zy of the intermediate state. This is the light ray of Vairocana 's comfhlssion! Therefore do not delight in the dull white light of the god (reulmsf! Do not be attached to it! Do not cling to it! This dull white light is the inl'iting p,zth created by your own habitual tendencies {or deep delusion, which )'Ott yourself haue ge1wrated. 44 I{ you become attached to it, )'OH will roam within the god realms und be drawn into {the cycles of existence of} the six clusses of beings. [This dull light} is an obstruction blocking the {hzth to liberation. Do not look ut it! Be devoted to the bright blue light! Focus intently on the tr,mscendent lord V,zirocana and repeat alter me the following uspiratiunal prayer:

0, as I ro~.1m in cyclic existence [driuenf by deep-seated delusion, May the transcendent lord Vairoc,llta draw me forward, Leading me on the path of radiant light, Which is the pristine cognition of reality's expanse. May the supreme consort ( Akasafdhatvrsvarr support me fronz behind,

TilE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

And, thus fencircledj, may I be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the /cue/ of an utterly perfect buddha. By making this aspirational pr,zyer with feruent devotion, you will dissolue into rainbow light in the heart of Vairocmza and his consort, and you will attain buddlhzhood, as the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource, in the central Buddha field of the Dense Array (Ghan,wyttlhz).

If, however, even after receiving this introduction, as the result of
negative obscuration and aversion, Ithe deceased] arc nonetheless overawed by the lights and rays, and turn away, and even if, after repeating the aspirational prayer, they remain bewildered, then, on the second day, Vajrasattva's assembly of deities will come to escort them, and, at that same time, the negative past actions which are conducive to a rebirth in the helllrealms] will also emerge. Again, calling the deceased by name, the introduction should be given with the following words:

0, Child of Buddha N,llure, listen without distraction. On the second day the purity of the entire element water will arise in the form of a white light. At that time, from the eastern Buddha field of Manifest Joy (Abhirati), the transcendent lord Ak~obhya­ Vajras,zttva will dawn before you, his body blue in colour, holding in his fright/ hand a fiue-fJronged vajra, seated on an eleplhmt throne ,md embraced by his consort Buddhaloc.ma. They are encircled by two male hodhisattuas, K~itig,zrbha and Maitreya, and two {emale bodhisattuas, Lasyd and Pu~pd, thus, six buddhabodies will be shi11i11g before you from within a space of rainbow light. A [brilliant} white light, findicatiue of} the mirror-like pristine cognition, which is the natural purity of the aggregate of {orm, white a11d dazzling, radia11t and c/e,zr [will eman,ltej from the heart of Vajrasattua and his consort and it will shine piercingly before you fat the level of your heart, with such brilliance} that your eyes cannot bear it. Together with this light of pristine cognition, a dull smoky light, [indicative of] the hell [realms}, will also dawn before you [and touch your he,zrtf. At th.zt time, under the sway of averswn, you will [wish to} turn away in fear and terror from the

THE GREAT LIBERATION BY Hl:ARING

239

bright white light and come to perceive the dull smoky light of the hel/frealmsj with delight. At that moment, you should fearlessly recognise the white light, white and dazzling, radiant and clear, to be pristine cognition. Have confidence in it! Be drawn to it with longing devotion! Pray with devotion, thinking: 'This is the light ray of the transcendent lord Vajrasattva 's compassion. I take refuge in it.' This, in reality, is Vajrasattva and his consort come to escort you on the dangerous pathway of the intermediate state. This is the light-ray hook of Vajrasattva's compassion! Be devoted to it! Do not delight in the dull smoky light of the hell /realms}! This /dull light} is the inuiting path of the negative obscurations created by your own deep az,ersion, which you yourself have generated. If you become attached to it, you will fall into the realms of hell, sinking into a swamp of unbearable suffering, from which there will be no [immediate} opportunity for escape. [This dull light/ is an obstacle blocking the path to liberation. Do not look at it! Abandon your aversion! Do not be attached to it! Do not cling to it! Be devoted to the white light, r,zdiant and dazzling! Focus intently on the transcendent lord Vajras,zttua and recite the following aspiration,zl pr,zyer:

0, as I roam in C) clic existence [driven} by deep-seated aversion, M,zy the transcendent lord Vajrasattva draw me forward, Leading me on the path of radiant light, Which is the mirror-/ike pristine cognition. May the supreme consort Buddhalocana support me from behind, And, thus [encircled}, may I be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfect buddha.
1

By making this aspir,ztional prayer with fervent devotion, fyouj u,ill dissolve into rainbow light in the he,zrt of the transcendent lord Vajrasattva, and you will attain buddhahood, as the Buddhabody of Perfect Resource, in the eastern Buddha field of Manifest Joy (Abhirati).
Yet, even after being introduced in this way, there arc some individuals who will turn away in fear from the light-ray hook of

.qo

THE TIBETAN BOOK Of TilE DEAD

compassion, being gripped by pride and powerful negative obscuration."" So it is that, on the third day, the transcendent lord Ratnasambhava's assembly of deities \vill come to escort [the deceased] and simultaneously the light path indicative of the human realm will emerge. Again, calling the deceased by name, the introduction should be given with the following words:

0, Child of Buddha Nature, listen without distraction. On the third day, the purity of the entire element earth will arise in the form o{ a yellow light. At this time, from the yellow southern Buddha field of the Glorious (Srimat), the transcendent lord Ratnusumhhava will dawn before you, his body yellow in colour, holding in his fright} hand a jewel, seated on a horse throne and embraced by his supreme consort Mamaki. They are encircled by two m.de bodhisattuas, Akasagarbha and Samantabhadra, and two female hodhisattv,zs, Malya and Dhapa, thus, six buddhabodies Ll'ifl be shining before you from within a sp.zce of rainbow light. A yellow light findic.ztive of} the pristine cognition of sameness, which is the n.ztural purity of the aggregate of feeling, yellow and d.zzzling, adorned by greater and lesser seminal points fof light], rudi,mt, dc.zr and zmhe.zrable to the eyes, fwi/1 emanate} from the hc.zrt of R,ztn,zs,mzbh.wa and his consort and will shine piercingly be{ore you at the /cue/ of your heart [with such brilliance} thut your eyes cannot bear it. Together with the light o{ pristine cognition, a dull blue light, findicatiue off the human realm, will also d,zzun before you and touch your heart. At that time, under the sway of pride, you will {wish tof turn auhl)' in {cur and terror from the bright yellow light and you will come to delight in the dull blue light of the lmm,m realm and feel attachment towards it. At that moment, abandon your fear of the yellow light, and recognise it as pristine cognition, yellow and dazzling, radiant and clear! Let your ,zwareness relax and abide directly u:ithin it, in a state of rzon-actiL·ity. -t~> Again and again, h,we confidence in it! Be drawn to it with longing deuotion! If you recognise it as the nat;tr,zl luminosity o( your own muareness, even though you may (eel no dcl'otion towards it . .md haL'e not recited the aspiratimzal prayer, ,111 the lmddh,z-bodies .znd light rays will dissolve inseparably into you ,md you ll'ill •lttailllmddh,zhood. If you are un.zble to recognise

TilE GREAT LIBERATIO:-o; BY HEARING

this /radiance} as being the natural luminosity of your own awareness, then pray with deuotion, thinking: 'This is the light ray of the transcendent lord Ratnas,mzblhzva 's compassion. I take refuge in it.' This, in reality, is the transcendent lord Ratnasambhava carne to escort you on the fearsome d~-mgerous pathway of the intermediate state. This is the light-ray hook of Ratnasambhava 's compassion! Be devoted to it! Do not delight in the dull blue light of the human realm. This [dull light/ is the inviting path created by your own habitual tendencies for deep-seated pride, which you yourself have generated. If you become attached to it, you will tumble down into the human realm, you will experience the sufferings of birth, old age, sickness and death, and there will be no [immediate/ opportunity to escape from the swamp of cyclic existence. This [dull light/ is an obstacle blocking the path to liberation! Do not look at it! Abandon pride! Abandon your habitual tendencies! Do not be attached to the dull blue light! Do not cling to it! Be devoted to the yellow light, golden and dazzling. Focus intently and single-minded/yon the transcendent lord Ratnasamblwva and recite the following aspirational prayer:

0, as I roam in cyclic existence [driven] by deep-seated pride, May the transcendent lord Ratnasambhava draw me forward, Leading me on the path of radiant light, \XIhich is the pristine cognition of sameness. May the supreme consort Mamaki support me from behind, And, thus [encircled/, may I be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level ol an utterly perfect buddha.
By making this aspirational prayer with fervent devotion, you will dissolve into rainbow light in the heart of the transcendent lord Ratnasambhava, and you will attain buddhahood, as the Buddhabody of Perfect Resource, in the southern Buddha field of the Glorious (Srinwt).
There is no doubt that if Ithe deceased I are receptive to this introduction, they will attain liberation, however weak their [individual] ability may be. Yet, even after being given this introduction many times, there are some whose positive opportunities have been exhausted by, for example, their great negativity or through not

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF TilE DEAD

having maintained their commitments and so forth, who, even now, will not have accepted this introduction. These individuals will have turned away in fear of both the sounds and the luminosities and become agitated by desire and negative obscuration. So it is that, on the fourth day, the transcendent lord Amitabha's assembly of deities will come to escort them and, at that same time, the light path [indicative of the realm] of the anguished spirits, which is generated by desire and miserliness, will emerge. Again, calling the deceased by name, the introduction should be given with the following words:

0, Child of Buddha Nature, listen without distraction. On the fourth day, the purity of the element fire will arise in the form of a red lixht. At that time, from the red western Buddha field of the Blissful (Sukhavati), the transcendent lord Amitiibha will dawn before you, his body red in colour, holding in his [right] hand a lotus flower, seated on a peacock throne and embraced by the suprenze consort Pa1_ujaravasini. They are encircled by two male bodhisattvas, Au,llokite5vara and Mmzjusri, and two female bodhisattvas, Gftii and Alokii, thus, six buddha-bodies will be shining before you from within a space of rainbow light. A red light [indicatiue o(J the pristine cognition of discernment, which is the natural purity of the aggregate of perceptions, red and dazzling, adorned by greater and lesser seminal points, radiant and clear, bright and dazzling, [will emanate/ from the heart of Amitabha and his consort and will shine piercingly before you at the leuel of your heart [with such brilliance/ that your eyes cannot bear it. Do not be afraid! Together with the light of pristine cognition, a dull yellow light, [indicative of the realm/ of anguished spirits, will also dawn before you {and touch your heart]. Do not delight fin the dull yellow light}! Do not become attached to it and do not cling to it! At this time, under the sway of deep desire, you will [wish to} turn away in terror from the bright red light and you will come to delight in the dull yellow light of the anguished spirits and feel attachnze11t towards it. At this moment, abandon your fear, and recognise the red light, bright and dazzling, radiant ;t1nd dear, to be pristine cognition. Let your awareness relax and abide directly within it, resting in a state of non-activity. Have confidence i11 the radiant, red luminosity! Be drawn to it with longing deuotion. If you recogn~se this radiance as the natural luminosity

TilE GREAT LIBER:\TIO!' BY HEARING

243

of your ozun awareness, even though you may feel no devotion tow,zrds it and have not recited the aspirational prayer, all the buddha-bodies and light rays will dissolve inseparably [into you] and you will attain buddhahood. If you are not able to recognise [the radiance/ in this way, then pray with devotion, thinking: 'This is the light ray of the transcendent lord Amitabha 's compassion. I take refuge in it.' This truly is the light-ray hook of the transcendent lord Amitabha's compassion! Be devoted to it! Do not turn away! Should you turn away, the luminosity will accompany you inseparably. Do not be afr~.zid! Do not be attached to the dull yellow light of the anguished spirits! This is the inviting path created by your own habitual tendencies for deep-seated desire, which you yourself have generated. If you become attached to this [dull light/, you will fall down into the realm of the anguished spirits and you will experience unbearable sufferings of hunger and thirst. This [dull light/ is an obstacle blocking the path to liberation! Do not be attached to it! Abandon your attachment! Do not cling to it! Be devoted to the red light, which is radiant and dazzling, and focus intently and single-mindedly on the transcendent lord Amitabha and his consort, and recite the following aspirational prayer:

0, as I roam in cyclic existence {driven/ by deep-seated desire, May the transcendent lord Amitd.bha draw me forward, Leading me 011 the path of radiant light, Which is the pristine cognition of discernment. May the supreme consort Pa1.ujaravasini support me from behind, And, thus [encircled/, rnay I be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfect buddha.
By making this aspirational prayer with fervent devotion, you will dissolue into rainbow light in the heart of the transcendent lord Amitabha and his consort, and you will attain buddhahood, as the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource, in the western Buddha field of the Blissful (Sukhavati).
Although it is impossible not to be liberated by [the successful recognition of] this [introduction], there are nonetheless those who will be unable to give up their propensities due to habituation over

244

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

long periods of time, even after receiving such an introduction. Under the sway of envy and negative past actions, they will become fearful and overawed by the sounds and luminosities. Failing to be caught by the light-ray hook of compassion, they roam downwards into the fifth day. So it is that, on the fifth day, the transcendent lord Amoghasiddhi's assembly of deities, resplendent with the light rays of compassion, will come to escort them and, at the same time, the light path indicative of [the realm of] the antigods, which is generated by the dissonant mental state of envy, will emerge invitingly. Again, calling the deceased by name, the introduction should now be given with the following words:

0, Child of Buddha Nature, listen without distraction. On the fifth day, the purity of the entire wind element will arise in the form of a green light. At that time, from the green northern Buddha field [called] Matrix of Enlightened Activities (Karmaprasiddhi), the transcendent lord Buddha Amoghasiddhi with his retinue will dawn before you, his body green in colour, holding in his fright/ hand a crossed-vajra, seated on a cfvm!zcfvaka bird throne and embraced by the supreme consort Samayatara. These two are encircled by two male bodhisattvas, Vajrapar;i and Nivarar;avi~­ khambhin, and two female bodhisattvas, Gandha and Nartf. Thus, six buddha-bodies will be shining [before you] from within a space of rainbow light. 'A green light [indicative ofi the pristine cognition of accomplishment, which is the natural purity of the aggregate of motivational tendencies, green and dazzling, radiant and clear, bright and awesome, adorned by gre,lter and lesser seminal points, [will emanate/ from the heart of Amoghasiddhi and his consort and it will shine piercingly before you at the level of your heart, {with such brilliance] that your eyes cannot bear it. Do not be afraid! This is the natural expressive power of your own awareness! Rest in a state of great equanimity, transcending activity, free from {the dichotomies ofi attachment and aversion, based on {your feelings ofi nearness and distance. Together with the light of pristine cognition, a dull red light, [indicative of the realm] of the antigods and formed by envy, will also dawn before you {and touch your heart]. Cultiuate an equanimity toward this [dull light] which is free from uttaclmzent or auersion! Even if your mental capacity is diminished,

T II E G R E :\ T L I

~

1: IL\ T I 0 :>;

B Y II E :\ R I :>; G

at least do not delight in it. At this time, under the sway of deep envy, you will [wish to/ turn aw.zy in terror from the bright and dazzling green luminosity and you will come to feel delight and attachment towards the dull red light of the antigods. At this moment, abandon your fear, and recognise the green luminosity, bright and dazzling, radiant and clear, to be pristine cognition. Let your awareness relax and abide directly within it, resting in a state of non-activity. Pray with devotion, thinking: 'This is the light ray o{the transcendent lord Amoghasiddhi's compassion. I take refuge in it.' This, in reality, is the light-ray hook of the transcendent lord Amoghasiddhi's compassion, which is known as the pristine cognition of accomplishment. Be devoted to it! Do not turn away! Even if you do turn away, the luminosity will accompany you inseparably. So, do not be afraid! Do not be att,Jched to the dull red light of the antigods. This is the inviting path of your past actions, which you yourself have engaged in, whilst motiuated by deep envy. If you become attached to this dull light, you will fall i11to the re.zlms of the antigods and experience the unbearable sut/erings of [unrelenting/ conflict . md quarrelling. This [dull light/ is an obst.zcle blocking the path to liberation! Do not be attached to it! Give up your yearning! Do not cling to it! Be devoted to the green light, which is radiant and dazzling, and focus intently and single-mindedly on the transcendent lord Amoghasiddhi and his consort, and recite the following aspiratio11Lzl prayer:

0, as I roam in cyclic existence [driven} by deep-seated envy, May the transcendent lord Amoghasiddhi dratu me forw,lrd, Leading rne on the path of radiant light, W'hich is the pristine cognition o{ accomplishment. M.zy the supreme consort Samayatard support me from behind, And, thus [encircled/, may I be rescued . From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, _ And be escorted to the leuel of an utterly per{ect buddha.
By making this aspirational prayer with fervent devotion, you will dissolve into rainbow light in the heart of the transcendent lord Arnoghasiddhi and his consort, and you will attain buddhaiJOod, as the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource, in the northern Buddha field {called} 'lv1atrix of Enlightened Activities' (Karnwprasiddhi).

TilE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

By giving this introduction repeatedly in this way, however weak the [positive] residue of [a deceased individual's] past actions might be, he or she will [have the opportunity to 1 attain recognition at one point or another. As recognition occurs at any point, it will be impossible for liberation not to be achieved. However, owing to a long association with myriad habitual tendencies and an unfamiliarity with pure vision and pristine cognition, even after being introduced repeatedly in this way, there are some who are nevertheless led backwards by negative propensities, despite this setting face to face having been given. Failing to be gripped by the light-ray hook of compassion, they will he overcome by awe and terror rupon the arising] of the lights and rays, and continue to wander downwards. Thereupon, on the sixth day, the male and female deities of the five enlightened families, together with their retinues, will arise simultaneously, and at that very moment, the six [dull] lights, [indicative] of the six classes of living beings, will also arise simultaneously. Therefore, calling the deceased by name, the introduction should be given with the following words:

0, Child of Buddha Nature, listen without distraction. Until yesterday the uisions of the five individual enliKhtened families arose before you. Despite this, even though the [former/ introduction was giuen, you experienced awe and terror; a response generated by your habit1wl tendencies. Consequently, you have remained in your present state, until now. If you had preuiously recognised {one off the natura/luminosities of the pristine cognitions of the fiue enlightened families as being a natural nzanifestation [of actual reality}, you would haue dissolued into rainbow light fat the heart/ of {one of/ these buddha-bodies of the fiue respectiue enlightened families, and attained buddhahood, in the Buddh.zbody of Perfect Resource. Yet, since you haue been un.zble to recognise these {experiences} as being natural manifestations, you haue wandered here. Therefore, listen now, without distraction. The uision of the entire /peaceful assembly/ of the fiue enlightened families, together with that which is called: 'the uision of the four pristine cognitions combined', 47 will now come to inuite you. Recognise this! 0, Child of Buddha Nature, fat this time} the four coloured

T II E c; R LA T

L l U l-. R :\ T I 0 :\ B Y H E A R l :-.; G

2.p

lights, which are the pure {orms of the four clements, will d,zwn be{ore you; and, simultaneously, the buddha Vairocana and his consort will arise, as before, from the central Buddha field of the Pen•asive Seminal Point [i.e. Ak~mi~(ha-Ghanavyaha]. [At that same moment}, the buddha Vajrasattua and his consort, surrounded by their retinue, will arise from the e.zstern Buddha field of M.mifest joy (Ahhirati). The buddha Ratnasambhaua and his consort, together with their retinue, will arise {rom the southern Buddha field of the Glorious (Srlmat). The buddha Amitahha and his consort, together with their retinue, will arise from the western Buddha field of the Blissful (Sukhdvatl), and the buddha Amoghasiddhi and his consort, together with their retinue, will now arise before you from the northern Buddha field [called} A1atrix of Enlightened Actiuities {i.e. Karmaprasiddhi}, fall arising together} out of a space o{ rainbow light. 0, Child of Buddha N.zture, encircling these male and female deities of the fiue enlightened families, the male gatekeepers, [Trailokyajuijaya, Y,mr.1ntaka, Hayagrluaraja and Amrtaku~u:ja­ lin, will also arise, together with the {enzale gatekeepers, A1ikusa, Pds.:z, Spho(d and Ghm.z{J. In addition, the six {emanational} sages who are transcendent lords, will also appear before you: Indrasakra who is the sage of the gods, Vemacitra who is the sage of the antigods, S/ikyamuni who is the sage of humans, Sthirasi1?zha who is the sage of the animals, judlamukha who is the sage of the anguished spirits, and Dharmardja tl/ho is the s,zge o{ the hell beings. fAccomp,mying the aboue array], Samantabhadra and Sanzmztabhadri will also arise be{ore you, fin the form called] Samantabhadra ,md Consort in Union, [the co,lfescencef which is the progenitor o{ all the buddhas. These, the forty-two assembled deities of the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource, will emanate from within your heart and then appe,zr before you. Recognise them! For they have arisen from within your own pure vision! 0, Child of Buddha Nature, these buddha fields do not exist extraneously. They are the fiue aspects o{ your own he,zrt; its four directions and centre. Emanating now from within your own heart, they have arisen before you. These buddha-bodies have not arisen extraneously. They have spontaneously arisen, atemporally, from the natural expressiue power of your own aw,zreness. Therefore recognise them as they are!

THE

TIBETA~

BOOK OF THE DEAD

0, Child o{ Buddha Nature, these buddha-bodies /that you see before you/ ,Jre neither l,zrge nor small, but perfectly proportioned, and they ure full udonzedjzl'ith their respective ornaments, /costumes/. colours. postures, thrones and hund-gestures. The array is mudc up of fcentr . zlj couples fa( male and (em.de deities/, forming five distinct dusters. and eut-h cluster of fiue is encircled by an aura o( fiue-coloured lights. All the nz.zle bodhis,zttuas of the ffiuej enlightened /~mzilics who accomfhmy the m,zle flmddhasj, all the {enhzle bodhis,ztll'•lS of the [fiuej enlightened f~mzilies who aaompmzy the {emale [lmddhasj, and the entire nzal.u.fal,z will arise [he{ore youj, per(ectly and simultaneously. So recognise them! They are your own meditatio1wl deities! 0, Child of Buddlhl Nature, (rom the he.zrts o{ the male and {em,de bzuidh,zs o{ the five enlightened f~unilies, the light r,zys of the '{our pristine cognitions combined', uery fine and clear, like a spider's web, will d,Jwn before your heart, [like the/ entwined light rays o( the sun. First, a sheet o( radiant white 4 s light rays, bright ,md awesome, findic..ztiue o/J the pristine cognition of reality's expanse, will emanLite from the he,zrt o{ V~.Iiroc,ma, and touch your hc.zrt. Ahoue 4 " this sheet o{light. a U'hite semin,d point resembling u mirror facing doll'nw,zrds zuill arise, emanating light rays, extremely radiant, bright ,md d~.z:::::.ling, .zdonzed with fiue distinct semin~.zl points o{like lhlllire, each of which in turn will be adorned by greater a1zd lesser semm,d points, f{orming an .zrr.zyj with no centre or hori:::.cm. [Second/. a sheet o{ r.zdiant blue light, findic,ztiue olf the mirrorlike pristine cogniticm, {zl'ili emanate/ {rom the heart of Vajras,zttL'•l. Ahoue this, lzke a turquoise bowl facing doll'llll'ards, a radiant blue seminal point will arise, falsoj adorned by fan .zrray off greater and lesser semin,zl points. {Third/. u sheet of r,zdi~.mt ycllou./ light./ indit-.ztiue ofl the pristine cognition o{ sameness, fzl'ill enhmutej (rom the heart o( R,anas.mzhhal'a. Ahoue this, like a gold cup facing downwards, a radi.mt yellow semin,zl point will ,1rise, {also] ,zdomed by fan urruy otf gre,lfer .md lesser seminal points. f Fourth/ ...z sheet o( r,zdimzt red light, [indicatiue o/J the pristine cognition o{ disanzment, /ll'ill emanate/ from the heart o( Amiuhh.z. Aboue this, like a coral bowl facing downwards, a radi~mt red scmin,zl point ll'i/1 arise, extremely luminous and dazzling,

TilE GREAT LIBERATIO:-.: BY HEARING

[resplendent} with the luminosity of pristine cognition. It too will be adorned with five distinct seminal points of like nature, each of which in turn will also be adorned by greater and lesser seminal points, [forming an array] with no centre or horizon. All of these flights and seminal points} will indeed arise, and touch your heart. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, these [radiances] are arising out of the natural expressive power of your own awareness. They have not come from anywhere else. Therefore, do not be attached to them! Do not be afraid of them! Relax and rest in a non-conceptual state. 5° [Abiding] in this state, all the buddha-bodies and light rays will merge into you, and buddhahood will then be attained. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, [during the above series] the green light [indicative} of the pristine cognition of accomplishment will not arise. The reason for this is th.:.1t the natural expressive power of pristine cognition, which is your own intrinsic awareness, is not yet perfected. 51 0, Child of Buddha Nature, this [array of luminosities that you are now experiencing/ is called: 'the vision of the four pristine cognitions combined'. It is fa/so} known as the 'hollow passageway of Vajrasattva '. 52 At this time, therefore, )'OU should recall the oral instructions, which your spiritual teacher formerly introduced to you. If you [successfully] recall this [former] introduction, you will have confidence in the visions that have already arisen, and you will recognise them, just as there is instant recognition at the meeting of a mother and her son, or just as one instantly recognises an old acquaintance the moment one sees them. Cutting through any doubt, you will recognise [these radiances] to be natural manifestations /of actual reality}. Achieving confidence, in this way, in the unchanging path of pure reality, and sustaining a continuous meditative stability, ' 3 you will dissolve into the buddha-body of great spontaneously present awareness 54 and irreuersibly attain buddhahood in the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, together with the radiances of pr_istine cognition, the six [dull flights [indicative] of the six classes [of beings} who are obscured by impure and bewildering perception, will also arise simultaneously. That is to say, the dull white light of the gods, the dull red light of the antigods, the dull blue light of the humans, the dull green light of the animals, the dull yellow light of the anguished spirits, and the dull smoky light of the inhabitants of the hells will arise alongside the radiances of

THE TIBl-.TAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

pure pnstme COKnztwn. At that moment, do not seize upon, or become attached to, any [of these lights/! Relax and abide in a non-referential state. For if you are fearful of the pure radiances of pristine cognition and become attached to the impure lights of cyclic existence with its six classes [of beings/, you will assume a body amongst [one of/ these six realms, and you will be dehilit.Jted; for there will be no [immediate/ opportunity for escape from cyclic existence, this vast ocean of suffering. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, if you are one who has ;wt been introduced to the oral instructions of a spirittwl teacher, you will be frightened and overwhelmed by these buddha-bodies and the radiances of pure pristine cognition, iust described, and you U'ill feel attachment towards the fdulljlights of impure cyclic existence. Do not do this! Be devoted to the bright and dazzling radiances of pure pristine cognition. Be full of devotion and think: 'The light rays of pristine cognition, which are the compassion of Those Gone to Bliss, the transcendent lords of the five enlightened {ami lies, have come to seize me with compassion. I take refuge in them.' Do not be attached to the bewildering lights of the six classes [of beings/. Do not cling to them! Focus one-pointedly on the male and fem,zle buddhas of the fiue enlightened families and recite the following aspirational prayer:

0, as I roam in cyclic existence [driven} by the five virulent poisons, May the transcendent conquerors, /the mule lmddhus/ o( the five enlightened families, draw me forward, Leading me on the path of radiant light, Which is the four pristine cognitions combined. May the five supreme female buddhas, [the purity off the expanse, support me from behind, And, thus [encircled/, may I be rescued From the light paths of the six impure cl,zsses [of beings/! Released frorn the fearsome passageway of the intermediute st.Jte, May I be escorted to the five utterly supreme and pure buddha fields.
By making this aspirational prayer, [the superior adept] will recognise [the radiances of pristine cognition] to be natural manifestations [of actual reality] and thereby, upon dissolving indivisibly

Till:. CRLAT I.IP.[R:\TI0:-.1 HY HEAIU!SC

with them, buddhahood will be attained. Those of average ability will achieve recognition on the basis of fervent devotion and thereby attain liberation, and even all[those of inferior ability] can, through the power of pure aspiration, close the womb entrances through which the six classes [of beings are born]. Thus, if the nature of 'the four pristine cognitions combined' is realised, [all of the above individuals] can attain buddhahood through 'the hollow passageway of Vajrasattva'. As a result of being introduced in such a clear and detailed way, the majority will attain recognition and many [individuals] will achieve liberation. However, those most lowly individuals in the human world who totally lack the propensities for spiritual practice, and those who have broken their commitments and so forth, will continue to be bewildered, as a result of their [negative] past actions. Despite being introduced, they will continue to roam downwards, failing to achieve recognition. So it is, that on the seventh day, the divine assembly of the Awareness Holders will arise from the pure realm of the sky-farers and come to escort [the deceased], as will, simultaneously, the light path to the animal realm, formed of the dissonant mental state, delusion.' 5 At this time, calling the deceased by name, the introduction should be given with the following words:

0, Child of Buddha Nature, listen without distraction. On the seventh day, a fiue-facetcd multicoloured light, [which is indicative of] the purity of your habitual tendencies in the expanse [of reality}, will arise before you. Simultaneously, the divine assembly of the awareness holders, arising from the pure realm of the sky-farers, will come forward to escort you. In the centre of [this ma1Jcf.alaj, suffitsed by rainbows and light, the unsurpassed {Vidyadharaj known as the 'awareness holder of maturation', Padmanartesuara, will instantaneously arise, his body resplendent with the radiance of the five lights, embraced by his consort, a red cj.akinf, {who is dancing} with a blood-filled skull and a curved knife, raised in the gesture of pointing to the sky. From the east of the ma1Jcf.ala, [the Vidyadhara/ known as the 'atl/areness holder who a hides on the levels' will inst,mtaneously arise, his body white in colour, his face radiant ,znd smiling. He is embraced by his consort, a white cj.dkinf, who is dancing with a

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF TilE DEAD

blood-filled skull and a curued knife, raised in the gesture o{ pointing to the sky. From the south of the m,u.zcjula, {the Vidyadlhzraj known tlS the 'awtlreness holder with power over the lifespan' ll!ill inst.zntaneously arise, his body yellow in colour and adorned by the exquisite {eighty/ minor marks. He is embraced by his consort, a yellow cfakini, who is d,mcing with a blood-filled skull and .z curz•ed kni{e, raised in the gesture of pointing to the sky. From the west of the mm.zcfala, {the Vidyadharaj knou.m as the 'awareness holder of the great seal' will instantaneously arise, his body red in colour, his face radiant and smiling. He is embraced by his consort, a red cjdkini, who is dancing with a blood-filled skull and a curued knife, r.zised in the gesture of pointing to the sky. From the north of the mu~zcjLZI,z, {the Vidyadhar,zj known tlS the 'awareness holder of spontaneous presence' will instantaneously arise, his body green in colour, his face both wrath fit! and smiling. He is embraced by his consort, a green cfakini, who is dancing with a blood-filled skull and a cun•ed knife, r,zised in the gesture of pointing to the sky. Encircling these aw,zreness holders, there will be inestim.zhle crou·ds of cfakinis: the cfakinis o{ the eight charnel grounds, cfakinis of the four enlightened families, cfakinis of the three abodes, cj.Zkinis of the ten directions, c.fakinis of the twenty-four power-places, spiritual heroes and heroines, faithful retainers, 'h and protectors of the [sacred] teachings- all wearing the six kinds of bone ornaments, playing drums, thigh-bone trumpets, skull drums and fw,zuing/ banners made of the hide of ritz.wlly 'liberated' beings, ctlnopies and streamers o{ human hide, [the entire display pervaded by} an incense cloud o{ burning human flesh, reuerberating U/ith the sound of countless and dil'erse musical instruments, the sound permeating LZII world systems, ctlusing them to vibrate, tremble and quuke. The crescendo will reverberate as if to split your he,zd. Performing their diuerse dances, this {array/ will come to escort those who haue kept their commitments and to bring to account those who have allowed their commitments to degenertlte. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, a five-coloured light, which is findicatil'e off the purity of your htlbitual tendencies in the expanse {of reulityj and of coemergent pristine cognition, composed of

THE GREAT LIBERATION BY HEARING

253

coloured threads [of light] twisted together, pulsing, shimmering, translucent, radiant, clear, bright and awesome, {will emanate} from the hearts of the five principal awareness holders and will shine piercingly before you, at the level of your heart [with such brilliance/ that your eyes cannot bear it. At that monzent, a dull green light, [indicative on the realms of the animals, will arise simultaneously with the light of pristine cognition /and touch your heart}. At this time, bewildered and confused by your past habitual tendencies, you will be frightened by the five-coloured light, and wish to turn away. Instantly, you will be attracted to the dull light of the animal realms, so therefore, do not be frightened now by the bright and flashing five-coloured light! Do not be terrified! Recognise this [radiance} to be pristine cognition! \'</ithin the [fivecoloured/ light, all the natural sounds of the sacred teachings will resound like a thousand simultaneous peals of thunder. They will resound like a [violent} echo, an overwhelming reverberation, a tumultuous crescendo, a cacophony of war cries, and /pound with the roar on wrathfitl mantras of terrifying ferocity. Do not be afraid! Do not tum away! Recognise these sounds and luminosities to be the naturally expressive power of your own au:areness, manifesting naturally. Do not be attracted to the dull green light of the animals. Do not cling to it! If you become attached to it, you will fall into the obscured realms of the aninZLlis und be enveloped by the limitless sufferings of obfuscation, dumbness and servility, from which there will be no /immediate] opportunity for release. So do not be attached to that {dull green light}! Be devoted to the five-coloured light that is radiant and dazzling! Focus intently and one-pointedly on the diuine assembly of the awareness holders, the transcendent lords and spiritual teachers, thinking: 'As you, the Awareness Holders together with your [attending} heroes and cjakinis have come forward to escort me to the pure realm of the sky-farers, I implore you, pity sentient beings such as myself who have failed to amass the accumulations {of merit and pristine -.:ognitionj, and pity those such as I, who have not been rescued until now, even though we have been embraced by the compassion of all the assembled deities of the five enlightened families, Those Gone to Bliss, throughout the three times! Today may you, the divine assembly of awareness holders, not allow nze to descend any further than this. Grasp me with the hook of your compassion,

254

TilE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

and lead me immediately to the pure realm of the sky-farers.' Focusing intently and one-pointedly on the divine fmm_u:jala off awareness holders, recite the fol/Otoing aspirational prayer:
0, as I roam in cyclic existence [driven] by deep-seated habitual tendencies, May the divine assembly of awareness holders attend to me And lead me on the path, with great love. May the assembly of spiritual heroes and awareness holders draw me forward, Leading me on the path of radiant light, Which is {the luminance off coemergent pristine cognition. May the supreme consorts, the hosts of cjakinis, support me from behind, And, thus fencircledj, may I be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the {sacred/ pure realm of the sky-farers.

By making this aspirational prayer with fervent devotion, you will dissolue into rainbow light, in the heart of the divine assembly of the awareness holders, and thereafter, undoubtedly, be born into the pure-realm of the sky-farers.
All types of spiritual friend can attain recognition at this stage, and [thus I they will attain liberation. There is no doubt that even those with negative propensities can attain liberation at this point. This concludes the first part of the Great Liberation by Hearing, the introduction to inner radiance in the intermediate state of the time of death and the introduction to the peaceful deities of the intermediate state of reality.
ITI! SAMAYA!

rgya rgya rgya!

PART TWO
An Elucidation of the Appearance of the Wrathful Deities in the Intermediate State of Reality
Herein is contained An Elucidation of the Arising of the Intermediate State of the W1rathful Deities. 1

INTRODUCTION
Now, the way in which the intermediate state of the wrathful deities arises should be presented. In the previous intermediate state of the peaceful deities there were seven successive [critical or] dangerous pathways. By receiving introduction to these sequentially, even though one might not have attained recognition at one [critical pathway], one should have attained recognition at another. Those who have achieved liberation [in this way] are countless. Yet, although many have been liberated through such [introductions to the nature of reality], sentient beings are numerous. Evil past actions arc very potent. Negative obscurations are dense. Habitual tendencies are long lasting. The cycle of ignorance and bewilderment is inexhaustible and undiminishing. Despite having received introduction in such detail, there arc still a large number who roam downwards, not having achieved liberation. Now, after the invitation of the assembly of the peaceful deities, and the divine assembly of the awareness holders and 9akinis, has passed, the blazing assembly of the fifty-eight wrathful blooddrinking deities, who are a natural transformation of the above assembly of peaceful deities, will arise. These deities will be very dissimilar [in appearance] to the peaceful deities. This is the intermediate state of the wrathful deities and, [consequently, as the deceased will be] overpowered by fear, terror or awe, recognition also becomes more difficult. Uncontrollably, the awareness

Tlll:

TIBETA~

BOOK OF THE 01:-.AD

continuously faints. But, nevertheless, if there is even the slightest recognition, liberation is easy. Should you ask why this is so- it is because once the awesome, terrifying and fearful appearances arise, the awareness does not have the luxury of distraction. The awareness is one-pointedly concentrated. If, at this stage, oral instructions such as those which follow [have not been previously introduced, or] are not now introduced, even though one's studies may have been ocean-like, they will be of no benefit here. Even the preceptors [of monasteries] who uphold the monastic disciplines and great teachers of dialectics [who have not been previously introduced] will be bewildered on this occasion, and fail to attain recognition. Consequently, they will continue to roam in cyclic existence. This is even more so for ordinary persons: fleeing in awe, terror and fear, they will fall into the abyss of lower existences and suffer miserably. However, even the most inferior of yogins who has practised the way of secret mantra, will immediately, upon seeing the assembled blooddrinking deities, recognise them to be meditational deities, as if meeting old acquaintances. Trusting in them, the yogin will dissolve indivisibly [into the meditational deities] and attain buddha hood. The crucial point is indeed that those in this world who have, [prior to deathj, meditated on the formal description of these blood-drinking buddha-bodies, and also made offerings and praises to them, or, at the very least, have simply seen their painted and sculpted images, may recognise the forms that arise here and attain liberation. Moreover, when those preceptors who uphold the monastic disciplines and the teachers of dialectics [who have not been introduced! die, however great their perseverance was in religious conduct or however learned they were in their exegetical doctrines within the human world, no [auspicious] signs, such as major or minor bone relics or rainbow light, will appear. 2 Since they did not take the way of secret mantra to heart while they were alive, but instead depreciated the secret mantra, and failed to become acquainted [in life] with the assembled deities of the way of secret mantra, they will not recognise the [luminosities and deities] when they arise in the intermediate state. Suddenly seeing something they had not previously seen, they will develop an attitude of aversion and become hostile. Consequently they will proceed into

TilE GREAT Lll.ILR:\TIO:-; BY lll:ARI:-1/G

257

on

lower existences. This [lack of familiarity and the arousal of aversion] is the reason why !auspicious] signs, such as major or minor bone relics, and rainbow light, do not occur in the case of those upholders of monastic discipline and dialectical philosophers, hmvever excellent they may have been, who have not taken to heart and experientially cultivated the way of secret mantra. On the other hand, practitioners of the way of secret mantra, even if they are the lowest of the low, however coarsely [they behaved I in the world, or however unrefined and uncultured they were, and however unseemly and inelegant their conduct, even if they have not been able to experientially cultivate the way of secret mantra successfully, will attain liberation in this instance, simply because they have not embraced a mistaken view, and are without doubt, and are devoted to the secret mantra. Even if such an individual's conduct in the human world was inelegant, at least one !auspicious] indication, such as major and minor relics, images or rainbow light, will occur at the moment of death. This is because the way of secret mantra carries an extremely great blessing. Yogins of the way of secret mantra who are above average capacity, who have experientially cultivated the meditations of both the generation and perfection stages and [practised] the recitation of the heart-mantras, and so on, do not need to roam downwards this far into the intermediate state of reality. As soon as respiration ceases, they will certainly be invited to the pure realm of the sky-farcrs by the awareness holders, heroes and <;iakinis. As an indication of this, [one or more of] the following signs will occur: the sky will become cloudless; [the body] will merge into rainbows and lights; a shower of flowers will fall; there will be the fragrance of perfume lin the air] and the sound of music in the sky; while rays of light, major and minor relics, images, rainbow lights, and so forth will appear [in the funeral pyre ]..1 So it is that, for the upholders of the monastic disciplines and teachers [of dialectics who have not been previously introduced], atld for practitioners of the way of secret mantra whose commitments have degenerated, and for all ordinary persons, this Great Liberation by Hearing is indispensable. Those serious meditators who have meditated on [the practices the Great Perfection and the Great Seal will recognise the inner radiance that dawns during the intermediate state of the time of death and will attain the Buddha-body of Reality. For these

THE TIIH.TAN BOOK Or THE DEAD

meditators there is absolutely no need to read this Liberation by Hearing. [In summary], if individuals recognise the inner radiance during the intermediate state of the time of death, they will attain the Buddha-body of Reality. If they achieve recognition during this intermediate state of reality, when the visions of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities arise, they will attain the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource. If they achieve recognition during the intermediate state of rebirth, they will attain the Buddha-body of Emanation. Alternatively, at the very least, [individuals who have heard this teaching] will be born into the higher existences, where, based on the residual potency of their past actions, they wiU again meet with, and be able to practise, this [sacred] teaching in the next life. Since [this sacred teaching is based on recognition in the intermediate states] this Great Liberation by Hearing is the teaching whereby buddhahood can be attained without meditation. It is the teaching whereby liberation can be attained just by its being heard, it is the teaching whereby those that are the most negative arc led onto the secret path, 4 it is the teaching whereby essential points [of discrimination] are instantly grasped, and it is the profound teaching whereby perfect buddhahood is instantaneously attained. Thus, it is impossible for those sentient beings who have been engaged by this teaching to fall into lower existences. This [Liberation by Hearing] and the [related] Liberation by ~'earing should be read aloud together, since [their conjunction] is like a nur)9ala of gold, inlaid with turquoise ornaments.'

MAIN SUBJECT MATTER
Having outlined in this way the essential purpose of the Liberation by Hearing, [the deceased] should now be introduced to the arising of the intermediate state of the wrathful deities. Again, you should call the deceased by name, three times, and say the following words:

0, Child of Buddha Nature, listen without distraction. Although the intermediate state of the peaceful deities did previously arise within you, you did not recognise it. So now you have wandered, /through the succession of pathways,} to here. Now, 011 the eighth

TilE <.;HEAT LIBEHATION BY IIEARII'G

259

day, the assembly of wrathful blood-drinking deities will arise. Recognise them and do not be distracted! 0, Child of Buddha Nature, he who is called Great Glorious Buddha Heruka will [now} arise, vividly manifesting before you from within your own br,zin. His body, b/a;:ing in a mass of light, is dark brown in colour, hauing three heads, six .zrms and four legs, which are [firmly] set apart. His right face is white, the left red and the central face dark brown. His nine eyes are fixed in a fearsome wrathful gaze, his eyebrows are quiuering like lightning, his fangs are bared and gleaming, and he is laughing loudly, uttering the sounds of Ala/a and Haha, and Shoo oo -like whistles, in loud piercing cries. The go/den-auburn hair of his head blazes and rears upward, sun and moon-discs, black serpents and dry skulls adorn each of his heads, and black snakes and fresh skulls form a garland around his body. In his six hands he holds, on the right in the first hand, a wheel, in the middle one, an axe and in the last hand a sword and to the left, in his first hand, he holds a bell, in the middle one, a ploughshare and in the hzst a skull. The female consort Buddhakrodhesvari is embracing his body, her right hand clasped around his neck and her left offering a skull-cup filled with blood to his mouth. Amidst loud pounding palatal sounds of 'Thuk-chom ', and an [echoing} roar like the reuerberation of thunder, the fire of pristine cognition blazes from the fiery indestructible pores of their bodies, and thus they stand together, {with one leg} extended and /the other} drawn in, on a throne supported by garucjas. Do not be ~.1fr,Iid! Do not be terrified! And do not be awed! Recognise this to be the buddha-body of your own intrinsic awareness. These ~.ue your own nzedit,ztional deities, so do not be terrified. This, in reality, is the transcendent lord Vairocmza and his consort, so do not be afraid. Recognition and liberation will occur sinw/ taneous/y!

If, upon hearing these words, [the deceased] recognises the medit?tional deities, he or she will dissolve indivisibly [within them] and thereby attain buddhahood in the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource. Yet should [the deceased], once again, flee in awe and terror and thereby not attain recognition, then, on the ninth day, the Vajra family of blood-drinking deities will come to escort him or her.

260

THE TIBETA:-.1 BOOK OF THE DEAD

Again, calling the deceased by name, the introduction should be given with the following words:

0, Child of Buddha Nature, listen without distraction. He who is called the transcendent lord Vaira Heruka, of the Vaira family of blood-drinking deities, will arise from the eastern direction of your brain and appear before you. His body is dark blue in colour, with three faces, six arms and four legs, {firmly} set apart. His right face is white, the left red and the central face is blue. In his six hands he holds, on the right in the first hand, a ua;ra, in the middle one, a skull-cup and in the last hand an axe, and to the left, in his first hand, he holds a bell, in the middle one,_ a skull-cup and in the last a ploughshare. The female consort Vairakrodhe5uari is embracing his body, her right hand clasped around his neck and her left offering a skull-cup filled with blood to his mouth. Do not be afraid! Do not be terrified! And do not be awed! Recognise this to be the buddha-body of your own awareness. These are your own meditational deities, so do not be terrified. This, in reality, is the transcendent lord VairLZsattua and his consort, so do not fear them. Be devoted to them! Recognition and liberation will occur simultaneously!

If, upon hearing these words, lthe deceased] recognises the meditational deities, he or she will dissolve indivisibly l with them] and thereby attain buddhahood in the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource. Yet, if those individuals who are greatly obscured by past actions, again flee in awe and terror and thereby do not attain recognition, then on the tenth day, the Ratna family of blooddrinking deities will come to escort them. Again, calling the deceased by name, the introduction should be given with the following words:

0, Child of Buddha Nature, listen without distraction. On the tenth d,zy, he who is called Rutna Heruka, of the Ratna family of blood-drinking deities, will arise from the southern directiolr.of your brain and appear before you. His body is dark yellow in colour, with three faces, six arms and four legs, [firmly/ set apart. His right face is white, the left red, and the central face is a burning dark yellow. In his six IJLmds he holds, on the right in the first

THE GREAT

LIHF.RATIO~

BY IIEARI:-.;G

261

hand, a jewel, in the middle one, a kha{l'anga and in the last hand a club and to the left, in his first hand, he holds a bell, in the nzzddle one, a skull-cup and in the last a trident. The female consort Ratnakrodhesvari is embracing his body, her right hand clasped around his neck and l:'er left offering a skull-cup filled with blood to his mouth. Do not be afraid! Do not be terrified! And do not be awed! Recognise this to be the buddha-body of )'our own awareness. These are your own nzeditational deities, so do not be terrified. This, in reality, is the transcendent lord Ratnasambhava and his consort, so be deuoted to them! Recognition and liberation will occur simultaneously!

If, upon hearing these words, [the dece<:lsed I recognises the meditational deities, he or she will dissolve indivisibly [with them! and thereby attain buddha hood Iin the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource!. Yet, even after receiving this introduction, there arc those who, owing to their negative habitual tendencies, will nevertheless flee in awe and terror. Not recognising their own mcditational deities, they will perceive them as Yama and thereby the recognition will not occur. So it is that, on the eleventh day, the assembled deities of the Padma family of blood-drinking deities will come to escort the deceased. Again, calling the deceased by name, the introduction should be given with the following words:

0, Child of Buddha Nature, [listen without distraction}. On the eleuenth day, he who is called the transcendent lord Padma Heruka, of the Padma family of blood-drinking deities, will arise from the western direction of your brain, in union with his consort, and appear vividly before you. His body is dark red in colour, with three faces, six arms and four legs, [firmly] set apart. His right face is white, the left blue, and the central face is dark red. In his six hands he holds, on the right in the first hand, a lotus, in the middle one, a kha{va1iga and in the last hmzd a mace and to the left, in his first lhmd he holds a bell, in the middle one, a blood-filled skull and in the last a small drum. The {emale consort Padmakrodhesvari is embracing his body, her right hand clasped around his neck and her left offering a skull-cup filled with blood to his mouth.

262

TilE TIBETA:-.; BOOK OF THE DEAD

Do not be a{raid! Do not be terrified! And do not be awed! Contemplate them with joy. Recognise this to he the buddha-body of your own awareness. These are your own meditational deities, so do not be terrified. This, in reality, is the transcendent lord AmitJhha and his consort, so be devoted to them! Recognition and liberation will occur simultuneously!

If, upon hearing these words, lthe deceased! recognises the meditational deities, he or she will dissolve indivisibly !with them] and thereby attain buddhahood [in the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource!. Yet, even after receiving this introduction, there are those who are held back by their negative habitual tendencies and there arc those who will not recognise their medirational deities because they have fled in awe and terror. The recognition not having been attained, so it is that, on the twelfth day, the assembled deities of the Karma family of blood-drinking deities, followed hy the Gaurr, the Pisacr, the Female Gatekeepers, and the Isvari, will come to escort the deceased. Since an even greater fear and terror will arise if these are not recognised, again, call the deceased by name, and offer the introduction in the following \vords:

0, Child of Buddha Nature, listen without distraction. When the twel{th day comes, he U/ho is called the transcendent lord K,zrma Heruka, of the Karma family of blood-drinkinR deities, will arise from the northern direction of your brain, in union with his consort, and appear viuidly be{ore you. His body is dark green in colour, with three {aces, six arms and {our legs, /firmly} set afh1rt. His right face is white, the left red, and the central /~lee is an awesome dark green. In his six hands he holds, on the right in the first hand, a sword, in the middle one, a klhz[u{uig.l and in the last hand a mace and to the left, in his first ha11d he holds a bell, in the middle one, a skull and in the last a plough-share. The female consort Karmakrodhesvari is embracing his body, her right hand clasped around his neck and her left of{ering a skull-cup filled with blood to his mouth. Do not be a{raid! Do not be terrified! And do 11ot be awed! Recognise this to he the buddha-body of your ou.m ,zzuarencss. These are your oum meditation.1l deities, so do not be terrified. This, in re,zlity, is the transce11dent lord Amoghasiddhi and his

THF GREAT LlgEHATIO!'..: BY HEAHII'<G

consort, so reg~.1rd them with intense devotion! Recognition and liberation will occur simultaneously!

If, upon hearing these words, [the deceased] recognises the meditational deities, he or she will dissolve indivisibly [with them] and thereby attain buddhahood [in the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource]. Based on the spiritual teacher's [former] oral instruction, as one recognises these [visionary appearances] as the natural expressive power of awareness, naturally manifesting, liberation will occur. This is like one who recognises a stuffed lion-skin to be a stuffed lion. The nature of the stuffed lion is such that if its actual nature is not recognised it will generate awe and terror. But, as soon as someone points out what this really is, the fa<;ade is penetrated, and the fear dissolves. Similarly, here, when the assembly of blooddrinking deities arises, with their huge bodies and thick limbs, filling the whole of space, Ithe deceased] undoubtedly becomes awed and terrified. But, immediately upon hearing this introduction, the deceased will recognise the appearances to be natural manifestations lof actual reality], or to be their own meditational deities. [As this recognition occurs,] the two [aspects of inner radiance], the 'mother inner radiance', which was formerly [introduced] through the spiritual teacher's guidance, and the 'naturally arising child inner radiance', [the experience of] which emerges subsequently [as the result of practice], meet together- in other words, like meeting an old friend, [the inner radiance] that dawns face to face with oneself docs so in a naturally liberating manner and one will be naturally freed within [the expanse otl naturally radiant intrinsic awareness. If this introduction is not received, even good persons may turn away at this point and continue to roam within cyclic existence. [As this occurs] then, the female wrathful deities, the eight Gauri, and the eight Pisaci, Ithe latter j having diverse Ianimal] heads, will ~merge from within the brain [of the deceased], and appear before him or her. Again, calling the deceased by name, the introduction should be given in the following words:
0, Child of Buddha Nature, listen without distraction! The eight Gauri will now be emerging from within your own brain and appe,lring before you. Do not be afraid! From the eastern direction

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

of your brain the white Gauri, holding a human corpse as a cudgel in her right hand and a blood-filled skull in her left hand, will arise before you. Do not be afraid! From the southern direction, the yellow Cauri, shooting an arrow from a bow; from the west, the red Pramoha, holding a crocodile victory-banner; and from the north, the black Vetali, holding a vajra and a blood-filled skull, [will arise/. From the south-east, the red-yellow Pukkasi, holding entrails in her right [hand/ and eating them with her left; from the south-west, the green-black Ghasmari, holding a blood-filled skull in her left [hand/, stirring this with a vajra in her right hand and drinking awesomely; from the north-west, the white-yellow Carpf.ali, tearing apart the head and bqdy [of a bloated corpse], holding the heart in her right hand and eating the body with her left; and from the north-east, the blue-black Smasani, tearing a head and body apart and eating, {will arise}. These eight Gauri, who are indicative of the [eight/ classes [of consciousness], will emerge from within your own brain, and surround the five blooddrinking deities and their consorts. Do not be afraid! 0, Child of Buddha Nature, listen without distraction! The eight Pisaci, who are indicative of the sense objects, will emerge, and appear before you, encircling this array. From the east, the dark brown Sirrhamukhi, lion-headed, her two arms crossed on her breast, carrying a corpse in her mouth and shaking her mane; from the south, tiger-headed, the red V)'iighrimukhi, her two arms crossed, snarling and staring with bulging eyes; from the west, fox-headed, the black Srgalamukhi, holding a razor in her right hand, and entrails in her left, eating the entrails and licking the blood; from the north, wolf-headed, the black-blue Svanamukhi, tearing apart a corpse with her two arms and staring with bulging eyes: from the south-east, vulture-headed, the white-yellow Grdhramukhi, carrying a large human corpse over her shoulder and holding a skeleton in [both/ hands; from the south-west, kiteheaded, the black-red Kmikamukhi, carrying a large corpse over her shoulders; from the north-west, crow-headed, the black Kakamukhi, holding a skull in her left [hand}, a sword in her right, and eating a {human/ heart and lungs; and from the north-east, owl-headed, the blue-black Ulukamukhi, holding a vajra in her right [hand}, wielding a sword in her left and eating flesh. These, the eight Pisdci, indicative of the sense objects, will emerge from within your brain and arise before you, encircling the five blood-

TilE GREAT L.IBI:.RATION BY IIEARIJ\iG

drinking deities and their consorts. Do not be afraid! Recognise all that arises as the natural expressive power of awareness, manifesting naturally. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, the four Female Gatekeepers will also emerge from within your brain and appear before you. Recognise them! From the eastern direction of your brain the white horse-headed A1ikusa, a blood-filled skull in her left hand; from the south, the yellow sow-headed Pdsa, holding a noose; from the west, the red lion-headed Spho(a, holding an iron chain; and from the north, the green snake-headed Ghar;(ii, holding a bell, will instantaneously arise. 6 These, the four Female Gatekeepers, will indeed emerge from within your brain and appear before you. Recognise them, as they are your own meditational deities! 0, Child of Buddha Nature, on the periphery of these thirty deities, who are the wrathful Herukas [and their retinues], the twenty-eight Isvari will emerge from within your brain and appear before you. They will have diverse [animal] heads and bear diverse weapons. But, do not be afraid! Recognise all that arises as the natural expressive power of awareness, manifesting naturally. Now, at this most critical point, remember your spiritual teacher's oral instructions. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, from the east, the six yogini of the east will emerge from within your brain and appear before you: the brownish white yak-headed Manurak~asi, holding fa vajra and] a skull; the yellowish white snake-headed Brahmar;i, holding a lotus; the greenish white leopard-headed Raudri, holding a trident; the bluish white weasel-headed Vai~r;avi, holding a wheel; the reddish white brown-bear-headed Kaumiiri, holding a pike; and the white black-bear-headed Indrii~zi, holding a noose of entrails in her hand. 7 Do not be afraid! 0, Child of Buddha Nature, from the south, the six yogini of the south will emerge from within your brain and appear before you: the yellow bat-headed8 Pingala, holding a razor; the reddish y~llow crocodile-headed Santi, holding a vase; the reddish yellow scorpion-headed Amrta, holding a lotus; the whitish yellow hawkheaded Saumi, holding a vajra; the greenish yellow fox-headed Dar;qi, holding a cudgel, and the blackish yellow tiger-headed Rak~asi holding a blood-filled skull in her hand. 9 Do not be afraid! 0, Child of Buddha Nature, from the west, the six yogini of the west will emerge fronz within your brain and appear before you:

266

TilE TIBI:.TAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

the greenish red vulture-headed Bhak~asi, holding a club; the red horse-headed Rati, holdi11g a large torso; the pale red g~zn{(.Ja­ headed mighty one fRudhiramadi, consort of Malhzbulaj, holding a cudgel; the red dog-headed f Ekacari~zif RJk~asi, zoic/ding a uajraruzor in her hand; the red lwopoe-headed Manoharika, firing an arrow {rum a bow; and the greenish red deer-headed protectress of wealth, fSiddhihzri, consort of Vasurak~itu/, holding a vase in her hand. 10 Do not be afraid! 0, Child of Buddha Nuture, from the north, the six yogmi of the north will emerge from within your brain and ufJfJear before you: the bluish green snake-headed V ayudeui, brandishing an ensign; the reddish green ibex-heuded AgnJyi, holding a glou.Jing {ire-brand; the blackish green soul-headed VurJhi, holding a noose of fanKs; the reddish green crow-headed Vujra /Camw.u.fi/. holding an in{unt humun corpse; the blackish green eleplhmt-headed BlmjanJ, holding a club and dri11king blood /from a sku/If; und the bluish green S1hlke-headed Vuno.zdni, holding a noose of S1Z.lkes in her hund. 11 Do not be afraid! 0, Child of Buddhu Nature, the four yogini who are the /{our] fem~zle gatekeepers will emerge {rom within your brain und appcur before you: {rom the east, the white cuckoo-he,zded VujrJ f;vfuh.zkalif, holding a11 iron hook; from the south, the yellow goat-he,zded VajrJ f Muhachdgaldj, holding a noose; from the u·est, the red lion-headed Vajra fMahdkzmzblhzkan.zif, holding an iron ch,zin; and {rom the north, the black-green snake-headed Vajra f Lzmbodaraf, holding a bell in her hand. These four yogini, the f(:m,zle gutekeepers, will indeed emerge from within your brain .md appe,ir before you. Do not be a{raid! Since these twenty-eight lsl'ari emanute naturully {rom the expressive pozuer o{ the naturally arising deities, u·hich ,zre the wrathful Herukas- recognise them now! 0, Child of Buddhu Nuture, through the expressil!e power of emptmess, the Buddha-body of Reality has arisen as the peaceji1l deities, recognise this! Through the expressive power o{ radiance, the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource has arisen as the wrathful deities. 11 Recognise this! At this time, zehen the assembly of the fifty-eight blood-drinkiJZg deities muni{ests from withm your bruin, you should recognise dll tlhzt drises as the natur,zlly arising luminosity of your own au•,zre-

THE GRI·.:\T LIBER:\TIO:\ BY liEARl:--<G

ness. Then, fif recognition occurs], you will immediately attain buddhahood, inseparable from the blood-drinking deities. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, if even now you do not recognise this [reality], and become afraid and turn away from the [visionary appe.zrancesj, you will go on to experience yet further suffering. If recognition does not occur, all the blood-drinking deities will be perceived as Yama. You will be overwhelmed by fear, by awe and by terror at [the sight off all the blood-drinking deities; and you will {aint. Those [visionary appearances], which are natural manifestations jof actual reality}, will [seem to} have become demons, and you will continue to roam in cyclic existence. But [even now}, if you are not awed and not terrified, you will avoid the continued wandering within cyclic existence. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, the largest of the buddha-bodies of the Peaceful and \Vrathful Deities will be as vast as the sky; the medium ones will be the size of Mount Sumeru; and even the smallest will be the size of eighteen of our bodies, standing one above the other. u Do not be a{raid! All phenomenal existence is now arising as luminosities and buddha-bodies. By recognising all the present uisiowzry .zppearances to be the natural luminosity of your own intrinsic aw.zreness, manifesting as lights and buddhabodies, you will dissolue inseparably within the lights and buddhabodies, ,md buddhaiJOod will be attained. 0 Child of Buddha Nature, tvhateuer fearsome and terri{ying apparitions appear to you now, recognise them to be natural manifestations [of actual reality/. Do not be a{raid! Recognise these [appearances/ as inner radiance, your own natur.zl luminosity. Upon recognition, you will undoubtedly attain huddhahood, right now. That which is called 'instantaneous per{ect buddhahood' will occur at this very nzornent. Remember this, and hold it in your mind! Child o{ Buddha Nature, i{ you do not recognise [the visionary appearances/now, and continue to be afraid, then all the buddhabodies o{ the peaceful deities will arise in the form of A1ahakala; aft the buddha-bodies of the wrathful deities will arise in the {orm o{ Yama Dharmaraja; and then all of your perceptions will turn into nzaleuolent {orces. In this way, you will continue to wander in cyclic existence. 0, Child o{ Buddha Nature, if you do not recognise the present appearances as natural manifestations [of actual reality], even

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

though you may have been learned in all the stUras and tantras, which form the [Buddha 'sj transmitted precepts, and eL'en though you may have practised these doctrines for an aeon, lmddhahood will not be attained. Yet, if you recognise now the visionary appearances that are manifesting naturally, then, through [the understanding of] a single essential point, and through [the understanding of] a single word, you will attain buddhalwod. If, immediately after death, you do not recognise the appe,Jrances which manifest naturally, these appearances will [euentzwllyj arise during the intermediate state of reality, in the forms of Yama Dharmaraja. The largest form assumed by Yama Dharmaraja is as vast as space; the medium form, tl?e size of A-fount Szmzeru, filling this world-system. [Thus, Yama Dharmardja will appear/, his upper teeth biting into his lower lip, his eyes glassy, his hair tied up on the crown of his head, his belly bulging and his neck thin, brandishing in his hand the wooden slate [documenting/ past actions- his mouth echoing with the cries of 'strike!', and 'kill!'he is drinking brains, seuering heads and ripping out internal organs. In this way, fit will afJpear as if his form/ {ills the entire world. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, when such visions arise, do not be afraid or terrified. Your body is a mental body, formed of habitual tendencies. Therefore, even if you are slain and cut into pieces, you will not die. You are, fin reality], a natural form of emptiness, so there is no need to be afraid. The forms of Yama Dharmaraja arise, too, from the natura/luminosity of your own intrinsic awareness. They have no material substance. Emptiness cannot be harmed by emptiness. [Clearly} determine now that, other than arising from the natural expressive power of your own awareness, [whatever seems to appear to you/ externally - the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities, the blood-drinking fHerukasj, the diverse animal-headed deities, the rainbow lights, the frightening forms of Yama, etc. - these are all without substantial existence. If this is successfully determined, all fear and terror will be liberated [naturally/, just where it is. You will dissolve inseparably [with the visionary appearances/ and buddhahood will be attained. Upon recognising fthe visionary appearances/ in this way, be fcruently devoted, and think: 'These are my meditLZtional deities. They haue come to escort me on the dangerous pathway of the intermediate state. I take refitge in them.' Remember the Three

THE GH.EAT LIBl:.H.ATION BY IIEAH.ING

Precious jewels! Remember your meditational deity, whichever it may be! Call to your meditational deity by name and pray with the following U/ords: 'I am roaming in the intermediate state come quickly to rescue me! Hold me in your compassion, 0 precious meditational deity!' Call to your spiritual teacher, by name, and pray with the following words: 'I am roaming in the intermediate state. Rescue me! Do not let your compassion forsake me!' Pray devotedly, yet again, to the assembled blood-drinking deities and recite this aspirational prayer:

0, as I roam in cyclic existence, /driven] by deep-seated habitual tendencies, May the assembly of fmalej Peaceful and \Vrathful Deities, tr.mscendent lords, draw me {orward, Leading me on the path o{fradiantflight, Through which fall/ awesome and terrifying perceptions are left behind. May the assembly of the wrathful{emalc deities, Dhatuisvari fand so forth/, support me from behind, And, thus fencircledj, may I be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the leuel of an utterly perfect buddha.
Now, when 1 roam alone, sep~zrated from my loued ones, And [myriad/ images of emptiness arise, naturally manifesting, May the buddhas [quickly/ release the power of their compassion, And may the fear of the awesome and terrifying intermediate state be annulled. \Vhen the five radiunt lights of pristine cognition d,zwn, Nfay 1 recognise them as my own /nature}, without awe and without terror, And us the /manifold} forms of the Peaceful and \Y/rathful Deities arise, Al.1y I be fe,zrlessly confident and recognise /the characteristics off the intermediate state. W'hen I experience suffering as the result of negatiue past actions, A1ay the meditational deities dispel all such misery,

270

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

And as the natural sound of reality reverberates like a thousand peals of thunder, May all [sounds} be heard as the resonance of the Six Syllables. When I am driven on by past actions, unable to find a refuge, May the Great Compassionate One, Mahakaru1Jika, protect me. And as I experience the suffering of habitual tendencies and past actions, May the meditative stabilities of inner radiance and bliss [naturally] arise. May the fields of the five elements not rise up as a hostile force, And may I see [them as] the fields o(the five enlightened families! Recite this aspirational prayer with deep devotion. It is very important. As all fear and terror dissolve, you will assuredly attain buddhahood in the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource- so do not be distracted!

The above introduction should be given three or up to seven times. Even if the negativity of the deceased is very great and even if the inheritance of past actions is very bad, it is impossible for liberation not to occur - [if there is recognition]. Yet, regardless of how often these teachings are given, if recognition does not occur, [the deceased] will necessarily roam into the intermediate state of rebirth. The introduction to that [state] is presented below, in detail.

CONCLUSION OF THE INTRODUCTION TO THE INTERMEDIATE STATE OF THE TIME Of DEATH AND THE INTERMEDIATE STATE Of REALITY
Since it is generally the case that one will experience bewilderment at the time of death, this Liberation by Hearing is indispensable, whatever one's degree of familiarity with [meditative] practices. In

T II E (; IU: .\ T L1 l\ 1:. IL\ T I 0 :-; 13 Y !I 1:. A R I ~ G

271

the c.1se of those who have consickrablc familiarity with [meditative] experience the recognition of the nature of reality can arise instantly, as soon as awareness separates from the material body. Therefore, it is essential to culriv~He this experience [of reality J during one's lifetime. Those \vho luve been introduced to lthe nature of! ;nvareness, directly, and who have cultivated [this aspect of meditative experience! Juring their lifetime, will have the greatest ability Juring the intermediJte state of the time of death when the inner radiance arises. Additionally, those who during their lifetime emphasised meditation on the deity, according to the generation Jnd perfection stages of the \vay of secret mantra, will have the greatest ability during the intL·rmniiate state of reality, when the visions of the l'cacdul and \\'rathful Deities arise. Given th<: above, it is extremely important to train the mind particularly in this Liberation by Hearing, \vhile one is alive. It should be embraced. It should be read aloud. It should be thoroughly comprchetH.ied. It should be taken to heart perfectly. It should be read ;1loud three times [<1 (.by], without fail. Irs words and me~111ing should he so clearly impressed on the mind that, even were one to be pursued by a hundred as~assins, its text and meaning would not be forgorren. This being called tht: Grc . zt l.iberc~tion hy He .. zring, even tho~e who have committed the fi,·e inexpi;1blc crimes will attain liberation upon hearing !a recitation of its words]. Therefore, it should be n.\ld aloud in public places. It ~hould be propagJteJ. Since the awareness becomes many times clearer during the intl'rmediate state, even if this teaching is sensc:d, ~1s now, only once, and even if its meaning is not understood, it \vill be remembered at the time !of death], without a single word being forgotten. Therefore it should be read aloud to the ears of ~111 during their lifetime. It should he read aloud across the pillows of all who are sick. It should be read aloud in the presence of all the bodies of the Jc:ad. It should be propagated, far and wide. To meet with this [teaching] is a gre;H good fortune. Except for those who have gathered the accumulations Iof merit and pristine cognition), and purified their obscurarions, it is difficult to encounter. Yet, once it is heard, liberation can be: achieved just by avoiding a mistaken view. 14 Therefore: it should be greatly cherished. It is the es-;encc of all teachings. This complete-. the introdudion to the intermediate state of

272

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

reality, which forms part of the Great Liberation by Hearing in the Intermediate States, the teaching on the intermediate states which liberates just by being heard, or just by being seen.

COLOPHON
This teaching was brought forth in secret by the accomplished master Karma Lingpa, the eldest son of the accomplished master Nyinda Sangye, from the sacred place of Mount Gampodar, which resembles a dancing god, and is located on the banks of the river Serdcn. The master Karma Lingpa entrusted its transmitted precepts and authorisation to his son, Choje Lingpa. The succession fell in turn to his [son) Guru Suryacandra [i.e. Lama Nyinda] and, in his presence, I Gaganadharmasamudra [i.e. Namka Chokyi Gyatso) received it with devotion.

PART THREE
An Elucidation of the Intermediate State of Rebirth
Herein is contained the Great Liberation by Hearing, an introduction to and elucidation of the intermediate state of rebirth, [which is an extract from] the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, [entitled] Natural Liberation through [Recognition of] Enlightened Intention. 1 I bow with respect to the spiritual teachers, and assembled meditational deities. ~1ay they effect liberation in the intermediate state! From within the Great Liberation by Hearing, the intermediate state of reality has already been presented. Here then follows that which is known as the elucidation of the intermediate state of rebirth.

[INTRODUCTION TO THE MENTAL BODY]
Although the elucidation of the intermediate state of reality has already been given many times, with the exception of those who are greatly experienced in the meditations of the [sacred] teachings and those who have an excellent inheritance of past actions, it is difficult for those lacking familiarity with meditative experience and those with a negative disposition to attain recognition, on account of the fear and terror [induced by] negative past actions. Therefore, from the tenth day onwards, these individuals should once again be reminded [of the nature of this intermediate state], through the following words. As before, offerings should be made to the Three Precious Jewels, and the Aspirational Prayer [Calling} to the Buddhas and Bodhisattvas for Assistance should be

274

TilE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

repcateJ. 2 Then, one should read aloud the following, three or up to seven times, calling to the deceased by name:

0, Child of Buddha Nature, listen carefully and understand! Hellbeings, gods and those with the body of the intermediate state are born in a supernormal manner. Formerly, when the visions of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities arose before you during the intermediate state of reality - you did not recognise them. Then, overwhelmed by terror, you will haue fainted. Four and a hal{ days later, upon ,Hvakening {rom this faint, your consciousness has again become clear and a body, resenzbling your former one, has arisen. This ['body' J is described in the tantras:.l
H,n•ing the bodily {urm of one's past and emergent existences, Complete with ,zll sense-faculties, and the power of mzobstructed nzouement. Endowed with miraculous abilities derived {rom past actions, Visible to those similar in kind and through pure clairvoyance. Here, 'past and enzergent'4 means that your {present} body [which is a product of} your past habitual tendencies will resemble a body of flesh and blood, but, like a body of the Auspicious Aeon (bhadrakalpa) it will also be radimzt and possess cert,zin o{ the m,zjor and minor 1narks. Since this fstLZte] is an apparitional experience of the mental body, it is called 'the mental body o{ apparitional experience in the intermediate state·. 5 At this time, if you are to be born as a god, you will come to experience the apparitional field of the realm of the gods. Depending on whichever of the realms you are to take birth in, whether that of the antigods, humans, animals, anguished spirits or hell-beings, you will come to experience its particular apparitional field. Therefore, ·p,zst' means that for three and a half days )'Oll will possess the bodily form /which is a product/ of your past habitual tendencies and existences. And 'emergent' nzeans that, after [three and a half d.1ysj, the apparitional field of the next realm into which you are to be born, will'emerge'. Hence, the expression 'past and enzer._r<ent' {existences/. \VIJLztel'er apparitional fields emerge at this time, do not be drawn by them! Do not hecome attached to them! Do not cling to them! I( you cling to them and become attached, you will continue

T II L

(;tU'. t\

T LIIH. RAT I 0 l'i H Y II EAR IN G

275

to roam amongst the six classes [of beings} and be turning towards suffering. Although, until yesterday, the intermediate state of reality arose [zuithin you}, you did not recognise it. As a result you have been compelled to wander here. Now, just as was [formerly] introduced by your spiritual teacher, if you are able to cultivate, wzdistractedly, fa recognition of] the essential nature [of reality}, if you can rest and abide without grasping and without activity, directly, in the unwavering, naked awareness, which is radiance and emptiness conjoined, you can attain liberation and avoid wandering, yet further, towards the womb entrances. If you are not able to achieve this recognition, then visualise your meditational deity, whichever it may be, or your spiritual teacher, as being [seated} on the crown of your head and be intensely and fervently devoted. This is most important. Again and again, do not be distracted.

If [the deceased] docs indeed recognise this essential nature [of
reality], he or she will attain liberation and avoid roaming further amongst the six classes [of beings]. But, on account of negative past actions, recognition is not easy to achieve, and therefore, one should reiterate [the introduction], in the following words:

0, Child of Buddha Nature, listen [carefitlly] yet again! The phrase, 'Complete with all sense-faculties, and the power of zmobstructed mouement'6 means that, euen though you may have been blind, deo1f or lame while you were alive, now, in the intermediate state, your eyes see {arms, your ears hear sounds and all your sense-faculties are faultless, clear and complete. Hence {the tantra] says 'complete with all sense faculties'. Recognise this {sensory clarity], for it is a sign that you haue died and are wandering in the intermediate state. Remember this oral instruction! 0, Child of Buddha Nature, 'unobstructed' means that the body which you now have is a mental body. Your awareness is now separated from its physical support. Therefore, this is not a body of solid form. Accordingly, you now have the ability to move wzobstructedly; penetrating to the core of all forms, you can pass through Mount Sumeru, and through dwellings, the earth, stones, boulders and mowztains. Indeed, other than your mother's womb and the 'Indestructible Seat',- you can pass back and forth even through .Mount Sumeru itself. Remember the advice of your spiritual te,Jcher- for

THE TIBETAN BOOK Of THE l>EAD

this {ability/ is a sign that you are wandering in the intermediate state of rebirth. [Recognise this} and pray to the meditational deity MahakarUI_zika. 0, Child of Buddlhl Nature, the phrase 'endowed with miraculous abilities derived from past actions '8 does not mean that you necessarily possess any enlightened attributes, or any miraculous ability in meditative stability, but that you have a miraculous ability which results from your past actions and accords with your past actimzs. 9 [Consequently}, you will have the ability to circumambulate Mount Sumeru and the four continents, in an instant. Merely in the time it takes to withdraw or hold out an arm, you can travel instantly anywhere you wish, just by thinking of your desired destination. Do not be fascinated by these diverse and haphazard miraculous abilities. Do not indulge in them. Of all the things which you have the ability to recall, there is not one which you cannot make manifest. You have the ability now, to manifest {any aspect of your past/, zmimpededly. Therefore recognise this and pray to your spiritual teucher. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, as for the phrase 'visible to those similar in kind and through pure clairvoyance', 10 the words 'similar in kind' mean that in the intermediate state, those of a similar kind of birth will come to perceive one another. Thus, in the CLlSe of those 'similar in kind' who are to be born as gods, the gods {to be} perceive one another. Similarly, those that are 'similar in kind' to any of the six classes [of beings/, will come to perceive one another. Do not become attuched fat the sight of these beings/! !vteditute on [the meditational deity] Mahakaru1_zika. The words 'visible through pure clairvoyance' do not refer to the [clazrvoyancej which results from the meritorious qualities of the gods and so forth, but they do refer to the pure clairvoyunce with which those of genuine meditative concentration perceive. 11 However, this is not fa clairvoyance/ that can perceiue /the beings of the intermediate state} at all times. If you are intent on seeing [beings of like nature in this intermediate state/ then they will be perceiued. If you are not so ilztent, they will not be perceived. This [clairvoyance/ will dissolve, as soon as your concentration is distracted. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, with a body having qualities such us these just described, you will {once again} see your homeland ~.-md your relatiues, as if in a dream. Yet, euen though you call out to your relutiues, they will not reply. You will see your family and

Til E G R F.:\ T Ll B 1:. IL\ Tl 0 :-; 13 Y II E J\ R I

~

G

277

relatiues crying and realise: 'I am de.ILi. What should I do now?' Thinking this, you cui// be ouenchclmed by intense suflering- you will{eellike J fish [expelled /rom the Wt.lterj, writhing on hot sand. Although you will suffer [on reulising th,zt you are dead}, this is not helpful [to you now/. If you haue a spiritual teacher, pruy to your spiritual te.zcher! Pr~zy to the meditational deity, AfahJkdru1.1ika! Although you will feel att.1ched to your relatives, this is not helpfitl [to you now f. Do not be attached! Pray to Mahakdru1_zika, and be free of suffering, au·e and fear. 0, Child of Buddha N.zture, your /present/ azc~.-zreness, freed from its [physical/ support, /is being blown/ by the coursing uital energy of past actions. Choicelessly, riding the horse of breath, it drifts directionless, like a {e.lther on the u·ind. To ~.-zll those who are crying, you will call out: 'I am here! Do not cry!' But they will not hear you. Yet agdin, you will re,zlise 'I am dead' and experience a very profound despair. Do not be absorbed by this suffering! Continuously, there will be greyness, like autumn tcl'ilight, with neither d~.zy nor night. The intermedi.zte states [between death .md birth/ tuilllast {or one week, or two, or three, or {our, or fiue, or six or seven weeks - up to forty-nine days in all. It is said that suffering in the intermedi.zte state o{ rebirth will last, generally speaking, {or twenty-one days. Hocl'el'er, since the durution [of this state/ is bused on p ..1st actions, .1 specific number of d . zys is not certain. 0, Child o/ Buddha N ..llure, ,zt this time the fierce, turbulent, utterly zmbear.zble lmrric.me o{ past ~.-1ctions will be /swirling] behind you, driuing you on. Do not be a/raid! This is your own bewildered perception. Be/ore you, there will be a terrifying, dense and un~zthomable d.zrkncss, echoi11g with cries o{ 'Strike!' and 'Kill!' Do not be ,z{r,ziJ! A1oreouer, in the case of very ncgatiue beings, a swarm of carnivorous ogres will arise, executors of the un{ailing /mu of c.wse and effect, 12 brandishing an array o/ werzpo11s, and screaming out aggressively: 'Strike!' mzd 'Kill!' You w~ll imagine that you ,zre being pursued by terril)·ing wild animals. You will imagine that you ~.zre being pursued by hordes of people, and /that you .1re struggling/ through snow, through rain, through blizzards and through darkness. There will he the sound of mountains crumbling, o{lakes flooding, of fire spreading and the ro,lr of fierce winds springing up. Terrified, you will try to flee wherever you c.m, but your p.lth ahead will [suddenly} be cut of/ by three

THI-. TIBETA;:o.; BOOK OF TilE DEAD

precifJices: one white, one red .md one black, all three awesomely frig,htening; you u·i/1 feel as if on the verge of f.liling. 0, Child o{ Buddlhz Nature, these are not truly precipices. They are .wersimz, att.zclmzent and delusion, respectiuely. u Know now th,Jt this is the intermediate state of rebirth, and call to [the meditation,lf deity/ Mulh1kdru1.zik~z. by name, and pray: '0, lord Mahaktlrw.zika, Spirituul Teucher and Precious Jewel, saue me (say your name) {rom {ulling into lower existences' [Pray with deep commitment in this w~zyf; do not forget! At this st~1ge, in the <-"use of those individu.zls uAJO have g~zthered the .zccwnul,lfions {of merit and pristine cognition] and haue sincerely practised the teachings, one will be welcomed by [uisicms ofl alnmdant riches and one will experience manifold blissfitl and happy st.ztes. fIn the case of those individuuls who are indifferent or deluded, uAw haue been neither uirtuous nor negative, one will experience neither pleasure nor pain, but only an apathetic dclusion.t~ Whichever of these h,zppens, 0, Child of Buddha N,zture, tuhateucr objects of desire or blissful or happy states appe.zr be{ore you, do not be att.zched to them. Do not cling to them! Be free from attachment and clinging ,md mentully of{er these /experiences] to your spiritual teacher and to the /Three] Precious Jewels. P~1rticularly, if these visions are of indiflerence, deuoid o{ happiness or pain, .1hide in the experience o{ the Great SeLzl, u•here awareness is fn~zturally present/, without meditation and without distraction. This is uery imfJortant. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, at this time, you will try to find shelter /from the hurricane of past actions/ below bridges, in mansions, in temples or grass-huts or beside stztpas and so forth, hut this fshclterj will be momentary, it will not last. Your awareness, now sep.mzted {rom your body, u.Ji/1 not rest and you will feel rC(kless, angry and ,z(raid. Your consciousness will be f.zltering, superfici.zl, .111d nebulous. Ag,zin you will realise: 'Alas! I am de.zd, whut should I do now?' Reflecting on this, your consciousness tllill grow s,zd, your heart will he chilled and you will {eel intense and boundless misery. Your mind is being compelled to move on, without settlillg in one place. Do not indulge in all kinds of n1emories! Let your awareness rest in an undistr.zcted state! [The time will come when you will realise th,ztj you have no (ood, except that u•hich has been dedicated to you. As for compd1Iionship, fherej, similurly, there will be no certainty. These

TI-ll: GREAT

LIBFIC\TIO~

BY

HFARI~G

are both indic,ztions that the mental body is u:.:mdering in the intermediate state of rebirth. Your present feelings of happiness and sorrow are [now] driuen by your past actions. [Once again}, seeing your honzelund, circle o{ friends, rehllir•es and even your own corpse, you will realise: 'I am dead! \VIhlt should I do now?' You will feel deeply saddened /by your existence] in a mental body, and wish, '0 that I might obtain a physical body!' Consequently, you will experience roaming here and there in search of a body. You might euen attempt, many times, to re-enter your own body, but a long time has alre.uiy elapsed i1z the [preuiousj intcrmedi..:zte state of re.1lity. In winter your body zcill have fro::.en, in summer it u·ill have decayed. Altenwtiuely, your relatiues will haue cremated it, buried it in a gr.we, or offered it to the birds and wild animals. Not finding a w.zy back, you will/eel utterly distressed, and you will certainly feel yourself [trying to] squeeze [into the creuicesj between stones and rocks. Torments such as these will enfold you. This being the intermediate state of rebirth, so long dS you search for a body, you will experience nothing but suffering. Therefore give up your clinging to a body and rest in a state of 1101h1Ctiulty, [undistractedlyj.
Liberation can be obtained in the intermediate state, as a result of the above introduction. However, even though this introduction is given, due to negative past actions, recognition may not occur. So again, you should call to the deceased by name and say the following words: 0, Child of Buddha Nature, (call to the deceased by name), /iste11 [to me}. It is due to your own past actions tlhzt you ,1re now sufferi1lg in this U'<ly. No one else is responsible- this is solely the result of your own past actions. Pray ardently now to the Three Precious Jeu•els. They will protect you. If you do not pray intensely now, especially il you do not know how to meditate on the Great Seal, or if you cannot meditate 011 a meditational deity, the 'innate good conscience' within you 15 llli/1 now gather together all your virtuous actions, counting them out with white pebbles, and the 'innate bad conscience' within you will gather together all your non-virtuous actions. counting them out with black pebbles. At this moment you will tremble with extreme {ear, az.oe and terror. You u.,:il/ tell lies, saying, '/ haue not committed non-virtuous

.!.So

TilE TIBErA:-; BOOK OF THE DEAL>

actions!' But at this, Yanw will s,zy: 'I shall consult the mirror of past actions. ' 1" In the mirror of past actions, fall your uirtues and non-uirtucsj will he reflected L'il'idly ,md precisely. Your attempts at deceit zuill be of no use. Tying a rope around your neck, Yamu will drLZg yuu (oru.'ard. He will sever [your head/ at the neck, extr,zct your heart, pull out your entr,zils, lick your brains, drink your blood, e,zt your flesh and suck your bones. Despite this, you will not die. 1-~t·en as your body is [repeatedly/ cut into pieces, it will he continuously reuiL·ed. Experiencing being cut into pieces in this lULl)'. time u(ter time, will c.:zuse enormous suffering. From the moment the counting o{ the pebbles begins, do not be a{rLiid! Do not be terrified! Do not lie. ,md do not be a{r,lid o{ Yama. The body ll'hidJ you nozv h,ll•e is a mentul h.ody; therefore, euen though you experience being slain ,md cut into pieces, you cumzot die. f Recognise now, tlhlt j in re.zlity, you need h,zve no fe"zr, because, fin truth/, your fhodyj is a n..ztural {orm o{emptiness. The acolytes of Ymn~.1 ,zre also, fin reality/. n,ztur,lf forms of emptiness- these are your own bczl'ildered perceptions. Your body, formed of mentul propensities, is fa nutur.JI form o{j emptiness. Fmptiness camzot hurm emptiness. Signlessness c~.11mot harm signlessness. Outside, und distinct {rom your own bewildering perceptions, Yama, gods, m,lleuolent forces, the hull-headed Rak~a and so on, do not substantially exist. 1.,. Recognise this! Recognise, now, tlhlt this is the intermediute st-zte! J>/,zce your mind in the meditatil'e stuhility of the Great Scul! I{ you do not know how to medit,zte, directly examine the cssena o{ tlhzt which is producing your fear and terror. This fessence J is a st.z rk emptiness, completely without inherent existence in any respect wlhltsocl'er! This [stLZrk emptiness/ is the Buddh.:zhody of Re,dity. Yet, this emptiness is not ~.1 L'LZcuous or nihilistic emptilzcss. The essenti,d nature of this emptiness is an awesome, direct and radiLZIZt aw,zreness, which is the enlightened intention of /the Buddha-body of/ Perfect Resource. lndeed, emptiness and radi.znce arc not sefhJrate: the essential ,.hlture of emptiness is rudi,mce Lind the essential 1Wture o{ r,Idiunce is emptiness. This indiuisible, naked, unclouded .md exposed awt..~rc1zess. present as it is right now in u nLltztr,d u1zcontriued state, is the Ruddhu-body of J:ssentialiry. 1 s furthermore, the lhllztrul expressive power [of this Buddha-body o{ Essenti.dityj is the compussionutc Buddha-body o{ EmL-Znation, tchich .nises et•eryzuhere Ll'ithout obstruction. 0. Child o{ Huddh.z N ..llure, listen fto me/ nou•, and do not be

TilE GREAT LIBERATIOI' BY HEARII'G

distracted. By merely recognising [the essential nature of your experience} in the above way, you will attain perfect buddhahood, endowed with these four buddha-bodies. Do not be distracted! The division between buddhas and sentient beings is determined by this [recognition}. If you are distracted at this critical moment, the opportunity to escape from the swamp of suffering will be lost. It is said of this very nzornent: In an instant, penetrating analysis is made. In an instant, perfect buddhahood is attained. Until yesterday, because you were distracted, even though so many aspects of the intermediate states have arisen, you did not attain recognition. [Up to this time}, you have experienced so much fear and terror. Now, if you continue to be distracted, the lifeline of compassion, suspended to you, will be cut off and you will move on to a place where there is no [immediate} prospect of liberation. So be careful.
Through this introduction, even though [the deceased! may have failed to attain recognition previously, he or she will be able to do so at this stage and consequently attain liberation. If, ho\vever, [the deceased] is a lay person, who does not know how to meditate, you should say the following words:

0, Child of Buddha Nature, if you do know how to meditate you should call to mind the Buddha, the [sacred} teachings, the [sublime/ assembly of monks and nuns, and [the meditational deity/ M.1hakaru~zika and pray to them. Meditate on all the fearful and terrifying appearances as being [forms} of Mahakaru~ika, or your meditational deity. Remember your spiritual teacher and remember the name which you received during empowerment ceremonies in the human world. 19 [Say this name to} Yama Dharma raja _and do not be afraid of him. [Know now, that/ even if you were to plunge down over the precipices, you would not be harmed. So, abandon your fear and your terror.
Even though liberation may not have been achieved previously, if the above introduction is accepted, [the deceased] will attain liberation at this juncture.

z.H2.

TilE TllH.TA!'-i BOOK OF THE DF:\0

Yet, since there is the possibility that [the deceased! will not achieve recognition, even though the introduction has been given, it is very important to persevere. Therefore, once agJin, one should call to the deceased by name and say the following words:

0, Child of Buddha Nature, your present perceptions can, like a catapult, in a instant, cast you into the most awesome st~ztes; either blissful or full of suffering. Therefore, now. fit is critical that/ your perceptions are not coloured by either attachment or auersion. It may be that you are about to t.1ke birth in the higher realms, yet at the time when the perceptions of the higher realms occur, your liuing rel,ztives, now left behind, are sacrificing and offering many anim.1ls on your behalf, dedicating {this actiuityj to you, the deceased. Corrupted perceptions teill thus arise ,md consequently an intense auersion may well up [within youj, and this will form a connecting link to a birth in the hell realms. Therefore, wlhzteucr activities occur in the place that you have left behind, meditate on loving kindness, and ensure th,zt az•ersion docs not .1risc! Alternatiuely, your mind nz,zy grow attached to your wealth ~md possessions, now left behind, or else, knowing that your u•ealth and possessions arc being enjoyed Lind owned by others, you may become both attached to those worldly goods and also hatefiJI towards those left behind fwho are using your possessions/. As a result of this, a connecting link will cert,zinly be formed to a birth amongst the hell beings or amongst the anguished spirits, euen though you may have been at the point of attaining birth in {one on the higher realms. However attached you may be to the wealth now felt behind, you do not haz•e the ability to enjoy it. Since it is absolutely of no use to you, ab,mdon your attaclmzent and yearning for the wealth that you have left behind. Let it go! Be decisiue! Regardless of who is enjoying your wealth, do not be possessive! Let it go! Cultiuate devotion, and imagine that you are oflering these [worldly possessions/ to your spiritu,zl teacher mzd to the /Three] Precious jewels. Rest in a state free from attachment ~md free from clinging. Once again, ez•en when the Kankar)IdharaQI incantation {or the dead is being recited for you and the Purification of the Lo\vcr Realms (Sarvadurgatiparisodhanatantra) is being recited 011 your behalf. you may perceive. with your present subtle cognitive ability. th.zt these [rites} ,zre being per{ormed impurely and distr,zctcdly,

T II E l; R F. AT Ll !H. RAT I 0 N B Y H L\ R I :-I G

and that those [who are performing these rituals/ are impure in both their commitments and vows ~md are careless in their conduct. As a result, you may huve no confidence in them, you may form a bud opinion of them, and you may become fearfully and horribly aware of their negative past actions, etc., as well as of their impure practice of the {sacred/ teachings and the rituals. Feeling this, you tuill experience the utmost s~1dness, and think: 'Alas, they have betrayed me! They haue truly betrayed me!' As a consequence of your profound disenchantment, instead of muintaining purity of perception and [feelings of/ respect, negatiue opinions and loss of confidence will arise within you. Thus, [these perceptions and feelings/ will{orm u connecting link that will certainly propel you into the lower existences, and, in this way, {your subtle cognitive ability and the rituuls recited on your be1Ja!f7 will not haue been of benefit, but rather o{ gre~.lt harm. Hou/ever impure may be the pructice of the [sacred} teuchings by your {riends now left behind, you must maint,zin respect and purity of perception from the depths of your heart. Think to yourself: 'i\1y own perception is so polluted! How could the speech of the buddhas be impure! These [impure perspectiues] haue arisen as a consequence of my own impure perception, and [will appear to me] just as the fl~.zws on my face will be reflected in a mirror. As for these {individuals performing the rituals, in reality] their bodies are the {sublime/ community o{ monks and nuns, their speech is the genuine [sacred/ teaching, and their minds are the essence of the buddhas. Therefore, I take refuge in them.' Thinking thus, whateuer actiuities occur in the place that you have left behind, they tl'ill cert..Jinly be beneficial to you. It is extremely importLZnt to maintain this purity of perception. Do not forget this! Euen if you are about to be born into the lower existences, [yet yo11 do nwint~.lin purity o{ perception}, and you perceive the ; elatives that you h~we left behind practising the uirtuous te,1chings, unstuined by negativity, and you see your spiritual teachers and musters purely practising the rituals with virtuous body, speech and mind, you will feel great joy. Simply through this [experience of great joy], cuen though you were about to fall into lower existences, this [joy/ will form a connecting link, which will certainly turn you back towards the higher realms. Since there is such manifold benefit, do not now lapse into impure perception. It is

TilE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

extremely important to maintain purity of perception and to be unbiasedly devoted. So, be careful! 0, Child of Buddha Nature, in short, since your awareness during this intermediate state lacks any [material] support, it is light and volatile, and therefore, whatever uirtuous or non-virtuous perceptions arise, these are very powerful. Do not be absorbed by non-uirtuous thoughts! Call to mind the virtuous practices of your past! Even if you did not engage in virtuous practices [during your life/, maintain purity of perception and deep devotion! Pray to your meditational deity or to Mahakaru1.tika, and with a powerful longing repeat the following aspirational prayer: 20 Now when I roam alone, separated from loz,ed ones, And [myriad} images of emptiness arise, naturally nzanifesting, May the buddhas [quickly/ release the power of their compassion, And may the fear of the awesome and terrifying intermediate state be annulled. When I experience suffering, as the result of negative past actions, May the meditational deity fMahakaru1Jikaj dispel all such misery, And as the natural sound of reality reverberates like a thousand peals of thunder, · May all sounds be transformed into the resonance of the Six Syllables. When I am driven on by past actions, unable to find a refuge, May the Great Compassionate One, Mahakaru~zika, protect 1ne, And as I experience the suffering of habitual tendencies and past actions, May the meditative stabilities of inner radiance and bliss [naturally] arise. Say this aspirational prayer with ardent longing; it will certainly lead you on to the path. Be absolutely certain that this faspirational prayer/ will not deceive you. This is most important!

THE GREAT LIBERATION BY HEARI:'I/G

Through these words, [the deceased] will regain his or her focus, and recognition will occur. Then, liberation will be attained.

[OBSTRUCTION OF THE

W0~1B

ENTRANCES]
Even though this introduction may have been given many times, due to the potency of strong negative past actions, recognition may be difficult. It is very beneficial, therefore, to repeat [the introduction] now, many times. Again, therefore, calling to the deceased by name, you should say the following words [at least] three times:

0, Child of Buddha Nature, if you have not taken to heart [the introduction] which has gone before, from now on, the body of your past life will grow more faint and the body of your next life will grow more vivid. At this, you will be dismayed, and you will think: 'I am experiencing such misery! Now I will look lor whatever kind of body I can find.' Thinking in this way, you will move haphazardly and randomly towards whatever might appear and consequently the six lights indicative of the six realms of living beings will dawn; and, according to your past actions, [the light of the realm] into which you are to be born will shine the most of all. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, listen! What are these six lights, you may ask? A dull white light indicative of the realm of the gods will arise. A dull red light indicative of the realm of the antigods will arise. A dull blue light indicative of the human realm will arise. A dull green light indicative of the animal realm will arise. A dull yellow light indicative of the realm of the anguished spirits will arise and a dull smoky light indicative of the realm of the ~ell-beings will arise. These six lights will emerge. And at this time, your [present] body will take on the colour of the light of the realm Into which you are to be born. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, at this juncture, the essential points of the oral instructions are extremely important. Meditate now on the light [that dawns] as being Mahakaru1'}ika! Meditate on the thought that when the light dawns, it is Mahakaru7Jika. This is the most profound crucial point. It is

T 1-1 1-. T I B [

rA ~

B 0 0 K l) F T H E D 1: :\ D

extremely import~mt, hcc.wse {this oral instruction/ obstructs birth. Altenwtiuely. you should medit.zte for a long time on your medit,ztional deity, whid)(•z•er it m,zy be. f.\1edit,Jtc on the deity/ appc,zring like ,m illusion, completely {ree {rom inherent existence. This is c,zl!ed fthe pr,zctice off the 'pure illusion-like body·. Accordingly, dissoh•e /the {orm o{J the meditati1m . 1l deity {rom the extremities [inwards}, until it disappe.zrs completely, and abide in the {resultant/ st.zte of emptiness and radiance, where nothing at all substantially exists and where there is no subjcctiz.·e apprehension. Medi!Lzte yet ag,zin on the mcdit,lfional deity . .\1edit..zte again on the inner r,uh.m,-e. Medit,lfe ,J!tenz.ztcly in this w..zy, ,md ,z{ter this, dissoh·e your ,m·,zrelzess itscl{{rom the extremities fimu.zrds. into emptiness and r,zdi,mccj. W'herez·cr there is space there is au·!.lreness. V:.'herever there is azl',zreness there is the Buddh.z-body of Re,zlity. Abide nakedly, therefore, in the st£7te of the zmimpeded Buddh.z-hody o{ Re,zlity. free {rom conaptu,z/ c/,zhor.ztion. [Abiding/ in this state, birth tl'ill he obstmdcd ,md huddh.dJOod ll'ill be att,zincd.
Yet, those unfamiliar with meditative experience and those very weak in their practice will not be able to understand rand 3pply the above introductions]. Once again, overcome by confusion, they will w;mder towards the womb entrances. Thus, the teachings which obstruct the womb entrJnces become of great importance and you should, once again, call to the de(eased by n~1me and say the following words:

0, Child of Buddha Nature, if you lhwe 11ot att,7ined recognition

fas a result of the introductions/ which haue gone bc{ore, then, based on the putclzc.-y ol your past actions, the perception will arise that you .zre mot•ing upu•,zrds, or mul'ing hori;:.ont.. zlly or mouing dou•llw,zrds. 21 As this OC(ltrs, )'Olt should medit,1te 011 lvlah~.zk.zru­ ~rika. Remcnzh,•r this! Yet ,zg..zin, tiS described hc/~>re, the experience u·i/1 arise of hcing pursued hy whirlwi11ds, hli:.:.z,zrds, IJLzil, or {o}!.; and a crowd'of f)(:oplc, and yolt zuill he trying to esc.zpc. Those who are lacking in merit ll'illcx{Jcricncc th.zt they ,zre fleeing tou/..zrds .z pl,zcc of suffermg. Thusc ll'ith merit ll'ill exfJerience arriz·ing at a place of h.zppincss. 0, Child ol Buddh.z N.zture, now, ,zt this point, the signs of

THE <.;RL\T

LIBER:\TIO~

BY IIE:\RING

the enuironment into which you L'lre to be born, on one amongst the four continents, will arise. Specifically for this moment, there are many profound essential points of oral instruction. Therefore listen, now, without distraction. Even though, previously, you have not taken to heart the essential instructions introduced to you, you can do so now, {or even those whose practice is very weak can underst.md [and apply one on the following essential instructions. So listen, now, without distraction. At this stage, it is extremely important that you carefully employ the methods for obstructing the womb entrances. [Principally}, there are two such methods of obstruction. These are: [first], the nzethod which obstructs the person who is to enter the womb and, [second/, the methods which obstruct the womb which is to be entered.
The oral teaching for the method which obstructs the person who is to enter the womb, is as follows: 0, Child of Buddha Nature, (call to the deceased by name) visualise notu your meditational deity, whichever it may be, with vibrancy. [MeditLZte on the deity/ as [vividly} apparent, yet completely lacking in inherent existence, like [the reflection on the moon in water. If you do not have a specific meditational deity, then visualise the lord MahdkarznJika, again with great vibrancy. Then, [gradually], dissolve [the image of] the medit~1tional deity from the extremities [inwards, until it disappears completely] and then meditate on the [resultant union/ o{ inner rLZdiance and emptiness, which is utterly free from any objective referent. This is the profound essential point. Meditate in this way, for it is said that by this means entry into a womb will be averted. Should even this !introduction] not cause obstruction and should [the deceased] continue to draw closer to the act of entering a womb, there are also the profound oral instructions which obstruct the womb entrances. These are as follows:

[0, Child of Buddha Nature,} listen [carefully}! In the recitation of the Root Verses of the !Six] Intermediate States, the following lines are spoken. Repeat these, now, after me: 22

THE TIBI::.TAN BOOK OF THI::. DEAD

Alas, now as the intermediate state of rebirth arises before me, I must with one-pointed intention concentrate my mind, And resolutely connect with the residrwl potency of my virtuous past actions. I must obstruct the womb entrances and call to mind the methods of reversal. This is the time when perseverance and purity of perception are imperatiue. I must give up all iealousy and medit,zte on my spiritual teacher with consort. It is extremely important to clearly repeat these uerses aloud, to arouse your memories {of past virtues/, to rneditate on this [prayer} and to experientially cultiu,zte its meaning. The meaning of these verses is as follows: the line 'now as the intermediate state of rebirth arises before me'2-' explains th~.zt you are now roaming in the intermediate state of rebirth. As an indication of this, if you look into water, you will not see your reflation. Your body dues not even cast a shadow. These are both signs that you do not have a solid body of flesh and blood, but that you arc roaming, with a {subtle] mental body, in the intennediate state of rebirth. Now, therefore, you 'must with one-pointed intention concentrate your mind', 24 undistractedly. At this moment, this /singularity of} intention is by itself the most important factor. 1tis like ,1 horse being controlled by the use of a bridle. Whatever your intention focuses upon, this will come about. Do not turn your mind to negatiue past actions! C1.1/l to mind, now, your connections in the human world with the {s1.1credj teachings and instructions, remember the empou./erments and oral transmissions [prel'iously received], remember [your connection with] this Liberation by Hearing in the Intermediate States, and so forth. it is extremely important that you 'resolutely connect with the residual potency of your virtuous past actions·. 25 Do not forget! Do not be distracted! The present moment is the dividing-line between progression and regression. The present moment is the time wh;n, by lapsing into laziness, even for an instant, you will experience constant suffering. The present moment is the tirne when, by cmzce1ztr~.zting ll'ith a singul,1r intention, )'OU will achieue constant lwppiness. Concentrate your mind with a single-pointed intention.

TilE Gl{LAT LIBERATION BY IIEARING

'Resolutely connect with the residual potency of your virtuous past actions.' Now is the time when you must obstruct the womb entrances. It is said fin the verses] that you 'must obstruct the womb entrances and call to mind the methods of reversal. This is the time when perseverance and purity of perception are imperative'. 26 You have noll! arrived at that stage. Your priority now is to obstruct the womb entrances. There are five methods which will bring about obstruction of the womb entrances, so keep them carefully in mind. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, at this stage, the perception will arise of a male and a female engaging in sexual intercourse. Upon perceiving this, do not to enter between the male and the female, but be mindfit! and 'meditate on' the male and the female as being your 'spiritual teacher with consort'. 27 Prostrate yourself before them and make offerings, emanating these with your mind. Be intensely deuoted and request instructions from [your spiritual teacher and consort]. Just by inte11tly focusing your thought in this way, the womb entrances will certainly be obstructed. Should [the womb entrances] not be successfully obstructed through this method and you are nonetheless drawn ever nearer to entering the womb, then meditate now on the spiritual teacher and consort as being your personal meditational deities, whichever these may be, or [if you do not have a personal meditational deity}, meditate on the spiritu£Zl teacher and consort as being Mahakaru1Jika and his consort. Again, make offerings, emanating these with your mind and generate the thought very intently: 'I request [the attainment of your} spiritu,ll accomplishment!' Thereby, the womb entrances will be obstructed. Should even this not obstruct the womb entrances, and you are still drawn ever nearer to entering the womb, the third method, which reverses attachment and auersion, is now to be revealed to you. There are four modes of birth: birth from an egg, birth from a -womb, supernormal birth, and birth from warmth and moisture. 2H Among these, the birth from an egg and birth from a womb are very similar, in that in both cases you will see the male and the female engaged in sexual union, as [described] above. If, based on either attachment or auersion, you enter a womb at this time, you will be born as a horse, bird, dog, human, or whatever is appropriate. If you are to be born as a male, you will experience

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAO

the perceptions of a male. You will feel intense aversion towards the father and you will feel jealousy and attachment towards the mother. If you are to be born as a female, you will experience the perceptions of a female. You will feel intense envy and jealousy towards the mother and you will feel intense attachment and affection towards the father. This [emotional arousal] will cause you to enter a womb. Here you will experience the 'coemergent delight', in the midst of the meeting between the sperm and the ovum. From that state of bliss you will faint into unconsciousness, and as time passes, the embryo will come to maturity in the womb, moving through [its various stages of development}, that is, the clotting of the embryo, the oval elongation of the embryo, 29 and so forth until finally, you will emerge /from the womb] and open your eyes. Now, you will have turned into a puppy. Previously having been a human being, you will now have become a dog. So consequently, you will suffer in a dog-kennel, or similarly, in a pigsty, or an anthill, or a wormhole, or else you may be born as a baby bull, a goat, a sheep and so forth. There is no way back. You will experience all manner of sufferings in a state of great obscurity and delusion. Through this process you will continue to remain within the six classes of living beings, including the realms of the hell beings and the anguished spirits. You will be completely drained by boundless sufferings. There is nothing more awesome or frightening than this! Oh dear! This is truly terrifying! Oh dear, Oh dear, in this way, those who lack the oral instruction of a genuine spiritual teacher will indeed fall into the great abyss of cyclic existen'e and be tortured unbearably by continuous sufferings. Rather than this, listen to my words! Understand this instruction of mine. I will reveal now an oral instruction which obstructs the womb entrances, through the reversal of attachment and the reversal of aversion. Listen and understand this well! It is said [in the Root Verses of the Six Intermediate States/:~ 0 I must obstruct the womb entrances and call to mind the methods of reversal. This is the time when perseverance and purity of perception are imperative. I must give up all jealousy and meditate on my spiritual teacher with consort.

THE GREAT LIBERATION BY HEARING

As is described fin the oral instruction] above, if you are to be born as a male, you will feel attachment towards the mother and aversion towards the father. If you are to be born as a female, you will feel attachment to the father and aversion towards the mother. Thus you will come to experience jealousy, fa conflict of attachment and aversion}. Specific to this stage, there is a profound oral instruction. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, when the feelings of attachment and aversion arise, meditate as follows: 'Alas, sentient beings such as I, with such negative past actions, have, up until now, roamed in cyclic existence. I have continued to wander in this way, being driven on by my feelings of attachment and aversion. If, especially at this time, I continue to be influenced by attachment and aversion, there is a danger that I will roam into the limitlessly [diverse} states of cyclic existence and risk sinking into the ocean of suffering, for a very long time. Therefore, now, from the very beginning, I must not generate attachment or aversion. Oh dear, Oh dear! As of now, I shall never again be motivated by attachment or auersion.' By concentrating intently on this thought, as it is said in the tantras, the womb entrances will be obstructed by this [singular intent} alone. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, do not be distracted! Concentrate your mind on this thought, with a onepointed intention.
Yet if, even having done this, the womb entrances are still not obstructed and [the deceased] draws ever nearer to entering a womb, then the womb entrances should be obstructed by giving the oral instruction on the unreal and illusion-like nature [of all phcnomena]. 31

[0, Child of Buddha Nature], meditate in the following way! 'Alas! The father and the mother fin sexual union], the rain, the blackness, the hurricane, the thunderous sound, the fearful and terrifying experiences, the nature of these and of all phenomena is iJlusion-like. In whatever form [phenomena} arise, they are not real. All substantial things are unreal and false, like a mirage. They are not permanent. They are not changeless. So what is the purpose of my attachment [to these perceptions]? What is the purpose of my awe and terror? That which is non-existent, I am seeing as existent! I In reality}, all these things [that I perceive} are the perceptions of my own mind. Yet, the essential nature of mind is

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

primordially non-existent, like an illusion. So how is it possible for things to exist externally, in their own right? Since I haue not understood this before, I haue [always] regarded the non-existent as existent. I haue regarded the unreal as real. I haue regarded illusions as truth. This is why I haue roamed in cyclic existence for such a long time. Now, yet again, if I do not realise that all these [phenomena] are illusions, I will continue to roam in cyclic existence, interminably, and without doubt, I will drown in a swamp of euery manner of suffering. Now, [I must realise that] all these {phenomena] are completely deuoid of substantial existence, euen for a single instant. fin reality], they are like a dream, like an illusion, like an echo, like a celestial .city, like a mirage, like a reflection, like an optical illusion, like the moon {reflected] in water. It is absolutely certain that these [phenomena] are not truly real, but that they are false. Through this singular resolue, I will blow apart my apprehension of their true existence. Through utter confidence in this {meditation], my apprehension of self-existence will be reuersed.' By knowing from the depths of your heart that all these {phenomena] are unreal, the womb entrances will certainly he obstructed.
However, if, despite this [teaching! being given, the apprehension of true existence is not shattered, and the womb entrances are therefore not obstructed and [the deceased] draws ever nearer to entering a womb, then there is a lfinall profound oral instruction:

0, ·Child of Buddha Nature, if, euen after hauing engaged in the aboue {meditation}, the womb entrances haue still not been obstructed, now, according to the fifth [profound oral instruction}, you must obstruct the womb entrances by meditating on inner radiance. 32 The method of meditation is as follows: 'Alas! All [seemingly] substantial phenomena are [expressions of] my own mind. Yet, fin reality], this mind is of the nature of emptiness, it is beyond creation and beyond cessation.' By focusing your thought in this way, your mind should [naturally] return to an uncontrived and stainless state. Let the mind rest in this, its natural state, directly in itself, in the same way, for example, as water is poured into water. Let [the mind} rest in its natural flow, clear, unconstricted, uncontrived and relaxed..n fBy following this method]

THE GREAT LIBERATION BY HEARING

293

you can be sure that the womb entrances to the four modes of birth will certainly be obstructed. Meditate again and again in this way, until the wonzb entrances are closed.
Set down above are several profound and genuine instructions for effecting the obstruction of the womb entrances. For those with high, average or low ability, it is impossible not to be liberated by these l instructions]. This is because: first, consciousness in the intermediate state is endowed with an, albeit corrupt, supernormal cognitive ability. Therefore, whatever one says [to the deceased] is heard by the deceased. Second, even if the deceased was deaf or blind [while in the human world!, now, [in the intermediate state], all the sensory faculties will be complete and therefore whatever is said will be apprehended. Third, since the deceased is continuously being overwhelmed by fear and terror, there is an undistracted concentration on what to do; therefore, what is said will be listened to. Fourth, since the consciousness has no [physicalJ support, it is easy to guide and it can penetrate to the essence of whatever is focused upon. [Additionally], since the power of retention is now many times clearer, even the mentally weak will have, in the intermediate state, a lucid awareness, by virtue of their past actions. Hence, they will have the gift of knowing how to meditate on that which is taught and the gift [to assimilate] such points [of instruction]. These are the reasons why the performance of rituals on behalf of the dead is beneficial. Indeed, it is extremely important to persevere in the reading aloud of this Great Liberation by Hearing in the Intermediate States for the entire forty-nine days. For if liberation is not achieved at one introduction, it can be achieved at another. This is the reason why, not just one, but many introductions should be given.

[CHOOSING A WOMB ENTRANCE]
-Then again, there are several kinds [of persons] who do not achieve liberation, despite having received the above introductions and having been taught the above visualisation techniques. This [lack of ability 1comes about through limited familiarity with virtuous past actions, extensive primal familiarity with non-virtuous past actions, and the potency and great force of negative obscurations.

294

THE TIBETA:>J BOOK Of TilE DEAD

So, at this stage, if the womb entrances have still not been [successfully] obstructed [as described] above, there is a profound oral instruction for choosing an [appropriate] womb entrance/' \vhich should now be presented. Again, one should request the assistance of the buddhas and bodhisattvas, take refuge in [the Three Precious Jewels] and cultivate an altruistic intention. Then, as before, calling to the deceased by name, three times, one should say the following words: 0, Child of Buddha Nature, (repeat the name of the deceased), listen [carefully/. Even though many {authentic/ introductions to the instructions haue {Jreviously been giuen to you, up until this stage, you haue not taken these to heart. Now, if you h.1z•e been unable to obstruct the ummb entrances, the time has actu~zlly come for you to assume a body. There are [not just one, but/ sever,lf different kinds ofprofowzd [and genuine} instructions which relate to your choice of an appropriate womb entrance. So comprehend these well. Do not be distracted. f Listen/ without distr.zction! Underst.md, and maintain a firm intention! 0, Child of Buddha Nature, now, /if you are to be born as a human} the indications and signs which relate to the environment into which you may be born, on one amongst the /four/ continents, will arise. You must recognise these [indications/! Indeed, you must choose the continent based on fa carefit! examination of these/ indications of the enuironment into which you may be born. If you are to take birth on the Eastern Continent, VideiJLz, you will see a lake, adorned by male and female su•.1ns. Do not he drawn towards this fpl.Jcej! Call to mind the methods of reuersal [and apply these/! For were you to go there, even though it is a happy and tranquil place, it is an environment where the /sacred/ te,zchings do not flourish. So do not enter /this continent/! If you are to take birth on the Southern Continent, j.zmbudL•ipa, you zuill see gr.1nd and delightfid m,msions. I{ indeed you can enter here, do so! If you are to take birth on the Western Continent, Apt'zrago: daniya, you will see a lake adorned [around its shores/ by male and female horses. Do not be drawn towards this place! C.1ll to mind the methods of reuersal [and apply these/! For euen though it is a pl.zce of great wealth and [abundant} resources, it is ,m

TilE GREAT LIBERATION BY HEARII'OG

295

environment where the [sacred} teachings do not flourish. So do not enter [this continent}! If you are to take birth on the Northern Continent, Uttarakuru, you will see a lake adorned [around its shores} by cattle or a lake adorned by trees. Recognise these appearances as indications of the birth that you are about to assume! Do not enter there! For even though this is a place where there is longevity and which has merit, it is an environment where the [sacred] teachings do not flourish. So do not enter [this continent/! I{ you ~1re to take birth as a god you will see delightful celestial palaces, many-storeyed and composed of diverse jewels. If indeed you can, you should enter here! I{ you are to h1ke birth ,zs an antigod, you will see exquisite groves and spinning wooden torches [creating} wheels of fire. Do not enter there, under any circumstances! Call to mind the methods of reuers,zl[and apply these/! If you are to take birth as an aniniLzl, you will see rocky caverns, empty hollows ,md straw sheds, shrouded by mist. Do not enter there! If you are to take birth as an anguished spirit, you will see tree-stumps, black protruding silhouettes, blind desolate gorges, or total darkness. Were you to go there, you would be born as an anguished spirit and experience the manifold sufferings of finsati.zblej hunger ..md thirst. Do not enter there! Call to nzind the methods of reversal/and apply these]! Be courageous and strong! If you are to take birth as a hell being, you will hear the songs of those of negative past actions. Or, quite simply, you will feel powerless and compelled to enter. \Vhereupon, the perception will arise that you are mouing into a land of darkness, where there are black and reddened houses, black earth-pits and black roads. Were you to be drawn to this place, you would enter the hells, and experience the {searing} unbearable sufferings of heat and cold. Be c,zrejitl! Do not enter into the midst of this, for there will be no opportunity to turn back. Do not enter there, under any circumstances! As it is said [in the root verses}: 'You must obstruct the womb entrances and call to mind the methods of reversal.' These are [wholly] necessary now! 0, Child of Buddha Nature, although you do not wish to move fonoard, you are pozuerless not to do so. The avenging forces, who are the executors of the unfailing laws of cause and effect, will be

rilE TIBETAN BOOK 01' TilE DEAD

pursuing you. You will have no choice but to move forward. Before you, the avengers and executors will be leading the way. The experience will arise of trying to flee from these forces, of trying to flee from the darkness, from the most violent windstorms, from the [thunderous} tumult, the snow, the rain, the hail and the turbulent blizzards, which swirl around you. [Frightened}, you will set off to seek a refuge and you will find protection inside an enclosed space, such as within the mansions, just described, or in rockshelters, or holes in the ground, or amongst trees, or within the bud of a lotus flower. Hiding here, you will be very hesitJnt to come out, and you will think: 'I should not leave here now.' You will be uery reluctant to be separated from this protected place and you will become utterly attached to it. Then, because you are so very hesitant to go outside, where you would be confronted by the fears and terrors of the intermediate state, you will, because of this fear and awe, continue to hide away. Thus, you will assume a body, however utterly bad that may be, and you will, fin time}, come to experience all manner of sufferings. This [experience of wanting to hide] is a sign that you are being obstructed by malignant forces and carnivorous ogres. Particularly related to this stage, there is a profound oral instruction. Listen, therefore, and understand! At this time, when you are being pursued by auenging forces and you feel powerless [to escape} and you are terrified and frightened, you must, in an instant and with perfect recall, vistwlise the Transcendent Lord Mahottara Heruka, or Hay~-1griva, or Vajrapa1_1i, or else, if you have one, your personal meditational deity. [Visualise the deity/ as having a huge buddha-body, with thick limbs, standing upright, in a terrifying wrathful nwni{estation, which pulverises el'ery form of obstructing force. [By virtue of this practice}, insulated from the avengers by the blessing and compassion [of the nzeditational deity/, you will secure the ability to choose a womb entrance. This is a profound and genuine crucial point of the oral instructions. So, understand this now! Moreover, 0, Child of Buddha Nature, the gods {inhabiting the form realms} of meditative concentration, and similar beings {of the higher re,lfmsj, take birth through the potency o{ their medit,ltil'e stability. H Also, certain classes of malevolent forces, including the anguished spirits, arise on the basis of the transformation of their mental body itself during this very [intermediate state],

TilE GREAT LIBERATION BY HEARING

297

through a shift in their mode of perception. [In this way], they assume the forms of an anguished spirit, malign force or carnivorous ogre, capable of displaying diverse miraculous acts. The anguished spirits who reside in the ocean depths, the anguished spirits who move through space, the eighty thousand classes of obstructing forces, and so forth, all come into existence consequent on such a shift in their mode of perception, while [still] in the mental body. At this time, therefore, [while visualising the wrathful deity] it is essential that you hold in mind the meaning of emptiness, [the essence of/ the Great Seal. If you are not able to practise in this way, you must cultivate your experience of the illusion-like natural expressive power [of actual reality]. If you are unable even to practise in that way, you should meditate on the meditational deity Mahakaru1Jika, without allowing your mind to experience attachment, in any respect whatsoever. Through [practising this effectively], buddhahood will be attained in the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource, during this intermediate state. 0, Child of Buddha Nature, if, due to the potency of your past actions, you must at this stage enter a womb, a further teaching on the methods of choosing a womb entrance is now to be taught. Listen, [carefully}, therefore! Do not just move towards whatever womb entrance appears to you. If, whilst being pursued by the avenging forces [of the laws of cause and effect}, you are powerless [and unable to resist} the process of entering [a womb], then you must, at this time, meditate on Hayagriva. Since you now possess a subtle supernormal cognitive ability, you will [clearly} apprehend all the [potential] birthplaces as they arise, in sequence. Therefore, make your choice, [based on the examination of the indications and based on the instructions J! There are two kinds of oral instruction [which can now be applied]: [first}, the oral instructions for transferring the consciousness to the pure buddha fields 36 and [second}, the instructions for choosing a womb entrance within impure cyclic existence. Therefore, [listen carefully and] do as follows: First, the transference of consciousness to the utterly pure realms of the sky-farers is effected by those of highest ability, by directing their intention as follows. 'Alas! I am deeply sad that even after an infinite "incalculable aeon", I am still left behind in this swamp of cyclic existence. How dreadful it is, that while so many have attained buddhahood in the past, I have still not achieved

THE TIBETA:-o; BOOK OF THE DEAD

liberation. Now, this cycle of existence disgusts me! It horrifies me! I haue long been led astray by it! Now, the moment approaches for me to move forward! Now, I must take birth, miraculously, in the bud of a lotus flower, in the presence of the Buddha Amitabha, in the western Buddha field of the Blissful (Sukhavati)!' Focus your intention, concentratedly, on this thought! {It is essential that you make this effort!/ Alternatively, you can focus your intention on whichever buddha field you wish. On Manifest joy (Abhirati), on Dense Array (Ghanauyuha), on Alakavatf, on Mount Pottllaka, or {you may wish to focus] on coming into the presence of {Padmasambhaua of] 04£/iytlna, in the celestial palace of Lotus Light, or indeed on whichever buddha field you wish to enter. He singleminded! Do not be distracted! Immediately upon establishing {this intention}, you will take birth in the {chosen/ buddha field. Yet again, alternatively, if you wish to proceed into the presence of Maitreya in {the realm of/ The joyful (Tu~ita), think as follows: 'At this juncture in the intermediate state, the moment has come for me to proceed into the presence of the king of the {sacred] teachings, Maitreya, in {the realm of/ The joy{ul. There{ore, it is there that I will go!' If you focus your intention on this thought, you will take birth, miraculously, in the heurt of a lotus, in the presence of Maitreya. Alternatiuely, if you are unable to accomplish this ftrans{erencej, or i{ you desire to enter a womb or you are obliged to enter one, then there are the {allowing instructions on choosing a womb entrance within impure cyclic existence. Therefore, listen fcare{ullyj. Utilising the supernormal cognitive ability which you now possess, examine the continents once again, as just described, and make your choice. You must enter a land where the {sacred/ teachings flourish! /He warned, however! J It could be that, fin reality}, you are about to take birth, by entering into a substance which is {etid and polluted, and yet that filthy mass will be perceiued by you as sweet-smelling and you will be drawn towards it and take birth within it. Therefore, whatever such {attractive/ appearances may arise, do not grasp at them as substantially real! Ensure that you remuin utterly {ree {rom the symptoms of attachment and aversion, and on that basis choose an excellent womb entrance. It is extremely important that your motivation is firmly concentr~.lfed f.zs you approach the womb entrance]. Therefore think as

TIll:. (i R 1:.:\ T L II\ E It AT I 0 :-; BY II EAR IN G

299

follows: 'Ah! For the sake of all sentient beings, I shall be born as a zmiuersal monarch, or [acting purely] like a great [dignified] sal tree, I shall be born i1lto the brahman class, or as the child of an accomplished master, or into a family which maintains an immaculate lineaf(e of the [sacred/ teachings, or into a family where the mother and father are deeply devout. Then, once I have taken on a body which is blessed with the merit of being able to act on behalf of all sentient beings, I shall [dedicate myself to] acting on their behalf!' You must concentrate your motivation on this thought and {thus/ enter the womb. As you enter the womb, consecrate it [by perceiving it] as a celestial p~.1lace of the deities.>~ Be full of deuotion. Ensure that you enter whilst pr~.1ying to and inZLlgining that you are receiving empowerments from the conquerors of the ten directions and from their 50115, as well as from the meditational deities and, in particular, from M,lhdk.Zrw.zika. f However be warned], for as you make this choice of a womb entrance, there is a risk of error. There is the risk of error when, through the potency of past actions, an excellent womb entrance is perceiued as a bad one, and when a bad womb entrance is perceiued as a good one. At this time, the essential points of the teaching are crucial. Therefore, mzce again, you should act as follou.!s. Euen though perceptions of an excellent [womb entrance] nz~.1y occur, do not become attached to these. And [conversely] even though perceptions of a poor [womb entrance} may occur, do not feel aversion. The essential point of the profound and genuine [instructions] is that you enter the womb in a state of great equanimity, utterly free from {the dichotomies of} good and bad, acceptance mzd rejection, or attachment and aversion.
Nevertheless, with the exception of certain persons who have experience of this !equanimity] it is difficult [for beings] to sever themselves from the deep-seated and long-lasting disease of negative habitual tendencies. Therefore, if [the deceased] remains unable to be free from attachment and aversion, in the above manner, such negative beings who are of the lowest capacity may seek refuge in the animal realms or similar [kinds of inferior existences]. In order to counteract this, again calling to the deceased by name, you should speak as follows:

300

rHE TIBETA:-1 BOOK OF THE DEAD

0, Child of Buddha Nature, if you do not know how to choose a womb entrance and you are unable to give up your attachment and your aversion, then, regardless of which of the above appearances arise, you must call out, by name, to the Three Precious Jewels. Tdke refuge in them! Pray to MahakJrw.zika! Go forward with your head held high. Recognise that this is the intermedi.zte state! Give up your attachment and your clinging to the friends, suns, daughters and relatives that you have left behind. These {attachments} are not helpful [to you now/. Enter into the blue light of the human realnz. Enter into the white light of the realm of the gods. Enter into the mansions of precious jewels and the gardens of delight.
This [introduction I should be enunciated up to seven times. Then one should pray to the buddhas and bodhisattvas, [reciting the Aspirational Prayer Calling to the Buddhas and Bodhisattuas for Assistmzce] ..lx Then one should read aloud, up to seven times, the Aspirational Prayer which Protects from Fear of the Intermediate States, the Root Verses of the [Six/ Intermediate States, and the Aspiraticmal Prayer which Rescues from the Dangerous Pathwuys of the Intermediate States. 39 Then, one should also read aloud, clearly and with correct pronunciation, the Liberation by Wearing: Natural Liberation of the Psycho-physical Aggregates. And you should also read aloud the Spiritual Practice: Natural Liberation of Habitual Tendencies.'~ 0

CONCLUSION
Thus, [in summary], by acting correctly, yogins with high realisation will rsuccessfully j effect the transference of consciousness at the moment of death, and, being spared the necessity of having to wander through the intermediate states, will attain liberation in an ascending and core-penetrating manner. Certain others, below these Iyogins in ability], who have achieved [direct] medit<Hive experience, will recognise the inner radiance of reality, at the eulmination of the intermediate state of the time of death, [and will, similarly, attain buddhahood] in an ascending and corepenetrating manner. Others, below these, in accord with their inheritance of past actions and their particular level of ability,

TilE <;HI:-.AT LIIH:RATIO:-.i BY HE:\RI:-.iG

301

will attain liberation at one [moment] or at another, during the [respective] weeks [which follow the moment of death], as the visions of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities gradually arise in the intermediate state of reality. Since there is a succession of dangerous passageways, recognition will occur at an appropriate juncture [during the intermediate state of reality] and liberation will follow. Ho\vever, those who have a very weak inheritance of [positive] past actions, those who are greatly clouded by negative obscuration and those who arc burdened by the most non-virtuous past actions, will be obliged to roam downwards into the intermediate state of rebirth. Here, as before, since there are different levels of introduction, like the rungs of a ladder, recognition will occur, if not at one stage, then at another; and thereby liberation will follow. But if those, just mentioned, who have a weak inheritance of [positive] past actions, do nor achieve recognition and arc accordingly overcome by fear and terror, then, there is a graded series of different forms of instruction [for obstructing, and] for choosing, the womb entrance. Thus, if recognition does not occur in the course of one such teaching, then, these individuals will be introduced to yet another [instruction] and upon understanding the [appropriate] visualisation technique they will achieve the inestimable bounty of the higher existences. Even if one is, like a beast, the lowest of the low, through the munificence of taking refuge, one will avoid birth in inferior existences and assume a precious human body, [blessed] with the benefits of freedom and favourable opportunities. Then, in the life to come, one will meet a spiritual reacher or spiritual friend, and one will receive the teachings, and thereby liberation will follow. This [sacred] teaching, when encountered in the intermediate state of rebirth, is an [oral] instruction that connects [the deceased] with their residual inheritance of virtuous past actions. This is why it [is said to] resemble a connecting tube which [re-establishes continuity I when inserted into a broken water channel. Therefore, (based on the veracity of this method], it is impossible not to be liberated upon hearing this reaching, even for those of the greatest negativity. This is because, during the intermediate stares, both the compassionate invitation of all the [Peaceful and Wrathful] Conquerors and the invitation of the manifestations of the malevolent and obstacle-causing forces arise simultaneously. As this occurs, merely by hearing this [sacred] teaching, the mode of

_)02

TilE

IIBETAI'O BOOK OF THE DLAD

pen:eption [of the deceased] is transformed and liberation is thereby attained. Further, this transformation is easy to effect because [the deceased] now possesses a [subtle] mental body and not a body of flesh and blood; the deceased continues to see and hear, with a subtle supernormal cognitive ability based on the potency of past actions, however far he or she has wandered into the intermediate states. [Thus], by sustaining mindfulness [of the teaching], the deceased is capable of transforming his or her perception in an instant. This is why [the reminder of the reaching] is extremely beneficial. Its impact is like that of a catapult machine; in other words, it resembles the way in which ~huge tree-trunk, incapable of being lifted by a hundred men, can be easily steered wherever one wants in a moment, when it is floated in WJtcr. [In essence, the impact of hearing this doctrine I resembles the turning of a horse by its bridle. All those who have died should be approached in the manner [here described]. If the corpse is present, then a friend should sit dose to it and repeatedly read aloud this succinct reminder. This reading should continue [ar least] until blood and serum emerge from the nostrils [of the deceased]; and until then, the corpse must nor be disturbed. The commitments which relate to this practice are ~1s follows: no living creatures should be killed in dedication to the dead person; relatives and friends, whether oneself or others, should nor cry, shout, mourn or wail in the presence of the corpse; and instead should engage in as much virtuous activity as possible. Further, it would be extremely beneficial if this [sacred] teaching of the Gre,lt Liberation hy Hearing in the l11termcdiate States is recited as a complement to [other systems of] meditative guidJnce, irrespective of the category of the [sacred I teachings to which they belong. Further, this text should he recited constJ.ntly. Its words and meaning should be learnt by heart. Then, if one's health permits, when rthe onset of] the intermediate state of the time of death becomes certain, and the signs of [approaching] death are re('ognised, one should read this text aloud to oneself, and reflect on its words and mec.ming. If one's health docs not allow this, then entrust the book to a fellow Buddhist for him or her to read aloud. The

THl: GREAT LIBERATIO:-. BY HF.ARll':G

3°3

reminder thus being made, there is no doubt that liberation will assuredly be attained. This teaching, which does not necessarily require [prior] meditation practice, is the profound instruction which liberates by being seen, liberates by being heard and liberates by being read aloud. This profound instruction is one which can lead even those of the greatest negativity on the direct path [to liberation]. Ensure that irs words and meaning are retained in the memory (such that] they are not forgotten, even if you were to be chased by seven [ferocious] dogs. This is a pith instruction for the attainment of buddhahood at the time of death. [Even if] all the buddhas of the past, present and future [were to search], they would not find a [sacred] teaching superior to this. This completes the instruction on the intermediate state, which liberates corporeal beings, the profound, refined essence, entitled the Great Liberation by Hearing in the Intermediate States. It was brought forth from the mountain of Gampodar by the accomplished master Karma lingpa, as a precious treasure.
MANGALA.\1!

12
Aspirational Prayers

CONTEXT
If possible, the dying person should recite these three aspirational prayers with intense longing at the time of death. Otherwise, the attending lama should recite these prayers, also with intense longing, immediately before the Liberation by Hearing (Chapter 11) is read to the dying person. That is, following the taking of refuge in the Three Precious Jewels - the Buddha, the sacred teachings and the monastic community - and the making of offerings. At this time, when it is likely that the dying person's consciousness is dimmed and the dying person may be feeling afraid, it is regarded as crucially important for the dying person to place their confidence in the buddhas and bodhisattvas and to request the buddhas and bodhisattvas to be their refuge and guide.

Herein is contained the Aspirational Prayer [Calling] to the Buddhas and Bodhisattvas for Assistance. 1 I bow down to the Peaceful and Wrathful Conquerors! This prayer should be recited at the time of one's own death, [or whenever appropriate]. First, make offerings, both actual and visualised, to the Three Precious Jewels. Then, while holding fragrant incense in one's hand, say the following words with fervent intensity: 0, buddhas and bodhisattvas, abiding in the ten directions, refuge of living beings, imbued with compassion, imbued with knowledge. imbued with clcur vision and imbued with love, come to this place, by the power of your compassion and accept these displuyed and visualised offerings! 0, Compassionute Ones, as you are the fountain of all-knowing pristine cognition, of loving compassion, of effectiue actiuity, and of a power to grant refuge, beyond conception, {come to this place!} 0, Compassionate Ones, this human being, (say the name), is leaving this world and journeying to another shore. He 2 is being cast off from this world and approaching the great transition of death. Suffering deeply, he is without a friend, without a refuge, without a protector and without a companion. His perception of this life is fading away. He is moving on to unother world, entering a dense darkness and {a/ling into an unfathomable abyss. Entriing the thick forest of doubt, he will be driven on by the potency of past uctions. He will be entering a great wilderness, bonze away on a gre~.zt ocean, and driuen on by the vital winds of past actions. He will be moving in a direction where there is no finn ground,

ASI'IRATIONAL PRAYERS

entering a great battlefield, being seized by gredt malevolent forces and becommg ouerwhelmed by fear and terror upon meeting the executors of the unfailing laws of cause and effect. In accord with his past actions, powerless {to resist}, he may euen, yet ag~.zin, be entering the realms of rebirth. The time has come when he has no choice hut to move on, alone, leaving his dear friends behind. 0, Compassionate Ones, grant refuge now to this person (say the name), who has no refuge! Protect him! Be his companion! Defend him from the great darkness of the intermediate state! Turn back the gre~.lt.lmrricane of past actions! Protect him from the great fear and terror of the unfailing latus of cause and effect! Rescue him from the long and d~.mgerous pathways of the intermediate st.lte! 0, Compassionate Ones, be unsparing in your compassion! Grant assistance to him! Do not allow him to be expelled into the three kinds of inferior existence. \'(lithout zuavering from your ancient vows, swiji/y release the power of your compassion. 0, buddhas and bodhisattuas, for the sake of this person (say the name), be unsparing in your comp,zssion, skilful means and ability! Seize him with your compassion! Do not allow {this} sentient being to j~lil under the power of negative past actions! 0, Three Precious jewels, protect us from the sufferings of the intermediate state!
This Aspirational Prayer {Calling/ to the Buddhas and Bodhisattuas for Assistance should be read aloud with intense devotion three times, by oneself and by all others present. ~~lay its impact not cease until cyclic existence has been emptied! SAMA Y A rgya rgya rgy~.z! Let good auspices prevail!

Herein is contained the Aspirational Prayer which Rescues from the Dangerous Pathways of the Intermediate States. 3

I bow down to the spiritual teachers, fmeditational deities] and tjakinis, May I be guided on the path by their great love. 0, as I roam in cyclic existence [driven] by deep-seated bewilderment, May the spiritual teachers, holders of the ora/lineages, draw me forward, Leading me on the path of [radiant] light, Which is undistracted study, reflection and meditation. May the supreme consorts, the hosts of tf.akinis, support me from behind, And thus [encircled] may I be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfect buddha. 0, as I roam in cyclic existence [driven] by deep-seated delusion, May the transcendent lord Vairocana draw me forward, Leading me on the path of radiant light, Which is the pristine cognition of reality's expanse. May the supreme consort [Akasa]dhatvisvari support me from behind, And thus [encircled} may I be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfect buddha. 4

ASPIRATIONAL PRAYERS

JII

0, as I roam in cyclic existence [driven] by deep-seated avers ton, May the transcendent lord Vajrasattva draw me forward, Leading me on the path of radiant light, Which is the mirror-like pristine cognition. May the supreme consort Buddhalocana support me from behind, And thus [encircled] may I be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfect buddha. 0, as I roam in cyclic existence [driven} by deep-seated pride, Niay the transcendent lord Ratnasambhava draw me forward, Leading me on the path of radiant light, Which is the pristine cognition of sameness. May the supreme consort Mamaki support me from behind, And thus [encircled] may I be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfect buddha. 0, as I roam in cyclic existence [driven} by deep-seated attachment, May the transcendent lord Amitabha draw me forward, Leading me on the path of radiant light, Which is the pristine cognition of discernment. May the supreme consort PatJcfaravasini support me from behind, And thus [encircled] may I be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfect buddha. 0, as I roam in cyclic existence [driven] by deep-seated envy, May the transcendent lord Amoghasiddhi draw me forward, Leading me on the path of radiant light, Which is the pristine cognition of accomplishment. May the supreme consort Samayatara support me from behind, And thus [encircled] may I be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfect buddha.

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF TilE DEAD

0, as I roam in cyclic existence [driven} by the five virulent poisons, May the transcendent conquerors, [the male buddhasj of the five enlightened families, draw me forward, teading me on the p,lth of radiant light, Which is the four pristine cognitions combined. May the five supreme female buddhas, [the purity of} the exfhmse, support me from behind, And, thus [encircled/, may I be rescued From the light-paths of the six impure classes [of beings/ And be escorted to the five utterly supreme and pure buddha fields. 0, as 1 roam in cyclic existence driven by deep-seated habitual tendendcs, May the assembly of spiritual heroes and awareness holders dr,lll/ me forward, Leading me on the path of radiant light, \'\lhich is the coemergent pristine cognition. May the supreme consorts, the hosts of qakini, support me from behind, And thus [encircled} may I be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, And be escorted to the level of an utterly perfect buddha. 0, as 1 roam in cyclic existence dl'iven by deep-seated betuildering perceptions, M,zy the assembly of Blood-drinking Wrath/it! Deities draw me forward, Leading me on the path of radiant light, Which is {ree of fear and terrif:ving perceptions. May the assembly o{ the Krodhesv,lrf, Queens of the Expanse, support me from behind, And thus fencircledj may I be rescued From the fearsome passageway of the intermediate state, A11d be escorted to the level of an utterly perfect buddha.
{o.~t .·llj HU.~tj' i\L.ly the elements of space not arise as a hostile force.
M~.ly

1 see them as the field of the blue buddha.

ASPIRATIO:-;AL PRAYERS

31 3

May the elements of water not arise as a hostile force. May I see them as the field of the white buddha. May the elements of earth not arise as a hostile force. 1\1ay I see them as the field of the yellow buddha. May the elements of fire not arise as a hostile force. May I see them as the field of the red buddha. 1\1ay the elements of wind not arise as a hostile force. 1\1ay I see them as the field of the green buddha. 1\1ay the [awesome] sounds, lights and rays not arise as a hostile force. May I see them as the infinite fields of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities. May the rainbow-coloured elements not rise up as a hostile force. May I see them as the fields of the manifold buddhas. 1\1ay I recognise all sounds as my own sounds. May I recognise all lights as my own lights. May I recognise all rays as my own rays. May I spontaneously recognise [the characteristics of] the intermediate st,ztes. May the fields of the three buddha-bodies be manifest.
SA~1AYA!

Herein is contained the Aspirational Prayer which Protects from Fear of the Intermediate States. 6 When my life's course is ended, And I roam alone in the intermediate states, The loved ones of this world can no longer help me. So, fat this critical time/, may the Conquerors, the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities, [Quickly/ release the power of their compassion, And may the deep darkness of my ignorance be dispelled. When I roam alone, separated from my loved ones, And [myriad] images of emptiness arise, naturally manifesting, May the buddhas [quickly] release the power of their compassion, And may the fear of the awesome and terrifying intermediate states be annulled. When the five radiant lights of pristine cognition dawn, May I recognise them as my own [nature}, without awe and without terror, And as the [manifold] forms of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities arise, May I be fearlessly confident and recognise [the characteristics off the intermediate states. \Y/hen 1 experience suffering, as the result of negative past adions, ML1y the Great Compassionate One dispel all such misery,

ASPII{ATIO:SAL Pl{AYERS

And as the natural sound of reality reverberates like a thousand peals of thunder, lvfay all sounds be heard as the teachings of the Greater Vehicle. When I am driven on by past actions, unable to find a refuge, May the meditational deities dispel all such misery, And as I experience the suffering of habitual tendencies and past actions, May the meditative stabilities of inner radiance and bliss [naturally] arise. 7 When I am miraculously born into the intermediate state of rebirth, May /not be beguiled by the perverse prophecies of Mara, 8 And as I /freely] arrive at every place that I think of, A1.zy the bewildering fear and terror, generated by my negative past actions, not arise. \Vhen the roars of savage wild beasts echo around me, May their cries be transformed into the sound of the sacred teachings, the Six Syllables, And as I am engulfed by snow, rain, wind and darkness, May I achieve the pure clairvoyance of radiant pristine cognition. May sentient beings in the intermediate state, similar in kind to myself, Be born into the higher realms, free from rivalry, And as severe dissonant mental states generate insatiable hunger and thirst, May the afflictions of hunger, thirst, heat and cold, be annulled. When I see my future parents in union, May I perceive them as Mahakarm.zika and consort, And for the sake of others, being blessed with the power to choose a birthplace, May I achieve an exalted body, adorned with the auspicious major and minor marks.

316

THE TIBETAN BOOK Or THE DEAD

Once I have achieved birth in a supreme human form, May I act so as to swiftly liberate all who see and hear me. And may I not be influenced by my negative past actions, But multiply and emulate my past merits. Wherever I may be born, in whatever land it may be, May I quickly encounter the meditational deity of my past lives. Knowing, from immediately after birth, how to speak and walk, May I remember my past lives and attain the power of non-forgetfulness. May I easily come to master by study and reflection, The manifold stages of learning - small, intermediate and great. May the country into which I am born be auspicious, And may all sentient beings be blessed with happiness.
0, Peaceful and Wrathful Conquerors, may I and all others Become entirely at one with you, and come to resemble you, In all your forms, your retinues, your lifespan and your buddha fields, And in every quality of your supreme auspicious marks.

Through the compassion of Samantabhadra and the infinite Peaceful and Wrathful Deities, By the power of the truth of pure reality, And by the blessing of the mantrins who practise onepointedly, May [every wish off this aspirational prayer be fulfilled.
This prayer entitled the Aspirational Prayer which Protects from Fear of the Intermediate States was composed by the preceptor from 099iyana, Padmakara. May this profound sacred teaching not be extinguished until all the worlds of cyclic existence have been emptied.
SAMA Y A

rgya rgya rgya!

This is a treasure-text of Tulku Karma Lingpa.

13
A Masked Drama of Rebirth

CONTEXT

This allegorical play portrays the experiences of the archetypal evildoer Lak~anaraka and the archetypal virtuous householder Srrjata as they meet with Yama, the embodiment of the inexorable laws of cause and effect, in the intermediate state of rebirth. This lighthearted masked drama is still commonly performed today during public ceremonial occasions throughout Tibet, Bhutan and the Buddhist regions of the Himalayas. The play is staged, often to huge audiences, in the courtyards or public ceremonial areas of a monastery, often at the time of the annual 1oth day sacred dances commemorating the life of Padmasambhava.

PART ONE
Herein is contained [a masked dranu cntirledJ N.ztur,z/ Liber.llion of the Intermediate State o{ Rebirth: A Teaching Reveuling the Natural Expression of Virtue and Negativity, in the intermediate Stute o{ Rebirth; 1 which is an extract from the Peac:efitl .md \\'ruthful Deities: A Pro{uwrd Sacred Teaching [entitled/ Sutur,z/ Liberation through [Recognition off Lnlightened lntolfi(m. 2 I respectfully bow down to the uncreatcd Buddha-body of Reality: Samantabhadra and Samantabhadri in union; To the unceasing Buddha-body of Perfect Resource: The Peaceful and Wrathful Lotus Deities; And to the naturally arising Buddha-body of Emanation: Padmakara. May [all beings! be liberated in the intermediate state! Having earlier presented the empowermenrs and introductions From the Liheration by He ..zring in the hrtermedi,zte States, An extract from the Peaceful and Wr,zthful Lotus Deities, 1 And having introduced the intermediate state of reality, which is the 'great liberation by secing', 4 Now I will present [a means of demonstrating! the introduction to the intermediate state of rebirth.'

THE SCENE
Here, hauing completed the preuious introductions [to the intermcdi,Jte Stutes of the time of deuth and re,zlityj, 1 will present [in the form of a musked dr,mr.zj the introduction to the intermedi,zte state o{ rebirth. The spirituul teacher [should 110w appe,Jr fully

MASKED Di{AMA

J2l

attired} in the costume of Yama Dharmardja, and wear a large wrathful mask, depicting Yama. He is carrying a large wooden slate in his right hand, and in his left he holds a large round mirror. Dressed in a silk brocade gown, he is seated on a great throne. In his retinue, there is a figure dressed as the black Ox-headed Rak~a Demon, 6 wearing an ox-head mask and holding a black lasso. Then, seated to the right, there is another figure dressed as the Monkey-headed Elemental Spirit/ with the face of a monkey, and holding a weight and measure in his hands. 8 Other· figures also present include: one dressed as the Boar-headed Cemetery Spirit/ carrying a wooden slate; one dressed as the venonwus Snakeheaded Demon, 10 with the face of a snake and carrying a mirror; one dressed as the ferocious Bear-headed figure, 11 with the face of a bear and holding a bellows; one dressed as the awesome Lion-headed figure, 11 with the face of a lion and clutching a hammer; and one dressed as the Garucfa-headed Bird figure, 11 with the face of a ganuj.a and holding a saw. These figures with diverse {animalj-heads who are attired similarly to Yama, are dignified and standing in rows, to the right and left of Dharmariija. The deity representing {the deceased's} good conscience 14 is wearing a white peaceful mask and a white silk robe, and is carrying a bowl filled with white pebbles. The demon representing {the deceased's! bad conscience 15 is wearing a black wrathful mask and a black gown, and is carrying a bowl filled with black pebbles. Before Dharmaraja, on the right, is a long white carpet, which is rolled out like a white pathway, and at its end are two figures dressed in the costume of Mahdkaru1Jika, with one face and four arms, and bedecked with ornaments. They are seated at the end [of the white carpet/ on a throne which is hidden by a curtain. On the left side is a long black carpet, which is rolled out like a black pathw,zy, and it leads to the door of a dark room. Hidden elsewhere, in his home, is a person named the late Srijdta {'gloriously born'); 1b while hidden sornewhere in the corner [of the stage], is someone named the late Lak~andraka {'hundred thousand hells'}, 17 who is a wrongdoing outcaste 1 s of low birth.

_)22

TilE TIBI-.TAN BOOK OF Till: DEAD

ACT ONE
(as he draws a cross 011 the wooden slate): 0! Ox-headed Rak~a, it seems the time of death has come for a person in their home in the human world; the indication of this has appeared on my wooden slate. OX-HEADED RAK~A (calling to the venomous Snake-headed Demon): 0, Venomous Snake-headed One! Look in your mirror! \XIhat is this deceased person's country? What is his family line? And what is his name? Please look! VENOMOUS SNAKE-HEADED DEMON: 0! The deceased whose time has come is from the country of Tamradvipa in India, and he lived in the city of Santikala, which is a township of butchers. As for his family line, he belonged to the lowest social class of the four classes; 19 and his name is the wrongdoing Lak~anaraka. His lifespan has come to an end, and [thus an indication of this I has appeared on the wooden slate. Now, go fand fetch him]! (Thereupon, the Ox-headed Rak~a. the Boar-headed Cemetery Spirit, and the demon representing [the deceased's! bad conscience run off, tl/hile, in their wake, the deity representin~ [the dece,lsed'sj good conscience rushes to his assistunce. As soon as they haue found the 'wrongdoing one' in his house in the human world. they tie a black noose around his neck, and then Ox-headed fRak~a/ and Boar-headed Cemetery Spirit both lead him away by the hands. The demon representing {the deceased's! bad conscience chases him from behind, carrying a load of black pebbles. Meunwhile, the deity representing [the deceased's! good conscience places {a mere/ six white pebbles in the bowl for white pebbles, and, in embarrassment, tries to help. Holding a white scarf, with his hunds folded in a gesture of supplication, he attempts to petition Oxheaded Rak~a {on behalf of the deceased/, but this is unsuccessful. Lak~andraka is then brought screaming into the presence of [Dharma-/raja.) DHARMARAJA (interrogates him): Hmm! \X'ho are you, you bbck human being, carrying a weight and measure? Where are you from? Why do you not dare to look at me directly? You appear to have attained a human form, but what portion of your positive virtu<: is [nowJieft? Have you ever had any scruples about commitDHARMARAJA

~~

A S K E D D H A l\1 A

ring negative actions? What do you have to say about this? Speak quickly now! THE WRONGDOI:--IG ONE (LAK~ANARAKAj (lamenting/y): Alas! Alas! Permit me to speak in the presence of Yama Dharmaraja! I had an ordinary human form, my resources were few, my food and clothing poor. I have had many female dependants and thus little to eat. I had to take the lives of many beings and many years have passed since I ate rice, for I had nothing but warm [freshly slain! meat to cat. i\1any years have passed since I drank rice wine or pure liquor; for when thirsty I had to drink water and blood. Nowadays in the populated areas of the world there arc many who claim to be spiritual friends. They frequently teach about the defects of having committed negative actions and the benefits of having carried out positive actions. However, I did not go to them! Also, everyone would say, 'Don't persist in such negative actions, as one day death will come, and at that time you will go to the hells. You should renounce wrongdoing and perform virtuous actions!' Even though they advised me by saying these things, I thought, 'I don't know whether I believe in the hells or not, and anyway there is no one who says they have been there, and then returned [to prove it].' So, I said to those people, 'Who has gone to the hells and then returned? If the hells exist, where arc they? These arc just the lies of clever-talking people. Under the ground, there is just solid earth and solid rock. There arc no hells. Above, there is only empty sky. There are no buddhas. So now while I'm alive, if I kill for my food, it doesn't matter. When I die, my body will be taken to the charnel ground and it will be eaten by birds and wild animals. Not a trace will be left. My mind will vanish, so at that time who will be left to go to the hells.-211 HA! HA!' So I did not believe in the hells and I committed negative acts. And I thought, 'Even if the hells do exist, they will only be set in some remote future life, so if I have sufficient food and clothing for now, the next life doesn't seem to rna tter.' So it was through this misunderstanding, this lack of awareness, and stupidity that I committed evil acts. It happened because I was not acquainted with the fact that you, Dharmaraja, [you] Ox-headed Rak~a and [all you] others, actually exist. I did not knowingly do evil just out of contempt for all of you, who exist here in the world of the intermediate state. The fault lies with this misunderstanding and

TilE TIBETAN BOOK 01:' THE DEAD

lack of awareness. So, now, all of you, lord and entourage, I request you not to pass judgement upon me. If I had known when I lived in the human world that this all actually existed, I would never have committed negative actions. Now I am stuck here under the influence of negative mental states. Alas! Alas!, since you are a King of Dharma, be merciful to me! Be my friend and supporter! Underground there exists great suffering, Dharmaraja, so do not send me down there! Instead, please send me upward into the human world! Thereafter I will never perform evil actions againonly good ones!
THE DEITY REPRESENTING THE GOOD CONSCIENCE (offering a white silk scarf): 0! Dharmaraja, listen to me! This outcaste

butcher from Tamradvipa has committed evil deeds owing to his delusion and blinding ignorance, as a result of which he did not understand [the difference between] good and bad actions. Since he did not act knowingly or with understanding, I therefore petition you not to punish him. He has, after all, also carried out a small number of virtuous actions! Once when six people were unable to escape from the current of a broad river, he saved all six - with a virtuous intent. As a mark of this, I have six white pebbles. And since there are also other virtuous actions, similar to this, which he has incidentally accumulated, Great Dharmaraja, I request your forgiveness on his behalf. (As he says this, he prostrates three times [before Dhar-

maraja].)
THE BLACK DEMON [REPRESENTING THE BAD CONSCIENCEl:

HA, HA! Is this all you have to say, white deity [of good conscience]! Are you not embarrassed to carry this [almost] empty bowl! He, this low-caste butcher, has spent his life in evil deeds and has robbed himself of his share of virtue. He has slain all the animals he has ever seen. He has taken warm flesh for food, And he has drunk warm blood as a beverage. He has continuously spoken harshly [towards others]. In the upper valleys he has slain innocent wildlife; In the lower valleys he has slain innocent fish; And in between he has beaten innocent beggars. He has defamed each and every spiritual teacher, Burnt down a large temple,

.\tASKED DRA.\tA

325

Polluted a great lake with poison, Burnt a vast mountain forest, Beaten his parents, and destroyed a sacred reliquary. Now in Tamradvipa, India, There is no greater wrongdoer than he! Look at the mound of black pebbles!

(turning to

Lak~anaraka)

In case you don't recognise yourself, Your country is TJ.mralipti, India;! 1 And your city is Santikala. Your father is the butcher, Tripon, 21 Who came here eight years ago. Your mother is the butcheress, Pelkyi, 23 Who came here five years ago. You are the offspring of these outcaste butchers. Now you have come here- haven't you? The year is the Water Female Pig/ 4 And this year your feeding [in the human world] has come to an end. All those of eastern India Call you 'Red-handeJ Butcher'; All those of southern India Call you the 'wrongdoing Lak~anaraka '; All those of western India Call you 'Black Low-caste Butcher'; All those of northern India Call you the 'Black Killer of All'. Your caste is the black cm_uj.zla caste And your family line is that of wrongdoing butchers. All generations of your family without exception Will take the path to hell. When you were killing, you seemed happy; When you ate, it seemed tasty, But does it taste so good now? What use is your clever, slick-talking tongue [now]? Now the time has come for you to experience suffering, In retribution for the million animal lives [you have taken]. If you don't experience this suffering, Then millions of creatures will have lost everything, And you, Lak~anJ.raka, will have gained everything.

THI: TIBETA!' BOOK OF THE DEAD

As far as retribution for your crimes is concerned, Even Dharmaraja with his mighty stature Cannot stop the effects of your negative actions, The greatest of which was burning down the temple, And the smallest of which was the killing of lice. This is why you have accumulated [all] these [black! pebbles. So it is best if you prepare yourself to move on. [Get ready to] go swiftly on this black path! [There], the sealed copper cauldron [that awaits you] is wide and deep, The waves of boiling bronze are fierce, The fiery mass of past actions is intensely hot, And the messengers of Yama have scant mercy. Dharmaraja 's attitude is extremely fierce, The weapons of past actions are sharply pointed, And the black winds of past actions are very powerful. Now is the time for you to go to such a place! Though I really do have compassion for you, I am nonetheless very, very satisfied! You must carry on your back the weight and measure, Which you used as a fraudulent weight and measure! You must wear at your side the weapons With which you killed many sentient beings! You cannot deny or misrepresent these things! Now the time has come for you to go To the citadels of the eighteen hells.

(He begins to lead
DHARMARAJ A:

[Lak~anaraka]

away.)

Alas! How pitiful! How terrifying! When one has obtained a human form, One should proceed, with highly purposeful virtuous conduct, On the path of liberation, where inferior rebirths are left behind; And [thus] one is never separated from peace and happiness. But on this occasion when you obtained a human life, You threw away positive actions like dirt, And seized upon negative actions, For which reason you have wasted this highly meaningful human body, Which is difficult to obtain.

~lA

'- K I·. I.J D RA

~~A

Since you have done nothing at all, other than return empty-handed [from this life], You are [only] carrying the burden of your negative acts! How sad! Since the actions you have carried out must ripen upon yourself, You cannot be protected even by the power of a thousand budd has. So I cannot respond to this, [your appeal], in any way! Since the results of the premeditated negative acts, Which you carried out when you had freedom, Will all come to ripen upon you, Even though you wail and lament, No one at all should feel sorry for you. Even though you have hopes in me, I have no means to act in any way. Since this mirror of past actions, which reflects phenomenal existence, Truly depicts the natural expression of virtuous and negative acts, How can it be that no past actions will appear in the case of wrongdoers? \X'hen the deity who is your good conscience And the demon who is your bad conscience Compare the black and white pebbles of past actions, Happy is the man who has accumulated virtue! How very remorseful are you, who have accumulated evil! On this dangerous red passageway traversed by all, When you arc brought to trial by the executors of Yam a's rites, Even though you may have been once very powerful, Here, it will be of no avail! Now is the time for the hearts and lungs of all great wrongdoers to be torn apart! Since you have practised non-virtue, This reckoning of your past actions Will be quicker and more powerful than lightning, So by fleeing you will not escape, And by showing remorse, this will be of no help! How pitiful are the human beings of Jambudvipa

}2.8

TilE TIBETA:-.1 BOOK OF TilE DEAU

Who do not strive to practise the [sacred] teachings! There will be no way of helping them. This detailed accounting of positive and negative past actions Forbids even the most minute negative deedsSo what are those humans who have no scruples thinking of! Though the white path of liberation leads to joy, And the black path of inferior rebirth leads to suffering, The humans of Jambudvipa do not abandon negative actions, Nor do they practise positive actions, lAnd], even though they may feel sadness and remorse, Past actions cannot be remade. One's past actions accompany one's body like a shadow. I hold all rewards in respect of positive virtues, And I exact punishments in respect of negative deeds. Judging the balance and counterbalance, I examine good and bad actions. So even though you have regrets, I cannot redo anything. Now, even though I am very merciful, there is still no way that I can help you. Once you take the black path to the hell realms, You cannot be saved, even if you were to be engulfed by the compassion of the Sublime Ones. So there is absolutely no way for me to do anything. The Conqueror has said that sentient beings must reap !the fruits of] their own past actions. So now the Ox-headed One will lead you away! ~tay your negativity and obscurations be quickly purified, And may you then attain the ultimate level of the buddhas.
OX-HEADED RAK~A: Since it is your own doing, even though you may have regrets, what is the use of that! As for us, we are not responsible [for your actions]! We have simply distinguished between truth and lies. If you had no responsibility for your past actions, then it would be meaningless for us to harm you. Now, as this is [the outcome of] your past actions, be off quickly! (Then he leads [Lak~anarakaj away by a black noose, and'ihe black demon [representing the had conscience} driues him from behind, goading him along the path represented by the black carpet. Then in a dark room he is subjected to shouts of 'Strike! Kill!', which cause him to cry out in all sorts of ways.)

:0.1 A~ K E 0

0 RA M A

THE SPIRITUAL TEACHER (then makes a detailed elucidation, beginning with the words): 0, Children of Buddha Nature, those who have committed evil deeds will be singled out in this manner and their sufferings will be the same [as those described here]. You will definitely have such experiences. So, whether this core dilemma besets you at this time or not will depend on you yourselves. From now onwards, it is therefore important for you to strive after virtue, and avoid negativity, 0, Children of Buddha Nature ...

ACT TWO
DHAR~1ARAJ A (as he draws a cross on his wooden slate): Alas! Ox-headed Rak~a, there is someone from a household in the human world whose lifespan has come to an end. This sign has appeared on my wooden slate. ox-HEADED RAK?A (calling to the venomous Snake-headed Demon): 0 Venomous Snake-headed One, look in your mirror! Look and see where the deceased is! VENO~lOUS SNAKE-HEADED DE~lON: The land of the one whose time has come, is in north-east India. The city is called Kaman1pa. 25 His social class, among the four classes, is the mercantile class/ 6 and his name is the householder, Srijata. His lifespan and merits have been exhausted, so the sign of this has appeared on the wooden slate. Now be off, quickly [and fetch him]! (So, all three, Ox-headed R,zk~a, Boar-headed Cemetery Spirit, and the demon representing /the deceased's] bad conscience run off, while in their wake, the deity representing [the deceased's] good conscience rushes to his assistance. As soon as they have found the householder, Srfjdta, in the human world at Kdmarupa, the Ox-headed One leads him away and the Boar-headed One holds his arm, as the demon representing [the deceased's] bad conscience chases lnm from behind. Meanwhile, the deity representing the good conscience of/ers assistance as the deceased is brought into the presence of Dharmardja, who questions him.) DHARMARAJ A: 0, deceased Child of Buddha Nature, have you not come from the human world? There you had a human body endowed with freedom and favourable opportunities, which is difficult to acquire. You have encountered the Buddha's teachings, which are difficult to encounter; and you have been born as a man

THI:: TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

in Jambudvipa, where it is difficult to take birth. \X'hat positive or virtuous past actions have you gathered? When you lived in the human world, did you practise the [sacred] teachings mindful of [cultivating] mental virtues and physical purity? What compounded virtues and attributes do you possess that would enable you to be saved !from rebirth in the hells]? Did you create [images, books and stOpasj representative of buddha-body, speech and mind? Did you commission the writing and recitation of the scriptures? Did you mould terracotta imprints? Did you offer water libations? Did you clear rocks from roads? Did you remove bothersome thorns from bad roads? Did you make offerings to those above? Did you bestow charity on those below? Did you scatter barley dough and grain at anthills? What other subtle acts of virtue did you accumulate, over and above these? Also, did you study, reflect and meditate jon the Buddhist teachings], and did you keep your one-day vows and fasts? Did you receive meditative instruction, empowerments and guidance? What other virtues of this type have you accumulated? Tell me quickly now! Negative past actions related to the body are killing, of which the greatest offence is the killing of one's parents and the smallest is the killing of lice and nits, stealing, improper sexual conduct and so forth. So what negative a...:tions of body have you accumulated? Then the negative actions related to speech are: meaningless gossip, harsh words, slander, lies and so forth. So what negative actions of speech have you accumulated? The negative actions related to mind are: covetousness, harmful intent, distorted views, and so on. So what negative actions have you accumulated mentally? Also, with regard to the five inexpiable crimes and the five approximate [crimes], what negative or non-virtuous actions have you accumulated, motivated through body, speech, or mind? Tell me now in clear detail!
THE HOUSEHOLDER SRIJATA (i11 a terrified and trembfmg uoice): Nlay I speak in the presence of Dharmaraja! I am the

householder Srijata, a citizen of the city of Kamaropa in the northeast of India. I also have female dependants. I was a humble perSon, self-sufficient in food and drink. I was a faithful devotee who made fulsome offerings to all the fine spiritual teachers who came to my distri...:t. I encouraged others to engage in virtuous actions. Y1oti\·c.ucd by virtue and good intent, I have restored ruined

~I

A '\ K E U

U I{ A :\1 A

33 I

temples, saved many living creatures from certain death, and repeatedly received profound empowerments and guidance. When I travelled around, I cleared dangerous paths; when I stayed [at home] I recited the Six-syllable Mantra, and I kept my one-day vows and fasts. I am a householder who made offerings to the Three Precious Jewels above, and gave charity to those of unfortunate birth below. I am indeed a bodhisattva. This is why everyone calls me the householder Lak~min ('endowed with wealth'). Such is the unbroken sequence of my virtuous actions. As for my negative past actions, although I had the intention not to harm even a single living being, since I was submerged in the perverse world which is cyclic existence, and I had a son, and in order for him to be able to join in matrimony, I took the lives of ten animals [for the wedding feast]. I confessed the negativity of this action, and recited the Diamond Cutter 27 one hundred times. Then, when I and my neighbours took the lives of many living cre~Hures in order to pay taxes in support of the village community, I too felt much remorse and made confession. Also, since I had lived as a worldly householder, I thought that I must have unintentionally killed [many insects] underfoot and by my hands, for which reason I often felt remorse. Since the credentials of my virtuous and negative actions are established in these ways, I beg you to consider this conduct and favour me with your compassion. DHARMA RAJ A: Well then, if it is true what you have said, then you have thought well about virtuous and negative actions, and about cause and effect; but I shall consult the mirror of past actions because you human beings are clever liars! (He shows him the mirror.) Look, fortunate Child of Buddha Nature! This mirror of past actions in which phenomenal existence is clearly reflected is clearer than the omniscient eye that perceives the three times. When it manifestly reveals the natural expression of virtuous and negative past actions, whatever you have done in the human world, all the virtuous and negative actions you have committed in the human world, will visibly appear, immediately. So what lies and deceit have you spoken? Look at this mirror right now! (Then, looking at the mirror) Well, the virtuous and negative actions of which you ha\'e now spoken are not false. Well done! You will be sent on the white path.

THE TIBLTAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

THE BLACK DEMON [H.EPRESENTING THE DECEASED'S BAD

Hey! !\lay I speak in the presence of Dharmaraja! This bad person called the householder Srijata, has indulged his whole life in negative actions and has cared only for his own long-term selfish interests. His name is householder Srijata, and his nickname is 'monkey-head'. As for this faithless householder Srijata, his [birth] year is the year of the ox, his [birthjplace is Kamaropa city, and his background is that of the mercantile class. He engaged in the following negative actions: Hurrying uptown, he killed his father and quarrelled; then rushing downtown, he fought with his neighbours, he threw stones at the camel belonging to his neighbour Sribhadra and although he killed it, he denied his action and lied about it. He pushed the scribe Prajnamati's young elephant over a cliff, and, although he killed it, he denied his action and lied about it. Now, we can compare the pebbles! How will it be possible for him to take the white path? It is utterly appropriate that he should go on the black path. (He pours three handjit!s of black pebbles in [to his bowl}.)
CONSCIENCE]: THE WHITE DEITY [REPRESENTING THE GOOD COJ\iSClENCE):

May I speak in the presence of Dharmaraja! The householder Lak~min [Srijata] is a most faithful devotee. He has strong interest in the [sacred] teachings and has a\'<>iJed negative actions. When about five hundred miscreants were brought to trial in the presence of the Maharaja, he offered five hundred srang of golJ, and saved their lives. In the Indian city of Kamaropa, the householder Srijata alone is one who possesses great faith. Now, we can compare the pebbles! How will it be possible for him to take the black path? He should now set out, guided along the white path! (He pours out about six measures of white pebbles [into his bow/].) THE MONKEY-HEADED ELE~tENTAL SPIRIT: Deity and demon of conscience, both of you have no need to disagree, because when I raise my scale balance, the measures of virtue and negativity will be determined by the weights. Now, if you look, [the outcome! will be obvious. (He weighs the pebbles, whereupon the white [container] is three times heavier.) DHARMA RAJ A: Wonderful! Those who have obtained a hufnan body, who delight in the [sacred! teachings, and fully realise their life's potential- as this [achievement] cannot he stolen or snatched by others - will themselves find happiness through their own virtues. With respect to this way of being, such as that of the house-

.\-1 A S K E D 0 R A .\I A

333

holder Lak~min [Srij~'ita ]-how wondnful it would be if all sentient beings were to do the same! Supplicate AvalokitesYara right now, and instJntly trJvel the \'vhite path! (Dihzrnzardja prays) I pray to the meditational deity !vlahak<1rul}ika, at the summit of Mount Pot<1laka in rhe east! Grant your blessing that we may realise the nature of mind to be the Buddha-body of Reality! (He then recites the Aspirational Prayer [Calling] to the Buddhas and Bodhisattvas for Assistance 2s and then giues formal introduction to the methods

for obstmcting the womb entrances during the intermediate state [of rehirth j and for choosi11g u womh. 2 '~ Lastly, he confers the introduction to the methods of transferring {consciousness} to the pure buddha-fields. w Immediately afterwards, the curtain is suddenly dr~.1w11 hack, and the form of Aualokitesuara is vividly displ. zyed. [The householder Srij~u..zj is led along the path [of virtue} represented by the white curpct, clad in fine robes, and wearing fine orname11ts.) DHAR\1:\RAJA (o!/ering praise): 0, Child of Buddha Nature,
this is how one should serve the purpose of obtaining a human body. Rejoice [in this]! (Then, he recites the following aspirational

prayer

ol At•,Jiokite5uar£l three times.)

0~1 \tA:;.;I PAD.\IE H0.~1 HRll,f!\1

~lay all sentient beings, including you Srljara, Be guided on the p~uh by the essence of the Six-syllable Mantra! ~lay cyclic existence with its three \vorld-systcms be churned to irs depths, And may the hells be exhausted and emptied! (He urges fail to recite} that Six-syllable Mantra.)
THE SPIRITUAL TEACHER: 0, Children of Buddha Nature, behold this distinction between the happiness and suffering experienced by the evil 'Red-handed Burcher' and the faithful householder Srijata, in consequence of their disparate accumulations of virtue ~1nd negativity! As we ourselves shall also encounter such experiences soon, it is most important that we strive after virtue ..mJ refrain from negativity! (Then, [the spiritual teacher} should

conj'er the empowerment fof the Peaceful and \Y/r,zthful Deities}, recite the auspicious verses, and perform the aspirational prayer for the dedzc.ltion oj'merit, followed by the concluding rite.)

334

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

COLOPHON
How wonderful! I, Padmakara, having actually seen the hells, composed this [masked drama] as an adjunct to the teaching of the [Great] Liberation by Hearing in the Intermediate States, in order to benefit sentient beings of the future. May it be encountered by those who are fortunate! This concludes the Natural Liberation of the Intermediate State of Rebirth: A Teaching Revealing the Natural Expression of Virtue and Negativity. 32 May all be auspicious! 33

PART TWO
Supplement to the Masked Drama of Rebirth
Herein is contained the Supplement to the Teaching Revealing the Natural Expression of Virtue and Negativity in the Intermediate State of Rebirth, entitled Gong of Divine Melody; 1 which is an extract from the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, [entitled] Natural Liberation through [Recognition of] Enlightened lntention. 2 I bow down to Samantabhadra and the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities!

THE SCENE
(In the context of [the masked drama entitled] A Teaching Revealing the Natural Expression of Virtue and Negativity which is [associated with the] Introduction to the Intermediate State of Rebirth, the one called 'the wrongdoing Lak~aniiraka' ('hundred thousand hells') is shown entering the inferior realms. Amidst the thunderous cries of 'Strike!' and 'Kill!' uttered by the executors of Yama's rites, he travels the black path, after which Dharmariija teaches on the disadvantages of committing negative actions to the entire audience assembled there.] Following this, the deity representing the good conscience [should appear] in a state of sadness, and should urge [the audience to recite] the Six-syllable Mantra.)

336

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

ACT ONE
THE DEITY REPRESENTING THE GOOD CONSCIENCE: Please recite the Six-syllable Mantra once on behalf of the deceased, the wrongdoing Lak~anaraka! O¥ MAJ';JI PADME HO¥ HRIJ:I! Please recite the Six-syllable Mantra once on behalf of all beings present within the intermediate state [of rebirth]! (Then speaking to the assembled audience) 0 listen! I am the one called deity of good conscience. This wrongdoing Lak~anaraka has committed many negative actions, as a result of which, at this moment, in the whole world, I can only find six tiny white pebbles representing his virtuous actions, but there are innumerable pebbles [here] representing his non-virtuous past actions. [Now], by the power of his bad past actions, he has been led away to the hells by the executors of Yama's rites. Although I wanted to guide him to higher rebirths, I have been unable to find a way [to help him]. All of you who inhabit the human world of Jambudvipa, and all of you gathered here, should not now engage in negative actions but practise only virtue. These following messages are the ones which we [now] send to you [from the intermediate state of rebirth]! (Then, circumambulating the mm.u!ala, 4 and chanting the

Six-syllable Mantra in a melodious voice, he continues with a sad demeanour.)
How wonderful! I pray to gracious Dharmaraja, Glorious embodiment of the activities of the buddhas of the three times, Who manifests for the benefit of beings! Alas! Listen and be attentive, all you gathered here! [Considering] the difficulties of obtaining a human form, All those who commit non-virtuous and negative acts [while living in the world] Will have missed the opportunity of escaping from this ocean of suffering. All [such] beings living in this world, Who arc [all] powerless to remain [in the world] for long, Will feel remorse when entering the jaws of the Lord of Death. But [this remorse] will be of no benefit to them thenFor, despite their sorrows, they will be obliged to move on!

:vi.ASKED DRAMA

337

All peoples of the past have gathered family and wealth [around them], Hoping these would last foreverBut, when [their own] impermanence and death arrive, They set out alone, devoid of refuge or sanctuary. The relatives and friends surrounding us in this life Are like a gathering of shoppers at a market. Although they seem close to us, they are not dependable. When the market closes, the shoppers will disperse. [Likewise,] this illusory aggregate of form, Like a fallen cairn at the top of a pass, Will be severed of all its flesh and bones. This our body is not to be relied on! Even though we have cherished this body, [A collection] of pus, blood, serum, and sinews, It is nonetheless [ever] on the verge of disintegration. Even though we miss it, birds and dogs will devour it, Even though we [try to sustain it by] engaging in ritual services, It will be snatched away by Yama, the lord of death. This body composed of the four elements will be left behind on the earth, Our consciousness will travel as a wanderer through the intermediate states, And the habitual tendencies of our negative past actions will follow like a shadow. How pitiful that we have committed non-virtuous actions! The deity and demon representing our good and bad consCience Will compare the white and black pebbles of past actions, And Dharmaraja will reveal all in the [all-seeing] mirror. All great wrongdoers will suffer these torments. Even though they should not commit even the slightest Qegative acts, The human beings of Jambudvipa are let down by wrongdoing! It is by engaging in virtue that they will be reborn in the higher realms, And by engaging in negativity that they will travel to the hells. At this one time, when one has attained a human body,

THE TIBETA!'< BOOK OF TilE DEAD

But failed to return with at least some virtue, What a pity it is that we carry the [alternative] burden of negativity, And bring sufferings upon ourselves! The hunters in the mountains, The fishermen by the rivers, And those who kill domestic livestock Will transmigrate and be reborn in the eighteen hells. Those who engage in deceit and deception, Having adulterated measures and weights, And those who steal, plunder or deceive Will long roam through the three inferior existences. Those bound to their wealth by the knot of miserliness, Those who squander the property of others, And those who appropriate donations made to the Three Precious Jewels, Will long roam through the realms of anguished spirits. This, the impact of non-virtuous past actions Is like a thunderbolt, it is extremely powerful. And even though we feel remorse, it will be of no helpWe will not be able to escape! The punishment for negative actions is exacted by Yama. In this dangerous passageway, traversed by all, The executors of Yama's rites bring us to trial. Pity those human beings who do not avoid negativityFor there is no way to help them. How severe is the attitude of Dharmaraja! How precise is the accounting of the deity and demon of conscience! How remorseful are the great wrongdoers! Only by engaging in virtue, will one proceed to higher rebirths. Alas! The body ages day by day. The lifespan is consumed moment by moment. Dying in turn, one after another, Sentient beings of this errant degenerate age Have lifespans shorter than the tail of a sheep! All householders with many dependants, [such as this wrongdoer], Will reap the fruits of their evil past actions in so many ways,

.\1 A') KL D

L)

1{:\:0.1 :\

339

And even their relatives and friends will [one day] arise as their enemies. In these bad times, keeping a household [can in itself] engender sorrow. Now, fthereforeJ, having attained a human body, Endowed with freedom and favourable opportunities, Direct your thought towards your own mind! The critical point is to concentrate on the sacred teachings! Then, you will be happy in this life and joyful in the next.

ACT TWO
(Then again, fin the masked drama of rebirth/, when the householder Srijata is shown setting off for the realms of higher rebirth, he prays in the presence of Avalokitesvara, and after [Dharmaraja] h.zs finished reciting the aspirational prayer of Avalokitesvara on beh.zlf of Srijata, the householder is adorned with fine ornaments, and inst.zlled upon a throne. Then, before the multitude of the five hosts of qdkinis arriue to welcome him with music and song, at that time, the deity o( good conscience should joyfully make the follotuing prayer, telling uf the advantages of abandoning negativity and practising uirtue.')
THE DEITY REPRESENTING THE GOOD CONSCIENCE:

I pray to Samantabhadra and Samantabhadrl, the Buddha-body of Reality, \X'ho abide in Akanigha, the palace of reality's expanse! I pray to Vajradhara, [lord of] the sixth [enlightened family], Who abides in the Buddha field of the Dense Array. I pray to the Teacher Vajrasattva, \\'ho abides in the Buddha field of Abhirati. I pray to the awareness holder Prahevajra, \Vho abides in the mary<;iala of spiralling rainbO\v lights! 6 I pray to the learned Sri Sirpha, Who abides in the assembly hall of Dhanakosa. I pray to Padmakara of O<;ic)iyana, \X'ho abides in the celestial palace of Lotus Light! I pray to the <;lakin! Yeshe Tsogyal, \X'ho abides in the pure palace of the sky-farers!

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

I pray to the accomplished master Karma Lingpa, Who abides in the buddha field of the Buddha-body of Emanation! I pray to his spiritual son Nyinda Choje, Who abides in the limitless palace of the [sacred] teachings! I pray to the peerless Soryacandra, Who abides in the palace where the benefit of living beings is spontaneously accomplished! I pray to the precious root spiritual teacher, Seated on a sun and moon cushion above the crown of my head! 7 I pray to the infinitude of Peaceful and Wrathful meditational Deities, Who abide in the maQ.c)ala of the Conquerors, which is one's own body! 8 I pray to the protectors of the [sacredJ teachings Magon Chamdrel, Who abide in the palace of the transmitted precepts and commitments! How wonderful! At this time when we have obtained a human body, Endowed with freedom and favourable opportunities, How amazing are our positive virtues! At this time when our five sense-faculties are intact, How amazing is it to be attracted by the [sacred] teachings! At this time when we have encountered the Buddha's teaching, How amazing it is to abandon non-virtue and negativity! At this time when we possess illusory wealth and property, How wonderful it is to offer these upwards to the Three Precious Jewels and downwards as charity! Once we have abandoned negativity, there will be no more inferior rebirths. How amazing is this householder Lak~min [Srljata], right here, Who, having practised virtue, has obtained a higher rebirth! How amazing is this householder Srljata, right here, Who is now going [to higher rebirth] in a core-penetrating way," Without passing [further] through the intermediate state [of rebirth]!

MASKED DRAMA

341

How amazing is this householder Lak~min fSrrjata], Who has achieved happiness through the fruit of his virtueSrrjata has reached the highest summit of his life's potential!

(Thereupon, the hosts of welcoming cjakinis, adorned with the six kinds of bone ornaments, begin to dance, playing their cjamarus and bells, and, emerging from behind the door, they come to welcome him, singing o~ MA~I PADME HO~ HRII:I in a sweet melody.)
THE HOSTS OF QAKINIS:

We have come from the land of the 9akinrs. We have come to invite the householder Srrjata! We have come from 0~9iyana. We have come to invite the householder Srrjata! We have come from Camaradvrpa. We have come to invite the householder Srijata! We have come from the Copper-coloured Mountain. We have come to invite the householder Srrjata! We have come from Mount Potalaka. We have come to invite the householder Srljata! We have come from the pure realm of the sky-farers. 0, great householder Srrjata, Please come to the buddha fields!

(The hosts of cjakinis encircle the householder, and he too begins to play the musical instruments /that he holds] in his hands and to dance with them. Then he exits together with the host of cjakinfs.)
This Supplement to the Teaching Revealing the Natural Expression of Virtue and Negativity in the Intermediate State of Rebirth, entitled Gong of Divine Melody, was composed by Namka Chokyi Gyatso on the third day of the ninth month of the sheep year at the retreat of Kharlateng, in front of the hermitage of Sangye Rinpoche, a place frequented by frontier tribes. By the power of virtue, may all beings be established on the level of Samantabhadra!

14
Liberation by Wearing: Natural Liberation of the Psycho-physical Aggregates

CONTEXT

As explained in the earlier chapters, this cycle of teachings contains a number of instructions which can effect liberation from cyclic existence, without prior experience of the meditations associated with the Vehicle of Indestructible Reality (Vajrayana). Amongst these expressions of the sacred teachings is this Liberation by Wearing, which is said to effect liberation simply by its being worn as a mantra amulet on the body at the time of death or by its being heard at the time of death. The text of this chapter expresses the enlightened intention of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities in the form of mantra-letters. These mantra-letters are the resonance of the pure awareness of the deities expressed in the form of letter shapes and sounds. Many practitioners of this cycle of teachings wear this mantra circle in an amulet throughout their lives. For others it is recommended that the mantra amulet should be worn at the time of death and not removed. It is also recommended that this text should be read aloud at the conclusion of each reading of the Liberation by Hearing (Chapter 11).

The ~1antra Circle of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities

Herein is contained the Liberation by Wearing: Natural Liberation of the Psycho-physical Aggregates, 1 an extract from the PeLzceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, fentitled] Natural Liberation through [Recognition of} Enlightened lntcntion. 2 I bow down to rhc primordial lords, Samantabhadra and Samantabhadri, And to the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities! This [text] is the Liberation by Wearing: Natural Liberation of the Psycho-physical Aggregates, In which [the mantras] of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities, Those Gone to Bliss, are encompassed. How wonderful! This is a great naturally arising [mantra circle]. The yogin who embraces this is immensely fortunate. The yogin who encounters this is immensely fortunate. The yogin who upholds this is immensely fortunate. The yogin who reads this is immensely fortunate. As it confers liberation by reading, there is no need for meditation. As it confers liberation by wearing, there is no need for spiritual practice. As it confers liberation through contact, there is no need for training. As it confers liberation through feeling, there is no need for reflection.

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

This [mantra circle] confers natural liberation whenever it is encountered. This is the natural liberation of the psycho-physical aggregates. This is a field of experience of the fortunate!

[PART ONE]
How wonderful! The enlightened intention of the father Samantabhadra Manifests as the following naturally present mantra syllables of Atiyoga:
0¥ Al:f

H0~t

1

EMA KIRI KIRI MASTABHALIBHAI.I

SA~liTA­

SURUSURU KUNDHAI.IMASUMASU EKARILISUBIIASTAYE CAKIRABHULITA CAYESAMUNTA CARYASUGHAYE BHITISANABHYAGHULIYE SAKARIDHUKANI MATARIBHETANA PARALIHISANA MAKHARTAKELANA SAMBHURATA MAIKACARATA.MBA SURYAGIIATARAYE BASHANA RANABHITI SAGHUTIPAYA GHURAGHURAPAGAKHARANALA¥ NARANARAYI SAGHELA¥ SASA ~~
THARAPATALA~t

SI RNASIRNABH ESARASPALA¥ BHU DDHABHUDDHACliiSA-

1;-{. II MAMA RARA LAHA A 4 This is the twenty-six line supreme essential mantra, Through which the enlightened intention of Samantabhadra Will naturally liberate mental apprehension in awareness, As an indestructible chain of light, primordially pure and indivisible from Samantabhadra l when it is worn at the time of death!, While [externally! a cloudless sky will appear.

How wonderful! The enlightened intention of the mother Samantabhadrl ~tanifests as the following naturally present mantra-syllables of Atiyoga. This is the essential mantra, liberating body, speech and mind in primordial purity:
0¥ A~l H0¥ EMA KIRI KIRI MASTABHALI SAMITASURUSURU KUNUHALIMASU EKARILISUBHASTAYE CATABHULITA CAYESA~tUNTA

CARYASUGHAYE BHITISANABHYAGHUYE KIRIDHAKINI

LIBERATION BY WEARING

349

D II AKA .M AHA B H 0 R I TAN A PAR ALI HI SA:..; A~ K H ARATA K E LA .~1 SAMBHUDDARATA MEGACARAPATA¥ TAPASURYAGHATARA A MANAPARABHIHO TINGHURALA MASMINSAGHUTILA TAYAGHURAGHURA RA~GAKHALARANALA~t NARANARALA~1 ITHARPATALA~t SIR~ASIR!'iABHISARALA~t SAKELA~t SASA ~~~~II
5

MAMA RARA

This is the essential mantra through which the enlightened intention of Samantahhadri liberates The dynamic motion of awareness, encumbered by phenomenal characteristics, in unborn emptiness. This is the twenty-nine line supreme essential mantra, Through which liberation will occur in primordial purity, indivisible from Samantabhadri, [when it is worn at the time of death], While lexternally I a clear and unobscurcd sky will appear. How wonderful! To symbolise the perfection of all enlightened attributes, The [following] twenty-five mantras which reverse attachment arc prcscntcd: 6 To avert attachment to the sense-faculties, lThcre is the mantra]: KARMA RAK~A GHIHA~lTI. !When it is worn at the time of death! It will confer natural liberation by subduing the beguiling force of the dissonant mental states, While Iexternally J a bright red rainbow will appear. To avert attachment to the psycho-physical aggregates, !There is the mantra]: BHIKARA~A SO GAD GLING. [When it is worn at the time of death] It will confer natural liberation by subduing the beguiling force of the psycho-physical aggregates, \X'hile [externally] a bright yellow rainbow will appear. To avert attachment to all sense objects, [There is the mantra]: BHUGARILABHADHUTRI. [W'hen it is worn at the time of deathJ

350

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

It will confer natural liberation by subduing the beguiling force of 'deva's son', While [externally] a bright white rainbow will appear. To let go of mental objects, (There is the mantra): RAMAKALASAMIKHYE. [When it is worn at the time of death] It will confer natural liberation by subduing the beguiling force of the 'lord of death', While [externally] a bright green rainbow will appear. To sever past sensations, right where they are, (There is the mantra): MATAMPHAPHERAMITI. !When it is worn at the time of death] It will naturally liberate the ground-of-all [consciousness] in primordial purity, While [externally I a bright blue rainbow will appear. To recognise the appearance of compounded aggregations, (There is the mantra]: KHATAREK?ASA MIG RLUNG. [When it is worn at the time of death] It will spontaneously liberate naturally manifesting appearances in primordial purity, While [externally] a phenomenon like the unfolding of dazzling brocade will appear. To enter the stronghold of awareness, (There is the mantra]: EKARANABHECAK~A. [When it is worn at the time of death] It will induce the attainment of the 'irreversible level',' While [externally] sarirmtz relics will appear [following the cremation]. To eradicate the continuum of bewilderment, !There is the mantra]: YARIMUTRASAGHULI. [When it is worn at the time of death] It will naturally liberate the three world-systems in primordial purity, While Iexternally I churiraJ?Z relics will appear [following the cremation].

Ll B E R ,\ T I 0 N B Y

~·

EA HI NG

351

To successively liberate the six classes of living beings, [There is the mantra): YASIRA~l RLUNG PALAYA. [When it is worn at the time of death] It will naturally liberate beings of the six classes in primordial purity, \X'hile [externally] nyarirtl1!1 relics will appear [following the cremation]. To purge cyclic existence from its depths, [There is the mantra): MAMAKOLINA~t SAMANTA. [When it is worn at the time of death] It will churn the depths of all lower existences, While [externally] parzc~m11rz relics will appear [following the cremation]. To suppress apparitional reality, [There is the mantra): GIIARI LA~1BARIMA¥TI. [When it is worn at the time of death] It will guide [the deceased I to the genuine reality, While [externally] serrir,lf?Z relics will appear [following the cremation]. To let go of the 'source of the pia y [of phenomena]', [There is the mantra]: BUGASINHAPHANGALA. [When it is worn at the time of death] It will liberate the phenomena that arise, right where they are, \X'hile [externally] manifold shimmering rainbows will appear. To sever the tethers of attachment, [There is the mantra): RAMISIPIKHETAPA. [When it is worn at the time of death] It will liberate objects of attachment in the expanse [of reality J, \X'hile [extenully] a clear and bright sky will appear. To focus on the chains [of light], [There is the mantra]: BHIKIIUMALABATA¥KE. [When it is worn at the time of death] It will induce the 'visionary appearance of increasing contemplative experience',!! While [externally I patterns will arise from the rainbow colours in the sky.

352

TilE TIBETAN BOOK OF TilE DEAD

To view the seal of the deity, [There is the mantra]: SAMANYIVADHERARA. [When it is worn at the time of death] It will induce the 'visionary appearance of reaching the limit of awareness', 9 While [externally] the forms of the deities will appear. To purify mistaken views and meditations, [There is the mantra]: VAJRA SATTVA TIDHOME. [When it is worn at the time of death] Awareness will be naturally perfected, While [externally] white rainbow lights will appear. To simultaneously reach the levels and the paths, [There is the mantra]: GHEPASUGHARNAMYE. [When it is worn at the time of death] The levels and paths will be simultaneously perfected, While [externally J the natural sound of reality will resound. To sever the basis of views which indulge in mental activity, [There is the mantra]: DHARMAPATISAGHULI. [When it is worn at the time of death] Digressions will be liberated, right where they occur, While [externally] white rays of light will appear. To cause the three buddha-bodies to manifest as the path, [There is the mantra]: RASMISAMAKHARGAD TSHE. [When it is worn at the time of death] The three buddha-bodies will arise as the path, While [externally] perceptions of light will appear. To cause the visionary appearances to genuinely arise, [There is the mantra]: ROPASAMIMITALI. [When it is worn at the time of death I A simultaneous, naked liberation will occur, While [externally I winds and breezes will arise in the atmosphere.

LIBERATIOIS BY \VEARI:--IG

353

To terminate attachment to sound, [There is the mantra): NATIBALAGlLISA. [When it is worn at the time of death] Liberation will occur in the inexpressible, ineffable state, While [externally] the number of rainbow lights that are seen will transcend recollection. To master the levels of exalted meditative concentration, [There is the mantra]: GHACCHAPAYA¥PA ETA¥. [When it is worn at the time of death] The singular perfection of the levels and paths will be reached, While [externally] the number of rainbow lights that are seen will induce non-conceptuality. To extend buddha-activity to its limits, [There is the mantra): KARMA EKANUSA. [When it is worn at the time of death] Liberation will occur as essence, natural expression, and compassionate energy, 10 While [externally] manifold subtle relics will appear [following the cremation.] To avert expressed attachment to buddhahood, [There is the mantra!: SANTRlMAMAKARMATA. [When it is worn at the time of death] The three buddha-bodies will be liberated in the space of primordial purity, While [externally] a clear sky and shimmering rainbow will appear. To discover the abodes of the Conquerors and their children, !There is the mantra]: NALAKHEPAKlLISA. [When it is worn at the time of death] It will liberate all beings who wear it and are touched by its breath, 11 While [externally] rainbows and subtle relics will multiply. How wonderful! Since the unified enlightened intention of non-dual Samantabhadra and Samantabhadri 12 is naturally present,

354

THE TIBETAN BOOK Of THE DEAD

Each [of these individual mantras] has the capacity to confer liberation. Thus they are [known as] the twenty-five seminal points, or mantra lines, In which reality naturally resonates and naturally arises.
SAMAYA

[PART TWO]
How wonderful! Then the male and female consorts [Samantabhadra and Samantabhadri], having entered into non-dual union, Emit multiple male and female emanations, From which arises the mary9ala of the hundred enlightened families of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities. 13 Within the naturally arising diffusive expanse of the enlightened intention of the Forty-two Peaceful Deities, Like the sun emerging from the clouds, This naturally arising enlightened intention then manifests as follows, Within the field of experience of fortunate beings:
0¥ AI.I H0¥ BODHICITTA MAHASUKHA JNANADHATU Al.f

is

the unified enlightened intention of the Forty-two Peaceful Deities. Thus 14 the mass of conceptual thoughts will be liberated in primordial purity, As an expanse of supreme pristine cognition, While [externally] the indestructible sound of these sixteen syllables And inestimable rainbow lights and relics will appear. How wonderful! Then the individual enlightened intentions of the Forty-two Peaceful Deities naturally arise:

LIIIERATION BY WEARING

355

0¥ HO~t svA A~t HA The mantra-letters of the naturally present causal basis 15 arise In the form of these seed-syllables of the five male buddhas of the enlightened families. Thus, the five psycho-physical aggregates will be naturally liberated, And they will arise as the five pristine cognitions, While [externally] five kinds of bone relic will appear Ifollowing the cremation]. MO¥ LA¥ MA¥ PHYA¥ TA¥

The mantra-letters of the naturally present causal basis arise In the form of these seed-syllables of the five female buddhas of the enlightened families. Thus, the five clements will be naturally liberated, And they will arise inseparably from the five female buddhas, While fexternally] five-coloured rainbows will appear.
0~1 J 1NAJ 1K is the enlightened intention of Vairocana. Thus the aggregate of form will be liberated in the pristine cognition of reality's expanse, While [externally] white rainbow lights will shine, And five-coloured paiicara'?l relics, indicating attainment of the five buddha-bodies, Will be retrieved from the heart [following cremation], For which reason these are known as the 'supreme bone relics of the Tathagata family'.

HO¥ VAJRADH~K is the enlightened intention of Vajrasattva. Thus the aggregate of consciousness will be liberated in the mirror-like pristine cognition, While [externally] blue rainbow lights will shine, And blue-coloured churira'?l relics, indicating an increase in enlightened attributes, Will be retrieved from the blood [following cremation], For which reason these are known as the 'supreme bone relics of the Vajra family'.

THE TIBETA!'I BOOK Ot' THE Dl:.AD

svA. RATNADH~K is the enlightened intention of Ratnasambhava. Thus the aggregate of feeling will be liberated in the pristine cognition of sameness, While [externally] yellow rainbow lights will shine, And yellow-coloured serira'!l relics, indicating the fulfilment of all wishes, Will be retrieved from the serous fluid [following cremation], For which reason these are known as the 'supreme bone relics of the Ratna family'.
A¥ AROLIK is the enlightened intention of Amitabha. Thus the aggregate of perception will be liberated in the pristine cognition of discernment, While [externally] red rainbow lights will shine, And red-coloured sarfra'?l relics, indicating attainment of the unborn reality, Will be retrieved from the flesh [following cremation], For which reason these arc known as the 'supreme bone relics of the Padma family'. HA PRAJNADll~K is the enlightened intention of Amoghasiddhi. Thus the aggregate of motivational tendencies will be liberated in the pristine cognition of accomplishment, While [externally] green rainbow lights will shine, And green-coloured nyarira1~ relics, indicating the attainment of the emanational body, Will be retrieved from the marrow [following cremation], For which reason these are known as the 'supreme bone relics of the Karma family'.

MO¥ DHATVISVARI is the enlightened intention of [Aka sa ]dha rvisvari. Thus the appearances of the space [element] will be naturally liberated, While [externally] piercing white 1(; rainbow lights will shine in the sky.

LIBERATION BY WEARING

357

LA~t DVE~ARATI is the enlightened intention of Buddhalocana. Thus the earth element will be naturally liberated, While lexternallyJ piercing yellow rainbow lights will shine in the sky.
MA¥ MOHARATI is the enlightened intention of ~1amaki. Thus the water element will be naturally liberated, While [externally] piercing blue rainbow lights will shine in the sky. PA¥ RAGARATI is the enlightened intention of PaQ9aravasinL Thus the fire element will be naturally liberated, While [externally] piercing red rainbow lights will shine in the sky.

is the enlightened intention of Samayatara. Thus the wind clement will be naturally liberated, While [externally] piercing green rainbow lights will shine in the sky.
TA¥ VAJRARATI
K~l~l MAl H0¥ TRA:yt HRII:I MO¥ THLI:yt Jl¥

The mantra-letters of the naturally present causal basis arise In the form of these seed-syllables of the Eight Male Bodhisattvas. Thus the eight classes of consciousness will be naturally liberated, And arise inseparably from the eight male bodhisattvas, While [externally] many subtle relics will appear [following the cremation].
K~l¥ HI RAJAYA SVAHA [is the enlightened intention of the male bodhisattva K~itigarbha]. Thus visual consciousness will be naturally liberated, And arise inseparably from K~itigarbha.
MAl DHARA~I SVAHA [is the enlightened intention of the male bodhisattva MaitreyaJ. Thus auditory consciousness will be naturally liberated, And arise inseparably from Maitreya.

358

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

H 0¥ SA RAJ AYA sv AHA [is the enlightened intention of the male bodhisattva Samantabhadra]. Thus olfactory consciousness will be naturally liberated, And arise inseparably from Samantabhadra. TRA¥ A GARBHA YAf:l SV AHA fis the enlightened intention of the male bodhisattva Akasagarbha]. Thus gustatory consciousness will be naturally liberated, And arise inseparably from Akasagarbha. HRif:l HA H0¥ PADMABHATAMAf:l SVAHA [is the enlightened intention of the male bodhisattva Avalokitesvara]. Thus tactile consciousness will be naturally liberated, And arise inseparably from Avalokitesvara. MO¥ SRI A¥ RAGAYA SVAHA [is the enlightened intention of the male bodhisattva Mafijusri]. 17 Thus mental consciousness will be naturally liberated, And arise inseparably from Mafijusri. TH Li¥ NISARAM BHAYA SV AHA (is the enlightened intention of the male bodhisattva Nivarai)avi~kambhin]. Thus the ground-of-all consciousness will be naturally liberated, And arise inseparably from Nivarar:tavi~kambhin. JI¥ KURUPA?;-11 HRil;l SVAHA [is the enlightened intention of the male bodhisattva Vajrapai)i]. Thus the dissonant consciousness will be naturally liberated, And arise inseparably from Vajrapat)i.

Through these enlightened intentions of the Eight Male Bodhisattvas The eight classes of consciousness will be naturally liberated, And diverse, shimmering rainbow lights will appear. tx

LIBERATIOI\ BY WEARING

359

HOtyt HOryt TRAryt JAI;I HRII;I VA~1 HOl;I Al;I

The mantra-letters of the naturally present causal basis arise In the form of these seed-syllables of the Eight Female Bodhisattvas. Thus mental constructs associated with the eight objects of consciousness will be naturally liberated, lAnd arise inseparably from the eight female bodhisattvas], While [externally], a shower of flowers will fall.
HO ~~ LASYE SAMA Y AS TVA~1 [is the enlightened intention of Lasyaj. Thus mental constructs associated with physical form will be naturally liberated, And arise inseparably from Lasya. HOryt PU~PE AVESA lis the enlightened intention of Pu~pa]. Thus mental constructs associated with past events will be naturally liberated, And arise inseparably from Pu~pa. TRAtyf MALYE SAMA YA HOl;I (is the enlightened intention of Malya]. Thus mental constructs associated with apparent phenomena will be naturally liberated, And arise inseparably from Malya. JAI;I DHOPE PRAVESAYAS TVA¥ lis the enlightened intention of Dhupa]. Thus mental constructs associated with objects of smell will be naturally liberated, And arise inseparably from Dhupa. HRII;I GITI RAGO'HA¥ [is the enlightened intention of Gita]. Thus mental constructs associated with objects of sound will be naturally liberated, And arise inseparably from Gita.

THE TIBETAN BOOK Of THE DEAD

VA~t DIPASUKHINI [is the enlightened intention of Aloka].

Thus mental constructs associated with future events will be naturally liberated, And arise inseparably from Aloka.
HOf:l GANDHE CITTA HOf:l (is the enlightened intention of Gandha]. Thus mental constructs associated with present events will be naturally liberated, And arise inseparably from Gandhil.

[is the enlightened intention of Nart1J. 1 "~ Thus mental constructs associated with objects of taste will be naturally liberated, And arise inseparably from NartL
Af:l N~TI RAGAYAMI

Through these enlightened intentions of the Eight Female Bodhisattvas, Mental constructs associated with the eight objects of consciousness will be naturally liberated, While [externally], a shower of flowers and sounds of music will manifest, as the transfer of consciousness occurs.
KRI¥ PRA¥ TRU¥
K~A¥ SRU~t

YE

The mantra-letters of the naturally present causal basis arise In the form of these seed-syll..tbles of the Six Sages. Thus the six dissonant mental states will be naturally liberated, The womb entrances of the six classes of beings will be obstructed, And the Buddha-body of Emanation will continuously manifest for the benefit of sentient beings, While [externally! manifold subtle relics will appear [following the cremation].
O¥ MUNI KRI¥ svAHA

is the enlightened intention of
to

Devendra Sakra. Thus pride, the entrance

the god realms, will be obstructed.

LIBERATION BY WEARING

O¥ .MUNI PRA~1 svAHA is the enlightened intention of Vemacitra. Thus envy, the entrance to the antigod realm, will be obstructed.

0~1 MUNI TRU~1 svAHA is the enlightened intention of Sakyamuni. Thus desire, the entrance to the human realm, will be obstructed.
O¥ MUNI K~A¥ svAHA is the enlightened intention of Sthirasirpha. Thus delusion, the entrance to the animal realm, will be obstructed.
O¥ MUNI SRU¥ svAHA is the enlightened intention of Jvalamukha. Thus miserliness, the entrance to the anguished-spirit realms, will be obstructed. O¥ MUNI YE svAHA is the enlightened intention of Dharmaraja. Thus hatred, the entrance to the hell realms, will be obstructed.

Through these enlightened intentions of the Six Emanational Sages, The entrances to the six imperfect classes of existence will be obstructed, And the [altruistic] activities of the pure emanational bodies will manifest, While [externally] shimmering rainbows will appear amidst the clouds.
HO¥ HO¥ HO¥ HO¥ JAl;l H0¥ VA¥ HOl;l

The mantra-letters of the naturally present causal basis arise In the form of these [seed syllables of] the Eight Male and Female Gatekeepers. Thus, the entrances to the four types of birth will be obstructed,

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

And the four immeasurable aspirations will grow within the mental continuum, While [externally] the four corresponding rainbow lights [white, yellow, red and green] will appear [following the cremation J.
0~1 VAJRAKRODHA VIJAYA H0¥ is the enlightened intention of Vijaya. Thus mental constructs associated with eternalism will be naturally liberated, And all acts of pacification will be accomplished.

O,~ VAJRAKRODHA YAMANTAKA H0¥ is the enlightened intention of Yamantaka. Thus mental constructs associated with nihilism will be naturally liberated, And all acts of enrichment will be accomplished.
0¥ PADMANTAK~T HAYAGRIVA H0¥ is the enlightened intention of Hayagrivaraja. Thus mental constructs associated with egoism will be naturally liberated, And all acts of subjugation will be accomplished.

0~1 VAJRAKRODHA AM~TAKU~J?ALI H0¥ is the enlightened intention of Amrtakury9alin. Thus mental constructs associated with substantialisnr~ 0 will be naturally liberated, And all acts of wrath will be accomplished.

Through these enlightened intentions of the four Male Gatekeepers, The four extremes, including eternalism and nihilism, will be naturally liberated, And the four enlightened activities will be accomplished, While !externally] the !four] corresponding rainbow lights white, yellow, red and green, will appear.

LIBERATION BY WEARING

O¥ VAJ RAN KU sA J Al;l is the enlightened intention of Ankusa. Thus the entrance to miraculous birth will be obstructed, And immeasurable compassion will grow within the mental continuum. O¥ VAJRAPASA H0}:1 is the enlightened intention of Pasa. Thus the entrance to womb birth will be obstructed, And immeasurable loving kindness will grow within the mental continuum. O}:t VAJRASPHOTA VA¥ is the enlightened intention of Sphop. Thus the entrance to egg birth will be obstructed, And immeasurable sympathetic joy will grow within the mental continuum. O¥ VAJRAGHA~TA HOI;I is the enlightened intention of GaQtha. Thus the entrance to birth through heat and moisture will be obstructed, And immeasurable equanimity will grow within the mental continuum.

[Through these enlightened intentions of the Four Female Gatekeepers, The entrances to the four types of birth will be obstructed, And the four immeasurable aspirations will grow within the mental continuum, While [externally] the four corresponding rainbow lights [white, yellow, red and green] will appear.] 21 Through this expansive diffusion of the enlightened intention Of the buddha-mind of the Forty-two Peaceful Deities, The aggregate of conceptual thoughts is naturally liberated, Causing bone-relics, small relics, and rainbow lights to appear. 22

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

How wonderful! Within the naturally arising diffusive expanse of the enlightened intention of the Sixty Herukas, Like the sun emerging from the clouds, This naturally arising enlightened intention then manifests as follows, Within the field of experience of fortunate beings:
0¥ RULU RULU H0¥ BHYOJ:I H0¥

This mantra is the unified enlightened intention of the Sixty Herukas. Thus mental constructs associated with dissonant mental states are liberated in primordial purity, as an expanse of supreme pristine cognition, While [externally] the indestructible sound of the eight syllables of the RULU mantra will resound, And manifold white fiery lights will shine [in the sky following the cremation]. How wonderful! [Thenj, the enlightened intentions of all the Sixty Herukas naturally arise individually:
HO¥ HO¥ HO¥ HO¥ HO¥ HO¥

The mantra-letters of the naturally present causal basis arise In the form of these seed-syllables of the Six Male Herukas. Thus the six dissonant mental states will be naturally liberated, And arise inseparably from the Six Herukas, While (externally] six-coloured flames will appear [during the cremation].
HO¥ HO¥ HO¥ HO¥ HO¥ H0¥

The mantra-letters of the naturally present causal basis arise In the form of these seed-syllables of the Six lsvari. Thus mental constructs associated with the six objects will be naturally liberated, And arise inseparably from the Six Isvari, While [externally] six-coloured rainbow lights will appear rduring the cremation].

LIBERATION BY WEARING

0¥ MAHA KRODHA MAHASRIHERUKA H0¥ PHAT is the enlightened intention of Mahottara Heruka. Thus the dissonant mental state of ignorance will be liberated in primordial purity, While [externally] dark brown flames will spiral to the right [during the cremation], Unequivocally indicating an irreversible liberation, inseparable from Mahottara. 0¥ BUDDHA KRODHA MAHASRIHERUKA H0¥ PHAT is the enlightened intention of Buddha Heruka. Thus the dissonant mental state of delusion will be liberated in primordial purity, While [externally] brilliant white flames will shoot upwards [during the cremation], Unequivocally indicating liberation inseparable from Buddha Heruka, [As the deceased will be born in the central Buddha field of the Dense Array]. 0¥ VAJRA KRODHA MAHASRIHERUKA H0¥ PHAT is the enlightened intention of Vajra Heruka. Thus the dissonant mental state of hatred will be liberated in primordial purity, While [externally] dark blue flames will shoot towards the east [during the cremation], Unequivocally indicating [liberation] inseparable from Vajra Heruka, As [the deceased] will be born in the [eastern] Buddha field of Manifest Joy. 0¥ RATNA KRODHA MAHASRIHERUKA H0¥ PHAT is the enlightened intention of Ratna Heruka. Thus the dissonant mental state of pride will be liberated in primordial purity, While [externally 1dark yellow flames will shoot towards the south [during the cremation], Unequivocally indicating [liberation] inseparable from Ratna Heruka, As [the deceased] will be born in the southern Buddha field of The Joyful.

~66

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

Oryt I'ADMA KRODHA MAHASRIHERUKA HO~l PHAT is the enlightened intention of Padma Heruka. Thus the dissonant mental state of desire will be liberated in primordial purity, While [externally] dark red flames will shoot towards the west lduring the cremation], Unequivocally indicating [liberation] inseparable from Padma Heruka, As Ithe deceased I will be born in the western Buddha field of The Blissful. Oryt KARMA KRODHA MAHASRiHERUKA H0~1 PHAT is the enlightened intention of Karma Heruka. Thus the dissonant mental state of envy will be liberated in primordial purity, While Iexternally I dark green flames will shoot towards the north [during the cremation], Unequivocally indicating [liberation] inseparable from Karma Heruka, As [the deceased] will be born in the northern Buddha field of the ~1atrix of Activity.

0¥ MAHA KRODIIESVARI TVAryt is the enlightened intention of Mahakrodhesvari. Thus mental constructs associated with apparent phenomena will be naturally liberated, While [externally] smoke will spiral to the right [during the cremation), Indicating liberation inseparable from Dhatvisvari. 0¥
BUDDHA KRODHESVARI TVAryt

is the enlightened

intention of Buddhakrodhesvari. Thus mental constructs associated with physical objects will be naturally liberated, While [externally] smoke will spiral upwards [during the cremation I, Indicating liberation inseparable from Buddhakrodhesvari.

LIIHI{A("IO:'IJ BY WEARI!\G

0~1 VAJRA KRODHESVARI TV:\~1 is the enlightened intention of VajrakrodhesvarL Thus mental constructs associated with objects of sound will be naturally liberated, W'hile rexternally I smoke will spiral to the east [during the cremation], Indicating liberation inseparable from Vajrakrodhesv3rL
0~1 RATNA KRODHESVARI TVA~1 is the enlightened intention of Ratnakrodhesvart. Thus mental constructs associated with objects of smell will be naturally liberated, \X1hilc [externally] smoke \viii spiral to the south [during the cremation l, Indicating liberation inseparable from Ratnakrodhc5varL

0~1 PAD~1A KRODHE;VA!d TVA.\;1 is the enJightencJ intention of Padmakrodhes\·;,ui. Thus mental constructs associated with objects of taste will be naturally liberated, \Vhile [externally] smoke will spiral to the \Vest [Juring the cremation], Indicating liberation inseparable from PadmakrodhcsvarL
0~1 KARMA KRODIIESVARI T\'A~l is the enlightened inrention of KarmakrodhdvarL Thus mental constructs associ3ted with objects of touch will be naturally liberated, \Vhile [cxt<.:rnally] smoke will spiral to the north [during the cremation J, Indicating liberation inseparable from Karmakrodhesvari.

Through the expansive diffusion of these naturally arising enlightened intentions of the Twelve Principal Herukas, The host of mental constructs associated with the dissonant statcs will be naturally liberated, While thc five buddha ficlds will be mastercd.

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

HA IIA HA HA HA HA HA HA

The mantra-syllables of the naturally present causal basis arise In the form of these seed-syllables of the Eight Mataral). Thus mental constructs associated with the eight classes of consciousness will be naturally liberated, W'hile [externally 1fiery sparks will spiral and shoot to the right [during the cremation].
O¥ VAJRA GAURI HA is the enlightened intention of Gauri, the white female wrathful deity. Thus mental constructs associated with the dissonant consciousness will be subdued. 0¥ VAJRA CAURI HA is the enlightened intention of Cauri, the yellow female wrathful deity. Thus beings of the six classes will be propelled into higher rebirths. 0¥ VAJRA PRAMOHA HA is the enlightened intention of PramohJ., the red female wrathful deity. Thus beings of the six classes will be steered away from cyclic existence.

o~t VAJRA VET ALI IIA is the enlightened intention of Vetali, the dark green female wrathful deity. Thus liberation will occur in the enlightened intention of um:hanging reality.
0¥ VAJRA PUKKASi HA is the enlightened intention of Pukkasi, the yellowish red female wrathful deity. Thus beings will be propelled from dissonant mental states [into higher rebirths]. 0¥ VAJRA GHASMARI HA is the enlightened intention of Ghasmari, the green female wrathful deity. Thus cyclic existence will be purified, right where it is, While lexternally] fiery sparks will spiral and shoot to the right during the cremation.

LIBERATION BY WEARING

0~1 VAJRA CA~I?ALI HA is the enlightened intention of

the pale yellow female wrathful deity. Thus dissonant mental states and erroneous thoughts will be severed.
O¥ VAJ RA SMASAr-ti HA is the enlightened intention of Smasani, the pale blue female wrathful deity. Thus the buttresses of dissonant mental states will be severed.

Cal)~ali,

Through these enlightened intentions of the Eight Matara}:t, [The deceased] will be guided out of cyclic existence, While [externally J fiery sparks will spiral and shoot forth [during the cremation].
HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE

The mantra-letters of the naturally present causal basis arise In the form of these seed-syllables of the Eight Pisacr. Thus mental constructs associated with the eight objects of consciousness will be naturally liberated, While [externally] fiery sparks will shoot forth in chains [during the cremation].
0¥ VAJRA SI~1HAMUKHI HE

is the enlightened intention of

Si111hamukhi. Thus cyclic existence will be purified in its primordial nature.
0~1 V AJ RA VY AGH RIM U KHI HE is the enlightened intention of

Vyaghrimukhi. Thus cyclic existence will be purified in its entirety.
O¥ VAJRA s~GALAMUKHI HE is the enlightened intention of Srgalamukhi. Thus dissonant mental states will be purified from their very
(OOtS.

0¥ VAJRA SVANAMUKHI HE is the enlightened intention of Svanamukhr. Thus the depths of cyclic existence will be churned.

370

THF. TIBETA:-.1 BOOK OF THE DEAD

0~1 VAJRA G~QHRA~1llKHi HE is the enlightened intention of Gr~lhramukhi.

Thus the three poisons will be severed from their roots.
0¥ VAJRA KANKAMUKHi HE is the enlightened intention of KankamukhL Thus beings will be guided from the pit of cyclic existence.

0~1 VAJRA KAKA~1UKHI HE is the enlightened intention of Kakamukhi. Thus dissonant mental states will be purified in the creative play of [reality's] expanse.
0¥ VAJRA ULOKAMUKHI HE is the enlightened intention of Ulokamukhi. Thus the buttresses of erroneous views will be severed.

Through these enlightened intentions of the Eight Pisaci, Mental constructs associated with the eight objects will be naturally liberated.
J AJ:I H0¥ VA~1 HOI;f

The mantra-letters of the naturally present causal basis arise In the form of these seed-syllables of the Four Female Gatekeepers [of the wrathful assembly]. Thus the entrances to the four types of birth will be obstructed, And the four immeasurable aspirations will grow within the mental continuum.
o,~ VAJRANKUSA JAJ:I is the enlightened intention of white horse-headed [Ankusa Vajratejasi]. Thus beings will be pulled from the abodes of cyclic existence, [And immeasurable compassion will grow within the mental continuum].

0~1 VAJ RAPASA H 0¥ is the enlightened intention of yellow sow-headed [Pasa Vajramogha]. Thus erroneous mental constructs will be securely tied, lAnd immeasurable loving kindness will grow within the mental continuum].

LIBERATIOr-; 13Y

WEARI~G

371

0~1 VAJRASPHOTA VA~l is the enlightened intention of red lion-headed [Sphota Vajraloka]. Thus the dissonant mental state of ignorance will be firmly bound, [And immeasurable sympathetic joy will grow within the mental continuum]. 0~1 VAJRAGHA!';~TA HOI:l is the enlightened intention of green snake-headed [Gargha Vajravetali]. Thus mental constructs associated with the five poisons will be subdued, [And immeasurable equanimity will grow within the mental continuum].
BHYO~I

BHYOI:l BHYOI:l BHYOI:l BHYOI:l BHYOI:l BHYOI:l
BHYO~I

BHYOI:l BHYOI:l
BHYO~I

BHYOI.J BHYOI:l BHYOI:l BHYOI:l

BHYOI:f BHYOI:l BHYOI:l BHYOI:l BHYOI:l BHYOI:l

BHYOI:l BHYOI:l BHYOI:l BHYOI:l BHYOI:l BHYOI:l BHYOI:l

The mantra-letters of the naturally present causal basis arise [In the form of these seed-syllables] of the Twenty-eight Isvari. Thus the aggregates of bewildered thought will be purified, While [externally] sounds, lights and rays will appear [during the cremation].
0~1 .MANURAK~ASI BHYOI:l

is the enlightened intention of

.Manurak~asL 23 0~1 BRAHMA~I BHYOI:l is the enlightened intention of

Brahmar:ti.
0~1 RAUDRI BHYOI:l 0~1 INDRA~I BHYOI:l

0~1 0~1
0¥

Vajra
O¥ O¥ O¥

o,~ 0:~1

is the enlightened intention of Raudri is the enlightened intention of Indrar:ti. KAU~lARI BHYOI:I is the enlightened intention of Kaumari. VAI~~Avi BHYOI;I is the enlightened intention of Vai~r:tavL VAJRA PINGALA BHYOI:l is the enlightened intention of [Pir1gala]. SAUMI BHYOI:l is the enlightened intention of Saumi. AMf3.TA BHYO~I is the enlightened intention of Amrta. DA~QI BHYOI:l is the enlightened intention of Dar:tQI. RAK?ASI BHYOI:l is the enlightened intention of Rak~asi. BHAK?ASI BHYOI:l is the enlightened intention of

Bhak~asi.

372
O¥ RATI BHYOJ:I

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

0~1 R U DH I RAM AD I BHYOJ:I

is the enlightened intention of Rati. is the enlightened intention of is the enlightened intention of is the enlightened intention of

Rudhiramadi.
0¥ EKACARAJ':'Ii BHYOJ:I

Ekacaral)i Rak~asi.
0¥ MANOHARIKA BHYOI_I

Manoharika.
0¥ SIDDHIKARi BHYOJ:I

is the enlightened intention of

Siddhikari.
0¥ VAYUDEVI BHYOJ:I

is the enlightened intention of is the enlightened intention of

Vayudevi.
0¥ MAHAMARAJ':'IA BHYOJ:I

Mahamaral)a.
O¥ AGNA.Yi BHYOJ:I O¥ cAMUJ':'IJ?i O¥ vARAHi BHYOJ:I

is the enlightened intention of Agnayi. is the enlightened intention of Varahi. BHYOJ:I is the enlightened intention of is the enlightened intention of Bhujana. is the enlightened intention of is the enlightened intention of Vajra is the enlightened intention of is the enlightened intention

Camui)QL
O¥ BHUJ ANA BHYOJ:I O¥ VARU~ANI BHYOJ:I

VaruJ)ani.
O¥ MAHAKALI BHYOJ:I

Jvlahakaii.
0¥ MAHACHAGALA BHYOJ:I

Vajra Mahachagala.
0¥ MAHAKUMBHAKAR~I BHYOJ:I

of Vajra Mahakumbhakari)I.
0¥ VAJRA LAMBODARA BHYOI}

is the enlightened intention

of Vajra Lambodara. Through these enlightened intentions of the Twenty-eight lsvari, The bewildering apparitions of the intermediate state will be naturally purified, While [external] signs such as sounds, lights, rays and [bursts of] fire and smoke will appear as the transfer of consciousness occurs.

LIBERATIO!'; BY WEARI!';G

373

How wonderful! The innermost heart[ -mantras] of the Four Great Wrathful [~1ale Gatekeepers], The subjugators who naturally liberate the four beguiling forces, Appear as an uno.bstructed lion's roar, Whose naturally arising enlightened intentions resound as follows:
0~1

VAJRA KRODHA

KYE~1A

KYERI KARIMASTA BHALI BHALI

ATA EKARASULI BHASATI ENILANILA KA EBINA ABHISI~CA

This lion's roar which subdues the beguiling force of the psycho-physical aggregates, [Is the enlightened intention of !\-1ahabala Kumarakalasa]. Thus one will dissolve indivisibly in the body of Buddha Kumarakalasa, And liberation will occur in the naturally present expanse.

0¥

VAJRA KRODHA MAHAMUDRA JNANA OJASVA H0¥

SPHARA~A PHAT SV AHA

This lion's roar which subdues the beguiling force of the dissonant mental states, [Is the enlightened intention of Yamantaka Vajra Heruka]. Thus one will dissolve indivisibly in the body of Vajra Heruka, And buddhahood will then be obtained. One will be naturally liberated beyond the boundaries of the five poisons, And emanations, and their emanations, will bring about the welfare of sentient beings.

0¥

VAJRA KRODHA AM~TAKU~QALI 1-10~1 CHINDHA

CHINDHA BHINDHA BHI!';OHA HANA HANA DAHA DAHA PACA PACA H0~1 PHAT

This lion's roar which subdues the beguiling force of 'deva 's son', [Is the enlightened intention of AmrtakUJ:t9alin]. Thus one will dissolve indivisibly in the body of Amrtakury9alin, And buddhahood will then be obtained. One will be freed from the sufferings of the lower existences, And enlightened activities will be accomplished in all directions, without distinction.

374

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

0¥ VAJRA KRODHA HAYAGRiVA HRII:f SARVA TATHAGATA MAHAPANCA 0~1 AYURJNANA MAHAPU~YE TI~THA 0¥

This lion's roar which subdues the beguiling force of the lord of death, lis the enlightened intention of Hayagrivaraja]. Thus Hayagrivaraja's accomplishment of long-life will be attained, And, abiding in the state of reality, which is supreme bliss, Ignorance and other dissonant mental states will be uprooted, The five poisons will be liberated, right where they are, without being renounced, And the habitual tendencies of beginningless cyclic existence will be swept away. lThrough these innermost heart-mantras of the Four Great Wrathful Gatekeepers l, The four beguiling forces will be destroyed and liberated in the four buddha-bodies, While [externally J bone relics, minor relics, and rainbow lights will appear [during the cremation]. [How wonderful! Through the expansive diffusion of these enlightened intentions of the buddha-mind of the Sixty Herukas, The mass of bewildered thoughts is naturally liberated, While !externally] sounds, lights and rays, and bursts of fire or smoke, spiralling to the right of the pyre, As well as rainbow lights, bone relics, and small relics, and other signs, will appear.J 24

[PART THREE]
How wonderful! The enlightened intention of the unimpeded Buddha-body of Emanation Arises as the following six syllables, By which the six classes of sentient beings are naturally liherated into the expanse [of actual reality]:
, A A HA SA SA MA

LIBERATION BY WEARING

375

Through this enlightened intention free from origination or cessation, These six syllables which are the six naturally present seminal points [of light], Will naturally liberate the six classes of sentient beings within the expanse [of realityJ, 25 While [externally], numerous subtle relics and diverse rainbow lights will appear [during the cremation]. How wonderful! The supreme enlightened intention of the Hundred Genuine Enlightened Families Appears as the secret hundred syllable mantra, Naturally arising within the heart of Vajrasattva, as follows:
0¥ VAJRASATTVA SAMAYAMANUPALAYA VAJRASATTVA
TVENOPATI~THA D~QHO
SUTO~YO

ME BHAVA

SUPO~YO

ME BHAVA

ME BHAVA ANURAKTO ME BHAVA SARVASIDDHI¥

ME PRAYACCHA SARVAKARMASU CAME CITTA¥ SREYAI:I KURU HU¥ HAHAHAHA HO BHAGAVAN SARVA TATHAGATA VAJRA MA ME MUNCA VAJRABHAVA MAHASAMAYASATTVA

AJ:I Through this unified enlightened intention of the Hundred Enlightened Families, Degenerations and breaches [of the commitments, and all] negativity and obscurations, will be naturally liberated, without renunciation, 26 While [externally], bone relics, rainbows, lights and rays will appear [during the cremation], And sounds will reverberate throughout the universe.
How wonderful! The supreme innermost heart-mantra, unborn and liberating, arises in the form of the following naturally present syllables:
A A I

I U 0

~

i3-

~ ~ E A I 0 AU A¥ A ~I.

These sixteen unborn syllables, in eight pairs, will give rise to an indestructible resonance, While [externally], they will produce a clear cloudless sky.

_p6

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF THE DEAD

How wonderful! The supreme innermost heart-mantra, unceasing and liberating, arises in the form of the following naturally present syllables:
KA KHA GA GHANA CACHA JA JHA NATA THA f?A QHA ~A TA THADA DHA NAPA PHA BA BHA MAYA RA LA VA SA ~A SA HA K~A

These thirty-four unceasing syllables, in eight clusters, will give rise to an inJestructible resonance, \X1hich is the enlightened intention of the unchanging [sacred] teachings, While causing rainbow lights and r~lics to appear [in the pyre]. How wonderful! The supreme innermost heart-mantra which liberates the enduring continuum [of phenomena] arises in the form of the following naturally present syllables:
(0¥) YE DHARMA HETUPRABHAVA IIETUN TE~A~t TATHAGATO HY AVADAT TE~A~1 CA YO NIRODHO EVA¥ VA.Di

MAHASRA~tA~Af:l SVAHA

27

These thirty-nine liberating mantra syllables, in twelve clusters, give rise to an indestructible resonance, While [externally] multiplying relics and [shimmering] rainbow lights will appear. The supplementary mantras which symbolise [the four] enlightened activities and [which are appended to the basic mantras above] arise in the form of the following naturally present syllables:
~1ay diseases, possession by malignant forces, And the eight fears, together with all negativity and obscurations, Be pacified within the expanse of intrinsic awareness!
SANTI¥ KURUYE SVAHA

May the lifespan [of beings] and all the fields of merit Be enriched within the modality of [intrinsic] awareness!
PU~TI¥ KURUYE SVAHA

LIBERATION BY WEARI!';G

377

~1ay the Three Precious Jewels and all cyclic existence and mrvaQa Be controlled within the modality of [intrinsic] awareness!
VASA~l KURUYE SVAHA

~lay all hostile, obstructing forces, The five poisons and the three poisons, Be destroyed within the modality of [intrinsic] awareness!
MARAYA PHAT SVAHA

May [all] these naturally present enlightened intentions, Which arc the unique offspring of all the teachings, Naturally arise and manifest for the sake of sentient beings!

[CONCLUSION]
Through [the power of] this authentic precious jewel, All one's needs and wishes in this life can be manifested, And in the next life buddhahood can certainly be achieved. This [mantra circle] should be accurately inscribed in a headed script, On a sheet of fine blue paper, The size of a four finger-width booklet, Using refined gold, the colour of the Buddha, And it should be rolled up in silk in the right way.u [Then], on the eighth day of the lunar month, Coinciding with the constellation Cancer, A yogin with pure commitments should consecrate it, And then it should be worn [continuously]. 29 Inexpressible virtues and negative actions may both greatly - mcrease. Therefore the [yogin] should persevere in the practice of virtue and act for the sake of sentient beings, Avoiding even the most minute of negative acts.

THE TIBETAN BOOK OF TilE DEAD

One who does this in the correct manner, Even if he or she has previously committed the five inexpiable cnmes, Cannot possibly fall into inferior existences, once this fmantra circle] has been encountered. Since even those who have not practised the [sacred] teachings at all can attain buddhahood [in this way], It is called the 'Liberation by Wearing'. Since all who sec this [mantra] circle can attain buddhahood, It is called the 'Liberation by Seeing'. Since all who touch it can attain huddhahood, It is called the 'Liberation by Touching'. Since all who hear it read aloud can attain buddhahood, It is called the 'Liberation by Hearing'. Since all who feel its breath can attain buddhahood, It is called the 'Liberation by Feeling'. Since there has never been a single buddha who did not see [this mantra circle], It is indeed the nucleus of the [sacred] teachings. All who see it being inscribed will attain buddhahood, All who come into contact with it, by wearing it, will attain buddha hood. All who hear it read aloud will attain buddhahood. Therefore, it should be inscribed and worn [as an amulet]. It should be read aloud and contemplated in the appropriate way, And it should be thoroughly comprehended in every respect! Except for those fortunate ones, with appropriate past actions, [This mantra circle] should be kept secret and concealed, Because those who have not accumulated merit cannot comprehend [its meaning], And if they were to defame this [mantra circle], they would proceed to the hells. This is like an anguished spirit seeing [nutritious] food as an enemy! Therefore, it should be kept as a secret, esoteric instruction. [This mantra circle] is a field of experience of the fortunate.

LIBERATION BY WEARING

379

to encounter this [mantra circle], And once encountered, it is difficult to mentally comprehend. Therefore, those who do encounter it should rejoice, And embrace it with respect!

It is extremely difficult

At the time of death [this mantra circle] should not be removed from the body, And when cremation takes place it should not be removed from the corpse. As a consequence, liberation may occur through seeing, hearing, recollection or contact. This completes the Liberation by Wearing: Natural Liberation of the Psycho-physical Aggregates, \X'hich encompasses [the mantras of] the hundred enlightened families of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities.
SAMA Y A!

rgya rgya rgya a gter-rgya

This is a discovered text extracted from Mount Gampodar by the treasure-finder Karma Lingpa.
SUBHA¥

Appendix One: Peaceful and Wrathful Deities and the

Tibetan Book of the Dead
A correspondence between the chapters of Karma Lingpa's Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, [entitled} Natural Liberation through [Recognition of/ Enlightened Intention (Dudjom Rinpoche three-volume edition, Delhi: Sherab Lama, I975-6) and the chapters of this book

History (/o-rgyus)
I) Memorandum (Them-byad zin-bris), composed by Gyarawa Namka Chokyi Gyclrsen, Volume r, pp. r-6. 2) Legend of King 'Gyod tshangs ('Gyod-tshangs rgyal-po'i lo-rgyus). Volume r, PP·?- 1 3· 3) Legend of the Brahmin Dung-phreng (Bram-ze dung-phreng-gi lo-rgyus). Volume I, pp. 15-20. 4) Padmasambhava's Prophecy of the Treasure-finder and the Series of Authentic Spiritual Lineage Holders (gTer-ston lung-bstan-dang khungs btsun-pa bla-ma brgyud-pa'i rim-pa-rnams), composed by Gendun Gyeltsen. Volume r, pp. 21-26. 5) Abridged History of the Lineage entitled jewel Garland (rGyud-pa'i lo-rgyus bsdus-pa nor-bu'i phreng-ba), composed by Namka Chokyi Gyatso. Volume I, pp. 2?-48.

Empowerment (dbang-bskur)
I) Natural Liberation through Encountering the Four Empowerments: The Extensive and Elaborate Empowerment of the Vase (dBang-bzhi 'phrad-tshad ranggrol-gyi spros-bcas bum-dbang chen-mo). Volume I, pp. 49-92. 2) Natural Liberation through Encounterzng the Four Empowerme1Zts: The Extraordinary Profound Elucidation of the Three Higher Empowerments Including the Natural Liberation Through the Secret Empowerment of Great Bliss (dBangbzhi 'phrad-tshad rang-grol-gyi gsang-dbang bde-chen rang-grol-la-sogs-pa'i dbang gong-ma gsum-gyi zab-gsal khyad-par-can). Volume I, pp. 93-125. 3) Natural Liberation through the Propelling of the Six Classes of Beings into Higher Rebirth: The /Middle-Length/ Empowerments of the Natural Liberation of Degenerated Commitments Through Reparation and Confession (sKong-bshags

APPENDIX ONE

nyams-ch,;gs rang-grul-gyz dbang-bskur gn,;s-spar 'gro-dmg rang-gro/), Volume I, pp. I27-I60. 4) Torma Empowerment: Afcamngful to Touch (gTor-db.mg reg-pa don-ld,;n), composed by l\iamka Chokyi Gyatso. Volume I, pp. I61-164. 5) Natural Liber.Jtl!m through Encounteri11g the Four Empowerments: Flower Elucidating the Concluding Seqzwtces (dBang-bzhi 'phrad-tshad rang-grol-gyi rfeskyi rtm-pa gsal-ba'i me-tog). Volume I, pp. r65-168. 6) Natural l.zberation through Connecting with Practical Application: A Supplement to the Middle-length M,zturational Empowerment entitled Natural Liberation of the Szx Classes of Lwing Bemgs (sMm-byed sgo- 'byed db,;ng-bskur 'bri11g-po "gro-drug rang-grol-la kha-skong phyag-bzhes-kyis brgyab-pa 'brel-tsh,;d ranggrul). Volume 2, pp. 145-228. 7) Minor Annotations on the Rites and Empowerments of the Bi11dzng to Hzgher Rebtrth (gNas-lzmg-gi cho-ga-dang dbang-bskur sags-/a nye-bar mkho-ba'i zur- 'debs phran-bu). Volume 2, pp. 229-238. ·

Generation Stage of Meditation (bskyed-rinz)
I) Spiritual Practice entitled Natural Liberatzmt of Habitual Tendencies (Clwssp)•od bag-chags rang-grul). Volume I, pp. I6<J-200. Sec Chapter 5· 2) Natural l.iberation of the Nature of A·fmd: The Four-session Yoga of the Preliminary Practice (Chos-spyod thun-bzhi'i mal- 'byor sems-nyid rang-grol), composed by Nyinda Ozer. Volume I, pp. 20I-2I6. Sec Chapter 1. 3) N,;tural Liberatzon of Degenerated Commitments through Reparation and Confession: Prelimin.zry Supplement to the Generation Stage of Ritual Purificatwn ({sKang-bsh.zgs nyams-chags ratrg-grol-gyi/ Las-byang bskyed-rtm sngo11- 'gro lhanthabs). composed by Namka Chokyi Gyatso. Volume I, pp. 2I7-2)2. 4) N,ltural Lzberatwn of Feelmgs: Pnmary Rosary of Ritual Pun{ication according to the Assembly of Peaceful and Wrathful Deities, in eighteen sections (Zht-khro 'dus-pa'i las-IJ)•ang rtsa-phreng tshor-ba rang-grul spyi-don bco-brgyad-pa). Volume 1, pp. 233-325. 5) Natur.Jl Liber.ztzon of Feelzngs: Lesser I Ros,;ry of/ Ritual Pzm{ication, in three essential sections (Las-byang chung-ba tshor-ba rang-grol snying-fm spyi-dwt gszmz-pa). Volume I, pp. 327-352. 6) Sequence of A!editation on the Peaceful .znd Wrathful Deitzes entitled Coemergent Przstme Cognition (Zhi-khro sgom-rim lhan-skyes ye-shes). Volume I, pp. 3 53-

367.
7) Naturall.zberation of Negativity and Obswration through I Enactment of/ the Hundredfold Homage to the Sacred Enlightened Families (D,;m-pa rigs-brgyar phyag-'tshal sdzg-sgrib rang-grol). Volume I, pp. 369-390. See Chapter 6. 8) Abridged Homage to the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities (Zhi-khro 'i • phyag- "tshal bsdus-pa). Volume I, pp. 39I- 396. 9) Natural Lzherution through Acts of Confession in the Presence of the Peac!/i1l u11d Wrathful Deitzes (Zhi-khro'i klcmg-bshags brjod-pa ra11g-grol). Volume r, pp. 397-42.9. Sec Chapter 7· I o) Naturul LzbcratHm of Degenerated Commitments through Reparatzon .z11d Cwzfcsswn: The Seque11ce for the r·ul{ilme11t of Meditutzve Commztments (bsKang-

APPENDIX ONE

bshags nyams-chag rang-grol-gyi thugs-dam bskang-ba'i rim-pa), compiled by Namka Chokyi Gyatso. Volume 1, pp. 431-465. 1 1) Natural Liberation of Degener.1ted Commitments through Rep.zration and Confession: The Natural Uheratzon of the Six Classes of Living Beings through the Guidance of the Deceased to Higher Rebirth (bsKang-bshags nyams-chag rang-grolgyi tshe-'das gnas-spar/ 'dren 'gro-drug rang-grol spyi-don bcu-pa). Volume 2., pp. 1-50. r 2.) Natural Liberation through Enlightened Activity: The Burnt-offerings of the Ritual Pun{ication (Las-bya11g sbyin-sreg phrin-las rang-grol), composed by Namka Chokyi Gyatso. Volume 2., pp. 51- I 2.3. I 3) Natural Liberation through the Rite of Burnt Offerings: The Sequence of the Preliminary Practices (sByin-sreg phrin-las rang-grol-gyi sngon-'gro sta-gon-gyi rim-pu). Volume 2., pp. I 2.3-144. 14) Abndged Notes on Ritual Service Elucidating the Meaning of Liberation (bsNyen-yig mdor-bsdus rnam-grol don-gsa/). Volume 2, pp. 2.39-2.53.

Perfection Stage of Meditation (rdzogs-rim)
1) Contents entitled 1\:atural Liberation of the Keys to the Chapters (Sa-bead lde'u-mig rang-grol gsul-bar bkod-pa), composed by Kyinda. Volume 2., pp. 255265. 2.) Prayer entitled Natural Liberation in the Vast Expanse of the Three Buddhabodies (gSol-'debs sku-gsum klong-)•angs rang-grol). Volume 2, pp. 267-2.72. 3) A Prayer for Union with the Spiritual Teacher [entitled] Natural Liberation Without Renunciation of the Three Poisons (sKu-gsum bla-ma'i mal- 'byor-gyi gsol-'debs dug-gsum ma-spungs rang-grol). Volume 2, pp. 2.73-2.76. See Chapter 2. 4) Natural Liberation through bzlightened Intention: Guidance to the Experience of the Intermediate States: A Supplement on Mental Training in the Preliminary Pr..1ctices (Bar-do'i nyams-khrid dgongs-pa rang-grol-gyi sngon-'gro rang-rg)•ud 'dul-byed-kyi lhan-thabs), a teaching of Choje Lingpa, compiled by Nyinda Ozer and redacted by Kamka Chokyi Gyatso. Volume 2., pp. 2.77-302.. 5) Natural Liberation through the Ground-of-all: A Manual of Guidance to the /ntermedzate Stute of This Life (sKyes-gnas bar-do'i khrid-yzg kzm-gzhz rang-grol). Volume 2, pp. 303-340. 6) Natural Liberution through Bewilderment: A Manual of Guidance to the Intermediate State of Dreams (rMi-lam bar-do'i khrid-yig 'khml-pa rang-gro/). Volume 2, pp. 34 I- 361. 7) Naturul Liberation through Awareness: A Manual of Guidance to the Intermediate State of Meditative Concentration (bSam-gtan bar-do'i khrid-yig rig-pa rang-gro/). Volume 2, pp. 363-3778) Natural Liberation through Recollection: A Manuul of Guidance to the Intermediate State of the Time of Death ( 'Chi-kha'i bar-do 'i khrzd-yig dran-pa rmzg-gro/). Volume 2, pp. 379-400. Sec Chapter 10. 9) Natural Liheratwn through Vision: A Manual of Gmdance to the Intermediate State of Reality (Chos-nyid bur-do'i khrid-yig mthong-ba rang-gro/). Volume 2., pp. 401-417-

Al'PENIJIX ONE
I o) N.Jturul l.therutum through Rebirth: A .\I.J111t.1l of Gwd,zna to the bitermedtate St.Jte of Relmth (Snd-p.J bur-do'i klmd-ytg snd-p.1 rung-gru/). Volume 2, pp. 419-4_~2.

Introductions (ngo-sprod)
1) Preliminary Pructtce for All the Introductions entitled Exhortatum un lmpermunence, Based on Escurtmg u Corpse to a Cemetery (Ngo-sprod thams-cud-kyi sngrm- 'gro dur-khrod-du bam-ro bskyal-ba-la brten-nas nu-rtag-pa '1 bskul-mur ngo-sprud-pa). Volume 2, pp. 43.3-442. 2) Introduction to the Origm, Emergence .111d Presence o{ Consciousness, Supported by the 1-lumun Body, {rum the Cycle o{lntroductions to the Gre,ll Perfect/Oil (rDzogs-pu chen-po ngo-sprod-kyt skor-l.1s khams-pa'i mi-mo-la brten-n,ls rnamshes 'byung- ·,ug-gn,ls gswn-gyi ngo-sprud), redacted by ~amgyel Zangpo. Volume 2, pp. 443-467. 3) Introduction to Awure111:ss: ·:-..:utur,zl LJIJer,ltirm through N.1ked Perception (Rig-pa mngon-sum-du ngo-sprod-{JL1 gcer-mthong rang-grol). Volume 2, pp. 469488. Sec Chapter 4· 4) lntroductimz to the Three Ruddha-hodies ;, Accordu11ce with the Great Pcr{ection: A SufJplement to the Liberation by Heanng (rDzogs-chen sku-gszmz 11go-sj1rod bar-du thus-grol-gyi cha-lag). Volume 2, pp. 4X9-493. 5) Natural I.iher,lfion through Conscwus Awareness: bttru,fuaion to the Stx Lamps (sGron-ma drug-gtngo-sprud shes-ng rung-grol). Volume 3, pp. 1-2.0. 6) Natural Liber<~tton through \'tsion: l11trodudwn by Afe.JIIS of a Cry·stul (Shelrdo 'i ngo-sprod mthmzg-h.1 rang·gro/). Volume 3, pp. 21- 21l. 7) Supplemellt to the Introduction to the Inner Radt.Jnce o{ the Ground (gZhi'i 'ud-gs.Jingo-sprod-kyi lh.Jn-th.Jbs), composed by :--.;amka Chokyi Gyatso. Volume 3, pp. 29-J6. ll) Introduction by Me,ms of a Butter /.amp (Mar-me'i ngo-sprud), composed by Namka Chokyi Gyatso. Volume 3, pp. p-40. 9) Great l-iberation by fle.1ring; Elucid,ztmg the Introduction to the Intermediate State of Re.Jlity (Chos-nyid bur-do 'i nJ.:o-sprod gsa/- 'debs thos-grol chCil-mo ). Volume 3, pp. 41- I q. Sec Chapter I I , Parts One and Two. 10) Great Liber.Jtiwt hy Hearing; EluCidating the Introduction to the Intermediate State of Rebirth (Snd-pa bar-du'i ngo-sprod gsa/· 'debs thos-grol chen-mo). Volume J, pp. I I s-162. See Chapter I I, Part Three. I 1) Supplement to the Teuching Reve.Jimg the N,lfural Expresswn of Vtrtue and Neg.Jtii'Ity: An Introduction to the Intermed~<lle St.Jte of Relnrth. entitled Gong of Dwme Melody (Snd·fJ.J har-do ·, ngo-s{Jrod dge-sdtg rang-g;:ugs ston-pa 'i lh.Jit-tlhlbs dbyungs-sny,m lh.1'i lhan-thabs), composed by Namka Chokyi Gyatso. Volume 3, pp. 163-173· Sec Chapter 13, Part Two. 1 2) N.1tural Liber,zt/011 through Recognition o{the Vtsuullndications and Signs of De.Jth ( 'Chi-ltas mtshan-m,l raltg-gro/). Volume 3, pp. 175-204. See Chaptc(S. 1 3) Nutural Liber.Jtion of fe.Jr through the Rttual Decc{Jtwn o{ Death ( 'Chi-bslu '1igs-p,1 r<~ng-gro/) Volume 3, pp. 205-21 R. Sec Chapter 9· Lt) Dcuelo{Jing the Gre,lfltess of the Tc.1chmgs of the tiber,ztum by Heurmg durmg the lnternzcdt.Jtc St,lfe of Dre.Jms (rhft-I.Jnz bar-do thus-grol chos-kyt chc-h.J hskyed-f,ycd), composed by ~yind,1 Ozer. Volume 3, pp. 219-254-

APPENDIX OI'<E

15) Liberatzon by Wearing: Natural l.zberation of the Psycho-physicul Aggregates, in which the fleace{ul and Wrathful Deities are encompassed (Zhi-khro 'dus-pa'z btags-grol plmng-po rang-grol). Volume 3, pp. 255-286. Sec Chapter 14. I 6) An Abridgement of the Liberation by Wearing: Natural Liberation of the Psycho-physical Aggregates, entitled Nucleus of Natural Liberation (bTags-grol pJnmg-po rang-grol-gyi don-bsdus rmzg-grol snying-po). Volume 3, pp. 287306. 17) Chapter on the Means of Attaching a Diagram which Liberates by Wearing; {rum the Tantra of the Great Perfection: Natural Liberation of Cyclic Existence and Niml1.za (rDzogs-chen 'khor- 'das rang-grol-gyi rgyud-las btags-grul bcangthahs-kyi le'u). Volume 3. pp. 307-313. 1 8) Afemurandum on the Actual Preparation of the Great Chart of the Liberation by Wearing (bTags-grol 'khor-lo chen-mo'i lag-len zin-bris). Volume 1, pp. 467492.. I'}) Inve1ltory for I nsertzon within the Casket (Glegs-bam bzhugs-pa 'i dkar-chag). Volume I, pp. 493-499. 20) Root Verses of the Six Intermediate States (Bar-do drug-gi rtsa-tshig). Volume -'• pp. 316-3 r8. Sec Chapter 3· 2.1) Aspirational Prayer which Rescues from the Dangerous Pathways of the Intermediate States (Bar-do'i 'phrang-sgrol). Volume 3, pp. 318-3 22. See Chapter 12. 22.) Aspzratzonal Pr,l)'er which Protects from Fear of the Intermediate States (Bar-do'i 'iigs-skyobs-kyz smon-lam). Volume 3, pp. 322-32.5. Sec Chapter 12. 2. 3) Natural Liberation of Feur: Aspirational Prayer {Calling] to the Buddhas and Bodlnsuttuas for Assistance (Sangs-rg)·as byang-sems-rnams ra-mda' sbran-pa'i smon-lam 'iigs-pa rung-gro/). Volume 3, pp. 325-327. See Chapter 12.

Path of Skilful Means (thabs-lam)
r) Natural Liberation through Desire: Most Profound Quintessence of Guidance on Supreme Bliss Pertaining to the Sexual Practices ( 'Og-sgu bde-ba chen-pu 'i khrid 'dod-chags rang-grol zhes-bya-ba yang-zab bcud-bsdus). Volume 3, pp. 329-419. 2.) The Means of Estublishing the Lineage by Carrying Desire onto the Path and the Means of Closing the Womb Entrances ( 'Dod-chags lam-khyer rigs-brgyud h:::hag-thubs-dang mngal-sgo 'gag-thab khol-du phung-ha). Volume 3, pp. 421437· 3) Nutural Liberation through Supreme Bliss: A Profound Abridgement of the Guzdance on Supreme Blzss Attained through the Sexual Practices ( 'Og-sgo bdechen 'dud-chags rang-grol-g)·i nyams-khrid gud-sbas don-bsdus zab-khrid bde-ba chen-po rung-grol zhes-hya-ba shzn-tu zab-pa'i nying-khu), composed by Nyinda Ozcr. Volume 3, pp. 439-481.

Protector Rites (bstan-srung)
I) Seven Classes ul Oath-bound Protectors, Associated with the Peaceful and Wrathful Deitzes: Natural Liberation o{ the Venomous Hostzle Malevolent Forces and Obstructors through Enlightened Activit)' (Zhi-khro bka'-sru1zg dam-can sde-

J86

APPENDIX ONE

bdun-gyi phrin-las dgra-bgegs gdug-pa rang-gro/), composed by Nyinda Ozcr. Volume 3, pp. 483-490. 2) Seven Classes of Oath-bound Protectors, Associated with the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: Natural Liberation of Venomous Forces through Reparation (Zhi-khro dam-can sde-bdun-gyi mdangs-bskang gdug-pa rang-gro/), Volume 3, pp. 491-498.

The Lotus Peaceful and Wrathful Deities (Padma zhi-khro)
1) Natural Liberation of Rebirth: A Teaching Revealing the Natural Expression of Virtue and Negativity, through the Introduction to the Intermediate State of Rebirth (Srid-pa bar-do'i ngo-sprod dge-sdig rang-gzugs ston-pa'i gdams-pa'am me-long srid-pa rang-gro/), contained in the Delhi offset edition of the Great Liberation by Hearing in the Intermediate States-, pp. 499-533. See Chapter 13, Part One.

Appendix Two: Symbolism of the MaJ)c;iala of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities

The maQ9ala represents a perfected stare of being, and the central deities within it symbolise the perfected states of the meditator's own awareness, psycho-physical aggregates, elemental properties, and sensory and mental processes. The peaceful deities represent the quiescent natural purity of these fundamental components of our being and the wrathful deities represent the transformative aspects of these energies, which bring about the natural transformation of the most enduring and deep-seated expressions of our mundane perceptual states. Last, the outer deities of the maQ9ala represent the modes of activity of an enlightened being. The exact mapping of this symbolism docs vary according to the lineage and class of the practice. In the chart presented below, the correspondences are based on Chapter 5 of the present work, supplemented by correspondences taken from other texts within the cycle, with certain common variances noted.

~

The Forty-two Peaceful Deities
The male and female primordial buddhas: Samantabhadra and Samantabhadri in union represent the indivisible union of pure awareness and emptiness
Location Samantabhadra
kwz-tu b:::ang-po

oc
00

Colour Sky blue

Symbolising The awareness aspect of the Buddha-body of Reality, the natur<tl purity of mental consciousness, free from fundamental ignorance. The emptiness aspect of the Buddha-body of Reality, the natural purity of the sensory spectrum of phenomena.

Centre of the energy centre within the he<trt, embracing Samantabhadri Centre of the energy centre within the heart, embracing Samantabh<tdra

Samantabhadri

kun-tu bzang-mo

Stainless white, like crystal

The five male buddhas: Vairocana, Ak~obhya-Vajrasattva, Ratnasamhhava, Amitabha and Amoghasiddhi, represent the five pristine cognitions and the natural purity of the five psycho-physical aggregates
Enlightened f<tmily Buddha
'":l '":l

Location Vairocana
rn.un-par

Colour Conch white

Symbolising The pri~tine cognition of reality's expanse, the natural purity of the aggregate of consciousness, free from delusion

sn,mg-mdzud

Central ch<tnnel within the heart, embr<tcing Akasadhatvisvari
1\: B: In some souru:s, where

>

Vajrasattva is placed at the centre of the mat:~~Jia and Vair<>eJna 111 the east (e.g. Lochen Dh.1rmasri, SDGG, pp. 81-6), Vairocana symbolises the a~grq~Jte of form. The d1stmction between tht:se positiom 1s rciJtt:d to the c!J,s of pra..:tJ.:e- tht· former correspondmg to Atiyoga and the latter to a Mah.\yoga intt:rpretation of the Cuh)'agarbha T.mtru.

Ak~ohhya

z

(":'1

tJ
)(

...,
~

0

(Ak~obhya- )Vajrasattva mi-bskyod rdo-rje sems-dpa'

Eo1stern channel branch of the heart, embracing Buddhalocana

Azure blue

The mirror-like pristine cognition, the natural purity of the aggregate of form, free from aversion

Vajra

>
-:l -:l 1"'1

NB: When plau:J at the centre of the ma1_1~ala, (Ak~ohhya-)\'aJrasattva n:presents the natural purity of the aggregate of comuousness_ See above_

z c

X
-l

Ratnasambhava rin-chen 'byung-gnas Amitabha snang-ba mtha'-yas Amoghasiddhi don-yod grub-pa

Southern channel branch of the heart, embra~.:ing .Mamakl

Golden yellow

The pristine cognition of sameness, the natural purity of the aggregate of feeling, free from pride The pristine cognition of discernment, the natural purity of the aggregate of perceptions, free from attachment The pristine cognition of accomplishment, the natural purity of the aggregate uf motivational tendencies, free from envy

Ratna

~

0

Western ~.:hannel branch of the Copper heart, embra~.:ing P<ll)<;iaravasinl red Northern channel branch of the heart, embracing Samayatara Turquoise green

Padma Karma

The five female buddhas: Akasadhatvisvari, Buddhalocana, Mamaki, Pal)~aravasini and Samayatara, represent the natural purity of the five elements
Enlightened family Buddha

Location AkasadhatviSvari nam-mkha'i dhyings phyug-ma Buddhalocana sangs-rgyas spyan-ma Central channel, within the heart, embracing Vairocana Eastern channel branch of the heart, embracing Ak~obhya­ Vajrasattva

Colour Moonlike white

Symbolising The natural purity of the space element

Beryl blue The natural purity of the earth element

Vajra
'..#>

00

N B: In Chapter 1 1, 1\uddhalocana is unusually identified with the natural purity of the water element, a role generally anributed to the female buddha MamakL

\C

Location Mamaki yum ma-ma-ki Southern channel branch of the heart, embracing Rarnasambhava

Colour Minium orange

Symbolising The natural purity of rhc water element

Enlightened family Ratna

-.....
\0

0

NB: In Chapter I I, M~makl is unusually identified with the natural purity of the earrh element, a role generally attributed to the female buddha BuddhalocanJ.

Pary<_larav:lsini yum-mchog gosdkar-mo Samayatara yum dam-tshig sgrol-ma

Western channel branch of the heart, embracing Amit;Ibha Northern channel branch of rhe heart, embracing Arnoghasiddhi

Firecrystal red Sapphire green

The natural purity of the element fire

Padma

The natural purity of the element wind

Karma

The eight male bodhisattvas: K~itigarbha, Maitreya, Samantabhadra, Akasagarbha, A valokite5vara, Manjusrikumarabhuta, Nivarar:taviskambhin and Vajrapal)i, represent the eight classes of consciousness
NB: According to the Guhyagarbha Tantra, they also symbolise the four senses and four sense organs.

Location
K~itigarbha

Colour

Symbolising

Enlightened family Vajra

sa'i snying-po
Mairreya rgyal-ba bya"{s-pa

Eastern channel branch of rhe heart, ro rhe right of Vajrasatrva Eastern channel branch of rhe heart, to the left of Vajrasatrva

SnowThe natural purity of visual consciousness mounrain white Cloudwhite The natural purity of auditory consciousness

>
'"C '"C

m

z
X

0

Vajra

--i

~

0

Samantabhadra byang-sems kun-tu bzang-pu Akasagarbha nam-mkha'i snying-po Avalokitdvara spyan-ras gzigs Maftjusrikumarabhuta 'jam-dpal{gzhon-nur gyur-pa/

Southern channel branch of the heart, to the right of Ratnasambhava Southern channel branch of the heart, to the left of Rarnasambhava Western channel branch of the heart, to the right of Amitabha Western channel branch of the heart, to the left of Amitolbha

Amber yellow

The natural purity of olfactory consciousness

Ratna

>
'":l

'":l

m

z

0

Burnished The natural purity of gustatory consciousness golden yellow Coral red Minium Orange The natural purity of tactile consciousness The natural purity of mental consciousness

Ratna

X o-1 ~

0

Padma Padma

[Sarva] Nivarar:tavi- Northern channel bram:h of skambhin the heart, to the right of sgrib-pa rnam-par Amoghasiddhi sel-ba Vajrapal)i phyag-na rdo-rJe Northern channel branch of the heart, to the left of Amoghasiddhi

Green as the nightflowering lotus Emerald green

The natural purity of the 'ground-of-all' consciousness

Karma

The natural purity of the defiled consciousness

Karma

...,..
\C)

...

The eight female bodhisattvas: Lisya, Pu~pa, Malya, Dhupa, Gita, Aloka, Gandha and Narti, represent the four sense objects and the four phases of conceptual thought (past, present, future and indeterminate), or alternatively the eight objects of consciousness
Enlightened family Vajra

...,..
\D

t-o

Location Lasya lasya-ma
Pu~pa
pu~pe-ma

Colour Quartz white Pearl white Saffron yellow Golden yellow Marsh mallow pink Lotus pink Poppy green Marine green

Symbolising The natural purity of visual phenomt:na

The eastern channel branch of the heart, in front of Vajrasattva The eastern channel branch of the heart, behind Vajrasattva The southern channel branch of the heart, in front of Ratnasambhava The southern channel branch of the heart, behind Ratnasambhava The western channel branch of the heart, in front of Amit;lbha The western channel branch of the heart, behind Amitjbha The northern channel branch of the heart, in front of Amoghasiddhi The northern channel branch of the heart, behind Amoghasiddhi

The natural purity of past conceptual thoughts The natural purity of mdcterminate conct:ptual thoughts

Vajra Ratna

Malya malya-ma Dhopa dhupe-ma Gita ghirti-ma Aloka aloka-ma Gandha gh,mdhe-ma Narti nirtt-ma

The natural purity of fragrance

Ratna

The natural purity of sound

Padma

The natural purity of future conceptual thoughts The natural purity of present conceptual thoughts

Padma

>
"'::

Karma

z
0

IT.

;;;
The natural purity of taste Karma
-i ~

0

The four male gatekeepers: Trailokyavijaya, Yamantaka, Hayagrlva and Amrtakur:t~alin, represent the natural purity of the four extreme views and four aspects of enlightened activity
NB: According to Chapter 7, they represent the natural purity of the four immeasurable aspirations.

> ....,
....,
l"M

0

z
X

Location T railokyavijaya

Colour White

Symbolising The natural purity of eternalist views and acts of pacification The natural purity of nihilistic views and acts of enrichment The natural purity of egotistical views and acts of subjugation The natural purity of substantialist views and acts of wrath

--Vajra

Enlightened family

o-j

~

0

khams-gsum rnam-rgyal
Yamantaka

The channel branch at the eastern gate of the heart, embracing Ankusa The channel branch at the southern gate of the heart, embracing Pasa The channel branch at the western gate of the heart, embracing Spo~ha The channel branch at the northern gate of the heart, embracing Gal)~hil

Yellow

Ratna

gshin-rje gshed
Hayagriva

Red

PaJma

rta-mgrin
Amrtaku~~alin

Green

Karma

bdud-rtsi 'khyil-ba

...... \0 ......

The four female gatekeepers: Ankusa, Pasa, Spho!a and Ghar)!a, represent the natural purity of the four types of birth and the four immeasurable aspirations
!'JB: Accordmg
to

v.
\,(;

~

Chapter 7, they represent the natural purity of the four extreme views.

Location Ankusa lc.zgs-kyu-ma The channel branch at the eastern gate of the heart, embracing Trailokyavijaya The channel branch at the southern gate of the heart, embracing Yamanraka The channel branch at the western gate of the heart, embracing Hayagriva The channel branch at the northern gate of the heart, embracing AmrtakuJ)~alin

Colour White

Symbolising

Enlightened family

The natural purity of miraculous birth and the immcasur- Vajra able aspiration of compassion The natural purity of womb birth and the Immeasurable aspiration of loving kindness The natural purity of egg birth and the immeasurable aspiration of empathetic joy The natural purity of birth through heat and moisture, and the immeasurable aspiration of equanimity Ratna

Pas a
zhags-pa-ma

Yellow

Spho!a
lcags-sgrogs-ma
Gha~!a

Red

Padma

Green

Karma

dril-bu-ma

The six sages: Indrasakra, Vcmacitra, Sakyamuni, Sthirasif11ha, Jvalamukha and Yama Dharmaraja, represent the natural purity of the six dissonant mental states
Location lndrasakra dbang-pu brgya-byin In the channel branch of the energy centre of great bliss at the crown of the head Colour White Symbolising The natural purity of pride

>
-:
'"0

z
0

~

X
o-j

~

0

Vemacitra thag-bzang-ris Sakyamuni shakya thub-pa Sthirasif!1ha senge rab-brtan jvalamukha kha- 'bar-ma Yam a Dharmaraja gshin-rje chos-kyi rgyal-po

In th~ occipital channel at the throat In the 'life force' channel at the heart In the energy centre at the navel In the channel branch at the bliss-sustaining secret energy centre In the en~rgy centre at the sol~s of the feet

Green Yellow Blue Red

The natural purity of envy The natural purity of attachment The natural purity of delusion The natural purity of miserliness

"0 "0

>

z c

m

X ....; ~

0

Black

The natural purity of aversion

The Fifty-eight Wrathful Deities
The six peaceful male buddhas: Samantabhadra, Vairocana, Ak~obhya-Vajrasattva, Ratnasambhava, Amitabha and Amoghasiddhi are in their wrathful aspects respectively: Mahottara Heruka, Buddha Heruka, Vajra Hcruka, Ratna Hcruka, Padma Heruka and Karma Hcruka, who represent the natural transformation of the six dissonant mental states
Enlightened family

Location Mahottara Heruka In the central channel branch che-mchog he-ru-ka of the skull within the brain, embracing Krodhdvari Buddha Heruka buddha he-ru-ka In the central channel branch of the skull within the brain, embracing Buddhakrodhdvari

Colour Dark brown Dark brown

Symbolising The natural transformation of fundamental ignorance into pure awareness The natural transformation of delusion into the pristine cognition of reality's expanse

Buddha

~

'-0
VI

Location V ajra Heruka b,zdzru he-ru-ka Ratna Heruka ratna he-ru-ka Padma Heruka padma he-ru-ka Karma Heruka ka-rma he-ru-ka In the eastern channel branch of the skull within the brain, embracing Vajrakrodhisvari In the southern channel branch of the skull within the brain, embracing RatnakrodhiSvari In the western channel branch of the skull within the brain, embracing Padmakrodhisvari In the northern channel branch of the skull within the brain, embracing Karmakrodhisvari

Colour

Symbolising

Enlightened family Vajra

.......
\C)

Dark blue The natural transformation of aversion into the mirrorlike pristine cognition Dark yellow Dark red

a-.

The natural transformation of pride into the pristine cog- Ratna nition of sameness The natural transformation of attachment into the pristine cognition of discernment The natural transformation of envy into the pristine cognition of accomplishment Padma

Dark green

Karma

The six peaceful female buddhas: Samantabhadrl, AkasadhatviSvari, Buddhalocana, Mamaki, Pal)~aravasini and Samayatara in their wrathful aspects respectively are Krodhe5vari, Buddhakrodhc5vari, Vajrakrodhe5vari, Ratnakrodhc5vari, Padmakrodhe5vari and Karmakrodhc5vari, who represent the natural transformation of mental constructs associated with the six objects of consciousness
Enlightened family
;lo "':1 "':

Location Krodhesvari kru-ti-sva-ri In the central channel branch of the skull within the brain, embracing Mahottara Heruka

Colour

Symbolising

Dark blue The natural transformation of mental constructs associated with the sensory spectrum of pht·nomena Redbrown The natural transformation of mental constructs associated with physical objects [of sight] Buddha

I'T1

z

0
)(

Buddhakrodhdvari In the central channel branch bde-gshegs dbyings- of the skull within the brain, phyug-mal b~ddha embracing Buddha Heruka kro-ti-svarri

-1

~ 0

Vajrakrodhesvari

)'lt1n b.1-dzra kro-tiSl/u-ri
Ratnakrodhdvari

In tht· eastern ~.:hanncl branch of the skull within the brain, embra~ing Vajra Heruka In the southern channel branch of the skull within the brain, embr.King Ratna Hcruka In the we~tern ch;mncl branch oi tht· skull within the brain, embr.tcing Padma Heruka In the northern channel bran~.:h of the ~kull within the brain, embracing Karma Hcruka

Pale blue

The natural transformation of llll'IHal constructs associated with objc~ts of sound Thl· natural transformation of mental~.:onstructs associated with objects of smell The natural transformation of mental constructs associated with objects of taste

Vajra

>
'":l '":l
~

'Z.

c:;

Pale
yellow Pale red

Ratna

X
-1

yum r,ltlla kro-tisva-ri
Padmakrodhdvari

c
Padma

~

yum pudma kro-tisua-ri
Karmakrodhesvari

k,zrma yum kro-tisua-ri

Palt· green The natural transformation of mental constructs associa ted with objc~.:ts of touch

Karma

The eight Matara~: Gauri, Cauri, Pramoha, Vetali, Pukkasi, Ghasmari, Cal)~ali and Smasani, represent the natural transformation of mental constructs associated with the eight classes of consciousness
Location Gauri Colour White Symbolising The natural transformation of mental constructs associatcc.l with visual consciousness, and the action of destroying the conceptual landscape of cyclic existence The natural transformation of mental constructs associated with auditory consciousness, and the action of propelling the six classes of beings into higher rebirth The natural transformation of mental constructs associated with olfactory consciousness, and the action of resisting lthe seductions ofJ cyclic existence
~

ke'u-ri
Cauri

In the eastern channel branch of the skull within the brain In the southern channel branch of the skull within the brain In the we~tern channel branch of the skull within the brain

Yellow

tsa 'u-ri
Pramoha

Rec.l

pra-mo-hii

\0 '-I

......
Location Vetali vetali Pukkasi pu-kka-si Ghasmari ghasmari
Ca~<;Jali

Colour Greenblack Redyellow Greenblack Pale yellow Blueblack

Symbolising The natural transformation of mental constructs associated with gustatory consciousness, and the action of [susraining recognition ofJ the unchanging reality The natural transformation of mental constructs associated with tactile consciou!>ness, and the action of drawing [sentient beings] free from the dissonant realms The natural transformation of mental constructs associated with the mental consciousness, and the action of consuming [the turning circle of] cyclic existence The natural transformation of mental constructs associated with the 'ground-of-all' consciousness, and the action of severing erroneous thoughts [at their roots] The natural cransformarion of mental constructs associared with the deluded consciousness, and the action of severing the buttresses of cyclic existence

\0

ex:

In the northern channel branch of the skull within the brain In the south-eastern channel branch of the skull within the brain In the south-western channel branch of the skull within the brain In the north-western channel branch of the skull within the brain In the north-eastern channel branch of the skull within the brain

gtum-mo
Smasani dur-khrod-ma

The eight Pisaci: Sirphamukhi, Vyaghrimukhi, Srgalamukhi, Svanamukhi, Grdhramukhi, Kankamukhi, Kakamukhi and Uliikamukhi, represent the natural transformation of mental constructs associated with the objects of the eight classes of consciousness
Location Colour Brownblack Symbolising The natural transformation of mental constructs associated with visual objects, and the action of stirring cyclic existence to its depths

> ..., ...,
0

z

fTI

se1~g-gdong-1'ha

Simhamukhi

In the outer eastern channel branch of the skull within the brain

><
--l

~

0

Vyaghrlmukhl stag-gdmzg-ma Srgalamukhi sri-/a gdong-ma Svanamukhi shva-na gdonK-ma Grdhramukhi rgod-gdonK-ma Kankamukhi kang-ka gdong-ma Kakamukhi kha-kha gdong-ma

In the outer southern channel branch of the skull within the brain In the outer western channel branch of the skull within the brain In the outer northern channel branch of the skull within the brain

Red

The natural transformation of mental constructs associated with sounds, and the action of overwhelming attachment to cyclic existence The natural transformation of mental constructs associated with smells, and the action of purifying dissonant mental states in their basic nature The natural tram-formation of mental constructs associated with tastes, and the action of stirring the pit of cyclic existence The natural transformation of mental constructs associated with touch, and the action of severing the three poisons from their roots

>
'":l

z
0

t':'1

Black

><
--1

~ 0

Blueblack

In the outer south-eastern chan- Whitenel hranch of the skull within yellow the brain In the outer south-western channel branch of the skull within the brain In the outer north-western channel branch of the skull within the brain

Red-black The natural transformation of mental constructs associated with mental phenomena, anJ the action of extracting [beings] from the pit of cyclic existence Black The natural tramformation of mental constructs associated with objects of the 'ground-of-all' consciousness, and the action of consuming and liberating dissonant mental states

Ulokamukhi hu-hl Kdong-ma

In the outer norrh-eastern chan- Dark blue The natural transformation of mental constructs associnel branch of the skull within ated with objects of the deluded consciousness, and the anion of drawing [beings] free from the false mentality the brain of cyclic existence
\;.>

\D \D

~

The four Female Gatekeepers manifest as Vajratejasl, Vajramogha, Vajraloka and Vajravetalt, respectively representing the closing of the doors to the four types of birth and the force of the four immeasurable aspirations
Enlightened family

0 0

Location Vajratejasi

Colour White

Symbolising The force of immeasurable compassion and the closing of the door to miraculous birth The force of immeasurable loving kindness and the closing of the door to womb birth The force of immeasurable empathetic joy and the closing of the door to egg birth The force of immeasurable equanimity and the closing of the door to birth through heat and moisture

-Vajra

[Ankusa] lcagskyu-ma
Vajramogha [Pasa]

In the channel branch at the eastern gate of the skull within the brain In the channel branch at the southern gate of the skull within the brain In the channel branch at the western gate of the skull within the brain In the channel branch at the northern gate of the skull within the brain

Yellow

Ratna

zhags-pa-ma
Vajraloka [Sphota] lcags-sgrogs-ma Vajravetali
[Gha~!ii]

Red

Padma

Green

Karma

dril-bu-ma

>
"':: "'::

z
0

fTl

><
o-j

~

0

Twenty-eight lsvari, represent the purification of the aggregates of bewildered mental constructs and the enactment of enlightened activity
Enlightened family Vajra

>
"'0 -; !Tl

z

0

><
-l

Location The six yogini of the east:
Manurak~asi

Colour

Symbolising The activities of pacification

In the minor channels of the eastern outer courtyard of the skull

0

s:i

Brahmat;ti Raudri
Vai~t;tavi

Kaumari lndrat;ti The six yogini of the south: Vajra Santi In the minor channels of the southern outer courtyard of the skull

brownish white yellowish white greenish white bluish white reddish white white· The activities of enrichment Ratna

Am!ta
Saumi
Dat;t~i
Rak~asi

yellow reddish yellow reddish yellow whitish yellow greenish yellow blackish yellow

~

.....

0

Location The six yogini of the west:
Bhak~asi

Colour

Symbolising The activities of subjugation

Enlightened family Pad rna

~

In the minor channels of the western outer courtyard of the skull greenish red red pale red red red greenish red In the minor channels of the northern outer courtyard of the skull

0

""

Rati Rudhiramadi
Ekacari~;ti Rak~asi

Manoharika Siddhikari The six yogini of the north: Vayudevi Agnayi Varahi
Camu~;t~i

The activities of wrath

Karma

Bhujana
Varuna~;ti

bluish green reddish green blackish green reddish green blackish green bluish green At the [outer] eastern, southern, western and northern gates of the skull respectively white yellow red dark green The closing of the four doors to the four types of birth, and the enactment of the four kinds of enlightened activity Vajra Ratna Pad rna Karma

The four yogini gatekeepers: Vajrll Mahakali Vajra Mahachagala Vajra Mahakumbhakar~;ti

> ....,
....,
("rl

z

0
:><

Vajra Lambodara

...;

0

E

Notes

List of Abbreviations
Dcrge Derge Parkhang xylographic editions, of the Kangyur, Tengyur and Collected Tantras of the Nyingmapa (NGB). Disc. gTer-ston, discoverer of concealed teachings (gter ma). DR Zab-chos zhi-khro dgongs-pa rang-grol, 3 vols. The most extensive and accurate version of Karma Lingpa's revelations (64 texts, 764 folios), a manusaipt of Katok provenance, from the library of the previous Dudjom Rinpoche, published in photo-offset form (Delhi: Sherab Lama, I975-76), reproduced on CD-ROM by TBRC, New York, Ref: 2330-2332. GGFTC G. Dorje, The Guhyagarbhatattvaviniscayamahatantra and its XIVth Century Tibetan Commentary Phyogs bcu mun se/. 3 vols. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, University of London, 1987. See also The Guhyagarbha Tantra: Dispelling the Darkness of the Ten Directtons (forthcoming). MTTWL P. Pfandt, MahJy.ina Texts Translated into Western Languages. Cologne: In Komission bei E. J. Brill, I98J. NA Not available, not extant. NGB The Derge xylographic edition of the Collected Tantras of the Nyingmapa (rNying-ma'i rgyud-'bum) in 26 vols. NK Collected Teachings of the Nyingmapa (rNying-ma'i bka'-ma), compiled in I 20 vols. by Khenpo Jamyang, Katok (I 999 ). NSTB Dudjom Rinpoche, The Nyingma School of Tibetan Buddhism: Its Fund.Jmentals and History, translated by G. Dorje and M. Kapstein, Boston: Wisdom Publications, r 99 I. This volume contains two texts, Gangs-/jongs rgya-bstan yungs-rdzogs-kyi phyi-mo snga- 'gyur rdo-rje theg-pa 'i bstan-pa rin-po-che ji-ltar byung-ba'i tshul-dag-cing gsal-bar brjod-pa lha-dbang gYul-las rgyal-ba'i rngabo-che'i sgra-dbyangs (short title: rNying-ma'i chos- 'byung), and the gSangs1lgags snga- 'gyur rnying-ma-ba'i bstan-pa'i rnam-gzhag mdo-tsam brjod-pa legs-bshad snang-ba'i dga'-ston (short title: bsTan-pa'i rnam-gzhag). Redisc. Rediscoverer of twice-concealed teachings (yang-gter). SDGG Lochen Dharmasri, gSang-bdag dgongs-rgyan, NK, Vol. 76. T A Complete Catalogue of the Tibetan Buddhist Canons, ed. H. Ui et a/., Sendai: Tohoku University, 1934· This is a catalogue to the Derge xylographic edition of the Kangyur and Tengyur. TBD Tibetan Book of the Dead (Bar-do thos-grol chen-mo). TBD Amdo edition Bar-do thos-grol chen-mo, 303 pages, recently compiled by

NOTES

Khenpo Dorje and published in Hong Kong, in Qinghai Buddhist Texts Series, Vol. I (n.d.). TBD Delhi reprint Bur-do thos-grol che1z-mo, 5 50 p3ges, Delhi ( 198 5 ). Reproduced from a print of the Bhutanese Rinpung Dzong xylograph through the agency of HH Dilgo Khycntse Rinpoche. TBD Varanasi reprint Bur-do thos-grol chen-mo, I 22 pages, ed. Kalsang Lhundup, Varanasi (1969). Handwritten print based on the xylographic edition of HH Dilgo Khyentse Rinpoche, housed at Engon Monastery in Sikkim.

r Natural Liberation of the Nature of Mind
r.

2..

3·

4·

5. 6.
7·

8.
9·

10.

I 1.

12.

Tib. gSang-sngags rdo-ne theg-pa'i chos-spyod thun-bzhi'i mal-'byor semsnyid rang-grol. Tib. Zab-chos zhi-khro dgongs-pu ra11g-grol. The practices concerning death ( "chi-ba) are the analytical meditations on the nature of impermanence (anitya). See e.g. Paltrul Rinpoche, The Words of My Perfect Teacher, pp. 39- 59; Sonam T. Kazi (trans.), Kun-zang La-may Zhal-lung, pp. 56-82.; and Sgam.po.pa!H. V. Guenther (trans.), The Jewel Ornament of Liberation, pp. 4 r- 54· The expression 'starting with' (sogs-la) implies that this will lead on to the other analytical meditations concerning past actions (karma) and the sufferings of cyclic existence (sal!tSJra). On the application of the meditation on death by hermit buddhas who frequent charnel grounds in order to meditate in reverse on the twelve links of dependent origination (pratftyasamutpada), see Dudjom Rinpoche, NSTB, pp. 228-9. This description of phenomena accords with the account given by Nago:lrjuna at the beginning of his Root Stanzas of the Madhyamaka entitled Discriminative Au•areness (Prafl"iJ-nama-malamadhyamakakJrika). See the translation by D. Kalupahana, Mlt/amadhyamakakJrikas, Ch. I. i.e. lacking in skilful means, on which see glossary. For a description of the eight freedoms (dal-ba brgyad) and the ten opportunities ( 'byor-ba bcu), see glossary. On the dissolution of the physical environment (lokadhatu) by fire and water at the end of an aeon, see L. Pruden (trans.), Abhidharmakosabl]{i~ya'!'• Ch. 3, The World, pp. 475-7, 489-95. The 'Lord of Death' ( 'chi-bdag) is an epithet of Yama Dharmaraja. Sec glossary. The expression 'irreversible path' (phyir mi-zlog-pa'i lam) refers to the sutras of the second and third turnings of the wheel of the sacred teachings, which expound the definitive meaning. See glossary under definitive meaning. Lit. 'accumulations' (Tib. tshoKs). This refers to the accumulation of merit (bsod-n.lms), as opposed to the accumulation of pristine cognition (ye-shes). See glossary. Tib. mnyam-rdzogs k/ong-yangs chen-po'i rang-bzhm. This expanse of sa'tlleness and perfection is synonymous with the Buddha-body of Reality. See Dudjom Rinpoche, NSTB, pp. 2.5 I -2.. !\jame and form (nanzanipa) together comprise all the five psycho-physical aggreg.ues (pafzcaskandhu) of which the mind-body complex is formed, \'iz.

NOTE~

I).

form (rupa), consciousness (vtinJ1la), feeling (vedamz), perception (sat!zinJ), and motivational tendencies (sat!lskJra). See glossary under aggregates. The seed-syllable H 0 ~ is that of Vajrasarrva, symbolising buddha-mind. On its composition, sec Pahrul Rinpoche, The Words of My Per{ect Teacher, p. 272. For an illustration depining the crown fontanelle in its relation with the three main energy channels and ancillary vessels, see Tibetan Medical Painti11gs,
p. 34·

I I

5. Sec glossary under Hundred-syllable Mantra. 6. 'Vajra Holder' (vairadh~k; Tib. rdo-rie 'd:.in-pa), here referring to the deity

Va)rasattva, is a title generally given to accomplished exponents of the Vehicle of Indestructible Reality ( Va,rayana). 17. This prayer for total union with the deity is repeated below, p. 2 I, at the end of the section on union with the spiritual teacher (guruyoga). As to the specilled indications of this union, the body size (kJya; Tib. sku 'i tshad) and lifespan of Vajrasattva (Jyul?; Tib. tshe) are those of a buddha, on which seeP. Williams, MahJyJna Buddhism, pp. I 8 I -4; his retinue (parivdra; Tib. 'khor) comprises male and female bodhisattvas, on which sec Ch. 5, p. 68; and his field (k~etra; Tib. zhing-khams) is Abhirati on which see Ch. 11, p. 239. for the significance of the thirty-two major marks (dvatri'!tsasanmukhapuru~alak~a~za; Tib. skyes-bu dam-pa'i mtshan-b:.ang sum-cu rtsa-gnyis), which arc displayed on the buddha-body of form (riip.JkJya), sec glossary. I 8. The initial mantra of the external mary~ala of offerings: o.~t VAJRA BHO,-.u A1_1 110 ~ indicates that the foundation or base of the symbolic ma•~0ala is of the nature of indestructible reality (vaJra; Tib. rdo-rie). Simultaneously, the practitioner sprinkles consecrated substances upon it. See Paltrul Rinpoche, The Words of My Perfect Teacher, p. 287; and Sonam T. Kazi (trans.), Kunza,zg La-may Zhal-lung, p. 400. The foundation of the mandala IS considered to be an immensely thick indestructible circle of wind, r~~ting upon space, and surmounted by a circle of water and a sphere of gold. Sec L. Pruden (trans.), Abhidharmakosubha~yat~z, Ch. 3, The World, pp. 451-2. 20. The second mantra of the mary<;J.1Ia of offerings: o,~ VAJRA REKHE AI.I HO~ indicates that the cakrut'J,_fa or 'perimeter wall' of the mary~<lla is of the nature of indestructible reality. Simultaneously, the practitioner makes a clockwise circular motion with the right hand, and places a flower blossom on the surface of the mary<:Jala, followed by the outer ring. Sec Pahrul Rinpochc, The Words of My Perfect Teacher, p. 287; and Sonam T. Kazi (trans.), Kun-zang La-may Zhal-lung, pp. 400-40 I. 21. On the pen.:cption of the sun (sllrya; Tib. nyi-nza) and moon (wndra; Tib. zla-ba) from the perspective of Abhidharma, see L. Pruden (trans.), AhhidharmakosabhJ~ym~z, pp. 460-62; and R. Kloetzli, Buddhist Cosmology, pp. 456. Rahu (sgra-gcan) and Ketu (dus-me) arc identified as the ascending and descending phases of the moon. 22. The syllables o~ A~ HO~ respectively symbolise buddha-body, speech and mind, for which reason, in the context of the present work, they frc4uently appear at the beginning of verses as an invocation. See Ch. 5, pp. 67ff. The three verses '"·h1ch follow respectively concern the outer, inner, and secret

406

NOTES

23.

24.

2

5.

26.

27.

2.8.

29.

30.

mar:t~ala of offerings which are made respectively to the Buddha-body of Emanation (11irmd1_takaya), the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource (sambhogakJyu), and the Buddha-body of Reality (dharmakaya). On the construction of these three ma•?~alas, see Paltrul Rinpoche, The Words of My Perfect Te.1cher, pp. 288-95; and Sonam T. Kazi (trans.), Kun-za11g La-may Zh..z/lung, Pt. 2, pp. 403-4. The ultimate nature of mind (sems-nyid) is identified with the Buddha-body of Reality (dharm..zkaya). for a detailed introduction to the nature of mind, within the wntext of the present work, see Ch. 4, pp. 3 8-57. The concluding mantra of the mar:t~ala of offerings o~t Al:l HO~t MAHA GURU DEVA l;>AKINI RATNA MA~J?ALA POJA MEGHA A HO~ indicates that a cloud of offerings is presented to the precious mar:t9ala of the spiritual teachers, meditational deities, and 9akinis. The spiritual teachers of the core lineage who are connected with this transmission ( 'brel-tshad do11-/Jan rtsa-brgyud bla-ma-mams) are those in successive generations who have maintained the lineage of our text from the time of Nyinda Ozer down to the present. See 'A Brief Literary History', pp. xxxvixlviii. The biographies of the important figures in the lineage of the oral transmission (bka'-brgyud) related to the teachings of the Nyingma school, are outlined in Dudjom Rinpoche, NSTB, pp. 601-739· The strict vows made in the past (s11gon-gyi dam-bca' gnyan-po) are those taken by buddhas and bodhisatrvas in former lives penaining to the propagation of the Buddhist teaching and the bodhisattva vow to remove the sufferings of all beings. See e.g. P. Williams, Mahayana Buddhism, pp. 49- 54· Listed among the eighty minor marks (asftya11uvyar,;ana), the Brahma-like voice (tshangs-pa 'i gsung) refers to one of the six modes of buddha-speech. See Longchen Rabjampa, GGfTC, pp. 703-4. On the concept of cyclical time, see L. Pruden (trans.), Abhidh..zrmakosabha~ya'~'· Ch. 3, The \X'orld, pp. 475-95; R. Kloetzli, Buddhist Cosmology, pp. 73-5. Each great aeon (muhakalpa) of cyclical time is said to wmprise the four eras of creation (vwartakalpa), duration (vivartasthayikulp.I), dissolution (sm~wartakalpa), and non-Juration (sa1!1Vartasthayikalpa). The expression 'tinal era' (dus-mtha') refers to the period of dissolution. On this conferral of the four empowerments, namely: the vase empowerment (bum-dbang), the secret empowerment (gsang-dbang), the empowerment of pristine cognition (shes-rab ye-shes-kyi dbang) and the fourth empowerment of indivisible cocmergence (dbyer-med lhan-skyes dba11g bzhi-pa) which respectively confer the accomplishment of buddha-body (sku-yt dngos-grub), the accomplishment of buddha-speech (gsung-gi dngos-grub), the accomplishment of buddha-mind (thugs-kyi dngos-grub), and the combined accomplishment of buddha-body, speech and mind (sku-gsu11g-thugs-kyi dngos-grub), see Paltrul Rinpoche, The Words ol My Perfect Teacher, pp. 3 29- 30; and Sonam T. Kazi (trans.), Ku11-za11g La-may Zhal-lung, Pt. 2, pp. 462-5.

NOTES

2
1.
2..

A Prayer for Union with the Spiritual Teacher

.3·

4·

5.

6.

7.

T1b. sl\u-gsum b/a-ma 'i mal- 'byor gsol- 'debs dug-gsum ma-spmzg rang-grol. Tib. Zab-chos zhi-khro dgongs-pa rang-grul . The specific blessing which anses from the Buddha-body of Reality (chos-sku'z byin-rlab) is 'primordially pure' (ka-dug), mdicatmg that m this context the Buddha-body of Reality is directly realised through the Atiyoga practice called 'Cutting through Resistance to primordial purity' 1ka-dag khregs-chod), on which see Ch. 4; also DudJom Rinpoche, NSTB, pp. 335-7. This blessing is 'spontaneously present' (/hun-grub), indicating that the Buddha-body of Perfel:t Resource is directly realised through the Atiyoga practice called 'All-surpassing Realisation of spontaneous presence' (/hun-grub thod-rgal). See Dud1om Rinpoche, ~STB, pp. 337-45. The prist me cognition of the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource, here referred to as 'naturally liberated in supreme bliss' (bde-chen rang-gro/), comprises the mirror-like pristine cognition (Jdarsajtidna), the pristine cognition of sameness (samataJizana), and the pristine cognition of discernment (pratyauek~anajtitm,l). See glossary under pristine cognition. The pristine cognition referred to here is the pristine cognition of the Buddhabody of Emanation, otherwise known as the pristine cognition of accomplishment (krtyupasthdnajndna). See glossary under pristine cognition. The natural pristine cognition (rang-byung ye-shes) of the three buddha-bodies in union refers to the unity of all the five aspects of pristine cognition (pati-

cajtidna).
8. On the bodhisattva's altruistic aspiration not to enter nirv~J)a until all sentient beings have been liberated from cyclic existence (s ..u?tsdra), see P. Williams, Mahd)•dna Buddhzsm, pp. 49- 54·

3 Root Verses of the Six Intermediate States
r.

Tih. Bar-do rnum-drug-gi rtsa-tshig. These verses arc re1rer .ned in the context of other chapters of this cycle, e.g. Ch. 10, p. 205, and Ch. 11, pp. 235 and
2.88.

2..

_,.

4·
~.

Chs. 1-7 of the present text relate to the intermediate state of living, including the intermediate states of dreaming and meditative concentration. Chs. 8-Io of the present text relate to the intermediate state of the time of death. The intermediate state of reality is the subject of Ch. 1 I. The intermediate state of rebirth is the subject of Chs. I 1 and 13.

4 Natural Liberation through Naked Perception
1.
2..

3.

Tib. Rig-pa ngo-sprod ?,Cer-mthong rang-grol. Tib. Zab-chos zl11-khro dgongs-pa rang-grol. The poinr is that all the inestimable 84,000 aspects of the sacred teachings, the nine vehicles, the three or four pi!uka, and so forth, depend upon the

40H

NOTES

4·

primary understanding of intrinsic awareness. Cf. Lankavatdrasutra, Ch. 2, v. 202: 'As long as sentient beings manifest, there will be no end to the vehicles. When the mind becomes transformed, there is neither vehicle nor mover.' The Tibetan expression tshig gsum (lit. 'three words') is used colloquially to mean 'terse' or 'in few words'. Two alternative readings have been suggested: 1) The phrase 'three words' could refer to the three statements given on pp. 41-2, that 'past thoughts are traceless, clear and empty', that 'future thoughts are unproduced and fresh', and that 'the present moment abides naturally and unconstructed'. 2) A less likely view is that this expression may refer to the Atiyoga testament of Prahevajra (Tib. dGa'-rab rdo-rje), entitled

Three Points which Penetrate the Essential (tshig-gsum gnad-du brdeg-pa).
The three points contained in this latter work crystalise the process through which intrinsic awareness (rang-rig) is introduced. They are as follows: the 'direct introduction to the essence itself' (ngo-rang thog-tu 'phrod-pa), the 'direct determination of this unique state' (tJ?ag-gcig thog-tu bcad-pa), and the 'direct confidence in liberation' (gdeng-grol thog-tu bca'-ba). for the original text, see Bi-ma sNying-tbig, Pt. 1, Vol. Ga, pp. 304-18, and Parrul Rinpoche's ninerernth-century commentary entitled mKhas-pa 'i shri rgyal-po mkhas-chos. The background to the revelation of Prahevajra's testament is given in Dudjom Rinpoche, NSTB, pp. 490-94. This verse derives from the Guhyagarbha Tantra, Ch. 13, v. 2: There are those of no understanding,/ And those of wrong understanding,/ Those of partial understanding,/ And those who have nor [quire] understood genuine reality. As explained by Longchen Rabjampa, GGFTC, pp. 988-97, those of no understanding (ma-rtogs-pa) are ordinary persons who adhere to the 'vehicles of gods and humans' (devamanu~yayana), striving after excellence and higher rebirths within cyclic existence (sa'?fsdra) through the practice of virtue. Those of misunderstanding (/og-rtogs-pa) comprise the eternalistic and nihilistic extremist philosophers of ancient India, who adhere to the Nyayayika, Vai~I)ava, Saq1khya, Vaise~ika, and Barhaspatya standpoints. Those of partial understanding (phyogs-tsam rtogs-pa) comprise the pious attendants (sravaka) who realise the selflessness of the individual person (pudgalanairatmya) but fail to realise the selflessness of phenomena (dhamwnairatmya), and the hermit buddhas (pratyekabuddha) who additionally realise the lack of inherent existence (niJ!svahhavatd) with respect to external material phenomena, but fail to realise the lack of inherent existence in internal mental phenomena. Lastly, those who do not quite understand genuine reality (yang-dag ii-bzhin-nyid-du ma-rtogs-pa) comprise the adherents of the causal vehicles, who maintain the views of Cittamarra and Madhyamaka, realising respectively that phenomena are extensions of consciousness and that all phenomena, whether external or internal, arc without inherent existence; yet not quite understanding that 'all things are identical in primordial buddhahood', or that 'neither renunciation nor acceptance is required because dissonant mental states themselves arise as pristine cognition'. At the same time, all these types are said to be 'meagr:,e in their skilful means (updyakausalya)' and they 'accomplish their results'with difficulty and toil over a long period of time'. Longchen Rabjampa concludes that only the adherents of the resultant vehicles (phalayana) perceive genuine reality as it is, and among these, only Ariyoga is stated to be the 'naturally secret truth' (rmzg-hzhin gsang-ba'i don), while Kriyatantra and Ubhayatantra

5·

NOTES

are referred to as 'disciplines' ('dul-ba), Yogatantra as 'enlightened intention' (dgongs-pa), and Mahayoga as 'secrecy' (gsang-ba). These diverse classifications of Buddhist practitioners and vehicles arc identified, one by one, in the following verses. For the Nyingma perspective of the non-Buddhist views 'of wrong understanding' (/og-rtogs-pa) mentioned above, see also Dudjom Rinpoche, NSTB, pp 64-7. 6. On the classifications of those ordinary persons 'of no understanding' (martogs-pa) who adhere to the 'vehicles of gods and humans' (deuamanzt~yayiina), sec Dudjom Rinpochc, NSTB, pp. 57-64. 7. The 'partial absence of self' (phyogs-tsam bdag-med) is that aspect of selflessness comprehended by pious attendants and hermit buddhas. Sec glossary under selflessness. 8. This passage, in which the texts (gzhung) and philosophical systems (siddhanta; Tib. grub-mtha') of the diverse Buddhist schools are said to inhibit the perception of inner radiance, corresponds doscly to a well-known quotation from the Tantra of the All-accomplishing King (Kun-byed rgyal-po 'i rgyud, T 828), for a translation of which, see Dudjom Rinpoche, NSTB, pp. 29 5-7. The Buddhist and non-Buddhist spiritual and philosophical systems (siddhant.J) are rhe subject of derailed analysis in many specialist treatises, among which the Nyingma presentations relevant to our present text include Longchen Rabjampa 's Treasury of Spiritual and Philosophical Systems (Grubmtha' mdzod), and Dudjom Rinpochc's Fundamentals of the Nyingma School (bsTan-pa'i rnam-gzhag). 9· According to the often-cited passage from the Tantra of the All-accomplishing King (Kun-byed rgyal-po'i rgyud, T 828) mentioned above, the weaknesses (gol-sa) of these three outer classes of tantra are respectively: maintaining the subject-object dichotomy in relation to purity (Kriyatantra), maintaining the duality of view and conduct (Ubhayatamra), and maintaining acceptance and rejection in relation to meditation (Yogatantra). In the present context, these are all subsumed in the weakness of excessive attachment to the so-called 'four branches of ritual service and attainment' (bsnyen-sgrub yan-lag hzhi), on which see the glossary. ro. The inner tantras of skilful means (n.:mg-pa thabs-kyi rgyud), which are the subject of the present verse, are those of Mah:lyoga, Anuyoga, and Atiyoga, for a detailed discussion of which, see Dudjom Rinpoche, NSTB, pp. 273-345, 3 57-7 2. Of these inner tantras of skilful means, only Atiyoga is considered to be free from weaknesses, while the Tantra of the All-accomplishing King (Kun-byed rgya/-po'i rgyud) refers to the weakness in Mahayoga as 'excessive perseverance with regard to ritual service and attainment' (seuasiidhana); and to the weakness in Anuyoga as 'the duality of pure expanse or space' (dag-pa'i dbyings) identified with Samanrabhadri, and of pristine cognition or awareness (jnana), which is identified with Samanrabhadra. See NSTB, pp. 29 5-7. In the context of the present verse, these weaknesses are both subsumed in the dualistic notion of 'space and awareness' (dbyings-rig). r r. Our text at this point has the reading: gdams-ngag gdams-ngag ('oral teaching, oral teaching'). The meaningful reading: gang-zag bdag-med ('selflessness of the individual') is suggested by Zenkar Rinpoche. r 2. The elimination of the dichotomy between 'singularity' (gcig) and 'multiplicity' (du-ma) is the subject of one of the great axioms of Madhyamaka dialectic,

410

NOTES

1 3·

14.

I

5.

I

6.

17.

I

8.

19.

20.

21.

known as the 'absence of the singular and the multiple' (gcig-dang du-bra[), on which see .M. D. Eckel, }fzanagarbha"s Comment.lr)' on the Dzstinction between the Two Truths, pp. 8o-8 5. The innate presence of intrinsic awareness, without need for the elaborations of view (/ta-ba), meditation (sgom-pa), conduct (sflyod-pa), or result ('brasbu), as expounded in these verses, is dearly discussed in the Atiyoga texts of Cutting through Resistance (khregs-chod). See e.g. Dudjom Rinpoche, NSTB, p. 335· The adopting of these four media (thig-bzhi) is comparable to reaching the limits of awareness by the three presences (sdod-pa gsum), or the revealing of the limits of liberation by means of the four assurances (gdeng-bzhi), which consolidate the practices of the Great Perfection. On these Atiyoga terms, sec Dudjom Rinpochc, NSTB, p. 343· The riveting of these four nails (gzer-bzhi) is comparable to that of the three attainments (thob-pa gsum), which consolidate the practices of the Great Perfection. See Dudjom Rinpoche, NSTB, p. 343· The two extremes of which the view is free arc open and closed or high and low perspectives; the two extremes of which medl[ation is devoid are hope and doubt; the two extremes of which conduct is free are renunciation and acceptance; and the two extremes of which the result is free are beginning and end. These eight extremes may be reduced to six by omitting the category of the result. On the view of vacuous emptiness (stong-pa phy,ll-ba) maintained hy nonBuddhists, see Dudjom Rinpoche, NSTB, pp. 62-4, 66-7; and for a detailed discussion, the purpose of which is to indicate that the Buddhist view of emptiness is neither vacuous nor nihilistic, see ibid., pp. I 78-2 I 6. The nature of the delusion (gti-mug), drowsiness ( 'thib-pa), and agitation (rgod-pa), which obstruct the clarity of meditations such as calm ahiding (samatha), is discussed in L. Pruden (trans.), AbiJidharmakosabha~ya'!l· Ch. 5, The Latent Defilements, pp. 767-868, and Ch. 8, The Absorptions, pp. I 21 s82. Existence and non-existence (yud-med g,mg-du ma-gmb) form one binary subset within the four-point set (catu~kori) of propositions which are negated hy NagJrjuna in the Root Stanzas of the Madhyamaka entztled Discrimmative Awareness (Prajfla-nama mulamadhyamaka-karika, T 3824). Sec D. Kalupahana (trans.), Mlllamadhyamakakarikas. On the controversy concerning the emptiness which is devoid of virtuous and negative actions (stong-pa-nyid-la dge-sdtg yul-ma grub), see the discussion on the view of the Great Perfection in NSTB, pp. 896-9 IO. The lives of the future treasure-finders (gter-ston) predicted by Padmasambhava, including that of Karma Lingpa, the treasure-finder associated \Vith our present text, are recounted in ~STB, pp. 7 50-88o, and on the prophecies found in the treasure-doctrines, ibid., pp. 934-5. On Karma Lingpa, see also 'A Brief Literary History', pp. xxxvi-xlviii.

NOTES

411

5 Natural Liberation of Habitual Tendencies
1.

2.

3·

4·

5.

6.

7.

8.

9·
I

o.

1 1.

r 2.

I

3·

q.
I

5·

16. 7· 18.
I

Tib. Chos-spyod bag-chags rang-grol. Tib. Z.1b-chos zhi-khro dgungs-pa rang-grot. Samantabhadra (kzm-tu lnung-po) and .Mahottara (che-mchog) respectively represent the peaceful and wrathful aspects of the Buddha-body of Reality (dharmakayu). The first of these mantras: 0¥ A':f H0¥ BODHICITTA MAHASUKHAJNANA DH ATU A ':f is the unified enlightened intention of the forty-two peaceful deities. See below, Ch. q, p. 354· The second mantra: 0¥ RULU RULU HO~t BHYO~I H C ~~ is the unified enlightened intention of the fifty-eight wrathful deities. See Ch. I 4· p. 364. Whereas the description of Vajrasattva given above, Ch. I, pp. I 5- I 6, focuses on the purificatory function of Vajrasattva, the present passage provides the formal description (abhis.Jmaya; Tib. mngon-rtogs) for the visualisation of Vajrasattva, according to the generation stage (utpattikrama) of meditation. For an explanation, see glossary under Hundred-syllable Mantra. These comprise the ten male and female buddhas along with the sixteen male and female bodhisattvas. See Appendix Two. An inserted annotation in the text adds that if this aspirational prayer is recited on behalf of a dece.1sed person, the word 'we' should, on each occurrence, be replaced with 'the deceased'. The level of Samamabhadra is the sixteenth buddha level, otherwise known as the Level of Unsurpassed Pristine Cognition (ye-shes bla-ma). This and the following itJlicized verses are extracted from the As pi rational Pruyer winch Rescues {rom the Dangerous Pathways of the lntermedzate States. See Ch. 12, pp. 3 1 o- 1 3. The four pristine cognitions combined are the first four of the five pristine cognitions, omitting the pristine cognition of accomplishment. Sec glossary. On the reason fur the omission of the pristine cognition of accomplishment, see Ch. II, p. 249. The occipital channel, which resembles the horn of an ox, is adjacent to the energy centre of perfect resource at the throat (mgrin-pa longs-spyod-kyi 'khor-/o) of the subtle body. The 'life-force' channel, which resembles a crystal tube, otherwise known as k..Ittk.l, is adjacent to the heart-centre (snying-ga chos-kyi 'khor-lo) of the subtle body. The bliss-sustaining secret place (gsang-b.J bde-skyong-gi 'khor-lo) is located at the genitalia of the subtle body. The ornaments (rgyan) worn by the peaceful deities include the five silks (dar-g)'i chas-gos lnga), i.e. scarves, pendants, blouse, skirt, and sleeves; and the eight jewels, i.e. crown, earring, throat necklace, shoulder ornament, midlength necklace, long necklace, bracelets and anklets. On the symbolism of these ornaments, secT. Norbu, The Small Golden Key, pp. 77-8. Tib. /han-skyes ye-shes. Tib. khrag- 'thung lha-tshogs. A synonym for herukas or wrathful deities. Tib. gnas-kyi ke 'u-ri-ma ma-mo brgyad. Here gnas is equivalent to the eight

412

NOTES

I9.
20.

21.

22.

23. 24.

2

5.

26.

27.

classes of consciousness (mam-shes tshogs-brgyad). See Longchen Rabjampa, GGFTC, p. I I70. Tib. mthing-nag. DR, p. 188. I. 6 reads mthing-skya, but see Ch. 6, p. 107, and Ch. I 1, p. 264. Tib. yul-bJ.zg slng-ha phra-men brgyad.The eight sensory objects are the objects of the wrresponding eight classes of wnsciousness. See Longchen Rabjampa, GGFTC, p. 1170. These four female Gatekeepers of the wrathful assembly also have distinct names: the wrathful counterpart of Ankusa is Vajratejasi, of Pasa VajramoghJ, of Spho~a Vajraloka, and of Ghary~a Vajravetali. This and the following verse concern the assembly of the twenty-eight isvarl (dbang-phyug-ma nyer-brgyad) on the outermost rings of the wrathful mar:t<;fala, who are collectively referred to as the 'emanational enactors of the four rites of enlightened activity'. Among these, the six yogin! from the east who enact the white rites of pacification (shar;nas zhi-ba ·; las-mdzad rna/- 'byor dbang-phyug drug) arc sometimes depicted holding a vajra in addition to their individual hand-emblems, indicating that they belong to the retinue of Vajra Heruka in the east. Among them, Manurak~asl in Ch. 5 is simply described as 'white' (dkar-mo) and inCh. I I as 'dark brown' (smug-nag). Also, inCh. 1 I, Brahmaryi is erroneously des<..:ribed as 'red-yellow' (dmar-se), Kaumari as solely red (dmar-mo), and Vai~ryavi as solely 'blue' (sngon-mo). Vajra is also known as Pit'lgala. See Ch. I 1, p. 265. The six yogin I from the south who enact the yellow rites of enrichment (/ho-nas rgyas-pa ·; las-mdzad rna/- 'byor dbang-phyug drug) are sometimes de pined holding a jewel in addition to their individual hand-emblems, indicating that they belong to the retinue of Ratna Heruka in the south. The six yogin I from the west who enact the red rites of subjugation (nub-11as dbang-gl las-mdzad mal- 'byor dbang-phyug drug) are sometimes depicted holding a lotus in addition to their individual hand-emblems, indicating that they belong to the retinue of Padma Heruka in the west. Among them, in Ch. I I, Ekac.lrir:ti is erroneously described as 'yellow' (ser-mo), Rudhiramadi as solely 'red' (dmar-mo), and Siddhikarl as solely 'green' (l;ang-klm). The Sanskrit identifications for Rudhiramadi, the consort of Mahabala (stabschen), Siddhikari, the consort of Vasurak~ita (nor-srung), and the rak~asi Ekadrar:ti (srin-mo) are derived from Longchen Rabjampa, GGFTC, p. I 12.6. The six yogin! from the north who enact the rites of v.;rath (byang-nas drag-po 'i las-mdzad mal- 'byor dbang-phyug drug) are sometimes depicted holding a crossed-vajra in addition to their individual hand-emblems, indicating that they belong to the retinue of Karma Heruka in the north. Among them, in Ch. 1 1, Agnayl and Cimury<;ii are described as solely 'red' (dmar-mo), Varahl as solely 'black' (nag-mo), and Varunaryl and Vayudevi as solely 'blue' (sngmzmo). Also, inCh. I 1 (Version B) Vayudcvi is depicted as 'snake-headed' instead of 'wolf-headed'. This verse concerns the four yogini who enact their emanational rites at"fhe outermost gates of the skull (sprul-pa'i las-mdzad dbang-phyug sgo-ma bzhi), and who complete the group of twenty-eight Isvari. Note that while in our text all four of these gatekeepers are generally referred to by the collecnve name VajrJ (rdo-r;e-ma), their distinctive names are found inCh. 14, pp. 3 7071, and in Longchcn Rabjampa, GGFTC, pp. 1127-2.8.

!'IOTES

2~!.

29.

30.

3 1.

3 2. 33· 34· 3 5.
36.

These are the fifty-eight wrathful deities, w1th the addition of ,\t!ahortara Hcruka and Krodhisvari. The three smeared sacraments (byug-pa'i rd~as gsum) of the charnel ground, 'ashes, blood and grease' (thai-chen rakta ~hag-gi zo-ris), indicate that they have subdued envy. The 'skim of moist hide and flayed tiger-skin' (ko-rlon gY.mg-g~hi st.zg-gz sh.mz-thabs) indicate that delusion, artachmenr and aversion are respectively subdued by the ten powers (dasabai..I), dcsireless compassion and wrathful compassion. The snakes indicate their subjugation of the live social cLlsses. For a description of the symbolism of the wrathful deities in general, secT. !'\orbu, The Small Golden Key, pp. 78-84. In addition to the live herukas (khrag- 'thung khro-bo'i tshogs), live krodhisvari (dbying-phyug khro-mo 'i tshogs), eight matara~, eight pis,\cT, twenty-eight Isvari (dbangphyuf.: mgo-brny..In tshogs), and four gatekeepers (sgo-ma bzhi) described in the previous verses, the wrathful mal)cJala also includes the eight great projcctresses (spor-byed chen-mo), who propel the consciousness of the deceased to higher rebirths, and who are enumerated individually in Ch. 6, pp. 108-9. Here 'fields' transbtes the Tibetan term khams ('sensory spectra') rather than skye-mched ('sensory activity fields'). This verse is derived from the Aspirational Prayer which Protects from Fear of the Intermediate States (Bar-do phrmzg-grol-gyi smon-lum), on which sec Ch. I2, pp. 314- I6. On the artainmcnt of buddha hood during the intermediate state of reality (chos-nyid b..Ir-do ), see below, Ch. II, pp. 2 26-3 2. Tib. Bur-do thos-grol. Sec below, Ch. I I, pp. 2I7-303. Tib. Zhi-khro ·, las-byang tshor-ba rang-grol. On this sadhana text, see Appendix One, p. 382. Tib. gS.zng-dhung rig-pu rang-grol. This is one of the empowerment texts related to the cycle of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities. Sec Appendix One. Tib. bsKong-bshags nyams-chags rang-grol. Sec below, Ch. 7, pp. I 13-50.

6 Natural Liberation of Negativity and Obscuration
I.
2.

3· 4· 5.

6. 7.

8.

Tib. Bar-do thos-~-:rol. Tib. brGya-phya~-: sd1g-sgnb rang-grol. Tib. Zab-chos zhi-khro dgongs-pa ra11g-gro/. A Sanskrit term, indicating obeisance or homage. The Delhi reprint of Bar-do thos-grol chen-mo includes an annotation to the effect that when generating the visuali!>ation of the ma•)9ala in front rather than prostrating to an already clearly visualised assembly, the words 'I bow down to such and such a buddha-body' (sku-/a phy,zg- 'tshal-lo) should be replaced by the words 'such and such a buddha-body is primordially and radiantly present' (sku-ni ye-nas gsa/). Tib. chos-kyi khams. Tib. mtshun- 'dzm. Here substannalism refers to the grasping at characteristics, having failed to understand that they lack inherent existence. DR here reads 'green-black' Uiang-nug), but see Ch. 5, p. 8 I, and Ch. I I, p. 264, where she is depicted as solely 'black'.

414
9·
I

NOTES

o.

11.

Note that Ulukamukhi is describt:d here as holding an iron hook (/cags-kyu), instead of a vajra, as inCh. 5, p. 8 3, and Ch. 11, p. 264. According ro GG i-=TC, p. 113 5, Sphora may also have a bear-head (dom-mgo). According to GGi-=TC, p. II35, Ghar:t!<l may also have a wolf-head

(spyang-mgo ).
12.

13.

14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.
20.

21. 22. 23.

Tib. Zhags- 'phen-mLl. Tib. mDung-tlmng 'phen-ma. Tib. sPor-byed dril- 'khrol-ma. Tib. sl'ur-byed khyzmg-thugs-ma. Tib. sPor-byed skar-mda' 'phen-mu. This is a reference ro the great mythological battle (gYul-chen) betwt:en the gods and antigods, on which sec Anugods in gloss ..uy. Tib. sPor-hyed rdo-rJc glog-phreng 'dzin-mu. Tib. sPor-byeJ glags-slhz rdeb-ma. Tib. sPor-byed ral-gri 'dzin-mu. VajrJ is more commonly known as Pi11gala (dga'-ba). See Ch. 11, p. 265. Sec Ch. 5, p. 86. DR reads 'green'. The number 1 10 comprises the verses dedicated to the Hundred Peaceful and Wrathful Deitie'i, with the addition of two verses dedicated to Mahottara Heruka and Krodhcsvari, as well as eight verses dt:dicated to tht: Projectresses

(SfJor-chen brg)'•ld).
24.

Tib. Na-r.1g bskang-hshags. A cclt:bratt:d treasure-doctrine (gter-chos) revealed during the thirteenth century by Guru Chowang, and included within his F.zght

Tr,msnzitted Precepts: Cmzszmmz.:Jtwn of All Secrets (bKa '-brgyad gsang-bu yongs-rdzogsl. On this text, seeK. Dowman (trans.), 'Emptying the Depths of Hell', in Flight of the Garuda, pp. 53-61; also D. Christensen (trans.), Nu-r,zg bskmzg-bshugs.

7 Natural Liberation through Acts of Confession
1.

2.

3.

4· 5. 6. 7·
!L

Tib. Zhi-khro 'i klong-bshags briod-p.l rang-grol. Tib. Zab-chus zhi-khru dgongs-pa rang-grol. The offerings and dt:dications of great magnitude attributed to the bodhis,lttva Samantabhadra are recounted in the Av.Jtart~sakaszUra. See T. Cleary (trans.), The flower Omament Scripture, pp. I 1 3 5 ff.; and P. Williams, MahJyiinu Buddhism, pp. 125-7. Tib. gnyzs-med lryung-chub-sems. i.e. the monastic vows of the priitimok~a (so-sur thar-pa) discipline, on which sec glossary. DR, p. 409, I. 2, reads: srub-la 'phyar-bus ... Here we follow the Varanasi reprint: 'phyor-lt~ gYe11g-has. The Delhi reprint reads: srog-la 'tshal-bas. In the context of the mar:t~ala of wrathful deities, the Buddha-body of Realit.y is represented by Mahottara Heruka. In the context of the maJ)~ala of wrathful deities, the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource (sambhogakiiya) is represented by the Five Herukas and their
LOn SOrtS.

'J.

The Four Pisaci situated 10 the cardmal directions of the wrathful assembly, n.uncly, Sif!lhamukhi, Vy<1ghrimukhi, S~galamukhi, and Svanamukhi, as their

~OTES

10.

1 1.

12.

r 3·

q.

1

5.

r 6.

17.
IlL

t

9·

20.
21.

22.

3. 24.
2

2

5.

26. 27.
2S.
29.

30.

names suggest, possess fangs, while those of the Intermediate directions: G~dhramukhi, Kankamukhi, Kakamukhi, and Ulukamukhi arc w1nged figures. Generally the Twenty-eight Isvarl are associated w1th the complete four rites or aspects of enllghtcned activity (las-bzhi) and not only abhiciira. DR, p. 4 1 2, I. 6, 'gugs- 'ching-sdom-dgyes. Version A misreads 'gyeJ for 'gyes, while Version B misreads 'plrying for 'ching and dgyes for 'gyes. Tib. sh.J-khr,lg mchod-p.1. This refers to the offering of the five meats and five nectars, on which see G. Dorjc, 'The Nyingma Interpretation of Commitment and Vow', in The Buddh1st forum, Vol. 2, pp. 71-95. Tib. ma-bJun srmg-bzhi. On this group of eleven peripheral <)Jkinls, who arc classed as protectors in the retinue of Sridevi, see Jigrne Lingpa, dP1.1l-chen 'Jus-pu. The wardens of the secret abodes (t1-ra gnus-nyu[/ g11as-nyul chc11-po) arc the protector deities associated wnh the sacred power-pLtces or pilgrim.1gc places of Tibet. Tib. rdo-rie rgy.;/-thahltlnb. Tib. hstan-pu 'i sgron-me is ht:rc U'>cd as an epithet of the assistant vajra-mastcr. NB DR, p. 416, reJds: ston-p.1'i sgrcm-ma. Tib. sgrol-ging hd,lg-pu is an epithet of Citipati, an awlytc of Yama, Lord of Death. i.e. the four female gatekeepers of the \\·r.nhful assembly, Vajratejasl, VajramoghJ, VajralokJ, and Vajravet.tlr, who 'summon and guide' ( 'gug- 'Jren pho-ny.J). The rampant cgohood whicl1 can result from improper application of Buddhist practKes, particularly the tantras, is exemplified by the archetypal demonic furm Rudra, who is compassiOnately 'liberated' by the wrathful dc1ties. An:ounts concerning the past lives of Rudra are to he found in the mDo dgongs-pa 'dus-p1.1, Chs. 22-31, l47·5·Iff.; in Yeshe Tshogyal, The Life and L1beration of P.1dmasambhava, Pt. I, pp. 26-47, and Longchcn Rabjampa, GGFTC, pp. IOS0-95· Here we follow the Delhi reprint: hyings. DR, p. 418, reads gYeng. Tib. byams-mgon thugs-rie-cl.ln, i.e. Vajrasattva, to whom this enrrcaty is made. lit. albugo (ling-tog). Tib. kzm-nus dum-po 'i ting-le. T1b. DR, pp. 42_;-4, gzung-'Jzm gny1s-su 'J::m-pi.l nyo11-re-mongsl ng-p1.1 ye-shes klrmg-Ju bshags-par hgyi. ;\;utc that Version A reads: yoJ-da11g medfJI.lr lta-hu nyon-re-mongsl rtug-ch,zd mcd-pu'i ye-sln:s klong-du bsh.Jgs. On the practices pertaining to th1s distinction, sec Longchen RabJampa, GGFTC, pp. <J00-'714. Tib. bh.Jg.J. Tih. )'i-dam {Jhy,zg-rgya. On the linking of the seals of the deities anJ the recitation of mantra, see glossary under Seals and Mantras. i.e. the secret name (gsang-mtshan) conferred by a vajra-mastcr in the course of an empowerment ceremony. Tih. mngon-rtogs. The principal Nyingma text elucidating the integration of the vinaya, bodhisattva, and mantra vows expressed in this verse is ~gan Parychen 's Ascert.Jinment of the Three Vows (sDom-gsum rnam-nges).

416

NOTES

3 1. Tib. sKongs-bshags nyams-cl1<zgs rang-grul. This text, which is included within the wider cycle of The Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: Natural Lzbcration [through Recognition] of Enlightened Intention, comprises both empowermems and generation-stage practices. See Appendix One. 32. According to the tradition of the treasure-doctrines (gter-chos), there arc four kinds of seal associated with the transmission of such teachings, namely: the seal of commitment (samayu-rg)'Ll), the seal of treasures (gter-rgya), the seal of conccalmem (sbas-rgya), and the seal of entrustment or succession (gtadrgya). See Dudjom Rinpoche, !'-iSTB, Vol. 2, p. 77·

8 Natural Liberation through Recognition of the Visual Indications and Signs of Death
Tib. 'Chi-ltas mtshan-ma rang-grol. The recognition of the signs and portents of impending death is also discussed in the context of Tibetan medicine. See Tibetan Medic..Jl Paintzngs, pp. 47-52, and pp. 203-8. 2. Tib. Zab-chos zhi-khro dgongs-pa rang-grol. 3· Tib. bar-do thos-pa rang-grol. See Ch. 11. 4· for a discussion on the Buddhist phenomenological analysis of the aggregate of form (nipaskandha), which constitutes the human body, see 1.. Pruden (trans.}, Ahhidharmakusahha~y..z'?'· Ch. 1, The Dharus, pp. 6 3ff. 5· Indications or symptoms of untimely death (dus-min 'chi-ha) may be treated by ritual purification, as recommended in this text, or by medical means, on which see Tibet..Jil Medical Paintings, p. 8 5. On the course of the lifespan principle within the body, see Tibetan Medical Paintilzgs, p. 39· 6. The ritual deception of death ('chi bslu-ba) is the subject of Ch. 9· It should be stressed that the specificity of the external signs of impending 7· death and the prognostications listed here are to be understood in the context of the spiritual practices outlined in other chapters of this cycle, since the examination cannot be undertaken in isolation from them. 8. Tib. 'chi-bdag lag-tu song-ba. Lord of Death is an epithet of Yama. 9· i.e. one calendar day or lunar day (tshes), comprising twenty-four hours. 10. Viral breath is an aspect of vital energy (rlung; Skt. t''iyu), on which see glossary under Vital Energy. 11. DR, Vol. 3, p. 181, I. 4, reads zhag 'ga' ('some days'}, but we have taken the present reading from the Delhi reprint. 1 2.. Fur an account of the examination of dreams from the perspective of Tibetan medicine, see Tzbetan Medical Paintings, pp. 49- p, and 20 5-8. 13. Tib. rgyal-pos srog-gcad. Here we follow the Delhi reprint (p. 438, I. 3). DR, p. 1 8 2, I. L, reads rgyal-po 'i srog-bc,1d. 14· Tib. b)•ung-chub mchog-tu sems-bsk·yed. See Ch. 1, pp. 14-15. 1 5· Tih. Jbang-gsum dam-tshig. See glossary under Four Empowerments acd Commitments. 1 6. Sec also Tiheta11 Medical Pamtlngs, pp. 5 r -2.; and for remote indications ot death discernible to the phys~~.:ian approa~hing the residence of a patient, ibid., pp. 47-8. !\'ore that DR, p. 186, I. r, reads gzungs for gzugs. 1 -;. i.e. rhe full-moon day of the lunar month.
I.

NOTES

8. 9· 2.0. 2. I.
I
I

2.2.

2.3. 2.4.
2 5. 2.6.

This mantra is that of the 'lord who subsumes the lifespan'. The other suitable hand-implements (phyag-mtshan) include the vajra and bell. The letter A is symbolic of emptiness (szlnyata). This cross-legged posture (rdo-rje skyil-krung) and folded hand-gesture of meditative cqu1poise (laK·P.J mn)·am-bzhag) arc both aspects of the seven-point posture of Vairocana (mam-snang chos-bdun), on which see glossary. Tib. hrtan-pa'i lha-dang bral-ba. Tib. spyi-gtsug bzlug-na. Our reading here follows the Delhi reprint (p. 450, I. 2.). DR, p. I 88, I. 6, has spyi-gtsug 'dug-na. Tib. gnas-lugs zah-mo 'z lta-ba. Tih. rlung-yum shor-ba. !\ore that OR (p. 191, I. 2.) and the Indian reprints all read 'six months' (zla-ba

drug).
2. 7.

For a discussion on the elaborate procedures for urinalysis in general, sec

Tibetun Medical Paintmgs, pp. 139-48, and 295-304.
2.8.

2.9. 30.

-~I.

3 2..

-~ 3.

34·
3 5·

3 6.

On th1s portent known as 'semng of the unchanging sun at the summit of !\fount Sumcru' (ri-r.Jb rtsc-I.J mi- 'gyur nyi-m.J nub), the method of ritually averring death is unspecified in Ch. 9· !\ore that the Delhi reprint has an annotation adding that: 'if, instead, there arc small circles of light, this portends that the subJeCt will fall ill'. The Delhi reprint has an annotation adding that: 'if, instead, there is a slight humming sound, this portends that the subject will fall ill'. On this portent known as 'rupturing of the Wish-granting Tree from the Summit of Mounr Sumeru' (ri-rab rtse-nas dpag-bsam IJon-shzng chag), the method of ritually averring death is unspecified inCh. 9· !\ore that the Delhi version has an annotation adding that: 'if, instead, there is a slight trace of evaporation, this portends that the subject will fall ill'. Yavati is more specifically identified as an acolyte of Mah<lk<lla, or as an aspect of Pehar. The Delhi version has an annotation adding that: 'if, instead, the tuft of hair stands up alone for a short time, this portends that one will fall ill'. On the posterior and pterion fontanelles subsumed in the phrase ltag-p.1'i hdud-sgo-dag, see Tibetan Medical Paintings, pp. 2.49-50. Tih. 'chi-ltas thor-bu. On this category of signs, which are also classified as 'sudden changes relating to death' (glo-bur rnam-gyur-gyi 'chi-ltas) within the T1betan medical tradnion, sec Tibet.Jn Medical Paintings, pp. 2.07-8. Sec Chapter 1 o for these practices. As stared in Tselc 1\:atsok Rangdrol, The Mirror of Mzndfulness, p. 56, the sequence may alter as far as the dissolution of the outer elements is concerned. At this juncture the secret sign of the impending luminosity appears like a mirage, and the subject's vision will hecomc unclear. On this dissolution of the earth clement into the water element, and its coincidence with the disintegration of the navel energy-centre of the body, sec Tsclc 1\:atsok Rangdrol, The Mrrror of Mmdfitlness, pp. 54-5. At this juncture the secret sign of rhc impending luminosity appears like a misry smoke; <1nd the subject's hearing will become unclear. On this dissolution of rhc water clement into the tire element, and irs coincidence with the disintegration of the heart energy-centre of the body, sec Tselc Narsok Rangdrol, The .\tzrrur of ,\fznd(umess, p. 55·

418
37·

NOTES

38.

39·

40.

41. 42.

43·

44·

45·

46.

4 7.

At th1s Juncture the secret sign of the impending luminosity appears like red firetl1es, and the subject's ability to smell will cease. The location of the body from which the warmth recedes indicates the place of subsequent rebirth, as indicated on pp. 177-9. On this dissolution of the fire element into the air element, and its coincidence with the disintegration of the throat energy-centre of the body, see Tsele )'.;atsok Rangdrol, The Mzrror of lvlindfulness, p. 55. At this juncture the secret sign of the impending luminosity appears like a flaming torch, and the subject's ability to taste will cease. On this dissolution of the wind clement into the space element or consCiousness, and its coincidence with the dismtegration of the sexual energy-centre of the body, see Tscle Natsok Rangdrol, The Mirror of Mmd/itlness, pp. 55-6. The five sensefaculties and the sensory spectra are also dissolved at this juncture. from this point onwards, death cannot be reversed. Note that in other texts of this genre, the descent of whiteness precedes the ascent of redness. However, Jigme Lingpa in his sKu-gsum zhmg-kh.mzs sbyong-smon follows the sequence outlined here, and according to Tsclc Natsok Rangdrol, op. cit., p. 57, it is uncertain whether the whiteness or redness will mamfest first. Tib. srog-rtsa. The so-called 'black life channel' (srog-rtsa nag-po) is identified with the aorta, in Tibetan medicine, while the 'white life-channel' (srog-rtsa dkar-po) is identified with the spinal cord. See Tibetan Medzcul P.1intmgs, pp. 191-2, and 197-8. On the signitic.mce of the syllables HI KA in the transference of comuousness ( 'pho-ba), see Ch. 10, pp. 203-4. On the dissolution of consciousness into inner radiance ( 'od-gsal; Skt. prabhJsvara) during the intermediate state of the moment of death ( 'chi-kha 'i bar-do), sec Ch. 1 1, pp. 22 7- 34· On the mother and child aspects of reality, otherwise known as the naturally occurring inner radiance of the ground and the cultivated inner radiance of the path, see Ch. 1 1, pp. 22 7- 34· The latter is the intrinsic awareness cultivated by meditators dunng their lifetime. The period following the cessation of the coarse outer breath (phyi-dbugs) and before the cessation of the subtle inner breath (11ang-dbugs), also known as the life-sustaining wind (srog- 'dzin-gyi rlung; Skt. prJ'!a), is that durmg wh1ch the vital energy and mind are drawn together into the central channel, causing ordinary beings to lapse into unconsciousness. On this distinction betwc:en inner breath and outer breath, see also Ch. 1 1, p. 228. The inner radiance of the path (/am-gyi 'od-gsal) is that experienced by practitioners and yogins through their spiritual practices prior to death. See glossary under Inner Radiance. T1b. g11od-sbym. Other texts suggest that this mode of rcbmh is indicated by the emission of consciousness from the nose. See Lati Rinpoche and J. Hopkins, Death, /ntermedzate State and Rebirth in Tzbetan Buddhism, p,'5 3; also A. Wayman, The Buddhzst Tantras, p. 141. On the term yak~a, see glossary. On the transference of consciousness ( 'pho-ba) through the crown fontanelle, anJ the .1ppear.1nce of serum at the crown of the head as an inJ1cation of success 111 this practice, see below, Ch. 10, pp. 203-4.

!'lOTES

Tib. sKu-gdung 'bur-ba'i rgyud. This text is one of the Seventeen Tantras of the Esoteric Instructional Class of the Grear Perfection (rdzogs-chen nzan-ngag sde'i rgyud bcu-bdun), and is contained in NGB, Vol. 3· 49· Tih. bTags-grol. This text forms rhe subject matter of Ch. q, pp. 347-79. 50. As explained in Ch. ro. 51. Tib. Bar-do thos-grol. This text is the subject matter of Ch. II, pp. 225-303. 52· Tib. 'Chi-ba bslu-ha. This text is the subject matter of Ch. 9, pp. r 84-9 5. 53· The presence of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities within the heart and the brain has already been explained in detail. See Ch. 5, pp. 67-88.
48.

9 Natural Liberation of Fear
r. Tib. 'Chi-bslu 'jigs-pa rang-grol. The.! Tengyur contains a number of ritual texts, similar to the present chapter, concerning the deception of death ( 'chi-ba bslu-ha; Skt. m~tyu~(hilpaka), including those by Tath.igatarak~ita (T 1702), Vaglsvarakirtl (T I748), and Ajiramitragupra (T 2839). A hybrid Sanskrit title Krodha amukho.1 bhela is also attributed to the present text. Tib. Zab-chos zhi-khro dgongs-pa rang-grol. The Varanasi reprint, p. 213, reads Vajrakum<lra (rdo-rje gzhon-nu). DR, p. 2.06, I. I, reads only gzhon-mt. Vajrakumara is the subject of this invocation, being rhe emhodiment of buddha-activity. The earliest extant literature on guidance through the intermediate states appears to have a strong association with this particular bodhisattva. Sec e.g. KJrJ~ujauyuhas!ltra, and M. Lalou, 'Chemins du mort dans lcs croyanccs de haute-asie', which mcludes a translation of an ancient Dunhuang manuscript entitled Expose du chemin du mort (gshi11-lam bslan-ba), where Avalokiresvara is referred to particularly as a deity who guides and rescues those propc:llcd towards hellish rehirths. On the course of the lifespan principle (tshe'i rtsa), subsuming the five elements, over a monthly cycle, and the location of the vulnerable points of the body in relation to it, sec Tibetan Medical Paintings, pp. 39-40. Tih. rlung-gi 'khor-lo. On the meditative stabilities related to the live clements, and the relationship between the live colours, the five clements, and the five seed-syllables, see Longchcn Rabjampa, GGFTC, pp. 619-20. These are the vowels (a-li) and consonants (ka-li) of the Sanskrit alphabet, for the symbolism of which see Longchen Rabjampa, GGFTC, pp. 5 54-99. The deities embodying the elements correspond to those of the Hindu pantheon, e.g. Pavana, who embodies the wind element, Agni who embodies the lire clement, Varuna who embodies the water element, and Visnu who embodies the earth ~lcmcnt. For the Buddhist perspective, sec Longch~n Rabjampa, GGfTC, pp. I I 24-8. YA~t is absorbed into Pavana, RA~ into Agni, LA~t into Vi~~u, and KHA~t into Varu~a. DR, p. 209, I. 3, adds an annotation, suggesting that these should include the hrcath of horses, elephants and buffaloes. DR, p. 209, I. 4, adds an annotation to the effect that the syllable RA~1 is inserted into the effigy's eyes, the syllable KIIA~t into its cars, the syllable LA~ into its tongue, the syllable Y A.~t into Hs nose, and the syllable E into its neck.

2..

3·

4·

5·

6.

7.

8.

9·
IO.
I 1.

42.0

NOTES

OR, p. 1.09, I. 6, adds that the effigy should be black when offered to male malevolent forces (bdud), red when oifered to martial haunting spirits (btsan) and hybrid serpentine haunting spirits (klu-btsun), yellow when offered to hybrid serpentine and plague-cau'iing spirits (k/u-gny.m) and malign goblins (the"u-rang), white when offered to the king spirits (rgyu/-po), and green when offered to the female malevolent forces (bdud-mo), rural divinities (yul-lhu), .md multicoloured when offered to earth-ogres (sa-srm). 13. Tih. ltas-ngan-t,')'i hya-sgrog. Feathers of the owl in partiwlar are deemed to he harbingers of 1ll-omens. 14. The sense organs are here consecrated with seed-syllables indicative of each of the five elemenrs in turn, heginnmg with LA~t, the seed-syllable of the earth elemenr. 15. The Heart-mantra of Dependent Origination (rten-'brel snyrng-po), which llberates the enduring continuum of phenomena and induces the appearance of multiplying relics ( 'phcl-gdwzg) and rainbow lights, is: YE DHAR~tA H ETU11..

PRARIIAVA IIETUN TE~A~t TATHAGATO HY AVADAT T£?A~I CA YO NIRODHO EVAM vAol MAIIA~RA:>.tANAII ('Whatever events arise from a cause, the TathJgata has t<Jld the caus~ th.ereof, and the great virruous ascetic has taught their ~..:essation as well'). See also Ch. I 4, p. 376; and S. Beyer, The Cult of

TJrJ, p. 146.
On the symbolism of the Sanskrit syllable A, indicative of emptiness, see GGrTC, pp. 5 59-63. This syllable is frequently utilised as a focal point for the meditations of calm abiding (s,mzutha), in which case It is visualised at the tip of the nose. There are recorded inst.HKes of the syllable adually mamfest1ng on the up of the nose of certain great meditation masters of the past. See e.g. the life of KumJrjdza in NSTB, pp. 56H-71.. 17. On the seed-syllable BHRO~t. the first of the mantras through which the mai)~ala of the peaceful de1ties is genera ted, specifically rcfernng to the ~..:reative visualisation of the celestial p.1laces of the deities, see Longchen Rahjampa, GGrTC, pp. 6H9-90. 1!L On the seed-syllable K~A, which is the final seed-syllable of the ma~9ala of the peaceful deities, specifically referring to Buddha Samamabhadra, see Longchen R.1bpmpa, GGFTC, p. 591. 19. The short syllable 110 ,~ has a contracted anusvara, in which the crescent and n.ida are subsumed in the bindu . .2.0. The syllable MA~ is that of the fen1.1le buddha M.imaki. See Longchen R.lbjampa, GGFTC, pp. 691-1. . .2.1. The syllable M 0 .~1 is that the female buddha Dhatvi5vari. See Longchen Rabjampa, GGFTC, p. 69r. 21.. T1b. rtsa gnyzd-lug. See Ch. I I, p. 228 . .2.3. On the d1verse divisiom of the Buddhist scriptures (gswzg-rub) from the !'\yingma pomt of VIeW, see Dudjom Rmpoche, NSTB, pp. n-87. 24. The rituals referred to here are somewhat unclear, but for the treatment of d1~eases pertaining to the five solid viscera and the six hollow viscera, ~e TdJct,m Medicull'amtmgs, pp. 101-2., and pp. 257-S. 2.5. The following series of signs of near death are observed in the urine specimen. Note that whereas here it is the urine scum (spris-m..I) that appears blue or red, inCh. 8, p. 170, these colours are attributed to the urine vapour (r/angs-pa). See
16.

NOTI:S

421

also the elaborate explanattons of urinalysis given in Tibetan Medical l'aintmgs, pp. 139-48, and pp. 295-304. 26. The combination of the five clements (khams-lnga) with the twelve animal year-signs is an important feature of elemental divination ( 'byung-rtsis), on which see G. Dorje, Tibetan Elemental Divinatzon Paintings, pp. 66-86. 27. The Delhi reprint adds an annotation to the effect that this is also applicable if the humming sound disappears intermittently. 28. At this point, the various versions of our text include the following paragraph: 'In cases when [one's shadow] is missing from the neck upwards, one should visu.1lise the syllable Y A~1 in the subject's heart, and gaze upwards as high as one can. [Death] will then be averted if one performs ablutions from the crown downwards with water [empowered by] mantras of retentton.' This observation appears to be misplaced, referring as it does to the analysis of the optically proJected shadow rather than the humming of the ears.

ro Natural Liberation through Recollection
I.

2.

-~·

4·

Tib. 'I'hu-ba dran-pa rang-gro/. Tib. rDzogs-rim bar-do drug-gi khrid-yig. This cycle has been translated into English by Alan Wallace. See Natural Liberation. Tib. Zab-clws zhi-khro dgongs-pa r.mg-grol. The six topics of the perfection stage (s,mzpannakrama) respcdivdy relate to the stx intermediate states summ<trised in Ch. 3· Among them, the yoga of consciousness transference relates ro the intermediate state of the ttme of dc.1th ('chz-kha'i b.u-do), on which see also Ch. I I , pp. 225-34. At this point an annotation in the text refers to the importance of this chapter as 'an oral tnstruction which is like the giving of a royal injunction' (rgyal-pu bka'-thcm

bskur-ba Ita-Im).
Tib. 'Chi-ltas mtshan-la rang-grol. See Ch. 8, pp. I 53-8 I. On the ritual deception of death ( 'chi-bslu), see above, Ch. 9, pp. 184-9 5. Tih. 'Chi-bslu '1igs-p.1 rang-gro/. This is the subject matter of Ch. 9 above. Consciousness transference may be taught in the context of general guidance (khrid-kyi dus), as in the case of the preliminary practices (sngon-'gro). Sec Paltrul Rinpoche, The Words of My Perfect Teacher, pp. 3 5 I -6 5; and Sonam T. Kazi (trans.), Kzm-::.ang La-may Zhal-lung, Pt. 3, pp. 49 3-5 I 6 . .:V1anuals of particular guidance on consciousness transference ( 'fJho-ba'i sgos-khrid) include the present chapter from Karma Lingpa 's Zhi-khro dgongs-pa ranggrol and Tsele 1\:atsok Rangdrol's The ;'vtirror of Mindfulness, pp. 65-73. 9. Tib. khrid kyz sngon 'gro. See above, Ch. 1. I o. Tib. sa-gnon-pa 'i phyag-rgya (Skt. bhztmyakrama~w), here identified with the 5. 6. 7· 8.

bhtlsparsamudra.
1 1.

12.

1 3.

On the association of these other orifices with specific modes of rehirrh, sec p. 214. On the crown or anterior fontanelle (tshangs-pa'i bu-ga), and its relationship to the central energy channel of the subtle body (avadhuti), sec Tibetan Medical Paintmgs, pp. 3 3-40 and pp. I 89-96. On the relation between the central channel and those of the Rasanj to its right

422

NOTES

14. 15. 16. 17. I 8. 19. 20.

21. 22.

2 3.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.
29.

30.

and the Lalana to its left, see also Longchen Rabjampa, GGFTC, pp. roo6 ff., and Tibetan Medical Paintings, pp. 3 3-4. Tib. khu-tshur. See Ch. 3, p. 33· This refers to the recitation of Ch. 11 of the present work. On these transformations, see Ch. 8, pp. 156-9 and 171-3. This reference is unidentified. Tib. Nyi-zla kha-sbyor. This text is contained in Vol. 4 of the Collected Tantras of the Nyingmapa (rNying-ma'i rgyud-'bum). The 'field of accumulated merits' (tshogs-bsags zhing), to whom offerings are made, comprises one's parents, invalids or other disadvantaged persons, spiritual teachers, monks, and bodhisattvas. Skt. sarm.zagamana. On the taking of refuge, see above, Ch. 1, pp. I 1- I 3; and also glossary. There are many diverse techniques of consc.iousness-transference within the Tibetan tradition, including those derived from The Six Doctrines of Naropa (Naro chos-drug), the Innermost Spirituality of Longchenpa (Kiong-chen snying-thig), and the present cycle. Tib. thos-grol. The words to be communicated in this context are contained below, Ch. 11, which includes descriptions of the three intermediate states of the time of death, reality, and rebirth. The intermediate state of reality (chosnyid bar-do) is also known as the intermediate state of inner radiance ('adgsa/), on which see Ch. I I, p. 227ff. just as there are outer, inner, and secret signs of impending death (see Ch. 8, pp. 15 5-71) and outer and inner signs of the efficacy of the mantras utilised in 'liberation by wearing' (see Ch. 14, passim), so here, in the context of the various types of consciousness-transference, there are 'outer' signs observable in the atmosphere, 'inner' signs observable on the body of the deceased, and 'secret' signs observable in the relics that emerge after death. On the appearance of seed-syllables among the cremated relics of great spiritual teachers, see e.g. Dudjom Rinpoche, NSTB, p. 564. The white syllable .A~r is the seed-syllable of Vajradhara, the azure syllable HO 1\:1 is that of Vajrasattva, and the red syllable HRII) is that of Avalokitesvara. See Longchen Rabjampa, GGFTC, Ch. 7, pp. 682-93. The five types of bone-relic (Tib. dung-rigs mam-pa-lnga), which appear following the cremation, are associated with the five seed-syllables of the five male budd has, and with five bodily constituents. See Ch. 14· On the appearance of cremation relics in the form of a deity's hand-implement (phyag-mtshan) or image (sku-'dra), see e.g. Dudjom Rinpoche, NSTB, pp. 572. Here the emergence of tluids from the left nostril rather than the crown fontanelle is an indication that the consciousness-transference has taken effect into the Buddha-body of Emanation rather than into the Buddha-bodies of Reality or Perfect Resource. On the appearance of such signs, see Ch. I4, passim; and for a recorded instance of the whole skull being left as a crematipn relic, sec Dudjom Rinpoche, NSTB, p. 572. Orgyan, i.e. an epithet of Padmasambhava. Tib. snd pa'i sgo zhes bya ba khams dang thig Ia dkar dmar 'gyu-ba'i lam. Tib. de-kho-na-nyid-kyi dam-tshig-dang sdom-pa. In general, all the commitments of the Vehicle of Indestructible Reality and all vows associated with

NOTES

pious attendants and bodhisattvas may be termed commitments and vows taken with respect to the nature of reality. More specifically, however, this refers to the four commitments taken by practitioners of the Great Perfection: nothingness, evenness, uniqueness, and spontaneity, on which see R. Barron (trans.), The Precious Treasury of the Way of Abiding. 31. Tib. btags-grol. See Ch. 14· 3 2. Tib. thos-grol. See Ch. I I.

I I

The Great Liberation by Hearing
Part One

Tib. Thos-grol chen-mo. Tib. Zab-chos zhi-khro dgongs-pa rang-grol. 3. Tib. khrid-kyi rim-pa. This refers to all the levels of instruction received during the course of a person's lifetime, including those based on the sutras and the tantras. The experiential cultivation of the 'great emptiness' (stong-pa chen-po) which the practitioner of Mahayoga enters into in the course of daily practice brings about a dissolution of normal conceptual consciousness into a non-dual, non-conceptual awareness. The signs which accompany the successful actualisation of this meditative process are identical to those which occur at the time of death. The resulting familiarity with the process of the dissolution of consciousness allows the practitioner, at the time of death, to pass through an accustomed process and thereby to enter the non-conceptual inner radiance without confusion and to rest in its nature, with stability. 4· See above, Ch. Io. 5. See above, Ch. 8. 6. Tib. bden-pa'i stabs. This refers to an invocation prayer evoking the power of the truth of the ultimate nature of mind and phenomena embodied in the meditational deities, the sacred writings, and the community of sincere practitioners. 7· This esoteric meditative process, which is divulged only to fully qualified practitioners, is described in supplementary texts relating to the present cycle, such as Guiding the Deceased to Higher Rebirths: The Natural Liberation of the Six Realms of Beings (Tshe- 'das gnas- 'dren 'gro-drug rang-grol). See Appendix One. 8. The belief in the notion of the continuity of consciousness creates a very different perspective among the bereaved within Buddhist communities. Although grief is not repressed, the family members and friends arc encouraged to support the consciousness of the deceased by being themselves strong in their spiritual practice and dedicating this effort to the deceased. Sympathy for the spiritual opportunities being presented to the deceased during and after the death process is strongly stressed. Clinging, attachment and extreme sorrow are discouraged, whilst creating an atmosphere of openness, compassion and acceptance of change is emphasised and highly valued. 9· On this interval following the cessation of outer respiration (phyi-dbugs) and preceding the cessation of inner respiration (nang-dbugs), see p. 228. ro. The injunction not to touch the body of the deceased extends from the moment
I.
2.

424

NOTES

11.

12.

I

3·

I4.

I

5·

I

6.

1 7·

when the cons~.:iousness enters the central channel until the vital energy leaves the body; a period of time which can be just a few moments or up to three days. This injunction is often repeated in the present text and stressed by Tibetan lamas who explain that touching the body draws the mindfulness of the individual to the place being touched. Since the point on the body from which the wnsciousness exits is related to the quality of the mental realm into whi~.:h it may enter, drawing the mindfulness by touching can be helpful or harmful. See above, Ch. 10, p. 214. Traditionally, every Tibetan household has a shrine which is the focus of the household's daily ritual and devotional activity. At the time of a bereavement various ancillary rituals are also performed together with the reading of this Gre.zt Liberatwn by Hearing. Often a tent is erected in the garden and a large altar laid out. There is much activity, involving both the family and the attending monks, in making the preparations for the rituals. The sense of bewilderment at the death of a loved one is Strongly tempered by the purposefulness in the activity directed at supporting and inspiring the consciousness of the deceased. These prayers are read to the dying person in order to inspire a calm and dignified approach to death. For the full text of the Aspirational Prayer Calling to the Buddhas and Bodhisattvas (or Assistance (Sangs-rgy,zs-dang byang-chub sems-dpa 'i-mams-/a ra-md,z' sbran-pa 'i smon-lam ); the Aspirational Prayer which Protects from fear of the Intermediate States (B..zr-do 'iigs-skyob-m,z'i smun-lam), and the Aspirational Prayer U'hich Rescues (rom the D..zngerous Pathw,zys of the Intermediate St,ztes (Bar-do 'phrang-sgrol-gyi smon-lam), see Ch. 12; and for the Root Verses of the Szx Intermediate States (Bar-Jo 'i rtsa-tshig), see above, Ch. 3· The attitude in which the dying person approaches death is regarded <15 the must essential fa~.:tor in ensuring the continued wellbemg of the individual. For the dying individual to cultivate an attitude of compassion towards others during the process of death is regarded as primary. Remaining fearless and fully aware of the processes of dying, whilst also being prepared to recognise the qualities of awareness which naturally arise during and after the moment of death, is strongly enwuraged. Tib. 'chi-kha'i bur-do-la 'od-gsul ngo-sprod-pa. This is the introduction to the radiance which arises immediately after the ceasing of respiration at the moment when the vital energies collect at the mid-pomt of the ~o:entral channel, close to the heart. See also above, Ch. 8, pp. I 73-7, and Ch. 10, pp. 205-9, where reference is also made to this intermediate state. Tib. chos-nyid bt~r-do-la 'od-gsa/11go-sproJ-pa. This is the introduction to the radiance experienced by the mental body of the deceased in the form of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities. See pp. 234-72; also Tsele :--.:atsok Rangdrol, The Mzrror of Mmd(ulness, pp. 77-102. Tib. srid·{Ja bar-do-la nmgal-sgo dgag-thubs bstan-pa. The final section of this chapter describes five profound methods for avoiding unwntrolled rebirth in an unfavourable realm. See pp. 28 5- 300; also Tsele Natsok Rangdrol The Mirror of Mindfulness, pp. 105-28. In this context, the advice is to invite to the bedside an individual who has followed the same meditational practices as the dying person. In this wnrext, the advice is to invite to the bedside an individual who has studied .md pradised within the same commentarial tradition.

NOTES

r8. i.e. the central energy channel of the body. 19. This period during which vital energy and consciousness arc united in the central channel is also described as that in which the 'inner breath' (nangdbugs) remains within the body. It is said to last approximately twenty minutes. 20. Tib. bar-do dang-po 'i 'od-gsal, i.e. the inner radiance which arises at the culmination of the intermediate state of the time of death is the first of three successive 'intermediate states' that occur after death and prior ro the rebirth process. They comprise the inner radiance of the ground, the inner radiance of the path, and the inner radiance of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities in the intermediate state of reality. These three phases arc not to be confused with the classical enumeration of the six intermediate states as described in Ch. 3 and in the glossary. 2 I. Throughout the death process and at each step in the reading of the Great Liberution by Hearing, the presiding lama should enter into those meditative states of awareness which the text describes and which the dying person is encouraged to cultivate. In this way, he serves as a support and anchor for the concentration of the dying and the deceased. 22. Tib. rtsa rba-rlahs rtsis-ha. Tibetan medicine describes diverse types of pulse which indicate impending death due to humoral imbalance, visceral failure and so forth. See Tibetan Medical Paintings, p. 137. On the procedures followed in pulse palpation, sec ibid., p. I 2 3. 2 3. Tib. gnyid-log rtsa-gnyis. The two carotid arteries 'which induce unconsciousness when pressed', are included among the body's most vulnerable points. See Tibetan Med1cal Pai11tings, pp. 33, 43· Pressure applied at the right moment is said to trap the vital energy and mind rogcther in the central channel, with no possibility of regression or reversal. Correct training in this procedure is of crucial importance, and it is obviously essential that the carotids arc not pressed until after the pulse has ceased. 24. On the crown or anterior fontanelle (Tib. tshangs-lmg; Skt. bruhmarandhra), which is the optimum point of exit for the consciousness of the dying individual, see Ch. 10, p. 214. 2 5. The period following the cessation of the coarse outer breath (phyi-dbugs) and before the cessation of the subtle inner breath (nang-dbugs), also known as the life-sustaining vital energy (Tib. srog- 'dzin-gyi rlung; Skt. prdl.l.J), is that during whi~:h the vital energy and mind arc drawn together into the central channel, causing ordinary beings to lapse into unconsciousness (shes-pa brgyul). This moment is also desGibcd in terms of the bla~:kncss induced by the merging of the white male and red female generative essences at the heart-centre of the central channel. See Ch. 8, p. 17 5. 26. The Tibetan biographical tradition cites many instances of great spiritual teachers who at the time of their demise enter into the prolonged experience of this intermediate state. 27. See Ch. ro, p. 203. 28. See Ch. 8, p. 17 3ff. An alternative description of this process is also given in medical texts. Sec Tibetan Medical Paintings, pp. 5 r- 2: 'Upon the sinking of the earth element into the water clement, the patient ceases to grasp the solidity of obJects. Upon the sinking of the water element into the fire clement, the sensory orifices dry up. Upon the sinking of the fire element into the wind

426

~OTES

29.

30.

3 I.

32..

33·

34·

3 5.

36.

37· 38.

'9·

clement, bodily heat disappears. Upon the sinking of the wind element into the space element, breathing stops. As far as the five sensory organs, born out of the five primordial elements, are concerned, the first to cease functioning is sight, then comes the ability to hear, followed by the senses of smell, taste and finally touch. Consequent on this tactile loss, life itself wanes; and all sensory functions &~.solve into the life-sustaining breath, which itself vanishes into consciousness, destined for future rebirth.' On the relationship between the various orifices from which serum is exuded and the realms inhabited by sentient beings, sec Ch. 10, p. 214; also A. Waym.1n, The Buddhist Tantras, Ch. 12, pp. I 39- ;o, whose account is based on the commentarialliterature of the Guhyasama;a Tantra. The harsh and bewildering experiences related to past actions (las-kyi 'khrulsnanJd are those manifestations of sound, lights and rays of light \vhich appear during the intermediate state of reality (chos-nyid bar-do), in contrast to the terrifying experiences related to Yama (gslmz-riel which occur Juring the intermediate state of rebirth (srid-pa'i bar-do). See p. 234ff and pp. 268-9. Smce the meditational deities are pure appearances inseparable from emptiness, they are said to 'appear and yet lack inherent existence' (snang-la rang-bzhin med-pa) and to be 'devoid of solid or corporeal forms' (gdos-bcas med-pa). See also Dudjom Rinpoche, NSTB, pp. I 23-7, 2.79-80; Longchen Rahjampo1, GG FTC, pp. 62.6-8 r. i.e. Avalokite5vara. On the risk of inferior rebirth (ngan-song) which confronts those who have broken their vows (sdom-pa shor-ba) and failed to mainto1in their basic commitments (rtsa-ha'i dam-tshig nyams), see Ch. 7; also Longchen Rabjampo1, GGFTC, pp. 1184-229. On this convergence of the mother and child aspects of reality (chos-nyidma-lm), which Jrc identified respectively with the inner radiance of the ground and the inner radiance of the path, the latter cultivated by the meditator during his or her lifetime, see also Ch. 8, pp. 176-7. The experiences of the 'mental body' (yzd-kyi Ius) during the intermediate stJtes of reality o1nd rebirth are described below in detail. See pp. 2.73-8;. The intermediate state of reality is here referred to as the 'third intermediate state' (bar-do gsum-pa) when it is enumerated following the two phases of inner radiance of the ground and path that arise during the intermediate state of the time of death ('chi-kha'i bar-do). Tib. Chos-nyid bar-do'i ngo-sprod chen-mo. For a synopsis of the classical enumerauon of the six categories of intermediate state: namely the intermediate state of the living or natural existence (rangb;::lmz skye-gnas-kyi lhzr-du); the intermediate state of dreams (rmi-lam b,zr-do); the intermedi3te state of meditative stability (ting-nge- 'dzin bsam-gtan-gyi lhzr-do ); the intermediate state of the time of death ( 'chi-kha 'i bar-do ); the intermediate Stolte of reality (chos-nyid bar-do); and the intermedio1te St3~ of consequent rebirth (lugs-'hyung srid-pa'i bar-do), see glossary. Tsele Natsok Rangdrol, The Mirror of Mindfulness, pp. 75-102, also discusses the diverse interpretations of the intermediate state of reality presented by the different ~~hools of Tibetan Buddhism. A~ stJtcJ above, p. 229, the intermediate state of the time of death is said to

l'OTE~

40.

4 I.

42.

43·

44·

4 5.

46.
47· >lB.

49·

50.

last up to three and a half days, so that those who have failed to recognise the inner radiances of the ground and path remain unconscious for the same period of time. It is on being aroused from that unconscious state that the visions of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities of the intermediate state of reality then arise. It is important to bear in mind that the use of the word 'day' in this context and those which follow is from the standpoint of the bereaved. From the perspective of the deceased, as Tsele Natsok Rangdol states, 'Few people, however, consider these to be actual solar days. Since they are ... only meditation Jays, understand that for ordinary people they do not appear for more than a short moment' (Mtrror of Mindfulness, p. I I 3 ). On the reversal of cyclic existence and of all its aspe~:ts of mundane consciousness and sense-perception through the practices of the Great Perfection, see NSTB, p. 340, and GGFTC, pp. 395-97, Iooi-5. The events which unfold in the course of the intermediate states of reality and rebirth are held, in the view of the presenr text, to endure approximately for forty-nine days. Note however that this period of forty-nine Jays is not said to be fixed. See Tsele Natsok Rangdrol, The Mirror of Mindfulness, p. 22. It is recognised that the nature of the appearances in the intermediate state of reality will vary according to the meditative tradition followed. Tsele Natsok Rangdrol (ibid., pp. 98- 1 oo) does emphasise, on the other hand, that the pure psycho-physical aggregates, elements, sense-organs, and so forth, will manifest as sounds, lights and rays. Tib. dlms-su thig-le brdal-ha'i zhing-khams. An epithet of the Akani~~ha­ Ghanavyiiha realm of Yairocana Buddha, on which sec glossary. Tib. Je-hzhin gshegs-pa'i 'od-zer chos-dbyings-kyi ye-shes zhes-bya-ba. This luminosity is called the 'light ray of the Tathagata' because Yairocana Buddha is said to preside over the Tathagata or Buddha family. On the compassionate unfolding of the great light rays of the tathagatas, see also Dudjom Rinpo~:he, NSTB, pp. 912-I3. Note that the text associates both the dull white light of the god-realms and the dull green light of the animal realms (seep. 25 3) with the propensities for delusi(m (gtz-mug) . .\lore generally, delusion is recognised as the primary dissonant mental state g1ving rise to birth among the animals, and pride as the primary dissonant mental state giving rise to birth among the gods. Note that pride is more generally asso~:iated with birth in the god realms, while it is attachment ( 'doJ-chags) or a combination of all five dissonant mental states that is said to generate birth as a human being. See above, Ch. 5. On the significaiKe in Atiyoga of the 'state of non-activity' (byar-med-kyi ngang), see above Ch. 4; also NSTB, pp. 33 5-7, 896-9 xo. Tib. ye-shes bzhi-sbyor-gyi snang-ba. This passage associates the white luminosity with the pristine cognition of reality's expanse and Yairo~:ana, and the blue light with the mirror-like pristine ~:ognition and Ak~obhya, reversing the earlier sequen~:e. On this distinction, see Longchcn Rabjampa, GGFTC, pp. 390-9 r. DR, Vol. 3, p. 77, I. 3, reads nang-du. Tib. mi-rtoR-Pa 'i ngang. Along with bliss and radiance, this 'non-conceptual state' is considered to be one of the three ~:oncomitanr experiences associated with the practice of the perfection stJgc (sampamzakrama). See Longchen Rabjampa, GGFTC, pp. 827-8.

NOTES

51. The green light associated with Amoghasiddhi is said not to arise until buddhaa~:uvities can be performed consequent on the attainment of perfe~o:t enlightenment. 52. This 'vision of the four pristine cognitions combined' (ye-shes bzhi-sbyor-gyi smmg-ba) is said to occur in relation ro the 'hollow passageway of Vajrasattva' (rdo-rje sems-dpa' khong-gseng-gi lam), a synonym for the central channel of the body, through which transference of consciousness ( 'pho-ba) is also effected. See Tselc Natsok Rangdrol, The Mirror of Mindfulness, p. 20. 53. Tib. rgyun-gyi ting-nge- 'dzi11; Skt. sroto 'nugatasamiidhi. 54· Tib. rig-pa /hun-grub chen-po'i sku. See glossary under Buddha-body. 55· On the wnflarion in this rexr of delusion (Skt. moha; Tib. gti-mug) with both the god-realm and the animal realm, see note 44· 56. On this class of faithful retainers (Tib. gi11g), who prore~:r rhe mal'_l~ala from impediments, see also Ch. 7, note 17.

Part Two
Tib. Khro-bo'i bar-do'i 'char-tshul bstan-pa bzhugs-so. See Ch. 14. There are many specific instances of these indications symbolic of passage ro the realm of the sky-farces (dag-pa mkha'-spyod) ar the rime of death, particularly in the context of the lineages of Ariyoga. Sec, for example, NSTB, p. 543 (the death of Bagom), p. 5 50 (the death of Dzeng Dharmabodhi), p. 56 I (the death of Zhangron), p. 563 (the death of Nyibum), p. 564 (the death of Guru Jober), p. 568 (the death of Melong Dorje), p. 572 (the death of KumJr<ldza), and p. 594 (the death of Longchenpa). For a more detailed explanation of these phenomena, see Ch. 14, pasmn. 4· Tib. gsang-lam, i.e. the path of the secret mantras (guhyamantra). 5· The full text of the Liberation by Wearing: Natural Liberation of the Psychophysical Aggregates (bTags-grol phung-po rang-grol) is contained below, Ch. 14, pp. 347-79. 6. The names of the four Female Gatekeepers of rhe wrathful assembly given here are identical to those given above, p. 247, in the context of rhe peaceful assembly. Their a~o:tual names are Vajratejasi in the cast, Vajramogha in the south, Vajralok<l in the west, and Vajravetali in the north, See, above, Ch. 5, p. 84. 7· The colours of Manurak~asi, Brahmar)i, Raudri, Vai~l)<lvi, and Kaumari here au:ord with the descriptions inCh. 5, p. 85, and Ch. 6, p. I ro. DR, p. 103, depicts them respectively as dark brown, reddish yellow, dark green, blue, and red. 8. DR, p. 103, !.4, reads phag-mgo (pig-headed), bur see Ch. 5, p. 8 5, and Ch. 6, p. I 10. 9· Here the colours of Santi, Am~ta, Saumi, and Daf.19I accord with the deSL:riptions inCh. 5, p. 85, and Ch. 6, p. 110. DR, p. 103, depicts them respe~o:t1vely as red, red, white, and dark green. 1 o. Here the colours of Bhak~asi and Rudhiramadi accord with the descriptions inCh. 5, p. 86, and Ch. 6, pp. 110-11. DR, p. 104, dcpi~o:rs them respectively as dark green and white.
1.

2. 3·

NOTES

Here the colours of Vayudevi, Agnlyi, Varahi, Vajra Camul)~i, and Varun<il)i accord with the descriptions inCh. 5, p. 86, and Ch. 6, p. 1 I 1. DR, pp. 1045, describes them respectively as blue, red, black, red, and blue. I 2. On this distinction, sec Longchcn Rabjampa, GGFTC, pp. 397ff., and ibid., Ch. I), pp. I075ff. 13· On the variations in the size of the buddha-body, see R. Kloetsli, Buddhist Cosmology, p. 69, and on the varying sizes of the physical bodies of living beings within the three world-systems, see the chart in ibid., p. 3 8. The same work has much information on the dimensions of Mount Sumcru and its status within the world-system. I 4· Mistaken views (/og-/t,z) arc principally those which disclaim an appropriate connection between virtuous causes and virtuous effects, and those which ascribe inherent existence in varying degrees to physical and mental phenomena.
I I.

Part Three
I.

2.

3·
4·

Tib. Z..1b-chos zhi-khro dgcmgs-pa r..Ing-grollas srid-pa bar-do 'i ngo-sfnod. Tib. Smzgs-rgyas-dang byang-clmb sems-dpa 'i-mams-/a ra-mda' sbran-pa 'i smon-lam. Sec Ch. 1 2, pp. 308-9. These verses arc found in Vo1subandhu's Treasury of the Abhidharmu, Ch. 3,
VV. I)-(4.

Tib. sngcm- 'byzmg. 5. Tib. h..1r-du 'j sn,mg-h..I yJd-kyi Ius. 6. Tib. dbung-po kun-tsh,mg thogs-med rgyu. 7· Vajraso1na, the 'indestructible scat' below the Bodhi Tree at present-day Bodh Gay<t, the place where the buddhas of the '3uspicious aeon' arc said to attain buddh.thood. 8. Tib. las-kyi rdzu- 'phrul slmgs-dang /dan. 9· The mir.Kulous ability b.1sed on past actions (/as-kyz rdzu- 't,hrul) is an intensified peru:ptuo1l state ansing from po1st habitual tendencies (vasanJ), quite distinct from the four supports for miraculous ability (~ddhipada) or enlightened attributes (gw.z.z) indicative of buddhahood, on which see NSTB, Vol. 2, p. I 38. IO. Tib. rzgs-mthzm lhu-mig d..1g-pas mthcmg. I I. This 'pure cl3irvoy31Kc' (lha-mig d,zg-p,z), like the miraculous ability based on past actions (1,15-kyz rdzzt- 'phrul) descrihcd above, is a product of the intensified perception of the mental body, enabling those destined to one form of rebirth to perceive beings of their own kind. As such, it is differentiated from the clairvoyance possessed by the gods inhabiting the world-systems of form (rupadhJtu) and desire (k.im..IdhJtu), but similar to that which is acquired in the course of meditation. 12. The carnivorous ogres (Tib. srin-po), a~o:ting as the executors of the unfailing law of cause and dfcct (las-kyi shu-za), are those who execute the rites of Yama (gshin-rJe'i las). Sec Ch. 13, pp. 321ff. I 3. The colours of the three precipices symbolic of the dissonant mental states (k/da)- white, red, and black- arc also respectively associated with the three enlightened families (rigs-gsum) through which they arc purified, i.e. those of

430

NOTES

Ak~obhya, who is the natural purity of aversion, Amitabha, who is the natural

16.

17.

!8.

19.
20.

21.

22..

2J. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28.

purity of attachment, and Vairocana, who is the natural purity of delusion. Sec Ch. 5, p. 97· This sentence is omitted in DR, Vol. 3, f. 125, I. 1. On the expression lha11-cig skyes-pa'i lha, here rendered as 'innate good conscience', and the expression lhan-cig skyes-pa'i 'dre, rendered here as 'innate bad conscience' sec also Ch. 13, pp. 3 2 Iff. On the 'mirror of past actions' (ias-kyi me-long) in which Yama Dharmar<lja is said to view the virtuous and non-virtuous actions of the deceased, sec below, Ch. 13, pp. 32.1-2. The 'bull-headed Raksa' (rag-sha glang-mgo) is the name of one of the acolytes of Yarna Dharmaraja: Sec Ch. q, pp. 321ff. See glossary. for the Nyingma interpretation of the Buddha-body of Essentiality (rzgo-bo-nyid-kyi sku; Skt. suahhavikakiiya), which some sources regard as the 'fourth' buddha-body, sec Dudjom Rinpochc, NSTB, pp. 191ff. On the significance of the 'name empowerment' (ming-gi dbang), sec glossary under Four Empowcrmcnts. The following verses derive from the Aspiraticmal Prayer which Protects from fear of the Intermediate States (Bar-do'i 'jigs-skyohs smon-lam). Sec below, Ch. 12, pp. 314-15. Those cxpcriem.:ing the sensation of moving upwards (gyen-/a 'gro-ba) have an affinity with rebirth in the god-realms, those moving horizontally ('ph red-/a 'gro-ba) have an affinity with the human realms, while those moving downwards (mgo mtlmr-la !Jrten-nas 'gro-ba) have an affinity with the hells, anguished spirits and animals. See e.g. Longchcn Rabjampa, GGFTC, pp. 493-4· On these verses from the Root Verses of the Six l11termediate States (Bar-do drug-gi rtsa-tshig), sec Ch. J, pp. 33-4. Tib. bdag srid-pa bar-do 'char-dus 'dir. Tib. mdwz-pa rtse-gcig sems-la hzung-bya. Tib. hzang-po /as-kyi 'pino-la narz-gyis mthud. Tib. nmga/-sgo hkag-nas ru-log dran-par byal sflying-rus dag-snang dgos-pa'i

dus gcig yin.
Tib. hla-ma yah-yum. On the practices pertaining to the purification of the four modes of birth (skye-gnas rigs bzhi; Skt. c'lturycmi), namely: oviparous birth (sgo-nga-nas skye-ha; Skt. a'!cf•zia), viviparous birth (mngal-nas skye-ha; Skt. jarayuja), supernormal birth (hrdzus-te skye-ha; Skt. ufJapJduka), and birth from warmth and moisture (drod-sher-las skye-ha; Skt. san:zsvedaja), sec Dudjom Rinpoche, NSTB, p. 279. Note that the instructions given in our text at this juncture refer only to first two categories. The clotting of the embryo (mtr-nur-po; Skt. kala/a) and the oval formation of the embryo (mer-mer-po; Skt. arhuda) are the first two of the so-called five stages of embryonic development (mngal-gyi gnas-skabs /nga). For a more detailed, though slightly different, explanation, sec Tibetan Medical Pazfitlngs, pp. 25-6 and 181-2.. Sec Ch. J, p. 34· Tib. bden-med sgyu-ma !ta-bu gdams-ngag.

29.

JO.
3T.

NOTES

43I

3 2. Tib. 'od-gsal sgoms-nas mngal-sgo 'gag. 33· On this description of the mind resting in its natural state, which derives from the esoteric instructions of the Great Perfection on Cutting through Resistance (rdzogs-chen khregs-chod), see Ch. 4· 34· Tib. mngal-sgo 'dam-pa'i gdams-ngag zab-nw. 3 5· On the meditative stabilities (samadhi) or meditative concentrations (dhyana) which give rise to birth in the world-system of form (rupadhatu), see the chart in NSTB, pp. 14- I 5; and for a detailed discussion, see also L. Pruden (trans.), Abhidharmakosabha~yulfl, Ch. 3, The World, pp. 365-495. 3 6. On the transference of consciousness to the pure buddha fields (dag-pa sangsrgyas-kyi zhing-du 'pho-ba), see Ch. 10. 37. For a description of such consecration of the womb, see the life of Sakyamuni Buddha in Dudjom Rinpoche, NSTB, p. 416; also GGFTC, p. 474· 3 8. Sangs-rgyas-dang byang-chub sems-dpa-rnams-la ra-mdar spran-fJa 'i smonlam. See below, Ch. 12, pp. 308-9. 39· For the text of the Root Verses of the Six Intermediate States (Bar-do dmg-gi rtsa-tshig), sec above, Ch. 3, pp. 3 2-4; and for that of the Aspirational Prayer which Rescues from the Dangerous Pathways of the Intermediate States (Bar-do 'phrang-sgrol-gyi smon-lam), see below, Ch. 12, pp. 3 ro- I 3· 40. For the full text of the Liberation by Wearing: Natural Liberation of Psychophysical Aggregates (bTags-grol phung-po rang-grol), see below, Ch. q; and for that of the Spiritual Practice: Natural Liberation of Habitual Tendencies (Chos-spyod hag-chags rang-groi), see above, Ch. 5·

12
r.
2.

Aspirational Prayers

3· 4· 5.

6. 7.

Tib. Sangs-rgyas-dang byang-chub sems-dpa' rnams-la ra-mdar spran-pa'i smon-lam. Or she, as appropriate. Tib. Bar-do 'phrang-sgrol-gyi smon-lam. DR, pp. 320-21, inserts these verses after those dedicated to Amoghasiddhi. This mantra, missing in DR, p. 3 2 I, I. 2, is inserted on the basis of its inclusion in the Delhi and Yaranasi reprints. Tib. Bar-do 'i smon-lam 'jigs-skyobs-ma. As this point the text inserts the following couplet, which has apparently been mis-transcribed out of context from the previous aspirational prayer:

May the fields of the five elements not rise up as a hostile force. May I see them as the fields of the five buddhas.
8. An allusion to the beguiling prophecies of Mara, who sought to deceive Sakyamuni at the time of his attainment of buddhahood.

432

NOTES

13 A Masked Drama
Part One
1.

2.

3·

4·

5.

6. 7· 8.
9· 10. I r. I 2..
1).

14· 1 5· 16. 17. Ill.

1 9·

20.

21.

22.. 2.J. 2.4.

Tib. Srid-pa har-dn 'i ngo-sprod dge-sdig rang-gzugs ston-pa 'i gdams-pa srid-pa har-do rang-grol. On the variant forms of the title, sec Appendix One. Tib. Zah-chos zhi-khro dgongs-pa rang-grol. Tib. Padma zhi-khro 'i har-do thos-grol. On the cycles of gter-ma discovered by Karma Lingpa, and the various texts concerning empowerment (dbanghskur) and introduction (ngo-sprod) contained within them, see above, 'A Brief Literary History', pp. xxxvi-xlviii, and Appendix One. Here, the inrermcdiate state of reality (chos-nyid har-do) is described as such because the luminosities and the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities are directly seen, offering the potential for immediate liberation. Although the introduction to the intermedi~te state of rebirth (srid-pa'i bar-do) has already been given (see Ch. II, pp. 273-303), the drama presented here functions as a light-hearted didactic supplement to the previous introduction, and is directed specifically at the living rather than the deceased. The acolytes of Yama include the Ox-headed Rak~a Demon (Rak~a glang-mgo). Tib. 'Byung-po spre'u mgo. The breis the standard Tibetan unit of dry measure, twenty of which equal one khal. The sr..mg is the standard unit of weight measurement. Tib. Dur phag-mgo. Tib. sDug-pa sbrul-mgo. Tib. gTum-po dom-mgo. Tib. srNgam-pa seng-mgo. Tib. 'Dab-chags khyung-mgo. Tib. /han-cig skyes-pa'i /ha. See also Ch. 1 r, p. 2.79. Tib. /han-gcig skyes-pa'i 'dre. See also Ch. 1 I, p. 2.79. Tib. dPal-skyes. Tib. dMyal-ba 'hum. On the outcaste (cm_ufiila; Tib. rigs-ngan gdol-pa) community, traditionally excluded from Indian society for occupational reasons, see A. L. Basham, The Wonder That Was India, pp. 145-7. The four classes of ancient Indian society comprise: the priestly class (brahma~zm,ar'!a); the princely class (k~atriyavar~za); the mercantile class (vaisyavan.za); and the labouring class (siidravar'!a). See A. L. Basham, The Wonder That Was India, pp. 138-45. On the currency of such materialistic and nihilistic philosophical views in ancient India, see Dudjom Rinpochc, NSTB, pp. 66-7; and see A. L. Basham, The Wonder That Was India, pp. 298-300. Tamralipti (zangs-gling) is identified with modern Tamluk on the Bengal q>ast. See NSTB, p. 455· Tib. shan-pu khri-dpon; also translatable as 'myriarch of butchers'. Tib. slum-mo dpal-skyid. The year of the water pig is the last in the cycle of sixty years, according to

NOTES

433

2

5.

26. 27.

28. 29. 30. 3 r. 32· 3 3.

the calendrical system of elemental divination ( 'byung-rtsis), for which reason it will create a 'fin de siecle' notion in the minds of the audience. Kaman1pa in Assam is revered as one of the twenty-four sacred abodes of tantric Buddhist India. See NSTB, pp. 472 and 501. Tib. rje-rigs; Skt. vaisya. See above, note 19. Tib. rDo-rje gcod-pa (Vajracchedika, T 16). This satra is one of the best known of the shorter J>rajnaparamita texts. Its Chinese version is said to be the world's oldest extant printed book. See Ch. 12, pp. 308-9. See Ch. II, pp. 285-300. See Ch. 10. See glossary under Six-syllable Mantra. Tib. dGe-sdig rang-gzugs ston-pa'i gdams-pa {'am me-long} srid-pa [bar-doj rang-grol. Skt. subha'!z bhavantu.

Part Two
I.

2.

3· 4·

5·
6.

Tib. Srid-pa'i bar-do'i ngo-sprod dge-sdig rang-gzugs ston-pa'i lhan-thabs dbyangs-snyan lha 'i ga~uji. Tib. Zab-chos zhi-khro dgongs-pa rang-grol. See pp. 326-8. The mandala of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities would be constructed in two or three. dimensions for the performance of this drama and the concomitant empowerment ceremonies. Seep. 333· On the significance of the 'mar:tc:lala of spiralling rainbow lights' (Tib. 'ja'-'od 'khyil-ba'i dkyil-'khor) for practitioners of the All-surpassing Realisation (thod-rgal) meditations of Atiyoga, see Dudjom Rinpoche, NSTB, pp. 337-

43·
7· 8.
9·

i.e. Namka Chokyi Gyelpo, the spiritual teacher of Gyarawa Namka Chokyi Gyatso, who composed this supplement. See Ch. 5, pp. 67ff. Tib. zang-thal. This expression indicates success in consciousness-transference or the direct realisation of inner radiance at death. See above, Ch. ro.

14 Liberation by Wearing
I.

2. 3· 4·

Tib. bTags-grol phung-po rang-grol-gyi don-bsdus. Tib. Zab-chos zhi-khro dgongs-pa rang-grol. O¥ Al;l HO¥ are the essential mantras which liberate mundane body, speech, and mind in primordial purity. This is the naturally resonant mantra of the Buddha Samantabhadra, written in the c:lakir:ti script of O<;lc:liyana, in the form of a vajra-song. The c:lakir:ti script appears to be only remotely related to Sanskrit. The following interpretation of these syllables derives from the Tantra of the Coalescence of Sun and Moon

434

NOTES
(Nyi-zla kha-sbyor-gyi rgyud, sDe-dge NGB, Vol. 4, p. 119a). for variant readings of the mantras, see also 1\;amkhai Norbu, The Dzogchcn Ritu,zl Practices, pp. 1 3 2-6; and for irs intonation, ibid., pp. 90-1. Following the rantra, the syllables are interpreted by Namkhai Norbu as follows: From the very beginning (EMA ), intrinsic awareness has never been born, nor will it ever be born (KIRI KIRI). Self-arisen, it has never been interrupted (MAFA), nor will it ever be interrupted (BHALIBIIALI). Since it is total vision, it has never been clarified, nor will it ever be clarified (sAMITASURUSURU). Being omnipresent, it has never been constructed, nor will it ever be constructed ( KuNoHALIMASUMASU). Being unique it is perfectly realised in space through the methods of the four signs (EKARI LISUBHASTAYE). It is naruralliberation into the great expanse and ir is supreme bliss (CAKIRABIIULJTA). Since it is the great expanse, it is habituated to supreme delight (CAYESAMUNTA CARYASUGHAYE). Relaxing the tension of this portion, which is relative existence, intrinsic awareness generates everything (BHITISANABIIYAGHULIYE). And rhus one transfers directly into the great inner radiance (SAKARIDIIUKANI). Brilliant and wondrous, this light radiates (MATARIBHETANA), totally transcending everything, and it eliminates all errors (PARALIIIISANA). In a state of being just as it is, it is free from all conceptions (MAKIIARTEKELANA). Being perfect, it is like the light of the moon (SAMBIIURATA MAIKACARATAMBA). Like the sunlight, it is luminous (sURYAGIIATARAYE BASHANA). It is like a jewel, a mountain, a many-petalled lotus (RANABHITI SAGHUTII'AYA). It is the great resonance which has never been sounded, and never will be sounded (GHURAGHURAI'AGAKIIARANALA~1). It is the primordial state which has never been created and never will be created (NARANARAYI THARAPA"fLA~t). It is the great enlightened mind which was never adorned and never wdl be adorned (SIRNASIRNABHESARASPALA~1). Self-originated and perfect, it will never become enlightened (BUDDHABUDDIIA CHISASAGIIELA~t). Ten concluding syllables are focal points of bodily energy (SASA '!-~ ~~ II !\.tA:.tA), while the other concluding syllahles arc associated with the buddhJ-bodit~s (RARA LAHA A). This mantra in the form of a vajra-song is included in the Tantra of the Coalescence of S1111 and Moon (Nyi-zla kha-sbyor-gyi rgyud, sDe-dge NCB, Vol. 4, pp. I I l.)a-b). As before, it is written in the 9aki!)l script of 09~iyana. The main verses are preceded by 0~1 A':' HO~t and concluded by the ten syllables of bodily energy (SASA ~~ q. 11 MAMA), and those indicati\'e of buddha-body (RARA). See Namkhai Norbu, The Dwgchen Ritual Practices, pp. I 32-6. These twenty-five mantras which follow are again rendered in the 9akir)l language of 099iyana, as distinct from Sanskrit. Tib. phyir mi-ldog-pa'i sa. Tib. nyams-gong 'phel-ba'i sn.zng-ba. Tib. rig-pa'i tshad-pheb-kyi sn,mg-ba. Tib. 1zgo-bo rang-bzhin thugs-rjer grol. Tib. btags-cing dlmgs-la sleb-pa'i tshad grol. The Delhi reprint (p. 22 5) comments that each of these preceding mantras encapsulates the natural sound of reality (chos-nyid rang-sgra) and is capable of conferring liberation. As such, these mantras are contrasted with the viJya-

5.

6.
7·

8. 9·
10.
11.

12.

!'iOTES

435

I

3.

I4.
I

5.

I6. 17.
I

mantra and dhJru'}im.mtra. See Namkhai Norbu, The Dzogchen Ritual Practices, pp. 128ff. From this point onwards, the mantras are rendered in Sanskrit. On the 'hundred enlightened families of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities' (zhi-klno rigs-brgya), see Appendix Two. As in all the verses that follow, these events occur when the mantra circle is worn at the time of death. The subtle wheel of vibrant mantra letters, vowels and consonants, from which the seed-syllables of the various deities are formed. See GGFTC, Ch. 4, pp. 544-74· The text (p. 265, I. 3-4) reads 'blue' at this juncture. The Varanasi reprint gives the alternative mantra for Maiijusri: vAGISVARI
MU¥ SRI SVAHA.

8.

19. 20.
21.

22.

23.

24.

2

5.

.z.6.

27.

28.

29.

The abridged version of this text suggests that subtle relics rather than rainbow lights will appear at this juncture, in conformity with the opening verse of this section. For Narti, the alternative form 'Naivedya' (Tib. Zhal-zos-ma) is also found. Here substantialism (mtshan- 'dzin) refers to the grasping at characteristics, having failed to understand that they lack inherent existence. This verse is omitted in our text, but found in the abridged version. For a more detailed explanation of the above mantras of the Forty-two Peaceful Deities, see Longchen Rabjampa, GGFTC, pp. 690-96. The text docs not add significant derail to the description of the mantras of the Twenry-cight lsvari. The actual mantras for this series are reproduced according to rDor-rJe me-long, Peking Kangyur, Vol. 10, p. 20; but with the Sanskrit corrected in accordance with GGFTC, pp. I 124-8. This verse is omitted in our text, but found in the abridged version. For a more detailed explanation of the above mantras of the sixty wrathful deities, including a number of variants, see Longchen Rabjampa, GGFTC, pp. 114456. On the nature of these six syllables, which are associated with the six realms of existence according to the tradition of the Innermost Spirituality (snyingthig), see Namkhai Norbu, The Dzogchcn Ritual Practices, p. 123 . On the Hundred-syllable Mantra of Vajrasattva, see glossary. On the breaches of rhe commitments, which it rectifies, see above, Ch. 7; and on the negativity and obscurarions, which it purifies, see Ch. 1 and Ch. 6. On this mantra, generally known as the Heart-mantra of Dependent Origination, see glossary. Tib. mgo-'jug ma-log. Here this refers to the importance of folding the paper so that the heads and tails of the various letters are not reverted or wrongly positioned. The booklet is then inserted within a golden casket, also known as legs- 'bam, that may be tied in a top-knot on the yogin's head or worn around the neck.

Bibliography

For abbreviations used occasionally here, see pp. 40 5-6.

Section One: Canonical Texts
a) Anthologies
Kangyur (Tib: bKa'-'gyur; Eng: Collected Translations of the Buddha's Teachings). Several editions are extant including the authoritative Derge xylographic edition in I03 vols. rNying-ma'i rgyud- 'bum (Eng: Collected Tantras of the Nyingmapa). Several manuscript versions are extant, but only one xylographic edition at Derge in 26 vols.

b) Sutras (mdo-sde)
(Tib: mDo-sde phal-po-che; Eng: Satra of the Great Bounteousness of the Buddhas). T 44, MTfWL I97, translated by T. Cleary, The Flower Ornament Scripture, 3 vols. Boulder: Shambhala, 1984 onwards. Kara~ujavyuhusatra (Tib: mDo-sde za-ma-tog; Eng: Satra of the Cornucopia of Avalokitesvara's Attributes), ed. P. L. Vaidya, Buddhist Sanskrit Texts, 17 ( 1961). T 116, MTIWL 90. LankavataraszUra (Tib: mDo-sde lankar gshegs-pa; Eng: Satra of the Descent to Lmikd), ed. P. L. Vaidya, Buddhist Sanskrit Texts 3 (1963). T 107, translated by D. T. Suzuki, London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, I932, 1956, etc. Prajtidparamita (Tib: Sher phyin, Eng: Transcendental Perfection of Discriminative Awareness): a collective name for a whole genre of siHras, including the three longest versions in Ioo,ooo sections (T 8), 25,000 sections (T 9) and 8,ooo sections (T 1 2). See MTfWL 208, I 54 and 222 respectively. Extensively translated by E. Conze. Ratnaku(a (Tib: dKon-mchog brtsegs-p,l; Eng: Mound of Precious Gems). J 459 3, MTTWL I 2.2.. Extensive selections are contained in G. C. C. Chang, A Treasury of MaiJLiyana Satras: Selections from the Maharatnakara. Pennsylvania: PennsylvJnia State University Press, 1983. S,mdlmzirmor.:anasutra (Tib: dGongs-pa nges-par 'grel-pa theg-pa chen-po 'i mdo; Eng: Satra of the Unravelling of Enlzghtened Intention). T Io6, MTIWL I97·
Avata~sakasutra

BIBLIOGRAI'HY

437

Partial translation in John Powers, jnanagarbha's Commentary on the Samdhinirmocana Sutra. TJth.igatJgarbhasfttra (Tib: De-bzhin gshegs-pa'i snymg-po 'i mdo; Eng: SzUra of the Nucleus of the Tathagata). T 258, MTTWL 23r. VajrJcchedika (Tib: rDo-rje gcod-pa; Eng: Diamond Cutter), ed. P. L. Vaidya, Buddhist Sanskrit Texts I7 (1961), T I6, translated and edited by E. Conzc, Serie Orientale Roma 13 (1957). Retranslated in Red Pine, Diamond Sutra, r--:ew York: Counterpoint, 200 I.

c) Tantras

Buddhasamayuga (Tib: Sangs-rgyas mnyam-sbyor-gi rgyud; Eng: Tantra of Union in Equilibrium with the Buddhas). T 366-7, Dergc NGB Vols. 11-12. Guhyagarbha Tantra (Tib: rGyud gsang-ba'i snying-po; Eng: Tantra of the Secret Nucleus). T 832, Dergc NGB Vol. 9, ed. and translated in G. Dorje, GGITC, 1987. GuhyasamdJa Tantra (Tib: rGyud gsang-ba 'dus-pa; Eng: Tantra of the Secret Assembly), ed. S. Bagchi, Buddhist Sanskrit Texts 9 ( 196 5 ), ed. B. Bhattacharya, Gaekwad's Oriental Series, 53 ( 1 967). T 442-3, Derge NGB Vol. I 2. Translated by F. fremanrle in A Critical Study of the GuhayasamdJa Tantra, Unpublished PhD thesis no. 774 271989, University of London. Kun-byed rgyal-po'i rgyud (Eng: Tantra of the All-accomplishing King). T 828, Derge NGB Vol. 5· Translated in E. K. Neumaier-Dargyay, Sovereign All-creating Mind, Albany: SUNY ( 1992). mDo dgongs-pa 'dus-pa (Eng: Szura Which Gathers All Intentions). T 829, Derge NGB Vol. 7· Nyi-zla kha-sbyor (Eng: Tamra of the Coalescence of Sun and Momz). Derge NGB Vol. 4· rDo-rje sems-dpa' sgyu-'phrul me-long (Eng: Tantra of the Mirror of the Magical Net of Vajrasattua). Derge NGB Vol. I I. Sarz;adurgatiparisodhJnJtantra (Tib: Ngan-song sbyong-rgyud; Eng: Tantra of the Purification of the Lower Re.;lms). T 48 3, 4 8 5, ed. and translated T. Skorupski in The Sarvadurgatiparisodhana Tantra: Elimmation of All Evil Destinies, Motilal Banarsidas, 19 8 3. sKu-gdung 'bar-ba'i rgyud (Eng: Ta11tr.1 of the Cremation of Corpses). Derge NGB Vol. 3·

Section Two: Commentarial Literature
a) Anthologies
Tengyur (Tib: bsTarz-'gyur; Eng: Collected Translations of the Classical Treatises). Again there are several extant versions, including the authoritative Derge xylographic edition in 213 vols. rSpng-ma'i bka'-ma (Eng: Collected Teachings of the Nyingmapa). The most extensive anthology of Nyingma commenrarial literature, edited by Khenpo Jam yang at Karok (I 999) in 1 20 vols.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

b) Commentaries of In die Origin
Ajitamitragupta, 'Chi slu-ba'i gdums-pa (Eng: Teachings 011 the Rituul Deceptio1l of Death). T 28 39· Mairrcya, Ahhisamayd/a1!1kdra (Tib: mNgo11-rtogs rgyan; Eng: Omammt of Emergent Realisatzon). T 3786, MTTWL 2-5. On this work see also Trangu Rinpoche, Onz,mzent of Clear Realization, Auckland: Zhyisil Chokyi Ghatsal Publications, 2004, and Lati Rinbochay et a/., Meditative States i11 Tzbetan Buddhism, London: Wisdom, 1982. Nagarjuna, PraJ1iiindmumulamadhyamakakarikd (Tib: dBu-ma rtsa-ba 'i tshig-le'ur byas-pa shes-rah ces-bya-ba; Eng: Root Stanzas of the Madhyamaka e11titled Discrmunative Awareness), ed. P. L. Vaidya, Buddhist Sanskrit Texts zo ( 1960). T 382.h translated in F. J. Streng, Emptiness: A Study in Religious Meuning, Nashville/:--.lew York: Abingdon, 1967, and by K. Kalupahana, MalamadhyamakakJrikJs, Albany: SU.:--.;Y, 1986. Santarak~ita, Tattuasa1!1graha (Tib: De-nyid hsdus-pa; Eng: Compendium of Topics). T 4266, ed. D. Shastri, Baudha Bharati Series 1-2 (I 968 ), translated by G. Jha, Gaekwad's Oriental Series 8o ( 19 3 7), 8 3 ( 19 39 ). - - Madhyamakalm?zk,ira (Tib: dBu-ma rgyan; Eng: Ornament of the Middle Way). T 3 884, ed. and translated in Masamichi lchigo, Madhyamukalan_zkJra, Kyoto: Kyoto Sangyo University, I98 5· Tathagararak~ita, M~tyu~Jdhapaka (Tib: 'Chi-ba bslu-ba; Eng: Ritual Deceptwn of Death). T 1 702. Tilop;l, -~~ufdharmop.zdes,z (Tib: ."".fJro chos-drug; Eng: The Six Doctrines of NJropd). T 2)30. See H. V. Guenther, The Life and Teaching of Niiropd. Oxford: Clarendon Press, I 96 3. Vagisvarakirti, Mrtyuvaiicanopadesa (Tih: 'Chi-ba bslu-ba; Eng: Esoteric Instructions on the Ritual Deception of Death). T 1748. Vasubandhu, Ahhidharmakosa (Tih: Chos-mgon pa'i mdzud; Eng: Treasury of the Abhidharma), ed. D. Shastri, Baudha Bharati Series 5-8 ( 1970-72). T 4089, French translation by L. de Ia Vallee-Poussin, L 'Abhidharmakosa de Vasuhandlm, 6 vols., Paris, Paul Geuthner, 192 3-3 6. English translation by L. Pruden, AbhidharmakosabhJsyan.z, 4 vols. Berkeley: Asian Humanities Press, 1988.

c) Commentaries of Tibetan Origin
Dudjom Rinpoche, bsTan-pa'i mam-gzhag (Eng: Fundamentals of the Nyingma Schoo/). Translated in NSTB. Gampopa, Duags-po th,zr-rgyan (Eng: The Jewel Omament of Liberation). Translated by H. V. Geunther, Berkeley: Shambhala, 197r. Gendun Gyeltsen, gTer-ston lung-bstan-dang khungs-btsun-pa bla-ma brgyud-pa'i rim-pa-mams (Eng: Padmasamhhava's Prophecy of the Treasure-finder an.d the Series of Authentic Lineage Teachers). Contained in DR, Vol. 1, pp. 21-6. Gyarawa Namka Chokyi Gyeltsen, rGyud-f'a'i lo-rgyus bsdus-pa nor-bu'i phreng-ba (Eng: ]ell'el Garland: An Abridged History of the Lineage). Contained in DR, Vol. r, pp. 27-48.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

439

Longchen Rabjampa, Grub-mtha' mdzod (Eng: Treasury of Spiritual and Philosophical Systems), ed. Dodrup Chen Rinpoche, Gangtok, Sikkim, c. 1969. - - gNas-lugs mdzod (Eng: Precious Treasury of the Way of Abiding), trans. Richard Barron, Padma Publications, 1987. l\:gari Parychen, sDom-gsum rnam-nges (Eng: Ascertainment of the Three Vows). Contained in f',;K, Vol. 51. See HH Dudjom Rinpoche's commentary in Perfect Conduct: Ascertaining the Three Vows, Boston: Wisdom Publications, 1996. Patrul Rinpoche, mKhas-pa'i shri rgyal-po mkhas-chos, in the Collected Works of Patrul Or}:,')'all}igme Chokyi \~?angpo (dPal-sprul gswzg-'bum), Vol. 5, pp. 2.0625. On this text, see HH Dalai Lama, 'Hitting the Essence in Three Words', in Dzogchen: The Heart Esse11ce of the Great Perfection, pp. 61-92, Snowlion, woo; also Khcnpo Palden Sherab and Khenpo Tscwang Dongyal, Lion's Gaze, Sky Dancer Press, 1999. Tscle Natsok Rangdrol, Bar-do spyi-don thams-cad rnam-pa gsul·bar byed-pa dra11-pa'i me-long (Eng: Mirror of Mindfubzess Clarzfymg All Aspects ol the lntermediute Stutes), translated by Erik Schmidt Perna Kunsang in The Mzrror of Mindfulness, Kathmandu: RangJung Yeshe Publications, 1987.

d) Treasure-doctrines (gter clws)
Guru Chowang (disc), bKa'-brgyaJ gsang-ba yo~tgs-rd::ogs (Eng: Eight Transmztted Precepts: Consummution of All Secrets). Contained in bKa'-brgyad phyogsbsgrigs, 4 vols. - - bKa'-brgyad drag-po rang-hyung-ba'i zhi-khro na-rag skong-bzhags-gyi cho-ga, translated by K. Dowman, 'Emptying the Depths of Hell', in Flzght of the Garuda, pp. 53-61. Jamgon Kongtrul (redactor), Rin-chen gter-nzdzod (Eng: Store of Precious Treasures), recently republished at Derge in 76 vols. Jigme Lingpa (disc.), Klong-chen snying-thig (Eng: Innermost Spirituality of Longchenpa), contained in the Collected Works of jzgnze Lingpa, Vols. 7-8, republished in 3 vols., New Delhi: l\:gawang Sopa, 1973. Selections translated in Tulku Thondup, The Dzugchen Innermost Essence Preliminary Practice (ed. B. Beresford), Dharamsala: Tibetan Library of Works and Archives, 1982; The Assembluge of the Knowledge-holders, Shantiniketan, WB, 1980; and in The Queen of Great Bliss, Gangtok: Dodrup Chen Rinpoche, 1982. --Rig 'dzin thugs-sgrub dfJal-chen 'dus-pa, contained in Klong-chcn snying-thig, Vol. 1, pp. 616ff. - - sKu-gsum zhi11g-khams sbyong-ba'i smon-lam, contained in Klong-chen snpng-thig, Vol. 2., pp. 448- 52· Karma Lingpa (disc.), Zab-chos zhi-khro dgongs-pa rang-grol (Eng: Peaceful and \'i/rathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, fentztledj Natural Liberation through [Recognitzmz ofl Enlzghtened Intention). Several recensions arc extant. B. J. Cuevas lists eighteen printed and manuscript versions of Tibetan and sub-Himalayan provenance. These include the most extensive and authoritative, DR, the full contents of which are listed in Appendix One, pp. 383-8. - - sKongs-bshags ~tyams-chags rang-grol fgyi dba11g-bskur gnas-spar 'gro-drug rang-grolf (Eng: Nutural Liberation through the Propcllmg of the Szx Classes of

440

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Beings mtu Htghcr Rebtrth: The {A1tddle-lengthj Empuwerments of the Natural Lthcratwn of Degenerated Commitments through Reparation and Confession), ~.:omained in DR, Vol. 1, pp. 127-60. - - dB.mg-'bring (Eng: Middle-length Empowerment). See the previous entry. - - hsKang-hshags nyams-chag rang-grol-gyi tshe- 'das gnas- 'dren 'gro-drug ranggrol (Eng: Natural Liberation of Degenerated Commitments through Reparation and Con/ession: The Natural Liberation of the Six Classes of Living Beings through the Guidance of the Deceased to Higher Rebirth), contained in DR, Vol. 2, pp. I-50. - - rDzogs-rim bar-do drug-gi khrid-yig (Eng: Six Guidebooks of the Perfection St,lge), contained in DR, Vol. 2, pp. 303-432. Translated by Alan Wallace and Gyatrul Rinpoche in Natural Liberation. - - Bur-do thos-grol chen-rna (Eng: The Great Liberation by Hearing in the lntermedt1.1te St,ltes, i.e. the Tibetan Book of the Dead), an abridgement of Karma Lingpa's revelations, extant in several edition_s- B. J. Cuevas lists eleven printed and manuscript versions of Tibetan and sub-Himalayan provenance. These indude the Amdo edition, the Delhi reprint and the Varanasi reprint. The text is fully translated in the present work for the first time. Earlier partial translations were made by Kazi Dawa Samdup, in W. Y. Evans-Wentz, ed., Tibetan Book of the Dead, London/Oxford/New York: Oxford University Press, 1927; by hances~.:a hemantle and Chogyam Trungpa, Tibetan Book of the Dead, Berkeley/London: Shambhala, 1 •n 5; by Robert Thurman, Tibetan Book of the Dead, Aquarianffhorsons, I 994; and by Stephen Hodge and Martin Boord, Illustrated Tthetan Book of the Dead, New York: Godsfield Press, 1999. - - Thugs-rie chen-po padma zhi-khro (Eng: Great Compassionate One: Lotus Peaceful and \'f/r,lthful Deities). ~A. but extracts of a rediscovered treasure (yang-gter) of the same title, revealed by Jamyang Khyentse Wangpo, are found in the Rin-chen gter-mdzod, Vol. 34· pp. 235-432. Longchen Rabjampa (disc./redisc.), sNying-thtg ya-bzhi (Eng: Four-part Innermost Spmtuality), containing the Bla-ma yang-ttg, the Bi-ma snying-thig, the mKha'-'gro yang-ttg, the mKha'-'gro snying-thig, and Zab-mo yang-tig. Derge xylographic edition in 4 vols., republished in Delhi by Sherab Gyalrsen Lama (I 97 5) in I 3 vols. Catalogue by S. Goodman in 'The Klong-chen snying-thig: An Eighteenth-century Tibetan Revelation', Appendix B. Orgyan Lingpa (disc.), Padma bka'-thang shel-brag-ma (Eng: The lniunctions of Padma, discovered at Cr)•stal Rock), Chengdu: Sichuan Nationalities Publishing House, 1987. Translated in G. C. Toussaint, Le Diet de Padma, Bibliothequc de I'Institut de Hautcs Etudes Chi noises, Vol. 3, Paris: Libra ire Ernest Leroux, 19 3 3; and inK. Douglas and G. Bays, Life ,md Liberation of Padmasambhaua, 2 vols., Emeryville, California: Dharma Publications, 1~n8. Prahevajra (disc.), Tshig-gsum gnad-du brdeg-pa (Eng: Three Points Which Penetrate the Essential). Contained in Bi-ma snying-thig, Pt. I, Vol. Ga, pp. 304-18.

Section Three: Secondary Sources
Basham, A. L., The Wonder Thut Was India, 3rd edn, London: Sidgwick & Jackson,
Jl)6?.

Heyer, S., The Cult ofT,irJ, Berkeley: University of California Press, 1978.

Bl B LIOGRAPHY

441

Blezer, H., Kar glin zz khro: A Tantnc Buddhist Concept, Leiden: Resean.:h School c~ws, 1997. Chokyi I':yima Rinpoche, The Bardo Guzdebook (trans. Eric Schmidt Perna Kunsang), Hong Kong: Rangjung Yeshe Publications, 1991. Coleman, G. P. (ed.), A Handbook ofTzbeta7t Culture, London: Rider, 1993. Cuevas, B. J., The Hid.:ien History of the Tibetan Book of the Dead, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2003. --'A Textual Survey of the gter ma of Karma-gling-pa: Zab chos zhi khro dgongs pas rang grol and Bar do thos grol chen mo', in Tibetan Studies: Proceedings of the Eighth Seminar of the Intenz.Jtional Association for Tibetan Studies, Bloomington: Indiana University Press (forthcoming). HH Dalai Lama, Dzogchoz: The Heart Essence of the Great Perfection, Ithaca, New York: Snowlion Publications, 2000. - - Advzce on Dying and Living a Better Life, London: Rider, 2002. HH Dilgo Khyenste Rinpoche, Pure Appearance (trans. Ani Jinpa), Halifax: Vajra Yairochana Translation Committee, 1992. Dorje, G., The Guhyagarbhatattvat,iniscayamahatantra and its X/Vth-century Tibetan Commentary Phyogs bcu num sel, 3 vols., unpublished PhD thesis, University of London, 1987. - - 'The Nyingma Interpretation of Commitment and Yow', in The Buddhist Forum, Vol. 2 (1991), pp. 71-95. - - Tibetan Elememal Divination Paintings: 1//uminated Manuscripts from The White Beryl ofSangs-rgyas rGya-mtsho, with the Moonbeams treatise of Lo-chen Dhann.1sr1, London: Eskenasi and Fogg, 200 r. Dowman, K., Flight of the Garuda. Boston: Wisdom Publications, 1994· HH Dudjom Rinpoche, The Nyingma School of Tzbeta7z Buddhism: Its Fundamentals and History, translated by G. Dorje and M. Kapstein, Boston: Wisdom Publications, 1991. --Counsels from My Heart (translated by Padmakara Translation Committee), Boston: Shambhala, 2001. Eckel, M. D., ]n.in.Jgarbha's Commentary on the Disti11ction between the Two Truths, Albany: SUNY, 1987. Epstein, L., 'On the History and Psychology of the "das-log", in Tibet Journal, 7·4 (1982), pp. 20-85. Fremantle, F., Lummous Emptiness: Understanding the Tibetan Book of the Dead, Boston: Shambhala, 2001. Germano, D., 'Dying, Death, and Other Opportunities', in D. S. Lopez Jr (ed.), Religions of Tibet in Practice, Princeton University Press, 1997. Gethin, R., The Fowzd.Jtions of Buddhism, Oxford University Press, 1998. Kazi, Sonam T. (trans.), Kun-zang La-may Zh.1l-lung, 2 vols., Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey: Diamond Lotus Publications, 1989. Kloetzli, R., Buddhist Cosmology, Delhi: Motilal Banarsidas, 1983. Kritzer, R., 'Amarabhava in the Vibha~a ·,in Notom Domu Joshi Dazgaku Kirisutokyo Bzmka Kenkyujo Kiyo [Maranata/, 3·5 (1997), pp. 69-91. Lalou, M., 'Chemins du mort dans lcs croyances de haute-asie', in Revue de /'Hisloire des Religions, 135.1 (1949), pp. 42-8. Lati Rinpoche and J. Hopkins, Death, Intermediate State and Rebirth in Tibetan Buddhzsm, Ithaca, New York: Snowlion, 1979. Mullin, G., Deuth and Dying: The Tibetan Tradition, Boston: Arkana, 1986.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Namkhai Norbu (trans. Brian Beresford), The Dzogchen Ritual Practices, London: Kailash Editions, 1991. Norbu, T., The Small Golden Key, New York: Jewel Publishing House, 1977. Orofino, G., Sacred Tibetan Teachings on Death and Liberation, Dorset: Prism Press, I 990. Paltrul Rinpoche, The Words of My Perfect Teacher (trans. Padmakara Translation Committee), San Francisco: HarperCollins, I994· Parfionovitch, Y., Dorje, G., and Meyer, F., Tibetan Medical Paintings, London: Serindia, I992. Pommaret, F., Les Revenants de /'au-de/a dans le monde tibetain: Sources litteraires et tradition vivante, Paris: Editions du Centre National de Ia Recherche Sciemifique, I989. Reynolds, J. M., Self-liberation through Seeing with Naked Awareness, New York: Station Hill Press, 1989. Sogyal Rinpoche, The Tibetan Book of Living and Dying, San Francisco: HarperCollins, I992. Tenga Rinpoche, Transition and Liberation (trans. Alex Wilding), Osterby: Khampa Buchverlag, I 996. Tenzin Wangyal, Wonders of the Natural Mind, New York: Station Hill Press, I993· Wallace, A., and Gyatrul Rinpoche, Natural Liberation: Padmasambhava's Teachings on the Six Bardos, Boston: Wisdom Publications, I998. Wayman, A., The Buddhist Tantras: New Light on Indo-Tibetan Esotericism, London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1973· Williams, P., Mahayana Buddhism, London/New York: Routledge, 1989. --The Reflexive Nature of Awareness: A Tibetan Madhyamaka Defence, Surrey: Curzon, 1998.

Glossary of Key Terms

(Words in bold type can be referenced elsewhere in the glossary; Tibetan and Sanskrit words arc given in italics and text names in italics. For a description of the meditational deities forming the mary<:Jala of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities see Appendix Two.) Abhidharma mngon-pa'i chos This is a generic term referring to the classical Buddhist literature on phenomenology, psychology, epistemology, and cosmology. Abhirati mngon-par dga'-ba, Skt. Abhirati The eastern buddha field of Manifest Joy is the pure realm associated with the male buddha Ak~obhya- Vajrasattva. Abiding Nature of Reality gnas-lugs The 'abiding nature of reality' is a synonym for emptiness as well as the expanse of actual reality (dharmadhatu). Absence of Self-identity bdag-med, Skt. nairatmya See Selflessness. Accomplished Master grub-thob, Skt. siddha An accomplished master is one who has fully developed the supreme and common spiritual accomplishments. Accomplishment dngos-grub, Skt. siddhi Spiritual accomplishments may be supreme or common. The former (mchog-gi dngos-grub) refers to the accomplishment of enlightenment or buddhahood. The latter (thun-mong-gi dngos-grub) arc a series of mystical powers gained through meditative practices, which are based on mantra recitation in the context of specific rituals. Accumulation tshogs, Skt. sambhara The Tibetan word tshogs generally has two senses, corresponding to the Sanskrit sambhara and ga!Ja. In the former case it refers to the two accumulations of merit (Tib. bsod-nams-kyi tshogs, Skt. pu'!yasambhara) and pristine cognition (Tib. ye-shes-kyi tshogs, Skt. jfzanasambhara), which are gathered by bodhisattvas on the path to buddhahood. The fulfilment of the 'two accumulations' constitutes the fruition of the entire path, according to the Greater Vehicle (Mahayana), resulting in the maturation of the Buddha-body of Form (rupakaya) and the Buddha-body

444

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

of Reality (dharmakJy.z) respectively. For the second meaning of tshogs, see Feastoffering. Accumulation of Merit bsod-nams-kyi tshogs, Skt. pu'Jyasambhiira See Merit. Actual Reality chos-nyid, Skt. dhamz,ztJ According to the Greater Vehicle or MahayJna Buddhism, actual reality is a synonym for emptiness (sunyata), which refers to the ultimate nature of reality. See also Apparent reality. Aeon bskal-pa, Skt. kalpa The aeon is a fundamentally important concept in the traditional Indian and Buddhist understanding of cyclical time. According to Abhidhanna literature, a great aeon (mahakalpa) is divided into eighty lesser or intervening aeons. In the course of one great aeon, the external universe and its sentien.t life-forms unfold and disappear. During the first twenty of the lesser aeons, the universe is in the process of creation and expansion (uwart.Jk.l!pa); during the next twenty it remains created; during the third twenty, it is in the process of destruction or contraction (samuartakalpa); and during the last quarter of the cycle, it remains in a state of destruction. Aggregate phung-po, Skt. skandha A general philosophical term referring to the principal psycho-physical components which constitute the mind-body complex of a sentient being. Buddhist literature speaks of five such components, technically known as the five psycho-physical aggregates (p.uicaskandha). These are: the aggregate of form (rztpaskandha), the aggregate of feelings (vedanask.mdha), the aggregate of perceptions (sat!lj1iJskandha), the aggregate of motivational tendencies (sm!zskaraskandha), and the aggregate of consciousness (viJ1itinaskandha). The Tibetan term phzmg-po, like its Sanskrit counterpart, literally means a 'heap' or a 'pile', an aggregate of many parts. Sentient beings in the desire and form realms manifestly possess all the five aggregates and those in the formless realm only the four mental aggregates. Aggregate of Consciousness nzam-par shes-pa'i phung-po, Skt. uijfzanask ..mdha In the context of our text the aggregate of consciousness comprises the so-called 'eight classes of consciousness' (nzam-shes tshogs-brgyad). These are: 1) the groundof-all consciousness (kzm-gzhi rnam-par shes-pa), which is an undifferentiated foundational consciousness underlying all the other aspects of consciousness in which are stored the imprints left by past experiences; 2) the deluded consciousness (nyonmong yid-kyi nzam-par shes-pa), which is pervaded by fundamental ignorance and is responsible for our sense of selfhood and dualistic misapprehension of the true nature of phenomena; 3) the mental consciousness (yid-kyi rnam-par shes-pa), which obJectively refers to mental constructs, thoughts and the experience of our senses; 4) visual consciousness (mi}:-gi rnam-par shes-pa); 5) auditory consciousness (nza'i mam-par shes-pa); 6) olfactory consciousness (srza'i rnam-par shes-{Ja); 7) gustatory consciousness (/c:e'i rnam-par shes-pa); and H) tactile consciousness (Jus-

kyi rnam-par shes-pa).
Aggregate of Feelings tshor-ba'i phzmg-po, Skt. uedanaskandha The aggregate of feelings encompasses the pleasant, unpleasant, and neutral sensations which arise as an immediate reaction to objects of our senses.

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

445

Aggregate of Form gzugs-ky1 fJIJimg-po, Skt. nipaskandha The aggregate of form includes both the subtle and manifest forms derived from the clements and experienced through the five senses, including, of course, our budics and the environment. The aggregate of form is considered to have fifteen aspeas, namely those related to the clements, earth, water, fire and w1nd; those related to the five sense objects, visual forms, sounds, smells, tastes, and contacts; those rci.lted to the five sense-organs, eye, car, nose, tongue, and body, and, lastly, that aspect related to imperceptible forms which arc sJid to be continuously present throughout past, present and future time. Aggregate of Motivational Tendencies 'du-byas-kyi phung-pu, Skt.

sat!lsktiraskandha
The aggregate of motivational tendencies, sometimes translated also as 'mental formations', refers to the array of spec1fic types of causative mental states which g1vc nsc to our characteristic perspectives and emotions and which m turn cond1t1on our act1ons. These are the motivating impulses behmd our thoughts, speech and actions which rel.ne in specific \vays to the perceived object. This aggregate includes the numerous modalities of the mmd, such as the fifty-one mental factors listed in the abbidhanna texts, as well as our habits, dispositions, and conceptualisanon tendencies. Aggregate of Perceptions 'du-shes-kyi phung-po, Skt. St.lf!liiitiskandha The aggregate of perceptions recognises and identifies forms and objects. It differentiates one form/obJeCt from another and n.uncs them. This process includes extensive, mmute, and mediocre modes of objectifying perception. AkaniHha 'og-mm The central buddha field of Akam~rha (lit. the 'Highest'), also known as the Dense Array (Ghanauy1iha), is the pure realm associated with the male buddha Vairucan,z. Alakavati lcang-lo-can A/,zkJL'ati is the name of the abode of the male bodhisattva Vajrapa1.1i. All-surpassing Realisation thod-rgal, Skt. L')'lllkrant.;ka Sec under Cutting through Resistance. Altruistic Intention to Attain Enlightenment sems-bskyed, Skt. cittotptid.I See Bodhicitta. Ancillary Commitments yan-lag-gi dam-tshig See Commitments. Anguished Spirits yi-dt·,zgs, Skr. preta Among the six classes of living beings, the anguished ~pirits are chara(tensed as being in a state of existence whiCh, 111 terms of the degree of suffering, is intermedi.ue to the animal and hell realms. Born as a result of a preponderance of miserliness in their past actions, they are ch.uacteriscd by unsatisfied cravmg. Antigod lha-ma-yin, Skt. asura One of six classes of living beings ( 'gro-ba rigs-drug). The mode of being and Jctiviry of the antigods is said to be engendered and dominated by envy, self-centred ambition and hostility. They are metaphorically described as being incessantly embroiled in a dispute with the gods (Skt. deu.;ls11ra) over the possession of a magiCal tree.

G L 0 S SA R Y 0

r

K E Y T E R .\t S

Anuyoga rJCS su mal- "hyor The e1ghth of the nine vehicles, and second of the three inner classes of tantra, according to the Nyin~:ma school of Tibetan Buddhism. Anuyuga emphasises the perfection stage of meditation (sampannakrama). Apparent Reality chus-can, Skt. Jharmin According to the Greater Vehicle, the apparent reality of phenomena refers to the world of conventional truth characterised by duality, cause and effect and multiplicity. This is contrasted with the actual reality, whid1 is the ultimate nature of phenomena. See Two Truths. Arhat Jgra-bcom-pa A being who has attained freedom from the cycle of existence (samsdra) by eliminating the karmic tendencies and the dissonant mental states which give rise to compulsive existence in a cycle of death and rebirth. Arhut, literally 'worthy', is interpreted to mean 'Foe Destroyer', the foe in this context being the dissonant mental states which are at the root of our conditioned existence. The status of an arhat is the ideal goal to which practitioners of the Lesser Vehicle aspire. An individual person who becomes an arhat has still nor become a fully enlightened buddha. This is because the attainment of buddhahood requires, in addition to the elimination of the dissonant mental states, a total overcoming of all the habitual tendencies imprinted upon our mentill continuum by our long association with deluded states of mind. In other words, the attainment of full enlightenment requires the total overcom1ng of illl personal limitations, which can be achieved only through a path that possesses the unification of the skilful means of universal compassion together with the discriminative awareness directly perceiving the actual nature of reality, at the must profound level. Ascending and Core-penetrating yar-gyi zang-thal According to Atiyoga, the ilttainment of the Buddha-body of Reality (dharmakJy,l) is described as 'ascending and core-penetrating' (yar-g)•i zang-thal). Here, 'ascending' (yar-g)•J) refers to the upwo1rd movement of consciousness through the central channel of the body and the consequent 'core-penetrating' to the transformation of consciousness into the pristine cognition of reality's expanse (dharmadhJttt}1iJna). Atiyoga shin-tu mal- 'byor The highest or ninth of the nine vehicles, and the third of the three inner classes of tantra, a(cording to the Nyingma school of Tibetan Buddhism, which is otherwise known as the Great Perfection (rdzogs-pa chen-po). Sec Great Perfection. Attachment 'dod-chags, Skt. rJga One of the 'three poisons' (dug-gsum) of the mind, along with delusion and aversion. In its extreme manifestation, in the form of insatiable craving, it is said to characterise the worlds of the anguished spirits (prctaloka). Aural Lineage of Authoritative Personages gang-zag snymz-brgyud One of the six lineages through which the Buddhist teachings are transmitted. The aur.tl lineage of authorit.nivc persons refers to the historical line of accomplished mastcr'i who h.t vc been responsible for aurally transmitting the Buddhist teachings throu~h SliLU:ssive generations.

GLOS~ARY

OF KEY

TER~S

447

Auspicious Aeon hsk.z/-p,; bz,;11g-po, Skr. bh,;Jr.zkulpa The name of the present aeon of time, dunng which one thous.:md buddhas are predicted to appear in su.:ce~s1on. Among thc~e, S.ikyamuni Buddha is reg.uded as the fourth and Maitrt?)•a as the fifth. Avalokitdvara spy.m-ras gvgs dh,;ng-phyug Av,;/okitesl'ura is regarded JS the embodiment of the compassionate aspect of the mind of all the buddhas, manifesting in the form of a meditational deity. He is revered as the patron deity of Tibet and h<1s m3ny different aspects, the most popubr including the se<lted four-armed white form and 'thousand-armed' form Mahakaru~tika. Our text refers to Aualokltc5l!ara as one of the eight principal male bodhisattvus. See Appendix Two, p. 393· Aversion ::.he-sd.mg, Skr. due~u One of the 'three poisons' (dug-gsum) of the mind. In Buddhist litcr3ture, the terms .1version <1nd hatred arc often used interchangeably w1th anger. In its subtle manifestation 3vcrsion is s3id to obstruct an individu31 trom a correct perception of forms. In its extreme manifest3tion, 3S overwhelmmg hatred and fear, it is said to he characteristic of the worlds of the hells (narablok.z). Awareness rig-pa, Skr. uidyti As an ordinary verb, the Tibetan term rig-p.z means 'to know' or 'to be aware'. When used as a noun, It has several distinct though not unrel3ted meanings, corresponding to the Sanskrit z·zdy.i: I) as a gener31 term encompassing all experiences of consciousness and mental events, 2) as intelligence or mental aptitude, 3) as a science or knowledgc-h3sed discipline, 4) as a pure awareness. Our text generally assumes the last of these meanings, in whi~.:h cases it IS 3 synonym or 3hbrcviation for intrinsic awareness (rullg-ng). See under Intrinsic Awareness. Awareness Holder rig- 'dzin, Skt. vidyadhura The awareness holders or knowledge holders arc embodiments of the gre3t accomplished masters who have attained the highest realisations of the tautrus. Amongst those whose accomplishments are classified as supr<lmundane arc Padmasambhava and Vimalamitra, who h.tve trans~.:ended the span of human life, having attained the rainbow body through the practices of the Great Perfection. Five kinds of awareness holder arc particularly identified, and their realisations are said to parallel those of the bodhisutti•a and buddha levels, namely the awareness holders of matur.nion, those with power over the life~pan, those abiding on the levels, those of the c;reat Seal, and those of spontaneous presence. Basic Commitments rts.z-ba'i d.zm-tshig, Skt. mlllusamJya See Commitment. Beguiling Forces hdud, Skt. nz.ira Sec Malevolent Forces. Being of Commitment dum-tshig sems-dp.z', Skt. s.znz.zyas.zttva. \Vhen deities are v1sualiscd in meditation, the form of the deity that is visually generated hy the meditator is known as the Being of Commitment. This is differentiated from the Being of Pristine Cognition (jii.znasattua, Tih. ye-shes scms-dpa') or the actual meditational deity, wh1ch IS inv1ted to enter into the visualised form.

G I. 0 S SA R Y 0 F KEY T E R ~~ S

Being of Pristine Cognition ye-shes sems-dfJu ·, Skt. Jli,in.;s.;ttua Sec above under Being of Commitment. Bewildered Perception 'klmt!-sn.mg The bewildering perceptions generated by the subject-obJect dichotomy. Bewilderment 'klmtl-JJu, Skt. bhrJnti Bewilderment is the confusion arising from the subject-obJect dichoromy and fundamental ignorance, on the bas1s of which rebirth in cyclic existence is perpetuated. Bewitchcrs 'gong-pu A c.:lass of malign spirits that are thought to frequent the atmosphere and the earth, many of whom were bound under an oath of allegiance to Buddhism by Padmasambhava Juring the eighth century. Their power to generate lite-threatening obstades, to assail bere.wed persons, and so forth can be averted by counteracting rituals.
Bhai~ajyaguru

smJn-h/,z

See Vai9uryaprabharaja. Blessing lryin-rlahs, Skt. .zdhi~~hJ11J In the Buddhist context, the term bless1ng should not be understood in terms of grace as in the case of theistic religions. Rather, it relates to the sense of inspir.nion received from an external source, which transforms or awakens the potentials inherent within an individual's ment.1l continuum. Thus, the Tibetan word lrymr!Jbs is Interpreted to mean: 'to be tr.111sformed through insp1ring magmticence'. Blood-drinking [Heruka] khrJg- 'tlm11g fhe-ru-k..Jj, Skt. hauk..z The Sanskrit word hauka is interpreted to mean 'one who delights 111 drinking blood' or 'one who holds a skull tilled with blood', symbohsmg the wrathful dynamic transformation of the Jeep-seated dissonant mental states. Blood-filled skull Jwzg-dm.zr, Skt. bh,mdh.llbhJ~z,j.;k,z In tantric Iconography, meditational deities are often depicted holding skull-cups filled with blood. The human skull symbolises mortality and impermdnence while the blood represents the transmutation of dissonant mental states mto pristine cognition. Bodhicitta bya11g-dmb-ky1 sems An altruistic intention or aspiration to attain full enlightenment for the benefit of all beings. Bodhicitt,z is cultivated on the basis of ..:ertain mental attitudes, principal among them being the development of love and great compassion towards all being<; equally. The Tibetdn tradttion speaks of two In.l)Or sy!.tems tor tr.unm~ one's mind in the generation of hodlncitta: the first is AtrsJ's 'seven-point cause and effect' and the second is .SJntHit'I'.Z's 'equdlity and exchange of oneself With others'. A genuine generation of bodl11ottu is attained only when, through the traming of the mind, the aspiration to .1tta1n iull enlightenment becomes spontaneous and no longer requ1res any deliberate exertion. At that stage the individual becomes a budhisaN~a. Literally, I}(JCilll means 'enlightenment', and citt.;, 'mind'. The literature of the Greater Vehicle spe;tks of two types of bodiJiotta: the conventional bodhicitta and the ulum.He hudhzcztta. The former refers to that aspect of bodl11otta defined above, whereas the latter refers to the mind of enlightenment i.e. the discriminative awareness d1redly realising emptiness, whKh IS induced by the above altrUIStiC

GLO~~:\RY

OF KEY TERMS

449

aspiration. The cultivation of an altruistic intention (sems-bskyed, Skt. cittotpada) is included among the preliminary practices (sngon- 'gro), in which context it is said to he an antidote for envy or self-centred ambition. In the tantras, however, the term bodhicitta (byang-sems) specifically refers to the white/male and red/female generative essences of the body. Bodhisattva byung-chub sems-dpa' A spiritual trainee dedicated to the cultivation and fulfilment of the altruistic intention to attain enlightenment, who is gradually traversing the five bodhisattva paths (pa1icamJrga) and ten bodlnsattt•a levels (dasubhftmi). An essential element of this commitment to work for others is the determination purposely to remain within cyclil: existence instead of simply seeking freedom from suffering for oneself. Philosophic.llly, the bodhisuttua is said to have fully realised the two aspects of selflessness, with respect to dissonant mental states and the nature of all phenomena. Bodhisattva Vows byung-dmb sems-dpa 'i sdom-pa, Skt. bodhisattuasa'?zvara Sec Vows. Bon An ancient spiritual tradition, considered by some scholars to be of Zoroastrian or Kashmiri Buddhist origin, which was widespread in Tibet, particularly in the far-western region of Zhangzhzmg prior to the official introduction and establishment of Buddhism. Although its literature clearly distinguishes it from both the indigenous shamanism or animism of Tiber and the Buddhist traditions, it has over the last several hundred years asstmilated many of the Buddhist teachings and developed a nco-Buddhist theoretical foundation. The Bon tradition is particularly strong in the Shang valley of Western Tibet, in Kongpo, Khyungpo and the Ngawa region of Amdo. Bone relics gdunglring-sre/ Wirhin the tradition of the Great Perfection (rdzogs-pa chen-po), four kinds of relics are said to be left behind following the death of an accomplished master. These are: relics of the Buddha-body of Reality (chos-sku 'i ring-srel), relics in the form of maJor and minor bone remams (sku-gdung ring-src/), relics in the form of clothing (sku-hal rmg-sre/), and relics of miniature size (nyzmg-ngu lta-bu'i ring-src/). Among these, the major bone relics (gdung) and minor bone relics (ring-sre/) are retrieved from the funeral pyre. Biographical literature suggests that the veneration of such relics has been continuously observed within Buddhism from the time of Sakyamu11i Buddha, whose own bone relics were interred within eight stupas. Five kinds of major bone relic arc specifically enumerated. See Chapter 14. Brahman Class brum-::.e'i ngs, Skt. brahma~z.zvar~za The priestly class, among the four traditional classes of Hindu society. Buddha sangs-rgyas The Sanskrit term buddha literally means 'awakened', 'developed', and 'enlightened'. The Tibetan equivalent sangs-rg)'aS is a combination of sangs-pa ('awakened' or 'purified'), and rg)'as-pa ('developed'). These two words in this context denote a full awakening from fundamental ignorance (avidya) in the form of the two obscurations (duayaz·araiJ..l) and a full realisation of true knowledge, i.e. the pristine cognition ( piJna) of buddha-mind. A fully awakened being is therefore one who, as a result of training the mind through the bodhisattva paths, has finally realised his/

450

G L 0 S SA R Y 0 F KEY T E R .\IS

her full potential fur wmplete enlightenment (boJhi), anJ has elitmnatcd all the obscurations to true knowledge and liberation. Buddhas are characterised according to thm five fruitional aspects of buddha-body (kJya), buddha-speech (uJk), buddhamind (cztta), buddha-attributes (gw_za), and buddha-activities (k~ty.Jkriy,i), which arc poetically descrihed in some Tihetan literature as the 'five wheels of mcxh<tustible adornment' (mi-zaJ-pa'i rgyu11-gyi 'khor-lu l11gu). Buddha-activities phri11-las, Skt. k~tyaknyJ In general, it is said that the principal activity of the buddhas is to bring ;tbout the welfare of all sentient beings, an aim whtch initially mot;vateJ thetr aspiration to attam the fully enlightened state. The Perfection of Di~criminative Awareness texts enumerate eighty mexhaustihle buddha-activities, whde some commentan.tl trc.Hises memion twemy-one cnltghtcned <Ktmties of the budJhas. With respect to the historical Buddha SJkyamuni, the Buddhtst texts list twelve princip.tl deeds that exemplify his enlightened activities. These are in successton: 1) the descent from the celestial realm of ·ru~ita, 2) the entry into the ...,-omb, 3) birth, 4) displaying mastery in worldly arts and skills, 5) enjoying the women of the harem, 6) renounung the worldly way of life, 7) undergmng severe physical penances, X) mcJ1t<ttlllg under the tree of enlightenment, 9) overcoming beguiling and male~·olcnt forces, 1 o) attaining manifestly perfect buddhahood, 1 1) turning the wheel of the sacred teachings, and 12) entering the peaceful state of final nin'ti'Ja. In tenm of skilful means, buddha-activity may be f01.:used through four modalities: pauficatwn, enrichment, subrugation, and wr;tthful transform.ttion. See Four Aspects of Enlightened Activity. Finally, according to the ltteraturc of the Nyingma school, there is an enumeranon of five modes of buddha-activity when spontaneous or effonkss activity is included along w1th these modalities. Buddha-attributes yon-tan, Skt. gw_z,1 The attributes of a buddha may be suh~tuneJ as specific qu.tllt1es of buddha-body, speech and mind. The attributes of buddha-body arc those associated with the various 'dimensions' of buddha-body, described below, and more specifictlly with the thirty-two major and eighty minor marks. Those of buddha-speech are known as the 'sixty melodies of Hrahmd', which implies that buddha-speech is soothing, gentle, firm, audible from a great distance, and so forth. The attrihutcs of buddhamind are threefold: compassion, omniscience, and power. Furthermore, in the literature of the ta11tras, a classification of five resultant enli~htened attributes is given, namely: the pure buddha field, the dimensionless celestial palace, the r .1d1am and pure rays of li~ht, the cx.1lteJ thrones of the deities, anJ the posse)>sion of consummate resources. Buddha-body sku, Skt. kJya The term 'buddha-body' refers not only to the physical body of a buddha, but also to the varying 'dimensions' 111 which the embmliment of fully enl1~htened .1ttrihutes is present. As such, the buddha-body can be categorised in d1fferent ways, corresponding to the different levels of the tcadung. for example, stltras of the Lc~er Vehicle (hinuyJnu) speak of the Buddha-body of Reality (dlhm1zLik.1ya) and the Buddha-body of Form (nipakJya), while stUras of the Greater Vehicle (m.;h,iy:m,r) ~enerally mention three buddha-bod1es (tnkJ·ya), dividm¥, the latter into the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource (s,mzhhogakJya) and the Buddha-body of Emanation (llrrm,il_rukJy,l). Sec below. In the sutras and treatises expound1ng buddha-

G I. 0 S SA R Y 0 F KEY T E R .\IS

451

nature (t.;thagatugarbha), such as Maitreya's Supreme Ccmtmuum of the Gre.lfer Vehicle (Mahay.mottaratantrasastra), an enumeration of four buddha-bodies (ct.ltztl?kayu) is mentioned. Here, rhe Buddha-body of Essentiality (svubhavikukaya) is added to the above three buddha-bodies, ro indicate either an active/passive distinction in the Buddha-body of Reality, or rhc underlying indivisible essence of the three buddha-bodies. In the tantras of the Nyingma school, there is an enumeration of five buddha-bodies (pmicakaya) where the Buddha-body of Awakening (uhhisambodhikaya, Tib. nmgon-byang-gi sku) refers to the apparitional modes of the three buddha-bodies, and the Buddha-body of Indestructible Reality (LJajrakJya, Tib. rJo-rje'i sku) refers ro their indivisible essence. Finally, in Atiyoga, when the buddha-bodies are acrualised, the Buddha-body of Reality is known as the yourhful va~e body (g::.hon-mt'i 'bum-pa'i sku) and rhc Buddha-body of Form is known as the body of great transformation ( 'pho-ba chen-po'i sku). Buddha-body of Emanation SfJrul-sku, Skt. nirmd1fukay.; The Buddha-body of Emanation is the visible and usually physical manifestation of fully enlightened beings which arises spontaneously from the expanse of the Buddha-body of Reality, whenever appropriate, in accordance with the diverse dispositions of sentient beings. The sutras refer to three types of emanational body in relation to Sakyamuni Buddha: (i) emanational birth in Tu~ita, (ii) emanational art forms, and (iii) supreme emanation as one of the thousand buddhas of the auspicious aeon. From the disrincti\•c Nyingma perspective, however, the three types of emanational body comprise: 1) natural emanations (rang-bzhi11 sprul-sku), which arc rhe buddhas of the five enlightened families such as Vairocana in the forms they assume when appearing before bodhisattvas of the highest level; 2) supreme emanations (mchog-r,i sprul-sku) such as Sakyamuni Buddha and the or her budd has of this aeon who initiate a new reaching, and 3) diversified emanations (sna-tshogs sprul-sku), including oases, food, medicine and other such material manifestations, which are of benefit to living beings, as well as emanational art forms (b::.o-bo sprul-sku) and emanational births (skye-bu sprul-sku), such as those taken by Sakyamuni in previous lives, for example as Prince Satsverakcru in the god realm of Tu~ita. Buddha-body of Form gzugs-sku, Skt. nipukayu According to the literature of the Lesser Vehicle (hinuyanu) the Buddha-body of Form refers to the thousand buddhas of the auspicious aeon, including Sakyamu11i. In the Greater Vehicle, however, the term indudcs both the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource and the Buddha-body of Emanation. According to Atiyug..z, when the Buddha-body of Form is acrualiscd through the practices of All-surpassing Realisation, a rainbow-light body is attained, and this realisation is known as the Buddhabody of Great Transformation ('pho-ba chen-po'i sku). Buddha-body of Perfect Resource longs-spyod rdzogs-pa'i sku, Skt.

sambhogakaya
The Buddha-body of Perfect Resource refers to the luminous, immaterial, and unimpeded reflection-like forms of the pure energy of enlightened mind, exemplified 111 the case of our text by the assembly of the forty-two peaceful deities and the tifry-eighr wrathful deities (see Appendix Two), which become spontaneously present (/hun-grub) and naturally manifest (rung-snang) at very high levels of realisation, that is to say at the point at which the duality between subject and object

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

dissolves. The interml!diate state of reality (chos-nyid bar-dn) is considered to be an optimum rime for the realisation of the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource. Buddha-body of Reality chos-sku, Skr. dharmakaya The Buddha-body of Reality is the ultimate nature or essence of the enlightened mind, which is uncreated (skyc-med), free from the limits of conceptual elaboration (spros-pa'i mtha'-brul), empty of inherent existence (rang-b-..hin-gyis stmzg-p,z), naturally radiant, beyond duahry and spacious like the sky. The intermediate state of the time of death ( 'chi-kha'i bar-Jo) is considered to be an optimum time for the realisation of the Buddha-body of Rea lay. Buddha Family de-bzhin gshegs-pa'i rigs, Skt. tathag.;takula One of the five enlightened families (pafzcakula) into which rhe meditational deities of the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource are subdivided. The deities of the Buddha family mclude the peaceful aspects Vairocana and Dharvisvari and the corresponding wrathful aspects Buddha Heruka and Buddhakrodhe5vari. See Appendix Two. Buddha Field zhings-khams, Skr. flmddhajk~etra The operational fields or 'paradises' presided over by specific buddhas, which spontaneously arise as a result of their altruistic aspirations, arc known as buddha fields. Such environments arc totally free from suffering, both physical and mental, and they transcend the mundane god realms (devaloka) inhabited by sentient beings of the world-systems of desire, form, and formlessness. It is said that when sentient beings who have not yet been permanently released from the bondage of cyclic existence have an affinity with a specific buddha and are consequently born into a respective pure realm, they become temporarily free nor only from manifest sufferings of the body and mind but also from the pervasive sufferings of past conditioning. Such fields or pure realms are regarded as conducive to the continuing cultivation of the path to buddhahood. Buddhahood sangs-rgyas nyid I s,;ngs-rgyas-kyi go-phang, Skt. buddhatual

buddhupada
The attainment of a buddha, who has not only gained total freedom from karmically conditioned existence and overcome all the tendencies imprinted on the mind as a result of a long association with dissonant mental states, but also fully realised or manifested all aspects of buddha-body, buddha-speech, buddha-mind, buddhaattributes and buddha-activities. Buddha-mind thugs, Skt. citta The term buddha-mind is synonymous with pristine cognition (i,-zdna), five modes of which are differentiated. See Pristine Cognition. In the particular literature of the Nyingma school, these five modes are distinctively known as manifest enlightenment (mngmz-bymzg-gi thugs), indivtsible indestructible reality (mi-phyeJ rdr~-rJe'i thugs), great sameness (nmyam-pa chen-po ·, thugs), great non-discursiveness (mi-rtog chen-po'i thugs), and liberator of sentient beings ( 'gro-ba'i sgrol-ba'i thugs). Buddha Nature rigs, Skt. gotra The seed of enlightenment inherent within the mental continuum of all sentient beings. It is this potential which makes it possible for every individual to re<1lise the ultimate nature, given the application of appropriate methods. The notion of buddha nature is intimately linked with the Buddhist concept of the essential nature of mind, which according to Buddhism is considered to be pure, knowing and lumi-

G L 0 S SA R Y 0 F KEY T E R ,\IS

453

no us. Dissonant mental states su~.:h as attachment, aversion and jealousy, which perpetuJlly aft1ict our mind and gt\'e rise to suffering, are not the essential elements of our mind bur adventitious and conditioned tendencies. ~lorcover, these dtssonant states are all rooted in an ignorant state of mind which misapprehends the true nature of reality. Hence, through gaining genuine insights into the true nature of reality, misconceptions can be dispelled, thus ~o:utting the root of all our di~sonant mental states and allowing the buddha-n.nurc within to manifest. The term 'nucleus of the tathagata' (t..Jthiig.Jt,Jgurbhu) is a synonym for this essence of buddhahood. Buddha-speech gswzg. Skt. u..ik The speech of the buddhas is, according to Nyingma literature, said to have five ;tspccts in that the buddhas may commumcatc through 1) uncreated meaning (skyenzed Jmz-gi gsung), 2) enlightened intention and symbols (dgongs-p..J brd..1'i gswzg), 3) expressive words (br,od-pa tshig-gi gszmg), 4) indivisible reality (dbyer-med rdo-r1e'z gszmg), and 5) the blessings of awareness (ng-pa bym-I.Jbs-kyi gswzg). Sec Buddha Attributes and Mantra. Burnt Offerings sbyin-sre!!.. Skt. homa A tantric ritual in whid1 m.my substances, such as wheat, sesame seeds, and mustard, etc., arc burnt as offerings in a fire lit on a spcctfically designed hearth. There arc different types of burnt-offering rituals corresponding to the enactment of the four rites related to the four aspects of enlightened activity: pacification, enrichment, subJugation and wrath. Calm Abiding zhi-gnas, Skt. sam,zthu Calm abiding is a meditJtive tc~o:hnique common to the entire Buddhist tradition, characterised by a stabilis,Hion of attention on an internal obJeCt of observation conJoined wtth the calming of external distractions to the mind. Calm abiding is an essential basis for trammg one's mind in the generation of penetrative insight (t'tfJ.Jsyana), a true analyticJl in~tghr into the more profound aspects of a chosen obJeCt, such as irs emptiness or ulttnute nature. Camaradvipa rnga-y,zb glmg The ~ulKonttnent CJnur.JdL·ifJu ts parricul..Hly assooatcJ, in Nyi11gma literature, with the Copper-coloured Mountain of Padmasambhava. Sec Four Continents and Eight Subcontinents. Caryatantra spyod-pa ·; rgyud Sec Ubhayatantra. Causal Vehicles rgyu mtshan-11yid-kyi theg-pa Sec Vehicle. Cause and Effect rgyu- 'bras, Skr. hetuphala In the context of Buddhist philosophy the term refers to the natural law that exists between a cause and its effect. Some of the principal features of the law arc: 1) nothing evolves uncaused; 2) any entity which itself lacks a process of change cannot cause any other event; and 3) only causes which possess natures that accord with specific effects can lead to those effects. The term 'cause and effect' is often used to translate the Sanskrit worJ kanua, which literally means 'action'. See Past Actions. Celestial Palace gzha/-yas-khang, Skt. vimJna Sec Ma!)~ala.

454
Central Channel rtsa dlm-ma, Skt. avadhzui See Energy Channels.

GLOSSARY OF KEY

TER~iS

Chang-bu Offerings ch • .mg-lm, Skt. pi~zLja finger-pressed strands of dough, which are made as offerings to assuage anguished spirits and to appease negative forces. Channel Branch rtsu- 'd.1h According to the tatrtras and related medical traditions, there are five energy centres located along the central channel of the body at the focal points of the crov..·n, throat, heart, navel and genitalia. A specific number of channel branches (rtsa-'d.zb) emerges from each of these energy centres, and these in turn conduct vital energy throughout the body through a network of 7 2,ooo minor channels. See Energy Channels. Channel of Pristine Cognition )'e-shcs-kyi dhztti According to the tantras, the channel of pristine cognition is a synonym for the central channel ot the body. See Vital Energy. Chiliocosm stong dmzg-po 'Jzg-rten-gyi khams, Skt. suhasralokadhatu According to traditional Indian Buddhist cosmology, the world of the four continents surrounding Mount Sumcru when multiplied one thousand times forms a chiliocosm of parallel worlds (stmzg dang-po). The chiliocosm when multiplied one thousand times forms a larger diclnlwcosm (strmg wzyis-pa), which in turn when multiplied one thousand rimes forms an even larger trichiliocosm (stong gsum-pa). This evolution of expanding worlds continues to enlarge incrementally until the inconceivably V<lSt number of multiple worlds is reached, in which a single supreme Buddha-body of Emanation is said to function simultaneously. Citipati dur-khrod bdag-po bdag-mo The Cztip.zti are a pair of male and female acolytes of Yama, lord of death, who are depicted as two skeletons in dancing posture, symbolising the rites of the charnel ground. Cittamatra sems-tsum-pu One of the four major Buddhist philosophical schools of ancient India, also known as Vzf1itinat•Jda, and associated in some respects with the YogJcJra tradition. The CittumJtr.z (lit. 'mind only') school founded by the fourth-century Indian master Asa1ig.z propounds an idealist or phenomenalistic view of the world. Its main tenet is that all phenomena are either actual mental events or extensions of the mind and the mind is regarded as existing as a substantially real entity. In addition, the school propounds that there exists no atomically composed material world external to, or independent of, our perceptions. According to the Cittamdtra school consciousness itself is considered ro be eightfold, with the ground-of-all consciousness as the foundation. Sec Aggregate of Consciousness. Cittamatrin sems rts.zm-pa-{Jo A follower of the CiNamJtra school. Civa1pcivaka sh.z11g-shang :\ m~·rhi,.:.JI -:rearure with the head, arms, and torso of a human being, and the wings .md leg-; of J bird. The throne of the male buddha Amoghasiddhi assumes the form of .1 cit•,mzch·.1k,z btrd.

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

455

Coemergent Delight /han-cig skyes-pa'i dga'-ba, Skt. sahajasukhalsahaja11a11da The coemergent delight is one of the four delights (dga '-ha bzln) experienced during the perfection stage (sampannakrama) of meditation. See Four Delights. It is said that the coemergent delight is also naturally experienced ar the moment of death (sec Chapter 8) and at the moment of conception (see Ch~tpter 11 ). Coemergent Ignorance /han-cig-skyes-pa 'i ma-rig-pa, Skt. sahajavidyii Sec Fundamental Ignorance. Coemergcnt Pristine Cognition lhan-skyes )'e-shes, Skt. sahajajfz,zna The natural emergence of pristine cognition th<H occurs Juring rhe perfection stage of meditation, when viral energy is absorbed within rhc central channel of rhe subtle body. Commitment dam-tshig, Skt. samaya A sacred commitment or pledge taken by a practitioner which is a prerequisite for rhe practice of the tantras. The Tibetan 'dam-tshig' literally means 'binding word', indicating that rhe person bewmes bound by a solemn oath. Each class of tantra has irs own categorisation of basic and ancillary commitments, which complement rhe pratimok~a and bodhisattva vows taken by those who uphold rhe vinaya and the sutra tradition of the Greater Vehicle respectively. Sec Vows. Samaya may entail the observation of specific precepts which are common to a whole clas!> of tantra, or individual precepts, which must be observed in relation to a particular mcditational deity. W'hen such commitments are broken they mu~t be restored through appropriate tantric ritual practices, for their degeneration may cause serious hindrances to progress on rhc path. See Chapter 7· Commitments of Indestructible Reality rdo-rjc dam-tsh~g, Skr. vajrasamay,z A synonym for the commitments in general which arc underr.tken in rhe context of the Vehicle of Indestructible Reality ( Vajraydna). Commitments Undertaken in Respect of Reality de-kho-na-nyid-kyi dam-tshig A synonym for the four commitments specific to the practice of Atiyoga. Compassion snyi11g-rje/thugs-rje, Skt. karuf!d In Buddhist literature, the term 'compassion' is often used as a synonym for 'great compassion' (mah.ikaru~z.i), which refers to a totally unbiased mind that aspires to the liberation of all sentient beings from suffering, equally. Compassion is said to become 'great' only when, through proper training of the mind, such an altruistic aspiration becomes spontaneous and no longer requires any conscious effort for its arising. The measure of having realised such a state is that one spontaneously feels a sense of intimacy and compassion towards all others, with the same degree of commitment and intensity that one feels towards one's most beloved. It is worth bearing in mind that in Buddhism, compassion should not be understood in terms J)f pity, which may 1mply a feeling of superionty toward the object of compassion. Conceptual Elaboration spros-pa, Skt. prapmica Conceptual elaboration refers to the presence of discursive or conceptual thought processes, the absence of \vhich (Skt. ni~prapafzca, Tib. spros-bral) is characteristic of the realisation of emptiness or actual reality. Confession of Negativity sdzg-p.z'i gshags-pa, Skt. pdp..Idesand A spiritual practi~..:e which involves the disclosure and purification of accumulated

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

negative actions. The successful application of confession must be undertaken within the framework of what are known as the four antidotal powers. for an explan,uion of thc!>e sec the introductory context to Chapter 7. Conqueror rt,')'..Il-bu, Skr. jina In Buddhist ltterature, this term is an epithet for a buddha, mdicating the victory attained by a buddha over cyclic existence (S.JI~tsJr.J). In particular in the context of this hook, the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource in the ma~ufala of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities is described as represented hy the 'five enlightened families of the conquerors' (rgyal-ba rigs-l11ga), where the five male buddhas, in both peaceful and wrathful forms, arc known as the five conquerors. Vajradhara, an aspect of the primordial buddha Samantabhadra, who represents the Buddha-body of Reality, is also known as the 'sixth conqueror' (rgyal-ba drug-pu) or 'lord of the sixth enlightened family'. More generally, in its Tibetan form, this same epithet is frequently used as an honorific title before the nall)es of highly venerated beings, e.g. Gyalu•.J Yizhin Nurhu (for HI-I the Dalai Lama), or Gyalwa Karmapa. Consciousness rnam-pur shes-pa, Skt. uijlldwl In Buddhism, comciousness is defined as 'an awareness which is knowing and luminious'. It is not physical and thus lacks any resistance to obstruction. It has neither shape nor colour; it can be experienced but not externally perceived as an objecc. In short, it indudes both the conscious cognitive events and the subconscious aspects of the mind through which we know and perceive the world, as well as the emotions. A distinction is made between the mundane consciousness (uitii,/11.1) of sentient beings, and the pristine cognition (jnJna) of the buddhas. See Pristine Cognition and Aggregate of Consciousness. Consciousness Transference 'p!Ju-b.J, Skt. sa1~zkrJ11ti A unique tantric practice undertaken to transfer the consciousness at the time of de.tth, ideally to the unconditiOned state of the re<tlisation of the Buddha-body of Reality, or to a realm of existence with a favourable migration, ide.tlly the pure realm of a meditational deity. See Chapter 10. Continuum of the Ground gzhi'i '1-.')'tuf, Skt. Jsrayat.mtra The continuum of the ground is identified with the primordially present intrinsic awareness, and the actual reality or emptiness, which is in harmony with the fruitiunal aspects of buddhahood. Accordmg to the tantras, the continuum of the ground (gzhi'i rgyud) is the basis through which the continuum of the path (lam-gyi rgyud) fully manifests as the continuum of the result ( 'hras-bu ·; rgyud). Continuum of the Path lam-gyi rgyud, Skt. margatantra According to the ta11tras, the continuum of the path is the means through which the continuum of the ground (gzhi'i rgyuJ) becomes fully mamiest as the continuum of the result ( 'bras-bu ·; rgyud). Continuum of the Result 'bras-bu ·; rgyuJ, Skt. phalatantra According to the tantras, the continuum of the result is the fruition or conclosion attained when the continuum of the ground (gzhi'i rgyud) becomes fully manifest. through the continuum of the path (lam-gyi rgyud).

G I. 0 S S A R Y 0

r

K E Y T E R :\1 S

457

Copper-coloured .Mountain ::angs-mdog Jp.ll-ri, Skt. Tamrasriparuata A sacred abode located on rhe sub(ontincnt Camaradvipa (rnga-yab gling), where Padmasambhava is said to (LJrrenrly restde in an awesome rainbow·ltght form. Core-penetrating ~ung-th,;/ Sec Ascending and Core-penetrating. Cutting through Resistance khregs-chod A(.:ording to the pith or esoteri( instrudions (m,;n-ng,;g-gt sde) of the Great Perfection (Ati)•oga) there are two medir.uive techniques, which arc en~agcd in suo.:essivcly. The first, Curting through Resistance (khregs-chod) focuses on the recognition of primordial purity (ka-dug), the nature of awareness (ng-pa), through which rhe Buddha-body of Reality is attatncd. The second, All-surpassing Realisation (thod-rga/), focuses on the recognition of spontaneous presence (lhun-?.ntb), eliciting and recognising the radiances of pristine cognition and the purity of our psycho-physical aggregates and clements, rhrough which the rainbow-like Buddhabody of Form is attained. In All-surpassing Realisation practice, once a stablt: rc.1lisation of the nature of aw<treness has been art<tined through Curting through Rcsist<tnce, all phenomenal appearances arc liberated through <1 spontaneous realisation of their essential modality .1s inner radiance. Curting through Resistance is the subject matter of Chapter 4 of the present work. The introduction to the intermediate state of reality, in C:h3pter 1 1 of our text, is illustrative of the esoteric instructions on All-surpassing Realisation, whiCh is the pinnacle of meditative practice ac(ording to the Nyingma school. Cyclic Existence 'khor-ba, Skt. sa1~tsJr.J A state of existence condtttoned by dissonant mental states and the imprint of past actions (karmu), charadcrised by suffering in a cycle of ltfc, death and rebirth, in whteh the six classes of sentient beings (~<lL.Jgati; Tib. 'gro-ha rigs-drug) rotate. Cyclic existence emerges from fundamental ignorance (al'idya) through a process known as the tweh·e links of dependent origination (dt Jdast.itiga-pratityasamutfJt.ida). When fundamental ignorance, identified as the misapprehension of the nature of actual reality (dharm.JtJ), is rcversrd, cyclic existence is itself reversed, and the contrasting state of nin'ii'Ja is attained, free from suffering and tht: processes of rebirth. Sec Dependent Origination and ;-..;irv<l'!a.
1

l)akini mkha ·- 'gro-ma qJkmi arc female }'Ogini who have attained either mundane or supramundane sptrttual accomplishments (stddln), the latter referring to the realisations of buddhahood. They may be hum.1n beings who have achieved such attainments, or manifestattons of the enlightened acttvity of meditational deities. The Tibetan equivalent ~mkha'- 'gro literally means 'space voyager', space metaphorically implying cmpti- ness, and voyager indicattng someone immersed in its experience. The cft.ikini arc said to confer enlightened or buddha-activities on the meditator, in contrast to the spiritual teacher who confers blessings and the mcditational deity who confers accomplishments. J?akini of Pristine Cognition ye-shes mkha'- 'gro, Skt. jtiJn,lcjJkini The female consorts of the pnncip<ll awareness holders of maturation, power over the lifespan, the Great Seal and spontaneous presence.

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

I?akini of the Three Abodes g11as-gsum mkha'- 'gro The tjJkmi of the three abodes are those of buddha-body, speech and mind. Dalai Lama rgyal bu yid-bzhi11 1zor-lmlri11-po-chc The temporal and sp1ritual leader of Tibet. The Da/,;i Lama's temporal reign beg.m at the time of the fifth Dalai Lama in the 17th century. Since then the country has heen ruled, periodically, by a succession of Dalai Lam,;s, until China's occupation in the J ')50s. The Da/,zi Lamas are chosen according to a strict traditional procedure of observation and examination initiated following the death of the previous Da/,;i Lamu. The present D,z/ai Lama is the fourteenth in the succession of this lineage. The title 0,1/ui Lama was originally offered to Sonam Gyatso, the third Da/,zi Lmza, by the then ~Iongo) prince Alta11 Qan. The Mongol word da-lui (Tib. rgyu-mtsho) means 'ocean (of wisdom)'. Qamaru cjd-ma-ru A hand-held douhlc-sided drum, frequently identified with the wrathful deities and the qakini, and generally utilised as a ritual instrument in conjunction with the bell. The c.J.lmaru is said to proclaim 'the sound of great bliss'. Dedication of Merit bsngo-bu, Skt. pumllimu An important element of Buddhist pr;~ctice enacted normally in the form of a recitation of verses of dedication at the conclusion of a spiritual practice. In all Buddhist practices, the establishment of the correct motivation at the beginning and the altruistic dedication at the end arc regarded as highly significant. The most popular obJects of the dedication <1re the flourishing of the sacred teachings of Buddhism throughout the universe and the arrainment of full enlightenment by all sentiem beings. Definitive Meaning nges-do11, Skt. IZitdrth,; The sutru teachings of the budd has are classified as being of either definitive meaning or provisional meaning (neydrtha) depending on whether they do not or do require further interpretation. In general, sutras of provisional meaning concern the nature of cyclic existence (sa'?zsdra) and its antidotes, as expounded by Siikyamutri Buddha in the first turning of the wheel of the sacred teachings. By contrast, those sutras of definitive meaning concern either the nature of emptiness, as expressed in the second turnin~ of the wheel of the sacred teachings, or the explications on buddha nature and buddha-attributes, as expressed in the third turning of the wheel of the sacred teachings. There arc divergent views in the various schools of Tibetan Buddhism .1s to which of the sutras of the second and third turnings should be regarded as definitive or provisional. Age snyigs-ma'i dus, Skr. k,z/iyuga According to the prevatlmg view of Indian cosmology, a period of cosmic or cydical time (aeon, Skr. kai{J.J) comprises fourteen secondary cycles (Skt. mant'antara), each of wh~eh la~ts 30ll,720,ooo years. Each secondary cycle is said to contain seventyone 'great ages' (Skt. IIZLlhdyuga), and each of these is further subdivided in1<''l four ages (Skt. caturyugu) whi~h arc of decreasing duration, and known respectively~ the Perfect Age (k~tayuga), the Third Age (tretdyuga), the Second Age (duJp,;rayug,l), and the Black or Dq~enerate Age (kaliyuga). Since these four ages represent a gr.1dual decline in meritorious activities, special meditative practices and spiritual antidote~ .ne associated with each in turn. Specifically, the Per(ect Age is most suited
Dc~cnerate

GLOS'>ARY OF KEY TER:'\IS

459

to the practice of the Kriyatu1rtra; the Third Age to that of the Caryiita1rtra; the Second Age to th,n of the Yogatautra; and the present Black or Degenerate Age to that of the Unsurpa~sed Yog,lta1ltra.

Deity yi-dam, Skt. i~~.Jdcuat,i See under Meditational Deity. Delusion gti-rnug, Skt. moha One of the three poisons (Jug-gsum) along with aversion and attachment, or five poisons (dug-lnga) along with aversion, attachment, pride, and envy, which perpetuate the sufferings oi cyclic existence. Delusion is the obfuscating mental factor which obstructs an individual from generating knowledge or insight, and it is said to be charactenstic of the animal world in general. Dense Array gtug-po bkod-p.;, Skt. Ghanauyzlha The Dense Array is a synonym for the central buddha field of Akani~!ha. See under AbniHha. Dependent Origination rtm- "brei, Skt. pr.ltityasamutpada The doctrine of dependent origination can be said to be the most fundamental met<tphysical view of Buddhist thought and it is intimately linked with the Buddhist notion of causation. The principle of dcpendem origination asserts that nmhing exists independently of other factors, the reason for this being that things and events come into existence only by dependence on the aggreg<Hion of multiple causes and conditions. In gcncr<li, the processes of cyclic existence, through which the external world and the sentient beings within it revolve in a continuous cycle of suffering, propelled by the propensities of past actions and their mteraction with dissonant mental states, arc said to originate dependent on twelve successive links, which are known as the twelve links of dependent origination (du.zdasti1iga-pratitya;;,mzutf"JJ,z). These compnse: I) fundamental ignorance, .z.) motivational tendencies, J) comciousness, 4) name and form, 5) sensory activity fields, 6) contact, 7) sensation, 8) attachment, 9) grasping, ro) rebirth process, 1 I) birth, I .z.) ageing and death. Although, in the ultimate sense there is no beginning to the continuum of mind, a relative beginning can be spoken of on the basis of a single instance of rebirth within cyclic existence. Every instance of birth in cyclic existence must have a cause and such causes arc ultimately rooted in our fundamental ignorance, which misapprehends the: true nature of actual reality. for an ordinary sentient being all the twelve links are interconnected and each component of the chain contributes to the perpetuation of the cycle. It is only through deliberate reversal of fundamental ignorance that one can succeed in bringing the whole cycle to an end. Fundamental ignorance (at·idyti) giVC:s rise ro conditioning or tendencies (sat~lsktira) which are stored in the substr~num or ground-of-all consciousness (tilay.wijnJna). Following the moment of a sentient being's conception, this inheritance of past actions from a previous life gives rise to name and form (mimanlpa), i.e. to the five psycho-physical aggregates (p.;fic,zskandha), which arc products of that dualising consciousness. Then, the sensory activity fields (ayat.Jna) provide the subjective and objective framework for sensory activity in its initial stages of development; while contact (sparsa) refers to the maturation of sensory perception as an unborn child develops a sensitivity to its environment inside the womb. Thereafter, sensation (t 1edana), attachment (t~·~l.l.l), grasping (JdJna), rebirth process (!Jh.;va), and actual birth (jtiti)

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

together indicate the emergence of a sentient being within the living world; and these in turn lead inevnably to old age and death (jardmar,u.la). Desire 'dod-chags, Skt. raga Sec Attachment. Desire Realm, Skt. kiimadhJtu See Three World-systems. Dhanakosa dha-na-ko-sa The name of an island lake situated in the country of 04tJiyaua, generally identified in the Tibetan tradition with the Swat Valley of modern Pakistan, where many of the Buddhist tantras were once disseminated and practised. It is considered to have been the birthplace of both l'rahevajra, the first human lineage holder of Atiyoga, and of Padmasambhava. Dharmaraja chos-rgya/ See under Yama Dharmaraja. Discriminative Awareness shes-rah, Skt. prajtia The Sanskrit term prajfid is formally defined as 'the discriminative awareness of the essence, distinctions, particular and general characteristics, and advantages and disadvantages of any object within one's own perceptual range, at the conclusion of which doubts are removed'. In other words, this is the faculty of intelligence or discriminating awareness inherent within the mental continuum of all living creatures which enables them to examine the characteristics of things and events, thus making it possible to make judgements and deliberations. The term prajfid has commonly been translated into English as 'wisdom', largely following the example of Edward Conze, who translated a voluminous series of texts devoted to the Perfection of Discriminative Awareness (PraJ1i..ipJramita). According to the abhidhanna of the Lesser Vehicle, pra11id is one of the five mental factors of ascert~lin­ ment which arise during all mental events of a veridical nature. According to the Greater Vehicle, the perfection of this faculty of discriminative awareness (praifldfJdranutd) leads a bodhisattva to a total overcoming of all types of doubt and ignorance and to the realisation of the emptiness of all things. Here, in conjunction with skilful means (updya), the term praj1iopaya refers to the integration of the two princ1pal aspects of the path to enlightenment. In this context praj1ia, or true insight into the emptiness of all phenomena, is united in perfect union with skilful means. In tantric traditions, the union of prui1iopdyu is often depicted iconographically in the union of the male and female deities, and in the symbolic hand-implements such as the vajra and the bell. Dissonant Mental States nyon-numgs, Skt. klesa The essentially pure nature of mind is obscured and afflicted by the various psychological defilements known as the dissonant mental states. The Tibct~ln word nyonmongs implies a mental event whose arising causes psychological afflictions within the mind, thus destroying its peace and composure. According to abhidluznna literature in general, there arc six primary dissonant mental states: fundamental ignorance, attachment, aversion, pride, doubt, and afflicted or dissonant views; and an enumeration of twenty subsidiary mental states (Skt. upaklesa), which comprise: anger, malice, dissimulation, fury, envy, miserliness, dishonesty, deception, arrogance, mischief, indecorum, indecency, obfuscation, agitation, distrust, laziness,

(;LOSSARY OF KEY

TER~IS

distraction, and inattentiveness. Even more w1de-ranging are the 84,000 dissonant mental '>tates tor which the 84,000 aspects of the sacred teachings arc said to provide distinctive antidotes. At the root of all these psychological aitlictions lies the fundamental ignorance which misapprehends the true nature of reality. Downfalls ltung-h.1, Skr. JfhJltl See T ransgrcssions. Dream Yoga rmi-lam
~lcditative techniljues for utilismg and transforming dream consciousness within

carele~sness, forgetfulne~s.

the context of Unsurpassed Yugatantra practice. These include: meditative techniques tor retaining ;nvarencss Juring the dream state; multiplying and transforming the contents of dreams and recognising their actual nature; and the dispelling of obstacles which prevent m<lintaining awareness in the dream stare. Dualism gnyis-s1r.mg, Skr. llhhay.rhhJs,z Any level of perception of duality. Buddhist thought describes various forms of dualism, principal amongst these being: r) a dualistic perception of subject and object; 2) all appe.uances of inherent existence; 3) all appearances of conventionalities; and 4) all forms of conceptuality. A genuine direct realisation of emptiness is non-dual, in that it is free from all the above forms of dualism. Dwgchen rd;:,ogs-chcn, Skt. m.zhJsandhi Sec Great Perfection. Fight Charnel Grounds dur-khrod hrgy.1d The eight charnel grounds .He thl· great cemeteries of aw..:icnt India, which are regarded as insplr<Hional pl;lces for the practice of meditation. These are respectively known, in Tibetan tr.mslarion, as Tumdrak (gtum-drag), Tsangt~ing Tnkpa (tshungtshing 'khngs-pa), B<lr T rikpa ( 'h.zr 'k!Jrigs-pu), Kengruchen (keng-rus-c,m), Silbutscl (bsil-hu-tsh.JI, Skr. .~ituz·,m,z), .\1unpa Nagpo (mun-pa nag-po), Kili Kilir Dradrokpa (ki-ll ki-l1r sgr.J-sgrug-pu), and Haha Godpa (hu-hu rgod-pa). Eight Classes of Consciousness m.zm-shes tshogslg1z.1s-hrgyad St·c undl·r Aggregate of Consciousness. Eight Classes of Spirits sde-brgy,zd A dass1hcation of the m.1hgn forces that can be appe;lscd by specific offerings and rituals. Diverse enumerations of th~:se malign forces have been made by Nuhchen Sangye Yeshe. Accordingly, there is an outer eightfold group (phyi-yi sde hrgy,zd), an inner eightfold ~roup (111111g-gi sde brgyad), a secret eightfold group (gsang-ba'i sde brgyud), a supreme e1ghttold group (mchog-gi sde hrgyad), an emanational eightfold group (sprul-pa'i sJe hrgyad), and a phenomenal eightfold group (snung-

srid sde hrgyad).
Eight Extremes mtha'-hrgy,zd, Skr. a~[Jnta The eight extremes from which intrinsic awareness is free arc those enumerated by Nagiirjuna in the Root Stanz.1s of the M,zdhyumaka entitled Discriminative Auhzreness (Prajn.inam,l mu/,mz,zdhyumukukdrika, T 3824), namely: cessation

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

('gag-fJa), creation or production (skye-ha), nihilism (chad-pa), eternalism (rtag-pa), coming ( 'ong-ba), going ( 'gro-ba), diversity (tha-dad-pa), and singularity (gcig-pa).
Eight Freedoms and Ten Opportunities da/-ba hrgyad dang 'byor-ba bcu Birth as a human being with the freedom and opportunity to follow the Buddhist path is regarded as difficult to attain and a precious circumstance. In the preliminary practices of the tantra path, in order to establish an appreciation for the significance of human rebirth, the freedom one has from eight unfavourable rebirths is a focus of contemplation, together with contemplation of the ten favourable opportunities. The eight freedoms arc the freedoms from the following eight states: birth in the hells, birth as an anguished spirit, birth as an animal, birth as an uncivilised or barbarous person, birth as a long-living god, birth into a society that holds mistaken beliefs, birth in an age devoid of Buddhism, and birth with limited faculties. Among the ten favourable opportunities, there arc five which are personally acquired and five which are contingent on external factors. The former comprise the favourable opportunities of being born as a human being, i"n a civilised society, with perfect sense-faculties, not being engaged in a conflicting lifestyle, and having confidence in Buddhism. The latter comprise the favourable opportunities of being born in an aeon when a buddha has appeared, when the sacred teachings have been taught, when they arc still being practised, and when one actively engages in their practice, and finds a qualified spiritual friend (k,;/yanamitra). Sec Chapter 1. Eight [Great] Fears 'jigs-pa hrgyad, Skr. a~[abhuya These arc variously enumerated but often include: drowning, fires, thieves, captivity, lions, snakes, elephants, and spirits. Eight Great Projectrcsses spur-byed chen-mu brg)•ad The eight great projectresscs are female deities representing forces that propel various classes of sentient beings to exalted rebirths during the intermediate state of reality. Sec Chapter 6. Eight Objects [of Consciousness] [m,;m-shes-kyij yu/ brgyad These arc the objects of the eight classes of consciousness, i.e. deep-seated habitual tendencies (ground-of-all consciousness), dissonant mental states (deluded consciousness), thoughts (mental consciousness), sights (visual consciousness), objects of taste (gustatory consciousness), sounds (auditory consciousness), smells (olfactory consciousness) and physical objects (tactile consciousness). See under Aggregate of Consciousness. Eight Sensory Objects yul brgyad Sec Eight Objects of Consciousness. Eighteen Hells dmyal-ha bco-brJ.,ry,;d, Skr. a~fadasanaraka States of existence within the cycle of rebirth, conditioned by our past actions, where the expericm:e of suffering, arising from hatred, anger and fear, is most intense and extended. Abhidhanna literature mentions two main types of such hell-like existences, characterised by the dominance of either freezing coldness or burning hear. These two arc in turn divided into eighteen subcategories. Eighty Minor Marks dpe-byad brgyad-cu, Skt. asityanuvyaiijana See Major and Minor Marks.

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

Eighty-four Thousand Aspects of the [Sacred] Teaching chos-sgo brgyad-khri hzhi stong The Buddha's teachings are said to comprise eighty-four thousand aspects or approaches, when they are classified according to their function as an antidote. It is said that there are eighty-four thousand dissonant mental states, comprising twenty-one thousand aspects respectively of attachment (raga), aversion (dvesa), delusion (moha), and their combination; and there is an antidote within the Buddha's teachings corresponding to each of these dissonant mental states. Elemental forces 'byung-po, Skt. bhota A category of forces associated with the elements: earth, water, fire, wind and space, which are said to move through the body in a monthly cycle and to whom certain illnesses and paediatric disorders arc attributed in Tibetan medicine. These may be appeased or brought back into balance by the application of medicinal antidotes, or by the counteracting rituals prescribed in the tantras, as outlined in Chapter 9· Elements I Elemental Properties 'hyung ba, Skt. bhuta Sec five Elements. Eleven Vehicles theg-pa hcu-gcig See Vehicle. EMA e-ma Identical to EMAHO. EMAHO e-ma-ho An exclamation of great wonder or astonishment. Empowerment dhang-bskur, Skt. ahhi~eka A ritual ceremony performed by accomplished spiritual teachers and lineage holders to empower prospective trainees, prior to their engaging in the various vehicles and specific practices of the tantras. The meditative processes of the empowerment ritual arc intended to activate the potentials inherent within the body, speech and mind of the trainee, in other words to awaken the seed of the natural ability to engage in the practice. Such empowerment ceremonies are an essential prerequisite for the practice of tantra in the Buddhist tradition. Sec also Four Empowcrments. Emptiness stong-pa-nyid, Skt. sunyata The ultimate nature of reality. According to the Madhyamaka school it is the total absence of inherent existence and self-identity with respect to all phenomena. Its synonyms include ultimate truth (Skt. paramdrthasatya), actual reality (Skt. dharmata), and suchness (Skt. tathatJ). Though presented in the scriptures of both the Lesser Vehicle and the Greater Vehicle, the theory of emptiness is most systematically developed in the writings of the second-century Buddhist thinker Nagarjuna, the founder of the Madhyamaka school. According to this view, all things and events, both external and internal, are devoid of any independent, intrinsic reality that constitutes their essence. Nothing can be said to exist independently from the complex network of factors that gives rise to their origination, nor are phenomena independent of the cognitive processes and conceptual designations (mental constructs) that make up the conventional framework within which their identity and existence are posited. It is our deeply ingrained tendency to conceive of things as materially existing in their own right that conditions and compels us to perceive

GLOSSARY OF KEY

TER~tS

and grasp at a substantial reality of things and our own existence. In turn, when all levels of wnccptualisation dissolve and when all forms of dichotomising tendencies are quelled through deliberate meditative deconstruction of conceptual elaborations, Niigiirjuna argues, the ultimate nature of reality - the emptiness - will finally become manifest to the person. Although the term is known also in the literature of the Lesser Vehicle, it is in the philosophical tenets of the Madhyamaka school that the different interpretations of emptiness were greatly elaborated. See Madhyamaka. Energy Centre rtsu-'khor, Skt. cakra According to the tantras and related medical traditions, there are five energy centres within the subtle body. These arc located at the crown, throat, heart, navel and genitalia, where the right and left channels are said to loop around the central channel (uvadhzlti), forming knots (rtsa-nzdud) which obstruct the flow of subtle energy into the central channel. At each of the five energy centres, there are a diverse number of channel branches (rtsa- 'd,lh), through which vital energy is conducted throughout the body. · Energy Channels rts.J, Skt. nJc./i In the tantras and related medical traditions, it is said that there arc 7 2,ooo vein-like channels through which flow the vital energies or subtle winds (r/ung, Skt. vayu) that sustain life and which also give rise to various conceptual states within the individual's mind. Three main channels run vertically from the crown fontanelle of the head down to the genitalia, intersecting at the five energy centres (Skt. cukra) of the crown, throat, heart, navel and genitalia. All the minor energy channels branch off from these energy centres to permeate the body. Among the three main channels, the one to the left is known as the rkyu,zg-ma (Skt. lalanJ), the one to the right as the ro-m.J (Skt. rasanJ), and the central channel as the dhu-ma (Skt. avadhzUi). Enlightened Family rigs, Skt. gotralkula This term may render either the Sanskrit gotra, in which case it is synonrmous with buddha nature, or the Sanskrit kula, in which case it refers to the five families (Skt. pa,..icakula) into which the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities are grouped. Sec the individual entries under Buddha Family, Vajra Family, Ratna Family, Padma Family and Karma Family and Appendix Two. Enlightened Intention dgrmgs-pa, Skt. ahhiprJya In the context of our text, enlightened intention refers to the unimpeded, nonconceptual and compassionate intention of the buddhas, whether or not it is clearly di~cerned by an observer. Enlightenment by,mg-chuh, Skt. hodhi In the Buddhist context, 'enlightenment' refers to an individual's awakening to the mind's <tctual nature. The Tibetan equivalent byang-chub implies the purification (hyung) of obscurations and the perb:tion (chub) of omniscience. The process of a training enlightenment therefore proceeds in conjunction with the dispelling of the dissonant mental states which obscure the perception of actual reality. On the bodhisattva path, thirty-seven distinct aspects of enlightenment are sequentially ~ultivatcd. A fully enlightened being is a buddha who is totally free from all obstru~tion to true knowledge and the state of liberation, and is hence omniscient 111 the knowledge of reality.

t;LO~~:\RY

OF KEY TER.\'IS

Enrichment rgy..Js-pu'Jias, Skt. pu~~iknyJ See Four Aspects of Enlightened Activity and Buddha-activities. Envy phrag-dog, Skt. ir~a Envy, which includes all the various forms of self-cherishing ambition, is one of the five poisons of the mind (dug-lnga), along with aversion, delusion, pride, and attachment. In its extreme manifestation, of persistent hostile competitiveness, it is said to characterise the worlds of the antigods (asuraloka). Equanimity bt111zg-snyoms, Skt. upek~a Equammity is one of the four immeasurable aspirations, along with loving kindness, compassion and empathetic joy, which arc cultivated in the preliminary practices and commonly repeated before engaging in daily practice. Equanimity is an essential element of the cultivation of the altruistic intention to attain enlightenment for the benefit of others, in the context of which the practitioner culrivates an unbiased attitude towards all sentient beings, regarding them as being completely equal and thus overcoming any sense of partiality towards them. Normally one's attitude towards other persons, for example, is strongly prejudiced by one's classification of others into seemingly incompatible groups of friends, enemies or those regarded with indifference. Sec also under Bodhicitta. Esoteric Instructional Class nzan-ngag-gi sde, Skt. upadesauarga See under Great Perfection. Essence, Natural Expression and Compassionate Energy ngo-bo rang-hzhin
tlm~s-rie

In the terminology of the Great Perfection, the essence (n~u-bo) is the modality of the Buddha-body of Reality, natural expression (rang-b:::hm) is the modality of the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource, and compassionate energy or spirituality (thugs-r1e) is the modality of the Buddha-body of Emanation. These three modalities may be cultivated through the techniques known as Cutting through Resistance (klnegs-chod) and All-surpassing Realisation (thod-rgal). The term natural expression (rang-lnhin) also has another distinctive usage in the context of the present work, where it frequently refers to the attributes represented by the twentyeight lsuari among the assembly of the fifty-eight wrathful deities. See Natural Expression. Eternalist mu-stegs-pa, Skt. tirthika In general Buddhist u-;age, the term 'etcrnalist' refers to the four so-called etcrnalistic s...:hools of ancient India, namely S.lf?zkhy.;, Vaishnavism, Shaivism and Jainism, whi...:h posit the existence of an independent self or soul (atmun, Tib. bdag). By contrast, Buddhist schools identify the self in terms of the five psycho-physical aggregates (p,ziicask,mdha), and therefore do not accept the notion of self in the sense of an eternal, unchanging, independently existing entity. Both eternalism and nihilism are regarded as the two extreme views, which are to be avoided when seeking an insight into emptiness, the true nature of reality, by means of the Middle Way (madhyamapr,aipad). Here all apprehensions of inherent existence constitute falling into the extreme of eternalism, and a total denial of the laws of cause and effect in association with past and future lives constitutes falling into nihilism. Expilnsc of [Actual] Reality chos-dbyings, Skt. dharmadhJtu The expanse of actual reality is a synonym for the expanse of emptiness. As such,

G L 0 S S A R Y 0 I" K E Y T E R ~1 S

it indil:ates both the dimension of the Buddha-body of Reality, and the pristine cognition of reality's expanse (dh.;rm.Jdh,Uujii.:Zna). Extremes mtha', Skt. antu From the perspective of the Greater Vehicle, the Buddha-body of Reality is s.tid to be free from the dualisti~: extremes of ~:reation and cess~uion (skye- 'gag), eternalism and nihilism (rtag-chad). existeiKe and non-existen~:e (yod-med), and appearaiKe and emptiness (s1wng-stong). Feast-offering tshugs fkyi 'khor-loj, Skt. gul.z..Jcakra The Tibetan word tshogs generally has two senst:s, corresponding to the Sanskrit sambhara and ga~zacakra. In the latter case it refers to the feast-offerings whi~:h are a unique tantric method for conferring accomplishment and pacifying obsrades. In general, feast-offerings are frequently held to commemorate important events in the Buddhist calendar, such as the tenth-day feast-offering, dedicated to Padmasambhava. The overall purpose is to distribute merit and pristine cognition in the context of a specific tantric ritual. See also under Accumulation. Final Nirval)a yungs-su mya-ngan-las 'dus, Skt. parinirvd1_za The expression 'final nirud1.za' refers spel:ifically to the passing away of buddhas, su~:h as Sakyamuni, and it is considered to be the last of the twelve prin~:ipal deeds, exemplified by the death of .Sakyamuni at Kusinagara. See also under Nirval)a and Buddha activities. Five Aggregates phullg-fw lnga, Skt. paflcaskandha See the separate entries, under Aggregate of Consciousness, Aggregate of Form, Aggregate of Feelings, Aggregate of Perceptions, and Aggregate of Motivational Tendencies. Five Appendages y.m-lug lngu, Skr. puncJ1iga The head and the four limhs. Five Approximating Crimes nye-ba'i mtsh.Jms-med lngu, Skt. P.JiicopJnt,zriy.J The five crimes which approximate the five inexpiable crimes (mtshams-meJ lng.J) in their severity are: to rape a fcm.1le arhat (dgra-bcom-ma-l.J 'dod-log spyod-pa), to kill one who abides on the level of a genuine bodbisattv.J (hyan[!.-sems nges-gnas gsod-pa), to kill a trainee monk (sloh-pu 'i dge- 'dun gsod-fJ.J), to misappropriate the in~:ome of the monastic community (dge- 'dun-gyi 'Ju-sgo 'phrog-pu), and to destroy

a stiipa (mchod-rten bslng-pu).
Five Buddha-bodies sku lnga, Skr. p,ziicakaya The Buddha-body of Reality, Buddha-body of Perfect Resource, Buddha-hody of Emanation, Buddha-body of Aw~1kening, and Buddha-body of lnJestru~:tihle Reality. See Buddha-body and individual enrries. Five Degenerations snyigs-ma l11ga, Skt. pancak.J~aya The five degenerations comprise: degeneration of the lifespan (ayul!kasJya), degeneration in terms of views (d~~(ika~ay,z), degeneration in terms of d~sonant mental states (kleiak,z~Jy,z), degeneration of sentient beings (sattuaka~d)'u), all'ti degeneration of the present age (kalpaka~aya). Five Elements 'hywzg-ba l11ga I khums /11ga, Skt. paiicabhzual panc.zd/}{itu Al:l:ording to the Indo-Tibetan system, as expounded in the tantras, mediGll and

GLO~SARY

01' KEY TERMS

astrologiCal texts, the five elements: earth, water, fire, wind, and space are five basic components that make up our environment, our bodies, and, at their subtle levels, mod.1litics of the mind. At the subtlest level, the elemental properties exist as the pure natures represented by the five female buddhas (Akasadhatvisvari, Buddhalocana, AlJmaki, Pa,_ufarav.lsini and S.:mz.Jyutdrd) and these manifest as the physical propcrnes of earth (solidity), water (fluidity), fire (heat and light), wind (movement and energy). and space - in other words as all the qualities that constitute the physical forms that we experience through our senses. A proper understanding of the clements and the way in which their properties permeate the nature of mind, the body and our environment is fundamental to the practice of Buddhist tantra. See Chapters 8 and I I and Appendix Two. Five Enlightened Families rzgs lnga, Skt. pa1icakula Sec Buddha Family, Vajra Family, Ratna Family, Padma Family, and Karma Family and Appendix Two. Five Hollow Viscera snod-lnga According to the traditions of Tibetan medicine, the five hollow viscera are those of the stomach, the large inrestinc, the small intestine, the bladder, the gall bladder, and the reservoir of reproductive fluid (bsam-se'u). Five Inexpiable Crimes mtshams-med lnga, Skt. panciinantarfya The five inexpiable Gimes, which arc regarded as the most severe and consequently the most difficult to overcome by reparation, are: matricide (ma gsod-pa), arhatcide (Jgra-bcom-{Ja gsod-pa), patricide (pha gsod-pa), creating a schism in the monastic community (dge- 'dzm-gyi dbyen-byas-ba), and intentionally wounding a buddha

(Jc-b;:,hm gshegs-po1'i sku-I.Jngan-sems-kyzs khrag 'byin-pa).
Five Poisons dug-lnga, Skt. {Jmicaklesa The five poisons comprise five of the most basic dissonant mental states (k/esa) all of which are grounded in fundamental ignorance (avzdya). They are: delusion (moh.J), attachment (r.lga), aversion (Jr·e~a), pride (abhzmdna), and envy/selfcherishing ambition (ir~J). Five Precious Substances rin-chen lngo1 Gold, silver, turquoise, coral and pearl. Five Pristine Cognitions ye-shes lnga, Skt. pafzcdj1i.l11a Sec under Pristine Cognition. Five Sense-faculties/organs dbang-po rnam-lnga, Skt. paiicendriya The five sense-faculties or sense-organs comprise: the eyes (cak~urindriya), ears (srotrendriya), nose (ghra,_zenJriya), tongue (jihvendriya), and body (kayendriya). Five Solid Viscera do11-lnga Acwrding to the traditions of Tibetan medicine, the five solid viscera are the heart, lungs, liver, kidneys, and spleen. Form Realm and Formless Realm See Three World-systems. Formal Description mngon-rtogs, Skt. abhisamaya While practising the generation stage (utpattikrama) of meditation, the deities arc visualised in accordance with their formal descriptions which are set down in the

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

texts of the appropriate means for attainment (sgrub-thabs, Skt. sadhana). In other contexts the term 'abhisumaya' conveys the sense of 'emergent or clear realisation', as in Maitreya's Omument of Emergent Reahsution (Ablns,zmay,zlu'?zkJra). Four Aspects of Enlightened Activity las-bzhi, Skt. cutu~kamzun These are specific ritual functions based on the dynamic modes of a buddha's activity, namely: pacification (santikriya, Tib. zhi-ba'i las), which includes the pacification of obstacles to spiritual practice, illness and the causes of harm to society and the environment; enrichment (pu~(ikriya, Tib. rgyas-pa'i las), which includes increasing the lifcsp.111 and prosperity; subjugation (uu~llukriya, Tib. dbang-gz Ius), which includes the controlling of neg;ltive and hostile forces; and wrath or transformation (mura1.wkriya, Tib. drag-po 'i las), which includes the elimination of male,·olent forces. The ritu;tl enactment of these four rites is often undertaken in the context of a burnt offering ritual (homa). Four Aspects of Ritual Service and Means for Attainment bsnyen-sgrub yan-lag

bzhi, Skt. caturd1!gaseuJsadhana
Whenever any means for attainment (Skt. s,zdlhl1ta) is practised, it will comprise the 'four aspects of ritual service and means for attainment'. The four branches are: ritual service (set,a), further ritual service (upaseua), means for attainment (sadhana) and great means for attainment (mt~hasadhana), which respectively entail 1) mantra recit.Hion and one-pointed visualisation of the meditational deity, 2.) prayers that the blessing of the deity will descend to transform mundane body, speech and mind into buddha-body, speech and mind, 3) the absorption of accomplishments from the actual deity into the visualised deity and thence into oneself, and 4) the realisation of primordial purity experienced when body, speech and mind arc identical to those of the deity. Four Aspects of Sensory Contact reg-b;;hi These are sensory contact, along with Its subject, object and actual sensation. Four Buddha-bodies sku-hzhi, Skt. cutul?kJya See under Buddha-body. Four Classes of Qakini mkha ·- 'gro sde-bzhi. The four classes of tf.akini comprise those born in sacred abodes or pure lands (zhing-skyes mkha'-'gro), those born in consequence of mantra recitation (sngugsskyes mkha'-'gro), those -...·ho are naturally born (/hmz-skyes mkhu'-'gro), and those born of pristine cognition (ye-shes mkha'- 'gro). Four Continents and Eight Subcontinents gling lnhi-dang gling-phran brgyud According to traditional Indian Buddhist cosmology, the world has Mount Sumeru as its central axis, surrounded bv seven concentric oceans divided from one another by seven successive ranges of go.lden mountains: Yugandhura, l~adhara, Khadinku, Sudarsan.z, A~uakanz,z, Vinataku, and .\J.mzindhara. The entire world is gmJed by a perimeter of iron mountains known as the CakruvJiu. In each of the four cardmal directions of Mount Sumeru, there is located a continent, along with two satellites or subcontinents. Among these, the eastern continent Viratdeha {Ius- 'phags; 'sublime ir body') is semicircular and it has two subcontinents: Deha (/us) and Videlu.. (Ius- 'phugs). The southern continent}umbudvlpa ('dzam-bu glmg; 'rose-apple continent') is triangular and its two subcontinents are Camaradllipa (mgt~-yuh glmg) and Ap.zracJm,zra (mga-yt~h gzhun). The western continent, A.paraguduniya (bu-

GLOSSARY Or KEY

TEH~IS

lung spyod; 'rich in .:atrle'), is circular and its two subcontinents are .Sa(hii (gYo-ldan) and fAtar,.mzalltri~za (/am-mchog ·~ro). Lastly, the northern continent Uttarukuru (sgra-mi-sny.m; 'unpleasant sound') is square and its two sub.:ontinents .ue KuruL'u (sgr.J mi-snyan) and K,mruL'u (sgr.J n11-snyan-gyi ;:/a). Among the four, }umbuduipa is unique in that it is here that the sacred teachings of the buddhas are said to tlourish. See Chapter I 1, Pan Three with respect to instructions for choosing a birthplace and Chapter 1 with respect to visualising the ma~ujala of offerings.

Four Delights dga '-hu hz/JI In the perfection stage (sum{Junnakramu) of meditation, when the practiceo.; of sexual yoga (sbyor-ba) are applied in order to bring about a coalescence of bliss and emptiness, the generative essence (thig-le) of the body descends through the central channel and the four delights arc sequentially experienced. As it descends from the energy centre of the crown fontanelle to the throat centre, the pristine cognition of delight (dga '-bu) is experienced. When it descends from the throat centre to the he.ut centre, the pristine cognition of supreme delight (mchog-dg.l') is experienced. When it des.:ends from the heart centre to the navel centre the pristine cognition of the absence of delight (dgu '-bru[) is experienced. And when it descends from the navel centre to the secret centre of the genitalia, the coemergent delight (/hun-skyes d~.l'-ba) is experienced. Thereafter, the generative essence is retained within the body and drawn upwards through the central channel, permeating each of the energy centres of the hody in turn with unce~1sing bliss and non-conceptual pristine cognition. Sec also under Coemergent Delight. four Elemenrs 'byung-hu bzhi, Skr. caturblnltu Earth, water, fire and wind. See Five Elements. Four Empowerments db.1ng-bskur bzhi, Skt. caturabiJI~ekha The four empowerments of the Unsurpassed Yoga tantras, induding .\1..zbJyog..z, are: the vase empowerment (lmm-Jb,mg), which purifies the ordJn<lTY body and its energy channels into the Buddha-body of Emanation (nirmd~rak.ly,l); the secret empowerment (gs.mg-db.mg), which purifies ordin~1ry speech and its vital energy into the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource (sambhogakJya); the empowerment of discriminative pristine cognition (shes-rub ye-shes-kyi dbung) which purifies ordinary mind and its seminal point (bindu) into the Buddha-body of Reality (dh.Jrmak,iy.J); and the empowerment of word and meaning (tslng-don-gi dbunK), which purifies these three equally Jnto the Buddha-body of Essentiality (suubhJuzkakJya). Sec also Empowerment. Four Extreme Views mu-b::.hi In the context of the present work, these are the four extreme views of pernunencc, decay, self, and substantialism. four Formless Meditative Absorptions g::.ugs-med S1ryums- '1ug b::.hi, Skt.
catul!sam,1patti

The four formless meditative absorptions which lead to birth in the world-system of formlessness, at the summit of cyclic existence, are those known as: infinite as the sky (:ik.lsJnantyJyutuna), infinite consciousness (L•iJ1i.ln.11z.mtyJy.Jtanu), nothing-at-all (uki'!'C•l1l)'Jyutunu ), and neither perception nor non-perception (naiuaS.J1!ljfzd1l.JSil1!1Jildyutunu ). See Three World-systems.

470

G L 0 S S A R Y 0 F KEY T E R ~~ S

four Immeasurable Aspirations tsh.zd-med bzhi, Skt. c.ztvary.zpramJ1.zJni Immeasurable compassion, love, empatheti( joy and equanimity. The cultivation of the four immeasurable wishes, whi(h is normally accompanied by the recitation of a short prayer (see Chapter 1 ), is a common preliminary to daily practi(e. This (Ontemplation establishes correct motivation and provides a strong impetus to the cultivation of the altruistic intention to attain enlightenment for the sake of all sentient beings. Four Malevolent Forces bdud-bzhz, Skt. c.zturmiira See Malevolent/Beguiling Forces. Four Modes of Liberation xrol-lugs h::.hi The four modes of liber.uion, a(cording to Atiyoga, comprise: primordial liberation (ye-gro/), natural liberation (rang-gru/), direct liberation (cer-gro/), and further liberation (y.mg-gru/) or liberation from extremes (mtha'-gru/). These are attained in connection with the intermediate state of ·meditative concentration (bsam-gt.zn

bar-do).
Four l"oble Truths bden-pa hzhi, Skt. c,zturiiryasatya The tea(hing on the four noble truths forms the basis of the first promulgation of Buddhism, since it is the very first formal discourse given by .Sakyamuni in Samath following his attainment of buddhahood at Bodh Gaya. The four truths are: the truth of suffering, the truth of its origins, the truth of its cessation, and the truth of the path leading to SIKh cess.Hion. The doctrine of four truths lays the foundation upon which the entire strudure of the path to buddhahood is built and the understanding of these four truths is therefore an indispensable basis for a successful practice of the Buddhist path. The tirst two truths constitute one inter-relationship of cause and effect and the remaining two, another. Wnhout proper insight into the fir~t inter-relationship no genuine aspiration to seck freedom from cyclic existence will arise. Similarly, \Vithout insight into the second, no genuine release from the bondage of karmically conditioned existence can be achieved. Four Preliminaries Sec Preliminary Practices. Four Times dus-bzhi Past, present, future, and indefinite time. In some contexts the four times refer to different phases of conceptual thought, in which case they are enumerated as past thoughts, present thoughts, future thoughts and indeterminate thoughts (so-sor

rtog-fJ<l).
Fundamental Ignorance ma-rig-pa, Skt. Jl'idyJ The most fundamentalmisapprehemion of the nature of actual reality, which is the source of all dissonant mental states and the twelve links of dependent origination. Divergent views exist among Buddhist thlllkers about the specific character and nature of fundamental ignorance. For example, the fourth-century master Asmiga conceives this ignorance to be a state of unknowing, ignorant of the actual nature of reality. In (ontrast, for masters like Nagarjuna and especially Dhannaklrti, it is an <Ktivc state of mis-knowing, i.e. it understands the existence of one's own self and the world in a fundamentally distorted manner. In the classical Indian Buddhist texts, two principal forms of fundamental ignorance arc identified - (i) ignorance pert.11nmg to the a(tu<ll nature of reality and (ii) ignorance pertaining to the law of

GLOSSARY Of KEY TI:.R.\1S

471

cause and effect. The Nyingma master Dudiom Rinpoche explains the evolution of bewilderment from fundamental ignorance in three phases: first, the fundamental ignorance of self-identity (bdag-nyid gcig-pu 'i ma-rig-pa) is not recognised to be false; second, the coemergent ignorance (/han-skyes ma-rig-pa) ensures that the consciousness of self-identity and non-recognition of actual reality coincide; and, third, the fundamental ignorance of the imaginary (kun-btags ma-rig-pa) generates bewilderment, through which one's own bewildering perceptions arc externally discerned in terms of the subject-object dichotomy, giving rise to all the sufferings of cyclic existence. Garu9a khyung A mythical bird normally depicted with an mvl-like sharp beak, often holding a snake, and with large and powerful wings. References to this bird can be also found in Hindu literature where it is often mentioned as the flying mount of powerful mundane gods (deua). In Buddhism, the symbolism of the g• .mHfa is generally associated with pristine cognition (it is said that the garuq.1 can t1y as soon as it is hatched) and with the consuming of dissonant mental states (the holding of a snake in its he<lk). In a Buddhist context, the garucja is also associated with Vajrapii~ri and certain wrathful forms of Padmasambhava through its power to subdue snakes, serpentine water spirits, and subterranean creatures, and, according to the Nyingma school, the gamqa is sometimes revered as a guardian of treasures (gter-bdag) or even as a repository of treasures (gter-kha). Gclug dge-lugs One of the four main traditions or schools of Tibetan Buddhism. Founded by the great fourteenth-century philosopher Tsongklhlpa and his foremost students, it quickly estahlished it~elf as a dominant tradition of Tihctan Buddhism with its monasteries extending from the far west of Tibet to Chamdo, Dartsedo, and Amdo in the cast. following the Third Dalai Lama's visit to .Mongolia, it became the state religion in .Mongolia and the Buriat regions of the Soviet Union, and during the seventeenth century its hierarchy became the dominant political force in Central Tibet when the fifth Dalai Lama assumed both spiritual and temporal power with the assistance of Mongol armies. 'Gelug' literally means the tradition of the virtuous path and is named after the monastery called Geden or Ganden, founded by Tsongkhapa in I 409. Generation Stage bskyed-rim, Skt. utpattzkrama According to the traditions of the tantras, the main practices of meditation whil:h follow the successful conclusion of the preliminary practices (sngmz- 'gro) include the generation stage and the perfection stage (Skt. s,lmpamzakrama). Both the generation and perfection stages of meditation are related ro transforming our mundane experiences of each of the phases of life and death, namely: the intermediate states of the time of death, of reality, of rebirth, and of living. The generation stage is characterised by the meditative processes of the practitioner's gradual identitication with the form and pristine cognition of the meditational deity and it is during this stage that, with the support of mantra recitation, the elaborate visualisation of the deity is gradually generated and stabilised. This process, known as self-generation, is a simulacrum of bringing the three buddha-bodies on to the path and is composed therefore of three principal aspects: dissolution into emptiness (Buddha-body of Reality), arising into a subtle form such as a seed-syllable or

472

GLOSSARY OF KEY TER\tS

symbol (Buddha-body of Perfect Resource), <tnd full emergence into the deity's form (Buddha-body of Emanation). Sec the Introductory Commentary by HH the Dalai Lama and Perfection Stage. Generative Essences by,mg-semslthig-le, Skr. bodhicittulbindu In the ta11tras and in Tibetan medicine, the generative es!>ences or tluids <lre considered as .uising irom a supreme seminal point (ting-le chen-pn) located in the middle of the heart centre. From the perspective of the ta11tras thi~ supreme seminal point IS regarded as the seed of buddhahood and from the perspective of Tibetan melbcine it is regarded as the bam of both physical and mental health. This supreme seminal point at the heart is considered to be the size of a small pea or large mustard seed and it incorporates the pure essences (duangs-mu) of the five clements, the presem:e oi which is indicated by its five-coloured glow. hom the perspective of the tantras the very subtle vital energy, known as the life-bearing wind or breath, dwells inside this seminal point and at the culmination of the intermediate state of the time of death all vital energies ultim.ucly dissolve inti> it and the inner radiance of the ground d.nvns. During life, a single seminal point abides in each of the five energy centres and each seminal point i!> whiter at the top and redder at the bottom. At the crown centre the whiter clement predominates and at the level of the genitalia the redder element predominates. According to Tibetan medicine, white generative fluids are said to produce bone tissue in the embryo, and it is from the bone marrow that both semen .md breast milk <He said to be produced. Red gener.uive fluids are said to produce blood, tlesh and skin. At their least subtle level, therefore, the former are 1denufied with semen and the latter with menstruJl blood. See also under Seminal Point. Gods lhJ, Skt. del'J One of the six classes of living beings ( 'gro-ba rigs-drug). The mode of being and activity of the gods is said to be engendered and dominated by exaltation, indulgence and pride. The gods exist in realms higher than that of the human realm in the world-system of desire (k.Jm,ldh.itu), and also in the world-systems of form (rft{JJdhrJtu) .md formlcssne~-; (,ini{Jy,zdhatu). See Three \\'odd-systems. Gods of the Ten Directions ph)'ogs-bcu·, IIhz, Skr. das,zdikpa/,z The gods who traditionally are said to preside over the ten directions of space are otherwi~e known as the protector deities of the ten dire~:tions, viz.: /ndr,z, Y.1m..z, Varu'!a, Yak~..z, Agni, RJk~"sa, V,iyu, BIJtUa, Brulm1rJ, and Van..zdeui or SthauarJ. Great Bliss bde-chen, Skt. muh.isuklhl In the context of Unsurpassed Yug..ztautra, 'great bliss' refers to the blissful states experienced when the meditator enters into union with a partner (either in visualisation at the beginner's level or in Jctualny at an advanced stage). In both cases, the experiences. to he valid, have to arise as a result of the dissolution of mental conceptuality and the vital energies which support these conceptual states. Such J blissful state of mind, when generated within a direct experience of emptiness, free from attachment, becomes what is known as the union of bliss and emptiness. Great Perfection rdwgs-{Ju che11-po, Skt. mJhiisandhi Great Perfection is <l synonym for Atiyoga, the highest of the nine vehicles according to the Nyiugma tr<ldition. Atiyoga is known as the Great Perfection because both the generation .md perfection stages of meditation arc effortlessly present. 'Perfection'

G L 0 S ~A R Y 0 F K L Y T E R ~IS

473

(rdzogs) implies rhar the enlightened attributes of the Three Buddha-bodies are effortlessly perfected in the stabilisation of the meditator's intrinsic awareness (rangrig). l-lere the Buddha-body of Reality (dharmakaya) is the essence or emptiness (ngo-bo stong-pa) of intrinsic awareness; the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource (sambhogakaya) is irs natural expression Jnd radiance (rang-bzhin gsal-h.:z); and the Buddha-body of Emanation (mrm.if!.:zkJy.:z) is its all-pervasive unimpeded compassionate energy (m.:z- 'gags tlmgs-rie) expressed in physical form. 'Great' (chen) implies thJt this perfection is the underlying nature of all things. The tantra texts Jnd instructions of Atiyoga, contained in the Collected T antras of the NyingmLZpa, are divided into three classes: the Mental Class (sems-sde), which emphasises the radiance (gsal-ba'i cha) of the nature of mind (sems-nyid); the Spatial Class (k/ongsde) which emphasises the emptiness (stong-pa'i cha) of reality's expanse (dharmadhatu); and the Esoteric Instructional Class (man-ngag-gi sde), in which these aspects arc gi\'en equal emphas1s and in which the meditative techniques of Cutting through Resistance (khrcgs-chod) and All-surpassing Realisation (thod-rgul) le~1d respectively ro the realisation of the Buddha-body of Reality and the Buddha-body of Form.
Great Seal phyag-rgya chen-po, Skt. mahamudra According ro the tradition of the siUras, the expression 'Grear ScJl' refers to rhe comprehension of emptiness as the all-encompassing ulrimJte nature of reality. Emptiness is called the great seal, for nothing extraneous to ir exists, and all phenomena, both physical and mentJl, are in their ultimate natures empty of inherent existence. Ac.:ording to the tradition of the tantras in generJl, the practice of the Grear Seal is considered in terms of ground, path and result. As a 'path', ir comprises a sequence of systematic advanced meditations on emptiness and pure appcarJnce, integrating the techniques of calm abiding and penetrative insight, which focuses on the nature of the meditJtor's own mind. This type of meditation is popular in both the Kagyu and Gelug schools of Tibetan Buddhism. As a 'result', the expression 'Great Seal' refers ro the stare of buddhahood, rhe conclusive result or supreme spiritual accomplishment. According ro the Nyingma school, within the conrexr of Maluiyoga in particular, the term refers to the great seal of buddha-body which secures the ground-of-all consciousness (a/ayavipiana) as the mirror-like pristine cognition. A distinction is also drawn between the supreme accomplishment of the Great Seal (phyag-rgya chen-po mchog-gi dngos-gruh), which is to be attained in the course of the meditator's lifetime, and the coalescent Buddha-body of the Grear Seal (zung- '1ug phyag-rgya chen-po 'i sku), which is identified with the inner radiance of rhe Buddha-body of Reality. Greater Vehicle thcg-pa chen-po, Skr. mah.iyana When the Buddhist teachings are classified according ro their power to le<ld beings to an enlightened stare, a disrmcrion is made between rhe teachings of the Lesser Vehicle (hinaydna) and those of rhe Greater Vehicle. In terms of motivation, the practitioner of the Lesser Vehicle emphasises the individual's own freedom from cyclic existence as the primary motivation and goal and the practitioner of the Greater Vehicle emphasises altruism and has rhe liberation of all sentient beings as the principal objective. As the term 'Greater Vehicle' implies, the path followed by bodhisattvas is analogous to a large carriage \Vhich can trJnsporr a vast number of people to liberation, Js compared to a smaller vehicle for rhe individual practitioner. In terms of philosophy, rhe principal philosophical schools of the Lesser Vehicle are

474

GLOSSARY Of KEY TERMS

Vaibha~ika and Sautrantika and those of the Greater Vehicle are Cittamatra and Madlryamaka.ln terms of the path, the Lesser Vehicle emphasises complete renunciation of dissonant mental states and the practice of the four noble truths and the twelve links of dependent origination, while the Greater Vehicle allows the taking on to the path of dissonant mental states and emphasises the practice of the six perfections. According to the Greater Vehicle, the entire path towards the attainment of buddhahood is presented within the framework of two main systems or vehicles (yana), those of the sutras (srttrayana) and the tantras (tantrayana). The former, also known as the vehicle of bodhisattvas (bodhisattvayana), entails a progression from fundamental ignorance to enlightenment which may take place over an immeasurable number of lifetimes. The latter, also known as the Vehicle of Indestructible Reality (Vajrayana) or the vehicle of secret mantras (guhyamantrayana), includes the preliminary practices and the generation and perfection stages of meditation through which it is said that enlightenment can be achieved in a single lifetime.

Ground gzhi See under Continuum of the Ground. Ground-of-all kun-gzhi, Skt. alaya According to the Great Perfection, the ground-of-all is identified with the continuum of the ground. This ground-of-all is therefore contrasted with the ground-of-all consciousness (Skt. a/ayavijiiJna). See Aggregate of Consciousness. Ground-of-all Consciousness kun-gzhi'i rnam-par shes-pa, Skt. iilayavij1idna See under Aggregate of Consciousness. Guhyagarbhatantra rGyud gsang-ba'i snying-po The most all-embracing of the eighteen Mahayoga tantras, focusing specifically on the ma'!lfala of the forty-two peaceful deities and the fifty-eight wrathful deities. There are three distinct versions of the Guhyagarbhatantra, respectively in 82, 46 and :z.:z. chapters, and it is the last of these that is most widely studied. All of these versions are included within the general cycle of the Tantra of the Magical Net (Mayajalatantra). See under Magical Net and Gyurme Dorje's 'Brief Literary History'. Habitual Tendencies bag-chags, Skt. viisana The deep-seated propensities and habitual tendencies inherited from our past actions. This concept of habitual tendencies is critical to the Buddhist understanding of the causal dynamics of karmic actions as well as its understanding of the process of conditioning. For example, when a person commits an act, such as the negative act of killing, the act itself does not last. So that which connects the committing of this act and the experiencing of its consequence in the future, in some instances in a future life, is the habitual tendencies imprinted upon one's psyche by the act committed. Similarly, when a strong emotion such as a powerful feeling of h,atred arises, although the actual emotion may subside after a while, the experience leaves a mark or an imprint, which will continue to have an impact on the person's attitudes and emotions as well as behaviour. It is the collection of such countless habitual tendencies imprinted in our psyche by dissonant mental states that constitutes the obscuration of misconceptions concerning the known range of phenomena

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

475

(Skt. jfteyavara'}a), the total eradication of which occurs only when one achieves full awakening or buddhahood. Sec Obscuration. Hand-gestures phyag-rgya, Skt. mudra See Seal. Hatred zhe-sdang, Skt. dt·e~a Sec A version. Hayagriva rta-mgrin The name of a wrathful deity, usually red in colour, with a green horse's head and neck (rta-mgrin) protruding from amongst the hair on his head. The teachings and the texts associated with Hayagriva belong within the sadhana class of Mahayoga, where they are known as the tmrtras of buddha-speech. In this respect, Hayagriva is considered to be the wrathful counterpart of Avalokitesvara. More generally, as in our text, he is depicted as a gatekeeper of certain matJcJ-alas and sacred shrines. See Appendix Two. Heart-mantra snying-po, Skt. hrdaya Sec Mantra. Heart-mantra of Dependent Origination rtcn- 'brei snying-po, Skt. pratityasanlutpadahrdaya The heart-mantra of dependent origination, YE UHARMA HETUI'RABHAVA HETUN
TE~A¥ TATHAGATO HY AVADAT TE~A.~ CA YO NIROUHO EVA,~ VADI MAHASRA-

MA~AI~, can be translated as 'Whatever events arise from a cause, the Tathagata has told the cause thereof, and the great virtuous ascetic also has taught their cessation as well.' Sec Mantra and Dependent Origination.

Hell[Realms]na-rag dmyal-ba'i gnasldnzyal-ba, Skt. naraka Sec Eighteen Hells. Hermit Buddha rang-rgyal, Skt. pratyekabuddha The practitioners of the Lesser Vehicle (hinaytma) include both pious attendants (sravaka) and hermit buddhas. Among these, the hermit buddhas are those who pursue the path to liberation without relying on a teacher, following a natural predisposition. According to Maitreya's Ornament of Emergent Realisation, the accomplishment of the hermit buddhas is considered to surpass that of the pious attendants in the sense that they realise the emptiness of external phenomena, composed of atomic particles, in addition to realising the emptiness of the individual personality (pudga/a). However, unlike bodhisattvas they arc said not to realise that the internal phenomena of consciousness too are without inherent existence. The realisation of a hermit buddha relies not only on the renunciation or monastic discipline, which is also undertaken by pious attendants, but on their comprehension of the twelve links of dependent origination and ability to reverse these through the power of meditation. Hero dpa'-bo, Skt. !lira Sec Spiritual Hero. Heruka khrag- 'thzmg!hc-ru-ka In general, the term heruka is an epithet for all wrathful male meditational deities, although in specific contexts it may refer exclusively to the meditational deity

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

Sriheruka and related meditational deities such as Cakrasm'tlvara. In the context of the present work, the term refers only to the six wrathful male buddhas: Mahottara Heruka, Buddha Heruka, Vajra Heruka, Ratna Heruka, Padma Heruka, and Karma Heruka. Literally, the t~:rm can be interpreted as 'blood-drinker', 'blood-drinking hero', 'delighting in blood', or 'holding a blood-filled skull'. Set: Appendix Two.
Higher Existences gnas mthu-ris, Skt. svar;:a The three high~:r realms of the gods, amigods, and humans. Highest Yoga Tantra hla-med rgyud, Skt. yuganiruttaratuntra See Unsurpassed Yogatantra. Hundred Sacred Enlightened Families dam-pa rigs-brl{ya Those of the forty-two peaceful deities and the fifty-eight wrathful deities. Sec Appendix Two. Hundred-syllable Mantra yig-brgya The hundred-syllable mantra of Vajrasattva may be interpreted as follows: 'o~t Vajrasattva! Protect my commitments! Vajrasattva! Let them be firm! Let me be steadfast! Let me be satisfied! Let me be nourished! Let me be loved! Bestow all accomplishments upon me! With regard to all my past actions, make my mind virtuous! HO¥ (seed-syllable of buddha-mind)! HA (four immeasurables)! HA (four empowermems)! HA (four delights)! HA (four buddha-bodies)! HOI~ (joyous laughter)! Transcendent One! Indestructible Reality of all the Tathagatas! Do not forsake me! Make me into indestructible reality! Great Being of Commitment! AI,i (non-dual union).' The recitation of this mantra, in conjunction with the visualisation of Vajrasattva and the confession of negativity, is an essential component of the preliminary practices (sngun- 'gro). See Chapter r and Vajrasattva. Ignorance ma-rig-pa, Skr. avidya See under Fundamemal Ignorance. Illusion-like Body sgyu-ma'i 1t,1-bu Ius See under Illusory Body. Illusory Body sgyu-lus A specific Vajrayana concept, the term 'illusory body' refers to a unique embodiment in which an advanced yogin arises at a high level of the perfection stage according to the Unsurpassed Yogatantras. The arising of the yogin in the form of the illusory body occurs when an indivisible unity of buddha-body, speech and mind has been actualised at the conclusion of the generation and perfection stages of meditation. The attainment of the illusory body is divided into two stages; the attainment of the impure illusory body (ma dag-pa'i sgyu-lus) and then attainment of the pure illusory body (dag-pa'i sgyu-lus). The first stage is called impure because the yogin is still not totally free from all habitual tendencies that obstruct subtle knowledge. When the yogin attains the pure illusory body, which is in union with inner radiance, this marks the attainment of the highest union that is the full awakening of buddhaoovd, the atrainment of the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource. According to the perfection stage of meditation, there are distinctive meditations which focus on the impure illusory body and the pure illusory body. In the former case, the meditation focuses on all physical phenomena as being dream-like and illusory in manner, without inherent existence. In the latter case, the meditation focuses on the ma'!qala of

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

477

deities visualised according to the so-called twelve similes of illusion (sgyu-ma'i dpe bcu-gnyis). Impermanence mi-rtag-pa, Skt. anitya Impermanence, along with suffering and the absence of self-identity, is regarded in Buddhism as one of the three marks or characteristics of causally conditioned phenomena. Although Buddhist literature mentions various degrees of impermanence, in general it can be defined as the momentarily changing nature of all things. Nothing endures through time without change, and the process of change is dynamic and never ending, reflecting the nature of flux and fluidity in conditioned existence. This fundamental quality of impermanence extends to both the external world and the perceiving mind. Imprecatory Female Spirits ma-mo, Skt. matara~ The imprecatory female spirits are generally depicted as ugly, ferocious, darkcomplexioned, and half-naked with emaciated breasts and matted hair. They invoke curses and imprecations, inflicting plague (dal-yams) on living beings. The mundane imprecatory female spirits of Tibet were subdued by Padmasambhava on Mount Chuwori, while the supramundane category includes the protectress Sridevi (Tib. dpal-ldan lha-mo) in the form Remari, and the eight mataral? (ma-mo brgyad) headed by Gauri, who form one subcategory of the fifty-eight wrathful deities. See Appendix Two. One of the eight principal rneditational deities of the Mahiiyoga sadhana class is known as Imprecatory Matara~ (ma-mo rbod-gtong). Incalculable Aeon grangs-med bskal-pa, Skt. asa~khyeyakalpa The expression incalculable aeon indicates a period of time equivalent to power of 59 lesser aeons. to the

10

Indestructible Chains of Inner Radiance 'od-gsal rdo-rje lu-gu-rgyud The appearance of indestructible chains of light or inner radiance occurs through the meditative technique known as All-surpassing Realisation (thod-rgal), according to the Great Perfection (rdzogs-pa chen-po). The arising of these chains of light is an indication of the natural expression (rang-bzhin) of intrinsic awareness (rang-rig), through which the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource becomes manifest. Indestructible Cross-legged Posture rdo-rje'i skyil-krung, Skt. vajrasana Contrasted with the 'lotus posture' (Skt. padmasana), this 'indestructible posture' is formed by crossing the legs with the feet upturned and folded along the thighs. In the case of the indestructible posture the right leg is folded above the left, whereas in the lotus position the left leg is folded over the right. This is one of the optimum recommended meditation postures, included in the Seven-point Posture of Vairocana. Indestructible Expanse rdo-rje'i dbyings, Skt. vajradluitu Generally a synonym for the expanse of reality (Skt. dharmadhatu) or emptiness. In certain contexts it also refers to the name of the central figures of the Vajradhatu ma~u!ala of the Yogatantras. Indestructible Hell rdo-rje dmyal-ba, Skt. vajranaraka A synonym for the hell of ultimate torment (Skt. Avici), which relates to the admonition that those who violate their commitments in respect of the Vehicle of Indestructible Reality are reborn there. See Eighteen Hells.

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

Indestructible Reality rdo-rje, Skt. ua1ra The fully enlightened buddha-body, speech and mind are described as indestructible reality. This suggests that the fruitional attributes of buddhahood are adamantine and indivisible, for they arc invulnerable to all degrees of physical, verbal and mental defilement. Individual Disciplines so-sor thar-pu, Skt. priitimok~a See under Pratimok~a. Inherent Existence rung-nKo-bo-nyid, Skt. suabhauat,i The term 'inherent existence' refers to the ontological status of phenomena, according to which phenomena arc attributed with existence in their own right, inherently, in and of themselves, objectively, and independent of any other phenomena such as our conception and hlbelling. The Madhyamaka schools of thought refute such a nature of existence and argue that nothing exists inherently, for nothing can be found to exist independently from conceptuality' and labelling when scrutinised through an ultimate analysis. The Madlryamaka schools hold that things exist only conventionally and their existence can be validated only within a relative framework of conventional reality. Absence of such an ontological reality, i.e. the absence of the inherent existence of all phenomena, is defined as the true nature of reality, emptiness, by the Madhyamaka schools and hy the tantras. Inner Radiance 'od-gsal, Skt. prabhiisl'<lra Sometimes also translated as 'clear light', the Tibetan term 'ad-gsa/, which has been rendered here as 'inner radiance', refers in the context of the perfection stage of meditation (Skt. samfhumakrama) to the subtlest level of mind, i.e. the fundamental, essential nature of all our cognitive events. Though ever present within all sentient beings, this inner radiance becomes manifest only when the gross mind has ceased to function. Such a dissolution is experienced by ordinary beings, naturally, at the time of death, but it can also be experientially cultivated through the practices of Unsurpassed Yogatautra. A fundamental distinction is made between the inner radiance of the ground (gzhi'i 'od-gsa/) and the inner radiance of the path (/am-gyi 'od-gsal). The former, which is also known as the 'mother inner radiance' ('ad-gsa/ ma), occurs naturally at the time of death, when it indicates the presence of the Buddha-body of Reality (dharmakaya), but which may not be accompanied by an awareness of its nature. The latter, which is also known as the 'child inner radiance' ('ad-gsa/ bu) is an awareness of the ultimate nature of mind cultivated by the meditator in life, i.e. the realisation of the nature of the 'mother inner radiance' as it is developed in meditation. Buddhahood is achieved when the 'mother inner radiance' and 'child inner radiance' conjoin. See Chapters 8, 10 and r I. Chapter 1 1, in particular, differenti.ues three successive phases of inner radiance which are experienced at the time of death and immediately thereafter: the primary inner radiance (bar-Jo J,mg-po chos-nyid 'od-gsal), which is identified with the inner radiance of the ground, the secondary inner radiance (bar-do 'od-gsal gnyis-pa), which is identified with the inner radiance of the path, and the tertiary inner radiaoce (bar-do 'od-gs,d gsum-pu), which is identified with the subsequent arising of the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities during the intermediate state of reality (chos-11yid htlr-do).

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

479

Inner Tantras of Skilful Means n.mg thabs-kyi rgyud The collective name for the tantras of Mahayoga, Anuyoga and Atiyoga. See also under Vehicle. Intentional Lineage of the Conquerors rgyal-ba dgo11gs-pa 'i brgyud-pa According to the Nyiugma school, the Buddhist teachings arc said to have been transmitted through six lineages (brgyud-pa drug). Among these, the first, which is known as the 'intentional lineage of the conquerors', refers to the enlightened intention (dgongs-pa) of Samantabhadra, which confers the realisation of the atcmporal Buddha-body of Reality, as a blessing upon the male and female buddhas of the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource. Intermediate State bar-do, Skt. antarJbhava The original usage of the term within the literature of classical Buddhist abhidhanna suggests that it referred exclusively to the period between the time of death and the time of rebirth. According to the Nyingma and Kagyu schools, however, the term 'intermediate state' refers to key phases of life and death identified as: the intermediate state of living (rang-bzhilz b.:~r-Ju), the intermediate state of meditative concentration (bsam-gtan bar-do), the intermediate state of dreams (rmi-lam b,;r-do ), the intermediate state of the time of death ( 'chi-kha 'i bar-do ), the intermediate state of reality (chos-nyid bar-do) and the intermediate state of rebirth (srid-pa'i bar-do). During each of these phases, the consciousness of a sentient being has particular experiential qualities, and corresponding to these qualities of experience there are specific meditative techniques conducive to realisation of the ultimate nature of mind and phenomena. See Chapter 3 and individual entries below. Intermediate State of Dreams rmi-lam bur-do The intermediate state of dreams begins from the moment of falling asleep and ends when we awake. This intermediate state offers the opportunity for the practitioner to recognise the similarity between the illusory nature of dreams and that of our waking state. This practice is cultivated in the context of dream yoga where the ability to maintain awareness of the ultimate nature of mind and phenomena during both deep sleep and dreaming is refined. Intermediate State of Living rang-bzhin bar-do The intermediate state of living begins at the time of birth and continues until the time of death. Having obtained a precious human form with the ability to recognise our actual condition, the opportunity arises to adopt a way of life and to engage in the practices that lead to buddhahood. See Chapters 3 and I, 2, 4, 5, 6 and 7· Intermediate State of Meditative Concentration bsam-gtan bar-do The intermediate state of meditative concentration entered during the waking state provides the opportunity for the practitioner to cultivate meditative equipoise (samabita, Tib. mnyam-bzhag) and thereby to achieve stability in the generation and perfection stages of meditation. This in turn deepens an unbroken awareness of the ultimate nature of mind and phenomena in post-meditative activities and prepares the meditator for the intermediate state of the time of death. See Chapters 3 and I, 2, 4, 5, 6 and 7· Intermediate State of Reality chos-nyid bar-do The intermediate state of actual reality arises after the intermediate state of the time of death ( 'chi-kha'i bar-do) and before the intermediate state of rebirth (srid-pa'i

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

oc~.:urs, based on the pr<Ktices adopted during one's lifetime, ro recognise the natural purity and natural transformative qualities of the ultimate nature of mind in the form of luminosities, rays, sounds and meditational deities. See Chapters 3 and 1 1.

bar-Jo). Here the opportunity

Intermediate State of Rebirth snJ-pa'z b,IT-do The intermediate state of rebirth is entered after the intermediate state of reality when the cons~.:iousness arises in the form of a mental body, conditioned by the individual's inheritance of past actions, and the individual begins to experience both the surroundings where he or she died and the unfolding of experiential states driven by the momentum of past actions. If liberation from cyclic existence is not a~.:hieved during this intermediate state it comes to an end at the moment of conception. Since consciousness is said to possess certain heightened qualnies during this period there is a potential to achieve liberation, or at the very least a favourable rebirth, at various key stages as this state is traversed. See Chapters 3 and I 1. Intermediate State of the Time of Death 'chi-klhl'i bar-Jo The intermediate state of the rime of death is entered at the rime when the process of dying definitively begins, and ends with the onset of the intermediate state of reality. It includes the gradual dissolution of the five elements and their asso~.:iated modes of consciousness and ~.:ulminates with the arising of the inner radiance of the ground (gzhi'i 'od-gs.;/). The natural arising of inner radiance immediately after respiration ceases is regarded as a supreme opportunity to realise the Buddha-body of Reality. See Chapters 3, H, 10 and 11. Intrinsic Awareness rung-rig, Skt. suasa~u·ittilsuasu~weduna According to Indian Buddhist epistemology, and particularly in the writings of the great logicians DzKnJga and Dharmakirti, the term smsm~wedanu refers to the apperceptive or reflexive faculty of consciousness, for which reason it is sometimes rendered as 'reflexive awareness' or 'apperceptive awareness'. However, in the view of the Great Perfection (rdzogs-pa chen-po) and in the context of the present work, the same term refers to the fundamental innate mind in irs natural state of spontaneity and purity, beyond the alternating states of motion and rest and the subject-object dichotomy. It is therefore rendered here as 'intrinsic awareness'. As such, intrinsic awareness gives the meditator access to pristine cognition or the buddha-mind itself, and it stands in direct contrast to fundamental ignorance (auidya), which is the primary cause of rebirth in cyclic existence (sm~zsdra). The direct introduction to intrinsic awareness is a distinctive reaching within the Nyingma school and the principal subject matter of Chapter 4· This pradice is a central component of the Esoteric Instructional Class (up,zde5,l) of Atiyoga, where it is known as Cutting through Resistance (klnegs-chod). See also Awareness and Mind. Intrinsic Awareness which is Pristine Cognition rang rig-pa 'i ye-:>hes Generally this term refers to the pristine cognition arising from the direct realisation of emptiness by a sublime being (arya, Tib. 'phags-pa) in the context of Jeep meditative equipoise. This is so called because the nature and qualities of that cxpcricnn• can never be fully conveyed by means of language <llld words but remains totally cv1dent to the yogin himself. In the context of the Great Perfection however, as exemplified by our text, the fusion of the meditator's intrinsic awareness with the pnsrinc cognition of buddha-mind indicates nor only that intrinsic awareness

GLO~SARY

Of KEY TERMS

provides access to buddha-mind, but that the idcmity of the two has been fully rc.tliscd. Sec also Intrinsic Awareness and Pristine Cognition. Introduction ngo-sprod A genre of pith instructions in which the nature of actual reality or intrinsic awareness is formally introduced (rzg-pu'i ngo-sprod), in a clear immediate manner, by a qualified spiritual teacher. Sec Chapter 4· Invitation spyan- 'dren-pa, Skt. upanun,mtra'!-a The term 'invitation' refers ro the meditative process of the tantras, whereby the actual mcditational deity or Being of Pristine Cognition ( jiianasattl'a, Tib. ye-shes s!'ms-Jp.1') is formally in\'itcd by the meditator to enter into the previously visualised form, known as the Being of Commitment (samayasattu.l, T1b. dam-tshzg

scms -dp.1').
Jambudvipa 'dzum-lm gling See under Four Continents and Eight Subcontinents. Kagyu bk.J'-brgyud One of the four main traditions or schools of Tibetan Buddhism. The Kagyu lineage tradition stems from the great accomplished masters (mahasiddha) of India such as Tzlop.1, N.Jropa and Maztrifhl through to Khyzmgpo Neljor, who founded the Sl:.mgp.z Kag:ru lineage. and ,\1.Jrpu Lotsau•a, who formed the Dagpo Kag)'U lineage. The latter compri~es four major sub-schools, namely the Karm.1pa, the Tshalpa, the B.mml{hl and the Ph.zgmodrupu, the last of which is further d1vided into the branches of the Drigung{JJ, T.zglungpa, Drukpa, Yaz.1ng, Troplm, Shugscb, Yelpa, and Afurtshung. These traditions inrcgratc practices derived from both the sutras and the tmztras. There IS a puticular emphasis on the Great Seal (Mah.imudra) sy~tern of practice and on perfection stage practices such as the Six Y ogas of Naropa. Kjmariipa k,z-mu ru-pa A traditional name corresponding to parts of modern Assam in north-cast India and the adjacent Sylhct region of BangiJdesh. K<tngyur and Tengyur bk,z'-bstan mam-gn)·is The Kangyur is the Tibetan Buddhist canon containing the original sutras and tmrtras translated from Indl<ln sources. The Kmzgyur, as we now know it, was formalised as a complete collection by the great fourteenth-century Tibetan scholar and encyclopaedist Buton Rmchendrub. Buton was also instrumental in the compilation of the Tcngyur, the canonical collection containing translations of authoritative Indian commcntanal works. !\1any manuscript vers10ns of these anthologies were prepared over the centuries, and important xylographic editions were pubil~hed at Narthang, Derge, Lhas.z, Utang, Cho-ne, and Bez1ing. •Kangyur' (bka'- 'gyur) literally means the translated sacred words or transmitted precepts of the buddhas, and 'Tengyur' (bstan-'g)•ur)', the translated commentaries. Kankal)idharal)i ku1i-k,z-~zi g.::.ungs The name of an incantation text associated with Ak~obhya- Vajrasattva, through which ofierings are n1.1de on behalf of the deceased. Karma l.1s See Past Actions.

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

Karma Family las-kyi rigs, Skt. karmakula One of the five enlightened families (pancakula) into which the mcditational deities of the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource are subdivided. The deities of the Karma family include the peaceful buddhas Amoghasiddhi and Samayatara and the corresponding wrathful aspects Karma Heruka and Karmakrodhest•ari. See Appendix Two. Karma Lingpa karma gling-pa Karma Lingpa (fl. fourteenth century) is the treasure-finder who extracted from Mt Gampodar in Dakpo the cycle of teachings known as the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: A Profound Sacred Teaching, [entitled] Natural Liberation through [Recognition of] Enlightened Intention (Zhi-khro dgongs-pa rang-groi), to which our present text belongs. See Gyurme Dorje's 'Brief Literary History'. Karmaprasiddhi byang-phyogs las-rab brtsegs-pa'i zhing-khams The northern buddha field of the 'Mound of ExceHent Activities' (Karmaprakat,z), otherwise known as the 'Matrix of Enlightened Activities' (Tib. las-rab grub-pa, Skr. KarmafJrasiddhi), is the paradise presided over by the male buddha Amoghasiddhi. See Appendix Two. Kaya sku See Buddha-body. Khafv:lliga kha{-vanga Literally meaning 'bedpost', the kha{vii1iga is a tantric staff, comprising a long eight-sided shaft of white sandalwood, sealed with a half-vajra at its base, and a crossed-vajra at its top, replete with streamers and surmounted by stacked skulls and human heads, indicative of the energy centres of body, speech and mind within the subtle body. In general, the kha{viinga symbolises the union of great bliss and emptiness. King Spirits rgyal-po A class of male spirits who are said to have assumed their particular forms through a preponderance of anger and hatred. Their many mundane forms are to be differentiated from the five supramundane forms of the protector deity Pehar (rgyal-po sku lnga), which are respectively known as the kings of body, speech, mind, attributes and activities. Kriyatantra bya-ba'i rgyud The first of the three outer classes of tantra, which form one subcategory of the six classes of tantra, and the fourth of the nine vehicles, according to the Nyingma school of Tibetan Buddhism. Kriyatantra emphasises outer ritual practices such as the making of offerings, prostration, and praises to the meditational deity visualised in the space before one. KYE HO kye-ho An exclamation of astonishment or wonder. Lake-dwelling Medicinal Spirits mtsho-sman/'tsho-sman A group of five, seven or nine female spirits of the sman-mo class who dwell in lakes, and who are differentiated from the sky-dwelling medicinal spirits (nam-mkha'i sman-mo), the earth-dwelling medicinal spirits (sa'i sman-mo), and the hybrid serpentine-medicinal spirits (k/u-sman). In general, the sman-mo are a category

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

of indigenous Tibetan spirits, to whom medicinal tonna-offerings (sman-gtor), compounded of medicines, nectars and blood, are made. Foremost among them are the five sisters of longevity (tshe-ring mched-lnga), who are embodied in the five main snow peaks of the Everest range. The most powerful of these medicinal spirits arc said to have been bound under an oath of allegiance by Padmasambhava at Silma in Tsang. Lay Vows dge-bsnyen-gyi sdom-pa, Skt. upasakavrata See Pratimok~a and Vows. Lesser Vehicle theg-dman, Skt. hinayana See Greater Vehicle, Hermit Buddhas and Pious Attendants. 'Liberating' Avengers sgrol-ging This is the name of a class of male sword-wielding spirits, collectively known as the skyes-bu ging-chen, who are invoked in order to enact the wrathful rites of 'liberation'. Liberation grol-balsgrol-ba, Skt. mok~a In a Buddhist context, the term liberation refers specifically to freedom from cyclic existence, the karmically conditioned cycle of death and rebirth, and consequently to freedom from all forms of physical and mental suffering. Such a liberation can be attained only through the total elimination of fundamental ignorance and the dissonant mental states, including attachment and aversion, which afflict the mind and perpetuate the cycle of existence. Lifelong Companion Gods 'go-ba'i lha This is a category of spirits who arc said to accompany an individual throughout his or her life, like a shadow, protecting the vitality (bla) of the individual. five types of lifelong companion god ('go-ba'i lha lnga) are specifically identified: the gods of the life-essence (srog-gi-lha), the gods of masculinity (pho-lha), the gods of femininity (mo-lha), the gods of the countryside (yul-lha), and the gods of inimical force (dgra-lha). Lineage brgyud-pa, Skt. paratttpara An unbroken line of successive teachers through whom the Buddhist teachings arc transmitted. According to the Nyingma tradition, six forms of lineage are described: r) the intentional lineage of the conquerors (rgyal-ba'i dgongs-brgyud), through which the Buddha-body of Reality communicates the teachings to the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource; 2) the symbolic lineage of awareness holders (rig- 'dzin brda 'i brg)'ud-fJa), through which non-human and human awareness holders of the highest spiritual accomplishments symbolically receive the teachings from bodhisattvas of the tenth level; 3) the aural lineage of authoritative personages (gang-zag snyankhung-gi brgyud-pa), through which accomplished masters orally transmit the teachings from one generation to the next; 4) the lineage empowered by enlightened aspiration (smon-lam dbang-bskur-gyi brgyud-pa), through which a treasure-finder of concealed texts is identified by their concealer's solemn affirmation, 5) the lineage of prophetically declared spiritual succession (bka'-bahs lung-bstan-gyi hrgyud-pa), through which a treasure-finder of concealed texts is identified from the authoritative prophesies of Padmasambhava, and 6) the lineage of the 4akini's seal of entrustment (mkha'-'gro gtad-rgya'i brgyud-pa ), through which a treasure-finder is

GLO~SARY

OF KEY TERMS

granted ~.:odified teachings by the lords of the treasure m fulfilment of the concealer's former aspiration. Lineage Holder brgyud-pa 'i 'd<.in-pa, Skt. parm!zparadhara One who maintains any of the six lineages and takes responsibility for their continued transmission from one generation to the next. See previous entry. Longchen Rabjampa klrmg-c:hen rab- 'hyams-pa A prolific writer ( 1308-6 3 ), regarded as one of the greatest masters of the Nyi11gma school, Longchen RubJampu is renowned for his systematic commentaries on the nine vehicles, the perspective of Atiyoga, and his revelation of the texts and practices contained in the Four-{hzrt Innermost Spirituality (sNying-thig ya-bzhi). His commentary on the Guhyagarbhatantra, entitled Dzspelling the Darkness u( the Ten Directzons (Phyogs-hc:u'i num-se/), is an important source, clarifying the ma1.uJala of the forty-two peaceful deities and the fifty-eight wrathful deities from the perspectives of the ground, path, and result. Lotus padma ln Buddhist poetry and the visual arts the lotus, particularly the variety which grows in water, is often used as a symbol of purity_ The lotus grows from an unclean mire, yet it is clean and unpolluted by the mire surrounding it. One finds the lotus depicted as the cushion or seat of many meditational deities in Buddhist tantric iconography_ Among the five enlightened families, the Padma or Lotus family (pudma'z rtgs) is that of the buddha AmztJbha. Lotus Light Pala..:e padma 'od-kyi fJho-br.mg The palace or operational field of Padmasambhava. See under Mal)9ala. Love/Loving Kindness byLlms-pa, Skr. m,zitri ln a Buddhi~t context, loving kindness is defined as a mental factor characterised by a sin..:ere wish that others enjoy happiness. According to this definition, love is one of the eleven 'wholesome mental factors' categorised in the abhidharma literature. However, in the case of the four immeasurable aspirations, the word love is used as an abbreviation for 'great love' (byams-pa chen-pu, Skr_ mahiimaitri) which refers to an altruisti..: mental attitude that is unbiased in its love towards all beings and is also spontaneous and naturaL It is said that su..:h a spontaneous sense of universal or unqualified love l:an only arise as a result of a systemati..: meditative training and an understanding of emptiness. Lower Existences ngan-song, Skt. durgatz The realms of the animals, anguished spirits, and hells. Lower Vital Energy 'og-gi rlung The vital energy located at the lower extremity of the central energy channel within the subtle body. See Vital Energy. Madhyamaka dlm-ma Derived from the Sanskrit expression m.Jdhyamapratipad, meaning the '.Mi9dlr Way' between the extremes of eternalism and nihilism, which was expounded by Sakyanru11i Buddha in the earliest sutras, Madhyamak.1 (dlm-ma) is the name of one of the most influential among the four classical s..:hools of Indian Buddhist philosophy_ Within the context of the M.1dhyamJka school, the ~Iiddle Way refers to the doctrine of emptiness (sunyut.l), which is held to be the ultimate nature of all

<.; I. 0 S S A I{ Y 0 I' K E Y T 1: I{ .\1 S

things. According to this view, all phenomena, whether mental or physical, cannot be found to possess any independent or self-validating natures, and their existence and identity arc regarded as valid only within a relative framework of worldly convention. Further, it is propounded that not only do phenomena exist solely in dependence upon causes and conditions, but even their idenrities depend on conceptions and labelling. 1\:cverthclcss, th1s sehoul holds that, unlike mere fantasies, such as unicorns for example, phenomena do exist conventionally and their ontology must he accepted as v.tlid. Such a metaphysical position is designated the 'Middle \X'ay' in that it is the mid-point between the extremes of total non-existence of reality, or nihilism, and the positing of an absolute, independent existence of reality, or eternalism. founded by Nagarjutta in the second century AD, the Madhyam..Jka schooll.uer evolved two sub-divisions: J>rJsarigzka and Su.it.mtrika, based on the different interpretations of .\",rgar,una's vic\vs whKh were made by Buddhapd!Jta {later elucidated by Candrakirti) and Bhavauzveka respectively. The Tibetan tradition, while recognising Bhauaviueka's important contribution to Buddhist logic and philosophy, considers the Pnlsmigika technique of reductio ad uhsurdum to be the most refined logical method in Buddhism for establishing the view of emptiness. The distmctivc feature of the Pr.is ..uigzk.I school is its total denial of any ontology implying inherent existence of either external objects or subjective consciousness. There is also, according to some Tibetan interpretations, the tradition known as the Great M,rdlryamak.I which in the coursc of meditative insight distinguishes between the intrinsic emptiness of phenomena (rung-stong) and the extrinsic emptiness of pure buddha attributes (g-;.h,m-stuns:). Magical Net sgyu- 'plmt! drva-ba, Skt. M.iydja/a Thc most all-embracing cycle of texts among the eighteen Mahayoga tantras, focusing specifically on the mm.ujala of the forty-two peaceful deities and the fifty-eight wrathful deities, and including within its corpus the Gulryagarbhatantra. As such, it is the basis for all subsequent expositions of this particular ma~z4ala, including the present work. Sec Gyurmc Doric's 'Brief Literary History'. Magon Chamdrcl 111.1-mgon lcam-dral An epithct of the protcctress Fk.r,,z{i and Dorje Lekpa, who arc rcvcrcd as the foremost supr.unundanc protector deities, according to the Atiyoga tradition of the Nyingma school. Mahakala mgmz-pu 11ag-po Thl.' supramundanc protector de1ty Af.zh,lkJ!a is a wrathful manifestation of Avalokite5t•ara. The meditative practiccs associated with this protector are popular in all four traditions of Tibet<ll1 Buddhism. Mahakarul)ika tlmgs-rje chm-po The thousand-armed form of Avalokitesvara. See Avalokitdvara. Mahayana thes:-pa che11-pu Sec Greater V chicle. Mahayoga mal- 'byor chen-pu 'i rgyud The seventh of the nine vehicles, <lnd first of the three inner clas~es of tantras, according to the Nyingma school. M.Ih.iyog,r emplusises thc generation stage of mcJnation (utp.Ittikram.r) and the gradual vi~ualisation of elaborate ma1_uj.zlas of deities. Ir comprises eighteen basic tatttras, such as Guhyagarbha, Guhyasamdfa,

GLOSSARY Of KEY TERMS

and BuddhusumJyo~u, as well as a vast number of tantra texts associated with the so-called c:ight classes of means for attainment (sgrub-pa bku '-brgyad), which focus respectively on the deities Yamantaka, Hayawiva, Srihcruka, Vajriim~ta, Vajrakila, M,U.zr.zl?, LokastotraJlltJ•l ('1ig-rtcn mchod-bstod), and Va,ramantrabhiru (rmod-pa drug-sn~u~s). These tc:xts are all contained in the Collected Tantras of the Nyingmafhl (rNymg-mu'i r~yud-'bum), and a small but important seb.:tion of them is <tlso cont;.uned in the Kangyur. Maitreya rgyal-hu by.zms-pa M,utrey,z is the embodiment of the great loving kindness (mahamaztri) of all the buddhas, as visu<tliscd in the form of a meditational deity. Maitreya therefore represents thl· perkcted state of the faculty of love/loving kindness inherent within each individual's mental continuum. In addition, M.zitreya is also revered as an emincm historical figure, a bodhisattva who was one of the eight principal bodhisattva di-;ciples of S,zkyamzmi Buddha. It is to him that the hue Works of Maitreya (By,mzs-d}()s sdc-lng,z) are attributed. According to the classical sutra literature it is the bodhisattva J'vf..Iztreya who is the coming buddha, fifth in the line of one thousand buddhas (Sakyamuni being the fourth) who will descend to this world during the auspicious aeon. Currently he is said to be residing in the god re<tlm of Tu~ita. He is also one of the four outer male bodhisattvas among the forty-two peaceful deities. Sec Appendix Two. Major and Minor Marks mtsh.zn-dpe, Skt. lak~al.tiinuuyatiJanr.J The Buddha-body of Supreme Emanation is characterised by thirty-two major marks (Skt. duiitrzms,m-nz,zhJfmmsr.Jiaksun.z) and eighty minor marks (Skt. asit)'r.llllW)'<lllJI111J), w.hich are .til enur~terar'ed in Maitreya's Ornament of Emerxent Rea/is,ztwn (Abhzsallr.1yJI,ll~lkJra, T 3786, vv. 13-17 and 21-32). These include an array of perfected features of body and speech, which according to the commentaries are the specitlc results of diverse aspects of a buddha's conduct. Malevolent/Beguiling Forces hdud, Skt. miira Buddhist literature speaks of four kinds of beguiling influences which are the ohsucles that impede one's spiritual transformation. These are the influence of: our impure psycho-physicJI aggregates (sk.zndha); our dissonant mental states (klesa); deva's son (dcL r.1putra), which refers to sensual desires and temptations; and the lord of death (m~·tyufhltz), which refers to ordinary death, at the point of which rebirth in cyclic existence continues rather than the attainment of buddhahood. As recordeJ in the life of Sakyamuni Buddha, these archetypal forces projected images of desire and terror which were designed to interrupt his meditative equipoise, just prior to his attainment of manifestly perfect buddhahood at Bodhg.zya in India.
1

Mal)~ala

dkyil- 'khor

The s~mskrit word 'llt.ll_r,.f,z/.z' conveys a number of meanings- circle, wheel, circumfcrerKe, tot.tlity, assembly or literary corpus. In the context of Anuyogu and Atiyoga, the expression 'three m<II,Z,,fulas' specifically refers to the scope of buddha-body, speech anJ mind. Then, in a more general usage, this term indicates the central (dkyil) and peripheral ('k/}()r) deities described in the tantra texts. These deities reside within a celestial palace (z•imdiJ,l), which generally has a perfectly symmetrical des1gn- wnh four gateways and four main walls composed of five layers of different colours, e;tch of the katures corresponding to a particular aspect of the principo1l Jeity·.,, and thereby to the meditator's, pure awareness and purity of perception.

GLO~SARY

Of KEY TER:\-15

The nz,z~ztjala rhus represents a perfected state of being and perception encompassing all phenomena. The celestial palace itself and the deities within it symholise the perfected states of the meditator's own awareness, psycho-physical aggregates, elemental properties, sensory and mental processes, etc. When such m,z~tjalas arc represented symholically, they may rake the form of a two-dimensional image on painted cloth, or they may be made of coloured sand, or else constructed as a three-dimensional structure, carved from wood or other m;HeriJis. The visualisation of ma1.u,fa/us in their rhree-dimemional form plays a crucial role tn the generation stage of meditation. Here, these 'abodes of the deity' arc never perceived of as independently existing universes but as mJnifestarions of the pristine cognition of the principal meditational deity being meditated upon. The symholism of the mm.u.falu of forty-two peaceful deities and fifty-eight wrJthful deities, as it rcbtes to our text, is given in Appendix T\VO .
.Ma~9ala of Offerings mchod-p.z 'z m,z~zc,f.zl The m.u.z<j.zla of offerings is one of the preliminary practices (sn.~oll- 'gru), in whid1 offerings are visualised and offered to the spiritual teacher, medit.ttional deity or Three Precious Jewels. In general, there are outer, inner, and secret ma~z~ala offerings, corresponding to the Three Buddha-bodies of emanation, perfect resource and actual reality. In the first, the entire external material universe, symbolised by Mount Sumern and the four continents, ere, is offered, usually using a circular metal hase on which arc arranged small heaps of rice; second, the inner nz,z~u,lui.J of offerings comprises the subtle body, complete with its energy channels, currents of vital energy and seminal points; and, third, the secret m.u.z..f.llu of offerings is th.tt of actual reality or the ultimate nature of mind. In the preliminary pr.tctices all these are offered one hundred thousJnd rimes as Jn antidote for attachment.

Manjusri ·,am-dp.z/ Maiijusri is the embodiment of the discriminative awareness of all the buddhas, manifesting in the form of a meditational deity. He is normally depicted in his seated posture, holding a sword in his right h.tnd (representing discriminative awareness) and a sacred text in his left hand (indicating his mastery of all knowledge) . .M.ziiJusri is also revered as an eminent histoncal figure who \\'JS one of the eight principal bodhisattva d1sciples of the Buddba; and he is also one of the four outer male bodbisattvas among the forty-two peaceful deities. Sec Appendix Two. Mantra sngags The Sanskrit word m.zntra is an abhreviation of two syllables mana and trayu, respectively meaning 'mind' and 'protection'. Hence 'muntra' literally refers to 'protection of the mind'. The essenrial indication here is the protection of the mmd from the overwhelming influence of ordinMy perceptions and conceptions, which give rise to deluded stares of existence, thus inhibiting the full expression of buddha nature. More specifically, m.mtra refers to the pure sound which is the perfected speech of an enlightened being. The aim of the generation stage practices is the cultivation of the mode of being of the meditational deity, that is ro say the transformation of mundane body, speech and mind into buddha-body, speech and mind. This is supported in ritual practice by the enactment of the h,llld-gcsturcs or seals (mudra), which arc the resonance of buddha-body, by nt.Jntra recitation, which is the resonance of buddha-speech, and hy visualisation, which is the rcsonJnce of buddha-mind. In general, three types of mJIItra arc differentiated: mantras of

GLOSSARY lH KEY TERMS

retention (Skt. Jhdr.JI_li, Tib. gzungs-sng,lgs), gnostic mantr,zs (Skt. vidy.lm,mtr.J, Tib. rt~-sn~.zgs), and secret mantras (Skt. guhy.mz.zntra, Tib. gs.zng-sng,;gs). Among these, the first comprises the m,;ntr.ls associated with the sutras \vhich are de~igned to inrensify discriminative awareness, the second are associated with specific deities of the outer tantras, and designed to imensify skilful means, while the third arc associated with the inner luntras, and are designed to intensify the generation stage of mednatwn. The term 'secret m.mtru' is also utilised as a synonym for the Vehicle of Indestructible Reality ( Vuvuy.lnu). Mantrin sngags-pu An <ldcpt of the vehicle of secret muutr.z (m.mtray.zn,z) in general. However, the word ng.1kpu (sng.zgs-pa) is popularly used to denote those pra...:titioncrs of tautra who choose to ma1ntain a Lunily life, passing on their teachings through a familial lineage, in contrast to the celibate lite of a monk or nun. Mara hdud See under Malevolent I Beguiling Forces. Martial Hauming Spirits hts.m A class of ghostly or haunting spirits, often depicted as armour-clad, who cause colic and intestinal disorders. Foremost .unong them arc Tsimuru, the prote~o:tor of Samye monastery, .1nd )',mzslm ML~rfJo. They are generally depicted as red in colour, brandishing a red lance v-:ith J red tlag in the right hand ;tnd throwing J red-coloured snare (btsan-.:.hugs) with the left hand, while rid1ng a red horse. Means for Attainment sgrub-th,dJs, Skt. sddh,ma The literature of the Buddhist tautnzs is classified into tautra texts and means for att<linment manuals. The former are general expositions concerning the continua of the ground, path and result asso~i<Hed with a parti~o:ular ma~z4.zla of deities, while the Litter <He speciti~ manu.tls derived from and inspired by the former .1s the detailed means for attainment, or meditative realisation, of a spe~11ic mat.z4ala of deities. Such practi~es have four ph.1ses, whi~h are often known as the four aspects of ritual service and means for attainment (bsnycn-sgrub yan-lug b~hi). Meditation sgom, Skt. hh,zu,;n,z Med1t.1tion is defined as a disciplined mental process through whi~h a person cultivates familiarity with a chosen obje~o:t, be it an external object like an image, or even a trivial object su~h <lS a pebble, etc., or an internal obje~t su~h as one's o\vn mind or per~onal identity. According ro the sutras, there are two main types of meditation, one emphasising the faculty of stability and single-pointedness of mimi and the other emphasising <llulysis and dtscrimination. The first type of medit<Hion is absorptive, and produ~es a quality of menral placemenr and tranquillity, knmvn as calm abiding, and the latter, known as penetrative insight, generates a deeper in!'>ight into the profound n.ltures of the chosen object. In the context of the t,mtras, meditation additionally includes the te.:hniques of the generation and perfection stages, as well as those of the Great Perfection. Meditational Deity yi-d,mt, Skt. i~(adeuat,i forms or resonances of fully manifest buddhahood whose characteristics are dt'lined or reve.tled hy the o;pccitic r.mtric practices on the basis of \vhich they .ue visu.tlised. After receiving empowerment and guidan..:e concerning an appropriate meditational deity or mut.z4ula of deities from an authoritative spiritual teacher, the practitioner

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

of the tantras seeks to experientially cultivate union with the qualities of buddhabody, speech and mind through the practice of the generation stage of meditation rebred to a specific medirarional deity or matJtJala of deities. It is essential that the meditarional deities should not be perceived as externally existing or independent beings but rather as forms or resonances of buddha-mind itself. Union with the meditarional deity is said to confer supreme accomplishment on the medirator, in contrast to meditation on the spiritual teacher, which confers blessings, and meditation on the cjakini, which confers enlightened or buddha activities. Meditative Commitment thugs-dam This refers to a resolute paiod of meditative equipoise, and the commitments pertaining to meditative equipoise. Note that the same term is also used as the honorific equivalent of yz-dam (meditational deity). Meditative Concentration bsam-gtan, Skt. dhyana Meditative concentration is defined as the one-pointed abiding in an undisrracted state of mind free from the taint of dissonant mental states (klesa). It is an advanced form of calm abiding, where often both calm abiding and penetrative insight may be present in perfect union. In the sz:Uras and abhidhanna literature of the Lesser Vehicle, four states of meditative concentration are identified as being conducive to birth in the seventeen levels of the form realm. These arc characterised, in their proper order, by a temporary sojourn from: I) physical sensations of pain; 2) mental unhappine~s; 3) mental excitements related to pleasure; and 4) mundane experiences of joy as a whole. In rhc context of the Greater Vehicle, meditarive concentration is the fifth of the six perfections (Skr. ~a{{JJramita). Meditative Equipoise mnyam-par bzhag-pa, Skt. samahlta ~leditative equipoise refers to a one-pointed placement of the mind on a meditation object or a theme, such as the selflessness of the individual personality (Skt. pudgalanazrJtmya) and the selflessness of phenomena (Skt. dlhlrm1.m,1irJtmya), which invariably occurs in the context of prolonged meditative stability (Skt. samadhi). It is contrasted with periods of post-meditation (Skt. p~~ta!.Jbdha, Tib. rjes-thob) during which the meditator arises from meditative equipoise, and engages with his or her environment. Meditative Stabiliry ting-nge- 'dzin, Skr. samadhi The Sanskrit term samadhi literally means 'union' or 'combination', and its Tibetan equivalent ting-nge- 'dzln means 'adhering to that which is profound ;tnd definitive'. Howncr, the term has several Jiffercnt meanings in different contexts. For example, in abhidhanna texts it sometimes refers to a mental factor that is pan of a group of mental factors present in every veridical cognition, whereas in the context of meditation, it can be synonymous with meditative concentration. In m<~ny instances, samJdhi refers to specific meditative stares such as diamond-like meditation, lion's mo1jestic pose meditation and others enumerated in the sutras and tantras of the Greater \'chide. !\tore specifically, in the Mahayoga tantras, the term meditative stability refers to the three phases of the generation and perfection stages of meditation. These arc: the meditative stability of reality (de-bzhin nyid-kyi ting-nge- 'd;;m), the meditative stability which illuminates all that appears (kun-tu snang-ba 'i tlng-nge- 'd;;ln ), and the meditative stability of the causal basis (rgyu'l tlng-nge- ·,t;;in), which respectively and sequentially focus on great emptiness, great compassion and the seals of the mcditational deities. In the Unsurpassed

G L 0 S S A R Y 0 F K E Y T E R :-.1 S

Yogatautras, somewhat different terminology is used in the contexts of the generation sta~e .llld the perfection stage. In the generation stage, the practice of the means of attainment rakes pl.Ke within the framework of (i) the initial meditative srahility (J.mg-po slryor-ha'i tilrg-11ge- 'chin), (1i) the meditative stability of the victonous rite of rhc ma~uJala (dkyrl-'khor rg;.·al-clwg-gi tillg-nge-'dzin), and (iii) the meditative ~t.thdity of the VICtorious rite of enlightened activity (/as rgyul-chug-gr ting-nge'dzin). In the conrcxr of the perfection stage, however, these same terms refer roan advanced level of realisation.
Mental Body yrd-lus, Skr. m.mok.iya The non-corporeal body assumed during the intermediate state of rebirth, which is said to have an initial similitude to the physical body of the previous life. See Chapter 1 1. Mental Factor sems-byrmg, Skt. caitasrku Sec Mind. Merit bsod-nums, Skt. puf!yu Merit refers to the whole~ome tendencies imprinted in the mind as a result of positive and skilful thoughts, words, and actions that ripen in the experience of happine~s and well-being. According to the Greater Vehicle, it is important to deJK.Ite the merit of one's wholesome actions to the benefit of all sentient beings, ensuring rhat others also experience rhe results of the positive actions generated. Middle Way Jbu-ma'i lam, Skt. 11ZLldhy.mraprutipad See Madhyamaka. Mind sems, Skt. cittc1 In Buddhism, mind is defined as a dynamic process, which is simply the awareness of an obJect or event. In irs technical usage mind is contrasted with fifty-one mental factors, which are enumer.Hed in the abhidhan11a literature. In the context of this d1ffen:nti.Hion rhc prim.uy function of 'mind' is to be aware of the referent object as ;1 whole, whcreJs the modalities which relate to the specific aspects of the object are defined as 'mental factors'. It is importanr to understand rh.H mind in Buddhism .,hould not be conceived of as a static thing or as something composed of a spiritual sub•aance. Although some Buddhist philosophical schools of thought do identify mind as the essence of being or personal identity, the notion of self or person is not .1n e~senrial component of the Buddhist concept of mind. In the Dzogcheu teachings .1n Important distinction is made between the Tibetan terms 'sems' and 'rig-pa'. Here, our 'ordinJry mind' (sems) is the gross dualising consciousness (rnam-shes) whereas pure awareness (rig-pa) is free from the dualistic perceptions of subject and obJect. See Awareness, Intrinsic Awareness, and Consciousness. Mind of Enlightenment !Jyang-chub sems Sec Bodhicitta. Mindfulness drull-fJa, Skt. sm~ti Mindfulness is the faculty which enables the mind ro maintain its attention on a referent uhjecr, rhus allowing for the development of familiarity with the object and .1lso the ahiliry to retain its imprint within memory for future recollection. Together with menral alertness, it is one of the two indispensable mental factors for the development of calm abiding. It is mindfulness which counteracts rhe arising of

GLOSSAKY Or KEY

TEK~lS

491

forgetfulness, and forgetfulness IS one of the greatest obsradcs to a successful wlrivation of meditative stability. Monastic Community Jge- 'dun, Skr. sangha In its classical Buddhist usage, the term refers mainly to the spiritual communities of orda1ned practitioners, both monks and nuns (Skt. bhzk~u/ bhlk~ut.zi}. The actual s.mgh.1, v>hen viewed as an obJect of refuge in the context of the Three Precious Jewels, is a highly reahsed, 'supreme assembly' of those who have gained a direct insight into the true nature of reality, emptiness, i.e. those who have attained the path of insighr. Monastic Preceptor mkh.In-fJo, Skr. upddhydya The term monastic preceptor specifically indicates one who presides over the monastic ordination ccremony of new monks. However, in some Tibetan traditions, the word 'khcnpo' (mkh,m-po) suggests an ordained professor of Buddhist philosophy, in which case it is equivalent to the term geshe (dge-shes) in its later usage. See Spiritual Friend. The same term can also be used to refer to the abbot of a monastery, in which case it often rakes the honorific form mkhan rin-po-che, the precious abbot. Monastic Vows sdom-pa, Skt. S.It~zvt~ru See Vows. Mother and Child Aspects of Reality chos-nyld ma-bu The 'mother' and 'child' aspects of reality arc those associated respectively with the inner radiance of the ground and the inner radiance of the path. Sec Inner Radiance. ,\1otivational Tendencies 'du-byas, Skr. Sut?zsk.ira See Aggregate of .\1otivational Tendencies . .\1ount Gampodar sgum-po-gd.zr-gyz rl-bo ~lount G.1mpod.1r in Dukfw is the treasure-site (gter-kha) from which the cyde of the Peaafitl and \Y/rathful Deitu~s: N,ztural Libcratzon through f Recognition off hzlzghtcned lnte11tlon (Lin-khro dgungs-pa r.Jng-gro/) was unearthed as treasure \gter-m,l) by Kamra Lingpa dunng the fourteenth century. Sec Gyurme Dorje's 'Brief Literary H1story'. Mount Potalaka rz-ho po-ta-/,z-ka PotJ/ak,z, the abode of Avalokite5vara, is reputedly identified with a mounrain in modern Karnataka State, South India, according to the classical Indian Buddhist tradition. However, in the Chmese Buddhist tradition, it is identified with the eastern island of Putuo Shun in the hay of Hangzhou .
~lounr

.\1ount Sumeru rz-rab ~lount Szmzeru is the axzs mundz of Indian cosmology, the centre of the world. In terms of the Hindu, Jain, Buddhist and Bon pilgrimage traditions, it is widely identified with the sacred Mount Kal/,zsh in far-west Tibet. See Four Continents and Eight Subconrincnts. Nagarjuna klu-sgrub A pre-eminent second-century AD Indian scholar and the founder of the Madlryamaka philosophical school of Buddhist thought.

492

G L 0 S S A R Y 0 F K E Y T E R :'\1 S

Natural Expression r• .mg-bzhin, Skt. svabhava While the term svabhava conveys other meanings, such as self-identity and inherent existence in the contexts of Madhyamaka philosophy and sutra-based literature in general, here in the specific ternunology of the Nyingma school, it is rendered as 'natural expression· because it describes the dynamic of the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource. As such, it is contrasted with the essence - the dynamic of the Buddhabody of Reality, and compassionate energy- the dynamic of the Buddha-body of Emanation. The Buddha-body of Perfect Resource is said to be endowed with seven aspects of natural expression: I) ripening in the n<Hure of reality, 2) buddha attributes which are spontaneously present, 3) dimensionless pristine cognition, 4) intrinsic rather than external manifestation, 5) unqualified sameness, 6) freedom from single and multiple concepts, and 7) inseparability at all times. In the context of the present work, the term 'natural expression' also refers to the modalities of the twenty-eight wrathful/svarf, when contrasted with the 'natural purity' (g1tus-dag) of the peaceful deities and the 'natural transformation' (gnus-gyur) of the wrathful deities. Natural Liberation ru11g-grol According to the terminology of the Nyingma school and in the context of the title of our text Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: N,ltural Liberution through {Recugnitirm ofi Enlightened Intention (Zhi-khro dgongs-pa ra11g-grul) the term 'natural liberation' refers to a natural process of recognition of the actual nature of the object, which is free from any form of renunciation or <lntidore. Dud1um Rmpoche expl.1ins the term 'natural liberation' (rung-gro[J to mean that recognition or awarene~~ is 'uncontrived by any antidote, and all that arises is liberated without reference to other liberating activities'. This accomplishment is a distinctive feature of the rc~ult­ ant vehicles, such as Atiyoga. in contrast to the causal vehicles, in ,..,·hich the application of antidotes and renunciation arc reljuired. Natural Pristine Cognition ra11g-hyu11g ye-shes This term denotes the presence of intrinsic awareness which is pristine cognition as an uncultivated seed, said to abide a temporally in the mental continua of all semient beings. See Intrinsic Awareness and Pristine Cognition. Natural Purity gnas-su dag-palnzam-par d,lg-pa According to the terminology of the Nyittgma school and in the context of the present work, the term 'natural purity' refers to the quiescent naturally abiding purity of the psycho-physical aggregates, elemental properties, and sensory and mental processes as represented by the forty-two peaceful deities of the ma~ufala. 'Natural purity' inJic<Hes the presence of the assembly of peaceful deities in the continuum of the ground. See Appendix Two. Natural Transformation g"as gyur-pa In contrast to the term 'natural purity', the term 'natural transformation' refers to the transformative energies of the fifty-eight wrathful deities of the ntt.l1.tcjala, which bring about the active transformation of the conditioned psycho-physical a~gre­ gates, elemental properties, and sensory and mental processes. 'Natural transformation' indicates the presence of the <.1ssembly of wrathful deities in the continuum of the ground. See Appendix Two.

G L 0 S SA R Y 0 f

KEY T ER

~~

S

493

Naturally Manifest r.znR-sn.mg In the terminology of the Nyingma school, the term 'naturally manifest' or 'intrinsically manifest' (rmzx-snanx) refers to the non-dual mode in which the natural radiance (r.mg-gsal) of pristine cognition (ye-shes) arises as intrinsic awareness (r.zng-rig). Sec Intrinsic Awareness. An important distinction is also made between rhe Buddha-body of Perfect Resource, which manifests naturally or inrrinsically, and the Buddha-body of Emanation, \vhich manifests extraneously (g::han-sn.znx), for the sake of sentient beings. Negativity sdig-pa, Skt. pap.z The negativity arising from the performance of non-virtuous past actions, which, along with negative ohscurations (sgrib) and their habitual tendencies (bag-chag), all have their basis in delusion, attachment, and aversion. Negativity, therefore, generates a momentum towards a less favourable rebirth within cyclic existence. New and Old/ Ancient Translation Schools gs,zr-ma-d,mg rnying-mu See N yingma. Nihilist chud-/t.;-h,zlmur-stug-f~<l, Skt. nai~!lnku Nihilism and etcrnalism arc the two extreme views which must, according to Buddhist thought, he transcended in order for any philosophical position to be considered well-founded. Nihilism in general refers to the view that denies the existence of objects, l.tws of cause and effect and the principle of dependent origination. However, based on one's metaphysical position with regard to the nature of reality. the criteria of what constiwres a dcn1al of the existence of phenomena or the law of cause and effect may differ. In ancient India the nihilist view was characteristic of the Caru.ik,z and B.irhasfJ.Jtya matcri.tlist schools. See Eternalist and Madhyamaka. Nine Sequences of the Vehicle theg-fhz'i rzm-pu dgu Sec under Nine Vehicles. Nine Vehicles theg-pa dg11, Skt. naz·.zy.uz.z In the Nyingma school, the BuJJhist te.t~.:hings are systematised Jccording to a hierarchy of the three outer or causJl vehicles (those of the pious attendants, hermit buddhas and bodhisaNvas), those of the three ourer classes of tantra (Kriyatantra, Ubhayatantra and Yogatantra), and those of the three inner classes of tantra (Mahayoga, Anuyoga and Atiyoga). See the nine individual entries. Nirvar;ta mya11g- 'das Nirvd~za (lit. 'state beyond sorrow') refers to the permanent cessation of all suffering and rhe dissonant mental states which cause and perpetuate suffering, along with all misapprehension with regard to rhe nJturc of emptiness (Skt. slln)·ut.:i). Nirva~zu is therefore the antithesis of cyclic existence (Skt. Su1?ZS.iru). Since it is through the misapprehension of the nature of actual reality (Skt. dh.zrnz.Jta) that our conscious stares of delusion arise, a total elimination of these dissonant mental states can only be effected by generating a genuine insight into the true nature of actual reality. All the bodhisaNva paths expounded in rhc st:Uras and all the aspects of the continuum of the path which are expounded in the tantras arc regarded as the means by which nirv,i~zu might be attained. Classical Buddhist literature mentions three types of nirvJ,_zu: 1) nirua~zu with resiJue, i.e. the initial state of nirl'd1_1a when the person is still dependent on his or her karmically conditioned psy..:ho-physical aggregates

494
(skundhu); .z.) mn•,il_tu without residue, i.e.

GLOSSARY Of KEY TERMS

<ln advanced state of nirvlif!u where the former aggregates have also bt.'en consumed within emptiness; and 3) non-ab1ding nirv.i~za, i.e. a· state that has transcended both the extremes of conditioned cyclic existence and also the isolated peace or quiescence of nirv.i~zu.

Non-virtuous Action mi-dgc-lhz, Skt. ukus.1la Sec Virtuous Action. Nucleus of the Sugataffathagata hde-gshegs snying-po I dc-gshegs snying-pu, Skt. sugut.zg.Jrbhalt.JthJg.Jt,zg.Jrbh.J Both Sugat.l (One Who Has Gone to Bli~~) and TathJg,zta (One Who Ha!> Thus Gone) arc epithets of Buddha. However, the expression 'nucleus of the sugat.z' or 'nucleus of the t.zth.ig,l!a' refers to the Sl'ed of buddha nature present bur uncultivated m the mental continuum of all sentient beings, and without ,.,hich the att.linment of enlightenment or buddhahood would be impossible. Sec Buddha nature. Nyinda Choje nyin-z/,z chos-rJc The name of the son of Kanna Lingpa. See Gyurme Doric's 'Brief Literary History'. Nyinda 01.er nyiu-z/.z 'od-zer The name of a second-generation lineage-holder of Kanna Lingpa. See Gyurme Doric's 'Brief Literary History'. Nyingma nzying-mu The oldest school of Tibet.m Buddhism, based on the teaching traditions <1nd texts introduced to Tibet during the c3rliest phase of Buddhist prop<1garion, which coincided with the reigns of the Buddhist kings of the Yarlwzg dynasty in the eighth to ninth centuries. These tr.1ditions were introduced from India by Padmasambhava, Vim.z/,zmitr,z and others, and m<lintaincd in Tiber by the twenty-five disciples of l'admasambhava. The distinction between the old and new schools of Tibetan Buddhism is made on the basis of the interregnum which followed the persecution of Buddhism during the ninth century and preceded the second or later phase of Buddhi.,t prop.1gation when a further corpus of Buddhist literature was introduced from India by 1\l.zrp.z, Drokmi LotsJw.z, Atis,z, Rinchen Zan!(J}() and others during the eleventh century. Lineages derived from the earlier phase and works translated before the interregnum are known as Nymgma, or the 'Ancient Translation school', in contrast to those which emerged thereafter and are known as S.1rma, or the 'New Tran~lation ~chools'. Nyingthig snying-thig The teachings known as the 'Innermost Spirituality' or 'Heart-Essence' (snying-thig) are the most important and essential pith instructions within the esoteric ino;tructional class (up.zde5ul'<Zrgu) of Atiyoga, including the techniques of Cutting through Resistance and All-surpassing Realisation. Two distinct lineages of these teachings were introduced from India by Padmasambhava <1nd Vtmalamitra, and then transmmed \l."ith great secrecy in Tibet until the time of Longchen Rabjampa (fourteenth century), who integratt·d them in his four-p.zrt Innermost Spirztualtty (sNymg-thig ya-hzhi), from which time they were widely disseminated and practised. D1verse traditions of Ny111gthig .ue pr<Ktised within the treasure (gter-m,z) traditions of the Nyingmu school, the most influenti.ll in more recent times being the l1111ermost SJiirztu,zlzty ol l.ongchcnJhl (K/cmg-cheu snyi11.~-thi!(), wh1ch was reve.1lcd during the eighteenth century by Rigd::.in }tgnze Lin!(JII.l on the b.1sis of his inspirauonal

GLOSSARY Of KEY TERMS

495

visions of Lmz~choz R.lhJ.mzpa, and whi.:h has since be.:ome the most popular recension of j\;ymgthig teachings throughout Tibet. Oath-bound Protectors d.Jm-c,;n A class of protectors of the sacred teachings who are considered ro have been originally indi~cnous Tibetan spirits, bound under an oath of allegiance ro Buddhism by Padmasambhava during the eighth century. Obscuration sgrib-pa, Skr. az,ara~z,; There are two main categories of obscurations (sgrib-pa), namely: the dissonant mental states (nyon-sgnh, Skr. klesiiuar.J~za) which arc the obscurations ro liberation, and the subtle propensities of these mental states as well as that of fundamental ignorance, which constitute the obscurations to omniscience (shes-sgrib, Skt. jfzeyav,zra~z.l). As the terms themselves indicate, the first category of obscurarions obstruct the individual from gaining total freedom from karmically conditioned cyclic existence, and the latter from attaining a direct and non-deceptive realisation of all aspects of reality. The obscurations to liberation include not only the conscious stares of our deluded mind, such as desire, hatred, jealousy, harmful intent, ere., bur also the psychological habitual tendencies which are imprinted by these stares, which serve as seeds for their continuity and recurrence. The second category of obscurations refers to rhe 'propensities for bewildering dualistic appearance' (gnyis-snang khru/-p,; ·; hJg-ch,;gs), the subtle dispositions and latent tendencies which are deeply ingrained within an individual's psyche and which arc the origins of our dualistic perceptions of the phenomenal world and of our own consciousness. A total ovcn:oming of both obscurations (Tib. sgrib-gnyis) marks the attainment of buddhahood. Obstacle-causing Spirits b,;r-cad-kyi gdon The various classes of spirits (gdon) who cause obstacles to individuals and pollute the environment, which are said ro impede certain localities, the physical body and human activities. In particular, there is an enumeration of eighteen such spirits to whom paediatric Jisea~es are attributed by the Tibetan medical tradition. Obstructing Forces bgegs, Skt. viglma A class of forces which obstruct spiritual practice, but whose obstacles may be cons1dered psychologically as cathartic in that their emergence may suggest that one's own negative past actions are ripening and therefore their negative impact is finally maturing and coming to an end. Often when means for attainment are performed in accordance with the tantras, a forma-offering is dedicated ro such obstructing forces prior to the commenccmenr of the generation stage of meditation. O<:J<:Jiyana o-rgyan Oqqiyana, the birthplace of Padmasambhava, is the name of an ;mcient kingdom, probably situated in the remote north-west of the Indian subcontinent, where a large corpus of ranrric literature is ~aid to have been propagated in the human world for the first rime. The land of Oq~fiyJna is associated with a number of great accomplished masters (siddha), including Padmasambhava, Kambala{Jtida, and l.ilavajra in particular. On the basis of traditional Tibetan pilgrimage accounts, such as that written by Orgyenpa Rinchenpel, modern writers identify OqqiyJn,; as having been in the region of the Swat valley in Pakistan. The Tibetan form of OqqiyJna, Orgyen, is also by extension a name for Padmasa.mbhava himself.

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

Offering mchod-pa, Skt. puja In a Buddhist context, this refers to offerings made to the meditational deity, the spiritual teacher or other appropriate objects of veneration. In general, there are offerings associated with body, speech and mind. Thus, an offering can be of material substance such as flowers, scented water and food, or a verbal offering, such as the recitation of songs of praise, or a mental offering, such as the offering of the positive potentials which one may have accumulated as a result of having engaged in wholesome deeds beneficial to others. More specifically, the tantras identify four kinds of offering which are to be made, namely, outer, inner, secret and definitive offerings. The outer offerings of enjoyment (phyi nyer-spyod-kyi mchod-pa) are the eight associated with the eight offering goddesses, including water for the mouth, water for the feet, flowers, incense, light, perfume, food, and sound, as well as song, dance, and meditation. Inner offerings of commitment (nang dam-rdzas-kyi mchod-pa) refer to the pure essences of semen, blood and flesh, transformed through the yoga of the energy channels, currents and seminal points within the subtle body. Secret offerings arc those of sexual union and 'liberation' (gsang-ha sbyor-sgrol-gyi mchod-pa) related to the esoteric rites and practices which transform the five poisons into the five pristine cognitions, and definitive offerings are those of great sameness (de-kho-na-nyid mnyam-pa chen-po'i mchod-pa), namely the union of bliss and emptiness. Omniscience thams-cad mkhyen-pa-nyid, Skt. sarvajiiata In a Buddhist context the word is reserved only for the all-knowing pristine cognition of the buddhas. Although the original Sanskrit and Tibetan terms, like their English equivalent, do carry with them the literal connotation of all-knowingness, the principal meaning of the term should be understood in terms of a direct and simultaneous perception of the dual aspects of reality, i.e. of the phenomenal aspects (valid only within the relative framework of our ordinary perceptions) and their ultimate nature, emptiness. In other words the term refers primarily to a nonconceptual simultaneous perception of the two truths within a single mental act. One-day Vows hsnyen-gnas-kyi sdom-pa, Skt. upavtlsasa'?"vara Sec Pratimok~a and Vows. Pacification zhi-ba'i las, Skt. santikriya See under Four Aspects of Enlightened Activity. Padma Family padma'i rigs, Skt. padmakula One of the five enlightened families (paiicakula) into which the meditational deities of the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource are subdivided. The deities of the Padma family include the peaceful buddhas Amitabha and Pa1.u!aravJsinl, and the corresponding wrathful aspects Padma Heruka and Padmakrodhesvarf. See Appendix Two. Padmakara padma'i 'byung-gnas See Padmasambhava. Padmasambhava, padma sam-bha-va Padmasambhava, also generally known as Guru Rinpoche and Padmakara, is revered as the master from Otf4iyana who, along with Santarak~ita and King Trismrg Detsen, formally established Buddhism in Tibet during the eighth century. In particular, he is renowned for his suppression and conversion of malevolent

G L0

~

S A R Y 0 F K E Y T E R 1\1 S

497

spirits and hostile non-Buddhist forces, as well as for introducing to Tibet many oral transmissions and texts of Mahayoga and Atiyoga, including the teachings contained in our text, the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities: Natural Liberation through f Recognition of] l:nlightened Intention (Zhi-khro dgmzgs-pa rang-grol). To practitioners of the Nyingma school, and all those who follow the practices of the Nyingma lineages, h~ is revered as a 'second buddha', and there are many systems of meditation based on the visualisation of his rainbow-like form. Tibetan literature contains a number of biographical accounts, which describe his life in the form of eight or twelve different manifestations. See Gyurme Dorje's 'Brief Literary History'. Palace pho-lm.mg/gzhul-yas-khang, Skt. vimJna Sec under Mal)<)ala. Paradise :.hings-kh,zms, Skt. huddhak~etra Sec Buddha Field. Past Actions /,zs, Skt. karm,z The technical term 'k,zrm.z' refers to the dynamic relationship between actions and their consequences. It includes in its causal aspect both the actual actions (physical, verbal and mental) and the psychological imprints and tendem:ies created within the minJ by such actions. After the performance of an action a causal chain is maintained within the mental continuum which continues through the presem and successive rebirths. Such a karmic potential is activated when it interacts with appropriate circumstances and conditions, thus leading to the fruition of its effects. This dynamic of p<lSt actions has two main features: 1) one never experiences the consequences of an action not committed; and 2) the potential of an action once committed is never lost unless obviated by specific remedies. It is also worth bearing in mind that the idea of 'past actions' in Buddhism cannot not be equated with the notion of causality as understood in a stri~.:rly deterministic sense. Path fum, Skt. mJrg.z The means of spiritual practice (view, meditation, conduct and so forth) by which the rcsultJnt goal of any of the nine vehicles might be attained. Peaceful and Wrathful Deities zhi-khro Sec Appendix Two. Penetrative Insight !IJdg-mthcmg, Skt. vipasyan,z This is an analytical meditative state, penetrating the nature, characteristics or function of the chosen object of meditation, which is accompanied by physical and mental suppleness and generated on the basis of mental tranquillity or calm abiding. The object of such an insight can be mundane, such as the topics of impermanence and suffering, or supramundane, such as emptiness, the ultimate nature of reality. This 'penetrative insight' can be attained only in union with calm abiding, and many meditation manuals state that the realisation of 'calm abiding' is an essential prerequisite for the cultivation of 'penetrative insight'. However, in Unsurpassed Yogatantra there exist advanced techniques which enable practitioners to attain 'calm abiding' and 'penetrative insight' simultaneously. Perception 'dtt-shcs, Skt. s.z1~f1id Sec under Aggregate of Perceptions.

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

Perfection of Discriminative Awareness sher-phyin, Skt. praif!.ipt.irumitii Often translated also as 'perfc~tion of wisdom', the Sanskrit word prai11iipt.iramitii rders to the sixth of the six perfections (Skt. ~afpt.lramitd) which are cultivated by bodhisattvas. The term 'pcrfcl.:tion of discrimmative awareness' has three different applications: firstly, it may refer to the resultant, perfected dis~riminative awareness ( 'bras-bu sher-phyirt) of a buddha, which IS totally non-dual, free of all obscurations, and perceives spontaneously in a single mental act the dual aspects of all phenomena. Sec Two Truths. Secondly, it may refer to the bodhisattva paths which lead ro the above perfection of dis~riminauve awareness (lam sher-phyin), blending together at the most profound level the discriminative awareness of emptiness (siinyutJ) and the skilful means of great compassion (mahakanu.z.i). Thirdly, it may denote the literature of the Pr,lpidpJrumztJ subdivision of the sutras of the Greater Vehicle, which outline the essential aspects of those paths and results (gzhzmg sher-phyin). Iconographically, Praf1i,ifJ.iramitJ is depicted in the form of a female meditational deity and the Sanskrit sutras themselves are invariably entitled Transcendent Lady who is the Per(edion of Discrimmatil'e Awareness (Bhagavatipra;,;aparamitii). See also under Discriminative Awareness. Perfection Stage rdzogs-rim, Skt. sampamzakruma Following the meditative generation of the form of the meditational deity and an approximation of the pristine cognition of the meditational deity during the generation stage (Skt. utpattikrama), the perfection stage employs tc~hni4ucs for controlling the energy channels, vital energies and seminal points within the practitioner's transmuted body. The purpose is to make manifest the inner radiance induced by the ever-deepening realisation of the four kinds of emptiness or 'dissolution stages' and of the coemergent pristine cognition induced by the four delights. The factor that marks the transition from generation stage to perfection stage is the yogin's ability to draw the vital energies (Skt. vt.lyu) into the central channel. See also Great Perfection.
Perfe~tions fJha-rol-du f'hyin-pa Sec under Six Perfections.

Pious Attendant nyan-thos, Skr. srJz•,1ka The practitioners of the Lesser Vehicle (hinayana) include both pious attendants and hermit buddhas (Skt. pratyekalmddha). The primary differences between them arc the fo(US and modalities of their pra(ticc on the path towJrds liberation from cyclic existence. The pious attendant places greater emphasis on destroying the mistaken belief in personal identity (pudga/a) by overcoming the primary and second<~ry dissonant mental states, while the hermit buddha additionally comes to realise that objective phenomena are devoid of inherent existence. Characteristically, the pious attendants depend on oral instructions when both receiving tea(hings and when giving guidance to others on the path. See Hermit Buddha. Posture of the Bodhisattvas sems-dpa 'i skyil-knmg, Skt. sattvapary,uika Also known as the posture of royal case (mahariiialilasana), this is the posture in which seated male and female bodhisattvas are commonly depicted iconographIcally or visualised in meditation in which the right leg is extended and the left leg drawn in. The extended right leg and foot symbolises the abandonment of all negative defects, and the drawn in left leg symbolizes the deity's understanding .md (Uitiv.uion of all positive attributes. As the combined purity of the deity's

GLO~SAHY

Of KEY

TER~S

499

compassionate skilful means (extended right leg) and discriminative awareness (dr.1wn in left leg), this posture also represents the abandonment of the two extremes of cyclic existence and niroat;a. Posture of the Lion sc11g-gc ·; 'dug-st..mgs. Skr. si1~:hjs,.ma The posture of the lion i~ the posture assumed by Silkyamuni Buddha at the time of hts passing, lying on the right stJe wnh his right arm bent at the elbow and his palm supporting the heaJ. Posture of Royal Ease r,I.,')'..Jl-chcn rol-pa 'z skyil-krung, Skr. m.;hJrJJulil.lsan.J See under Posture of the Bodhisattvas. Power stobs, Skr. b.1la In general, spiritu.1l power is dassitied, along with discriminative awareness and compassion, as one of the three principal attributes to be cultivated by bodhisaNt•as, symbolised in this case by the form of the BodhisaNva Vajrapat;i. More specifically, boJhisaNvas cultivate ten spiritual powers (d.Js.Jhula) with respect to their reflections, higher aspirations, practice, discriminative awareness, aspirationill prayers, diverse vehicles, modes of condw.:t, emanational abilities, enlightenment, and teaching of the sacred doctrine. Distinct from these are the so-called ten powers of the buddhas (d.Js.Jt.JthJ~Jtubula), which are all inc..:luded among the categories of buddha attributes. Buddhas arc said to be endowed with spiritual power because they have: (i) the power of knowing the positive ilnd negative comingcncies of all things, (ii) the power of knowing the maturation of past actions, (iii) the power of knowing diverse volitions, (iv) the power of knowing diverse sensory spectra, (v) the power of knowing those who arc of supreme ability and those who arc not, (vi) the power of knowing all spiritual paths - wherever they lead, (vii) the power of omniscience with respect to meditative concentration, liberation, meditative stability, meditative equipoise, ilnd puriflcatton of dissonant mental states, (viii) the power of recollecting past abodes, (ix) the power of knowing where consciousness is tr.msferred at the time of death and rebirth, and (x) the power of knowing that the entire flow of corrupt past actions has cc.1scd. Prahcvajra dg.J '-r.Jh rdo-rie ~lore commonly known in the Tibet.m form G.1rab Durie, Pr.Jhcr 1ufru is regarded as the first human lineage holder of Atiyoga. Prasangika thul- 'gyur-ba Sec Madhyamaka.
Pratimok~a

so-sor thar-pu

An individual's practice of ethical discipline which acts as a firm foundation ior the aspirant's spiritual endeavour whilst on the path towards the attainment of liberation from cycli..: existence. There are eight types of pr.ltimok~a vows: 1) one-day vows (Skt. upuvasalupavdsi), a lay person's vow of abstinence, taken only for a twenty-four hour period, from killing, sexual misconduct, stealing, lying, alcohol, frivolous activities, caring after lunch, and using high scats or beds; 2-.3) the five vows of a lay man and a lay woman (Skt. upasukul updsikJ) which are not to kill, lie, steal, be intoxi..:ated, or commit sexual mis..:onduct; 4-5) the vows of the novice monk and novi..:e nun (Skt. srJmu~:era/ srama~renka); 6) the vows of a probatiOnary nun (Skt. siksam.it;u); 7) the 253 vows of a fully ordained monk (Skr. hiJJk~u); and 8) the .3 64 vows maintained by fully ordained nuns (Skr. hhiksu~:i). Pr.itmwk~a

soo

GLOSSARY OF KEY TER:V1S

literally means 'individual liberation', or the initial stage of release from the irnplusive force of non-virtuous habits. 'l'rdt1' means 'individually' or 'first', and 'nwk~a', 'release', 'freedom', or 'liberation'. SL"c also under Vows. Preceptor mkhmz-po, Skt. upadhyJya See Monastic Preceptor. Precious Jewels dkon-mchog, Skr. rat11a See under Three Precious Jewels. Preliminary Practices sngmz- 'gro The preliminary practices arc thosl.' undcrt.tkl'n by an aspiring practitioner of thl.' tantras, prior to engaging in the main practices of the generation and perfection stages of meditation. There are both outer, or common, preliminaril.'s, and inner, or uncommon, preliminaries. The former are the four analytical meditations which turn the mind of the practitioner away from worldly distractions and towards the sacred teachings, namely those focusing: on the nature of the precious opportunities afforded by human birth; on death and impermanence (anity,l); on the dynamics of past actions (karma) and their consequences; and on the sufferings of being~ within cyclic existence (Sut?ISJra). The latter are the five purificatory pr<tctices, each of which is performed one hundred thousand times, namely: the taking of refuge in the Three Precious Jewels, in conjunction with the act of prostration (which purifies pride); the cultivation of the altruistic intention to attain enlightenment for the sake of others, in conjunction with the recitation of the appropriate verses (which purifies envy and mundane ambition); the recitation of Vajrasattva's Hundred-syllable Mantra (which purifies aversion); the offering of the matJc.tala (which purifies attachment); and the cultivation of union with the enlightened attributes of the spiritual teacher {guruyog<I}, in conjunction with the appropriate mantra recitation (which purifies delusion). Sec Ch.tpters 1 and 2. Primordial Purity ka-dag See Spontaneous Presence. Pristine Cognition ye-shes, Skt. f1IJ11J The modality of buddha-mind. Although all sentient beings possess the potential for actualising pristine cognition within their mental continuum, the psychological confusions and deluded tendenCies which defile the mind obstruct the natur.tl expression of these inherent potentials, making them appear instead as aspects of mundane consciousness (viji!Jil<I). BudJI11st literature mentions five types of pnstine cognition which arc the quintessential perfected states of our own mental faculties and which are identified with the five male buddhas of the mm.uf.t~la of Peaceful and Wrathful Deities. Sec Appendix Two. The pristine cognition of reality's expanse (dharmadhJtujfwna) is the natural purity of the aggregate of consciousness, free from delusion; the mirror-like pristine cognition (ddars.JjfzJIIi.l) is the mind to which all the objects of the five senses appear spontaneously as in a mirror, it is the natural purity of the aggregate of form, free from aversion; the pristine cogniloinn of sameness (samatdftiJna) is the mind that experiences the three different types of feelings (good, bad and indifferent) as of one taste, it is the natural purity of the aggregate of feeling, free from pride; the pristine cognition of discernment (pratyavek~al.l<ljtlii1Za) is the mind that accurately identities names and forms, it is the natural purity of the aggregate of perceptions, free from attachment; and the

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

501

pristine cognition of accomplishment (k~tyup,lsthanajfiana) is the mind that accords with awakened activities and their purposes, it is the natural purity of the aggregate of motivational tendencies, free from envy and self-centred ambition. Propensities bag-chags, Skt. vJs,.mJ Sec Habitual Tendencies. Prostration phyag- 'tshal-ba A common gesture of reverence in the practice of Tibetan Buddhism. During the preliminary practices (sngrm- 'gro) of the tatttras, the act of paying homage through prostration is undertaken, in conjunction with the recitation of the prayer of refuge, as a means of reducing and eliminating pride. Protectors of the [Sacred] Teachings chus-skyunglsrung-ma, Skt. dharmupJ/a There arc two main categories of protectors: r) supramundane protectors, such as Mahakala, Ekaja~f, DorJe l.ekpa, and RJhu/a, who arc the wrathful manifestations of enlightened beings; and 2) worldly protectors, many of whom were originally malevolent forces who were subdued by accomplished masters such as Padmasambhava and then assigned to protect the teachings. In both cases their activity is to protect the sacred teachings and its sincere practitioners from obstacles. Provisional Meaning drang-don, Skt. neyartha See under Definitive Meaning. Pure Illusory Body dug-pa 'i sgyu-lus See Illusory Body. Pure Realm See Buddha Field. Pure Realm of the Sky-farcrs d.1g-pu ·, mkha ·-spyod-kyi zhing, Skt. khecarik~etra The pure realm or fields of the sky-farers represents the level on which the awarenessholders (v1dyJdharu) are said to abide. Pure Vision/Perception dug-pu 'i snang-ba In the terminology of the Nyingma school, the expression 'pure vision' frequently refers to a type of revelation, through which meditational deities or accomplished masters of the past appear in a vision to impart their teachings. This mode of pure vision, therefore, has some affinity with the revelations of the treasures (gter-mu). More generally, 'pure vision' denotes the purity of perception of meditational deities, symbolically represented by their respective ma~Jc!alas, which is cultivated in the generation stage of meditation. However, the Tibetan equivalent dug-pa'i snung-bu is also used colloquially to mean a 'positive perspective' or 'positive outlook' on life. Purification sbyrmg-ba, Skt. sodhuna The verb 'to purify' has two distinct meanings in a Buddhist context. firstly, purification can refer simply to the purification of non-virtuous habits or dissonant mental states, ere., in which the objects of purification arc, without qualification, totally eradicated from one's mental continuum. In the second meaning, which arises more in the context of tantra, the term 'purification' has rather different implications. Here, the significance of the word is understood in terms of transmutation from an impure, polluted state into an unstained, purified state. This process

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

is exemplified by the practices related to G.lrrying the Three Buddhu-hodies un to the Path (sKu-gsum lam- 'khyer). In this context, the phases of ordinary death, intermediate state, and rebirth when experienced choicelessly as a result of one's past actions, are the bases of purification. The meditations on the Three Buddhabodies arc the purifying paths and the accomplishments of the Buddha-body of Reality, the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource, and the Buddha-body of Emanation arc the purified results. Purification of the Lower Realms ngan-sung sbyong-ba, Skt. durgutiparisodhana This is the Tantra of the Puri{ic.ztion of the Lower Re.zlms (Sarvadurgutiparisodhan.zt.J1ltra), which is recited to assist the deceased in avoiding the pitfalls of rebirth as a sentient being trapped in the three lower existences. Quiescence zln-ha, Skt. santi This is a synonym for the quiescent state of nin'dfJa, in which all dissonant mental states and misconceptions concerning actual reality have ended, and rebirth in cyclic existence no longer occurs. As such, it is the antithesis of the rebirth process (srid-pa). Sec also under nirva~a. Rainbow Light IBody J ·;a '-Ius The appearance of rainbow light at the time of death is indicative of the deceased's adeptness in the practices of the Great Perfection (rdzogs-fJa chen-po) or in certain other perfection stage practices. There arc many incidents recorded in Tibetan biographical literature concerning the attainment of the rainbow-light body at the time of death. On occasions when this attainment is residual, the physical body will shrink dramatically or vanish into light, leaving only the hair or fingernails of the deceased's physical form behind. However, when there is no residue, the entire physical form will vanish into light. In these latter cases, the body of rainbow light ('1.z'-lus) or body of light ('od-kyi sku) is equivalent to the attainment of the Buddha-body of Great Transformation (Skt. m.zhasa~kra11tikJya, Tib. 'pho-b.z chen-fJo 'i sku). Sec Buddha-body. Ratna Family rin-chen rigs, Skt. ratnakula One of the five enlightened families (pancakula) into which the meditational deities of the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource are subdivided. The deities of the Ratna family include the peaceful buddhas R.Jtnas.zmhhava and Mamaki and the corresponding wrathful aspects Ratna Heruka and R.ztn,zkrodhesv.zri. See Appendix Two. Realisation rtogs-pa, Skt. adhig.Jma This refers to the spiritual experiences that a praditioner gains through insight into and transformation of the mental continuum whilst on the path to enlightenment, and to the resultant attainment of liberation or buddhahood. Reality chos-n)•id, Skt. dharmata In our text the term 'reality' has been used interchangeably with 'actual reality'. See Actual Reality. Reality's Expanse chos-dbyings, Skt. dharnzadhatu Sec Expanse of [Actual] Reality. Refuge sky.zhs- 'gro, Skt. saru1Jagamana This term in Buddhist usage indicates the act of entrusting one's spiritual growth and well-being to the Three Precious Jewels. The Three Precious Jewels arc the

G l 0 S SA R Y 0 F K E Y T E R .\-1 S

objects of refuge, and the nature of the refuge sought from each of the three differs. In the Buddha, the fully enlightened reacher, guidance on a correct path to buddahood is sought; in the sacred teachings, the realisations of the path arc sought; and in the monastidsupreme community (sangha) perfect companionship on the path to buddhahood is sought. The successful taking of refuge in the Three Precious Jewels requires the following two conditions: a) a genuine anxiety in the face of the potential for future suffering and b) a genuine confidence in the capacity of the Three Precious Jewels to offer protection from these potential sufferings. In the context of our text, the act of going for refuge constitutes the first of the five uncommon preliminary practices (thun-min sngon- 'gro). Here, the three levels of refuge are recognised: the outer refuge (phyi'i skyabs-'gro), which is taken in the Buddha, the sacred teachings and the monastic community; the inner refuge (nang-gi sky.1bs- 'gro ), which is taken in the spiritual teacher, the meditation a! deity and the tJakini and the secret refuge (gsang-ha'i skyahs-'gro), which is taken in the Buddha-body of Reality, the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource and the Buddhabody of Emanation. Relative Truth kun-rdzoh bden-pa, Skt. samurtisatya See under Two Truths. Relics gdunglring-srel See under Bone Relics. Renunciation nges- 'byunglspang-ba, Skt. nai~kramyalpruhar:a The English term renunciation translates both the Tibetan terms nges-'hyung and spmzg-hu. In the former sense, renunciation refers to Sakyamuni Buddha's renunciation of the household life and it is defined as a mental attitude free from impulsive clinging to all worldly attributes such as wealth, fame, position and the thought of a favourable rebirth in a future life. It is only on the basis of such an attitude that the practitioner can spontaneously generate a genuine wish to be free from cyclic existence. Hence the real meaning of renunciation lies not just in mere physical separation from objects of desire but more importantly in a quality of mental liberation which is free from even the slightest degree of craving for mundane values. The Tibetan word nges- 'hyung literally means a 'definite emergence', indicating a definite emergence from the bonds of our normally narrow-minded attachment to worldly pleasures. In the latter sense (Skt. prahar:a), renunciation refers to the four correct trainings which arc included among the thirty-seven aspects of the path to enlightenment (bodhipak~ikadharma) cultivated by those aspiring to enlightenment, namely: 1) to not develop non-virtuous actions which have not arisen, 2) to renounce non-virtuous actions which have arisen, 3) to develop virtuous actions which have not arisen, and 4) to not renounce virtuous actions which have arisen. Rinpoche rin-po-che This term literally means 'high in value or esteem', and in ordinary language indicates a precious jewel. By extension, in Tibetan Buddhism, the term has come to refer to an incarnate master who is 'high in value' or 'most precious'. Accordingly, the title 'Rinpoche' is widely used by Tibetans to refer to any incarnate spiritual teacher. Sec Tulku. Rite for Affirmation of Vows 'bogs-chug The rite for the affirmation of vows is that through which the ability to fulfil

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

and restore impaired commitments taken in association with the tantras is transferred. Rites of Enrichment, Pacification, Subjugation and Wrath zhi rgyas d/Jang drag-gi las See Four Aspects of Enlightened Activity. Rites of 'Liberation' sgrol-ba The rites of 'liberation' refers to practices, only to be applied by accomplished masters who have attained proficiency in consciousness transference, which end the life of a hostile being who is wholly intent on vicious negative activities. The consciousness of the harmful being is compassionately transferred to a realm of higher rebirth thus freeing him or her from the inevitable consequences of their future and past actions. . Ritual Officiant las-mkhan, Skt. karmdcarya The ritual officiant is the one who leads the students into the presence of a spiritual teacher at the rime when empowerment is conferred, covering the students' eyes with a red blindfold and placing a flower and a vajra in their hands. Ritual Service bsnyen-pa, Skt. seva See Four Aspects of Ritual Service and Means for Attainment. Rosary phreng-ba, Skt. mala The Tibetan rosary generally has one hundred and eight beads, and is used for the counting of mantra recitations. Rudra ru-dra As expounded, for example, in the Szura which Cathers All Intentions (mDu dgongs-pa 'dus-pa) and later treasure (gter-tna) revelations as well, Rudra is the embodiment of rampant egohood, a being who assumed a powerful malevolent form, having misapplied the practice of the tantras in a previous life, and who was consequently subdued by the wrathful means of the buddhas Hayagriva or Mabottara Heruka. The metaphor illustrates the origins of the outer attributes of the wrathful deities, who are in essence the peaceful deities, but who adopted the outer terrifying characteristics of Rudra in order to actively confront deep-seated egohood. The metaphor illustrates that the wrathful deities represent the spontaneous process of transformation of the outer deluded state to its actual or enlightened nature. Sacred Substances rdzas, Skt. dravya According to the tantras, ritual substances or anicles are employed in order to symbolise the bond between the practitioner and the meditational deity and in some cases these actually symbolise the mcditational deities or their attributes. In the context of an empowerment ceremony, symbolic implements, such as the vajra and bell, or diadem, vase and so on are known as sacred substances of empowerment (dhang-rdzas). [Sacred] Teachings fdam-pa'ij chos, Skt. {sad/dharma The Sanskrit term dharma carries a very broad range of meanings, derived from the Sanskrit word dh~, meaning 'to hold'. The Tibetan equivalent chos literally means \:hange' or 'transformation', and refers both to the process of spiritual transformation and to the transformed result. Ten classical definitions of dharma arc given

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

by Vasuhandhu in his Rational System of Exposition ( Vyakhyayukti), namely: phenomenon, path leading to enlightenment, attainment of enlightenment, object of consciousness, merit, living thing, scripture, material thing, regulation, and spiritual tradition. In terms of the spiritual tradition of Buddhism, the term refers specifically to the second of the Three Precious Jewels (Skt. triratna), i.e. to the sacred teachings. See Transmission. Sakya sa-skya One of the four principal schools of Tibetan Buddhism, named after a monastery of the same name which was founded by Khon Kmzchok Gyalpo in the eleventh century in western Tibet, at a site which has a slightly whitish rock surface. Sakya literally means 'pale earth'. The widespread influence of the early Sakya masters soon evolved into a whole new school of Tibetan Buddhism, the school reaching its full maturity during the time of the Sachen Gongma Nga, the five great founders of Sakya, and in partiwlar through the influence of perhaps the greatest of these, Sakya Pa~ufita Kzmga Gyaltsen. The essence of the Sakya school's thought and practice is enshrined in the sets of instructions called 'the path and its fruit' (/am- 'bras). Sakyamuni Buddha siikya thuh-pa Our historical buddha, who is considered to have been the fourth supreme Buddhabody of Emanation to have appeared during this particular aeon (in which context Maitreya is regarded as the fifth or future buddha). The Buddha .Siikyamzmi is considered by historians to have lived in the sixth century BC and is credited, according to Buddhist tradition, as the progenitor of all the contemporary Buddhist lineages relating to the sutras and certain of those related to the tantras, and for the establishment of the early Buddhist monastic community. Sakyasirpha sakya senge An epithet of Sakyamuni Buddha. Sal Tree shing sa-/a A tall tree ( Vatica Robusta) indigenous to the Indian subcontinent, with wide branches and thick foliage. Samantabhadra kzm-tu hzang-po The male buddha SamantabhaJra is the foremost figure in the assembly of the forty-two peaceful deities. It is important to differentiate the male buddha Sanzalltahhadra from the male bodhisattva Samantabhadra. See below and Appendix Two. Samantabhadra (bodhisattva) hyang-sems kun-tu bzang-po The male bodhisattva Sanzantabhadra is one of the four outer male bodhisattvas among the forty-two peaceful deities. See Appendix Two.

SAMA YA rgya rgya rgya
Certain chapters of the present work end with these words of admonition that the seal of commitment (samayanzudra), through which buddha-mind is secured, is to be resolutely applied by those who receive the teaching. Sec Seal and Commitment. Sarpsara 'khor-ha Sec Cyclic Existence.

GLOSSARY OF KEY

TER~1S

Santarak~ita zhi-ba'i 'tsho I mkhan-po ho-dhi-sattua A monastic preceptor and exponent of Madhyamaka philosophy from Zahor, who officiated at the great NJ/andJ Monastic University in India before his arrival in Tibet at the invitation of King Trisong Detsen during the eighth century. In Tibet, he was responsible together with King Trisong Detsen and Padmasambhava for the comtruction of Samye Monastery, the first Buddhist monastery ro be built in Tibet. King Trisong Detsen, Padmasambhava and .Santarak~ita jointly established Buddhism as the state reli~ion of Tibet. SJntarak~ita is the author of a highly influential encyclopaedic work on classical Indian philosophies entitled T,lttt•.Jsa'?lgrah.J and a short, bur influential, work on 1'vi.Jdhy.1maka known as Orn.Jment
of the Middle W.1y (Madhy.Jmakai.JI?lkara).

Seal phyag-rgya, Skr. mudra According to the sutras, the word 'seal' denotes a secure realisation of emptiness. In the tantras it refers to the various hand-gestures. which accompany the recitation of mantras, and by extension refers also to the meditational deity's symbolic handemblem (phyug-mtshun) - the vajra, bell and so forth. In this context therefore the seals arc the resonance of buddha-body. furthermore, in the Yogatantras, in particular, there are four seals which secure the aspects of mundane consciousness (vijii<ina) as their corresponding aspects of pristine cognition (jntlna): among them, the great seal (mahJmudrJ) of buddha-body secures the ground-of-all consciousness (J/ayauijnLinu) as the mirror-like pristine cognition (adurS.JJiidna); the seal of the sacred teachings (dhurmumudrJ) of buddha-speech secures the mental com.ciousness (mumwiJIIJna) as the pristine cognition of discernment (fJratyauek~a~zaJII.ina); the seal of commitment (samayamudrJ) of buddha-mind secures the deluded consciousness (kli~~amanouij1iJna) as the pristine cognition of sameness (samatJjnJnu); and the seal of action (k,mnamudra) of buddha-activity secures the five sensory consciousnesscs (fJaiicuduJravijii.ina) as the pristine cognition of accomplishment (kr:tyupasthJnujliJnu). Then, according to Mahayoga, in the perfection stage of meditation, when the practices of sexual yoga (s!Jyor-hu) arc applied in order to anualise the union of great bliss (mahJsukha) and emptiness, the term 'action seal' (karmumudra) denotes an actual sexual partner, while the term 'seal of pristine cognition' (f1i,i11amudrJ), by contrast, denotes a mentally visualised consort. For a description of the meditative tradition known as MahJmudrJ sec under Great Seal. Secret Mantra gsa11g-s11gugs, Skt. guhyamuntra See Mantra. Seed-syllable yig- "bru, Skt. hijJk~ara Generally this refers to Sanskrit syllables or letters visualised as the quintessential basis from which arise the forms of meditational deities in the practices of the Vehicle of Indestructible Reality. Often these letters or syllables are the first letter of the name of the deities themselves, or syllables or letters that are associated with specific enlightened families. So, for example, in the case of many of the deities belonging to the Vajra family of Ak~ohhya, they are visualised as arising from the letter H0~1, while for deities belonging to the Padma family, the letter Al;l is otrcn utilised, and so on.

Self hd,zg·ll}'id, Skt. Jtman
For an introduction to the concept of 'self' as it applies to our text, sec the lntroJudory Commentary by HH the Dalai Lama. See also under Selflessness.

GLO..,~ARY

Of KEY TERMS

Self-empowerment rang-dbang, Skt. svadhi~~hana A spiritual practice in which the four empowerments are received directly by the meditator from a visualised spiritual teacher, as presented in Chapter 2 of the present work. See Empowerment. Self-identity rang-hzhin, Skt. suabhdva This term refers to the inherent existence which the eternalist philosophies of Hinduism and Jainism project onto phenomena. Elsewhere, the Sanskrit term atman (Tib. bdag), referring to the notion of an independent or substantial self, has also sometimes been translated as 'self-identity'. Scltlessness bdag-mcd, Skt. nairatmya Selflessness in Buddhist philosophy is understood to imply the lack of inherent existence both in the personality and in physical and mental phenomena. The Lesser Vehicle schools such as Vaibha~ika and SautrJntika expound the doctrine of selflessness only in terms of personal identity. They propound that selflessness refers to the absence of an independently existing 'self' or 'I', emphasising that the self is neither substantial nor self-sufficient. Nowhere among the aggregates of the person, either individually, collectively, or even in their continuity can one find a substantial or solid being. Material objects are nothing but a series of indivisible atomic particles, and consciousness is nothing but a series of indivisible time moments. However, the Cittamatra and Madhyamaka schools extend this notion of scltlessness to embrace all physical and mental phenomena. All such phenomena arc equated with cmptineo;s (sliny,Itli), and these Greater Vehicle philosophical schools therefore speak of both the seltlessness of person (pudga/anairJtmya) and the selflessness of phenomena (dharmanairJtmya). Nevertheless, substantial philosophical differences exist between the two Greater Vehicle schools in their views on \vhat it is that is being negated by the doctrine of emptiness. Seminal Point thig-/e, Skt. hmdu The Tibetan term tiJig-le conveys a wide range of meanings. It refers to: 1) the pure white/male anJ red/female generative essences of the body, which along with the energy channels and vital energies flowing through the channels, form an important aspect of human physiology according to the tantras and related medical traditions; 2) a synonym for the Buddha-body of Reality (dharmakaya), known as the 'unique seminal point' (thig-le nyug-gcig); and 3) the seminal points of light which appear during the All-surpassing Realisation (thod-rga/) practices of the Great Perfection (Atiyoga), and also during the intermediate state of reality. See Chapter I I, Part One. Sense-faculties dhang-po, Skt. indriyu See under Sense-organs. Sense-organs dbang-po, Skt. indriya According to the analysis of abhidhanna, these comprise: the eye (cak~llrindri)'<l), the ear (srotrendrry,l), the nose (gbrJ~zcndriy<J), the tongue (jihvendriya), and the physical body (kJyendrrya). Sensory Activity Fields skye-mched, Skt. ayatana The operational fields or contexts in which sensory perception is said to occur. Abhidhan11a sources identify twelve sensory activity fields (Skt. d!'JdasJyutuna), six of which arc designated as external and the remainder as internal, divided into pairs

GLOSSARY Of KEY TERMS

as follows: the al:Civity field of the eye (cak~urtlyatana) and the activity field of form (rzlpayutanu), the activity fields of the ear (srotrayatana) and of sound (sahdJyatana), the activity fields of the nose (ghra~zayatana) and of smell (gandhJyatana), the activity fields of the congue (jihvayatana) and of taste (rasayatana), the activity fields oi the body (kJyJyat.ma) and of couch (spra~~Jyut.ma), and, lastly, the activtty fields of the mind (manu Jyatanu) and of mental objects or phenomena (dharmJyatanu). Sensory Spectra khums, Skt. dhatu A broad term denoting each and every aspect of sensory perception, including the sensory subject, object and their interaction. abhidharnra sources identify eighteen distinct sensory components or psycho-physical spectra (Skt. a~radas,uihdtll), grouped as follows: those of the eye, form and visual consciousness; those of the ear, sound, and auditory consciousness, those of the nose, smell, and olfaccory consciousness; those of the congue, taste, and gustatory consciousness; those of the body, touch, and tactile consciousness; and those of the mind, phenomena, and mental consciousness. Sentient Being sems-c,ml'gro-ba, Skt. sattval gati In a Buddhist context, the expression 'sentient being' has a technical usage which contrasts with the concept of a buddha. The term refers to beings in cyclic existence and also those who have attained liberation from it but who have nor attained the non-abiding niroii~ra of fully manifest buddhahood. The Sanskrit term gati (Tib. 'gro-ha) literally means 'goer', and sattva, a 'living being'. The Tibetan equivalent of the latter, sei11s-can, literally means 'sentient' or 'a being with mind', as it dues in English. Sec Six Classes of Sentient/Living Beings. Serpentine Water Spirits k/ulklu-mo, Skt. ndgalnJgini Male or female water spirits, often depicted as half human and half serpentine, who reside in oceans, rivers, lakes and springs, and who are described in Buddhist literature as custodians or repositories of submerged spiritual or material treasure. 1£ is considered important that their environment should be kept pristine and clean; otherwise, agitation or pollution can result in the emergence of water spirits that engender leprosy, consumption and various skin ailments. Seven Emanational Oceans rol-pa ·; r}..')'a-mtsho bdun See four Continents and Eight Subcontinents. Seven Golden Mountain Ranges gser-gyi ri-bo bdun See four Continents and Eight Subcontinents. Seven-limbed Practice yan-lag hdun·pa A preliminary practice which is normally undertaken as a prelude to the generation stage of meditation. The seven limbs together constitute a comprehensive practice for purifying negative potentials and accumulating merit, thus laying a stable basis for a suc(essful meditational session. The seven limbs in their proper sequence arc: I) paying homage through prostration, 2) making offerings, 3) purifying non-virtuous habits, 4) rcjoi(ing in the wholesome actions of others and oneself, 5) requesting the buddhas to teach, 6) appealing to the buddhas not to enter into niroii~Ja, and "')the dedication of merit. Our Chapter 5 includes an additional three.

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

Se\'en-point Posture of Vairocana m.Jm-swmg chos-hdun This is a metaphor for the ideal or recommended meditation posture, in which the legs arc crossed in the 'indestructible posture' (vajrJsana), the back straight, the hands in the gesture of meditative equipoise, the eyes focused on the tip of the nose, the chin slightly tucked in, the lips and teeth set in their natural positions, and the tip of the tongue toudung the palate.
Sexu~Yogashyo~ha

See under four Delights. Signlessness mtshun-ma mcd-fJa, Skt. nirlak~J'!a Signlessncss, along with emptiness (Skt. suny.1td) and aspirationlcssness (Skt. nirpru~zidhJnJ), is regarded as one of the three approaches to liberation (mam-thar sgo gsum) which arc the hallmarks of the teachings on the perfection of discriminative awareness (Skt. pruJ'i.lp..ir.JmitJ). Signlessncss is the antithesis of substantialist views (mtsh.111- 'dzm) - the perspective that grasps at the inherent existence of things by means of their characteristics such as colour~. forms and other properties. Single Nature of Mind sems gcig-po In Chapter 4 of our text the phrase 'the single nature of mind' is a synonym for the ultimate nature of mind (sems-nyid), or the actual reality of mind. Six Classes of Sentient/Living Beings 'gru-bu rtgs-drug, Skt. ~uc.fguti A birth in cyclic existence is characterised as occuring among one or other of the six classes of living bcmgs, depending on the nature and maturity of an individual's past actions. The six classes are: 1) gods (dcuu), mundane celestial bemgs whose primary mental state is one of pride or exaltation, 2) antigods (asura), who arc predominantly host de and jealous, 3) human beings, who are influenced by all five dissonant mental states, 4) animals, who arc under the sway of instinct and obfuscation, 5) anguished spirits (pretu), who arc under the sway of attachment and unsatisfied craving, and 6) the denizens of the hells (nuraka), who arc overwhelmed by hatred, anger and iear. S111ce all five dissonant mental states have influence on human beings, it is not inappropriate to look upon all of these conditions also as extrapolations of human psychological states. In our text the primary causes of rebirth in each of these six realms are respectively identified as: pride, jealousy, attachment, delusion, miserliness and hatred. Sec also Three Worldsystems. Six Dissonant Mental States nymz-mongs drug, Skr. ~afklesa In certain instances in our text when the context relates to rebirth among the six classes of beings, this enumeration does not refer to the well-known abhidhanna category of the six primary dissonant mental states: fundamental ignorance, attach.ment, aversion, pride, doubt, and dissonam or afflictive views, bur to the six poisons _(dug-drug) that are said to generate rebirth among the six classes of living beings, namely: pride, jealousy, attachment, delusion, miserliness and hatred. Six [Emanational] Sages sprul-sku thuh-drug Sec under Six Sages. Six Intermediate States har-do drug Sec under Intermediate States.

510

GLOSSARY 01' KEY TER!\tS

Six Kinds of Bone Ornament rus-pa 'i rgyan drug The SIX kinds of bone-ornament worn by the wrathful deities, which symbolise the tramcendence of Jcarh and dissonant mental states, comprise: necklaces (mgulrgyan), bracelets (gdu-bu), earrings (nz,z-cha), crowns (dhu-rgyan), banJolecrs (mchod f1hyir-thogs), and human ashes (thai-chen). Six Lineages hrgyud-pa drug Sec under Lineage. Six Mantras and Six Gestures sngags-drug-da11g phyag-rgya drug A senes of mantras anJ gestures used for the empowerment of substitutes or offerings made to harmful or obstructive forces. This process of consecration is effected by means of the following six hand-gestures (phyag-rgya drug) anJ six corresponding mantras (sngags-drug): r) The hand-gesture of the expanse of reality is conjoined with the mantra 0~ SVABIIAVA SUDDHAI:f SARVA DHARMA~! SVABHAVA SUDDHO 'IIA~1, which purifies the ritual o_bject. 2) The hand-gesture of the jewelled casket is conjoined with the mantra NA.\\AI~ SARVA TATHAGATEBHYo
VISVA MUKHEUIIYAI,I SA RVATIIA

KHA~ U [)GATE SPIIARA~:\ IMA~

GAGAN A

whKh expands the effigy to fill all of space. 3) The hand-gesture of swirling nectar is COnJoined with the mantra 0~\ VAJRA AM~TA KU~I?ALI HANA IlANA HO~ I'HAT, which transforms the effigy into a vessel filled with nenars. 4) The hand-gesture of vast potency is conJoined with the mantra NAMA~! sARVATATIIAGATA AVALOKITE 0~ SAMBIIARA SAMBHARA IIOr-:t, which empowers the effigy to grattfy all the senses. 5) The hand-gesture of the comet of knowledge anJ bestowal of gifts is COnJOined with the mantra OM JNANA AVALOKITE SAMANTA
SI'HARA~A RA~MII\IIAVA SAMAYA MAHAMA~I DURU OURU H~DAYA JVALANI

KIIA~t svA!IA,

HO~, which empowers the effigy to fulfil the hopes of all, without contention. 6) Lastly, the hand-gesture of the univer!>al monarch is conjomed with the mantra
NAMAI,I SAMANTA BUDOHANA.~t GRAIIl·.SVARA PRABIIA JYOTFNA MAHASA!\tAYE

whKh ensures that the effigy will pacify, subjugate or transform all inimical forces, and bring about a successful outcome for the ritual as a whole.
WAliA,

Six Perfections pha-rol-tu phym-t"z drug, Skt. ~a!f~tlramitJ In the sutra system of the path to buddhahood, the entire bodhisattva's way of life or conduct is founded upon the practice of the six perfections which comprise: generosity (dJna), ethical discipline (si/a), patience (k~Jnti), perseverance or Joyous effort (I·iryu), meditative concentration (dhyJna), and discriminative awarcnc~s (/lruJ'IJ). These six arc known as 'perfections' when, for example, the practi(e of generosity is: r) motivated by the altruistic intention to auain enlightenment for the sake of all beings; 2) undertaken within a sixfold combination of all the perfections; and 3) performed with an awareness of the emptiness (;anyatJ) of the agent, the act, and the ob)ect in question. As an aspiration, the word pJranutJ is useJ to denote a means to perfection; but when describing the perfected result, at the attainment of buddhahood, it means 'transcendent perfection', in accord with irs literal meaning, 'gone beyond'. Six Pri!>tine Cognitions yc-shcs drug The six arms of the herukas, among the fifty-eight wrathful deities (see Appendix Two), symbolise the six pristine cognitions. These comprise the Pristine Cognition of pure cxp<tnse (da~-pa'1 dhyln~s-kyi ye-shcs), in addition to the standard enumer.nion of the five pristine cognitions. Sec Pristine Cognition.

GLO~~ARY

OF KFY

TER~IS

51 I

Six Realms See Six Classc~ of Sentient/Living Beings. Six Sages sfmtl-sku tlmh-drug The six sages are aspens of the Buddha-body of Emanation (nirm.i~zuk.iyu) whi~h manifest in the realms of the six classes of living beings, namely: Indrusukra, the sage of the gods (lh.;'i thuh-pa dha11g-pu hrgy.;-hyi11), Vem,zcitr.;, the sage of the antigods (lha m.;-yin-gyi thuh-p.; th.;g-hzang-ris), Sakyasi1?Jha or Sakyamuni, the sage of humans (mi'i th11h-pa shakya seng-ge), Sthirasii!Jhu, the sage of animals (hy,zl-smzg thub-fJLl seng-ge rub-hrtan),ju,ilamukhu, the sage of the anguished spirits (yt-dt•,zgs-kyi thub-pa kha- 'b.zr-ma), ;md Yama Dhamtaraja, the sage of the hells (dmyal-ha'z thuh-pa chos-kyi rgyal-po). See Appendix Two. Six-syllable Mantra yi-ge drug-fJ.J, Skt. ~·uf.;k~.zra The six-syllable mantra (O¥ ~~A~I I'ADME 110~1) is that of Avalokitesvara. Sixty \'\'rathful Deities kho-hu drug-cu A ~ollenivc name for the assembly of fifty-eight wrathful deities, with the addition of the two aspens representing the Buddha-body of Reality: Malwttara Heruka and KrodhesL•.zri, who arc respenively the wrathful ~ounrcrparts of Sam.mtabhadra and Sam,mt.zhh.zdri. Sec Appendix Two. Skilful Means th.zbs, Skt. up.iya The con~cpt of skilful means is central to the understanding of the Buddha's enlightened deeds, induding his tead1ing of the many scriptures. From a very early stage, lluddhisrn developed a hermcneuti~ of reading many of the scriptures attributed to the Buddha from thL· perspecttve of skilful means, that is to say from the perspective that the truths rL'\'Calcd in a specifi~ tca~hing lll<lY be ~ontingent on the needs, interests and mental dtspositions of specifi~ types of individuals. This tdea of skilful means, especially in the ~onrext of ading for the welfare of others, StKh as through the giving of tea~hings, w3s applied also in relation to the altruisti~ deeds of the bodhisattvas. A~wrding to the Greater Vehicle, training in skilful means (Skt. 1tfJdyakausalya, Tib. th,zbs-la mkhas-pa) refers to the first five of the six perfections: generosity, discipline, patience, perseverance, and mcditati,·e concentration, when integrated with disaiminative awareness, the sixth perfc~tion, to form a union of discriminative awareness and means (Skt.{Jr<Zfllopaya). The pcrfedion of .. kilful means is also separately enumerated among the ten perfections, where it indi..:.ttes the inestimable result a~quired by dedicating the merit of one's virtuous deeds, hov.:ever small, for the benefit of all sentient beings in general and for the S<lkc of grc<1t unsurp.1ssed enlightenment in parricubr. In the tantras, the technical term 'path of skilful mc.111s' (thahs-lam) refers to the pr<Kti~cs in whi~h the internal sexual yoga (sbyor-b.z) of the energy channels, ,·ital energies and seminal points is refined within the subtle body. Also, the three inner classes of tmrtra a.:~ord111g to rhe Nyingma school ..tre sometimes referred to as the 'vehides of overpowering f'lte<lns' (tlhzhs dh.zng-bsgyur-ba'i theg-p.z-rn.;ms), in the sense that they ~arry on the path all the dissonant mental states which are renoun~ed in the lower paths. Sky-farer mk!J,z'-spyod-ma, Skt. khe(uri Sec Pure Realm of the Sky-farers. Spacious Expanse mkha'-dbyings :\ metaphor for the se~ret ~entre of the female deity or female consort.

512

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

Spirit Lords of the Soil sa-bdag, Skt. bhamipati According to Sino-Tibetan elemental divination, the spirit lords of the soil are a dass of gcomantic forces whose position rotates - in some cases according to the years of the sexagenary calendar, and in others according to the months of the year, the days of the month, and the hours of the day. It is regarded as important that the subterranean locations of the spirit lords should be known at the time of constructing a building or ma~u!ala, and before entering into specific activities. Spiritual Accomplishment dngos-grub, Skt. siddhi See under Accomplishment. Spiritual Friend dgc-ba'i bshcs-gsnyenldge-bshes, Skt. kalyanamitra The term 'spiritual friend' refers to a spiritual teacher (Skt. guru) who can contribute to an individual's progress on the spiritual path to enlightenment and who acts wholeheartedly for the welfare of his or her students, adopting a renunciate lifestyle. In Tibet, during the eleventh and twelfth centuries, the term became synonymous with the great masters of the Kadam school, who combined a scrupulously renunciate lifestyle and deep humility with profound scholarship and meditative resolve. In later centuries, the Tibetan abbreviation geshe came to have an academic usage in the Gelug school, where it now identifies a scholar-monk with a dm:torate title in traJitional BuJdhist stuJies, anJ is similar to the modern usage of the term 'khenpo' (mkhan-po) in other traJirions. See also under Monastic Preceptor. Spiritual Hero Jpa'-bo, Skt. vlra A synonym for awareness holder and for 4aka, the male eqivalcnt of the tjakinl. Spiritual Sibling mched-grogs/rdo-rje spun-sring In the context of the tantras, six types of spiritual sibling are iJentified: 1) universal spiritual siblings, i.e. all sentient beings who from beginningless time have been one's parents; 2) spiritual siblings who share the Buddhist teachings; 3) harmonious spiritual siblings, who arc similar in view and conduct; 4) dear spiritual siblings, who share the same spiritual teacher; 5) dose spiritual siblings, who receive teaching together; and 6) intimate spiritual siblings, who receive empowerment together. Spiritual Teacher bla-ma, Skt. guru The original Sanskrit word 'guru' literally means 'heavy' or 'weighty', and by extension a 'venerable teacher'. The Tibetan equivalent 'bla-ma' (pronounced /am.1) means 'unsurpassed' or 'supreme'. indicating that the guru is unsurpasseJ in terms of being the perfect object towarJs which meritorious activity should be directed. However, it is important to note that specific qualifications arc necessary in order to be considered as a spiritual teacher. These qualifications differ according to the level of spiritual practice at which a teacher is adopted. In the context of the tantras, the spiritual reacher is said to confer blessings on the meditator, in contrast to the mcditational deity, who confers supreme accomplishment and the 4akini, who confer enlighteneJ or buddha activities. Ultimately, the guru is one's own buddha nature. Spontaneous Presence /hun-grub, Skt. anabhoga In the esoteric instructional class of the Great Perfection (Atiyoga), the term primorJial purity (ka-dag) refers to the ultimate essence of buddhahood, the Buddha-body of Reality, the realisation of whi...:h is approached through the practices of Cutting through Resistance (khregs-chod), as described in Chapter 4, and spontaneous

G L 0 '>SA

I{

Y 0 f

KEY T l:.IL\1 S

513

presence refers to the expressive nature of the Buddha-body of Reality as the Buddha-body of Form, the realisation of which is approached through the practices of All-surpassing Realisation (thud-rg.JI), as indicated in the emergence of the luminosities descnbed in Chapter 1 I. ~tore generally, this term refers to spont.meous or effortless activity, the fifth of the live kmds of buddha activity, according to the .\Iahayoga texts. Sri Si111ha slm sing-ha The name of an early exponent of the Atiyoga teachings, who was a n.Hive of SIJOky.mz in Central Asia. Srimat dpa/-d,mg /d,m-pa'i ~hing-kh.Jms, Skt. .Srimat The southern buddha field of 'The Glorious' is the pure realm presided over by the male buddha Ratn.Js.mzbh.m.J. Stopa mclwd-rten A sacred object representative of buddha-mind. Stzi{hlS were originally a symbol of the Buddha-body of Reality, constructed in a dome-shape to hold the remains of .Sakyamuni Buddha. The vener<ltion of sttipas is closely connected to the earliest phase of the Greater Vehicle in ancient India, where the original stli.{Ja design developed within the central monastic assembly hall (Skt. caztyil). The stlipas commonly seen in Tibetan cultural areas are constructed to a specific architectural design, usually in the shape of a dome, raised on a square base of several layers, from which rises a mulrd.1ycred spire. In monasteries and sacred sires, a series of eight stup,zs is frequently constructed, symbolising different events in the life of .SJkyamuni Buddha. Others are extraordmarily large, like those of lJ.JudhanJth .md Suay.mzbhu in ;-.;epa!, or S.Jizchi in India and Boralmdor in Indonesia, and some enclose within them entire ma~IC.Jalas of deities, such as the Pe/klmr Chode at G)'illltse in Tsang and the Memorial Churte11 in Thmzplm, Bhutan. The symbolism of the stzipa is complex, rl'presentmg the progression to buddhahood, the five clements, the five pristine cognitions, and so forth. Smaller reliquary stzlpas are frequently budt as a funerary mcmonal to important spiritual teachers, often enshnning their sacred ashes or embalmed remains. Subduer rtsad-du gcod-{hl Accordmg to the terminology of the Nyingma school, the six herukas of the assembly of fifty-eight wrathful deities are given the title 'subduer', rcternng ru their activity of natural tram.formation with respe(t to the di\sonant mental states. See Appendix Two. Subjugation dbang-gi fils, Skt. l'u~it.JkrzyJ See Four Aspects of Enlightened Activity.
~ublime One

'ph,zgs-p.J, Skt. Jry.z

A sublime being is one who has entered into a direct realisation of the actual nature of reality, in other words the lack of self-identity of both oneself and phenomena. The level of experience of an Jrya is stratified in relation to the resultant stage of the vehicle being followed. Substantialist Views mtshan- 'dzin, Skt. lak~a,_zagraha~za The mistaken apprehension that the form, colour and other characteristics assumed by any particular entity have inherent existence.

5 '4

GLO~SARY

OF KlY TERMS

Subterranean Goddc!>se., /Jrtu1Hnu An import.lnt d,t.,s of twelve 111digenous Tibet.ln ~pirits who personify the mighty snow r.mges of Tibet and who arc g..1thcrcd within the outer retinue (php- 'khor) of the fifty-eight wrathful deities. 1-'oremost ..1mong them arc 1\on~tszm Demo (associated with Mt Num"·huk Huru•a), M,zchen l'umru (assm:i;Hcd with .Mt Amnye Machen), Do'fe Chcnchikm,z (as">~.:ratcd with ~lr Everest), Do-'fe Kzmdrakm,l (associ.ned with \It ,\iycnchen Tullglh,z), JnJ /)()TJC 1\zmtizung 1a~~oci..1ted with \It
NoJm Gun~z<~n~).

Subtle Body phru-bu'z Ius Skt. slik~m,z/.:,iya In contrast to our gross phyo;ical body, whiCh is composed of flesh, bones and blood, the subtle body comprises a network of subrle energy channels, vital energies ;tnd seminal points of energy. This iorm arises as a natural expression of the interaction of the subtle mind .md the subtle \'ital energies on which it depends. See the Introductory Conll11L'ntary by HH the Dalai L1ma. The most advarKcd level of subtle body, known in the tantras a'> the pure illusory body (sgyu-lus), is experienced only when <tn indivisible unrty of buddha-body, speech and mind Ius been <1Ctu.1lised at the conclusion oi the generation and perfection stages oi medrtation. A similitude of such a subrle body can he expenenced dunng the practiCe of dream yoga, when the level oi consciousness is relatively subtle and deep, due to the tempor.uy cessation of acti"e sensory proce'>scs. The mental body (yiJ-Ius) expcnenced during the intermediate state of rebirth is ;tl~o a form of '>Ubtlt: body. Suffering sdug-bs11~u/, Skt. Jul!khutd In a BuJJhrsr context, the term 'suttcrrng' rs used in a hro.td sense and includes nor only phy~rcal 'ens.Hion'> but also mental cxperrences, rlut is to say .111 the essemially unsatisfactory expericrKcs oi lrfe 111 cyclic exi .. tence. The various iorms of suffering can be caregorrscd rnro thrL·e groups: 1) the suffering of suiiering (dlll!kh,uill~'/.:h,zt,1), l) the suiicring of change (l'lfhlril.r,im,zdul!/.:h,ztJ), .1nd _)) the suiiering of pervasive conditioning (s.u~r:;.k.ir.zdlll!/.:l',lf,i). The fir..r c.negory rders to .1ll our physical sensatiom. and ment<tl e'perierh:es which .uc sdi-evident to us as suffering and towards which we have ~pontaneous ieclings of aversron. The second c1tegory includes all our experiences wh11.:h are normally recognised as pleas;Hit .1nd Jesrrable, but which are noncthcle.,s suiiering in th;H per.,rstent indulgence in these alw<l}'" results rn the changed attitude of drssatrsfaction and boredom. It is only through reflection th<H the umamfauory nature of such experiem:es C.lll he realised. The third CJtegory refers to a basic level of suiferrng which underlies the round of birth, siCkness, old age and Je,lth. This suffering serve-; as the cau.,e of our expt·riences oi the two other d.1sc;es of sufferrng. It is called pervasive becau~e it extends to Jll forms of lrie in cyclic existence, irre.,pective of whether or not liie-forms are endowed with bodily existence. Suftering is idcntrtleJ as the tlr•;t of the four noble truths (Skt. c,llurdryasutya), whrch were taught by Sakyamuui Buddha in the course of his first drscourse, and the entire path of Buddhism, emhr<Krng .til irs \·chicles (yJnu), m<lY he seen <lS the w;tys of elimrn.ltrng suffering, thus bringing an end to cyclic existence itself. Sugata Family hdt:-hur gshegs-p,1'z rigs, Skt. sllg,ztaku/,z :\synonym tor the Buddha family. See Buddha Family. Sukhavati bdc-hu-c.m-gyi zhmg-l.:hums ThL· western buddha field oi 'The Blissful' buddha Amrt.lhh,l.
i~

the pure re.tlm presrded over by the

G L 0 S <.,A R Y 0 F KEY T E 101 S

Supernormal Cognitive Power mngon-shes, Skt. abhiJfza Supernormal cognitive power is considered to be a by-product of advanced meditation, but similitudes of these powers are said to arise during the intermediate state of rebirth (srid-pa'i bar-du). Six powers are specifically enumerated: clairvoyance (lha'i mig-gi mngon-shes, Skt. divyacak~urabhij1ia); clairaudience (lha'i rna-ba'i nmgon-shes, Skt. diuyasrotriihhif1iii); knowledge of the minds of others (gzhan-sems shes-pa 'i mngun-shes, Skt. paraczttiibhijfzJ); miraculous abilities (rdzu- 'phrul-gyi shes-pa'i mngon-shes, Skt. ~ddhyabhij1ia); knowledge of past lives (sngon-gnas rjes-su drun-pa'i nmgon-shes, Skt. parvaniuasJnusm~tyabhij1ia); and knowledge that the flow of all corrupt past actions has ceased (zag-pa zad-pa'i mngon-shes, Skt. asravak~ayabhiJfia). Among these, the first five arc said to be mundane powers, whereas the sixth is possessed by buddhas alone. Supreme Assembly tshogs-chen In this context, a synonym for Monastic Community. Sutra mdo The original discourses which Siikyamuni Buddha taught publicly to his disciples as .1 fully ordained monk, consequent to his attainment of buddhahood. In the context of the three successive turnings of the wheel of the sacred teachings, the Buddha expounded respectively 1) the discourses on the doctrine of the four noble truths (Skt. caturJry.ls.ltya), 2) the Perfection of Discriminative Awareness (PrajtiiiparamitJ), Ratnuku!a and related siitras which emphasise signlessness, aspirationlessness and emptiness, and 3) the Nucleus of the TathJg.1ta (Tathag.ltagurbha) and rel,ucd szttrus, as well as the SzUra of the Unrauelling of Enlightened Intention (Sandhinirmocanastttra), which emphasise buddha nature and the thorough analysis of buddha attributes. Among these the first category is the corpus of the Lesser Vehicle szttras and the last two are the Greater Vehicle sutras. The scriptural transmissions of the sacred teachings of Buddhism comprise the canonical sutras and tantras, as well as the1r commentari.tl literature. Sutrayana mdo-sde 'i theg-pa A tt·rm referring collectively to the first three of the nine vehicles when contrasted with the six vehicles of the tantras. Sec also under Greater Vehicle. Symbolic Lineage of Awareness Holders rig- 'dzin brda'i brgyud-pa The lineage through which non-human and human awareness holders of the highest spiritual accomplishments symbolically receive the teachings from bodhisattvas of the tenth level. More specifically, this refers to the transmission of advanced bodhisattvas such as Muiijusri, Avalokite5vara, and VajrapiitJi who communicated with their respective disciples (gods, serpentine water spirits and mountain or sylvan spirits) by means of symbolic gestures rather than words. It also refers to rhe Jrnode in which the earliest human progenitors of the Atiyoga lineage received and -transmitted their highest teachings. Tantra rgyud The Sanskrit word tantra and irs Tibetan equivalent rgyud literally mean a 'continuum' or 'unbroken stream' flowing from fundamental ignorance to enlightenment. T ..Intra has two basic meanings in Buddhism - it refers to the continua of ground, path and result, and to the literature or tantra texts which expound these continua in the context of the classes of tulltra (see below). The former is the

G L 0 S SA R Y 0 F K E Y T E R ~~ S

actual meaning of tu11tru. Through the continuum of the path (/um-gyi rgyud) the primordially present continuum of the ground (gzhi'i rgyud) is realised or fully manifested as the continuum of the result ( 'bras-bu 'i rgyud). Because tantra includes sophisticated techniques which, unlike the sutra path, enable dissonant mental states, such as desire/attachment and hatred/aversion, to be transmuted into states of realisation, without renunciation or rejection, the practitioner can cultivate an uninterrupted continuum between the practitioner's ordinary initial mind, the advanced mind on the path, and the resultant fully enlightened mind of the Buddha. In the Nyingma school the literature which expounds this dynamic is divided into a sixfold classification of the three outer tantras, namely: Kriyatantra, Ubhayatantra, and Yogatantra, and the three inner t,.mtras, namely: Mahayoga, Anuyoga and Atiyoga. These six cbsses represent st.tges of ever-decreasing emphasis on external ritual and ever-increasing subtlety of internal meditation together with an everincreasing subtby of the dissonant mental states, attachment in particular, th.tt can be transformed into a blissful experience conjoined with the realisation of the actual nature of reality. It is said that on the basis of the fulfilment of the generation and perfection stages of the three inner tantras fully manifest buddhahood can be attained in a single lifetime. Tathagata de-bzhin ~shegs-pa A synonym for buddha, used frequently in the sutras, which literally means 'One Who Has Thus Gone'. The expression is interpreted in different ways, corresponding to the different classes of sutras and tantras, but in general it implies 'one who has departed in the wake of the buddhas of the past', or 'one who has manifested the supreme enlightenment dependent on the reality that does not abide in the two extremes of existence and quiescence'. Ten Directions phyo~s-bcu, Skr. das,ldik The four cardinal and four intermediate directions, as well as the zenith and nadir. Ten Opportunities 'byor-ba bcu See Eight Freedoms and Ten Opportunities. Ten Similes of Illusory Phenomena shes-bya sgyu-ma'i dpe-bcu The ten similes which illustrate the illusory nature of all things are: illusion (sgyu-ma), mirage (smig-rgyu), dream (rmi-lam), reflected image (gzugs-bmyatt), a celestial city (dri-za'i grong-khyer), echo (brag-ca), reflection of the moon in water (chu-zla), bubble of water (chu-bur), optical illusion (mig-yor), and an intangible emanation (sprul-pa). T erracotta Imprints tslhl-tsha Small votive images moulded with clay fashioned in the form of miniature stupus or bas-relief meditational deities. They are usually empowered, in the context of appropriate rituals, and frequently interred within a larger stupa or kept by devotees as an object of veneration. Third Empowerment dbang gsum-pa The third of the four empowerments. Sec Four Empowerments. Thirty-two Major Marks mtshan sum-cu-so-gnyis, Skt. dvatrit~tsamnahapuru­
~·li..Jk~,u.t.J

See Major and Minor Marks.

<.;LO..,~ARY

OF KEY TER.\tS

Those Gone to Bliss bde-b..1r gshegs-pa, Skr. sugata An cpHhct of the buddhas. The expre~sion 'those gone to bli~s of the three times' (dus-gsum bde-gshcgs) refers to the buddhas of the p;tst, present, and future, exemplified respectively by Di/J..I1~zbra, Sakyanumi, and 1\-faitrrya. Thread-cross mdos In its simplest form a thread-cross can be two crossed stu.:ks or a simple wooden frame (nam-mkha') around which coloured threads (rgyang-/m) are arranged in a diamond or other more complex pattern. Thread-crosses vary in size and complexity depending on the type of ritual fur which they arc constructed. In e~sem:e, they represent a 'trap' fur negative and malevolent forces, where the trap symbolises and is empowered with all the qualittcs that c.m satisfy the negative or malevolent force. Thus, the design uf the thread-cross can clmely mirror that uf a stupa or three-dunensional ntd~r4ala and represenr the purity of the psycho-physu.:.tl aggregates, elemental properties, and sensory and menral processes, etc. On some occasions these complex thread-crosses can be enormous structures up to tens of feet high. Three Buddha-bodies sku-gsum, Skt. tnkJya The Three Buddha-bodies comprise the Buddha-body of Reality, the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource, and the Buddha-body of Emanation. Jointly, they form the secret object of refuge. See their individual entries, and also under Refuge. Three Levels of Existence srid-pa gsum, Skr. trzhhdL'u The three levels of extstence are those of celestial, terrestrial and subterranean beings. Three Lower Existences ngan-snng gsum, Skt. trzdurgati Sec Lower Existences. Three Poisons dug-gsum Attachment, aversion and delusion. See their individual entncs. Three Precious Jewels dkon-mchng gsum, Skt. triratna The Three Precious Jewels comprise the Buddha (sangs-rgy·as); the sacred teachings (Skt. saddh,zrma, Tib. dam-pa'i chus); and the monastic community of monks and nuns (Skr. s..J1igha, Tib. dge- 'dun). Together these three form the outer obJeCts of refuge (sec Chapter I). They are regarded as the perfect obJects in which refuge can be sought from the uns.uisfacrory nature of ltfe 111 cyclic existence in general, and particularly from the potential suffering of unfavourable future existences. They are called 'prectous jewels' because, like the wtsh-fulfilling jewels of Indian classical literature, in their met.tphorical sense, they possess the wtsh-fulfilltng capauty to provide protection from the peril~ of cyclic existence. See thctr individual entries ind also under Refuge. Three Roots rtsa-ba gsum, Skt. trmul/,z The three roots jointly form the inner object of refuge, according to the tantras (sec Chapter 1 ). They comprise the spiritual teacher (Skr. guru, Tib. bla-ma), who confers blessing (Skr. adhi~(hJna), the mcditational deity (Skr. l~(adeuutd, Tib. yt-dam lha) who confers accomplishments (Skt. siddhi); and the 4akitri (Tib. mkha'- 'gro) who confer the .tctualtsation of buddha activities (Skr. k~tyakriyJ). See their individual enrnes and also under Refuge.

sr8

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

Three Times dus-gsum The three times are those of past, present, and future. Three Vehicles theg-pa gsum, Skt. triyana See Vehicle. Three World-systems 'jig-rten-gyi khams gsum, Skt. tridhatu According to Buddhism, cyclic existence includes three world-systems, namely: the world-system of desire (Skt. kamadhatu), the world-system of form (Skt. rupadhatu), and the world-system of formlessness (Skt. arapyadhatu). Among them, the world-system of desire is a state of existence dominated by sensual experiences, particularly the sensations of suffering and pleasure. It is inhabited by all six classes of sentient beings, including humans and six categories of gods (kamadeva~a{kula). The world-system of form, in which beings have a comparatively subtle level of consciousness, temporarily devoid of gross sens~tions of pain and pleasure, is regarded as a state beyond ordinary human existence and inhabited only by gods. Birth in such a realm requires the attainment of one or all of the four meditative concentrations (Skr. caturdhyiina), in past lives. Abhidhanna literature mentions twelve ordinary realms of form and five 'pure abodes' (paiicasuddhanivasa), above them, where birth can be taken consequent on these four concentrations. Lastly, the world-system of formlessness is regarded as the highest level of rebirth within cyclic existence and a state where an individual's physical faculties exist only as potencies and the individual functions only at the level of consciousness. It is said to be inhabited by those who have mastered the four formless meditative absorptions (Skt. catursamiipatti). Torma-offering !(for-ma, Skr. naivedyalbali Tonna-offerings are cakes, usually made of dough and often decorated with colourful butter sculptures. Sometimes they are embodiments of the meditational deities associated with particular ritual practices, or they may be food-offerings presented to various deities or protectors visualised in the context of meditation. Yet again, tormas may act as physical symbols into which diverse aspects of negativity are absorbed, transformed, and removed through ritual practices. Transcendent Lord bcom-ldan-'das, Skt. bhagavan According to the Tibetan interpretation, the Sanskrit honorific term 'bhagavan', which has often been translated as 'Blessed Lord', indicates a buddha who has: 1) 'destroyed' (hcom) the four malevolent/beguiling forces (caturmara) comprising the influence of the psycho-physical aggregates (skandha), dissonant mental states (klesa), sensual temptations and mundane death; 2) come to 'possess' (/dan) the six excellences (~acfgw.za) of lordship, form, glory, fame, pristine cognition and perseverance; and 3) 'transcended' ( 'das) the sufferings of cyclic existence. Transgressions nyes-by,zs, Skr. du~krta The vows maintained by Buddhist monks and nuns include the avoidance of pri1pary downfalls (Skt. dpatti) and secondary transgressions. The term transgression (nyesbyas) is used in a technical sense to refer to a whole host of secondary precepts in the context of the monastic vows of individual liberation (pratimok~a), and in the wntext of the bodhisattva and tantric vows. The list of these transgressions differs according to the context. See Commitment, Pr:ltimok~a and Vows.

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

Transmission lung, Skt. agama The Buddhist sacred teachings (Skt. saddharma) comprise both experiential realisations (adhigama; Tib. rtogs-pa) and authoritative transmissions. The latter include both the oral teachings and sacred scriptures (Skt. pravacana, Tib. gsung-rab), imparted by the buddhas, as well as the associated commentaries or treatises (Skt. sastra, Tih. bstan-bcos), which have been transmitted in an uninterrupted lineage or succession from ancient times. In Tibetan Buddhism, it is regarded as essential that a transmission of both the text and its oral commentary is formally received from an authoritative lineage holder, if any significant spiritual experience is to be cultivated, since a mere theoretical understanding of these topics is not regarded as sufficient. Transmitted Precepts bka'-ma, Skt. pravacana from the perspective of the Nyingma school, the scriptures and oral teachings of Buddhism have been transmitted in two distinct ways: through the long oral lineage of transmitted precepts (ring-brgyud bka'-ma), which have been handed down from one generation of accomplished teachers to the next since ancient times, and through a close lineage of revealed teaching~ or treasures (nye-brgyud gter-ma), whose origin is more recent. Treasure-finder gter-ston An accomplished master holding an authentic lineage who successfully reveals a hidden treasure-text or sacred ohjea, in accordance with the prophesies made by Padmasambhava or a specific concealer of treasure-texts. Sec under Treasures. Treasures gter-ma, Skt. nidhi The Sanskrit nidhi (Tib. gter-ma), translated in English as 'treasure' or 'revealed teaching' (gter-chos), refers to those sacred Buddhist texts and objects which were concealed in the past in order that they might be protected and revealed in the future for the benefit of posterity. The notion of the revelation of concealed texts as treasure is extremely ancient in India and China. Within Indian Buddhism, it is well known that the Perfection of Discriminative Awareness (Prai1iJparamita) sutras were reputedly revealed when Nagarjuua received them in the form of treasure from the serpentine water spirits (nJga). A recension of the sadhana class of Mahayoga tantras, classified as gter-chos by Nyingma doxographers, is also said to have been revealed to eight great masters, including Nagarjuna, in the .Sitavana charnel ground near VairJsana. In Tibet, the tradition of the treasures was introduced by Padmasambhava and his students, who concealed texts and sacred objects at geomanric power-places in the landscape, entrusting them to their respective custodians or treasure-lords (gter-bdag) or to 4akinf for safe keeping, with the prediction that these would be discovered at some future time by a prophesied treasure-finder (gter-ston). Accordingly, it is believed that the students of PadmaJambhava have continued to emanate in the form of treasure-finders in successive .centuries in order to reveal these treasure-teachings. Other kinds of treasureteachings revealed directly from the enlightened intention of buddha-mind in a telepathic manner (dgongs-gter), or in a pure visionary experience (dag-snang), arc also recognised. There are many such lineages extant today, including that of the present text, and they arc maintained mostly, but by no means exclusively, by the Nyingma school.

5 20

GLO~SARY

OF KEY TER:VtS

Treatise bstun-hcos, Skt. Stlslr<~ The term treatise (sdstru) in the Buddh1st context generally refers to authoritative works written by accomplished masters elucidating the profound meaning of the Buddha's scriptures ({Jrur·ucuna). Treari,es are contrasted with scriptures (both sutras and tantras), the latter being attnbured to the Buddha. See Kangyur and Tengyur. Trichiliocosm stong-I{Siml 'J1g-rten-gy1 kh.1ms, Skt. trisahusr,llokadh.itu See Chiliocosm. Trisong Detsen khri-srong ldc'u btsan The th1rty-e1ghth king of Tihet and son of Klllg Trule Tsuktcn. Despite his accession to the throne at a tender age and the opposition of ministers who were Bon sympathisers he established Buddhism as the state religion of Tibet. He invited both Santtlrak~ita and Padmastlmbhavtl to construct Tibet's first monastery at Samye and to transmit the diverse Indian lineages of the .vinaya, sutras and tantras. He became a realised practitioner of the tantras in his own right, under the guidance of Padmasambhava, and actively sponsored the education and projects of his highly organised tramlat1on teams. Accord1ng to tradnional accounts, it was Kmg Tnsong Detsen who requested J't.Zdmasambhava to give the teaching<; that are presented in our text. See Gyurmc Doqe's 'Brief Literary History'. Tulku sprul-sku, Skt. mrm,z~I.Jk.iyu In its philosophical and d,tssical US<tge the term refers to the Buddha-body of Emanation. However, based on this concept of emanation, a different usage developed in Tiber following the inception of a tradition to formally recognise the incarnations of high spiritu,tl teachers after their death. The first such tulku to be given formal recognition was Karma Puksln, the second, Karmupa ( r 204-8 3 ). Later, other important tulku institutions emerged, such as that of the Dtllai Lama and Punchen L.amu, and the system of recognising successive generations of tulkus became commonly cstabli~hed throughout T1bet and the Himalayan reg1on. Turning of the Wheel of the [Sacred] Teachings chos-kyi 'khor-lo bskor-ba, Skt.
dhur111tl(tlkr.Jpra~·urlu11u

This metaphor refers to the promulg.ltion of the Buddhist teachings by the Buddha and cominues to he used metaphorically with regard to the teaching activity of successive lineage holders. The Buddha S..ikyam1mi is recognised to have promulgated three sequential 'turnings of the wheel'. The as~ociat1on with the concept of a wheel derives from a comparison w1th the 'wheel of sh.Hp weapons' said to he held in the hand of a universal monarch. Within the context of this comparison the sacred teachin~s are composed of ethical discipline (the central axis), analytic discriminative awareness (the sharp spokes) and meditative concentration (the stJbilismg perimeter). Sec also Sutra.
Tu~ita
Tu~1tu

dga'-/d,m

is the name of the fourth of the six god re,tlms, which are said to be located within the world-system of desire (Skt. kamadhtitu). It is regarded as the current abode of the future buddha Maitreya. Twcl\'e Links of Dependent Origination rtcn- 'brei bco-K11)'1S, Skt. du,zdJsJnga-

fJr,ltityus,/mu lfhiJ,,
See undn Dependent Origination.

GLOSSARY OF KEY TER:vtS

521

Twenty-four Power-places yul nyi-shu rtsa-bzhi, Skt. caturvi1?t5atmahasthana The twenty-four power-places are the following regions of the ancient Indian subcontinent, which are associated with the tantras of the CakraSJ'!fl.!tlra and Heruka classes: }J/andhara, Ocjqiyana, Paun.wgiri, KJmarapa, Malava, Sindhu, Nagara, Munmuni, Karw.tyapd!aka, Devfko!a, Karmarapti(aka, Kulatil, Arbuda, Godavari, Hmtt.idrl, llankela, Lampt.ika, Kaiicl, Saurd~!ra, Kaliliga, Koka~za, Caritra, Kosala, and Vindhyakaumt.irapaurika. Two Accumulations tshogs-gnyis, Skt. sambharadvaya See under Accumulations. Two Extremes mtha' gnyis, Skt. . mtaduaya The two extremes of eternalism and nihilism. See under Eternalist and Nihilist. Two Truths bden-pu gnyis, Skt. saty,zduaya All Buddhist philosophical schools of thought formulate their ontology within the framework of the two truths, the conventional or relative truth (Skt. samu~tisatyu, Tib. kun-rdzob bden-pa) and the ultimate truth (Skt. paramarthasatya, Tib. dondum hden-pa). However, the definition of the two truths differs according to their different epistemological interpretations. The Cittamatra and Madlryamaka, the two Greater Vehicle schools of thought which emphasise the doctrine of the two truths, define the ultimate truth as a synonym of emptiness, the ultimate nature of phenomena, while the conventional truth is defined as the empirical aspect of reality as conventionally experienced through our perceptions. Such an aspect of reality is true only within the relative framework of our own veridical experiences. However, according to the various tu11tra vehicles there are increasing degrees of subtlety in the interpretation of the two truths. Ubhayatantra gnyis-ka 'i rgyud Ubhayatantra, also known as Carydtantra, is the second of the three outer classes of tantra, which form one sub-category of the six classes of tantra, and the fifth of the nine vehicles, according to the Nyi11gma school of Tibetan Buddhism. Ubhayatantra places an equal emphasis on both external ritual and internal meditation. Ultimate Truth don-dam bden-pa, Skt. paramdrthasatya Sec under Two Truths. Unique Seminal Point thig-le nyag-gcig According to Atiyoga, this expression is a synonym for the Buddha-body of Reality. For the range of meanings conveyed by the Tibetan term thig-le, sec Seminal Point. Universal Monarch khor-lo bsgyur-ba, Skt. cakrauartin In the context of Indo-T1betan Buddhism, the concept of the benign universal monarch or emperor who rules in accordance with the law of the sacred teachings of Buddhism is one that has permeated Buddhist literature since the time of Asoka. Their appearance in the world is considered a unique and rare event, just as the appearance of a buddha is considered ro be unique and rare. Unsurpassed Yogatantra bla-med rgyud, Skt. Yoganiruttaratantra The highest among the four classes of tantra, the other three being: Kriya, Caryd, and Yoga tantra. The differences between the four classes of ta11tra represent stages of ever-decreasing emphasis on external ritual and ever-increasing subtlety of internal meditation. Niruttara means 'unsurpassed' or 'highest' and it is in

522

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

the Yoganiruttara tantras that the meditative techniques for realising the Three buddha-bodies are the most subtle and refined. There are two distinct phases in the dissemination of the Unsurpassed Yogatantras in Tibet, which are reflected in two differing ways of classifying them. According to the Nyingma school, the earlier phase of dissemination, they are classified into Mahayoga, Anuyoga and Atiyoga, whereas the later schools classify them into Father, Mother and Non-dual or Indivisible tantras.
U~l]i~avijaya gtsug-gtor rnam-rgyal-ma One of the three principal meditational deities associated with longevity practices and the subject of five principal dharatJi incarnations, U~tJisavijaya generally assumes a slightly wrathful appearance, with three faces (white, yellow and pale blue) and eight arms holding diverse symbolic implements. She is seated with her legs folded, in the indestructible posture.

Vai4uryaprabharaja sang-rgyas sman-bla The Buddha of Medicine, the principal figure in the Buddhist medical tantras, who is regarded as the progenitor of the Four Tantras of Medicine (rGyud-bzhi). According to certain sources Sakyamuni Buddha is believed to have assumed a specific form when teaching the medical tantras and that aspect of the Buddha is called Vai4uryaprabharaja, the 'King of Blue Beryl Light'. He is normally depicted in paintings as being blue in colour anJ holding in his left palm an alms bowl filled with the fruits of a medicinal plant, chebulic myrobalan. According to the lineage of the medical tmttras, there are eight different aspects of the Medicine Buddha, of which Vai4uryaprabharaja is the foremost. Vajra rdo-rje In the sense of rdo-rje pha-lam (pronounced 'dorje phalam'), this term means the diamond, literally 'the sovereign among all stones'. In Buddhism however rdo-rje indicates the indestructible reality of buddhahood, which is defined as both imperishable (mi-gshigs) and indivisible (ma-phyed). The emblem symbolic of this indestructible reality is also known as rdo-rje or vajra. This is a sceptre-like tantric ritual object which is held in the right palm usually whenever playing a ritual bell. The sceptre symbolises skilful means anJ the bell discriminative awareness. Holding these together in the two palms represents the perfect union of discriminative awareness and skilful means. Vajrii, also known as Pingala (dmar-mo), is the name given to the first of the six yogin£ from the south, a subcategory of the twenty-eight lsvarf. See Appendix Two. Vajra-brothers and sisters rdo-rje ming-sring The most intimate of spiritual siblings (mched-grogs), with whom one shares empowerments and commitments. See Spiritual Sibling. Vajra Family rdo-rje'i rigs, Skt. vajrakula One of the five enlightened families (paiicakula) into which the meditational deities of the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource are subdivided. The deities of the Vajra family include the peaceful buddhas Ak~obhya- Vajrasattva and Buddhalocana-a'nd the corresponding wrathful aspects Vajra Heruka and Vajrakrodhe5vari. See Appendix Two. Vajra-master rdo-rje slob-dpon, Skt. vajriiciirya The 'master of inJestructible reality' who presides over empowerment ceremonies

GLOSSARY 0 I' KEY

TER~1S

523

and the related ritual darKes of the great means for attainment (Skt. muhJsadhana, Tib. sgrub-chen), embodying the central meditational deity of the ma~uJala. Vajradhara rdo-rje 'chang V.1jradhara (lit. 'vajra-holder') is an expression of the Buddha-body of Reality, spontaneously arising from the pure, pristine expanse of inner radiance, in a form complete with all the characteristi~.:s of the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource. Vajradhara is thus regarded as the root of all the five enlightened families and consequently he is also known as the lord of the sixth enlightened family. Many tantra texts and lineages attribute their origin directly to the Buddha-body of Reality represented in the form of either Samantabhadra or Vajradhara. Other tantra texts and lineages dairn th..1t Va,r.Jdhara is a form assumed by Sakyamuni Buddha when giving esoteric teachings on tantra. Vajradhara is said to become manifest when one has totally overcome all dualisti~.: conceptions and actualised buddhahood. He is usually depicted as seated and holding a vajra and bell in his crossed palms. Vajrakila rdo-rje plmr-ba One of the eight foremost meditational deities a~.:cording to the 'means for auainmcnt' class of Muluiyoga. \'a,rakila is dark blue in colour with three faces and six arms, the central pair of hands holding a ritual dagger (Skt. kilu). Often the lower part of his body is also visualised in the form of a ritual dagger, the three facets of the pyrJmid..1l blade representing the transformation of delusion, attachment and aversion. Va,rakila is representative of the natural expression of buddha activity. Vajrakumara rdu-r1e gzhon-nu An aspe~.:t of the meditational deity Vajrakila. Sec under Vajrakila. Vajrapar:ti phyag-na rdo-rje The emhodiment of the spiritual power (hala) and skilful means of all the buddhas as visualised in the form of a meditational deity. V.Jjrap.i'!i is generally depicted as being wrathful in aspect, holding a vajra in his right upraised hand and a skull-cup in his left. In peaceful form Vajrap.11Ji is also one of the eight male bodhisattvas among the forty-two peaceful deities. See Appendix Two. Vajrasattva rdo-rje scms-dp.1' Vajras.Jttua, or in literal translation 'the spiritual hero of indestructible reality', has two principal forms. Firstly, in the ~.:ontext of the Guhyagarbha tantra, and related texts, he is identified with the peaceful male buddha Ak~ubhya- Vajrasattua. Sec Appendix Two. Secondly, in the context of the preliminary practices (sngon- 'gro) of meditation, the recitation of Vajrasattua's Hundred-syllable Mantra (yig-brgya) purifies negativitics, obscurations, transgressions, and downfalls (see Chapter I). In this latter context, Vajrasatt~·a is visualised as white in colour, dressed in the silken garments and ornaments of a bodhisattva, and holding a vajra in his right palm close to the heart and a bell in his left hand close to the left side of his hip. Sometimes, both forms of Vajrasattua arc integrated in a single practice, as in Chapter 5 of the present work, where practitioners first visualise the white form of Vajrasattua, hefore visual ising the forty-two peaceful deities, including Ak~obhya- Va1rasattua, Within their hearts. As a lineage holder, Vajrasattua is credited with the transmission of Atiyoga into the human world, appearing in the form of the deva Adhicitta (/h.Jg-scms-cun) before Prahevajra (dga'-rab rdo-rje) in a vision. According to the

524

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

Gn:at Perfection, V,ztrus,zttua is sometimes used synonymously to Indicate the Buddha-body of Reality, and as such is identical to Samantabhadra. Vajrayo'lna rdo-rje'z theg-pa See Vehicle of lndeo;tructible Reality. Vehicle theg-pa, Skt. yana The term 'vehicle' suggests a dynamic momentum leading to the attainment of t~irod~Ja. Although from one standpoint thnc may be as many veh1clcs as there are thoughts aris1ng in the mind, the sacred teachings are classified into distinct vehicles accordmg to their power. Accordingly, the expression 'two vehicles' refers to the d1stinct1on between the Lesser Vehicle and the Greater Vehicle, the expression 'three vehicles' or 'three c;tusal ,·chicles' refers to the veh1cles of pious attendants, hermit buddhas and bodhisattvas. The division into 'nine vehicles', which corresponds to the Nyingma das~ificauon, includes the three causal vehicles of the pious attendants, hermit buddhas and bodhisattt•as, and the six resultant vehicles of Kriyata11tra,

Ubhay,ztalltra, Yogata11tra, Maluiyoga, A11uyoga (rjcs-su nz.zl- 'byor-gyz theg-p,z),
and Atiyoga (shin-lu m,z/. 'hyor-gyi thcg·fhl). Vehicle of Indestructible Reality rdo-rte'i theg-p,z, Skt. V.w.zyana The Vehicle of Indestructible Reality comprises, in the Nyi11gma classification, the six result.1nt vehicles of the tmrtras, so-c.1lled because the indcstrw.:tihle and 1mperish.1ble realities of buddha-body, speech and mind are fully re<tlised and manlicstcd when the continuum of the ground is transformed into the continuum of the result by means of the continuum of the path. See under Tantra. It is also known as the Veh11.:le of Secret M.zntr,zs (Skt. Guhy.mz,mtr.zy,ilz.J) because engaging in this path ensures the protection of the mind from dualistic pen.:ept10ns and conceptions. See Mantra. Vidyadhara rig- 'dzin Sec under Awareness Holder. Vinaya 'dul-ha The Sansknt term t•in.zya, literally meaning 'discipline', refers to the monastic discipl111e maintained by members of the Buddhist community, including the ethical codes which regulate the life of fully ordained monks and nuns, as well as prob.:ttion:Hy nuns, nov1ce monks and nuns, and male and female laity. The collection of .5akyamuni Buddha's discourses which elucidate and define the principles of these ethical codes (including the administrative guidelines for running a mon.tstery) is known as the t•in,zy,JfJi~,zka, which is one of the three primary collections of discourses cornpnsing the Buddhist caiwn (Skt. trifJi~.zkJ). Based on different interpretations relating to the subtler points of the Buddha's discourses on L'lll.l)'•l, there emerged, in ancient India, several distinct schools, including the Sthal'irauJda, SaruJstu·,idu, MalhiSLIIiglnka and S,mzmitiy.z. The r•in.zya tradition which hec.tme prcdommant in T1bet is that of the SarL'dstu·<idins. Sec Vows and Pratimok~a. Virtuous Action dge-lhl, Skt. kusala Both virtue .111d its oppo~ite, non-virtue (Skt. akusa/a, Tih. nu-dgc·h.z) are defined 111 terms of hoth motiv.Hion and the consequences of the al'tlon. In ordl'r for an Ktion to be ddineJ as either virtuous or non-virtuous, there are certain prerequisite icatures wh1ch must he present. These are: mom·ation, the actual execution of the

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

act, and the conclusion. An act is non-virtuous if it is: 1) motivated by negative intentions; 2) committed by the agent in a sane mind and with full knowledge; and 3) the person derives a sense of satisfaction from having accomplished the act. Such actions can be physical, verbal, or mental. Broadly speaking, non-virtuous actions are categorised into the following ten types: killing, stealing, and sexual misconduct (which are the three physical actions); lying, divisive speech, harsh speech, and meaningless gossip (which are the four verbal actions); and covetousness, harmful intent, and distorted views (which are the three mental actions). An act is considered virtuous if it either passively refrains from the ten recognised types of non-virtuous action, or actively engages in acts for the sake of others with an altruistic motivation. Visionary Appearances snang-ba According to the terminology of the Great Perfection, there are four successive visionary appearances experienced through the practice of All-surpassing Realisation (thod-rgal). These arc: the visionary appearance of the direct perception of reality (chos-nyid mngon-sum-gyi snang-ba), the visionary appearance of mcreasing contemplative experience (nyams gong- 'phel-ba 'i snang-ba), the visionary appearance of reaching the limit of awareness (rig-pa tshad-phebs-kyi sna11g-ba), and the visionary appearance of the cessation of clinging to reality (chos-nyid-du 'dzin-p,;

zad-pa'i snang-ba).
Vital Energy rlung, Skt. uayu In the tantras and related medical traditions, it is said that there are ten kinds of vital energy or subtle winds which flow through the 72,000 energy channels (Skt. nJ4i) of the body. These sustain life and include the energies which support various conceptual states within the individual's mind. At the subtlest level, subtle mind and vital energy are thought of as a single entity. The ten kinds of vital energy comprise: five inner viral energies (nmrg-gi rlung lnga) which influence the body's inner motility, and five outer vital energieS (phyi-'i rlung lnga) which have specific effects on the outward motility of the body. The former are the viral energies associated with the five elements (earth, water, fire, wind, space) and their respective colour-tones (yellow, white, red, green, blue). The latter comprise life-breath (Skt. pr.i7Ja, Tib. srog- 'dzin), muscular movement (Skt. vyana), digestion (Skt. samana), semiotidvocal movement (Skt. udana), and reproduction/waste disposal (Skt. apana). The movement of viral energy through the energy channels of the subtle body is refined in the context of the perfection stage of meditation. Ordinarily, in the case of individuals who have not cultivated such practices, both viral energy and subtle mind are d1ffused via the right and left energy channels and thereby come to permeate the entire network of the body's minor channels. This dissipated vital energy is known as the vital energy of past actions (las-kyi rlung) because it is activated by dissonant mental states, and the influence of past actions predominates, obscuring the inner radiance of the subtle mind. However, when the practices of the perfection stage of meditation are applied, the knots which block their combined movement through the energy centres (Skt. cakra) located on the central energy channel are untied and both vital energy and subtle mind enter, abide and dissolve within the central energy channel of the body (Skt. avadhuti) and then the nonconceptual inner radiance arises, for which reason it becomes known as the vital energy of pristine cognition (ye-shes-kyi rlung). On a physical level, it is important,

526

G L 0 S S A R Y 0 F K E Y T E R :\f S

according ro the T1beran med~~.:al tradition, rhar viral energy remains in balance with bile and phlegm, which arc collectively known as the three humours, if sound health is ru be maintained. Vows [of Buddhism! sdom-pa, Skr. Su'?w.lra Sets of precepts or injunctions voluntarily adopted in the course of Buddhist practice which facilitate an individual's progress on rhe path to enlightenment. These include short-term vows, such as the one-day vows, lifelong vows, such as the monastic vows of a fully ord,lincd monk or nun, and perpetual vows associated with the Greater Vehicle, which are to be maintained over a succession of lifetimes. All such vows may be subsumed within three categories: the monastic vows of the pratimok~a, the special vows of the bodhisattvas, and the special commitments (Skt. samuyu) undertaken by practitioners of the tantras. See Priitimok~a and Commitment. The special vows of the bodhisattvas, exemplified by the SzUra of AkJsaKurbha, extol that bodhisattvas must be careful to maintain their altruistic vows, expressed in the verses of the four immeasurable aspirations, and to avoid nineteen specifically enumerated root downfalls (Skt. ma/,ip,ztti) and forty-six transgressions (Skt. du~k~t,z). In all schools of Tibetan BuJJhism, the pratimok~a and bodhisattva vows and the commitments of the tantras art: fully integrated. Vows of the Buddhist Laity dge-bsnyen-g)•i sdom-pa Sec under Pratimok~a. Water Libation chu-gtor A specific purificatory offering of water, the ritt·s of which were introduceJ w Tiber from lndi.1 by Atisa during rhe eleventh century. Way of Secret Mantras gsang-sngagsfkyi thcg-pa], Skr. Gulryamantrayr.ina The 'way of secret mantras' is a synonym for the Vehicle of Indestructible Reality (Skt. VajrayJn<l). Wind rlzmg, Skr. vdyu See Vital Energy. World-system "1ig-rten-gyi khams, Skr. lokadhatu See Three World-systems. Wrath Jr,zg-po 'i las, Skr. mara~z.zkriyii One of the four aspects of enlightened activity. The concept of wrath in the context of BudJhist tantra should not be unJersrood in terms of even the subtlest egocentric violence or fierceness. Wrath here refers to the natural transformative process of buddha-mind, the a~gressivc natural transformation of the deep-seated condnioning which unJcrlies mundane deluded consciousness and the concomitant psychophysical aggregates, elemental properties, and sensory and mental processes. Sec Four Aspects of Enlightened Activity and Appendix Two. Wrathful Deities khro-bo 'i llhz-tshogs Sec Appendix Two.
Yak~a

gnod-sbyin

/\class of spirit~ of Indian origin who .1ssume both male (yak~,z) and female (yak~i,_zi) forms. Frequently depi.:red as holding choppers, cleavers, .md swords, they are said to inhabit mountainous areas and sylvan groves, and if propitiated in the context

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

of a means for attainment (Skr. sadhana), they may confer the common accomplishment of swift-fooredness. The Tibetan equivalent gnod-sbyin literally means 'granting harm', emphasising their more malign attributes. Yam a gshin-rje Sec under Yama Dharmaraja. Yama Dhannaraja gshin-rje chos-kyi rgyal-po The emhodimenr of the forces of impermanence and the infalliole laws of cause and effect. His fierce form is iconographically depicted holding the wheel of life's rebirth processes (bhavacakra, Tib. srid-pa'i 'khor-lo) within his jaws, indicating that the nature of cyclic existence is in its entirety bound by impermanence and the laws of cause and effect. In the context of the intermediate state of rebirth (srid-pa'i bar-do) he personifies the process of confronting in death the nature of one's past life's actions and, based on the natural laws of cause and effect, he personifies the process of 'judgement' that determines the consequential outcome of such past actions. See Chapters I I and 13 and the Introduction. Yama Dharmaraja is also the sixth of the six sages (tlmb-pa drug), who form one subcategory within the assembly of the forty-two peaceful deities. Sec Appendix Two. Yeshe Tsogyal ye-shes mtsho-rgyal Padmasambhava's innermost Tibetan consort who became accomplished in the ma~uJala of Vajrakila. She compiled many of Padmasambhava's oral teachings and concealed them throughout Tibet in the form of treasures (gter-ma) to be discovered by later generations. Yoga rna/- 'byor The Sanskrit word yoga, literally meaning 'union', is interpreted in Tibetan to mean 'union with the fundamental nature of reality'. In Buddhism, therefore, yoga refers to the methods through which the meditator unites with the qualities of the meditational deity in the context of the generation stage, and the nature of fundamental reality during the perfection stage, of meditation. In terms of the latter, it includes mental and physical practices, which refine the energy channels, and mature control of the vital energies and seminal points within the subtle body. These practices cultivate discriminative awareness, and the coalescence of emptiness respectively with the four delights, with inner radiance, and with non-conceptualisation. Yogatantra mal- 'hyor-gi rgyud The third of the three outer classes of tantra, which form one subcategory of the six classes of tantra, and the sixth of the nine vehicles, according to the Nyingma school of Tibetan Buddhism. Yogat.mtra emphasises meditation, rather than external ritual, and here, the meditator progressively refines an identification with the meditational deity. Yogic Exercises khrul- 'khor, Skt. )•antra A series of vigorous exercises, including yogic jumps ( 'bebs), performed in conjunction with specific visualisations and breathing techniques, which enable the medit.ltor to develop the physical flexibility necessary for the suotle meditative practices of the perfection stage of meditation. Yogic Jumps 'behs Sec under Yogic Exercises.

GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS

Yogin rna/- 'byor-pa According to the Tibetan definition, a yogin is defined as 'one who seeks to unite with the fundamental nature of reality'. In other words, a yogin is one who intensively follows the spiritual paths outlined in the generation and perfection stages of meditation, as well as the Great Perfection. Yogini rna/- 'byor-ma A female yogin. In the context of the present work, the term most frequently refers to the twenty-eight Isvarf who form one sub-category of the fifty-eight wrathful deities. See Appendix Two.

Thematic Index by Chapter

Chapter One Natural Liberation of the Nature of Mind: The Foursession Yoga of the Preliminary Practice 8-22
COMMON PRELIMINARY PRACTICE 8-I I Meditation on the Four Themes that Turn the Mind Toward the Search for Liberation 8-I I UNCOMMON PRELIMINARY PRACTICE 11-21

With the Buddha-body of Perfect Resource 26 With the Buddha-body of Emanation 27 With the Three Buddha-bodies in Union 27 ASPIRATIONAL WISHES 27-8

Refuge

I I- I

3
I I- I 2
1 2- I
I

3 3 Generation of an Altruistic Intention I4-15 Recitation of the Hundred-syllable Mantra of Vajrasarrva 15-I6 The :V1ary4ala Offering 17- I 8 Prayer to the Lineage Teachers 19-20 Receiving the Four Empowerments 2.0-21

Outer Refuge Inner Refuge Secret Refuge

32-4 Intermediate State of Living 3 2 Intermediate State of Dreams 32 Intermediate State of Meditative Concentration 3 3 Intermediate State of the Time of Death 33 Intermediate State of Reality 3 3 Intermediate State of Rebirth 33-4

Chapter Three Root Verses of the Six Intermediate States

Chapter Two A Prayer for Union with the Spiritual Teacher, [entitled] Natural Liberation, Without Renunciation of the Three Poisons 2.6-8
PRAYER FOR UNION 26-7

Chapter Four The Introduction to Awareness: Natural Liberation through Naked Perception 38-57
THE IMPORTANCE OF THE INTRODUCTION TO AWARENESS

38-9

THE ACTUAL INTRODUCTION TO AWARENESS 39-42 Synonyms for Mind 4 I The Three Considerations 41-2 CONSEQUENCES OF THE

With the Buddha-body of Reality 26

530
INTRODUCTION TO AWARENESS

T H E ~1 AT 1 C I :-.; D EX B Y C H A PTE R

42-4

OBSERVATIONS RELATED TO EXAMINING THE NATURE OF MIND

44-6

INTRINSIC AWARENESS AS VIEW, MEDITATION, CONDUCT, AND RESULT 46-50 Four Grear Media 46-7 Four Grear Nails 4 7 Unity of the Three Times 47-8 Exhaustion of the Six Extreme Perspectives 48-50 SYNONYMS FOR A W A R EN E S S THE NATURE OF APPEARANCES CONCLUSION

50- 53

53-5

56-7

Chapter Five The Spiritual Practice entitled Natural Liberation of Habitual Tendencies 62-91
THE TEN-BRANCHED PRAYER FOR THE ACCUMULATION OF MERIT 62-5 Branl:h of Taking Refuge 63 Branch of Invitation 63 Branch of Requesting the Deities to be Seared 63 Branch of Paying Homage 63 Branch of Making Offerings 64 Branch of the Confession of Negativity 64 Branch of Sympathetic Rejoicing 64 Branch of Turning the Wheel of the Sacred Teachings 64 Branch of Requesting the Buddhas Not to Enter Nirvana 6 5 Branch of the Dedi~ation of Merit to the Unsurpassed Greater Vehicle 65 PURifiCATION 65-6 Visualisation of Vajrasattva 65-6 Recitation of the Hundred-syllable Mantra of Vajrasattva 66 MAIN PRACTICE 66-90

Visualisation, Prostration, Offerings, Refuge and Prayer to the Pea..:eful Deities 66-7 5 Samantabhadra and Samantabhadri 67 Vairocana and Dhatvist•ari 67-8 Vairasattva and BuddhalocLZnJ, encircled by K~itigarbha, Maitreya, Lasya and Pu~pa 68-9 Ratnasambhava and Mamaki, encircled by Samantabhadra, Akasagarbha, ;\1Jiya and Dhupa 69-70 Amitabha and PdtJtfarat•iisini, encircled by Avalokitesvara, Man;usrl, Gitd and Aloka 70 Amoghasiddhi mzd Samayatdrii, encircled by Sarvanivaranaviskambhin, va;ra1 ,a,_zi, candha and Nartl 71 Eight Male and female Gatekeepers 7 1-2 Six Sages 7 2-4 Forty-two Assembled Pe,lcefitl Deities 74-5 Visualisation, Prostration, Offerings, Refuge and Prayer to the Assembly of Awareness Holders 75-S Visualisation, Prostration, Offerings, Refuge and Prayer to the Twelve Principal Wrathful Deities 78-81 Mahottara Heruka and Krodhesuari 7H-9 Buddha J-leruka and Buddhakrodhe5uari 79 VaJra Heruka and va,rakrodhesvari 79 Ratna J-leruka and Ratnakrodhesuari 79-80 Padma J-leruka and Padmakrodhesvari So Karma J-leruka and Karmakrodhe5varf So Visualisation, Prostration, Offerings, Refuge and Prayer to the Peripheral Wrathful Deities 81-7 Eight Matara~ 81-2

T II E !\1 A Tl C I N D EX BY C H A PTE R

531
Confessional Field to be Present I 17 Homage to the Three Buddha-bodies which Compose the Peaceful and Wrathful Deities I 17 Threefold Offering of Outer Phenomena, Inner Cloud-masses, and Secret Substances 1 I 7 Secret Offering of Supreme Bliss I I 8 Affirmation of Vows within the Modality of the View I I 8 Call to the Assembly of Peaceful and Wrathful Deities for Attention I I8- I 9
CONFESSION IN THE PRESENCE OF THE INEXPRESSIBLE TRUTH
I

Ezght Pisaci 82-4

Four Female Gatekeepers 84 Twenty-eight lsvari 8 5-7
Prayer to the Assembly of Sixty Wrathful Deities 87-9 Aspirational Prayers 89--90 CONCLUSION 90-9I

Chapter Six Natural Liberation of Negativity and Obscuration through [Enactment of] the Hundredfold Homage to the Sacred Enlightened Families 96-1 I2
llomage to Samantabhadra and Samantabhadri 96-7 Homage to the Five Peaceful Male Buddhas 97-8 Homage to the Five Peaceful Female Buddhas 98 Homage to the Eight Male Bodhisattvas 98-9 Homage to the Eight Female Bodhisatrvas 99-IOI Homage to the Four Male Gatekeepers IOI-2 Homage to the Four Female Gatekeepers I 02 Homage to the Six Sages 102-3 Homage to the Six Herukas Io3-4 Homage to the Six Krodhesvari 104-5 Homage to the Eight Matara~ 105-6 Homage to the Eight Pisaci Io6-7 Homage ro the Four Female Gatekeepers I07-8 Homage to the Eight Projectresses Io8-9 Homage to the Twenty-eight isvari IIO-I2

19-23

CONFESSION IN THE PRESENCE OF THE PEACEFUL DEITIES 123-30 To Samantabhadra and Samantabhadri I 23 To the Five Male Buddhas 123-4 To the Five Female Buddhas I 24 To the Eight Male Bodhisattvas I 24 To the Eight Female Bodhisattvas I24-5 To the Six Sages I 25 To the Four Male Gatekeepers I 25 To the Four Female Gatekeepers 125-6 To the Entire Array of the Peaceful Deities I 26-9 Further Remorseful Confession to the Peaceful Deities I 29-30 CONFESSION IN THE PRESENCE Of THE WRATHFUL DE I Tl E S I 3 0-3 8 Confession of Faults in Achieving Meditative Stability in Reality qo-31 Confession of Faults in Achieving the Meditative Stability which Illuminates All That Appears I 3 r Confession of Faults in Achieving the Meditative Stability of the Causal Basis I 3 I Confession to the Five Herukas I 3 I-2

Chapter Seven Natural Liberation through Acts of Confession II6- 5o
PRELIMINARIES II7-I9

Invitation and Request for the

532
To the Five Krodhesvari 1 3 2 To the Eight Matarary 13 2 To the Eight Pisaci 13 2 To the four Female Gatekeepers 133 To the Twenty-eight lsvari 133 To the Awareness Holders 1)3 Confession of One's Beginningless Violation of the Commitments 133-4 Confession to the Entire Ma~:t~ala of Wrathful Deities and the Request for Forgiveness 134 Specific Confessional Prayers to the Ma~:t<;lala of the Wrathful Deities 135-8
PLAINTIVE CONFESSION OF RAMPANT EGOHOOD

THEMATIC INDEX BY CHAPTER MISCELLANEOUS SIGNS OF DEATH

171-3

SIGNS OF EXTREMELY NEAR DEATH 173-7 Dissolution of the Five Sense Faculties and the Five Elements 17 3-5 Movement of the Generative Essences 175-6 Dawning of Inner Radiance 176-7 SIGNS INDICATING THE PLACE OF SUBSEQUENT REBIRTH CONCLUSION

177-80

180-81

138-42

CONFESSION IN THE I'RESENCE OF TilE VIEW

Chapter Nine Natural Liberation of Fear through the Ritual Deception of Death 186-95
GENERAL CONSOLIDATED RITE FOR AVERTING DEATH

143-7

CONFESSION IN TilE I'RESENCE OF ALL THOSE GONE TO BLISS 147-50 Confession of Degenerated Commitments and Infractions 14 7-50 Recitation of the Hundred-syllable Mantra of Vajrasattva 150

186-9

SPECIFIC RITES FOR AVERTING DEATH 189-94 Ritual Averting of the Signs of Ncar Death 189-91 Ritual Averting of the Signs of Remote Death 191-3 Ritual Averring of Further Signs of Near Death 193-4 CONCLUSION 194-5

Chapter Eight Natural Liberation through Recognition of the Visual Indications and Signs of Death rss-Br
INTRODUCTION

155-6 156-9

Chapter Ten Consciousness Transference: Natural Liberation through Recollection 200-216
INTRODUCTION

EXTERNAL SIGNS Of DEATH INTERNAL SIGNS OF

200-201 201-5

TRAINING IN CONSCIOUSNESS TRANSFERENCE

DEATH 159-62 Examination of the Vital Breath 1 59-60 Examination of the Signs of Death which Occur in Dreams 160-62 SECRET SIGNS OF DEATH 162-4 SIGNS Of REMOTE DEATH 164-8 Analysis of the Reflected Image in the Sky 164-8 SIGNS Of NEAR DEATH 168-71

ACTUAL API'LICATION OF CONSCIOUSNESS TRANSFERENCE AT TilE TIME Of D EAT H 20 5- I 5 The Timing and Context 205-8 Consciousness Transference into the Buddha-body of Reality 208-9 Consciousness Transference into the

TIIE!\tATIC INDEX BY CHAPTER

533
appear within Y dlow Luminosity, Encircled by Four Bodhisattvas Akasagarbha, Samantabhadra, Malyd and Dhupa 239-41 Red Amitabha and Pa~zcjaraudszni appear withzn Red Luminoszty, Enczrcled by Four Bodlnsattuas Avalokttesvara, MariJusri, Gitd and Atoka 24 1-3 Green Amoghasiddhz and .SamayatJrii appear within Green Luminosity, Enczrcled by Four Bodhisattvas Va,rapJ~i. Nivara~zavi~khambhin, Gandha and Narti 243-6 Emire Peaceful Assembly of the hve Enlightened Families Appears Together with the Vision of the Four Pristine Cognitions Combined 246-51 Divine Assembly of Awareness Holders and Qakinis appears withm Five-coloured Luminosity 2 51-4
PART TWO: AN ELUCIDATION OF TilE APPEARANCE OF THE WRATHFUL DEITIES IN THE INTERMEDIATE STATE OF 2 55 -70 Introduction 25 5-8 Arising of the lntermedi.ne State of the Wrathful Deities 258-66 Buddha Hemka and Buddhakrodhesuari 2 58-9 Vajra Heruka and Vajrakrodhesuarl 259-60 Ratna Heruka and Ratnakrodhesvari 260-6 I Padma Hemka and Padmakrodhesvarl 261-2. Karma Heruka and Karmakrodhesvar/ 26 2.-3 The Eight Gauri, the 1-:ight Pisdci, the Four Female Gatekeepers, and the Twenty-eight lsuarf 2.()3-6 Consequences of Recognition and Lack of Recognition 2()6-8 REA Ll T Y

Buddha-body of Perfect Resource 209-1 1 Consciousness Transference mto the Buddha-body of Emanation 2 I I -1 2 Instantaneous Consciousness Transference 21 2-14 Consciousness Transference of Ordinary Beings 214-15
CONCLUSIOS 216

Chapter Eleven The Great Liberation by Hearing 225-303
PART ONE: AN ELUCIDATION OF TilE INTERMEDIATE STATE OF THE TIME OF DEATH AND OF THE APPEARANCE OF TilE PEACEFUL DEITIES IN THE INTERMEDIATE STATE Of REALITY 225-54 225-6

INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION TO INNER RADIANCE IN THE INTERMEDIATE STATE OF THE
Tl~tE

OF DEATH

227-34

Introduction to the Inner Radiance of the Ground 22 7-3 2 Introduction to the Inner Radiance of the Path 23 2-4
INTRODUCTION TO THE INTERMEDIATE STATE Of REALITY 234-54

lnrroduction to the Arising of Sounds, LightsandRays 235-6 Appearance of the Peaceful Deities 236-54 Whzte Vazrocana and Akasadhatvist·ari appear within Blue Luminosity 236-8 Blue Ak~obhya- Vajrasattva and BuddhalocanJ appear within White Luminosity, Encircled by Four Bodhisattvas K~itigarbha, A1aitreya, Lasya and
Pu~pJ 238-9

Yellow Ratnasambhava and A1amaki

534
Aspirational Prayers 268-70
CONCLUSION OF THE INTRODUCTION TO THE INTERMEDIATE STATE OF THE TIME OF DEATH AND THE INTERMEDIATE STATE OF REALITY

THEMATIC INDEX BY CHAPTER

OF THE INTERMEDIATE STATE OF REBIRTH: A TEACHING REVEALING THE NATURAL EXPRESSION OF VIRTUE AND NEGATIVITY IN TilE INTERMEDIATE STATE OF
THE SCENE

270-72

PART THREE: AN ELUCIDATION OF THE INTERMEDIATE STATE OF REBIRTH

273-300

INTRODUCTION TO THE MENTAL BODY 273-85 Characteristics of the Mental Body 274-6 Characteristics of the Intermediate State of Rebirth 276-9 The Meeting with Yama Dharmar<lja, Embodiment of the Infallible Laws of Cause and Effect 279-81 The Power of Perceptions 282-4 Prayer to Mahakaru~ika 284 OBSTRUCTION OF THE WOMB ENTRANCES

320-34 320-21 Act One: The Meeting of the Wrongdoing One Lak~an<lraka with Yama Dharmaraja 322-9 Act Two: The Meeting of the Virtuous Householder Srijata with Yama Dharmaraja 329-33
REBIRTH
PART TWO: SUPPLEMENT TO A

TEACHING REVEALING THE NATURAL EXPRESSION OF VIRTUE AND NEGATIVITY IN THE INTERMEDIATE STATE OF REBIRTH, ENTITLED GONG OF

THE SCENE

285-93

CHOOSING A WOMB ENTRANCE 293-300 Transferring the Consciousness to Pure Buddha Fields 297-8 Choosing a Womb Entrance within Impure Cyclic Existence 298-300 CONCLUSION 300-303

308-16 Aspirational Prayer Calling to the Buddhas and Bodhisattvas for Assistance 308-9 Aspirational Prayer which Rescues from the Dangerous Pathways of the Intermediate States 31 o- 13 Aspirational Prayer which Protects from Fear of the Intermediate States 314-16

Chapter Twelve Aspirational Prayers

335-41 335 Act One: Exhortation by the Deity of Good Conscience following the Entry into the Hells of the Wrongdoing One Lak~anaraka 336-39 Act Two: Celebratory Speech by the Deity of Good Conscience as the Virtuous Householder SrTjata sets off for the Realms of Higher Rebirth 339-41
DIVINE MELODY

Chapter Fourteen Liberation by Wearing: Natural Liberation of the Psychophysical Aggregates 347-79
INTRODUCTION PART ONE

347-8

Chapter Thirteen A Masked Drama of Rebirth 320-41
PART ONE: NATURAL LIBERATION

Twenty-six Line Supreme Essential Mantra of Samantabhadra 348 Twenty-nine Line Supreme Essential Mantra of Samantabhadri 348-9 Twenty-five Mantras which Reverse Attachment 349-54
PART TWO: SEED-SYLLABLES AND MANTRAS OF THE PEACE-

THEMATIC INDEX BY CHAPTER FUL AND WRATHFUL

535
Twenty-eight lsvari 3 7 1-2 Four Great Wrathful Male Gatekeepers 373-4
PART THREE

354-74 Forty-two Peaceful Deities 3 54 Five Male and Five Female Buddhas 3 55-7 Eight Male Bodhisattvas 3 57-8 Eight Female Bodhisattvas 3 59-60 Six Sages 360-61 Eight Male and Female Gatekeepers 3 61-3 Sixty Wrathful Deities 364 Twelve Principal Herukas and Krodhc5v~ri 365-7 Eight MiHara}_l 368-9 Eight Pisaci 3 69-70 Four Female Gatekeepers 3 70-7 1
DEITIES

Six Syllables of the Six Classes of Sentient Beings 3 7 4-5 Hundred-syllable Mantra of Vajrasattva 375 Syllables of the Sixteen Vowels and Thirty-four Consonants 375-6 Heart Mantra of Dependent Origination 3 76 Mantras of the Four Aspects of Enlightened Activity 3 76-7 CONCLUSION 377-9

1. The assembly of the Forty-two Peaceful Deities (zhi-ba 'i lha-tshogs).

2. (above) The male and female primordial buddh• Samanrabhandra and Samanrabhadri in union. (below) Peaceful Deities o: the Buddha family: the m• buddha Vairocana, in um wirh rhe female buddha AkiisadhiitviSvari.

3· Peaceful Deities of the Vaj ra Family: (centre) the male buddha Ak ~obhya ­ Va jrasatrva , in union with the female buddha Buddhalocana; (left) the male bodhisattva K~ iti ga rbha ; (right) the male bo dhisattva Maitreya; (top ) t he fe male bodhisattva Pu ~pa; (bo ttom) the female bodhisattva Liisyii.

4· Peaceful Deities of the Ratna Family: (centre) the male buddha Ram asambhava, in union with the female buddha Ma makl; (left ) the male bodhisattva Samantabhadra; (right ) the male bodhisatt va Akasaga rbha; (top) the fema le bodhisattva Dhiipii; (bottom) t he female bodhisattva Pu~pii.

5· Peacefu l Deities of the Padma Family: (centre ) the male buddha Amitabha, 111 union with the female buddha Piindaraviisinl; (left) the male bodhisattva Avalokitdvara; (right ) the male bodhisarrva Man j usrik umii rabhuta; (top) the fe male bodhisattva Alokii; (bottom ) t he fema le bodh1sarrva Gita.

6. Peaceful Deities of the Karma Family: (centre) the male buddha Amoghasiddhi, in union with the female buddha Samayatiirii; (left ) the male bodh isattva Niviiranaviskambhin; (right) the male bodhisattva Vajrapiini; (top ) the female bodhisarrva Narri; (bottom) rhe female bodhisattva Gandhii.

- .The Six Sages: (lop left ) InJrasa kra; (top riRht ) Siikyamuni; !centre left ) Vcmacirra; (centre right) Srh ira s i1~1ha; tbottomlefi) .J va lam ukha; (l)()/10111 right) Ya ma I>hannaraja.

8. The Eight Gatekeepers:

(top left) Yamantaka in union with Pasa; (top
right ) Hayagriva in unio n with Spho ta; (bottom left ) Trailokyavija ya in union with Ankusa; (bottom right) Amrtakut:tc!alin in un ion with
Ghan~a.

9 · T he Assembly of Fiftyeight Wrathful Deities

(khro-bo'i lha-tshogs ).

1 0 . The male and female primo rdial buddhas Maho ttra H eruka a nd Kro dhesvari in union.

1 ' . Wrathful Deities of the Buddha Family: Buddha Heruka in union with Buddhakrodhesvari.

1 2 . Wrathful Deities of the Va jra Family: (top ) Vaj ra Heruka in union with Vajrakrodhesvari; (centre ) the six yogini of the east: Manuriik~asi, Brahmiini, Raudri, Vaisl).iivi, Kaumiiri, and Ind riiJ?i; (bottom) the wrathfu l gatekeeper Vajratejasi, alongside the yogini gatekeeper Vajrii [Mahakali].

13. Wrathfu l Deities of the Ratna Fa mi ly: (top) the w ra thfu l gatekeeper Vajni mogha, alo ngside the yogin! gatekeeper Vajra IM a hachaga la]; (cen t re) Ra tna H eruka in uni on with

Ratnakrodhesva rl; (bottom) the six yogin! o f the south : Va jra, Santi, Am~ta, Sauml, Oa n9i a nd Ra k~asl .

r4. Wrathful Deities of the Padma Fa mily: (top) the wrathful gatekeeper Vajraloka, alongside the yogin! gatekeeper Vajra [Mahak um bhakarnl); (centre) Padma Heruka in union with Padmakrodbesvari; (bottom) the six yogini of the west:

Bhak~asi, Rati, Rudhiramadi, Ekacarini, Manoharika, and Siddhikari.

-~ Karma

· Wrathful Deities of Family: (top ) .;:rma H eruka in union :h Karmakrodhe5vari; . •1tre) the six yogini of the rrh: Yayudevi, Agnayi, 1rahi, Cimundi, Bhujana, -d Varuniini; (bottom ) -~ wrathful gatekeeper 3J ravetall, alongside the gini gatekeeper Vajra -J mbodara].

16. Clusters of the Eight Miitarah and the Eight Pisac1: (top left) the four Pisiici of the cardinal directions: Simhamukhi, Vyaghrlmukhi, S~galamukhi , and Sviinamukhi; (bottom left) the four Matara~ of the cardinal directions: Gauri, Caurl, Pramoha, and Vet:ili; (top right) the four Pisaci o f the intermediate directions: Grdhramukhi, Kankamukhi, Kakamukhl and Ulukamukhi; (bottom right) the four Miitarah of the intermediate directions: Pukkasi, Ghasmari, Candali and Smasani. ··